Actions

Work Header

Rating:
Archive Warning:
Category:
Fandom:
Relationships:
Characters:
Additional Tags:
Language:
English
Collections:
Fanfictions For Cale Henituse's Slacker Life, wan's delusions it keeps in its heart aka PEAK, Re-read Fanfic unlocked 🔓
Stats:
Published:
2025-01-27
Updated:
2025-12-25
Words:
172,010
Chapters:
21/?
Comments:
680
Kudos:
1,873
Bookmarks:
306
Hits:
36,366

a hero who will never be seen in the world again.

Summary:

Two months.

 

The God of Death’s divine voice rang in the abyss-like space, holding up two fingers. Cale’s eyes widened where he sat across from him.

 

It had been roughly a few weeks or so since the White Star was defeated and the despair-crazed god was resealed. Cale thought he’d be done after that, and for a while, he was right, despite all the commotion about him being the ultimate hero— which was total nonsense in his opinion— but then the God of Death suddenly contacted him.

 

You have two months or so left.

 

He told him he was going to die.

 

Or:

 

Cale is sick and can't do anything about it. He doesn't tell his family. Well, he's got two months to slack, so he may as well make the most of it.

Notes:

I've posted only 2 TCF fics so far and the fact that they're both Cale MCD should say something.

(See the end of the work for more notes.)

Chapter 1: two months.

Chapter Text

Two months.

 

The God of Death’s divine voice rang in the abyss-like space, holding up two fingers. Cale’s eyes widened where he sat across from him.

 

It had been roughly a few weeks or so since the White Star was defeated and the despair-crazed god was resealed. Cale thought he’d be done after that, and for a while, he was right, despite all the commotion about him being the ultimate hero— which was total nonsense in his opinion— but then the God of Death suddenly contacted him.

 

You have two months or so left.

 

He told him he was going to die. 

 

“What are you…” Cale frowned instinctually. “Is this some kind of plot related to the gods?”

 

The God of Death let out a low hum, sipping from his mug of steaming coffee, not quite confirming nor denying his claim— in fact, it actually sounded like he was kind of unsure himself. A short silence stretched across the two individuals in his domain. Cale’s frown deepened.

 

“Are one of the gods trying to target me?”

 

Perhaps.

 

“What does that mean?”

 

I think I should first clarify that the threat that’s imposed on you isn’t necessarily physical in the sense that it's some kind of attack from someone.

 

“So what is it then?”

 

Cale. His voice sounded oddly sympathetic— no, like he genuinely felt bad. The god’s expression twisted in a sort of complicated way as he finished his words. You’re sick. 

 

Cale flinched the moment he heard him. “Huh?” What was this troublesome god trying to say?

 

“!” Supposed impending death and some sort of vague, unexplained sickness? Cale clicked his tongue. He could recognize this tragic trope anywhere.

 

“A terminal illness?”

 

Spot on. 

 

“You've got to be kidding me…” Cale held back a groan and a string of curses as he sat and stared at the God of Death across from him, who wore a pitying expression as he sipped his coffee. He asked the first, somewhat cliche question any other character in such a situation would have asked. 

 

“Is there a cure?”

 

No.

 

“Not anywhere in this world?”

 

Not anywhere in any world.

 

His fingers strummed on the arm of his seat before Cale took in a sharp breath and placed his head in one of his hands like he was getting a headache. He sighed. “Can I make a deal with you to get rid of it?”

 

No. 

 

Cale bit his lip as he spoke the words he never thought he’d ever say. “...I would, maybe, be willing to become a saint for it.”

 

The god of Death swirled the mug of coffee in his hands and sighed. If I could really cure you, I would have made that deal with you the moment you got here. 

 

He clicked his tongue. “Is there another god who could?”

 

Probably not. 

 

He furrowed his brows. “Okay, fine, what am I sick with anyway?” 

 

This ‘sickness’ isn’t something a regular human, or really any ‘mortal’ would suffer from. He explained, hands tapping on his armrest leisurely, but his expression was quite serious. Even the gods could be afflicted with this supposed illness.

 

Cale clicked his tongue. That didn’t sound good for him at all. He crossed his arms as he contemplated, motioning for the man-looking god in front of him to continue. 

 

There’s not exactly a term for it since it’s pretty rare, especially for a mortal like you. But I guess the best way I can describe it is that… His lips pressed into a line. Your soul is.. It’s deteriorating. 

 

Cale flinched again at that. “It’s what ?” Why?

 

You’ve been exposed to too many things, so to speak. He explained. You’ve been exposed to a god’s powers, you’ve transmigrated, you’ve been afflicted with curses and had your original body taken over by a thousand-year reincarnator, you’ve also basically directly stabbed the essence of an immortal, one of the longest living beings across all the worlds too, straight into your heart and thereby your bloodstream, and breaking your plate multiple times also doesn’t really help your case. 

 

Cale bit his lip at that. “...That’s all?”

 

Well, no. The God of Death sighed. You’ve also intervened with many fates.

 

He raised a brow. “When did I—”

 

Let me explain first. He said. The thing about these multiple worlds is that there’s a lot of them. A near-infinite amount with barely a fraction of a difference, or no difference at all. The fates of these worlds tend to be already written out. For example, there’s multiple worlds that go with the flow of ‘The Birth of A Hero’. Though there have certainly been many transmigrators aside from you, little have changed the fates of their world, let alone other worlds, as much as you have. 

 

“Mn…”

 

You’ve changed over dozens of being’s fates and created new worlds with different timelines that flow as your world does. Ah, and the sealed god’s test also sent you to Earth 2 and you also intervened with their fate. So my point is, you’ve messed with original fates and intervened as a ‘variable’ like a lot and it does cause a bit of a, um… complication.

 

“Okay, so how exactly does that affect me?”

 

Right, so, think of your soul as a kind of, uh… object. The God of Death said awkwardly. How do the other gods manage to dish out eloquent-sounding explanations for these kinds of matters without sounding like they don’t make sense? And all those things you experienced and were exposed to had different levels of ‘pressure’. Ah, I know now— think of the pressure as a kind of boulder. All of these events stack up one by one, boulder after boulder, until eventually— the god of Death scrunched up a random document from atop the coffee table. It takes a heavy toll and breaks down from all the pressure.

 

Cale let out a long sigh. “So basically, what you’re saying is, thanks to all that BS I had to go through— mostly because of you, might I add—” he narrowed his eyes. “My soul is overwhelmed with the ‘pressure’ of all these events and now it’s basically going to collapse in on itself?”

 

He smiled. I knew our clever Cale would be smart enough to understand everything.

 

“Don’t call me that.”

 

The whole fate-changing thing also has its backlash on the soul, y’know. It’s just that most transmigrators’ souls tend to be able to handle it. It’s also the reason most gods with this ‘illness’ get afflicted with these things, thanks to too much divine intervention in the mortal realm. He explained. The reason your soul can’t handle it though is because of the already pre-existing exposure from the White Star’s curse and everything else that stacked up throughout your time here. It’s kind of like filling a glass that’s already halfway filled.

 

“Right, I get it, enough with the analogies.”

 

He sulked, but cleared his throat before moving on. Ah, and I think I should tell you one more thing.

 

“Hm?”

 

The God of Balance might have had a small hand in this.

 

Cale flinched. So another god was targeting him?

 

That scary bastard is always super strict about maintaining balance across the worlds and in the divine realm and all. The God of Death sighed, looking around a bit as if wary that the God in question may appear to beat him again. You’ve already done a lot of things and totally changed the fate of multiple worlds as a variable with unnatural circumstances. I have a feeling that old existence might have thought that to balance it out, you, or your allies needed to lose something.

 

“They need to lose…” Cale frowned, a bit baffled. “Me?”

 

Yes.

 

He spoke in a very confused voice. “Just my life is enough?”

 

He looked at Cale as if he was genuinely stupid. Cale, do you realize how many people either worship you, would actually go to war a thousand more times for you, or would ascend to the divine realm just to beat me up for your sake? He winced for a moment. Actually, so many Gods also want you on their side. Losing you would be the ultimate loss.

 

Cale let out a kind of dissatisfied sound at that, shifting uncomfortably. ‘Ultimate Loss’ was a stretch— He wasn’t so important that just his life was enough to balance out the existence of an entire world. Sure, he read the novel and changed all kinds of things, but it’s not like he did that all by himself. Most of the time he left most of the heavy-lifting to the others.

 

Okay, so now that you understand everything… he trailed off. What do you want to do?

 

 

For a while now, Cale had been moving from place to place after beating the White Star.

 

First he rested at the Henituse Territory, where everyone at the estate fussed and worried over him, especially Deruth who witnessed Cale, his very first-born, literally stab himself through the heart with a branch. After recovering there for a while, he cycled through various places, staying at the black castle, staying at the super rock villa in Harris village, staying a few days at the palace because Alberu forced him to in order to make sure he doesn’t do anything stupid if he went unsupervised, the territories of the northeastern nobles, and even stopping by the Eastern continent. 

 

Today he returned to the Henituse Estate.

 

Countess Violan wouldn’t say there’s anything necessarily wrong with her son— no, she’s never thought that there was something wrong with Cale even when he began misbehaving years ago. However, she would say that Cale was acting a bit different than usual. 

 

“Look here, Orabuni!” Lily smiled, raising her gigantic sword up in the air as if it didn’t weigh a feather. A faint trace of light began to emit around the blade. “It’s aura smoke! It was there before, but it looks more prominent now, doesn’t it?”

 

Cale nodded with his usual stoic look, but a light smile pulled at the corner of his lips. “It does.”

 

She waved around her ginormous greatsword with a bright expression. “The color looks a lot like your hair, doesn’t it?”

 

Cale tilted his head at that, humming contemplatively before agreeing. “It does a little.”

 

“A pretty deep but sort of bright red— I think it’s a great color!”

 

He shrugged. “If you say so.”

 

“Mm, Orabuni, do you think I’ll be able to manifest an aura anytime soon?”

 

“Of course,” He nodded. “You’re already training really hard, I’m sure it won’t take too long, if it’s you.” 

 

“The human is right, cheerful Lily! You are very strong.” Raon agreed, flying near her with a bright smile on his face. “You could even be as strong as Choi Han when you grow up!”

 

Her eyes sparkled up at her brother as well as the little dragon praising her. “Do you really think so, Raon-nim?”

 

“Of course!”

 

“Lily, remember not to overdo it.” Cale reminded, picking up a cookie from the stack and handing her one. She took it gladly and had a bite as she sat. “There’s no need to rush it— you’re more than strong enough to manage it, so just take your time.”

 

She blinked before smiling back brightly with a cookie in her mouth. “I know,”

 

Cale leaned back on his seat and wiped off a crumb from the little dragon’s face. “How did today’s lessons with Edro go?”

 

Violan smiled at the sight as she watched from the window of her study near the garden. It’s quite subtle, but Cale has been far more active lately. 

 

Of course, it wasn’t as if he never held conversations with them. Cale was a great listener and seemed to always know how to say the right words, and they’ve started casual conversations like this with him before. But Violan thought that she’d never seen him initiate himself with them as often as he had been lately. He’s also been a lot more talkative and responsive, asking more follow-up questions and making more remarks and acknowledging hums. Again, it was quite subtle, but something that was certainly worthy of note that wouldn’t escape her keen senses.

 

Perhaps, after the war ended, Cale was beginning to relax more. Violan hummed in a satisfied manner. She was glad if that was the case. Though she certainly acknowledged and was very proud of Cale’s achievements and capabilities in the war, and all of his great deeds, she also knew that it took a huge toll on him physically. She never wanted to see her son cough up even a drop of blood or faint ever again.

 

At lunch, Cale continued to listen attentively to what Lily, and now also Basen, were saying. The two siblings seemed to notice this as well and were enthusiastically chatting up a storm regarding just about anything they could think of with a sparkle in their eyes. The black dragon, whose presence they were now starting to get used to, as well as the two cats that always followed Cale around also joined in, and now the table was quite noisy. Violan had to nudge Deruth to remind the lively children to finish their plates.

 

“Ah, please excuse me,” Cale said, beginning to stand up. “I think I’ll go back to my room now since I’m finished.”

 

The disappointment on Lily and Basen’s faces were quite evident, though Basen had attempted to try and hide it and failed. Meanwhile, Cale excused himself and walked out the door, the two cat children and the black dragon trailing behind him. 

 

Violan noted, from Cale’s demeanor, that he was beginning to act more laid back. It was a good thing, of course, but she also worried that it may actually be some sense of… fatigue instead.

 

Cale seemed somewhat tired all the time these days.

 

It didn’t seem like anything that could warrant too much concern, since she and Deruth, in collaboration with the crown prince, had worked toward making sure Cale could live the leisure life he wanted and not need to take on anymore duties. In addition, they’ve also been keeping a very close eye on him to make sure he isn’t trying to take on more work himself. 

 

Maybe it was because he had been traveling around a lot.

 

Either way, Violan is at least glad her son was finally able to rest.

 

 

“You look tired.” On asked as she rested on the blanket atop Cale’s thigh. The wooden rocking chair gave gentle rhythmic sways as sunlight shone past the window in warm rays.

 

Hong, who was next to her, nodded in agreement, climbing up to perch near Cale’s shoulder, while Raon spoke. “But you take so many naps, human! How could you still be so tired all the time?”

 

“Mn…” He hummed, lightly running his hand through the fur on Hong’s head. “I’m not so sure myself. Are you guys bored?”

 

“Hm, just a bit! We want to go out and play with you!” he beamed.

 

Cale nodded at that, before a record of the God of Death’s words played in his head. He also recalled his own feelings regarding the matter.

 

He was going to die. In just two months at that. 

 

Cale was pretty upset. All that work for his slacker life, to retire early and just roll around in bed all day lazing around while farming a bit, just to only be able to enjoy 2 months of it? That was really it?

 

[“...Is there no way to extend the time I have left?”

 

That’s the most time you’ve got.

 

He gripped the armrest a bit tighter. “Leading up to the date that I die, will anything happen? Actually, what even are the symptoms of this supposed illness supposed to look like?”

 

The God of Death hummed. So fortunately, I suppose, this doesn’t work much like a regular human disease where your body suffers all kinds of things since it’s afflicting the soul and not exactly your body. At most you’ll just be experiencing increasing fatigue the closer you get to the date of your death, and I suppose I should tell you that leading up to the end, you’ll start to get feverish and burn up. But..

 

Cale frowned. 

 

You’ll also be feeling increasing chronic pain all over your body, but no priest or magic can alleviate it in any way. It’d also be really hard for them to identify so it’ll mostly look like there’s nothing wrong with you.]

 

He was right about the fatigue, Cale sighed as he leaned back tiredly on his rocking chair. He’d been wondering the past month why he suddenly felt so tired and somewhat pained all over his body and now it made some sense. The chronic pains aren’t that difficult to deal with at the moment, since it was a little similar to his scars as Kim Roksoo that would ache on occasion from the use of instant.

 

It didn’t feel like much of a big deal at all, but he was pretty much going to die soon.

 

“Mn…”

 

On watched the way Cale’s rhythmic tapping on the armrest increased in tempo and heard the low grunt let out and frowned. When this happened, Cale was usually thinking hard about something. Usually a bit too hard. 

 

She was about to ask about it when Cale suddenly spoke.

 

“It’s snowing.”

 

At that, the children looked out to see small, delicate snowflakes slowly descend towards the ground. Hong practically hopped right off of Cale to press his face against the glass. Raon saw his hyung and followed suit, wings flapping somewhat more enthusiastically and his tail swinging more than usual.

 

“Snow!” Raon exclaimed. This was the second time that this now 6-year-old dragon saw snow, and the sparkle in his eyes was still as bright as the first time he saw it.

 

On watched her excited dongsaengs with a smile, but didn’t really move too close to look. She still had some mixed feelings about snow.

 

Though Hong, her younger brother, had become much less apprehensive about it ever since last year, she still had many memories less than pleasant deeply rooted in her mind. Of sitting in the cold fighting to stay awake for hours, trudging through snow till the tips of her paws went numb and till a thin sheen of ice coated their fur, of craving warm meals every second of the day and envying the warm glow of a comforting home from the corner of the slums and of huddling close to her brother to keep him warm.

 

Snow was more fun now, but it didn't erase those bitter memories completely.

 

“Ooooh, I wanna go out!” Hong exclaimed with joy.

 

“Let’s build a snowman! I saw it inside of this book the kind Rosalyn gave me!” Raon immediately flew away towards the night stand, where they kept a stack of books the children liked to read before bed. They usually would read it themselves, but occasionally, Cale would read it out to them as bedtime stories. On liked it when he did that because his voice, though not super expressive, was very soothing and would easily lull them all to sleep.

 

Raon flew back with the book in his hand, flipping to a page with an illustration on the page. It depicted a figure made out of three big round clumps of white snow, with twigs for arms sticking out and a carrot nose, and small pebbles as buttons and eyes. She thought it looked rather silly.

 

“It’s even wearing a hat and a scarf!”

 

“Does it get cold?” Hong asked with slight concern. “It should wear a jacket too, shouldn’t it?”

 

“It’ll be fine without it,” Cale commented, before hesitating. “Erm, it’s a snow person, right? It wouldn’t get cold, so it’s probably only wearing it to look nice…?”

 

“These are the main character’s hat and scarf! He let the snowman have it,” Raon helpfully supplied, pointing to the picture with enthusiasm.

 

“Oh, are you supposed to wear a hat and scarf when you go outside?” Hong asked.

 

“If it’s cold, you definitely should,” Cale replied, examining the illustration. “You could get sick if you dress too light, so make sure to layer up.”

 

“Then let’s wear the hats from last year!” Raon said, zipping away and returning with them levitating with magic. They landed in Cale’s hands, and he examined it closely. He tried to fit the hat on On’s head but it came out a bit lopsided thanks to her ears. She adjusted it herself with her paws and blinked up at Cale.

 

“It’s gotten a bit small,” he commented, smoothing out the knitted surface atop her head. 

 

“It isn't that small, though,” On said. “Just a little bit more than before.”

 

“You’ve gotten bigger since last year, so I think it would only make sense that you’ll need another hat. Besides, it isn’t bad to have more things to wear, right?”

 

“That’s right!”

 

“Don’t go out until I get—” he paused. “hm…” 

 

“What’s wrong?” On asked.

 

“Mn, no, nothing’s wrong,” he assured them. “I was just considering something,”

 

She tilted her head but wasn’t met with an answer. Fortunately, it didn’t seem like the kind of thought that would make him act recklessly, or do something dangerous without telling them, so she didn’t try to press for more. But if it was Cale, then they’d still needed to worry.

 

But besides, if anything were to happen, she could go and report it to grandpa Eruhaben, uncle Beacrox, or Ron and they would make sure he’s okay. They have lessons after this, so On was going to train hard to get stronger so she could protect Cale herself, too.

 

 

When Kim Roksoo was little, his clothes would often get holes, rips, and tears on them. And in the first place, he’s never had many clothes either. Little Kim Roksoo worked quite hard to try and take good care of his clothes that were still in good condition, but there wasn’t much a weak little kid could do against a drunk adult in his own house.

 

Eventually, he picked up sewing. A nice old ahjumma from the second floor of their apartment was kind enough to let him have one of her small kits, and give him some short and quick pointers, but he learned most of it in his own time. He got a lot of cuts and pricks on his fingers and palms the first time around, since his small hands weren’t used to doing such finework— And most of the stitches would come out shabby. He’d rip out parts from old clothes he’d completely outgrown but never got replaced or old cloth that was thrown away he could salvage to patch up some holes, and messily stitch together tears here and there. And when he got beat by his uncle it would sometimes mess up the stitches too, and he'd need to do it all over again.

 

He also recalled once, when he had a particularly nasty gash on his leg, he got desperate and tried to sew it up the way he would stitch up his ripped clothes, but he’d rather just forget about that.

 

A lot of his clothes were very thin, so in the winter, when he would be wandering around hungry and thirsty in the snow, he’d get cold and then sick. He remembered passing out a few times in alleyways and waking up still cold and hungry, and he remembered having to clean up the apartment with bad headaches and a flu. It wasn’t pretty, so he’d rather just ignore those parts, but because he went through all that, he’d say he was okay enough at sewing to be able to pull it off, and he’s gotten a lot better over the years as Kim Roksoo. He picked up knitting that one time too when Lee Soohyuk and Choi Jungsoo got him a knitting kit for the holidays as a half-joke, but he actually managed to make some use of it. He also apparently seemed to be okay at embroidery, considering how he actually managed to make those bad-quality Arm uniforms a while ago.

 

All in all, Cale was at least half-decent at needlework.

 

Which was why he was sitting at the moment, alone in his room, with some yarn and knitting needles and a book with knitting patterns in it.

 

To start off, he decided on a scarf, since he remembered how to make one from the knitting set Choi Jungsoo and Lee Soohyuk got him. Simple enough. 

 

“Hm…” The kids weren’t regular human kids, but rather cat-tribe members and a small dragon, so he’d need to make adjustments. For Raon, he’s never shown an interest in polymorphing, so he’ll knit a smaller one than usual to fit him. On and Hong, however, do polymorph occasionally. The children, all in all, generally have a preference for their original dragon and cat-forms respectively, especially Hong and Raon. On, however, does tend to switch to her polymorphed form more often. 

 

“Should I just knit two for her?” he considered. It wouldn’t be too much of a hassle, and he had enough yarn for it anyway.

 

When he had asked Hans to go out and get him some knitting supplies, he had gone a bit overboard and brought him way too many colors, and an entire array of different kinds of needles. What the hell? He had thought. What was he even supposed to do with all these balls of yarn?

 

“They say cats like balls of yarn though, right? Would On and Hong like to play with these…?” He mumbled to himself. Actually, considering Hans’ fondness for the two, maybe it was his intention.

 

“Huh,” he remarked absentmindedly, temporarily pausing his needlework. How big would the scarf need to be for Raon, actually? He contemplated it for a moment, and then tried to imagine the little dragon in front of him, in his hands.

 

This big? He clicked his tongue and widened the space between his hands. No, he’s gotten a bit bigger than that.

 

Cale recalled the day he carried Raon out of that cave with him. He was really small and frail. Even for a baby dragon, he had been a lot lighter than Cale expected him to be. 

 

He tried to imagine how he was now— when he’d fall asleep while waiting for Cale to finish a book he was reading, or some kind of paperwork, Cale would often carry him from the sofa inside his room to the bed. Over time, he had gotten heavier, and quickly grew in size. It was a bit more difficult nowadays to fit him in his hands, but Cale could make it work. His cheeks were also chubby enough for Cale to pinch sometimes.

 

The same would go for On and Hong. Thinking about it now, they’ve grown quite a bit too since the first time Cale had met them at the slums when he was off feeding the man-eating tree every other day. It got harder to carry them both at once. On would even be a teenager soon.

 

“...They’ve also started getting picky with their food,” Cale remarked to himself, but he had a satisfied smile on his face. Good, they were still kids. They should be able to pout and frown down at the food on their plates, and throw tantrums if they wanted to. Even so, they would eat everything off of their plates, praise the food afterwards and thank whoever brought it to them.

 

“Raon isn’t very fond of bell peppers, On doesn’t like sour things very much unless it’s lemons, and none of them like bitter things at all…” Cale thought about it as he mumbled nonsense to himself. One day, they wouldn’t even be able to fit in his arms anymore, and he’d have a harder time carrying them around. If they fell asleep in a random place somewhere, how was he supposed to move them? He wasn’t Choi Han or something.

 

“Maybe I should try working out…” he trailed off, before sighing. “It wouldn’t really matter, though.” 

 

No matter how great and mighty the children were, they couldn’t grow so much within 2 months.

 

“Still, these kids,” He thought about the first time he saw Eruhaben in his dragon form when he went with Pendrick. He really looked ancient, in comparison to the little chubby 5-year-old Raon who puffed his chest up at him and announced his name. Will Raon really grow up to be that big? It seemed a bit impossible, to him. It was difficult to picture the cute little now 6-year-old as such a large presence. 

 

On and Hong too. Maybe they wouldn’t grow to be a giant dragon, but one day they’d be adults too, wouldn’t they? Like him, and Rosalyn, or Alberu.

 

What would they be doing when they’re older? Actually, have the kids ever mentioned what they wanted to be when they grew up? On and Hong seem to be training and studying to be the heirs to the Molan household. They’re smart kids, and they seemed really enthusiastic about it. The Molans were now an information-based household rather than an assassin one, so Cale also wasn’t too worried about them. Raon also seemed to really like magic. Maybe he’ll study it more in the future, or maybe he’ll even work with Rosalyn at a magic tower. Or maybe he’ll travel around— he could do that with On and Hong too, since all three of them really liked adventures.

 

“… Kids really grow up fast, huh,” He sighed. It seemed far away, but it’s already been 2 years. Someday it’ll be 5, then 6, 10, even 20. What would the children look like in the future, all together? 

 

Cale could only wonder.

Chapter 2: snow and yarn.

Summary:

The kids have a snow day. Cale gives out some of the things he had knitted and cannot comprehend why people seem to like it so much.

Notes:

I was technically going to post this tomorrow but got impatient TwT. I've written about 60 percent of the fic already and just need to fill in some blanks such and such. Anyways enjoy snow!

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

In the end, Cale spaced out a little and ended up making too much. Once he got the hang of it, he just sat there and his hands were practically moving on autopilot, repeating practiced motions. It’s already been a few days— almost a week, and it’s all he does. He didn’t stop at scarves, either. 

 

Am I really going to give everyone all of this? Cale clicked his tongue. Well, what else was he supposed to do with all these scarves, hats, and whatever else? 

 

“Do you three want to go out?” Cale asked. “The snow’s piled up a bit more.”

 

It was late into the afternoon already, and the kids had just gotten back from studying. Like the bundles of endless energy they were, they had been pressing their face against the glass and talking enthusiastically about going out and playing in the snow while drinking hot cocoa and munching on cookies. 

 

They immediately lit up. “Yeah! Let’s go!”

 

“I wanna build a snowman today— Let’s get a carrot from Beacrox!”

 

“For the nose, right? What about the eyes?”

 

“There’s rocks outside— I saw a few. We can use them for the buttons too.”

 

“Oh, right! And let’s give it a nice smile,”

 

“What about the hands?”

 

“Some twigs and branches~”

 

Even when they were walking down the hallway, the three were still buzzing about. Cale only followed them from behind with a sigh, putting on his coat. At some point on their way to the garden, they ran into Ron and Beacrox. The kids told them about their plan to build a snowman and go outside, and Beacrox obliged and fetched them an old carrot from the second kitchen. Ron, meanwhile, offered Cale some of his warm, signature lemonade, which he tried to reject, but in the end just relented and accepted anyway. Scary old man.

 

“Mn…”

 

“Do you like it, young master?”

 

“...Sure.”

 

“Ho,” Ron wore his usual benign smile in response, and Cale suppressed a shiver.

 

They were at the garden at this point, and the cool air blew past as they walked past the gate and stepped out onto the path. 

 

“Wait.” Cale said. “You have to layer up first, don’t forget.”

 

The children’s scarves and hats were pretty small, so it wasn’t too difficult to carry around. He pulled out three sets of hats and scarves, and also small mittens.

 

Raon’s eyes sparkled as he knelt down and unfolded them. “Human, what’s that?”

 

Hong let out a little gasp. “Ooh, is it for us!?”

 

On blinked up at him. “New hats? And scarves?”

 

Cale just hummed back. “Come here,” carefully, he wrapped a gray scarf around Hong’s neck, and then slid on a small hat of the same color on his head. His ears twitched as they poked out of the holes Cale had added for him. “There,” he said. “Does it feel weird? Too small or big? Itchy?”

 

Hong shook his head so fast it could have flown off. “No! Not at all!” his eyes were sparkling so impossibly brightly that Cale had to squint somehow. “Is this really for me?”

 

“Yes. If it feels a bit off, it’s because I knit it myself— so it isn’t really that good.” Cale said, before hesitating. “...Do you like it?”

 

“You really knit this yourself?” he beamed. “That’s so cool! I didn’t know you could knit— I really, really like it! It’s the same color as noona!”

 

Well, Cale did have that in mind. He figured having the two siblings swap colors would be cute, rather than having it match their fur. It really did end up looking adorable. He let out a satisfied huff and ruffled the top of Hong’s head.

 

“Human! Me too! I also get one, right!?”

 

“And me?” On asked, and Cale nodded at the both of them.

 

Raon’s scarf and hat was white. Cale didn’t think too much about the color choice, aside from the fact that it would contrast well with his dark scales. There were also holes at the top of his hat where his horns could poke out. Cale had guessed how big it should be, and it did end up a bit bigger than needed. Honestly, all of the things he made were pretty amateur and shabby, with his lack of skill, but he tried his best to make it decent enough, despite the occasional loose threads. Aside from the contrast, Cale supposed he also thought about Sheritt. It would be cute if the little 6-year-old dragon were to match with his mom, right? White also looked good on Raon anyway.

 

As for On, her set was red, like her brother. It suited her well, and she seemed quite satisfied about it for some reason. Cale also managed to knit an extra scarf for her that was a bit bigger.

 

“You might want to polymorph more often, so I made you an extra,” he said, showing her the red scarf in his hands. Thinking about it now, he should also maybe make on for Hong too just in case. “I’ll hold on to it for now, you can use it whenever you want,”

 

On’s eyes sparkled as she looked at it. “Really?” she whispered with awe before beaming. “Thanks, Cale,”

 

Cale observed her for a bit. “On, do you not like snow?”

 

She blinked. “What makes you think that?”

 

“It’s just my guess,” he said, and On just awkwardly hummed back. Cale spoke. “I don’t like snow very much either.”

 

“You don’t?”

 

“Nope,” he admitted, honestly. “It’s wet, it’s cold, it’s a pain to shovel and move through— there’s lots of reasons not to like snow, and I don’t like it. And that’s why I choose to just stay inside. Even if I decide to go out into the snow sometimes, I would always just come back to sit near a fireplace and take a nap,” he said, looking at On. “The same is for you. If you don’t like snow, you can always come inside. If it gets too cold, you can always return to the house with me and warm up, if you get hungry there are warm meals on the table, and when you’re feeling tired from playing you can nap and rest for as long as you want.”

 

Cale kneeled to sit next to her and placed a hand atop On’s head, thumb lightly circling in a smooth soothing gesture. “There’s a warm house and the rest of our family waiting for you back at home,” he said. “So if you dislike snow, come inside.”

 

Cale watched On blink slowly a few times as she stared down at the patches of white snow that sat near her feet. He knew On and Hong must have been through some tough winters throughout the years they’ve been on the run. 

 

Though his own experiences as Kim Roksoo probably weren’t as severe, he knew what it was like to sit outside in the cold craving warmth. It was a really lonely and painful feeling, so he didn’t want any of the kids experiencing that ever again. Kids should be getting excited during snow days and run around before getting sick from playing so hard. And then it was a parent’s job to look after them and warm them up afterwards. On, Hong, and Raon still had lots of childhood snow days ahead of them.

 

“...Okay.” On nodded. “I’ll come inside when it gets too cold,”

 

Cale nodded, satisfied. “That’s right,”

“Cale, Cale! Where’s your scarf? And your hat?”

 

“That’s right, weak human! You can’t freeze to death in the snow!”

 

Cale frowned at that. “I won’t freeze to death, Raon,”

 

“You could though~”

 

“You’re so skinny and you have no fur, so you could really freeze over! Like a block of ice!”

 

“Weak human, if you turn into a block of ice I’ll burn the whole world down!”

 

“Okay, okay, calm down,” Cale sighed. He did wear a coat before heading out, but he didn't actually knit anything for himself. It wasn’t like he needed a new scarf or hat anyway. 

 

“Young master-nim,” Cale got the chills as he turned around. “Please do not forget your hat and scarf. It would most trouble this old servant if you were to fall ill, after all.”

 

Ron was already there, smiling benignly, holding out a tray with Cale’s scarf and hat ready, even some gloves. He was relatively warm already, but this was fine, he guessed. Cale just sighed and hesitantly took them from Ron. 

 

As he tied his scarf, Ron was already there adjusting it for him. It felt secure and warm around his neck and fortunately didn’t choke him to death.

 

Looking back towards the kids, they had already started rolling around in the snow while shouting and playing. Hong was showing his nona and their youngest how to make snow angels, which Cale remembered from a book he showed him a few days ago. The two cats’ angels’ had little cat ears imprinted in their silhouette, while Raon’s had an extra set of wings and a few horns poking out.

 

Hong crouched down and drew a little smiley face on On’s snow angel, giggling. “Hehe, look, look, it’s you, noona! You’re smiling!”

 

On laughed and went to Raon’s and drew two dots for eyes and a smile with a little tongue sticking out. “Blep.”

 

Raon went to Hong’s, and drew a silly face with a wide semi-circle smile and triangular eyes that made it look like Hong was laughing. He also added whiskers for extra detail. “Ta-da!”

 

The children did that for a while, laughing while doodling on the snow and adding more details to their snow angel. Eventually, they called Cale over to take a look. The faces were quite silly, but grew more detailed over time– they even added eyebrows. Raon’s silhouette had some scales drawn in, Hong added some swirls for extra effect around his angel and On’s had stars drawn around hers. It was very cute.

 

“Cale, Cale, you should do it too!”

 

“That’s right human, make a snow angel!” Raon was beaming brighter than the snow. “We’ll show you how to do it, It’s very simple!”

 

“You just have to lay down and move your arms around like this—” On made up and down motions with her arms, paws swiping at the air. “And also your legs too,”

 

“Um…” he hesitated. 

 

“Come on, please?”

 

“Pleaseeeeeeee?”

 

With three shiny eyes blinking up at him hopefully it would’ve been mean for Cale to decline. He sighed and laid down in the snow, feeling the cool sort of crunchy surface press against his back. Laying in a bed of snow and facing up, the children were peering down at him while laughing. Hong picked off some snow from his face and Raon swept his hair to the side.

 

“Okay! Now move your arms around, human!”

 

“Mn…” he sighed and obliged them, waving his arms and legs around in the snow. He kind of wished he wore a hat since there was a lot of snow in his hair now, but it wasn’t a big deal.

 

When he was finished, Cale sighed and stared up at the sky— only to be met with Choi Han’s very confused face. He flinched.

 

“Gah!”

 

“Cale-nim?” Choi Han asked in a somewhat concerned tone. “What are you doing?”

 

“Oh, hi Choi Han!”

 

“He’s making a snow angel~”

 

“Yup!”

 

He tilted his head to the side as he stared down at Cale’s lying figure. “Snow angels…” he echoed. 

 

“You can get up now, human!”

 

“Yup, you could get sick if you stay in all that snow,”

 

“Don’t get sick, Cale!”

 

Choi Han offered his hand and pulled Cale up to his feet. As he dusted himself off, grimacing at the wet and cold sensation of the snow against his clothes, The children marveled at his snow angel.

 

“Ooh!”

 

“It’s tall!” Raon pointed out. “Wow, and the wings are big too, human!”

 

“It really looks like an angel!” Hong remarked. 

 

“The wings kind of make me think of your shield,” On pointed out, crouching down and placing her paw in the snow at the center of the figure. “The shield would be right here, see?”

 

“Oh!” Raon gasped. “It does! Isn’t that right, Choi Han?”

 

Choi Han observed the silhouette in the snow with a hum before nodding. “It does.”

 

“Let’s draw it!”

 

While the kids were busy with that, Cale finished dusting himself off and spoke to Choi Han as he adjusted his own scarf, “Were you training earlier?”

 

He nodded. “Yes— with the knights at the training grounds,” he paused. “Miss Lily was also there,”

 

Cale hummed. “Really? How did she do?”

 

“Good,” Choi Han answered with a smile. “She’s really strong and has a remarkable amount of stamina, and a lot of talent. She’s well regarded by all of the other knights and when she practiced with me she—”

 

Cale choked on air. “You sparred with her?”

 

“Hm? Oh, yes,”

 

Cale almost caught a heart attack when he heard that. Lily? Fought Choi Han? Cale was confident and certain in her strength, but to this extent? At her age? Against this munchkin protagonist? Wasn’t she like, 10? 9?

 

Sensing Cale’s supposed worry, or perhaps bafflement, Choi Han quickly assured him. “It was a light practice match and it wasn’t like I went all out— Despite wielding a greatsword, I thought she was still agile, and her stance is very refined— um, don’t worry, she’s fine,”

 

“No, I’m sure she’s fine,” Choi Han was a good kind of guy so Cale couldn’t imagine him ever hurting her intentionally in a thousand years. “I’m glad she’s doing well,”

 

Choi Han blinked before smiling. “I can report to you about her progress, if you’d like,”

 

“You don’t have to,” he sighed. “Though I don’t mind hearing about it every once in a while,”

 

“Okay,”

 

“Oh, before I forget,” he pulled out a magical bag from his pocket and rummaged inside for a little, before pulling out a dark red scarf. He held it out to Choi Han. “Here.”

 

Choi Han stared at it for a while, looking somewhat stunned. He blinked. “This is…?”

 

“Yeah, I know, it’s not much,” he shrugged. “It’s just something I made in my spare time— it’s a bit shabby but, just take it,”

 

Choi Han’s scarf was actually some of the first of Cale’s knitting attempts. As he was an amateur, there were loose threads poking out here and there, though he cut most of them so it would look less shabby, and it had a relatively simple design. He didn’t have much in mind when he started it, but after some time, he considered giving it to someone since it was coming out relatively well. 

 

“You train outside a lot,” Cale simply stated. “Don’t underestimate the snow. I’m sure you know that already, but I thought this could help somewhat in staying warmer. It’s easy to get sick during the winter,” Even munchkin protagonists in fantasy novels could catch colds.

 

Choi Han’s eyes looked like they were sparkling as they fixated on the folded up scarf Cale held out for him, though he wasn’t sure why. He carefully took it before unfolding it, observing it up close before mumbling. “You… made this?”

 

He shrugged. “Yeah,”

 

“For me?”

 

“I made some for the kids too— you saw those hats? And the scarves?” Choi Han turned to observe the children who were doodling in the snow still around Cale’s snow angel and let out a little gasp.

 

“I didn’t know you could knit,”

 

“It’s a small skill I picked up on a whim,” he shrugged. “So it looks amateurish,”

 

“! No! It’s not amateurish at all! It looks very nice!” Choi Han exclaimed suddenly as if trying to reassure Cale.

 

He tilted his head. “Thanks?”

 

Choi Han put the scarf on, wrapping it around his neck once or twice. It fit nicely enough, and the punk seemed strangely pleased by it. On the other hand, Cale winced. The scarf was a dark red. He hadn’t put much thought into the color choice, except that Choi Han wore black all the time and a splash of color could probably help or something and red yarn was the color he had most of, but looking at him now it just looked like blood on his clothes. He shivered. Choi Han meanwhile seemed to like color quite a bit.

 

“Ah. Thank you,” he smiled at him. “I like it— I’ll wear it whenever I go out for sword training, Cale-nim,”

 

“You don’t have to,” 

 

“But I’m going to,” 

 

“Just don’t catch a cold,” he sighed. “And you can’t miss meals because it’s colder now, so your body is going to burn through more of its energy so it can keep you warm. Have you eaten yet?”

 

He smiled. “I have, this morning— I had a lunch break earlier as well,”

 

Cale hummed. “Good,”

 

Turning back around, the two of them looked at the now elaborately decorated Cale snow angel, courtesy of the children. It was quite a sight— A smug looking nonchalant expression, a scarf around its neck, and they even added some hair. Around the silhouette were various bags of money, some spilling out coins, magic stones, and lots of sparkles. 

 

“Human, look!” Raon exclaimed, pointing his paw at it. “It’s you!”

 

“You’re scamming someone, see?” Hong tapped on the doodle of a shocked bald figure next to his supposed face. Cale heard Choi han stifle a laugh from beside him.

 

“It’s a loooot of money. 5 billion gallons~” On chuckled. 

 

Huh, the kids were quite artistic. Cale bent down slightly to get a closer look. “It looks pretty good,”

 

“Oh!” Raon drew a circle next to the snow angel with dots and smaller circles inside. “Here’s a cookie, human!”

 

“It’s from the crown prince’s office— the chocolate chip ones~” Hong added. “Oh, and also the blueberry flavored ones, here!”

 

“Oooh, and…” On doodled another circle with ornate-looking patterns on it. Cale could recognize it almost immediately despite the messy details. “A golden plaque~”

 

Cale seemed somewhat satisfied by it all. It was an accurate depiction of him. Choi Han crouched down with the kids and observed their drawings, then drew a glass with a lemon-slice on the rim and a straw sticking out with his finger.

 

“And here’s the lemon tea that Ron would often make you,” he added, but Cale grimaced. The children laughed at him. 

 

“Oh!” Raon fluttered over to Choi Han and touched the scarf wrapped around his neck. “Did you get a scarf too, Choi Han?”

 

“Mhm,” he nodded with a smile, pulling the end and showing it off a bit. “Cale-nim made it for me,”

 

Raon gasped. “Mine too! Look, Choi Han! Isn’t it cool? The human knitted it for me– it’s white just like the snow!”

 

Hong also let out a little gasp. “Yours looks like noona’s!”

 

Choi Han and On made eye contact and showed off their scarves to each other while smiling a little. Cale didn’t really understand why they were showing it off so much, but if they liked it then it wasn’t like there was a problem.

 

 

“Ah, it’s young master Cale-nim!” a few knights turned their heads towards Cale’s way as he walked near the training grounds. They all stood and greeted him with a small bow with cheery expressions. 

 

“Orabuni!” Lily exclaimed as she leaned on her greatsword and waved as the knights conversing with her did. 

 

“How’s practice?” Cale asked, handing her a handkerchief to dry up some of the sweat rolling down the side of her face. 

 

“It’s been great! Take a look,” She gripped her sword a bit tighter and seemed to focus a little. The same foggy red aura rose like faint smoke from her sword, though it was more prominent than a few days ago even now. “It’s gotten bolder right?”

 

“It has,” he nodded. “You’ve been training hard— did you eat yet?”

 

She nodded. “Mhm. I made sure to drink a lot, too,”

 

“Good, that’s good,” Cale nodded, satisfied.

 

“What brings you here, orabuni?” she questioned curiously.

 

“I was just passing by, so I thought I might as well say hi,” he sighed. They both sat on the steps, and Cale pulled out some cookies he had kept with him. They were usually for Raon, Hong, or On, but he had plenty on him so it wasn’t much of a problem. “How did it go today?”

 

“Great! I had a few lessons with master over at the restaurant this morning and he treated me to breakfast there— he’s a great chef on top of being a great swordsman, did you know? Then he made me run a bunch of laps and we practiced—”

 

Cale had honestly been out on a small stroll on his own while the kids finished up their snowman, saying he could come back when it was finished. Choi Han and Beacrox were helping out with rolling up balls of snow to form the body, but they somehow made it a little competitive. He didn’t want to get mixed up with that and decided to take a walk.

 

Lily was the kind of kid that really grew up quickly. For a 9-year old, she was already quite tall. Not tall enough to be above Cale, but he thought she could get there in just short of a few years. She also seemed to have matured a lot more over the past two years, but she’s still cheerful. 

 

Lily was actually younger than On was, too. She hadn’t seen them talk all that often since they didn’t meet as often in the first place, but he thought it would be good if they ever decided to talk. Making other friends your age was quite important, though Lily was closer to Hong in terms of age.

 

“Mn, Lily,” Cale cut in, pulling out the spatial magic bag from his pocket again and digging through it. From there, out went another scarf, only this time with a more unique design, following a striped pattern. It followed a dark and light blue color scheme, and the tassels at the end were braided. He didn’t think too much of it, other than the fact that she seemed to like the color blue. Cale had gotten used to scarves after a while and tested out a more complicated design, which was why it was striped.

 

Her eyes sparkled as she stared at it. “This is…?”

 

“It’s for you,” he said. “You train hard all the time, and it’s winter. Don’t get sick,”

 

She blinked a few times as she took it and held it, observing the details up close. “Did you buy this?”

 

“No,” he admitted. “...I made it,”

 

The sparkle in Lily’s eyes seemed to increase ten-fold. “You made this, orabuni? By yourself? Really?”

 

“...yeah,”

 

She let out a little gasp. “Wow… Thank— Thank you!” she smiled widely at him. “I’ll make sure to take good care of it and— and I’ll wear it all the time. I promise!”

 

“You don’t—”

 

“I will!” she grinned, putting it on right away. Fortunately, it fit fine— it complimented her bright blue eyes quite well. “I just finished up with practice, so I’m going to go back and show this to Basen-orabuni— and mother and father as well!”

 

“Um… all right?”

 

“Thank you!” Lily got up and ran off, dragging her giant sword with her while she wore a cheerful expression. It was quite the sight.

 

Well, he shrugged to himself. I guess it doesn’t matter what she plans on doing as long as she’s happy with it. 

 

A familiar voice suddenly chimed in from beside him. “Good afternoon, young master-nim,”

 

He looked up, and found vice-captain Hilsman smiling at him in his training gear. He greeted him with a small bow as she stood in front of him. “Hilsman,”

 

“The knights are all very happy to have you here, young master-nim! It feels as if we could grow ten-times more motivated just by your presence,” he smiled widely. 

 

“That sounds ridiculous,”

 

“It’s true! How could a flame within us not immediately blaze when the renowned hero of silverlight himself has come to cheer us on?”

 

Cut the crap. Cale sighed. All this hero stuff is seriously bothering him. “I didn’t come here for that though?”

 

“Well, it wouldn’t really matter as long as you’re present,” He laughed. Hilsman has been all smiles for a while now. “It’s a wonderful day, isn’t it?”

 

“It’s snowing,”

 

“Snow days can be nice too, young master-nim,” he replied. “On cold days like these, it’s best to warm up with a drink at the tavern,”

 

“Hm…” Cale shrugged. He wasn’t wrong.

 

“Have you gone to the new tavern that opened recently?” he asked. “It recently opened a while ago, sometime after the battle at Puzzle City. The drinks and food they serve there are quite delicious.”

 

“Really?” he tilted his head. “What is it called?”

 

Hilsman smiled. “Silver Shield Tavern.”

 

Cale’s expression soured immediately. “What?”

 

“Hahaha!” he laughed with a wide grin on his face. Cale was sure that he definitely knew what he was doing. “It’s a great establishment, young master-nim. If you ever plan to go into town, this Hilsman is always ready to guide you there,”

 

“Haa…” he just wanted a free drink, didn’t he? “Well, whatever.”

 

“Everyone’s been in a lively mood as of late, young master-nim,” he smiled. “The White Star has been defeated, and the new year is approaching. I think they’re looking to hold a festival sometime soon,”

 

“Is that so?”

 

“Yes,” he nodded. “A veil of peace has descended upon the entire kingdom, in fact. Even my mother who has been quite tense for a while since the war has gradually loosened up. We shared a drink just a few days ago. I’m quite glad, you see,”

 

“Mn…”

 

Hilsman smiled again at Cale. “Young master-nim, truly, deciding to follow you and serve you was the greatest decision of my life,” he said, with an expression of ease yet certainty. Cale stilled a little. “Thanks to you, I’ve gotten stronger,” he said. “And thanks to you, the territory— no, the kingdom, better yet the entire continent can continue to live in peace.”

 

“...”

 

“And for that, I’m eternally grateful,”

 

This place must mean a lot to Hilsman. Though he was somewhat arrogant towards Choi Han in the beginning, he was a hard-working kind of guy who was dedicated to his duties, and good with his words. A fitting vice-captain for the knights that served the territory. Cale couldn’t think of anyone else who could fill the role much better than Hilsman could.

 

“If you’re really grateful, just keep doing your job properly,” he sighed. He didn’t need to be so thankful towards Cale, he only did what was necessary for his peaceful life. Though there isn’t much left of that peaceful life for him to live, at least the others who had worked hard, like Hilsman, could properly enjoy it. He tossed him a bag of coins from his spatial magic bag. “Take the rest of the knights to that tavern you like so much for a meal tonight,”

 

All the other still-training knights within earshot cheered like they had just gotten pay-raise.

Notes:

characterization is hard when theres so many characters to keep track of TwT anyways hope y'all liked this :)

Chapter 3: kimbap.

Summary:

Cale gives out the last of his impulsive knitting projects and craves some korean food. Someway somehow, Beacrox is persuaded.

Notes:

warning: Author cannot cook or knit for jack. However, author also headcanons KRS as a great cook and good at needlework.

Anyways! Hope you guys enjoy this one. I should probably note that this is a relatively slow-paced series with truck-load of domestic fluff (dw the angst is in equal measure) This is also just my way of self-indulging and bringing to life all my fun little scenario ideas :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Beacrox, as the second chef in the Henituse estate, did not like having other people in his kitchen. They could mess something up, or break something, or bring in dust or mud from outside, or make things dirty. Needless to say, no one was allowed in unless they got permission.

 

If his past self from 2 years ago saw him let Cale, who used to throw fits about his food and hurled wine bottles on a daily basis, into his kitchen, he may try to assassinate him in real time.

 

“You want to cook?”

 

Cale seemed to flinch a bit at his genuine look of bafflement. “...Yes.” 

 

“Young master-nim, I could just make it for you if there’s something you want, there’s no need for you to do it yourself.”

 

“It’s not something you can make.” Beacrox’s frown deepened drastically and Cale quickly corrected himself. “Wait, no, I meant that it’s not something you’d probably know how to cook.”

 

“What makes you so sure?”

 

“It’s a recipe from Choi Han’s world.”

 

He raised a brow. “Choi Han?”

 

“Yes.”

 

“Why would you know a recipe from his world?”

 

He took a moment to think before answering. “He told me about a few.” Cale replied. “I’m just… interested in them.”

 

Beacrox watched Cale tie his hair into a rare ponytail, as opposed to the usual black ribbon behind his hair, and sighed. “Why can’t you just give me the recipe?”

 

“Mn, I just wanted to try it out myself,” Cale shrugged. 

 

Usually, he would have pressed on some more to convince Cale to just get out of his kitchen and let him handle it, but he’d seen how oddly fatigued and passive he had been the past month since the aftermath of the battle within the temple. It was better for him to be a bit more active rather than just sleep for long periods of time, he supposed. And besides, it wasn’t as if he’s actually seen his young master cook anyway, and though he wasn’t expecting much, it might at least be an interesting new thing to know about him. 

 

“Fine,” he relented. “Though I don’t know if that punk is really someone you can trust when it comes to something like recipes.”

 

“Ah, don’t worry about that, I’ve got it.”

 

“How exactly?”

 

“Here’s the recipe,” he said, handing him a piece of paper with Cale’s recognizable handwriting in ink. 

 

Beacrox read it and tilted his head. “Kimbap…?”

 

“It’s a pretty simple recipe,” Cale remarked as he glanced at the magic clock on the wall. “It’s still a bit early for lunch, so this can count as a nice snack.”

 

Cale was right, it did seem quite simple, and the instructions seemed detailed enough for them to actually follow without much issue. Essentially, it was rice wrapped in seaweed paper with a variety of fillings. As he watched Cale take out a pot though, he was still slightly skeptical about the young master using his kitchen.

 

“What are you doing?”

 

“Starting with the rice,” Cale replied, pouring water in and switching the stove on. “It shouldn’t take too long. Probably done by the time I finish stir frying and chopping.” He blinked. “Mn, are you going to help me out?”

 

“Of course I am,” Beacrox said. It was preposterous enough to him that he even let Cale do this. 

 

“Mn, in that case, could you get some of the ingredients? I’ll be cutting them later.”

 

He frowned. “No, I’ll be doing the cutting, young master-nim.” he said, sounding quite insistent. Cale gave him an odd, somewhat fearful look but just awkwardly agreed. What he didn’t know however, was that there was an unspoken ban on sharp objects coming anywhere near his vicinity until further notice ever since the stunt he pulled inside the temple— which they still weren’t over, by the way.

 

“...Alright,” he agreed with reluctance, pouring a few cups of rice inside the pot and water in from over the sink. Beacrox watched attentively as Cale repeatedly poured water in, sifted through it with his hands like he was washing it, and drained it. His motions seemed practiced, as if he had done it dozens of times before, which baffled the chef because who would have the balls to make the young master of a county, no, a duchy , better yet the hero on the continent, wash rice?

 

By the time he came back from the pantry with the ingredients Cale listed in the recipe, the pot was sitting atop the counter to simmer with the lid on. The redheaded young master asked him a few times to let him do the cutting too, insisting that it’d be done faster that way, but Beacrox stood his ground and ignored him until he was finished with the process. He let him do most of the other, deemed safer steps, though.

 

Firstly, he blanched some spinach, scalding it in boiling water for a few seconds before running it under cold water right after. Then he placed it in a relatively large bowl after letting Beacrox cut out the bulb, and added salt, sesame oil, and minced garlic cloves. Then he mixed it with his hands— of course, only after Beacrox made him wash them one more time before doing so.

 

“...Have you done something like this before, young master-nim?”

 

Cale tensed slightly before relaxing again, giving an awkward hum. “Mn.. Well…” he trailed off, seemingly contemplating his answer a bit too much. ”I guess so.”

 

“And when did that happen?”

 

“...Sealed god’s test,” he replied. Beacrox’s eyes widened in surprise since he never really knew what exactly transpired when Cale was sucked in the black orb that day. Apparently the sealed god forced him to… cook? Did the young master-nim despise cooking enough that it appeared in the test of a god who essentially represented despair? 

 

“...I see,” he simply replied. It couldn’t be helped that he asked that question considering how unaffected Cale looked about sticking his hands into the ingredients and mixing it himself (As long as he washed his hands, which Beacrox watched him do very attentively, it’s fine). He wouldn’t have expected him to be so normal about it, let alone good at it.

 

“Can you tell me a bit about this dish, young master-nim?” Beacrox decided to ask. To be honest, it wasn’t often that Cale took particular interest in something so specific aside from money and maybe wine. Especially when it was about Choi Han’s mysterious faraway hometown in another world. He couldn’t help but be curious about his thoughts on it.

 

“Mn…” Cale tilted his head as if recalling a few things. “It’s a dish from… Choi Han’s hometown. It’s called ‘kimbap’. They come in a lot of varieties, this one is just the simplest and most basic. I guess you could call it the ‘original’ variety.” he explained. “You would usually pack these for picnics or gatherings. They’re a popular lunch that moms would pack you for school picnics, or just for regular school lunch. They’re round, and bite sized. They’re also easy to make with leftover kimchi, so they make a quick lunch when you’re in a rush.”

 

Cale seemed satisfied enough when he talked about this dish, and his pronunciation of its name sounded somewhat authentic, even though Beacrox wasn’t sure what he was talking about. He did say he had learned some of Choi Han’s language. “Have you ever had these?”

 

“...” Cale took a moment. “They taste good.” 

 

It felt like he was hiding something.

 

But lately, it felt like Cale had been a lot more honest with them, and a lot more willing to answer questions. It felt as if he had let down some of the walls he had put up when it came to some parts of himself. Maybe he was still hiding a few things, but this much from him was enough, for now.

 

He watched Cale beat a few eggs in a bowl mixed with salt before pouring the mixture on the pan. It sizzled as he tilted the pan to allow it to spread evenly, and again Beacrox was surprised by Cale's unexpected adeptness with cooking he had literally never seen him do. And then he flipped the egg with his bare hands.

 

“What are you doing!?”

 

He flinched. “Uh, flipping it?”

 

“With— with your bare hands…!?”

 

“Yes…?”

 

“The— the stove is on! Is your hand not burning…?!”

 

“Ah, mn, it’s perfectly fine, don’t worry about it.” he said, before mumbling to himself. “I’d usually just use disposable chopsticks from the convenience store, but… It’s no big deal at all— it’s just a little hot, this is faster than using a spatula or something.”

 

Beacrox was left somewhat speechless before sighing exasperatedly and pointing behind Cale. “There’s burn salve in that drawer,”

 

Then he stir fried the rest of the ingredients, moving with a sense of expertise. It was like Beacrox’s level of skill when he used to make Cale's favorite dishes all the time when he was a child. Now that he thought about it, ever since the day he had suddenly changed, his trashy young master-nim had never once complained about his food and pretty much just ate everything off his plate. 

 

“Young master-nim,” Beacrox called as he lifted the pot to check on the rice. “What’s your favorite food?”

 

Cale glanced at him as he stirred the vegetables. “Mn… anything’s fine as long as it isn’t sour or bitter, or generally inedible,”

 

So I guess he really doesn’t like father’s lemon tea, Beacrox sighed internally. Why does he keep drinking it anyway though?

 

“Is there anything more… particular?” he asked. “A specific dish you might like?”

 

Cale gave a thoughtful hum before opening his mouth like he was going to answer, before faltering. “I like…” Beacrox stared at his strange expression, waiting for him to reply, before Cale’s reddish-brown eyes glinted as he mumbled. “...Kimchi.”

 

Beacrox blinked. “What was that?”

 

“Kim…” he trailed off, sounding somewhat hesitant, before exhaling and relaxing his shoulders a bit. “Kimchi-jjigae.”

 

“Is that…” he trailed off. “a dish from Choi Han’s world?” Wow, the sealed god really made him do a lot of cooking. 

 

Cale nodded. “Yeah,” he placed the stir-fried vegetables on the plate. “It tastes— I think it would taste good.”

 

He looked a bit nostalgic when he said that.

 

Cale glanced back at Beacrox before humming. “I can show you how to make it.” It seemed that his curiosity showed on his face. “Another day, maybe. I can show you other recipes too, if you want. I remember— I know a few.”

 

Steam wafted out from the pot of rice that seemed like it had finished cooking, and Beacrox could spot a small, satisfied smile from Cale as he laid out the seaweed sheet. 

 

“Of course, young master-nim.”

 

Beacrox didn’t mind Cale in his kitchen.

 

 

Basen sighed as his quill scrawled over the pages of his parchment, trying to focus on the paragraphs in his book about management. Father didn’t assign him any work today, but that didn’t mean he should slack off too much yet. There were still lots for him to study.

 

However, he frowned when he remembered when Lily had come in yesterday with a blue striped scarf and a happy expression, before promptly showing it off to him.

 

“It’s a scarf that Cale-orabuni made,” She had proclaimed, pointing and poking at it to emphasize her point. “He knitted it himself because he was worried about me,”

 

“Haaa…” Basen wasn’t childish. No, he definitely wasn’t. He was mature and he wouldn't be bothered by a scarf. Definitely. 

 

Is it because Lily is always training outside? He wondered to himself, before mumbling quietly. “...I want something from hyung-nim, too.”

 

At that moment, the door to the study opened with a light swing, and like he had heard his words, in stepped his hyung carrying a plate of… something. It looked like a snack, but he wasn’t exactly sure what it was. Basen straightened his posture. “Hyung-nim.”

 

“Studying today?” he asked in a casual tone, closing the door behind and walking over to sit on the sofa near Basen, setting a plate of the mysterious snacks on the table. 

 

He stared at the peculiar thing for a while. “This is…?”

 

Cale picked up one of the rolls, at least that’s what Basen would guess it was, and dipped in the strange pallet of sauce that came on the plate. Afterwards he ate the entire thing in one go and chewed, as if demonstrating to Basen. He tilted his head.

 

“Kimbap.”

 

“Huh?”

 

“This is called Kimbap.” Cale paused, as he picked out a book from the shelf. “It’s a foreign dish.”

 

“A foreign dish…?” He didn't recognize it as any of the national dishes from other kingdoms, and it didn’t exactly seem like something you would find in the western continent. “The eastern continent…?”

 

Cale hummed pensively, before shrugging. “Sure,” he replied, before sliding a glass of water across the table in his direction. “You should drink.”

 

“Oh…” Basen, in all honesty, drank tea more often than he did water, though he couldn’t deny needing something more refreshing at the moment.

 

“You’re studying really hard,” Cale remarked. He stilled. “You should remember to take breaks. Or at least drink enough. Dehydration can cause headaches, remember that.”

 

“Ah… right. Thank you, hyung-nim.”

 

Cale opened up the book he had picked out earlier— it wasn’t too thick, and from the quick glance he had of its contents, it seemed to be a novel of sorts. Oh. he thought. Cale must have enjoyed reading stories. He’s seen him read a few times before but he’d completely forgotten after the war started and Cale got busy dealing with… everything.

 

“How have your studies been? I also heard you were helping father with some internal affairs.” he said. “Hans mentioned you were pretty good at it.”

 

“Oh,” he blinked. “They’ve been… good. I quite enjoy it,”

 

“You do?” Cale tilted his head at him slightly before picking up another roll of the ‘kimbap’ from the plate. “That’s good, then. Keep up the good work.”

 

He smiled. “Th… Thank you, hyung-nim. I will,”

 

“Has anything happened lately?” he asked while stabbing one of the rolls with a fork and swirling it in the dipping sauce.

 

“Ah… well,” Basen contemplated a response. “This morning my instructor happened to take a day off,”

 

“Your instructor?” He paused. “Mr. Walt?”

 

“Yes, him,” he nodded. “Apparently his wife fell bedridden not long ago. Father is sending him support and well wishes,” 

 

“Mn, alright,”

 

“I've been studying on my own since this morning,” 

 

“Mn, well, keep up the good work,” Cale handed him one of the kimbap rolls with a fork, already dipped in sauce. “Have you eaten breakfast yet? Either way, it's gotten a bit late– if you've really been studying all morning, then you should eat something now. Thinking on an empty stomach won't get you anywhere,”

 

“Ah…” he blinked, accepting the offer. With the way Cale ate it, he was just supposed to eat the whole thing at once? “Thank you, hyung-nim,”

 

He opened his mouth and put the entire thing in his mouth and then chewed. “Mn…!”

 

Cale tilted his head. “Is it good?”

 

“It's…” Basen decided to finish swallowing before he spoke. “It's great…!”

 

Basen didn't have rice all that often, and he's never had it wrapped in… seaweed? Either way it was delicious. The rice was soft and the seaweed was somewhat crunchy, and the taste of the contents in the middle of the roll was remarkable. He could taste a few things, kind of. There was spinach, some sort of meat, eggs, and more.

 

“The dipping sauce is delicious,” he said. “This is… it's called kimbap?”

 

Cale nodded as he cut the remaining rolls into halves with a fork. “Rice rolls wrapped in seaweed with filling in the middle,” he said. “They're a nice study snack,”

 

“Oh…” did Cale often eat something like this when he was studying back then? “I didn't know Chef Beacrox could make something like this…”

 

“Hm? Oh, he just learned today,” Cale replied. “I was the one who gave him the recipe, and I guess I also cooked some of the ingredients-”

 

His eyes widened. “Hyung-nim, you made these?”

 

“...kind of,” he shrugged.

 

Oh wow. Oh… wow. His hyung made a snack, for him? “It tastes amazing,” Cale blinked at him. “Really, I didn't know you were so talented at cooking, hyung-nim…!” he was definitely going to brag to Lily about this later.

 

“It was just something I picked up,” he sighed. “...On that note, here's something for you.”

 

“Hm?” 

 

Cale pulled something out of a pouch he carried with him, and slid it across the table to Basen. His eyes widened slightly. “You use a lot of fountain pens nowadays, and sometimes pencils,” he mentioned. “It’s easy to lose them when you carry them around,”

 

It was a knitted… pouch? It was a green color with a dark button at the top to seal it. As he held it, gently, he could feel something inside of it, and undid the button to check. It was a new fountain pen.

 

“If you’re having trouble storing them, you can put them in here… I guess,”

 

In all honesty, Cale didn’t know why he started all these knitting projects. Well, it was something he’d considered doing when he was younger, he guessed, but he supposed he just felt like he had a lot of things to think about and it was easier to space out while working on something rather than sitting down and staring at a wall, which would definitely raise some concerns.

 

I mean, I guess…. He remembered his days as Kim Roksoo, when he would study at his part-time jobs, restaurants, and would even stay after school just to study until late. Of course, that was all before the world basically collapsed. He thought if he’d gotten into a good college with a good scholarship, he could at least live on-campus and let the scholarship cover some funds, maybe get a good job after he graduates. But then again, the world did kind of end, so all that was in vain.

 

I guess I just kind of thought Basen was a bit similar? 

 

Of course, Basen would definitely have all that work pay off in the future, working for the duchy probably as the next count if that’s what he really decides he’d like to do. He was doing well already, in Cale’s opinion, so he should really just relax a bit. Lily and Basen sure are diligent.

 

Mn, but it’s kind of stupid. Would Basen even like something like this? He tried to make it look as nice as possible but it still looked amateurish.

 

Contrary to Cale’s expectations, Basen was basically beaming on the inside. Oh Lily would never hear the end of this. “Th… Thank you,” his eyes were sparkling. “This is… I appreciate it very much, hyung-nim— I’ll make sure to make good use of it!”

 

“You don’t ha—”

 

“I will,”

 

“Okay,” Cale sighed. As long as he liked it, he guessed, but wasn’t this a bit much? “Well, I’m sorry for disrupting your studies, I’ll get going now,” he said. “If you need me, I’ll be heading out for a bit after this, but I should be back soon. Ask Hans or Ron,” he eyed the plate of kimbap that was already running out. “There’s more of these in the kitchen. Lily and the others are eating outside too, so join them if you need fresh air,”

 

“Ah.. Okay.”

 

“Keep up the good work,” and a few steps later, Cale was out of the study. Basen stared down at the pen holder in his hands.



Cale looked really relaxed today. He hoped that… He hoped that Cale would keep visiting every once in a while like this, too.

 

 

As Alberu’s royal instructor, Choi Han had gone to the palace that day for their scheduled training. The weather was cold out, and after what Alberu considered a training session from the seventh circle of hell, they stopped and went in to warm up and talk. 

 

Alberu spoke more about how Puzzle City’s restoration was progressing, as well as some plans he had in regards to handing out the rewards for the contributions towards the battle at puzzle city against the unranked monsters— particularly in regards to Cale. Choi Han also told Alberu about how Cale had been acting a bit strangely lately.

 

“I don’t think it’s a bad change,” he had said. “Not at all, actually. It’s just a bit sudden. He’s been more open and honest about things, and he talks more during normal conversations. I don’t think I’ve heard Cale-nim swear in a while too.”

 

“Maybe it’s because he’s had some time to think,” Alberu said. “Commanding the war was a heavy burden, even for Cale Henituse himself.” 

 

They tensed slightly as they recalled the way he looked when Raon carried him through the balcony, bleeding, covered in a thousand open red cuts, and unconscious. Alberu and Choi Han decided that they would stop at nothing to make sure he never had to hurt himself like that ever again.

 

“Look, he even gave me a scarf,” 

 

He sighed as he eyed the red scarf Choi Han had been wearing all day. “You’ve mentioned that 5 different time already,”

 

Choi Han contemplated it for a while. “Do you think he might be hiding something?” 

 

“If it’s Cale, then yes.” Alberu sighed in a deadpan. “But, maybe it’s okay to just let him have the benefit of the doubt, right? From the way you described it, it sounded like that punk was finally relaxing and fulfilling that slacker life he always talked about.”

 

“That’s… yeah…” Choi Han nodded. It did definitely make him feel relieved to see Cale resting comfortably and safely so much the past month. “If something seems suspicious, we could ask Miss Cage to ask the God of Death, right?”

 

“That’s right.” Alberu agreed. “Now we just need to keep an eye on that bastard.”

 

“That bastard? You couldn’t possibly be talking about me, could you hyung-nim?”

 

They turned their heads around to see a familiar figure dressed in a coat, with a baby black dragon floating above him with a cheery expression and two cats in his arms. On hopped off as he got closer to them.

 

Albery scoffed. “Speak of the devil.”

 

“The devil? Me?” he made a sarcastic motion to himself. “Your sharp words wound this lowly subject, your highness.”

 

“What are you doing here?” Alberu asked as Cale approached Choi Han.

 

“Delivery, I guess.” he shrugged, and they both noticed him holding some sort of box. Hong climbed up his shoulder before leaping off, snatching away a jar of cookies from the desk. “Tsk. You shouldn’t be out training when it’s snowing. You get hungry easier when it’s cold out, you know.”

 

Cale held out a rectangular, wrapped lunch box. Alberu tilted his head in somewhat confusion, while Choi Han’s eyes lit up with a nostalgic sparkle at the recognition. Hesitantly, he reached out and took it, carefully unwrapping the colorful cloth before opening the box.

 

“!” he gasped. 

 

“This is…?” Alberu questioned as he opened the cookie jar for Hong and let Raon carry it away.

 

“Kimbap!” Choi Han exclaimed. “But, how…?”

 

“I convinced Beacrox to let me use the kitchen,” he shrugged, looking to the side to see the kids at a distance far away enough they wouldn’t really be paying attention. Currently, they were with Mary, who went to visit Tasha who was working at the palace, all while enjoying Alberu’s stock of sugar cookies. “It’s Korean food, from Earth. I made some.”

 

“You made this?” Alberu blinked. 

 

“Hyung-nim, are you trying to say I can’t cook?”

 

“I mean— well… I’m just more baffled that that scary person actually allowed you in his kitchen in the first place.” he sighed. “Agh, whatever— let’s just taste it first.”

 

Cale handed them both a pair of wooden chopsticks. Choi Han wondered where he’d gotten those since he had never even heard of them existing in this european-esque world, but he found that they worked well. Alberu watched him, looking baffled by the concept of eating with just two sticks as utensils, but thanks to his time in Earth 2 as the tiger, he wasn’t as shocked over it.

 

Choi Han picked one roll up and ate it.

 

“So?” Cale gave them both an expectant look. “I personally think I’m an okay cook— even Beacrox said it tasted alright when we tried it. Basen, Lily and the kids also thought so. Even Ron said it tasted fine.”

 

“What the—” Alberu looked quite undignified as he chewed while he spoke. “What is this and why does it taste so good?”

 

“It’s Kimbap.  Mn, just some rice rolled up in seaweed with filling.” he said. “I was in the mood for it, so I made some.”

 

“Oh…” Alberu examined the roll in his hands with a hum before smiling in a sun-like way. “Really, I’m honored that my precious dongsaeng personally brought such delicious food to us so suddenly, and right after swordsmanship lessons. Isn’t that right, instructor-nim?”

 

Cale, as Alberu’s sworn brother, also had an amazingly glib tongue. He placed a hand on his chest and put on a smile which any nearby civilian would describe as heroic. “Your highness, the most radiant star of the kingdom, this lowly self doesn’t deserve such praise. I simply could not bear the thought of allowing you to starve just like that in this cold weather after training so diligently, you see. To thank me for such a thing, you truly are the kindest and most thoughtful, the most shining—”

 

Meanwhile, Choi Han was a bit too busy at the moment, eyes sparkling as he chewed through another roll of kimbap. There were many triggers for flashbacks and remembering things, one of which was taste. Choi Han had thought he’d never even try any Korean food ever again when he arrived at the Forest of Darkness. He’d even almost forgotten the taste. 

 

Now, though, it helped him piece back some old memories. His mother’s voice sounded a bit clearer to him when he remembered the times she would send him off to school with a wrapped lunchbox just like this filled with kimbap made from leftover kimchi that they had the night before, or that one time they went out to a picnic and had some with tuna filling. The more he tasted it, the more he began to remember some things he had forgotten.

 

“Choi Han?” he blinked and turned towards the source of the voice. “So? I don’t think it’s half that bad. I used to make it all the time when I was Kim Roksoo. A bit less fancy though.”

 

“It’s— It’s great, Cale-nim!” he quickly replied. “It tastes amazing! You’re a great cook!”

 

He blinked. “Huh?”

 

“Thank you so much for bringing this over,” he said with a grateful smile. “Really, I really…”

 

“Hey, calm down,” Cale said, sounding petrified from his dramatic reaction. “You’re treating it like it’s a 5-star gourmet dish you’ll only be able to afford once. It’s just basic kimbap I made on a whim. We could make more.” he sighed. “It won’t be long until Beacrox figures it out and makes it himself. I’m sure his cooking would taste a lot better.”

 

Alberu frowned. “You shouldn’t bring yourself down so much, you know.” he sighed. “It actually tastes pretty good.”

 

Cale shrugged. “It’s passable,” he glanced over at Choi Han. “I know how to make a few more Korean recipes, you know.”

 

He blinked. ”Really?”

 

“Don’t expect much, it’s just from what I remember as Kim Roksoo.” he shrugged. “Mn, it’d be nice to have kimchi jjigae during cold weather like this, right?”

 

Choi han’s eyes widened. “Kimchi!”

 

“Yes,” Cale nodded. “I can also make regular kimchi, I guess. Ramyeon would be nice this time around too. Mn, ah, and tteokbokki would be great too, huh?”

 

Alberu watched the steadily growing sparkle in Choi Han’s eyes and let out an amused huff. Well, if Korean food was this good, he’d be willing to try more too. He was particularly interested in tteokbokki because of how psyched Choi Han looked at just the mention of it.

 

Looking past that, it was interesting to him that Cale had decided to get up and cook something, a foreign dish even, himself suddenly. Actually, according to Choi Han, he’d been acting more actively but also a bit strangely as of late too. And knowing Cale, there might be some underlying reason for it aside from just the fact that he liked it, and they knew he’d probably never come out and say it himself. 

 

Of course, that isn’t to say that Cale’s new behavior was a bad thing. Not at all. It was actually pretty nice of him to suddenly pop in and bring some food for them like that. Maybe he was overthinking it. However, there was one thing he’d been wondering about for a while now since he first went to Earth 2 to help Cale with the sealed god’s test.

 

“Cale—”

 

“Oh, right, also,” Like a magician, he reached into his coat and pulled out a long scarf. Choi han let out a small gasp. “Here.”

 

Cale tossed the scarf to him and he caught it in his lap. Unfurling the folded thing, he fiddled with the tassel and smoothed over the knitted surface and observed its appearance. “It’s…”

 

“You made another one,” Choi Han remarked.

“Sorry it isn’t anything too elaborate,” he said. “It’s a pretty basic pattern after all, just stripes.”

 

“You…” Alberu observed the scarf with an expression of bafflement. It followed a peculiar color scheme, yellow and a dark brown, but it made it look cozy. “Hey, is knitting your hobby now? Are you a country-side grandma?”

 

Cale looked genuinely confused. “What?”

 

“I heard you made Choi Han a scarf, the kids a scarf and a hat, and you made Miss Lily and young master Basen something too. Is this just your thing now?” Not that he was complaining. To be honest he was kind of tired of hearing Choi Han brag about and show off his scarf while knocking him to the ground every second like it was a game during training. No, he wasn’t jealous, it was just that if he got Choi Han a scarf, shouldn’t he make one for his hyung too?

 

“What? No,” he denied. “I just got bored, and wanted to try my hand at it a little, but then Hans went overboard and bought me a full box of yarn. It’d be a waste if I didn’t do anything with it,”

 

“Uh-huh,” For the others, maybe, but Alberu knew that no matter how much Cale wanted to deny it, he was probably the most doting parent Alberu has personally ever met. He’d guess it started out for the kids and then escalated from there because Cale can’t for the life of him keep things small-scale.

 

“Though, this seems like a specific color palette,” Alberu noted. The others seemed quite intentional with their colors. He had called Raon and the kids a few days ago and they had also shown off their new winter hats and scarves while chatting up a storm about their snow day with Cale earlier in the day. “Did you have anything in mind while picking it?”

 

If anything, he’d expect something like blue and yellow, or just yellow. Cale hummed before snickering to himself. “It looks kind of like caution tape.”

 

He blinked. “Caution what?”

 

“Caution tape,” he could see Choi Han squinting before attempting to suppress a laugh. 

 

“What the hell is a caution tape?”

 

“Mn, it's a thing from Earth. Basically what the police use to keep people away from places. Like blocking off entrances, crime scenes…” 

 

“...Alright,” that did sound somewhat useful. “But why?”

 

He shrugged. “I thought it’d be funny,”

 

“You wanted the crown prince to walk around looking like he’s wearing tape because  it’d be funny?”

 

“Hey, I didn’t say you had to wear it,” 

 

“Yeah? Well I’m going to, and I’ll announce to the entire kingdom that my precious dongsaeng knitted it personally himself for me because he was so worried for my health in this cold weather,” Alberu smiled like the sun. “Oh, truly, how selfless is the Silver Shield Hero, savior of the continent! There is no soul in which I have faith—”

 

“Hahaha!” Choi Han couldn’t help but laugh.

 

Cale had a very disrespectful expression on his face. “Will you stop,” 

 

“Stop preaching about my wonderful dongsaeng? Young master silver shield? The hero of silverlight? Savior of the continent? The one with the most best-selling merchandise in the market?”

 

“What?”

 

“They sell dolls of you, Cale,” 

 

He looked positively horrified. “They sell dolls of me…?”

 

“Oh, no, not just dolls,”

 

“That reminds me, I saw a few kids in the city running around with them, and the wolf children even asked for one when I was heading back from Harris Village.” Choi Han smiled.

 

Cale made the sourest, most petrified expression he’d ever seen, and Alberu wheezed hard. Cale glared at him harder.

 

Alberu picked up another one of the rolls of kimbap and stared at it. This is the food that Kim Roksoo grew up eating, and also probably Choi Han. Then he looked back at Cale. He couldn’t help but wonder if he must’ve missed it for a while, both of them. “Cale,” Alberu glanced to the side to see the kids playing, and also decimating his cookie supply. “Do you plan on telling them?”

 

The redhead looked at him and seemed to figure out what he meant. “Mn…” he trailed off contemplatively. “Right now I’m… not too sure.”

 

“I see,” he nodded. Whether Cale actually decided to tell them or not didn’t really matter to him. Kim Roksoo was a past identity, and Alberu could understand if Cale wanted to really throw that name away and just move past it. However, Alberu was concerned if his dongsaeng might be feeling some sort of guilt weighing on his mind about keeping that fact from his family and allies. Perhaps this was his way of easing things into eventually telling them the truth. He might also be feeling home sick. 

 

Actually, Alberu was half amazed and also quite astonished by the fact that Cale had settled so easily into this world after transmigrating against his will so suddenly. Perhaps he should have expected some level of home sickness, at least.

 

“What do you think?

 

“Hm?”

 

Cale looked at him, gaze intent. “Do you think I should tell them, hyung-nim?”

 

Alberu blinked before giving it some thought. “...I don’t think it’s something I can really decide for you, dongsaeng. But, at least…” he trailed off. “I think you can take your time with it. It’s not something you have to rush.”

 

Cale looked at him before subtly smiling. “Yeah,” he nodded. “That’s right. But, I think I'll have to tell them at some point soon.”

 

“If that’s what you want to do,” Alberu nodded, setting his cup of tea down and staring at his reflection within it. 

Notes:

Alberu certified earth fan (its the food and the guns)

oh yeah for those wondering since this won't be the last time Cale starts craving Korean food, I reference most of these recipes from maangchi. I heard she was a lovely cook and I've wanted to try her recipes for a while so go check her out maybe, shes on yt and has a website with all the recipes on it :)

have a nice day, sorry if there're any spelling or grammar mistakes, I tried my best to proof-read like 20 times a day lol. I'm gonna go take a nap now.

Chapter 4: sparring match?

Summary:

Cale stays over at the Super Rock Villa and starts talking to the ancient powers. Eruhaben pays a visit, the wolf children want him to spar with Choi Han, who seems to secretly also want to. Cale decides he'll only live once.

Notes:

just a warning I can't writing fight scenes for jack and I was that kid who skipped wushu lessons and quit after like a month. anyways! have fun :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Cale sat in his room within the Super Rock villa, rocking chair swinging back and forth as he sipped from his tea. He had gotten really tired lately. Perhaps it was because of his whole soul deterioration thing, and maybe also because it was winter. 

 

The children were outside this time around, playing with the wolf and tiger children in Harris Village, or perhaps exploring around the villa again. Raon may have alsp decided to teleport to his black castle with On and Hong to hang out with Sheritt.

 

Meanwhile, the ancient powers were buzzing around in his head.

 

He’d finally told them what the God of Death said.

 

–You can’t die! 

 

The Super Rock spoke after the cheapskate’s panicked voice. 

 

-Cale, are you sure there’s really no cure for it? Any way to slow it down at all? Are you sure that god isn’t lying?

 

It’s pretty bold of you to just assume a god is lying, you know. He commented. I’ve tried looking for it myself. I don’t think the concept of this ‘sickness’ even exists here, and there’s a few unsolved medical cases for people with terminal illnesses, but they all had different symptoms.

 

-Hey, geezer, isn’t there anything you can do?

 

-I don’t know! I… I can’t seem to do anything about it, sob! I didn’t even realize it!

 

The crybaby was crying at that point and it sounded quite irritating to the ears, despite it all happening in Cale’s head.

 

-I can barely even keep you from being exhausted all the time!

 

-Well, you do feel somewhat weaker than before. It’s hard to tell, but…

 

The glutton sounded like she was frowning.

 

-Agh, Cale, eat another cookie! I’m stressed out by this!

 

-Is it because of that world tree!? Is she the reason our Cale is dying now!?

 

Cale clicked his tongue. Don’t set anything on fire.

 

-So it’s really because of her? Then I’m with cheapskate on this one, for once.

 

Cale had always thought that the thief was somewhat sensible, so long as they weren’t trying to loot anyone, but perhaps if the Super Rock could turn out like that, so could she.

 

-That XXX God of Death! I can see why that priestess wants to cuss him out all the time! That XXX bastard! XXXXX

 

Please stop that, it’s hurting my head.

 

-S-So, then… you’ll really…

 

-Our Cale is… he’s going to die just like that in less than 2 months?

 

-Y-You can’t just give up yet! There has to be— there should be—!

 

-There’s a few texts on medicine that I kept in the library in the villa, there could be something there. Why don’t we try to check those later? Alright, Cale?

 

-It’s fine! You’re going to be fine! You’ve survived through worse, so, really, you could… couldn’t you?”

 

Their voices started to sound quite desperate as they called out one after another.

 

-...Oh, that poor little dragon and those two cats…

 

-Mn, the world might really blow up, huh…

 

-Cale, we…

 

-...

 

It suddenly got quiet.

 

Cale set the tea cup down with a clack atop the saucer and took the opportunity to bring something up.

 

When people with Ancient powers die, he began. They essentially ‘drop’ those powers, right?

 

-...

 

I wanted to know about how exactly that worked, and I wanted to ask something, He continued. Would you mind if…

 

 

At some point in their conversation, three knocks sounded on the door to Cale’s room. With cookies in his mouth, he let them in.

 

“Eruhaben-nim,” he acknowledged with a light hum. 

 

“Well hello there, punk.” the gold dragon said, strutting in with elegance while Cale basically watched with a deadpan, wiping crumbs off his mouth and washing it down with tea. He was basically sparkling like sunlight and it was honestly too early for that today. “I take it you’ve been resting properly these past few days?”

 

His tone sounded more expectant than questioning, but Cale just nodded. “Yes,” he said. “I’ve practically been forced to do nothing but that everywhere I go.”

 

The palace, the estate, the villa, the black castle, Harris Village, the Wheelsman, Ubarr, and Chester territory. Quite literally everywhere he’s gone he was treated like some sort of VIP. Cale couldn’t really understand why they were so dead set on treating him like he was made of actual glass and preventing him from pretty much even bringing up the topic of any work, but it was nice that they kept annoying disturbances off his back.

 

“Ho,” he said, sounding amused, but nodded as if it was something up to standard. “Then keep doing that.”

 

Cale sighed and just leaned back, listening to the sound of the Ancient powers discussing various things in his head. It was tiring in the early days when they began to talk like this, and could still be tiring and annoying even now, but after a while, they ended up being white noise that was somewhat easy to fall asleep to, like the sound of a teacher’s lecture on a slow school day. 

 

“Cale,” Eruhaben spoke again, taking a seat on a chair near his. “Now that the White Star is gone, what do you plan on doing?”

 

He tilted his head at that, stirring his tea with a tiny spoon before taking another sip. “Slacker life, obviously.” he replied. “It’s what I’ve wanted from the start.”

 

“Ho,” he crossed his arms with a somewhat puzzled expression. “I suppose you have mentioned that a few times, but I… you really are serious about it.”

 

Cale frowned. “Of course I am.” It was just that that white thing kept getting in the way of it by being an annoying, infuriating bastard.

 

“It’s just that… well, the things you’ve been doing up until now…” Eruhaben’s expression twisted in a sort of confused yet pitying way, before he shook his head and sighed. “Well, what would this ‘slacker life’ entail, anyway?”

 

He gave it some thought before replying. “Mn… well for one, I’d probably just stay in the Super Rock villa, right here.” There would be no reason to move around anywhere else. It had everything— it was still within the Henituse territory, so if anything were to happen he could just head over even without teleportation magic. He also had a lot of protection and next to nobody outside of his party knew where to find the villa. It was near Harris Village so if he needed to get anything he could also pick them up from there— the tigers had begun setting up markets too, and he heard a tavern was also being built. Though if the kids wanted to travel, he wouldn’t have minded a few trips spaced out throughout the year.

 

“But I also have the villa in the jungle, and there’s also the black castle if Raon wanted to visit Sheritt-nim, and of course various other places I’ve prepared,” Cale said, recalling all of the preparations and saving up he did before the war started. He thought it was a bit tiring back then, but now he somewhat regretted thinking that way when he ended up doing even more tiring things in the future. “I’d stay in all the time and just eat, sleep, and slack off,”

 

“I… see.” Eruhaben replied, sipping his tea. Cale was too busy imagining his would-be slacker life to really hear it. 

 

“Ah, but I promised Basen I’d take care of some external affairs for the duchy here and there, so we’d probably travel every once in a while. I think that’s fine— On, Hong, and Raon would probably like it,” They were very active children, after all. 

 

He remembered the way Hong and Raon would paw at his face and blankets while trying to persuade him to wake up in the noon, and On opening up the curtains until the sunlight streamed in and hit his face. Afterwards they’d drag him off to eat somewhere and then on a walk around the garden and sometimes even the city. He’d always wondered where children get so much of their energy from, since he was more of a timid kind of kid when he was younger. But it was better to be an open and curious kid than one who always had their head down.

 

Cale hummed as he recalled those memories. “I also…” he trailed off. “...wanted to start a small farm.”

 

Eruhaben almost choked on his tea. “A— A farm?”

 

“Yes.”

 

“Didn’t you say you wanted to live a slacker life?”

 

“That’s right.” he nodded. “It’s only going to be a small-scale farm, so it won’t be that much trouble.”

 

Well, that had been the plan, anyway. Cale doubted two months would even be enough time to plant nor harvest anything, and it was smack-dab in the middle of winter too.

 

Eruhaben stared at him as if he was ridiculous, and also like he didn’t trust his statement about it being small-scale at all. 

 

“I’ve researched the easiest crops to grow.”

 

“Mn, alright, but… should I- may I ask why? You don’t exactly strike me as the type to want to willingly do something as strenuous as farming. Especially not with that build.”

 

Cale was slightly offended by Eruhaben’s statement, but just sighed and set his tea back down, leaning back on his rocking chair. “It’s for…” he paused for a second, a record playing in his mind as if automatically, and he heard Choi Jung Soo and Lee Soo Hyuk’s voices for a moment.

 

“It’s for a… promise, of sorts.”

 

“Ho? What kind?”

 

Normally, maybe Cale would have decided to avoid answering such questions, or change the topic to something else. Perhaps it would be because it would just make things complicated, or be too much trouble to explain. But now, he couldn’t really find it in himself to really care about such things.

 

Maybe it was because he was dying soon.

 

It could be, because of that, he’d been more honest and open about these things. Maybe it was because he wanted to talk as much as he could with them? 

 

Maybe, it could be that even when he’s thrown away the name ‘Kim Roksoo’, and fully accepted the name ‘Cale Henituse’ as who he was, he still wanted his family to know just a little bit about who ‘Kim Roskoo’ was.

 

There’d be no other chance to tell them. 

 

“Some friends asked me to start a farm when I retired,” he said. “They said that that way, I wouldn’t be out running around getting into trouble, or something like that.”

 

Eruhaben’s eyes widened at that before they curled in an amused fashion. “Is that so? Your friends sound very smart, I must say.” he said with a chuckle. “You’d ought to introduce me to these friends of yours, someday. I don’t think I’ve heard of them, unless maybe it’s someone I already know?”

 

“No,” Cale answered honestly. “They’re…” his lips pressed together in contemplation. “They aren’t… from around here, I guess.”

 

“Ho? Are they from the Eastern continent then? Somewhere else?”

 

“Somewhere,” he shrugged vaguely. Cale still wasn’t so sure about whether or not he really wanted them to know about him being a transmigrator. He could very well literally choose to take that secret with him to the grave, but…

 

“I’ll tell you more about them someday.”

 

Maybe he really does want to be a bit more honest with them after all.

 

“Ho, alright then,” Eruhaben looked suspicious of him but didn’t pry. 

 

Seconds ticked by, and Cale didn’t remember when his head quieted down, but the Super Rock broke the silence.

 

-Cale, are you going to tell him? Actually, will you tell anyone about this at all?

 

“...” Even if he decided to keep it a secret, in the end, they would all find out about it anyway after the 2 months were over. 

 

“It feels peaceful now, doesn’t it?” Eruhaben spoke. “So very peaceful.”

 

Golden mana rose and lit a fire in the fireplace, bright red flames dancing and crackling. Cale even felt a blanket rise from his bed before draping on his shoulders.

 

“Do you think it would last even until a thousand years, Eruhaben-nim?” 

 

The golden dragon raised a brow at Cale’s sudden, strange question before humming. “I wouldn’t count on it,” he said. “Humans— even beastfolk have their way of destroying peace after some time, you know. Though I feel you wouldn’t have to worry about it for another few decades at least.” 

 

“Mn…” Cale hummed. “Do you know the saying that history tends to repeat itself?”

 

“Hm, no.” he replied. “Though I can understand it. I’ve seen humans repeat and forget things over the course of decades. I suppose that would also apply to their mistakes.”

 

“That’s right,” he nodded. “Even with the Ancient White Star, and that white wannabe,” Cale said. “It’s an interesting trend, you know. Things tend to experience  some sort of ‘revival’ after they wear out. There’s data and records you can look at from over the years. You can even begin to predict what might happen in the future as long as you have data.” 

 

“Hm, data, you say,” he said with a somewhat cautious tone. “That’s an interesting perspective.”

 

“Eruhaben-nim,” he began, hesitating before he spoke. “I won’t live a thousand years.” maybe not even one.

 

The ancient dragon seemed taken aback by the sudden statement before seeming calm again as he replied. “...yes.”

 

“I’ll live about 90 years at most as a human. I also have the vitality of the heart, so it's possible I could even live until I’m 150— maybe a little bit more.” Cale said. That was how long the old crybaby had lived. “On, Hong, and especially Raon will live longer than that.”

 

“...”

 

“You drank a lot from the jar, right?” Cale said, his tone sounding somewhat satisfied. “You’ll live for another thousand years, Mila-nim said.”

 

“...ha.”

 

“I’m sure it was always your plan, maybe. But please watch over Raon, On, and Hong. I know they’re good and clever kids, so they won’t go out and cause too much trouble.” he took a sip from his tea and stared out the closed window. “It might be a big favor, but please protect and guide them.” He didn’t want Raon to go and destroy the world, after all. An amused smile tugged at his lips. “After all, you’re the greatest and mightiest of them, aren’t you?”

 

“It seems so,” he sighed, casting him a worried glance. “...of course I'll keep an eye on those little kids, but what brought this about?”

 

“mn..” Cale’s gaze drew to the side.

 

“Cale.” His tone sounded less light and more serious. “Did something happen?”

 

He flinched slightly. Why are the two scary old men in his life so sharp?

 

“Nothing happened,” he lied with a sigh. “I just thought I'd ought to start thinking about certain things and to ask you about it, I guess.”

 

“...I suppose so,” he accepted with reluctance. “You'd do better not to worry about things like that too much for now. Just go on and enjoy this ‘slacker life’ you’ve talked about so much, you unlucky punk.”

 

“Will do.”

 

 

Groups of the tiger people shoveled the streets of Harris Village, snow crunching beneath their feet. Some children ran around carrying snowballs and throwing them at each other while some warriors were off running laps barefoot in the snow for some reason. It must’ve just been some form of training he didn’t get.

 

Cale sat on the bench with Raon, who was eating some freshly baked apple pie that a nice lady had given him, and was attempting to shove a piece into Cale’s mouth. After messy trial and error, it was finally in and Cale was chewing it. It tasted quite sweet, and it was nice to have them warm and crisp rather than soggy for once.

 

“Oh no!” Raon frowned, pointing to his white scarf. “It's got some of the apple jam on it…”

 

“That’s fine,” Cale replied, patting off crumbs and wiping the corner of his scaly mouth. “We can always wash it. Be as messy as you want.”

 

“I’ll ask Goldie Gramps to teach me a cleaning spell instead!” He exclaimed. “Your clothes get dirty a lot too, human! Let's just magic it away!”

 

He hummed with a note of interest. “You can do that?”

 

“Of course I can!” He puffed his chest out. “I am a great and mighty dragon, after all.”

 

Cale nodded affirmatively, dusting snow off the small dragon’s hat. Dragons really were the best.

 

He saw Raon’s big blue eyes sparkle as he watched snowflakes fall from the sky and descend towards the ground and spoke as he dusted frost off his hair.

 

“You know,” Cale said. “If you stick your tongue out, snowflakes will land on it and it'll melt.”

 

“Ooh, really?”

 

“Yeah. It feels cold. You can try it if you want.” 

 

“Okay!” 

 

Raon stuck his forked lizard-like tongue out with an ‘ahhhh’ and let a snowflake or two land. They disintegrated and melted into water after a few seconds. “It's cold!”

 

He nodded. “Yes.”

 

“Ooh, the kind Rosalyn taught me that snowflakes form from water, right?”

 

“That's right. You're very smart.”

 

He beamed. “Of course I am, weak human!” he proclaimed. “The snowflake tastes very cold and refreshing, so I want more,”

 

“You don't have to spend your time sticking your tongue out like that all the time.” Cale sighed. When Kim Roksoo was a child living with his uncle, there were many instances where would be outside the apartment wandering around starving and thirsty during winter days. He used to stick his tongue out and catch snowflakes all day as a way to refresh himself when he didn’t have water. He even ate clumps of snow once when he was really thirsty and tired and almost froze over.

 

“Let's just have snow cones.”

 

He tilted his head. “Snow cones?”

 

Cale nodded with a hum. “It's like ice cream, but a big scoop of snow with some sweet syrup on top.”

 

“With syrup!?”

 

“Yes.”

 

“Oh! Is this one of the things from your hometown, human?”

 

“Yes, it is.”

 

“I want to try some!” 

 

“Sure you can,” he nodded. “I'll ask Beacrox when we get back.”

 

Meanwhile, the wolf children were training again as always in the field just across from the bench where Cale was sitting. Aigoooo, really, these children. He really wished they'd all take time to play more. It was a snow day, they could be at home sleeping in by a warm fireplace if they wanted to.

 

Though, as Cale hummed while watching the children laugh and enthusiastically train as they began sparring with each other, at least they were having fun.

 

In the distance, sticking out like a sore thumb amongst all the white snow, was Choi Han in full black. He brushed his hair back and panted slightly as he gripped his sword in his right hand, looking quite serious, before turning to the side and noticing Cale and Raon. His previous focus switched to an innocent-looking smile as he waved to them. Scary bastard.

 

The only thing that really stuck out from his full black attire was the red scarf Cale made for him. The intention was so that he'd have a little more color in his wardrobe but it just looked like blood from afar. Cale shuddered, but Raon took that as a sign of him being cold and cast more temperature regulation spells on his clothes while Choi Han seemed to smile wider as he adjusted his scarf and motioned to it as if he was showing off. Cale didn't really get it but just gave him an awkward thumbs up.

 

Cale leisurely watched Choi Han from where he sat as the wolf children surrounded him in a lively crowd and asked him all sorts of questions. Choi Han patiently replied to each one, before they eventually asked to spar with him. 

 

“Oh, it looks like they're going to practice together!” Raon pointed out. 

 

“It seems like it.” Choi Han had switched to a wooden sword. 

 

Choi Han wasn’t just Alberu’s instructor because of his sword arts skills or because they arranged it that way so he would be out of the nobles’ reach, but also because he could be quite the good teacher on his own. As the wolf children lunged at him with their various attacks, Choi Han pointed his fingers and calmly spoke like he was giving them pointers and advice while he almost effortlessly dodged each one. Cale quietly shuddered again. Scary bastard.

 

“Hey human, let’s sit closer! I wanna see!” Raon seemed to be quite invested in the whole thing so Cale obliged him and they moved to the bench closer to the training grounds. 

 

“Cale-nim, Raon-nim!” Choi Han greeted with a bright smile. 

 

Cale waved his hands as if to tell him to just dismiss him and Raon. “Mn, don’t worry about us and just go and keep practicing. We’re just watching.”

 

“No, that’s totally fine!” 

 

“Oh! Young master-nim, look at this cool move I can do with my sword!” one of the wolf kids beamed.

 

“Young master-nim, young master-nim look here! I’ve got a shield like yours too!” Cale hummed. Well, he did hear there was a tiger who was a good blacksmith here.

 

“Young master-nim, can you show us your powers? Please?”

 

“Young master-nim!”

 

“We want to see the shield!”

 

“Mn…” Cale sighed. Children sure have lots of energy.

 

-You could show off a bit of your powers, you know

 

-Won’t that strain him though?

 

-Well, not as bad as you'd expect! He might get a bit more tired than usual, but aside from his… soul deterioration, he could mostly use us like usual, just, well, it consumes more energy. 

 

-Ooh, show him some thunderbolts then, Cale! Burn away some of that snow and show ‘em a sea of fire!

 

-Maybe let’s not set anything on fire

 

“Young master-nim, you should try sparring!”

 

“Yeah, with sir Choi Han-nim!”

 

“You’re both very strong!”

 

Cale shuddered again for the umpteenth time that day. Him? Fight Choi Han? Sounds like a death wish.

 

-Ooh, that swordmaster punk? Y’know, you’re real strong! I’m sure you’ll do more than fine in a small friendly match, y’know?

 

-Don’t strain yourself, Cale.

 

-If you’re feeling up to it, I think you can, as long as you don’t overdo it. Again, don’t overdo it, keep that part in mind. 

 

Meanwhile, Choi Han’s eyes widened slightly at the idea like it was surprising. Of course, Cale supposed, beating up a frail skinny man might just seem like bullying to him. Although, Cale should mention, he could have sworn he’d seen some glimmer of interest in his eyes. He sighed. 

 

“Well,” he shrugged. “If Choi Han wants to, I’ll consider it, I guess,”

 

“Really?” Choi Han seemed somewhat surprised by his response. “Are you sure, Cale-nim? You don't have to.”

 

Why would I force myself to do something I don’t want? Cale thought as he tilted his head at him before shrugging. Warming up in the winter might be a bit good for his body, and if he was tired he could just stop and Raon could teleport him straight to the villa at any time. 

 

“Why not, I guess,” he replied, standing up, and stretching just a little bit. It was an interesting thing he could try at least once. “I’ll be using my ancient powers if that’s fine.”

 

“Oh, of course,” Choi Han nodded, staring at Cale’s thin build. A sword would not do him much good anyway.

 

His boots crunched in the snow below his feet as he stood across from Choi Han. The swordmaster readed his stance slightly while Cale listened to the buzzing of the ancient powers, their different words causing a ruckus in his head. The Cheapskate and Crazy Kid were screaming excitedly like they were at a wrestling match, while the Super Rock and Crybaby reminded him not to push himself too hard, again.

 

-Okay, so you’re not going to use every one of us, right? 

 

-Let’s limit the use a bit to just 3 powers, aside from crybaby.

 

-I think you should use me— you won’t have much luck outspeeding that punk on your own so a little wind in your step would be useful, right?

 

-And don’t forget me! These kids want to see a silver shield, right? Let’s show them something cool.

 

-But you need a bit of offensive power, so how about a spear from water? I’m the strongest, right?

 

-Hey, I thought Cale was going to be using my thunderbolt today! What else would be cooler than a fiery big red thunderbolt in all this snow!? 

 

-What? Obviously he needs something more flexible and versatile, like water, you XX! You’re way too out of control, anyway! Cale, I’ll show you a few new tricks with my amazing sky eating wear, yeah? 

 

-No, I’ll teach him how to blow those kids away with my fire!

 

-XX! Cale is more of a water-person anyway!

 

-Hey! Clearly, he’s more—

 

-Stop bickering so much, you’re hurting his head.

 

-Cale, just please don’t go over your limits!

 

“Cale-nim?”

 

“Mn…” Cale groaned as he listened to the commotion in his head while Choi Han watched him with slight concern. Eventually he just sighed and ignored the voices, turning to face Choi Han. “So, how is this supposed to go?”

 

“Ah, well, hm, I suppose we should first come to an agreement regarding the intensity,” Choi Han noted. “I won’t use my aura since I take it this is your first sparring match?”

 

“Hm…” Cale hummed before shrugging. “I guess so.” He's never really practiced with the ancient powers, in all honesty, applying them only during battles. On the other hand, he did have some experience bodybuilding and some sparring as Kim Roksoo, thanks to Lee Soo Hyuk’s hellish training sessions during his time with him, as well as some continued training over the years once he took on the position of Team Leader after Lee Soo Hyuk and the rest of the team died.

 

“Alright— oh, one more thing!” Choi Han seemed serious. “If you feel like you’re overdoing it, you must say so immediately and we’ll end the match,”

 

“That’s right!” Raon piped in, enthused. “You cannot cough up blood this time, human. If you faint again, I’ll lock you up forever!”

 

Lock me up forever? Cale considered it. Well, it didn’t sound too bad if he was forced to stay in all day. Unfortunately, there were too many things he needed to do and think about to take Raon up on his offer. 

 

“You have to promise!”

 

“Swear it, Cale-nim,” 

 

“...Alright, I guess?”

 

Choi Han smiled. “Okay then. Let’s start.”

 

Wind gathered beneath Cale’s feet, swift as it flowed. Choi Han took a stance, which was a sign that he was going to be moving first. Cale’s reddish-brown eyes glinted as he whispered under his breath. “...three counts— now.”

 

Choi Han charged forward and Cale’s feet kicked the ground and away, dodging. This was the first time they’ve ever sparred against each other, so Choi Han seemed slightly surprised by Cale’s quick move but didn’t hesitate, feet turning and dashing to his new position.

 

“...four— now.” he dodged again.

 

“...three.”

 

“...six.” Cale’s eyes narrowed attentively as he mumbled. It seemed like Choi Han was starting to get used to his pace. His eyes flashed with focus and Cale almost shuddered as he kicked off the ground again. Scary bastard.

 

Choi Han finally swung at Cale’s side and he immediately summoned a silver shield to block it and countered with a stone spear, which he blocked with another quick swing of his sword. The shield was quickly pulled back and resummoned to block Choi Han’s next swing early while simultaneously pushing him back to give some distance.

 

-Woah.

 

-You sure are good at this!

 

-Watch out, he’s moving again.

 

Tell me when he’s attacking if I can’t see him. It wasn’t cheating since he was technically using his ancient powers.

 

Choi Han was there in a blink, about to strike, and Cale set up his shield early. It was enough time for him to notice and change course, aiming below the shield. Cale suppressed a smirk, as he had planned for him to react that way and blocked it with a quick wall of stone to slow momentum and used that shield he had set up prior to hit him. It landed as he had predicted.

 

-Oh yeah, we got ‘em!

 

Choi Han was panting as he stood before Cale, and he shuddered when he saw the smile on his face.

 

-Look at this punk, having fun.

 

-Careful, Cale, looks like he’s going to pull something.

 

Cale clicked his tongue as he watched a dark glittering aura rise from the tip of Choi Han’s wooden sword. It was, fortunately, light, almost like aura smoke, so Choi han was still holding back. He’d done a good job ignoring the children's loud cheering up until this point, but it was hard to miss now.

 

“Go human!” Raon cheered.

 

“Young master Cale!”

 

“You’ve got this, mister Choi Han!”

 

“I hope you don’t mind, Cale-nim.”

 

“Bastard.” If he really wanted to ask him, he’d have done it before he kicked off the ground and tried to pounce on him. Cale placed a shield above him, which Choi Han struck with his aura before jumping off and landing behind him. 

 

He timed each of Choi Han’s strikes and dodged each one, being pushed back. Cale waited, before he spotted a good enough opening and tripped Choi Han using the shield, knocking him off balance. 

 

Thinking about it now, Cale panted as he summoned the small water spears. The shield has a lot of uses. 

 

The glutton chimed in at that moment, sounding quite prideful.

 

-Heh. Of course, the shield is very useful isn't it?

 

Setting that aside, Cale also realized that he had a pretty good terrain to use the Sky-Eating Water. Droplets of water rose from the ground and heaps of snow and formed cold, smaller spears of water, slightly frozen at the surface. As Choi Han quickly recovered and rose to his feet, Cale saw the aura intensify slightly in all its dazzling gleaming dark glory as he got back into a perfect stance.

 

-Ha! Let’s get that XX punk, Cale!

 

By now, they seemed to be getting used to each other’s pace, and Cale was truthfully getting pretty worn out. The chronic pains had been pretty manageable the past day, but they were starting to act up a bit. It felt like invisible cracks all over his body were being prodded occasionally and unpredictably, and was quite inconvenient.

 

He was a little distracted and reacted later when Choi Han moved. Cale moved back with the help of the Sound of the Wind, and had a shield quickly summoned to block the blow before quickly dispersing it. Choi Han made his next move and Cale noticed it in time to start releasing spears as he dashed around to dodge his strikes. 

 

It managed to hit him once or twice, while Cale was also pushed back a few times by Choi Han’s strong aura-powered strikes. He barely seemed tired at all— what kind of stamina monster was this teenage punk?

 

He changed the form of the small spears of water from earlier and gathered them into one singular spear that he held in his hand. It felt light as a feather, but strong. Cale used it to block Choi Han’s swings like a baton and push him back.

 

-Cale, slash ‘em! Go big in a diagonal angle, he’s got an opening in about… now!

 

Slash!

 

That managed to send Choi Han far enough back that Cale had time to catch his breath and re-evaluate his next course of action, his mind flipping past hundreds of pages of Birth of a Hero and identifying Choi han’s next possible move. He regained his footing and pooled the wind at his feet.

 

Cale exhaled a breath and focused his gaze. What other counters can he try? He was already starting to burn up, and though the crybaby said nothing, he could feel as if he was warning him not to overdo it in his gut.

 

Well… He trailed off. I haven’t tried that yet, I guess.

 

-Hm? Oh, you want to use my power again?

 

Just on my hands, Cale replied to the Super Rock. 

 

His reddish brown eyes glinted with a focused shine as he was getting pushed back by Choi Han’s unending swings, waiting and anticipating as Choi Han’s own gaze bore into him with every strike to his shield. Cale could have sworn he spotted a smile from him too, that crazy protagonist bastard.

 

The water spear dispersed in a second like melted snow. “2, 4… 3…” Cale’s fist wound back before landing a punch on Choi Han straight to his jaw.

 

The swordsman staggered back and stopped, before lifting his hand to touch his jaw. There wasn’t even a bruise there, or anything like that, but Choi Han seemed too stunned by what just happened to realize that immediately and just kept touching his jaw as if not believing it. Thinking about it now, Cale had been mostly relying on his ancient powers compared to physical attacks, setting aside the (very satisfying) slap he delivered to that White Thing. 

 

“Wha— Cale-nim…?”

 

“Why do you look so surprised, you punk?” Cale sighed. It was, unfortunately, not that strong due to his admittedly scrawny build, but the Super Rock’s power helped harden his fist and made it less painful and hit a bit harder. It was crazy though, he was pretty sure it hurt his hand more than it hurt Choi Han, if it did at all. How strong is this guy?

 

Raon gasped. “That was a good punch, weak human! It was not even as strong as the tip of my fingernail, but it was good!” Raon yelled from the sidelines, probably trying to be supportive in his own dragonly way and Cale just sighed as he examined his fist. 

 

“Ah– is your fist okay?”

 

“Worry about yourself,” Wasn’t he the one who punched him?

 

“Oh, uh… yes. I’m fine. It doesn’t sting anymore.” he reassured, nonchalant. “But Cale-nim, how did you…?”

 

“Aigoo, I was the team leader, remember?” he replied, somewhat vaguely. 

 

But it should make enough sense— Kim Roksoo didn’t have any abilities that could be really used specifically for combat or fighting unlike Choi Jungsoo and Lee Soohyuk. Though of course, that didn’t stop Lee Soohyuk from dragging him into his hellish training sessions, where he built a bit of muscle and learned some basic self defense. After he became the new Team Leader, even though by this point they had more access to more destructive weapons that could compensate for anyone’s lack of a combat ability, he focused more into body building and trained his physical combat skills. After all, you couldn’t fight monsters as a team leader without knowing how to throw a strong punch. That, combined with Instant, made for good saves when his team was in trouble with a monster and lacking weaponry.

 

Though I’m totally weaker now, I still at least remember how to do it, he noted.

 

“Ugh, why don’t we stop and just call it a draw, or something,” Cale sighed, breathlessly flopping down on one of the benches at the training grounds next to Raon. The young dragon immediately summoned water from his magical pocket dimension and poured it through his lips while chiding him about being a weak human and everything. Choi Han stood next to Cale and was also given a water bottle, and the wolf children handed them both towels while loudly gushing about the entire duel and how awesome both of their powers were. Cale was too tired to stop them and just shut his eyes.

Notes:

The sparring match was just kind of my excuse to write Cale fighting all smart with record. And also because I read that one fic where Cale and Choi Han were sparring partners and thought it was just lovely. Can he beat Choi han in a full-on fight? I'm not well-versed enough in the power tiers in tcf to answer.

Anyways, thanks for reading! Holy God of Death, I mean, we're at almost 1,000 hits already? That's crazy! Unfortunately my holiday is about to end and updates will probably slow down a few degrees TwT

 

for those wondering if cale will really die, what is your opinion on the ship of theseus

Chapter 5: happy endings.

Summary:

Rosalyn and Cale talk about novels and magic. No one in the Rock Villa who isn't Korean can handle spice.

Notes:

Warning: A remarkable overuse of the word spice

Moderate crack energy this chapter because I love the whole fam hanging out and being chaotic. I have an absolutely terrible spice tolerance despite being Asian and it might show here.

Sorry for any typos or spelling mistakes I write edit and upload most of these chapters like half-asleep and depressed.

(also if anyone can remind how Bud addresses Cale, like does he use -nim or call him young master or just Cale idk man I don't remember the novel is long and part 2 is almost at the 400th chapter mark like haha what)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

The young master enjoyed reading.

 

It was a fact that many people in Cale’s party partly knew of. Though they knew this, it seemed that they may have underestimated how deep his fondness for reading went. 

 

The Rock Villa had a library near the lab where Rosalyn and Eruhaben often worked. It was quite the sizable room, with a large catalogue of books, cozy chairs to lounge in, tables with ink and quills and parchment at the ready, lamps that cast a soft glow during the night, and windows that let sunlight filter in.

 

Though, in Rosalyn’s opinion, the most interesting thing about this library was the large collection of older books, even ones dating back to ancient times. She’s been there many times herself, finding interest in the large array of old magic scrolls, ancient spellbooks, and records from old mages. Sometimes they’d help her look through a different point of view and she’d end up solving the problem she’d had with her spells and potions. 

 

It seemed like young master Cale had a similar interest in these books.

 

Quietly, Rosalyn pushed the door to the library open with a small creak, and smiled when she found a certain someone lounging on the loveseat with a stack of books sitting on the coffee table and a cup of tea or two in front of him.

 

“Good afternoon, young master-nim.”

 

“Oh— Miss Rosalyn,” he looked up to acknowledge her, before his gaze went back to flip the pages of his book. Rosalyn studied the covers and the title on the spine of the books Cale was supposedly reading. 

 

“Are you reading fantasy novels, young master-nim?”

 

“Mm, some of them are,” he replied. “My mother sent some from the library in the estate, and some of these are also from the Flynn Merchant guild.”

 

“And the rest?”

 

“Just this and that, also some old legends and records that were from this library that happen to date back to ancient times. They had a lot of stories back then. I’m familiar with only a few of them, so it’s interesting.” 

 

“I see,” she nodded, coming in and running her finger past the different spines of books maintained with magic on the shelves, and picking out a few on magical theory and practice. “Are you interested in ancient times, young master-nim?”

 

“Somewhat, I guess. I just think the old stories can be a little interesting to hear about.” he then grumbled. “...And I guess I’ve also got bothersome voices to tell me all kinds of unnecessary details while reading.”

 

“Pardon?”

 

“Nevermind,” he sighed. “Have you come here to get books, Miss Rosalyn?”

 

“Mm, ah, yes.” she said, motioning to the two thick books in her hands. “The evolution of magic is a very interesting subject matter, and I think that learning different perspectives could help me better understand it.” Rosalyn explained. “For example, they used to have old maps to help visualize the flow of mana, and magic used to be a more intuitively manifested force rather than a more objective, logical one.”

 

“Mn, really?” he remarked, before going quiet for a moment as if he was contemplating something. “What kind of magic do you like?”

 

Rosalyn blinked at the question, before smiling. “I like to handle mana,”

 

Cale tilted his head slightly. “Isn’t that what all mages do?”

 

“That’s right, but I suppose I just like the feeling of handling mana the best.” she replied. “Young master-nim, when you rip a teleportation scroll, or use any kind of magic or have Raon-nim cast a spell on you, do you feel a sort of sensation about the air, or even through you?”

 

“Hm…” he hummed. “Well, sometimes there’s this tingling feeling. It was strange at first, but I’ve gotten used to it.”

 

“Right, like that. When I cast spells or handle mana, a feeling like that courses through me. That’s mana.” she said. “It can feel different depending on different factors, like the strength, atmosphere, sometimes I can get a sense of its temperature.” she explained, while Cale simply listened with the side of his head resting on his hand atop the arms of the chair. She smiled. “I quite like that feeling.”

 

Cale looked at her for a moment before nodding. “I see.”

 

She grinned. “Do you know what feeling of mana in particular is my favorite, young master-nim?”

 

“Which one?”

 

“The condensed feel of mana from the highest-grade magic stones that you often lend me in bulk, young master-nim.” Rosalyn said, mana pooling at her fingertips before rising in a condensed, red flame of energy, burning brightly. Cale’s eyes widened slightly as he watched.

 

“When I handle all that mana, coursing through me like a rushing river of endless power, I think there’s no better feeling. It reminds me sometimes of when I first handled mana when I was small, and how powerful it felt, and when I realized I really wanted to be a mage.” she explained. “After all, there’s no better feeling than trying to imagine the unfathomable destruction you could cause, right?”

 

Rosalyn saw Cale shiver where he sat and laughed. 

 

“So then, I guess it’s safe to conclude that you like magic, Miss Rosalyn?”

 

“Of course,” she nodded with a smile that was like the sun. “I love magic.”

 

Cale looked over at the stack of books in her hands, and the ones on the shelves. “Then I wish you luck on your research, Miss Rosalyn.”

 

She smiled. “Thank you, young master-nim.” she said, before similarly looking over at Cale’s own stack of books. “..What do you find interesting about fantasy novels then, young master-nim?”

 

Cale looked up, eyes widening slightly at her question, before humming. “Hm… I don’t know, actually,” he shrugged. “They’re just amusing to pass the time with.” he closed the book on his lap and examined the cover, finger resting beneath the title. His gaze lifted and Rosalyn nodded with a smile, urging him to continue. 

 

“Mn, they’re all so cliche sometimes, though.” He sighed. “The main character could be ridiculously powerful, and they could also have some sad, tragic backstory that would come up as their motivation. The villains could be really annoying and infuriating and kind of a pain, and the main character would either be too good or too temperamental. Sometimes if there’s romance, it would feel especially cheesy, there’s also some dramatic monologuing that takes too long during fights, and the author would sometimes mention details off-handedly that don’t actually affect any part of the story or even come up in the character’s path, and…” 

 

Rosalyn sat down as she listened. Maybe this was supposed to be a rant on the young master’s critiques of fantasy books, and it could even seem as if he didn’t like them at all. But there were still stacks of books left in the library everyday, empty cups of tea, and sometimes the quiet sound of page turning when you’d pass by the door, if you listened closely.

 

“Are you fond of cliches, young master-nim?”

 

Cale sighed. “They would get repetitive, and predictable over time.” he said. “And the story would always either end in tragedy, with the hero all alone to walk the path of the cruel world by himself, or just a cliche happy ending.”

 

“Which one do you like more?” Rosalyn asked.

 

Cale crossed his arms and leaned back, before closing his eyes. Then he opened them. “...I’m not sure.” His voice sounded honest. “I’m a bit… I’m used to main characters with tragic backstories, and I wonder sometimes if it’ll end the same way for them.” he said before sighing with a shrug. “But I guess it’s just natural that you would want a story to end with the characters happy, right? So I guess I would prefer that.”

 

“I see.” Rosalyn smiled. Even if it were fictional characters, the young master would wish them nothing but happiness.

 

“Miss Rosalyn,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“...” he paused. “What do you think of stories where the main character would die at the end?”

 

She blinked, taken aback by the sudden question, but gave it some thought. Hearing Cale’s opinions and perspectives have been great enough, and she won’t miss the chance to have a discussion with him on a topic he’s particularly interested in. “It isn’t typically normal for the main characters to die at the end of the story, at least in most of the books I’ve read myself,” she admitted. “Though I suppose a story like that would be what’s called a tragedy. They were quite common in ancient myths. I’m sure there’s more than a few here in the library too.”

 

Cale nodded, glancing to the side at a few particular titles. “That’s right.”

 

“But, well, personally…” she trailed off. “It would depend on the type of death. I think I would be satisfied by a story that would end with the main character dying of old age after a long satisfying life after their adventures.”

 

“...I see.” he nodded. “Mn, well, the type of death I had in mind was the sudden kind.” he said. “While they were still on their adventure, or right afterwards when everything was over, or when something happened, and they’d decide—”

 

“Like a story with a sacrifice?” Rosalyn frowned. “I don’t like sacrifices at all, young master-nim.” She sounded quite firm when she spoke, which caught Cale off guard a bit. “Isn’t it better when the main character would work everything out with their allies and face things together, rather than going ahead and sacrificing themselves for them?”

 

Cale’s gaze moved away as he hummed a little awkwardly. “I… see.”

 

She sighed, but thought about it more. “I think tragedies are interesting.” she said. “They’re essentially cautionary tales meant to teach a lesson with the hero’s demise or unfavorable ending, right?” she said. “I suppose that’s just what makes them the genre they are but… I’m like you, young master-nim,” she smiled. “I like happily ever afters. With all of the characters, together.”

 

“...Is that so?” he remarked. “I do too.”

 

 

Choi Han sat on a stool in the villa’s kitchen, sword laid against the counter at his feet. His elbow rested against the counter as he watched Cale stir a pot on the stove, steam wafting with a familiar aroma around the room. 

 

Beacrox allowed him in the kitchen, on the condition that he didn’t move from his spot or touch anything, and also washed his hands and changed into cleaner clothes since he had just come back from a training session. Choi Han, not wanting to miss it for the world, obliged.

 

“Raon, could you give me—”

 

“Here you go, human!” a bowl floated over from the side with magic, and landed perfectly in Cale’s hands.

 

He gave a satisfied hum. “Thanks.”

 

“Here!” Meanwhile, Hong was wiping some newly-rinsed plates from the sink with a sense of great enthusiasm, while On was with Beacrox chopping up some ingredients in her polymorphed-form. Cale would look over occasionally to watch them and then go back to what he was doing, and even though the kids were doing quite well, Choi Han thought it was very endearing of him to secretly fret about them anyway. 

 

A blue vase sat at the window of the kitchen, with a colorful yet messy bunch of wildflowers held within. Choi Han had asked about it earlier, and Cale simply said it was something the wolf children gave him some time ago with a nonchalant expression, and said he would have preferred fresh produce like fruits or vegetables compared to flowers. 

 

Cale lifted the ladle and brought it to his lips, taking a small sip. He made a peculiar expression, before looking back. “Hey, Choi Han?”

 

He replied immediately. “Yes, Cale-nim?”

 

Cale headed over and held out a ladle with some broth that held a thick curry-like consistency in it. “Try it. Is this spicy enough?”

 

“We’re baaack~” the door swung open and a familiar face entered, striding in and sitting on a stool next to Choi Han. “Woah— what’s this amazing smell?”

 

Beacrox looked over and discerned him closely, before glaring daggers at his clothes. If Choi Han could guess, it was probably the few specks of dirt that must have gotten on him while he was out training with Hannah earlier. Hannah herself picked up on Beacrox’s death glare and rushed out to quickly wash her hands or do something about her hygiene that may satisfy the chef and save her from his wrath, while Bud was none the wiser.

 

Glenn was at least nice, or rather sensible enough to elbow him and give his finger a twirl, erasing the stains and specks on his clothes with magic. Bud complained, but Beacrox just turned away in a huff, sated. 

 

Bud looked over at the ladle Cale was about to give Choi Han. “What’s that, Cale?”

 

He sighed. “It’s a foreign dish— I’m having Choi Han try it so that he can tell me whether it needs more spice or not,”

 

“Oh! It looks and smells delicious, so can I try it?”

 

Cale looked over at Choi Han and raised a brow, and he only gave him a shrug. He handed him the ladle.

 

Bud smiled, gleeful. “Thanks!” He took a sip. 

 

Cale hummed. “Choi Han, did you—”

 

“...Mpfh!?” Just moments later, his hands shot up to his mouth while he choked and coughed. Everyone else in the room stared at him in confusion. “S-S–!”

 

Glenn took the ladle away from him and stared at Bud in disbelief, summoning over a glass of water already sitting on the counter. “Hey, what’s up with you?”

 

“S… Its’...” he choked. “SPICY!”

 

Glenn raised a skeptical brow as he watched Bud gulp down the entire glass desperately. “It can’t be that bad— you’re being dramatic over this.” upon the frown he got from Bud, Glenn only shrugged with a huff before sipping the remainder of the broth. “Mn, it tastes—” he choked, ending his initial sentence abruptly. “MFH….!?”

 

The ladle almost fell to the ground, but Choi Han was quick to catch it before it could. Glenn was choking and summoning buckets of water directly into his mouth with magic while heaving like there was coal in his mouth. On, who was observing this whole ordeal, tilted her head curiously and looked over at the pot of whatever Cale was cooking on the stove while Hong and Raon let out a few giggles at their silly reactions. Meanwhile, Bud was pacing around the room fanning his open mouth while going “Haa… haaa!” as if it was really on fire.

 

Cale sighed at them and took the ladle back, just in time for Hannah to come in while wiping her hands with a towel, only to immediately stop at the door to see the Mercenary King himself run around the room while being yelled at by Beacrox, as well as his mage companion doubled down on the floor panting like a dog while repeatedly refilling a single cup of glass and downing it like he was trying to drown himself.

 

“What—” she finally walked in. “What the hell happened here? Did you get poisoned or—”

 

“It’s, haa… that! Cale’s stew!”

 

“Young master Cale’s stew…?”

 

“I mean, it isn’t really a stew—”

 

“You’re running around over stew?

 

“It’s spicy!”

 

“It can’t possibly be that—”

 

“Miss Hannah, please— don’t.”

 

“Stop being so loud,” Beacrox snapped, but by this point he seemed to be quite intrigued by what exactly it is Cale was making, since he had been handling most of the ingredient prep with On by this point. Though he probably looked at the handwritten recipe from Cale, he didn’t actually know what it was supposed to taste like.

 

“Human, human, I want to try it too!”

 

Cale sighed at that. “No, you already know it’s spicy. You wouldn’t like it.”

 

The little dragon puffed his chest up pridefully while pouting. “I am great and mighty! Surely, I can handle it!”

 

“It’s not really that you can’t handle it, it’s just that even if you could, you probably wouldn’t like it so much.” he explained.

 

“Oh! Like when grandpa Ron gives you lemon tea?”

 

“...” The redhead turned back to his cooking and sighed. “I’m also making a milder one for you, Hong, and On, so don’t worry about not getting to try it. It tastes sweeter.”

 

Hong lit up. “Oooh, Really?”

 

“You could've said so earlier!” Bud yelled from across the kitchen island, earning yet another glare from Beacrox, this time with a knife in his hands. 

 

Hannah looked over at Cale with a confused look, watching him take another sip himself and shrug, mixing in some more spices, and seemed rather perplexed about everything. In the end she just shook her head and headed over, much to Glenn and Bud’s dismay. “Can I try it, young master-nim?”

 

He raised a brow. “The ‘spicy’ one?”

 

“I guess so.”

 

He shrugged again and this time scooped up some of the thick broth with a tablespoon and handed it to her. “Help yourself, I guess.”

 

Choi Han felt a little bad, but in all honesty he was enjoying this a little. It was like watching those reality shows where foreigners would try local Asian food and give out funny reactions, especially if it was spicy. In the meantime, Cale slid him a small saucer with some broth, and of course, an actual ingredient in the dish.

 

“Well, here you are— tteokbokki. Try it out for me.” He said, motioning to the small rice cake sitting on the table. “Does it need more spice?”

 

Just as Choi Han was about to thank him and sample it, a spoon clattered to the ground followed by a muffled sound of surprise. This time, however, Hong figured out the pattern of various people around him trying Cale’s cooking and running off for water, so this time he already had a glass ready to hand to her. Unfortunately, Hannah instead dashed to the nearest window, threw it open, and grabbed a clump of snow before shoving it into her mouth.

 

“Miss Hannah!?”

 

“ARE YOU EATING SNOW!?”

 

“Wait, why didn’t I think of that!?”

 

“Hey— stop that! I’ll tell Saint Jack!”

 

Tteokbokki was normally spicy, but never extremely hot— unless of course, if everyone here wasn’t used to eating something particularly spicy, being a European-esque fantasy world and all. Choi Han looked over at Cale, who sighed, yet again, and shrugged. “I made it the same way I usually like it,”

 

He tilted his head. “Really spicy?”

 

“Just with an extra kick,” he said, while readjusting his apron. “I liked to eat gochujang with extra flakes on some store-bought rice cakes in the mornings to help with hangovers. Some leftover kimchi with rice, too. Burns away annoying memories and refreshes me.”

 

“Mn…” 

 

“I thought the others might like something like this since most of my team liked spicy stuff whenever we ordered or went for company dinners.” Cale sighed. “Haa… and I even toned down the gochujang, too.” 

 

He stared down at the small sample he was handed, then ate the small rice cake. Choi Han hummed in delight. It tasted a lot like the ones he used to have in Korea, though a few levels spicier, as he had been warned of. “It’s delicious,” he nodded with a smile, scraping off more of the sauce using his spoon. It was a nice blend of spicy and sweet. He gave it some more thought. Choi Han was also the kind of kid who happened to enjoy spicy dishes and would eat Samyang noodles with his friends after school every now and then— he had a preference for spice, too. “Mn, but it could use some more.”

 

“WHAT!?”

 

“Figures,” Cale nodded, as if it was the most obvious thing in the world, and the two swordmasters and mage watched in absolute horror as he dumped more spices in the pot like it was nothing.

 

“Ahh, stop it, stop it! At this point it’s just going to be a pot of molten lava!”

 

“Y-Young master-nim, is this really today’s dinner…?”

 

“Let me try that,” Beacrox finally said, heading over to the stove where Cale’s supposed pot of molten lava sat, and picked up the ladle. The redheaded young master took a step back.

 

“Oho? What an interesting aroma,” Ron entered through the door, before stopping to inspect the condition of the room. If he was perplexed, the only sign of it was the slight furrow of his brow. 

 

Coincidentally, it seemed Eruhaben and Rosalyn also entered after him, and were promptly greeted by a cheerful Raon who flew over to them to start explaining that his human had created a delicious dish that managed to defeat the strong Bud, Hannah, and Glenn. 

 

“Hm?” Eruhaben commented with a small tilt of his head. 

 

“How exactly did something that the young master-nim—”

 

“...!” Beacrox gasped and covered his mouth right that second, eyes widening in something akin to horror, or perhaps surprise. “Wh-What is…” Hannah sighed as she sat with her head in her hands and a very confused Cale simply grabbed a glass of water and cautiously held it out for the chef. 

 

As Beacrox gulped it down like his life depended on it, Choi Han failed to suppress a snicker. “Pfft—”

 

Beacrox was this close to actually murdering him on the spot, and he would have done so had it not been for Cale quickly attempting to calm him down with a petrified look on his face.

 

“Oho? And what is it that’s so funny, young punk?”

 

“...Nothing.”

 

“Lemonade Gramps! Like I said before, the human decided to make a new dish for today’s dinner, and when everyone tried it they all keeled over like they were defeated!” Raon explained with excitement. “Oh, except for the human himself and Choi Han!”

 

“Is that so?” Eruhaben joined in, peeking over to see just what it is that Cale was making. “How peculiar— I’ve never seen anything like those before. What is it?”

 

“It’s, mn…” Cale paused, contemplating. It really was like trying to describe Korean dishes to foreigners. “Rice cakes with spicy sauce, I guess. Ah, but I made a more mild version for the kids.”

 

“So it’s just spicy? That’s it?”

 

“No, that’s not just it! Clearly it’s way too spicy!” Bud yelled out in protest.

 

“Rice cakes…? Huh, I didn’t know you could prepare rice in such a way,” Rosalyn remarked. “What’s it called, young master-nim?”

 

“Tteokbokki,” he replied. 

 

“Ah, it’s a dish from my world,” Choi Han supplied helpfully.

 

“I’d like to try it,” Rosalyn said. “I personally think I have decent spice tolerance, since I’ve sampled a few dishes brought from foreign regions, so I think it’ll be—”

 

“NO!”

 

“...”

 

Beacrox had regathered his composure already by this point, but Choi Han could clearly see that his tongue must still be burning because the glass of water never left his hand. 

 

“If you all can’t handle it, there’s the milder version,” Choi Han said.

 

“Add more then, since it’s not spicy enough for you, punk,” Beacrox gritted out, pointing a hostile finger at him. “I dare you.”

 

Choi Han looked over at Cale, who just looked back with an expression that seemed to ask ‘are you really going to?’. He laughed, and Cale sighed before handing him a small bowl of fresh, hot Tteokbokki. Chili flakes and a bunch of other ground up spices sat on the kitchen island, and under Beacrox and the others’ piercing gazes, he sprinkled a decent mound, not breaking eye contact with the chef the entire time.

 

“Eat it.”

 

Choi Han stared unblinkingly as he lifted the spoon to his mouth and chewed. In truth, this was actually a bit spicier than he can handle. But he’d be a fool to admit that in front of Beacrox of all people, and he’d also be quite embarrassed to say so in front of Cale, who was also Korean.

 

“So?” Bud inquired. “Good, huh?”

 

“...Delicious,” Choi Han managed in a mostly serious voice.

 

“Finish it, then,” Choi Han glared back at Beacrox. “There’s at least 3 more spoons left, you punk,”

 

“If I do it, what’ll you give me?”

 

“Who said we were making a bet?”

 

“Are you scared?” Choi Han accused. “If you’re not willing to make a bet you must be confident in me winning,”

 

“When did I ever say that, you bastard?” he scoffed. “2 more spoons of chili flakes, and some from that chili paste on the table. No water,”

 

Choi Han eyed the bowl of chili paste in question and realized it was Gochujang. Fortunately for him, he often enjoyed eating it straight from the tub when he was younger. His spice tolerance was in-tact, so it should be fine. “And if I manage that?”

 

“Tch. What do you want?”

 

“I want you to let me use the kitchen,”

 

Beacrox’s eyes were vicious. “What?”

 

“I want you,” Choi Han reiterated. “To let me use the kitchen,”

 

“For what?” 

 

“I want to cook,”

 

“You can cook?”

 

Choi han felt offended. “Of course I can,” he didn’t survive in the forest without knowing how to boil water or cook meat at least. Though, to be fair, the meat usually did end up a bit crisper than he liked or sometimes a little bit mushy on the inside. But it wasn’t inedible. 

 

“I don’t trust that,”

 

“Well it’s what I want if I win so there’s nothing you can do about that,”

 

“On the condition I watch you. The entire time. If you blow it up or damage this room in any way I’m kicking you out.”

 

“Fine,” he relented. “Let’s get started.”

 

“I haven’t said your end of the bet,” Beacrox cut in. “If you fail, I’ll make you do grocery runs for a month, every morning,”

 

He scoffed. That would cut his morning training hours. “A month?”

 

“Are you scared?”

 

“Of course not,” he replied. “Fine,”

 

“Get started, then.”

 

While all that was happening, Cale was pretty much finished already, washing his hands in the sink. The others had formed a crowd around the kitchen isle where Choi Han was sitting and dumping ungodly amounts of spice into his dish like it was a spicy noodle-eating challenge on the internet that they filmed during a sleepover. It was just as noisy.

 

Cale flipped through the papers he clipped together, containing a catalogue of different Korean recipes he managed to memorize. He’s done Kimbap, Tteokbokki, he tried out corndogs a few days ago, which Hong liked a lot, and even some bulgogi for last night’s dinner. 

 

“Mn, kinda craving yachaejeon,” he mumbled to himself. “But we definitely need to get kimchi out of the way too, it’s been way too long since I’ve had it…”

 

“Cale, Cale!” Hong piped in. “Look, I finished all the dishes— here!”

 

Hong held up a shiny, polished plate which Cale could see his reflection through, while beaming brightly waiting for praise. He took the plate and ruffled his hair. “Good job,”

 

“I also washed up the cups, and the forks and spoons, easy peasy! But I stayed away from the sharp stuff like the kitchen knife, like you told me to,” He smiled. Cale was well aware that the kids were practicing with daggers on the daily, but seeing a little kid near sharp stuff still made him uneasy, especially while washing dishes. Soap and water made it slippery— he cut himself a lot when he was a kid because of it.

 

He nodded, satisfied. “Good. Thanks, Hong,”

 

“So, I helped out, right~?” He said. “Can I have some snow cones from the ice storage? Please?”

 

Oh. So that’s why he’s been so enthusiastic about helping. Cale huffed out a sigh but he was smiling as if it couldn't be helped. The kids already had some today and he told them not to have too much or they’d catch a cold. What a clever kid— where’d he learn that?

 

“Well, you did help a lot,” he shrugged, turning towards a room near the kitchen. “Alright,”

 

Suddenly, On raised her hand. “I also helped,” she said. “I cut up all the ingredients, remember~?” 

 

“And me too, human! I brought you the ingredients so you could focus on cooking! I helped out!” Raon yelled out, raising his hand like his noona did and waving it around while flapping his wings.

 

He scoffed. Where did they learn to be so clever? He can’t even get upset. “Alright, alright. The three of you can have one more snow cone today,”

 

The children got together and high-fived. “Yes!” 

 

“I want cherry syrup,”

 

“The blue one for me, human!”

 

“I want the same thing that youngest wants!”

 

 

In the end, Choi Han won the bet, at the cost of his throat burning so hot that he drank 5 cups of water in one go as soon as he was done. His voice was even all hoarse and dry, so he refrained from speaking for the rest of the night. Beacrox was not happy.

The cooking also took a bit longer because he needed to make more of the mild version. After the challenge it had been a continuous cycle of people coming in, being confused, trying the spicier variant, and then promptly regretting it. He even toned down the milder version some more just in case.

 

The reactions varied, everything from summoning icicles and shoving them in their mouth (Rosalyn), eye twitching and non-verbal before walking out of the room, only to have the sound of what seemed like a rapid waterfall follow (Eruhaben), mistaking it for poison and attempting to throw it out (Ron), and even just curling up on the ground and nearly crying, while whispering prayers frantically (Jack).

 

Some were spared, like the kids, and Mary, who Hannah quickly warned and stopped. All in all, it seemed that Cale overestimated their spice tolerance. How many times has he heard and said the word spice already, again?

 

Bud stared at him in sheer disbelief as he, Cale, was the only one eating from the spicy, or as they’ve taken to calling it, death pot. “How can you eat that?”

 

“I mean, why not?” 

 

“It’s nothing like I’ve tasted before…” Rosalyn admitted. “It’s so…”

 

“Please, spice doesn’t even sound like a word anymore…” Glenn sighed.

 

“Just why?”

 

“It’s spicy, but that’s kind of the point,” he shrugged, drinking from a glass of cool water. There was no better combination to clear his head. 

 

“How would you… describe the taste, young master?” Beacrox asked.

 

Cale hummed. “Refreshing,”

 

Multiple slammed the table. “What!?”

 

“You aren't supposed to use that word to describe… this!” Bud yelled. “That’s for something like frozen treats! And beer!”

 

“It’s the opposite of refreshing—! It’s literal hellfire!”

 

“Haha! It seems even the weak human is mightier than everyone else!” Raon exclaimed, much to Eruhaben’s quiet offense.

 

“Choi Han would agree with me,” Cale shrugged, and Choi Han silently nodded back with a thumbs up of approval. He couldn’t eat anything particularly spicy or else his throat would get worse, but Cale promised to save some of it for him in the morning once he heals.

 

“Well, setting that aside, this version is far more reasonable,” Eruhaben said as he wiped the corner of Raon’s mouth which had sauce from his plate.

 

“When it isn’t burning you alive from the inside, this tastes great,” Hannah said, digging into her plate more. 

 

“Yeah! I like the sweetness,”

 

“It’s got an interesting texture… It’s chewy and flavorful,” On commented.

 

“You should try it with cheese! It tastes even better when it’s all melty!” Hong exclaimed.

 

“Ooh, really? I’ll try that…”

 

“Hey, speaking of, did you know what I found in the villa today?”

 

“What?”

 

“There was this room on the second floor— it was locked off but I managed to unlock it,”

 

“Correction, I opened it for you with a spell,”

 

“Well anyway I found a room with this hatch, and—”

 

“The wolf kids brought some home-made stew this afternoon, you know? They were so sweet, it came with a small note too—”

 

“Hey, did you hear about—”

 

“Seriously?”

 

“Hey, could someone pass the salt—?

 

“...yes, and so ligaments located in the arm are particularly difficult to stimulate in order to properly control and—”

 

“Why’s the water all the way on the other side of the table?”

 

“Today, I learned a new spell—!”

 

“Haha!”

 

The entirety of dinner was spent like that, sitting together while telling stories and conversing about basically whatever topic they could come up with off the top of their heads. He wasn’t really listening, something about new spells, old scrolls and hidden letters, hatches. He thought about how long he’s gone without having dinner with someone in his own house.

 

Choi Jungsoo and Lee Soohyuk used to live with him, deciding to be roommates in one sizable apartment to save on money and rent, so they’d cook up something or go for a group convenience store run every night. Since they died, he’d been eating meals alone at home all the time unless there was a company event. 

 

Listening to all the ruckus, a part of him missed the peace and quiet. But maybe he missed this more.

 

 

–..And that’s what happened?

 

Cale just hummed back, rocking chair swinging back and forth. “Mhm.”

 

Alberu stared at him for a little while from the other side of the communication device before bursting out laughing. 

 

-Pff— ha! You cooked some Korean food and everyone started dying because it was too spicy?

 

He shrugged, caressing Raon’s back as he slept, blanketed in Cale’s arms. “Yeah,” 

 

-And you’re telling me that punk Choi Han and Beacrox made a bet?

 

“Mhm,”

 

-And Choi Han won?

 

“It was all really chaotic but yeah,”

 

Alberu, the radiant prince, in his dark elf form and royal pajamas doubled over his table and slammed his fist on the table while wheezing like a dying man.

 

-Damn it, I should’ve been there.

 

“You’re gonna wake the kids up, laughing like a madman like that,” Cale sighed, readjusting the blanket on On and Hong, who were sleeping curled up in the chair next to his. “I honestly don’t know what would’ve happened if you were here,” Though in all honesty, he would’ve loved to see Alberu, the very picture of a European foreigner, pace around choking from spicy food like a reality TV show. 

 

-I can’t believe I missed out on all that and new Korean food.

 

“You sure like the food from Earth,”

 

-Last week’s kimbap and the bulgogi were delicious and now I want more.

 

“When’s your next session with Choi Han?”

 

Alberu hummed contemplatively before replying.

 

-In 2 days.

 

He shrugged. “Alright. I’ll bring you some rice cakes,” Maybe he won’t miss out on Alberu’s reactions after all. The crown prince smiled.

 

-What a kind and generous dongsaeng I have.

 

“You flatter me, your highness— its is you who is the kindest for allowing a humble subject such as I to serve something so lacking,”

 

Alberu’s expression soured and now it was Cale’s turn to laugh.

Notes:

Hello my friends :) first of all holy crap like 1,000 and a half hits???? and over 200 kudos?????? That's awesome y'all are amazing!!

Been reading some comments on the ship of theseus thing and well, I'm definitely not gonna say anything but you all have interesting interpretations on what exactly I plan to do with Cale. also, for those wondering still if Cale is actually going to die, remember that this work is tagged Major Character Death.

Chapter 6: petals and pebbles.

Summary:

Cale falls asleep during lunch and the children start a mass-braid outbreak. Bud can't catch stones for the life of him.

Notes:

You can tell I got inspired by Squid Game season 2 when I wrote this chapter lol.

I see everyone's describing the events of this fic so far as a calm before the storm. Well-put, I must say.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Raon’s weak human was very troublesome.

 

Of course, he didn’t dislike him for it. Not at all! It was just that he had a very backwards-way of doing things. Whenever they asked him to rest or sleep, he’d just wave them off and say ‘No, later’ while doing his work. But when he needed to get up, he’d never budge from his bed! Raon as well as his hyung and noona thought it was very peculiar. He was so sleepy that they’d have to squirm and slide out of his arms if he was hugging him, too!

 

Today was one such instance, as Cale, their weak human, had been slumped in bed for hours, only moving around to toss and roll around his bed with his eyes mostly closed covered in a big blanket. It was past noon already! It was the after- noon and he wouldn’t get up! No matter how much he, On, or Hong tried to drag him out, he’d just stay snoring away.

 

“Humaaaaan! Wake up!” Raon said, pawing at his blankets. Cale didn’t respond.

 

“Come on! Let’s go out on a walk and play with the wolf children! Choi Han came in earlier and then left when he saw you were asleep, you know!” Hong urged poking at his face and nuzzling the side of his face in an attempt to push him to turn to the side. In turn, Cale buried his face in a pillow.

 

“Cale, you have to eat,” On said with a pout, looking rather stern as she moved his hair out of his face. “You should eat something for breakfast and get exercise done.”

 

“Waaaake uuuuup!”

 

Finally, they heard a sigh from him, and Cale finally opened his eyes, laying on the bed and staring up at the ceiling. “Mn…” he groaned, before sitting up and laying against the headboard. 

 

“You’re finally up!” Hong gasped.

 

“Come on, weak human! You have to eat something!”

 

“M’tired…” he reasoned in a slurred voice.

 

“You sleep for such a loooong time, weak human!”

 

“Hm…” he replied, sounding drowsy  as he lifted his hand to rub the top of Raon’s head, and the other for On’s head. Hong practically leapt into his lap, and Cale hummed as he picked out small crumbs of food in his fur. “You’ve all eaten?”

 

“Of course we have!”

 

“We were trying to get you to wake up and eat too,”

 

“Mn, sorry,” he simply said, before reaching for the glass of water on the side of his bed. It was cold as usual, and he drank about half of it before getting off the bed carrying Hong. 

 

“Beacrox is in the kitchen. You haven’t even had breakfast, but it’s time for lunch already,” On scolded.

 

“That’s right, human! Grandpa Ron told us we should always eat our meals on time!”

 

“And so did Rosalyn! And Goldie Gramps!” Hong added. “So now you have to eat a lot, okay?”

 

He nodded. “‘Kay,”

 

“And drink! Grandpa Ron said he’d make you looots of lemonade!”

 

Cale suddenly shivered. “He said that…?”

 

“He said he’d make you some herbal tea if you didn’t want lemonade,” On said. “Grandpa Ron said they were imported from the eastern continent and had a lot of health benefits— but just a little bitter.”

 

The weak human’s expression worsened, for some strange reason, and he shivered again. “Bitter…?” Raon of course noticed this— he must be feeling sick and cold! 

 

“Human! You should wear a blanket!”

 

“Hm…? Oh, I’m already wearing a cardigan, though,” he said. “It isn’t that cold,”

 

“But you’re shivering! Grandpa Ron should brew you some warm lemon tea after all!” 

 

“Oh! You could have it with your breakfast and lunch!”

 

“You should stay warm, or you could catch a cold— maybe you should try some of that herbal tea, Cale.”

 

Oddly enough, his expression seemed to worsen right after! Cale must have really needed some warm tea!

 

As they walked down the hall of the villa, chatting all the way, they happened to bump into the smart Rosalyn and Glenn, who were carrying a lot of stuff! Raon could recognize a few spellbooks and magical textbooks— there were even a few that he had read and finished himself. 

 

“Oh— young master Cale,” Roslayn smiled. “Good afternoon,”

 

“Good afternoon, young master-nim,”

 

“Mn,” he nodded. “Have you both eaten yet?”

 

Rosalyn chuckled. “That’s what we should be asking you,” she spoke. “We didn’t see you at breakfast again today— you’ve been sleeping in a lot. Though rest is important, it’s also equally important not to miss meals, young master-nim. How will you grow taller?”

 

“That’s right! If you want to grow big and strong, you should remember to have all your meals!” Raon nodded. “You are a very frail, weak human. I, the great and mighty Raon Miru, will grow big and strong so that you won’t get hurt!”

 

“And me!”

 

“Me too~”

 

“Is that so?” Cale had a very satisfied expression on his face. “That’s good, then. Keep it up.”

 

“Of course!” The three of them grinned brightly.

 

“Mister Glenn, Miss Rosalyn, what are you both carrying?” Cale asked, eyeing their massive books and trinkets, some levitating with magic. “It seems like… a lot.”

 

“Hm? Oh, these are some magic artifacts and records we found from the villa,” Glenn replied. “Miss Rosalyn pointed out some interesting things, and we’ve been focusing on studying some old mana flow maps, and the structure of some old artifacts, young master-nim.”

 

“Ah… I see.” he nodded. “So, it seems like you both have been really working together lately. I tend to see you more often with Bud.”

 

“Hm? Oh, that nutcase?” Glenn sighed as if he was exasperated. “Well, I suppose you wouldn’t be wrong. Though he’s also been training a lot with Miss Hannah and Mister Choi Han. I see them spar quite often— Mister Choi Han is really quite.. formidable” 

 

“Ah, I see,” he nodded. “Mn, well, good luck on your research.”

 

They both smiled. “Thank you, young master-nim,”

 

“We’ll see you at lunch later,” Rosalyn gave a little wave and they went back on their way.

 

They headed down the stairs, until they reached the first floor. Their room was all the way upstairs in the third-floor, in the master’s bedroom. Oftentimes, Raon and his hyung and noona liked to do little races in the morning to the dining room for breakfast, and run up the stairs to go get Cale after lessons. 

 

“Do you want to go out for a walk later?” Cale asked as they turned the corner.

 

“Really?”

 

“Of course!”

 

“After you eat first, though,”

 

“Mn, right,” he nodded. “Ah, it’s gotten a bit warmer out— do you want to eat out on the terrace too?”


On the terrace, the snow piled near the railings, but the steps leading out to the front garden seemed like it got cleared out from the snow, and Raon could spot small bits of salt. He knew from Goldie gramps that sprinkling salt could help melt snow!

 

Lemonade Gramps came out and brought them their lunch. The talented uncle Beacrox had made them some steak— and Raon knew it happened to be Cale’s favorite kind too! Though, his human had never really been particularly picky when it comes to food as long as it was cooked well— or cooked by Beacrox!

 

“Ah, and of course, this old man brewed you some tea as well, young master-nim,” Ron smiled. “Warm honey lemon tea for this afternoon— I hope you will enjoy it,”

 

“...” Cale stared at the cup in front of him before sighing. “Mn… thank you… Ron.”

 

“My pleasure, young master-nim. Please enjoy the meal,”

 

“At least it’s Beacrox’s sirloin…” Cale mumbled as he picked up his cutlery. “Hm, oh yeah, did anything happen lately?”

 

“Oh, yeah! Yesterday, we saw the clumsy Bud and the strong Hannah’s practice match!”

 

“Yeah, but Bud wasn’t clumsy at all when he’s fighting! He went whoosh, and his aura was so strong!”

 

“Ah, but I thought it was really cool when Hannah—”

 

They chatted like that for a while over their meal, Cale listening intently as always, while also chipping in with a few short remarks and comments. It felt like they had been there for a while, even after their plates and glasses were already empty, absorbed in conversation. At some point though, they noticed Cale got quiet. 

 

“Cale?”

 

They were met with only the sound of soft snoring. Cale was asleep, head resting on his folded hands above the table. 

 

“He fell asleep again?”

 

“But he’s been sleeping all morning!”

 

“He sure likes sleeping, huh,”

 

A gust of air swept over them in a cool breeze, and a small petal or two fell into Cale’s hair. It was from the ivy that grew around the walls— they looked nice so goldie gramps maintained them with magic during the winter.

 

“Oooh,” Raon went in slight awe, motioning to Cale’s head. “It looks pretty!”

 

“Cale’s hair really grew long,”

 

“Oh! We should style it!” Hong suggested. “Noona, remember when Auntie Tasha taught us how to do braids? We were with Mary, Hannah, and Rosalyn,”

 

“Oh! I remember that too!” Raon exclaimed before gasping. “There’s lots of flowers growing! Let’s put it in Cale’ hair!”

 

“Yeah!”

 

And so their little quest began. Cale was fortunately a mostly heavy sleeper— it was almost impossible to get him out of bed, after all! On got started on the hair, deciding on a few braids. Meanwhile, Raon and Hong went to collect some flowers. Raon helped with the higher up places, and Hong searched around outside— turns out a few white flowers grew here and there, even in the snow. 

 

“On?” Choi Han called with curiosity, walking up the steps of the terrace. He blinked once he saw Cale. “What are you doing? Is Cale-nim alright?”

 

On grinned with a small chuckle. “We’re styling his hair,” she said, treading through Cale’s hair carefully with her fingers. “I learned how to do braids, and I can do a bunch of other stuff too— Hong and Raon went to collect some flowers,”

 

“Flowers?”

 

“Wouldn’t he look prettier with flowers?”

 

“Oh,” he blinked. “Ah, yes— that’s right,”

 

“I brought back some flowers!” Raon yelled giddily, carrying a handful and some floating with him. He placed them on top of the cleared out table— they had stacked the plates and cutlery and set them aside earlier. “There’s a purple one, a blue one, a yellow one— oh! Hi, Choi Han!”

 

Choi Han smiled. “Hi, Raon-nim,”

 

“We’re collecting flowers to decorate the human’s hair with!”


“Hmm, I see,” Choi Han nodded. “Um… Could I help?”

 

“Of course!”

 

Eventually, Hong came back with a small little basket he said he had gotten from Hannah. “She also gave me this really pretty flower!” He smiled. “She said it was from a vase in her room, and that I could use it!”

 

“Oooh— It’s yellow like the strong Hannah’s hair!”

 

“And Jack’s!” Hong nodded. “There’s also some small white ones outside! They grown near the trees— they’re so small, but I picked a lot,”

 

“Okay~ Thank you,” On smiled, weaving in the smaller flowers into Cale’s braids. Choi Han watched intently as he helped sort through the flowers they had gathered by color and shape. Raon thought they looked like small snowflakes in his hair. 

 

“Let’s go get a little more!”

 

Walking with Choi Han, Hong and Raon went to gather some more flowers. On the way, they managed to meet with Good girl Mary, who was having some tea in the lounge with a stack of scrolls on the table. 

 

“Flowers for the young master-nim?” She asked.

 

“Yup! We’re putting it in his hair after we braid it!”

 

“I see,” she nodded. “May I also give you flowers for him?”

 

“Really? Of course!”

 

Mary nodded again and headed to her study down the hall. “I received lots of flowers— I keep them all in my study, but I’m not sure what to do with all of them,” she said. “I’ve run out of vases to properly keep them, but Miss Rosalyn cast some magic to help keep them alive,” 

 

Mary’s study was a place that Raon often came to. He’d, then they would share cookies and tea, and Raon would bring her fun books to read. It was a room with lots of bones inside, which Mary would often explain to Raon, but also lots of flowers. That was because ever since being hailed a hero, she had lots of admirers, and she tried to keep as many gifts from them that she received as possible. There were even tiny drawings and clay sculptures she tried to maintain. 

 

“What kinds of flowers does the young master-nim like?”

 

“Hm… I’m not too sure,” Choi Han admitted.

 

“The human has never mentioned it! I should ask him later!”

 

“I have this blue flower,” she said. “It resembles the color of your eyes, Raon-nim.”

 

Raon gasped. “That’s right, it does!” he smiled, before picking out another flower. “Then, can I also have this one, good Mary? It’s a purple flower! It looks a lot like your eyes too!”

 

“Oh…” she blinked. “Of course you can have it, Raon-nim.”

 

Meanwhile, Hong and On were busy braiding outside on the terrace. Cale was still peacefully asleep. 

 

“Hehe, he looks like a fairy!”

 

“Hm?” a new voice piped in. “What are you doing, little kids?”

 

“Goldie!” 

 

“Isn’t it pretty?” On motioned to Cale’s hair.

 

“Ho,” he smiled, eyes curling like crescents. “Indeed so—he’s been asleep the entire time?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“He really likes to sleep!”

 

“Hm…” Eruhaben got closer and twirled his finger. Golden dust appeared and slowly fell, adding a sparkle to his hair. “Now he looks even better than a fairy— he looks like a dragon,”

 

He let out a soft gasp. “It’s so sparkly!”

 

More people began to pass by. Rosalyn and Glenn happened to meet them again on their way out, and created some flowers for them out of mana that looked quite pretty. Rosalyn placed one herself. Bud tried to sprinkle some snow in but was promptly stopped by a smiling Ron, who tucked a strand of hair behind Cale’s ear before setting down some herbal tea for him— and then leaving with Bud in tow. Beacrox gave them a small one from the kitchen, and Jack left them with a white flower and whispered a small blessing before he left. Eventually, Raon and Choi Han got back with more flowers, as well as Mary in tow.

 

“We’re all done! But we still have so many flowers leftover,”

 

“What should we do with them?”

 

“Oh! I have an idea!”

 

 

“Mgh…” Cale clicked his tongue as he opened his eyes, still feeling drowsy. He paused when he felt a weight on either side of him, resting against his arms, and another curled up on his lap. “Wha—” 

 

All three of the children were sleeping. On was on his left, head nestled in the space on Cale’s shoulder, while Hong napped soundly on his right, hugging his arm loosely while snoring audibly, head almost draping off his shoulder and colliding with Raon’s on his lap. Both cat siblings were in their polymorphed forms, and Raon was napping with his tail occasionally flicking here and there.

 

He didn’t know what exactly happened, but at some point he had been moved inside and onto a sofa, with a pillow. He yawned and stretched a bit, however he could in this position anyway— how long had he been asleep for?

 

I was listening to the kids talk and got sleepy, he recalled. Damn it, this stupid illness makes me feel so exhausted all the time.

 

Hong rustled, turning a bit in his sleep, and Cale smoothed over his tangled bed of red hair, and was mystified when he found tiny flowers scattered about and some strands braided together. He pulled one out and twirled them between his fingers, then looked down to see a messy flower crown sitting on Hong’s thigh, like it had fallen off. Looking over at On, he realized hers was put in braided pigtails, one more messy than the other, accompanied with an array of flowers. Raon had a purple flower or two tucked behind his ears (?) too.

 

They must’ve been out playing, huh… he thought. Afterwards, they probably got tired. Though Cale wondered who might’ve moved him from the terrace. Slowly, he managed to inch his way out, as carefully as he could laying them down so their heads rested on a blanket. On stirred once or twice, but fortunately never woke. He draped a blanket over the sleeping children, before quietly leaving.

 

Looking out the window, it had gotten dark already— Though he felt like it couldn’t have gotten that late. Cale walked around a bit and headed down the hall, when he heard the faint sound of familiar voices talking from the lounge. He could make out some laughter too, and frustrated yells.

 

He could see almost everyone gathering around the table doing… something. Cale wasn't too sure what exactly, since they were all crowding and being a bit loud.

 

“One… two…!” Cale heard something… multiple things scatter on the table. It sounded like small pebbles, followed by the sound of laughing and disappointed oohs “Ah, damn it!”

 

“Give it up Bud~ this is your fifth time losing, you know?”

 

“Let me try again!”

 

“Oh, just quit it, it’s my turn!”

 

“What are you all doing?”

 

Multiple heads turned to him at once in slight surprise, before smiling. “Oh, young master-nim!”

 

Though, the strangest thing he could name from this whole thing was probably… “...What’s on all of your heads?”

 

Everyone at the table, Hannah, Bud, Glenn, Jack, Rosalyn, Mary— heck, even Eruhaben, Ron, and Beacrox, had different kinds of flowers in their hair. Some were wearing flower crowns, or a flower tucked behind their ears— some were styled and braided with flowers woven in. There were also ones that just had flowers scattered about in their hair like they’d been caught in a shower of them, particularly Choi Han.

 

Bud, wearing a french braid, just laughed. “Look at yourself first before you ask about us!”

 

“Huh?” Cale felt around his hair and realized it was tied into some sort of elaborate braid, and he could feel some petals in his hair too. Choi Han just chuckled with his own bed of flowers for hair and handed him a hand mirror.

 

His hair was, as he had suspected, styled, tied into a loose fishtail braid— he also saw a ridiculous amount of flowers. A lot of them were out of season for that time of the year, and there were small white ones scattered about like tiny pinches of snow in his hair. And one— no, two of the flowers were glowing? Actually, was it just him, or was his hair… sparkling? It was like someone sprinkled a bucket’s worth of glitter in.

 

“What the hell happened here…?”

 

It was Rosalyn’s— who had her hair tied into a braided bun— turn to laugh now. “It was On, Hong, and Raon-nim,” she explained. “You fell asleep at lunch on the terrace, so they decided to play with your hair a little while you were sleeping.”

 

“Those three…?”

 

“They were running around all over the place gathering flowers and sticking it into your hair— On was the one who braided it.”

 

“She also braided my hair!”

 

“Mn, they couldn’t fit any more in yours, but had so many flowers leftover,” 

 

“So those little kids decided to also put them in ours,” Eruhaben sighed, but he seemed quite amused. His hair was half-braided, with flowers scattered along the strands like a waterfall. No matter what hairstyle he wore, he would always look impeccably majestic.

 

“Raon-nim braided my hair,” Mary said in a GPS-like voice, but there was an air of excitement in her dull tone. Though her hair was short, tiny little braids were made along one side, framing her face, and a flower tucked behind her other ear. There seemed to be a specific pattern of purple and blue flowers in Mary’s hair. 

 

“Hoho,” Ron simply chuckled from the side, and Cale spared a quick glance at him. He also had flowers in his old, gray hair. Unfortunately, they didn’t make him any less scary. 

 

“I… see.” Cale simply replied with a small nod. A lot seemed to happen whenever he wasn’t conscious. “Um, well, what are you all doing here?”

 

“Oh, we’re playing this game from Choi Han’s world,” Hannah said, and they made some room on the couch for him to sit next to Choi Han and Mary. Though she was wearing her usual ponytail, Cale could spot a few strands braided together, and she was wearing a flower crown that was similar to brother’s.

 

“Choi Han’s world…?” Cale eyed the five pebbles on the table. 

 

“It’s Gonggi, Cale-nim,”

 

“Ah,” he knew that game. “You’re playing Gonggi?”

 

“We found some small pebbles outside and started a game because we got a little bored,” Choi Han admitted. “So far, no one except me and Beacrox have managed to succeed in it yet.”

 

“You and Beacrox, huh…” it made sense. Gonggi was a Korean kids game that required a lot of speed and accuracy. Choi Han, with the added advantage of being Korean himself, was also probably the best swordmaster out there— He was fast and also probably accurate. On the other hand, Beacrox was also an assassin— of course he’d be quick and precise. He doubted Ron would ever have trouble with it either, if he were to try.

 

“Bud’s been playing again and again, and also losing again and again for the past 5 minutes.”

 

“Hey! You didn’t have to tell him that!”

 

“It’s so difficult, young master-nim. You should give it a try,”

 

Cale picked up one of the pebbles and observed it for a little while. “You used to play this game when you were a kid?”

 

“I had a lot of noonas, since I grew up with lots of girl cousins.” Choi Han explained. “They’d include me and my other cousins in the game too. I was honestly pretty bad at it at first, but then I got better at it after some time,” he laughed sheepishly.

 

“Mn… I see.” he nodded. “It’s a bit embarrassing to admit, but I didn’t play a lot of games when I was a kid.” Maybe he did when he was with his parents, but he couldn’t remember much from those times. At his uncle’s house, there wasn’t anything to play with, and no time to try and make up a game himself or look for pebbles to play gonggi with. “There just wasn’t any time for it,” he needed to do chores, he needed to walk around and beg for food, he needed to study and work. If there was one use he could get from a pebble, it was a last-resort emergency food, or to throw at aggressive street cats. Even during his peaceful high school days, he would be too focused on studying to spare any time for games. 

 

“Ah…”

 

“Young master-nim…!” They sounded oddly sad for some reason. “Here, you should really give it a try, then!”

 

“The rules are that you need to first collect them all, and then scatter them, then you need to toss it up while picking up—”

 

While Bud was explaining the rules, Cale whispered in a low voice to Choi Han who was next to him. “Jungsoo taught me how to play this, though,” he said. “There were lots of tiny chunks of debris and pebbles outside during missions, so he’d pester me for a game whenever we were on break during patrols. I used to lose to him all the time and he’d make me buy him dumplings every time I did,”

 

Choi Han blinked, but laughed at the story. “Really?” 

 

“I got better after a while though,” he said, feeling a bit smug as he recalled how he would steadily begin to win more and more matches against Choi Jungsoo. “Then I would make him buy me soup dumplings and triangle kimbap as per the bets we made all the time.”

 

“Did he ever win against you after that?”

 

“A few times— but I got better at it so he would keep buying me free snacks.” he smirked. “Mn, and the team leader also liked to play sometimes— though he was more of a ttakji and jegichagi kind of guy. They were both ridiculously outdoorsy actually,” Cale sighed, tossing the pebble up and catching it. “They taught me all kinds of games— it was a bit tiring.”

 

“Mn, tiring, huh?” he chuckled. “Do you have a favorite?”

 

“Not in particular,” he admitted. “But I’m personally the best at memory games and tongue twisters,” he picked up all five pebbles and held them within his palm. “Ah, but that doesn’t mean I’m bad at Gonggi either,”

 

“...and then you have to flip them all on your palm and then catch it— Cale, were you listening?” Bud frowned. “It’s kind of complicated, you know,”

 

“I heard you,” he didn’t really need to listen though, since he already knew the rules. “If I get this first try, you have to get me soup dumplings,”

 

“Eh? Wait, what? When did I agree to that—”

 

He smirked. “Well, here I go,”

 

“What even are soup dumplings…?”

 

He shook them up in his palm and the five pebbles were scattered on the table. Cale picked up one, and tossed it in the air. High, but not too far up, just enough to swoop down to collect the next stone. He picked them off, one by one. It had been a while since the last time he played Gonggi— years, actually. He didn’t play games all that often after becoming Team Leader for Team 1, but he did remember playing once or twice with Kim Min Ah’s daughter, who happened to be at their office waiting for her mother. It was one of the only games he knew how to play with her, since kids started to come up with their own games after a while. 

 

“Oooh…!”

 

And then you would scatter them all again, and go two by two, then three and two, and then collect all four and catch the flying one.

 

“Woah, he’s really doing it!”

 

“Wha— you’re telling me this is his first attempt!?”

 

“Ah, but here comes the difficult part…”

 

It took him a while to get good at it too. Next you would have to flip all the stones in your palm onto the top of your hand, and then toss it again and catch it in your palm. Cale remembered how he messed up a lot at the part where he needed them all to land on top of his hand, since they would easily scatter and fall off. Choi Jungsoo laughed at him a lot. “And… hup!” Cale could hear some more unified gasps. They landed atop his hand, though one was teetering off the edge a little. He must have gotten rusty.

 

“Ah! One more time!”

 

“You’ve got this, young master-nim, you just need to catch it!”

 

“Shhh! You’re breaking his focus!”

 

Why are they all taking this so seriously? This wasn’t the world championship for Gonggi, or something. Cale sighed, focused, and…

 

Fwip!

 

In one quick motion, his palms were closed. Then, he slowly revealed all the stones inside.

 

“Gasp!”

 

A chorus of ‘Woah!’s rang out in the lounge room as everyone leaned in closer to get a look at all the stones in his hand as if head just won the world cup, or something.

 

“One, two… He really got all five!” Glenn counted with awe.

 

Bud choked. “On his first try!?” 

 

“...No way!” Hannah sounded quite amazed as she stared at his open palm.

 

“How did you do that!?”

 

“You’re really amazing, young master-nim!” Jack cheered.

 

“Huh, I wonder if there’s some sort of trick to it…” Lock whispered in an amazed voice.

 

Mary tapped his shoulder from beside him, and gave him a thumbs up, before speaking in her usual GPS-like voice. “Good job,”

 

“Mn…” he nodded, a bit awkwardly. “Thanks.”

 

“Wow, you’re better than what I saw from Choi Jungsoo’s memories, Cale-nim…!” Choi Han commented with sparkling eyes. “You went really fast!”

 

“Ah, yeah,” Why was everyone so worked up over this? 

 

“Ah, no fair! Let me try that again!” Bud exclaimed. He proceeded to fail 5 more consecutive times. 

 

After Bud’s continuous failure, the stones were passed around, and everyone got a turn. Lock, who came over some time that evening after Cale had fallen asleep, tried a few times, and nearly made it but messed up when he had to flip them over his palm. Rosalyn tried but kept tossing too high and missing the catches, while Mary would toss too low and wouldn’t be quick enough to pick up the rocks before it fell— though Hannah would cheer her up afterwards. 

 

“It is alright,” Mary had said. “Failure just means there is more room to learn,”

 

Rosalyn, who was also a bit down after failing so much, simply sighed. “Yes… that’s right,”

 

Ron, that scary old man, managed it in one turn at a record-breaking— almost neck-breaking speed, all the while maintaining his benign smile, earning a small round of applause from the table. “Oho,” Eruhaben had chuckled. “It seems your old hands are still quite swift,”

 

“You think too highly of this old self,” he replied. “It is simply a children’s game, yes?”

 

Everyone who had failed up until that point slumped a bit into their seats. Bud in particular averted his gaze as Ron’s eyes subtly looked his way. 

 

Then came Eruhaben’s turn, who was… unfortunately not as swift. Maybe it might’ve been because of his long, talon-like nails, Cale wouldn’t know. Hannah, Jack, and everyone had their turns, and after some time, the first of them after Ron to succeed was Hannah, being a swordmaster and all. Lock, who was already so close, also managed to catch all of the pebbles in his palm. Rosalyn and Choi Han cheered for him, ruffling his hair a little too roughly. Mary also gave Hannah a thumbs up.

 

“Cale-nim,” Choi Han asked. “You said you were good at tongue twisters, right?”

 

“Mn?” Cale blinked. “Ah, yeah— I guess so.”

 

“Why don’t we try some?” Choi Han suggested with a smile. “I also a know a few— hm, like, Your giraffe painting is a poor giraffe painting, and my giraffe painting is a well-drawn giraffe painting,”

 

Ah, the Korean ones. “Oh, I know that one,” Cale nodded, before trying to remember and echo it. “ Your giraffe painting is a poor giraffe painting, and my giraffe painting is a well-drawn giraffe painting,” 

 

“Yeah, like that,” 

 

“Tongue twisters always came pretty easy for me,” he admitted. “It was the one thing I was good at before Choi Jungsoo and Lee Soohyuk.” It was easy to remember them growing up, and it was even easier when he could reference back his records once he awakened his abilities. 

 

“Tongue twisters…?” Mary questioned from beside him. “Is it difficult to twist your tongue?”

 

“Hm? Oh, no,” Rosalyn piped in. “Tongue twisters are phrases that are difficult to say. It feels like you’re twisting your tongue just trying to say them, and that’s why they’re called that,” she smiled. “I happen to know my fair share.”

 

“Hey, I do too,” Bud said, thinking. “Oh, this one— Near an ear, a nearer ear, a nearly eerie ear,” 

 

“Near an ear… e-rer near?” Lock attempted with a tone of confusion.

 

“Hey, I know that one— it’s near an ear, a nearer ear, a…” Glenn stopped short, clicking his tongue. “Uh… ear?”

 

“No, no, it goes like this— Near an ear, a nearer ear, a nearly eerie ear,” Bud repeated, slowing down a bit. 

 

“Near an ear, a nearer ear, a nearly eerie ear,” Rosalyn managed. “Near an ear, a nearer ear, a nearly eerie ear,”

 

“Nice! Now say it fast, three times!”

 

“Near an ear, a nearer ear, a nearly eerie ear—” she said again, quick. “Near an ear, a nearer ear, an i-erly— ugh!”

 

Lock winced. “Ooh, you were so close, noona!”

 

Cale hummed. “Near an ear, a nearer ear, a nearly eerie ear,” he said, speeding up. “Near an ear, a nearer ear, nearly eerie ear— near an ear, a nearer ear, nearly eerie ear,”

 

“Woah, you got it!”

 

Choi Han gasped as if he was astonished. “Cale-nim, you really are…!”

 

“I told you,” he sighed. “I’m good at tongue twisters.”

 

“Hm, really now?” Rosalyn chuckled. “Then try this one— Susie works in a shoeshine shop. Where she shines she sits, and where she sits she shines.”

 

“Why are all of them so long…?” Lock sighed, mumbling what he could remember of the phrase to himself.

 

“Susie works in a shoe-sai— a shoe sine— a shoeshine shop…” Jack sounded like he was struggling quite a bit. “Susie works in a shoeshine shop… Susie works in a shoeshine shop…”

 

“Susie works in a shoe shine shop…” Beacrox paused. “And— I mean, where she shines that— where she shines she sits, and where she sits, she shines.”

 

“Susie works in a shoe shine shop… Where she shines she sits and where she sits she shines— Yes!” Hannah punched the air a little and Jack gave her a high five while praising her. 

 

“Young master Cale?”

 

“Mn… Susie works in a shoe shine shop. Where she shines she sits and where she sits she shines.”

 

“Oh!” Rosalyn looked somewhat impressed. “Then, how about this one— Nine nice night nurses nursing nicely.”

 

“Nine nice night nurses nursing nicely,”

 

“This one? Fred fed Ted bread, and Ted fed Fred bread.”

 

Cale nodded and repeated it as well. “Fred fed Ted bread, and Ted fed Fred bread.”

 

“Fed bred Ted Bed…?” Bud mumbled to himself in utter confusion.

 

Rosalyn hummed. “Here’s another tricky one— I slit the sheet, the sheet I slit, and on the slitted sheet I sit.”

 

“Mn… I slit the sheet, the sheet I slit, and on the slitted sheet I sit.”

 

“Oooh!”

 

“You really are good at tongue twisters, young master-nim,” Rosalyn nodded, sounding awed.

 

“Hm, how about some other tongue twisters?” he looked at Choi Han.

 

“Oh! Yeah, I also had a bunch of tongue twisters from my world,” he smiled. “It’ll be a bit trickier though— Here’s one, Park Beom-bok goes to the night cherry blossom viewing, and Bang Bum-bok goes to the day cherry blossom viewing.”

 

“...”

 

“Ha?”

 

“What?

 

“C.. Can you please repeat that?”

 

Park Beom-bok goes to the night cherry blossom viewing, and Bang Bum-bok goes to the day cherry blossom viewing.” Choi Han said it a bit slower that time.

 

“...S-Still nothing,”

 

“What was that!? It went so fast!”

 

“Park… Bom– beom-bok…?”

 

Park Beom-bok goes to the night cherry blossom viewing, and Bang Bum-bok goes to the day cherry blossom viewing.” Cale repeated. He actually already knew that one since it was one he had heard in high school when he was younger.

 

“Oh!” Jack gasped in astonishment.

 

“How!?” 

 

“I already said,” he replied. “I’m good at tongue twisters,” he paused. “Oh— Choi Han already told me this one though.”

 

“You practice this stuff with him…?”

 

“Uh… he just tells me a few and I learn them,” Cale answered. 

 

“...For fun?”

 

Cale shrugged vaguely. “It’s interesting, being from another language and all.”

 

“Which would you consider to be the hardest one you know?” Eruhaben asked. “I’m quite curious.”

 

“Mn…” he hummed, glancing at Choi Han, before whispering. “Do you know about the moist cookie one?”

 

“Ah, that one,” Choi Han nodded. “I got dared by my friend to memorize it in an hour once at school,”

 

“A dare, huh?” Cale said. “Did you manage to though?”

 

“In an hour? Not really,” he admitted sheepishly. “But I did eventually learn it after a while, since I thought I may as well have.”

 

“Do you still remember it?”

 

“I think so,” he shrugged, before mumbling a few Korean words from the tongue twister under his breath, practicing. He smiled a little to himself. “I actually used to say it a lot to help me stay awake and focused in the Forest of Darkness,”

 

“Do you want to try it, then?”

 

Choi Han nodded, replying in Korean. “Yes,”

 

“Okay then— one, two, three!”

 

They both inhaled a sizable breath before speaking together. “ A non-moist chocolate chip cookie that lived in non-moist chocolate chip cookie land—”

 

The room erupted in unified ‘Oooh…!’s as they began. Even Ron raised his brow and leaned in slightly to watch and listen to the whole spectacle— all for a tongue twister. Frankly Cale didn’t know what was so interesting about all this.

 

“...saw a moist chocolate chip cookie from moist chocolate chip cookie land and wanted to become a moist chocolate chip cookie and so went to moist chocolate chip cookie land— “

 

“E…Eh?”

 

“...It’s still going?” Beacrox whispered in a mix of somewhat awe, but also horror.

 

“Oho…” Eruhaben blinked.

 

“...but the gate-keeper of moist chocolate chip cookie land said, ‘You are not a moist chocolate chip cookie, but a non-moist chocolate chip cookie, so live in non-moist chocolate chip cookie land,’-”

 

“It sounds like a story,” Mary commented.

 

“It— It actually does, though…?” Hannah mumbled.

 

“I think it’s been a whole paragraph already…!”

 

“…so the non-moist chocolate chip cookie gave up on becoming a moist chocolate chip cookie and went back to non-moist chocolate chip cookie land.”

 

“Woaaaah!”

 

“What was that!?” Bud exclaimed, flabbergasted.

 

“Hey, remember to breathe, unlucky punk,” Eruhaben sighed. Ron placed a fresh cup of warm lemon tea in front of Cale, and a glass of water half-full in front of Choi Han.

 

“Hey, you should really tell us the meaning behind these crazy tongue twisters!”

 

“It’s kind of stupid, though,” Cale sighed, slumping back onto the couch while catching his breath, eyeing the cup of lemon tea with a frown. 

 

“Mn, it’s about… a chocolate chip cookie? One that isn't… moist,” Even Choi Han felt like it sounded ridiculous. “And it wants to be a moist cookie, so it goes to moist cookie land, but then the guard stops it and tells it it isn’t a moist cookie and to go back to non-moist cookie land.”

 

“....Huh?”

 

“It really does sound like a bedtime story for kids,” Lock commented. “A really… erm, crazy one,” 

 

“It sounds like something someone would make up under the effects of some kind of hypnosis spell,” Glenn sighed.

 

“Or while drunk,” Bud shrugged.

 

They spent the entire night doing silly things like that— catching pebbles, trying tongue twisters, and they even ended up telling a few stories here and there. It was very lively— also kind of noisy. Strangely enough, Cale didn’t hate it all that much.

 

He’s never really hung out with other people like this before when he was younger during his years as Kim Roksoo. He was always busy— It wasn’t like he hated fun and games or something. If anything, he often remembered wanting to have enough time to do extra things like that. There was just no room for it in his agenda. Over time, he just thought it felt more pointless than anything when he could be working or completing something. He already had so little time in the day, what little more could he afford to waste?

 

Then Jungsoo and Soohyuk were there, when the end of the world was rolling around. Even during the apocalypse, amid all the monsters, Jungsoo would teach him how to play a few games he knew, and then Lee Soohyuk would too. 

 

They would pick up small stones from the side of crumbling streets and toss them up and say ‘This is how you play Gonggi’, they would find a spinning top on sale at the store, hand it to him, and say ‘You need to wind it up really tight, and then release it so it spins for a longer time’. Sometimes during training Lee Soohyuk would pull out a Jegi and say ‘You’re so frail, Roksoo-yah. Have you ever played Jegichagi before, hm? This is how’, and on slow days sorting through files on monsters and reports on guilds, Jungsoo would come up to his desk and say ‘Have you ever seen game shows on TV? Let me show you this game— it’s called Cham Cham Cham— You’ve gotta know it! I promise it’s really simple!’.

 

Things have gotten really peaceful. Lately, he’d sit alone at night, stare off blankly out the window or at the wall, or close his eyes, and take a peek at his old records. 

 

The voices of people, young, old, and annoying, would echo faintly in his mind like an empty chamber. And when his eyes would grow half lidded, he would feel as if he was getting swept up, gently, in a sea of dull records. Running to a random convenience store because Lee Soohyuk couldn’t live without his coffee, the giddy chatter of his teammates as they drank together after a mission, that time his entire team showed up at the hospital to scold and pester him all day and night after he overused Instant or got hurt— sometimes Choi Jungsoo would be admitted there with him and once all three of them were even there after a tough mission, and once the entire team too. Just pointless, unremarkable and mundane records like that. But even so, there were lots of them, filling up space, between records of monsters and files and guild names, and painful ones he’d rather not touch.

 

Cale opened his eyes. Everyone was still talking— there was a plate of food on the table. A familiar scent wafted through the air as he recognized the dish that sat in front of him. “Soup… dumplings?”

 

“Oh, Cale-nim,” It was Choi Han’s voice. “You should have some,”

 

He was handed a small bowl with a dumpling on top, and some dipping sauce. Choi Han also gave him some chopsticks. “Haaa…” he blew on it before taking a bite. “Mn…!”

 

“Is something wrong?”

 

“...I burnt my tongue,” he mumbled, chewing through carefully. Choi Han quickly handed him a glass of water. It tasted a bit different compared to the ones he had in Korea, but it was still good.

 

“So?” Beacrox asked. “I used one of the recipes you wrote down.”

 

“Mm…” he hummed, before nodding. “It tastes good. Delicious, actually. Thanks.”

 

“...Of course, young master-nim,” He sounded a bit strange— he hoped he didn’t offend him somehow. Did he come off condescending or something?

 

“...And so that’s why you should be careful when you ask to board random wagons,” Conversation flowed through. It was Bud’s voice, he was as lively as ever.

 

“That trap sounded kind of obvious though?” Hannah sounded a bit judgemental.

 

“Remember— stranger danger,” Rosalyn added.

 

“I asked you if the owner seemed suspicious, but you said they were fine!” Glenn complained.

 

“Well, that’s because I didn’t smell anything on them! How was I supposed to know they were actually—!”

 

Voices. A lot of them. They were talking about this and that. Cale heard a few technical words relating to magic, or sword techniques, maybe even something about cooking. It felt like he was being blanketed by his mundane records, and it felt… a little warm.

 

Cale’s reddish brown eyes glinted. Mundane, huh. Even though everyone there was somewhat troublesome— being dragons, assassins, mages, swordmasters and the like, they seemed to fit perfectly in his sea of dull memories. 

 

Would he be nostalgic over moments like these, too? If he sat and peeked inside his records, would he hear their voices talking about how to stay safe from ambush attacks and repeating tongue twisters?

 

Two months— less than that, wouldn’t be enough time for something like this to feel distant yet. He hummed. I wonder, Cale thought. They said your life would flash before your eyes when you died. 

 

Would he hear these voices echo then? 

 

A part of him hoped so.

Notes:

Oh ya if you guys want you can check out my tumblr! I might release some of my extra story notes and bits there maybe if you guys want (@records-of-a-slacker)

Y'know funny story this was supposed to be posted on Cale's birthday but I couldn't finish it in time TwT

Chapter 7: lullaby.

Summary:

Cale is relatively good at putting people to sleep.

Notes:

Wow! Didn't realize we were at 7 already and we're barely halfway through the first portion of this fic.

Sorry y'all I was super sleep deprived when I wrote this and that may reflect on the writing TwT aigoo, my poor life.

Alberu Crossman Roan Kingdom's #1 Koreaboo (his spice tolerance is ridiculously bad and he just thinks their weapons and CEOs are cool)

Btw should I drop the playlist I write this fic to? might be fun. there's Eine Kleine, Lemon, Mabel, etc.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Your highness,” 

 

“Hm?”

 

“Did you get any sleep last night?”

 

Alberu looked up beyond the towering stacks of paper. “Ha?”

 

Cale was looking at him. “You look like a zombie, hyung-nim,”

 

“What the hell is a zombie?”

 

“It’s, well, it’s something,” Cale shrugged, taking a sip from his tea and biting into his cookie he spoke with food in his mouth. “Either way you look like one,”

 

“Huh? Like what?”

 

“Zombies,”

 

“What?”

 

“Like you’re undead, basically.” Cale said, setting his cup down. “Your hair’s a mess and there’s 5 cups of coffee next to all those documents— not even my Team Leader drank that much— not in 2 hours at least.”

 

“Mn… I need it to stay awake.”

 

“Are these documents really that urgent? You look like you’re about to keel over.”

 

“Haa… You’re driving me nuts,”

 

Cale blinked. “I didn’t even do anything though?”

 

Alberu stared at the budget report he was reviewing at the table with different items and their prices, mumbling and counting under his breath. “Cale, what’s six plus five?”

 

“It’s four,”

 

He frowned. “No it’s not.”

 

“So you’re sane enough to tell I’m screwing with you but not enough to know the answer?” Cale questioned, and Alberu sighed again for the millionth time.

 

“Ugh, it’s… uh, eleven,” he shook his head and got back to work, stamping and writing and signing. He’s stared at so many printed letters that he even tried to sign the top of his desk earlier. He really needed to get this done— just a few more, and then he’ll take a break and rest his eyes for a bit— a few more, and…

 

A cup clacked in front of him. He looked up to see it was Cale. “Here’s some tea,” 

 

He blinked a few times. “Why?”

 

“What do you mean why? Won’t you allow this lowly dongsaeng of yours serve you, your high—”

 

“Mn, stop it,” he said, swiftly cutting Cale off with a wave of his hand. He was running out of coffee anyway. He doused half of it in two or three gulps. “It’s sweet,” he said. “A little different from the kind mister Ron usually serves,”

 

“I don’t like those,” Cale sighed as if he was greatly displeased. “This was a brew my friend— mn, Choi Jungsoo would make me a lot when I’m working,”

 

“Hm, that guy?” he commented. “Okay…”

 

A while of mostly quiet passed, save for the occasional question or inquiry from Cale. He’s done this a lot, actually— lately he’d just barge in on some random day alone, or with Raon and the kids, or Choi Han, and sit in his office, burning through his whole supply of cookies all the while. He’d bring up random topics to talk about— sometimes a little about work, sometimes just mundane normal questions. Every time he barged in, he’d stare at Alberu and ask him if he’s eaten yet. Sometimes he carries a packed lunch with him, wrapped in cloth. He’s already finished the lunch he brought in that particular day— there were more of those seaweed rolls and some fried chicken. Korean food tasted really nice.

 

Choi Han was right that time though— Cale had grown a lot more talkative, or at least more active in terms of interacting with them. For a question he’d usually just give a nod or an acknowledging hum to, now he would occasionally give an answer. Sometimes when he sees something familiar, he’d look at it or hold on to it for a little while, before mentioning a small detail from his past. Once he held one of Alberu’s fountain pens, twirled it around and said ‘When I was younger, I used to lose a lot of my pens. I’m not sure if some kids stole them or something, but it would get a bit difficult sometimes since I might not have some extra money to keep buying a new one every time I lost one, and borrowing from others too often was a bother. It was worse the first time they sent me back to school after I got sent to the orphanage, since I didn’t really have my own money yet. At some point I would start tying them with string so I wouldn’t lose them even if I had dropped one’

 

They were sudden, a bit sad sometimes though, or a bit peculiar. Also a bit concerning. Alberu learned a lot more about Cale and his life as Kim Roksoo, and what Korea was like. He thought it was interesting. Sometimes, he would also ramble on about the plot of certain stories he’s read— which was especially interesting to Alberu because they were essentially stories that could hypothetically happen in their world right now if the circumstances were right, or stories that take places in settings reminiscent to theirs but just slightly off somehow. It felt a bit uncanny.

 

Cale was absentmindedly rambling about the plot of a ‘cliche fantasy novel’ again when Alberu just sighed and asked. “You know, I’m starting to wonder what stories taking place in your world would look like,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“You know, no magic, no swordmasters or kings and beastfolk or dragons— what would that even look like?” He was genuinely curious, in all honesty. “I mean, you do have other stuff— like those cell phones and computer things, and your technology is generally more advanced.”

 

“Well,” he shrugged. “I don’t really read novels in that genre, but I think I tried a few,”

 

“What would the plot usually be?”

 

“As far as books go, authors have a wild imagination, you know? It isn’t all that different from here, I guess,” Cale said. “We’d put some kind of supernatural twist on regular scenarios, like ghosts, or monsters, or even magic but just in the modern era,” he hummed. “Ah, but there’s also this popular genre with ‘hunters’ and ‘towers’ or an apocalypse… I think it’s called a fusion fantasy?” he trailed off. “It looks something like what earth is now, just a bit more… videogame-like, with levelling and such and such,”

 

“Videogames?”

 

“Mn, it’s like…” Cale clicked his tongue as he thought about it. “Ah, I don’t know— I’ve never really played one, in all honesty. But it’s like a game, but on a screen,”

 

“Like on… computers?”

 

“Sure,”

 

“I see…” that does sound interesting. “Are there any stories without magical twists in them though?”

 

“Hm? Oh, yeah,” he nodded. “Plenty,”

 

“What’re they like?” he asked, sighing as he finished another stack. On to the next one.

 

Cale eyed him silently for a bit before humming. “Well,” he began. “I’ve read a few— they’re usually just about crazy situations, or romance, or really just regular life stories. That genre’s called slice of life,”

 

“Crazy situations?”

 

“That’s usually somewhere in the thriller or melodrama realm,” he shrugged. “There’s also stories that take place in high school, with delinquents and gangs and lots of fights or dramatic teen romances,” he listed. “There’s also office romance, contract marriages, CEOs,”

 

“Office romance…?” Alberu echoed, dumbfounded. “And what’s a CEO?”

 

“Hm, it’s, well, it stands for Chief Executive Officer,” Cale said. “It’s the highest ranking executive at a company, basically,”

 

“Company… like a guild?”

 

“Something like that…?”

 

“Huh… Sounds interesting,” he shrugged. “What’s the most interesting story you’ve read that took place in regular settings?”

 

“Hm…” Cale hummed. “There was this one story with a nice-written plot that I liked,”

 

“What was it?”

 

“A kid who’s been fighting in the military since he as young gets sent to a regular high school once he recovers some lost memories from an accident a long time ago and reunites with his family again,” Cale said. “He’s quite a good soldier— an elite, even, and all he really wants to do is live peacefully now that he’s with his family and living a regular life. Of course, trouble gets stirred up all over the place, with bullies, gangs, and some old enemies that have it out for him, but he’s so strong that he can just nip everything in the bud as soon as it starts,” He sighed. “Haaa, there’s a lot of jerks in that story, but it’s satisfying because he can just stop them immediately and beat them up, then go home and continue with his life.”

 

“...” Alberu wondered if Cale had some kind of pent-up frustration with the way he was frowning. “...Sounds interesting,” he seemed to like ‘overpowered’ main characters, and it seemed they could even be present in stories outside the fantasy genre. “What were the antagonists like, anyway?”

 

“Mn, they were your typical jerks— rich people who look down on others and act like they’re above regular people, greedy people who undermine issues when it doesn't concern them or is too much of a hassle for them to fix, maniacs who see some kind of sick pleasure in watching people suffer, or something,” he sighed. “I liked how straightforward the protagonist was— he doesn’t stick around too much for a sob story for people who did horrendous stuff and was calm and sensible. When someone was harassing his sister, he…”

 

“Mn…”

 

Alberu listened and nodded along again to Cale’s rant. It was a bit strange, but he liked how he’d fill the silence and helped pass time, even if he could be a bit of an annoyance. For all the ranting he’s done though, Alberu thought Cale really must like reading— a bit more than he expected. He’s never heard much of his rambling up until a while ago— they’d always be talking about smacking their enemies in the back and a strategy for the next potential battle. They still do, of course, but now it’s peaceful enough to fit in some things like tea brews and stories about their childhoods. It was nice for Alberu to rant a little about all that to someone, too.

 

He’s nodding along and— he’s nodding too much, actually. Alberu would sway forward, catch himself, and then his eyes would grow heavier. The ink was dripping down from the tip of his quill and on the pages as he tried to come up with a clear thought, but he was so tired and everything just felt hazy, and…

 

Thud.

 

 

Alberu slowly blinked once or twice as he slowly came to. He stared at a stack of documents sitting next to him, and got up, groaning. “Ugh…” There was a bit of dried drool that trailed down from the corner of his mouth, and he was a bit sore but otherwise a lot more rested than before. As he sat up straighter, he felt something sliding off his back and looked behind him to see it had been… a blanket. A glass filled with cold water sat on his desk, with a lid covering the top. 

 

“What…” he tried to remember what happened before he fell asleep. He was approving some proposals for reconstruction, and also penning a letter to a noble and— oh, yeah, something about high school? A teenager and a gang? 

 

Alberu looked up and almost flinched. There, on the couch across from his work desk was a certain redhead sprawled out across the cushions with an arm over his eyes, a leg hanging off the edge, and a blanket loosely draped on him. His chest rose and fell steadily as he slept. 

He sighed. “Cale…” Right, he was rambling about a novel he read once from Earth. He’d been listening when he nodded off and fell asleep. Alberu hummed. Did he decide to spend the night here? “Haaa… This punk…”

 

Sunlight filtered out through the window, and he could hear the sound of birds chirping, and he glanced at the clock. Around six or so. Alberu clicked his tongue— there was still so much stuff he needed to look through and he planned to get most of it done by the end of the night.

 

Alberu doused the glass of cool water, and moved to take a sheet of paper before stopping. He was quite drowsy the other night, but he could still tell that the ones on the table now were stacked differently compared to before— they looked a lot more neat too. 

 

He flipped through the first pile, and found that most of the things he was supposed to review were done, written out in neat and quick handwriting. The next pile were only some proposals and agreements he needed to look over and sign himself, which meant that the brunt of all the reviewing was out of the way and he could get to the more important matters. The quick and to the point yet detailed nature of the sentences and the handwriting were recognizable.

 

Alberu looked up and across his office towards the table in front of the couch Cale was sleeping in. A few cups of tea sat, emptied, as well as 3 glasses of cold water which were all empty but one that had water pooling at the bottom. His jar of cookies was also, once again, emptied. A small messy stack of paper sat laid out on one side as well as one of his quills and ink bottles, which he had been looking for a second ago. 

 

“Ha…”

 

“Mn…” As if he sensed Alberu’s baffled looks, Cale slowly stirred awake, opening his eyes and staring up at the ceiling, before turning to the side, facing Alberu. They stared at each other for a while. Then, he spoke, with a small, sun-like smile that resembled Alberu’s when he spoke to his subordinates. “What a blessing it is to open my eyes and let the first thing it gazes upon be the most brilliant star in the Roan kingdom,”

 

Alberu scoffed again. “You bastard.”

 

“That’s a bit much first thing in the morning, hyung-nim,”

 

“You're one to talk,”

 

Cale truly looked like a troublesome little bastard at that moment, “I don’t know what you mean, hyung-nim.”

 

“Ugh…” he sighed, before motioning to the stack of finished reviews on his desk. “You, are you seeing this? All of this is finished.”

 

“Indeed it is,” 

 

He raised a brow. “That tea from yesterday— did you drug me?”

 

“Drug you?” Cale scoffed, taking mock-offense and feigning hurt. “Oh, how could this lowly self ever even dare, your highness?”

 

“Seriously?”

 

Cale just shrugged. “I wasn’t lying, you know— Jungsoo did use to bring me that tea,” he stated casually. “...When I’ve been overworking myself anyway, in his words. It’s chamomile, helps induce sleep and relaxes you,” Alberu stared at Cale as he grabbed a cookie from the few that remained in the jar as he spoke with crumbs in his mouth “Then he’d start talking nonsense to me and telling long winded stories and the next thing I knew, I was asleep.”

 

“So you planned it?”

 

“Somewhat,” he shrugged. “I’ve always wanted to try it on someone else. You were about to pass out yourself anyway any second there,” Cale chuckled with a little smirk. “Don't worry, I asked Tasha which ones I could work with just to be safe.”

 

Alberu was speechless as he watched Cale slowly sit up with his messy bed of red hair, with a blanket messily strewn over him as he doused the last of the cold water inside the glass on the table. He groaned and just slumped over and laid his head on his desk. “How’d you even do all this?”

 

“This much is a piece of cake for me, you know,” Cale said nonchalantly. “I used to do paperwork and reviews all the time back when I was in charge of strategizing and when I was Team Leader,”

 

“Right…” Alberu stared at the man eating cookies in front of him and lazing around on the couch— his dongsaeng, who was actually a 36-year-old man with an office job. He blinked. “You’re driving me nuts.”

 

“Hm?” Cale tilted his head as he laid back down on the other side of the couch, looking to the side and facing Alberu who also laid his head on his desk. “I didn’t do anything this time, though?”

 

“Haaa…” he sighed, massaging his temples, before looking up. “Well, anyways,” he paused. “Thanks, Cale.”

 

Cale turned his head towards him and gave a small smile. “You should stop by the villa more often,” he remarked. “It’s close to New Year’s too, you know. Come over for a drink if you’re really thankful, at least— I’ll teach you you how to play a new year’s game,”

 

“Will there be food?”

 

“Obviously,”

 

“Korean food?”

 

Cale hummed. “A few dishes, yeah— I’m looking to make some kimchi and samgyeopsal this time around. And some Tteokguk— rice cakes.”

 

“I’ll clear my schedule,” 

 

“Ha!” Cale laughed. “There’s a seat waiting for you, your highness,”

 

The days were getting colder as winter progressed, white snow covering the streets. The sunlight would reflect on the pearly white surfaces and brighten it. He thought a little about the scarf Cale had given him before.

 

Alberu looked over all the reviews again and hummed. “Maybe I should just make you my Prime Minister after all,”

 

Cale threw a pillow at his face.

 

 

The morning was peaceful, like any other. The curtains were still drawn, the room was quiet, and the bed felt remarkably soft. How did people ever find the willpower to even get out of bed in the morning? Where do they even get all the energy? Cale wouldn’t know.

 

-He’s sleeping in again.

 

-Well, it’s better than when he was running on no sleep at all, right?

 

-Today’s a bit quieter than usual! Though I wish those little kids could tug him out of bed like they usually would.

 

-Hey Cale, you should eat.

 

-Drink some water at least!

 

“Ugh…” he groaned, turning over in his messy bed. It would be an otherwise perfect morning had it not been for the voices of the ancient powers bothering him in his head.

The glutton spoke up once again, sounding as if she was daydreaming.

 

-Hm, I wonder what breakfast is today?

 

The thief sighed, sounding a bit tired.

 

-All you ever think about is food.

 

-Why don’t we make bets, then? I bet crepes.

 

The crybaby replied to the cheapskate’s suggestion.

 

-Huh? We’re making bets? Um, maybe something with chicken in it? And maybe some vegetables. I like that chef, his meals are always balanced.

 

-Bread! The soft kind! Maybe some sourdough today, or ooh, even a sandwich!

 

-Hm, maybe some steak? The kind Cale likes.

 

Cale didn’t know if he had begun hallucinating but he could somehow hear the Super Rock shaking his head.

 

-It seems a bit early for that, don’t you think? Steak is usually for lunch.

 

-Well—

 

The door to the bedroom suddenly opened, flooding in with light from outside the hall as well as the familiar sound of cheerful laughter. Cale didn't need to open his eyes to know it was the kids, but he could also hear that their footsteps sounded heavier— like that of shoes. He peeled one of his eyes open and saw On and Hong had polymorphed, Raon still flapping his wings and flying beside them. Cale closed his eyes again.

 

“Cale~ wake up!”

 

“Come with us!”

 

“That’s right, human! Look,” Raon exclaimed, flying closer to the bed. “Did you know? The villa has a music room!”

 

“Mn…” well, of course he knew, kind of. He took note of it when he was exploring the villa for the first time. Cale just never really went in because he had no use for it.

 

“Listen to this,” Hong said, before inhaling. Instead of an exhale, what came out was the sound of a note— from an instrument. Cale opened his eyes but didn’t move. Hong was holding a recorder and grinning.

 

“Oooh! And listen to this, human!” Raon, who was flying, also had a xylophone in front of him, which was also floating thanks to magic. He tapped one of the keys with the mallet in his chubby paws and out sounded a light chime. He tapped a few more keys, and then did it in order. “Did you know, human? This is ‘do’, and this is ‘re’! There’s many more sounds, and they have an order. If you play all of them in order it goes— ‘Do re mi fa so la ti do’!”

 

It was a bit loud but Cale just nodded back with a grunt. “I see.”

 

The instrument in On’s hand was a violin. She smiled and placed the bow on the strings before playing it. This time, it was a more complex string of notes— it sounded like a part of a song. “I’m learning a quick song,” she said. “Grandpa Goldie is teaching me,”

 

“Eruhaben is?”

 

Hong nodded. “Yup!” he replied. “Apparently, he used to be really good at playing instruments,”

 

“He did, huh…” Eruhaben really fit the bill of a majestic ancient dragon. 

 

“Noona is learning the song that goes, mn, the one about the stars!” Raon exclaimed.

 

Hong piped in. “Like this— City of stars~ are you shining just for me~?”

 

“Yeah, that one!”

 

“We heard it play at a tavern once, remember?” On added. “It’s been stuck in my head.”

 

“I’m also gonna learn a song! It’s a really fun one called ‘Do-re-mi’,” 

 

“Oh! I love that one!” Raon exclaimed, playing the note for ‘do’ on his xylophone. “Do, a deer, a female deer!”

 

Hong continued by playing ‘re’ on his recorder. “Re, a drop of golden sun~”

 

On continued it with her violin. “Mi, a name I call myself,”

 

“Fa, a long, long way to run!”

 

“Haaa…” Cale slumped defeatedly as the kids dragged him out of bed by the arm and towards the door, still singing joyfully to themselves.

 

Raon flapped his wings as he pushed Cale along. “So, a needle pulling thread!”

 

Hong giggled. “La, a note to follow So!”

 

“Ti, a drink with jam and bread~” On sung.

 

“That will bring us back to Do!”

 

Right on time the kids finished their chorus, Cale found himself at the entrance of the supposed music room. The curtains were drawn back flooding his vision with sun, only to be blinded once again when he sees Eruhaben in all his majestic glory, golden sparkles of dust reflecting in the sun. Damn, it was seriously too early for this.

 

The kids pushed and pulled him over to sit on the chair. Coincidentally Ron also happened to be there, with a tray of snacks and tea at the ready. He placed a cup down on the table next to Cale. “How was your sleep, young master-nim?”

 

“...” he stared at him for a while. “...It was fine,”

 

“It’s wonderful that you’ve finally decide to rise earlier today,”

 

Cale quietly took a sip from the cup of tea he was brought, before looking down scornfully at the familiar dreaded sour taste. “..Okay.”

 

“Good morning, unlucky punk,” Eruhaben greeted casually. “It’s rare to see you awake at any hour that isn’t between twelve in the afternoon and eight in the evening.”

 

The worst part of it was probably the fact that despite all those hours he was still tired. This goddamn illness. “...Right,”

 

“Weak human, look!” Raon yelled, holding up his mallet and playing a series of notes. Cale recognized it as part of a nursery rhyme that was common in the Roan kingdom. “Ta-da!”

 

Cale nodded with a hum— wait, he should probably clap, right? It was important for kids, especially dragon kids, to get approval for stuff like this. “Good job, Raon,”

 

“You should try it too, human!” Raon exclaimed. “Look, there’s so many instruments you can choose! This one is called a ‘guitar’, all you have to do is just strum the string with your finger and it makes noise! Oh, and this one’s also like a guitar but way bigger! It’s called a harp, and you also just pull the string like this! ‘Do, re, mi, fa, so, la, ti, do’!”

 

“If you don’t like string instruments, there’s also this! It’s a flute, all you have to do is blow into it and block the holes on the top here, see? Then it makes different noises,” Hong suggested, though Cale already knew that wind instruments were way more complicated than that.

 

“Hm, no, no, if it’s Cale, then he doesn’t want to exert too much effort, right?” On piped in, and the two younger siblings let out little ‘ohh!’s as if to say ‘That’s right!’. “He needs something easy, really easy,”

 

“Hm…” Hong contemplated for a moment. Eruhaben who was sitting with his violin watched with a sigh and a slightly unimpressed look directed at Cale but shrugged a little as if it couldn’t be helped. “Oh! I know!”

 

He ran off to the place where the instruments were being held and picked out something small, before dashing back to Cale. “Here!”

 

He blinked. “This is…”

 

Raon let out a little gasp. “Oh! It’s that one!”

 

Cale held up the supposed instrument given to him. It was a steel… triangle, with a mallet.

 

“The triangle is the easiest instrument,” On said. “It also usually only ever has a few parts in orchestras, so it’s perfect for Cale~”

 

“Try playing it, Cale!”

 

“...” He struck the triangle lightly with the mallet.

 

Ting!

 

“Wow!”

 

“Good job, human! Very good job!”

 

“Do it again!”

 

Ting.

 

“Yes, yes, it’s the perfect instrument! It’s very easy, so you’ll surely master it in no time!” Raon exclaimed with sparkling eyes. “Weak human, we’re going to go practice now,”

 

“And then we’ll show you a performance, so don’t go anywhere— just sit right here, okay?” Hong added.

 

“Don’t fall asleep~”

 

He watched the children turn around and head to sit with Eruhaben, carrying their instruments while giggling and sighed. Well, it’s good that they’re trying out more things. Just the other day they pestered Cale to get out of bed and go on an outing in Rain City to go see Freesia. Though On and Hong were primarily being mentored and taught by Ron and Beacrox, Freesia would occasionally teach them a few extra skills on the side if they ever dropped by. But that day they had just come after Freesia promised to teach them how to make their own mugs from clay.

 

The results were… Well, they weren’t as ugly as the rabbit statue that Freesia herself had sold. The kids were more skilled than that. The results were a little wonky, but they still use that mug from time to time for hot chocolate, and Cale kept them in a cupboard with everyone else’s cups and mugs in the kitchen.

 

The kids even made an extra vase for him. It did look as if it was melting, but that just added… artistic value. At least that’s what Violan had said when they stopped by the estate after Cale went shopping for them. The vase was placed in the kitchen as well, on the windowsill to hold the flowers that the wolf children had brought for him some time ago. It was a very colorful display.

 

Listening to and watching the three, he thought that Hong seemed quite passionate about mastering his recorder. He also had a nice singing voice. He seems to like it, so maybe he’d want to be a musician when he grew up? The Rock Villa had a decent supply of instruments already, but maybe he should buy more like he did with the library.

 

“Goldie, goldie! You should show us another song you know on the violin,” Raon suggested.

 

“Mhm, I want to see how you move the bow,” On added, staring at her own violin. “You’re really good at it,”

 

“Ho?” Eruhaben raised a brow before chuckling. “Well, if you insist,”

 

In an elegant, practiced motion, the golden dragon placed the bow on the string, before moving it. Cale had never touched a violin in his life, and he’s never really understood how exactly it’s supposed to work. 

 

When Eruhaben began playing, an elegant and light tune flowed, following a classical melody. He’s never heard it before— but that might be because it could’ve been an old song, lost to time. He’s lived for such a long time, after all. Even the children went silent, watching with awe in their eyes.

 

After some time, he stopped, and was met with a round of applause from On, Hong and Raon, as well as a few claps from him and Ron who had also been listening. 

 

Some time later, the kids continued to spend more time practicing, looking back occasionally to show off what they learned to Cale. He just gave them nods and a small thumbs up whenever they did.

 

Cale closed his eyes a little, enjoying the lull of the mostly peaceful morning. This was quite nice, actually. The window was slightly open to let a cool breeze in, but it wasn’t too cold thanks to the blanket Raon gave him. And if he ignored the lemonade Ron decided to brew him again, the pastries that day tasted good, not too sweet. He’d have to mention that to Beacrox.

 

Thwack! 

 

He peeked his eyes open to gaze towards the window. It sounded like someone was sword training again. It could be Hannah and Bud, but he and Glenn went back to sort out some business for the Mercenary Guild the other day and said he’d be gone for 3 days. It was probably Choi Han with Hannah, maybe.

 

Thwack!

 

“...your highness, you mustn’t leave room for an opening,”

 

“Isn’t it more like you should go easier on me? I’m being as cautious as humanly possible, you know.”

 

“Pardon me, but I believe you could do better than that,”

 

“Haaa…”

 

Ah, so it was those two, he opened the window a bit wider to get a better view, and stared out. Choi Han and Alberu were sparring yet again. He could see the crown prince holding Taerang, in the form of a spear, and Choi Han with his usual dark blade. It really looked like some sort of play-fight between the sun and the darkness.

 

At some point, Alberu almost stumbled, and Cale leaned out more to shout. “Watch your footing, hyung-nim,”

 

Both heads immediately whipped around to turn in Cale’s direction, and Choi Han’s previous somewhat serious expression immediately turned into an innocent smile, waving his way. Alberu just sighed and replied. “Good morning, Mr. Slacker,”

 

Wiping their sweat with a towel, they headed over to the window Cale was peeking out of, which happened to be on the ground floor. Choi Han seemed like he barely broke a sweat and was all smiley, but Alberu looked flabbergasted at his change in demeanor.

 

“Training?”

 

“Yeah,” Alberu shrugged. “Hey, tell your friend here to be less strict with his student,”

 

Choi Han hummed. “You just need get stronger and train more, disciple-nim,”

 

“Haa…” Alberu sighed. Thinking about it now, Alberu was already pretty strong. But alas, anyone put in the same room as a munchkin protagonist couldn't help but pale in comparison. What kind of hellish training did this punk put him through?  “You’re up earlier than I expected. The kids always whine to me about how heavy of a sleeper you are. It’s a shame, I wanted to go wake you up myself,”

 

“And why would you want to do that?”

 

“Is there no greater joy than the honor of waking up my precious dongsaeng, the treasure of the kingdom, from his slumber?”

 

Way too early for any of this. “What is this ‘precious treasure of the kingdom’ crap you’re talking about?”

 

“It’s you,”

 

“No,”

 

“You can’t just reject a title— people still call you commander, savior of the continent sometimes, you know?”

 

He frowned. “I don’t want to hear any of it,”

 

Alberu smiled in a sun-like way. “Young master silver shield,”

 

“I will throw a teacup at you,”

 

Ron smiled benignly from beside him. “I would advise against that, young master-nim,”

 

A small gasp rang from behind Cale. “Cookie prince!”

 

“Oh, the crown prince is here?”

 

“Crown prince!”

 

The children all practically rushed over to the window, Raon climbing over his shoulder to wave enthusiastically at the two. “Hi cookie prince and Choi Han!”

 

Choi Han smiled back. “Hello,”

 

Hong’s eyes sparkled. “Did you bring cookies?”

 

“Ah, no,” Alberu admitted. “But I will next time, I promise.”

 

“Oh, then are you here to give Cale a golden plaque?” On asked with a smile that seemed eerily similar to Cale’s. Alberu just hummed awkwardly at that.

 

“What are you three up to?” Choi Han asked as he received a small cookie from Raon. 

 

“We’re learning how to play instruments,” On smiled, holding up her violin. 

 

“There’s a music room in the villa! Did you know?”

 

“A music room?” Choi Han peeked in, and his gaze drew to the piano that sat there. “Ah…”

 

“You can play the piano?”

 

“Mn, well…” Choi Han fidgeted with the scabbard of his sword while shrugging awkwardly. “I did use to take a few piano lessons,”

 

“Really?” Alberu commented.

 

“What songs do you know?”

 

“Um…” he trailed off. “I can do… Mary had a little lamb? Half of it...?” 

 

Alberu blinked slowly. Twice. “What?”

 

“You know, the nursery rhyme? The one that goes ‘Mary had a little lamb, little lamb, little lamb’...”

 

Raon gasped. “There’s a song about good girl Mary!?”

 

Hong leaned in curiously. “And she has little lambs?”

 

“Ah, no, well…” Choi Han was hesitant, trying to think of an explanation. Judging by Alberu’s and everyone else’s expressions, none of them seemed to have even heard the tune before. It could be that it didn’t exist in this world. That of all things?

 

“Choi Han, teach me that song!”

 

“Yeah! I bet we could learn it,”

 

“It sounds simple enough,” On nodded.

 

“Uhm…”

 

Afterwards, Alberu decided he’d stay over for a while longer at the villa to spend more time sharpening his sword, or Cale supposed, spear skills. He sure was diligent, huh.

 

Cale peeked out the window from his bedroom on the third floor, peering down at the two. “Hey!” he yelled. Alberu and Choi Han, who were sparring, yet again, looked up. “Fighting,”

 

“...” Choi Han stared at him for a while before suddenly laughing, then smiling a bit too widely as he waved back and replied in Korean. “Thanks!”

 

Alberu looked between them, confused. “Wait, what?”

 

Cale chuckled to himself. Alberu still didn’t know Korean, save for a few phrases he and Choi Han taught him here and there for secret codes and such, but this had a lot of potential. He could technically start talking smack about him with Choi Han right in front of his face.

 

“Come in for lunch in a bit,” he said. “The kimchi’s finished fermenting today,”

 

Choi Han basically lit up. “Kimchi!?”

 

“Yeah, hurry up and get in already,”

 

“Is that Korean food?” Alberu yelled up at Cale. He just sighed and nodded. They both set aside their weapons and headed in immediately. 

 

The training grounds were empty now. Cale closed his eyes.

 

It had been around one and a half weeks— almost two. He was about a quarter of the way through the time he had left and he would just get more fatigued each day.

 

The God of Death would pester him in his dreams too on some nights– he’d be asleep and then suddenly in that bastard’s office. It got worse when he started making pointless small talk and handed him coffee— the darkest most bitter brew he’s personally ever had in his life, not even Lee Soohyuk would subject himself to it— and cookies that tasted nowhere as good as Alberu’s. 

 

Sometimes though, he’d tell him more useful things regarding him and his whole terminal illness thing. What symptoms could start to pop out, what the other gods have said about it and whatever he could possibly find on the extremely rare condition. He’s also started explaining to Cale about what would happen after he died.

 

[It’s going to use up a high amount of probability and my authority as a god, but I can mend your soul enough when you die to allow you to reincarnate as any normal soul does. He explained, sipping from his coffee. But there isn’t anything else I can do.

 

“What does that mean?”

 

It means I can’t give you your memories of this life once you reincarnate. He said. Usually, for certain heroes, it’s possible because they’ve done something great for the world. But I can’t for you. 

 

“And that’s because…?”

 

Even with stuff like this, I have to play by that ancient one’s rules. He sighed. There’s a balance in everything. In order for this world to exist as it has, you have to die, in order to mend your soul and continue your cycle of reincarnation, you’ll have to give up any chance of retaining your memories of this life in the next one.]

 

“Ha…” he sighed. “My poor life,”

 

 

After dinner, the sun set and the night fell in a gentle veil of darkness that wrapped around the villa. From the window past the thinner curtains, Cale could make out stars in the sky. He doesn’t have a particular fondness or dislike of them, they’re just there. They were hard to see, at one point, because all of the light pollution is Seoul, but when the buildings came crumbling down, they’d twinkle and shine in dozens of constellations as you prowled through the night, following stars like an old voyager would. 

 

He’s seen them many times, enough to memorize them and name the constellations, and count every star overhead. Here, the sky looked different. It was as clear as it was in the apocalypse, but he couldn’t recognize a single star, though he did eventually, with Raon, who liked stars very much.

 

“Cale,” On called softly. “Can you do something before bed?”

 

Cale, who was lying on the bed, gently caressing their backs hummed. “Do you want me to read you another story?”

 

“Those are nice, but how about…” Hong trailed off. “How about you sing something?”

 

He tilted his head. “Sing?”

 

“Yeah,” On nodded in agreement. “Like… just a song before bed.”

 

“We never got to hear you sing, weak human,” Raon added.

 

“You want me to… sing you a lullaby?”

 

“Something like that,”

 

“I don’t have a nice singing voice though,”

 

“That’s okay,” Hong nodded. “We just wanna hear it, just once, okay?”

 

“We won’t tell anyone about it!”

 

“Alright, alright,” he relented with a sigh, contemplating. He was never much of a singer except— well, maybe he was? His teammates mentioned him humming or whistling every once in a while during shifts back then. Though, that was mostly because songs could get stuck in his head a lot easier compared to other people, with Record and all. He wasn’t sure if he sounded any good, though.

 

They want me to sing something? Like a lullaby? He hummed again. What am I supposed to sing to them?

 

Cale thought about it some more before pausing, then he inhaled a breath and held them a bit closer as he began. “...If I could begin to be, half of what you think of me, I could do about anything— I could even learn how to love…”

 

The children’s bright round eyes widened as they listened. They probably didn’t understand what language he was speaking in. Not even Raon would recognize it, since it was in English and not Korean. 

 

He closed his eyes. “When I see the way you act, wondering when I’m coming back, I could do about anything— I could even learn how to love… like you,”

 

“Love…. Like you,” His voice was quieter, tempo slowed— he tried to be gentle, since he was supposed to lull the kids to sleep with this. They just stared right back at him with a look of awe. Cale just smiled back. “I always thought I might be bad, now I’m sure that it’s true ‘cause…” he pulled the blanket over them up slightly. “I think you’re so good, and I’m nothing like you,”

 

The dim light of the lamp on their bedside cast a soft warm glow in the cool night, and he thought he could see that light in the kids’ eyes, blinking up at him. “Look at you go, I just adore you… I wish that I knew…”

 

His thumb lightly circled Raon’s head, in the space between his horns, and pushed back some of the fur that was getting in the way of On and Hong’s eyes. “What makes you think I’m so spea… cial.”

 

“Cale,” On called out after a short silence. “What song’s that?”

 

“I couldn’t understand any of the lyrics,” Hong added.

 

“What does it mean, human?”

 

“Hm…” he hummed. “It doesn't mean anything,” he said, and the children just looked more confused. “But it’s a song only you three know. It’s a special song that you can choose the meaning of yourself,”

 

Raon tilted his head. “A song that only we know?” 

 

“In the whole world?” Hong questioned.

 

“Yup,” he nodded, treading through On’s fur. “Only you know, and it can mean whatever you want it to.”

 

“Ah…” the children let out small gasps and Cale chuckled. 

 

“You should sleep now,”

 

“...Can you…” On paused. “Can you finish the song?”

 

“Your voice is really nice,” Hong said straightforwardly. “I’m not asleep, so you have to sing more,”

 

“That’s right. I want to listen to it all the way through, and then figure out the meaning!” Raon said, sounding a bit too determined for a 6-year-old little kid who should be asleep by now. “You must, human,”

 

Cale sighed, but couldn’t help smiling. “Okay,” he closed his eyes and resumed caressing their backs once more. “If I could begin to do,” he began. “Something that does right by you, I would do about anything, I would even learn how to love…” the kids were beginning to get drowsy. 

 

Cale slipped into his thoughts for a moment, closing his eyes. “When I see, the way you look, shaken by how long it took,” he paused. “I could do about anything. I could even learn how to love… like you,”

 

Raon started blinking slower and Cale smoothed out his scales for him. “Love… like you,” 

 

He closed his eyes and held them a bit closer. A bit more securely, as his body slowly but surely succumbed to the comfort of sleep. “Love me… like you…”

 

Maybe he should have sung to them like this more often.

Notes:

The reason Cale knew that song was because when he went to team karaoke sessions Lee Soohyuk like the main character he was would sing it like some sappy male lead because his inner acting skills come out when he's exhausted and slightly drunk. Cale records everything so it didn't matter that it was in english lol though his pronunciation was a bit off. The kids don't know that though.

 

You know what would be so funny? If Cale died next chapter

Chapter 8: joy.

Summary:

Cale and the kids go visit the black castle.

Notes:

Cale and Sheritt co-parenting goals.

Also! hello! again! oh my god this was so late TwT

So The Horrors struck and google was being a bit of a nightmare and I was a bit stuck on this chapter. This one was a little difficult to write, but I think it's also kind of important- though i'm sorry if it feels a bit off i was kinda sleepy throughout the time of making this TwT. Thank you all for the support so far bc omg like over 60 bookmarks??? over 3k hits??? y'all are insane (affectionate).

Also! here's some ART from the chapter when Cale made spicy tteokbokki! it's the watercolor piece Hong made and I drew it myself TwT. try checking out my tumblr for fic updates and even some random notes or maybe even art if I'm feeling artistic~

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Cale and Sheritt sat together on the luxurious sofas in the castle, with him sipping tea while she flipped through a book with magic. The kids were off exploring the castle, the sound of their giddy laughter echoing in the halls every now and again as they ran around. A few minutes later, she set the book down. “So,” she said. “What manner of stories do you have today?”

 

Cale hummed as he held up his teacup, closing his eyes as he contemplated. “Well,” he began. “Yesterday, Raon was really excited about explaining a spell he learned,”

 

“Hm… I see,” she nodded. “What spell was it?”

 

“I think it was a shrinking and enlargement spell,” he replied, before smiling in a satisfied way. “He enlarged the size of one of his silver coins and showed it off to me,”

 

“Ah… I see. Enlargement of matter can be quite a difficult spell. He’s very talented,” Sheritt nodded along while smiling in a very proud way. “Did anything else happen?”

 

“Ah, when he was showing it to me, he tried to talk about how he was great and mighty, and was really excited, and I guess he couldn’t decide whether to say great or mighty first, so instead he said—” Cale set his teacup down. “Human, I am very very grate-y,”

 

Sheritt let out a little gasp. “He did?”

 

“Yes, and then later on while he was talking to On, he tried to say ‘tricky’ and ‘difficult at the same time, and then he ended up saying…” he tried to pretend he was Raon. “This is very trifficult, noona,”

 

“Ah,” she gasped, clasping her hands over her mouth. “That’s so… adorable…!”

 

Cale hummed, nodding in agreement. “Three days ago, he made a drawing— we just went out shopping around the Henituse territory and a craft story caught the kids’ eyes. On bought some origami paper and a handbook, Hong got some watercolors, and Raon started out with some colored pencils— they shared the supplies with each other,” he explained, before pulling out a folded piece of paper from his pocket. “He drew a lot, but he also made this,”

 

He slid it across the table, and with magic, it levitated and unfurled itself before Sheritt. She gasped again, transparent finger brushing against the surface. “Is that… me?” 

 

Cale nodded. “Mhm,” he said. The drawing itself depicted Raon, as well as Sheritt in her polymorphed form standing next to him with the Black Castle in the background. It had all the standards of a children’s picture, green grass, blue sky that wasn’t quite colored in all the way with patches of white, a circular sun in the corner with some lines pointing outward, As well as some flowers here and there. Sheritt was holding a large silver shield and an expression that made it look like she was laughing, and written above her was ‘Strong Mom!!’ with an arrow pointing at her, with the same for Raon saying ‘The Great and Mighty Me!! :)’. 

 

She was basically gaping  with her hands over her mouth, spluttering trying to figure out what to say. Her magic spoke for her, and within a single snap of her fingers, the paper was framed, the original painting within the fancy golden picture frame that she used set aside. Cale quietly sipped his tea, knowing Raon also made a drawing for him which he had safely kept and displayed in his bedroom, as well as Hong’s watercolor portrait of him cooking, and On’s folded crane which he taught her how to make sitting on top of the night stand.

 

The frame promptly floated off, before being hung on the wall. Sheritt was still all-smiles as she stared at it from a distance as if it was the greatest, most priceless piece of art she’s ever owned. Well, Cale couldn’t deny that. 

 

Today was their second weekly visit to the Black Castle. Every week, on whatever day they’d feel like, Cale and the kids, sometimes maybe with Choi Han or anyone else, would come to visit so Raon could see his mom and generally just hang out at his castle. He’d also take the opportunity to check on Lock, who’s regularly training with Sheritt along with some of the wolf children, and the Dragon Half-Blood.

 

“Um, how has he been?”

 

“He’s been eating well. Lately he’s started liking yoghurt— he also likes apples a lot more when they’re cut to look like a bunny— it’s something Beacrox started doing recently.”

 

“I see…”

 

Sheritt and Raon have gotten a lot closer over the past few days, though they could seem somewhat awkward with each other sometimes. That was fine— they were slowly making up for lost time together, and that was what mattered. “He’s also started really liking reading this book with a collection of fairy tales. He’d carry it everywhere he goes and talks about it all the time,”

 

“Oh, what’s it called? Perhaps I might have more in my library,”

 

“Hm, ‘The Snow Queen And More Winter Tales’, I think,”

 

“I see, I see,” she nodded, seeming serious. Cale just continued to dip his sugar cookies in his tea— Sheritt had started getting some since he heard the kids liked them so they could have them every time they came by.

 

Each time they visited, Cale and Sheritt would talk to each other about how Raon is doing when he wasn’t at the castle. Things like his progression with magic, or whatever interesting thing may have happened over the course of a few days. 

 

Cale started glancing around to examine the castle’s interior. Tall grand pillars, a large ceiling with an equally grand, but not over-the-top chandelier, as well as pristine windows that let light filter in. There were also shelves of books and boxes of toys lying around, and lots of places to sit and lounge around. It was refined and great, befitting of a Dragon’s castle, but also cozy and comfortable. He thought about what Sheritt had said the day they stumbled across the Castle of Light.

 

“I wanted this to be the children’s hometown.” 

 

“Sheritt-nim,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“...If I may ask,” he began, staring into his reflection within the surface of the sweet tea. “What did you think when you realized that you wouldn’t be able to be there for the birth and life of your children?”

 

Sheritt ‘s eyes widened at the question, like she wasn’t expecting it. And to be frank, it might’ve been a sensitive topic. Even so, she didn’t seem offended or troubled when Cale asked. “Well,” she began. “That’s quite a peculiar question,”

 

“...You don’t need to answer,”

 

“It’s fine,” she smiled. “I was simply surprised by the suddenness. But I don’t mind providing an answer, because you’re Raon’s guardian as well,”

 

“Mn…”

 

“I knew since the moment I held the two in my hands that they’d be powerful,” Sheritt said. “And as a result, they’d take quite a while to hatch. Longer than the rest of my life span as a dragon, you see,” she explained, picking up a sugar cookie. “I wanted to be there for the lives of those two children. And that was why I made this castle,” she smiled, before her expression fell solemnly. “I wanted it to be somewhere where they could grow up safely until they were ready to leave, and I wanted it to be a place they could return to,” Sheritt smiled again. “And so afterwards, I thought a lot about what these children may need. I had Nelan help me as well,”

 

“Nelan Barrow…?” Cale echoed. That was the name that Choi Jung-Gun had assumed in this world. 

 

“Yes, that punk,” she nodded with a nostalgic glint in her eyes. “I’ve learned a lot of things from him too. When I was building this castle, he suggested that the children may have lots of interests. So we prepared lots of different things,” She had a fond look in her eyes as she thought of Raon. “I thought that as dragons, they may want to learn as much as possible about the world from inside the castle, so I prepared books on every subject I could think of— I believe there were encyclopedias on flora and fauna, astronomy, of course, magic, history and the like,”

 

Sheritt was right about that, Cale thought. Raon was the diligent and curious type, who was always asking questions about every new thing he saw. 

 

“And stories.” She added. “I wrote a few of them myself, you know,”

 

“You did?”

 

“With Nelan— we wrote a few tales together,” the ancient former dragon lord had quite the prideful smirk on her face. “Yes, yes, we based many of the stories off of our own adventures— we even picked aliases for ourselves! It was quite entertaining, I must say— we ended up with a trilogy,”

 

“Ah…” Suddenly, Cale recalled the fact that Sheritt and Choi Jung-Gun had come up with the title ‘Dragon Slayer’ simply because they thought it sounded cool, and it didn’t seem all that out of place. Though it sounded like the kind of thing teens in their chunni phases would have cooked up.

 

“Mn, and books weren’t all. I thought perhaps they may not be studious types, or maybe even just disinterested in reading altogether, so I also prepared other things— I bought some board games, every kind I could find, a few toys he may like, and when he would grow older, a few complex puzzles and contraptions. I prepared somewhere he could freely experiment with his magic, like a training ground of sorts.” her smile grew a bit smug. “These walls are also quite strong, you know? They could take damage from most magical attacks and still stay standing. Near-indestructible, you could say, so they can choose to mess with as many spells as they wished.”

 

“As many spells as they wished, huh…” Cale hummed. He supposed that would be an important thing to dragons. 

 

“Ah, and board games as well as toys— I remember we bought out many stores. And I also decided to have lots of plants inside, since Nelan said it helped make the place feel more cozy. And lots of pillows, and lots of space to explore as freely as they’d like, and…” she trailed off. “Well, I just tried to think of everything I could have prepared for those children,” her expression faltered slightly, as if she was remembering something unpleasant. “It didn’t… go as I had planned it to,” she said, voice dropping. 

 

“But, at least that child has found his way back to this castle.” Sheritt was smiling in a somewhat wistful way. “I truly hope that now, I’m able to protect and cherish him as I have promised to do, and that child would forgive his weak mother for failing him so,”

 

It must have been difficult, for both Sheritt and Raon.

 

For Raon, to be trapped somewhere lonely and cold as an egg for hundreds of years, only to hatch in a place where he’d be chained down and tortured without even feeling the touch of sunlight. For so long.

 

And for Sheritt, to be sealed away and separated from her children, powerless to even leave in search of him and feeling as if in the end, her attempt to protect her children only brought them harm.

 

“Have I ever thanked you?” 

 

“Pardon?”

 

“For saving him,” she smiled. “For cherishing him, teaching him, protecting him, healing him— for loving him,”

 

Cale stilled, not knowing how to respond. “You don’t…”

 

“I should thank you again,” she said. “Because that child is the greatest and most precious joy in my life,”

 

The name ‘Raon Miru’ was composed of two pure Korean words, and meant ‘Joyful Dragon’. Cale had intended that name as a wish for Raon to grow up happily.

 

“Ah, and have I ever told you what I thought about Raon’s name?”

 

“...Ah?”

 

“I’m not sure what it means, but it’s a great name,” she smiled at him. Cale thought that Raon must’ve gotten his bright smile from his mom. “I like it, thank you for choosing such a nice name for him,”

 

Raon’s name, meaning ‘Joy’, was also a reflection of his mom’s love for him and her greatest wish.

 

“You know,” Cale spoke. “Whenever we’re out on walks, Raon would sometimes point out things he sees that reminded him of you,” Sheritt’s eyes widened. “This one time, mn, two weeks ago, he started picking up white flowers or just white things in general and brought them back home. When I asked him about it, he said ‘They’re like mom’ while smiling.”

 

The former dragon lord, stilled as she listened.

 

“When it started snowing, the kids made snowmen outside. They made a few, one of themselves, Choi Han, Ron, some other people, mn, me— but Raon also made a little dragon figure of you and put it right next to his,” Cale explained. “Before we’d come over, Raon would sometimes ask me or Eruhaben-nim what kinds of things dragon lords might be interested in so he could know what kinds of things he could talk about with you. He also asks me to remind him of interesting things that have happened over the past few days so he could tell you stories of what he’s been up to outside— sometimes he’d ask me or his siblings if they were interesting enough,” Cale explained with a small amused smile at the memory. 

 

“He isn’t a timid little kid, and though he’s a little awkward around you sometimes, he loves you,” Cale paused. “He also told me once, some time after finding this castle, that he was happy he had a mom,”

 

There were tons of crappy parents in the world. Sheritt was flawed, like any other person was, but she wasn’t one of them.

 

“I…”

 

“Maybe it isn’t my place to say, but I don’t think he’s ever been mad at you for what he went through,” Cale said, thinking of Raon. “You’ve made mistakes before this, but you aren’t a failure. You’re only one if you decided to abandon and turn away from him— but you didn’t.” he continued. “Raon is still six. He’ll be seven soon.” Cale inhaled. “You still have a lot of time with him to make up for things, and you’re doing more than fine,”

 

Cale thought about his mom— Kim Roksoo’s mom. His memories of her were a bit fuzzy since it’s been so long. But she was a calm, soft-spoken person, and she was kind.

 

“I…” her pupils were shaking as she tried to respond once more. 

 

If she could magically come back to life or talk to him right now, would she smile like Sheritt did? Or would she have cried because of the way her son had lived? Would she even say a word at all?

 

“...Thank you,” The dragon lord of protection’s smile shone like a silver shield.

 

Maybe she would even come to hate the kind of selfish person Cale became.

 

 

The door of the black castle opened, and in walked a pair of dragons, one nagging the other about having manners and some chore he had forgotten to complete the other day, and another just sighing and nodding in defeat with a quilt of arrows.

 

“It’s Dodori! And Auntie Mila!” Raon exclaimed with sparkling eyes as he flew out of his mom’s arms and shot out to greet him, Hong and On in tow. Cale thought it was like having distant cousins come over to visit suddenly during the holidays.

 

With the kids swarming all over him, Dodori, the closest thing to a chunni dragon, more so than Sheritt, that this world had, smirked with pride and pulled out a bunch of books from his satchel— Cale shivered when he recognized the cover of a few of them. They were books about heroes— some specifically about him. 

 

“Dodori, you should go greet your teacher too,” Mila chided. “He’s standing right there,”

 

“Ah,” he realized, turning to Cale and clearing his throat. “Ahem. Hi, teacher,”

 

Cale tilted his head and awkwardly replied. “Hi?”

 

“Ah, and hello, Dragon lord-nim,” he said, somewhat awkwardly greeting Sheritt. She gave an equally awkward thumbs up, and the kids immediately pulled Dodori down the hall to explore some rooms they found in the castle.

 

“So, teacher-nim,” Mila set aside her giant scythe and walked over to Cale. “I heard something quite interesting from senior Eruhaben some time ago,”

 

Cale’s teacup was shaking slightly. “...You did?”

 

“Yes— I must say, it wasn’t something I expected from you,” she hummed. “I heard you wanted to be a farmer?”

 

Cale blinked once. Then twice. Slowly. “What.”

 

Mila blinked. “Oh? Was it a joke?”

 

“Wait, what?” Sheritt piped in with a ton of sheer confusion from behind him.

 

“I… um, I mean— no, no it wasn’t.” He admitted. “I… do plan on starting a small farm,” he quickly added. “A small farm. Small scale. Just an orchard, some tomatoes, something easy—”

 

“So it wasn’t a joke,” Mila looked baffled for some reason as she said that aloud to herself. “Huh.” she seemed to be contemplating as she stared at Cale, lifting up one of his arms and sliding up his sleeve to examine his thin bony arms. This was quite scary because Mila was extremely tall and quite muscular. She clicked her tongue. “With this build?”

 

It was the exact same thing that Eruhaben had said. “...Yes.”

 

“Could I ask why?” she questioned. “I have to admit I’m quite curious,”

 

“Um…” Cale hesitated, but vaguely explained the agreement he had made with Lee Soohyuk and Choi Jungsoo as he did with Eruhaben. She seemed just as perplexed, but nodded along. “Well, if it’s really something you’d like to do, then I’m not trying to stop you,”

 

Cale was confused. Why would she try to stop him?

 

“Though, farming is back-breaking work,” she said. “You have to tend to them every single day. I often have to wake up early, as well. You need to toil and plow the fields, dig up the ground, sow the seeds, water them every single day, keep track of their growth, and then harvest it all and start again.”

 

Just listening to her list everything was making Cale’s head spin. “It will be a small scale farm,”

 

“You’ll still have to do all of those things, you know,” she sighed. “Well, winter’s no time to be planting anything, so you’ll need to wait until it warms up— spring, I’d reckon,”

 

“Mn…” he won’t even live long enough to see the next spring, but alright.

 

“For now though, I’d start on building up more muscle— you’re all skin and bones, teacher-nim,” she commented. “Do you eat enough? Little Raon there and the two cat children seem well-fed enough,”

 

“I—”

 

“If being a farmer is really what you want to do, you’ll need to do it properly or you’ll only be working hard without any actual fruit from your labor,” Mila said, sitting Cale down on the sofa again before sitting next to Sheritt. “Listen closely. What did you say you wanted to plant? An orchard, some tomatoes? For an orchard, you’ll need to—”

 

Cale ended up sitting there for an hour listening to detailed farming advice from Mila. Even Sheritt had to sit through it, though she seemed somewhat invested in the whole ordeal. Cale just nodded along and drank more tea.

 

It turned out there were a bunch of things he needed to consider going into farming. Like the distance between seeds when planting, how deep they should be planted, types of soil, types of fertilizer, equipment that sounded quite heavy for him, some things to watch out for— things like that. 

 

All of it was quite useful information, though it sounded extremely daunting. It felt like it was a shame he wouldn’t be able to make use of it. 

 

I did mention it to On, Hog, and Raon already, though. Before the God of Death went and contacted him, though Cale was busy dealing with some (Alberu dealt with most of it) part of the aftermath of the whole battle at Puzzle City, he had also started planning out his slacker life. He even mentioned the farm to the kids, and they already seemed somewhat excited about it.

 

Maybe he should keep note of this for them, just in case.

 

 

Lock held his shield in his hands, palms covered in sweat as he polished it with cloth, enough that he could even see his reflection on the surface. 

 

Today was another day of training with Sheritt. Though she was nice, she could also be quite ruthless. How many laps had he and the rest of his siblings been running since this morning?

 

Even so, he was determined. He heard young master Cale was here today with Raon as well as On and Hong. He didn’t want to seem uncool in front of the two younger kids and the person he looked up to, so he’s powered through all day.

 

He felt something hard and cool lightly tap on top of his head and immediately looked up, only to be met with Cale holding a glass of water for him. His eyes widened. “Ah— young master Cale!”

 

“Sheritt-nim told me you’ve been practicing all day,” he said, motioning for him to take the glass of water and drink. “Make sure to take a break,”

 

“Ah, yes,” he nodded. “Please don’t worry about me,”

 

“Hm…” he hummed with a sigh before shrugging, sitting next to him on the wide bench. “You’ve been training often?”

 

“Yes,” he nodded again. “I said I’d get stronger, after all,”

 

“You’re already plenty strong,” he replied simply. 

 

Lock simply smiled back. “But I’d still like to get stronger,” he said. “There’s no way to know what kind of threats there are in the world— I want to be ready no matter what. I should at least make sure my abilities remain sharp.”

 

There were many times when Lock thought he was strong enough, and many times he’d been disproven of that fact. He’d thought their village was strong, and that they’d certainly be safe, but then they were attacked by Arm one day and lost everything. That was all it took.

 

“I see,” Cale nodded, as if agreeing, before eyeing the shield he held. It was nowhere near as great or strong as Cale’s own shield. Even so, Lock kept it well polished— it didn’t shine like silver but instead reflected clearly. Cale was looking at that well-cared shield. “Do you like using the shield?”

 

His answer was immediate. “I do,”

 

“Why is that?” 

 

“Because it can protect the people around me,” and because it’s a power that you use better than anyone. “I want to be… someone who stands at the vanguard and keeps people safe.”

 

That time at the Gorge of Death, during the battle with Arm and the northern kingdoms, and when he couldn’t go berserk, with a sick Raon burning up in his arms, Lock felt like the most powerless existence in the universe. 

 

“Stay behind me,”

 

The back that stood in front of him at that time, bearing the burden of attacks alone with a single silver shield, wasn't large enough to cover his tall frame, but even so Lock felt that Cale’s back was broad like a fortress— like a shield, unwavering. 

 

He decided, that’s the kind of strength I want to be. 

 

Cale hummed contemplatively, leaning back. “It’s good that you want your people to be safe— that is very important,” he said. “However, you should also remember what the shield was created for.”

 

He blinked. “What the shield was created for…?”

 

“While it’s true it’s made to protect other people as well,” he spoke. “It’s also a tool meant to protect the holder.” Cale looked at him. “It’s a tool to keep you safe before anyone else.”

 

“...” Lock wasn’t sure how to reply.

 

“And there isn’t anything wrong with that,” he added. “Remember that you can’t save or protect anyone if you’re hurt or dead, but even apart from that, your life is precious as well, so it’s only natural that you should protect it,”

 

“My life is… precious,”

 

“Of course,” Cale nodded. “And if you feel like you can’t protect yourself, just fall back— there are lots of people around you who will,”

 

“Ah…”

 

“Lock,”

 

He straightened. “Yes?”

 

“Will you continue to wield the shield in the future?”

 

Lock didn’t hesitate this time either, nodding. “Yes,” he replied. “I will.”

 

Cale hummed at that, closing his eyes momentarily like he was thinking. “If you do,” he spoke. “Hold on to those ideals, but don’t forget what I told you. Will you promise to do that?”

 

“Yes, sir!”

 

“You don’t have to shout,” he sighed, leaning back. “Mn, this is from Raon and the kids— they’re inside so you should talk to them.”

 

A slice of crisp, warm apple pie wrapped up in cloth. Lock’s eyes sparkled. “Ah..” he unraveled it slowly. “Thank you, young master-nim,”

 

“Thank the kids— they were the ones who asked me to bring it to you,” Cale said. “They’re waiting inside so you should head in already. Have you eaten yet?”

 

“Oh, I did have something earlier—”

 

After some time, Lock headed inside the castle once more, carrying his silver shield that started to feel lighter.

 

 

Cale walked around the castle perimeter, turning the corner. There in a patch of grass outside near the side of the castle was the Dragon Half-blood, who was conversing with Mary. They had become good friends over the course of the time he’s been on their side. 

 

“Human!” a familiar voice called from behind him, and Cale turned around to see a certain little dragon flying his way. “There you are! What are you doing? Are you on a walk, weak human? You should have said so!”

 

“Mn… really? Sorry,” he smiled as he fixed the crooked white knitted hat placed on top of Raon’s head haphazardly. It had a small stain that Cale recognized from the chocolate chip cookies Sheritt kept in a jar on the table. 

 

“Oh, it’s Mary and the Dragon half-blood,” Raon pointed out with a curious tone. “Are you going to say hi to them too, human?”

 

“I am, just for a bit,” 

 

“Can I come with you too?”

 

“Of course you can,”

 

“Okay!”

 

The tall dark bone dragon turned once he sensed his presence, wings generating a gust of wind as he did and rustling the surrounding grass like a breeze. Though he was a bone dragon, the shadow in the hollow space in his eyes seemed as if it was lit up and brimming with more life than Cale’s ever seen from him.

 

“Oh,” he said in his dark monotonous voice that seemed similar to Mary’s, though it had more emotion. “Hello, young master-nim.” he looked over at Raon who was staring back at him with a small tilt of his head from behind Cale’s shoulder. “Ah, and Raon,”

 

He seemed a bit fidgety or nervous— he’s always been whenever he sees Cale. Actually, it was more like awkwardness. Were all dragons really like this whenever they talked to someone? 

 

Maary greeted them in a similar manner, and though she was as mechanic-like as usual, there was a small tug at the corner of her lips as she looked at both Cale and Raon. “Good afternoon, young master-nim, Raon-nim,”

 

Raon grinned brightly in response. “Hi Mary and Dragon half-blood!”

 

“Have you been well?” Cale asked, looking at them both. Mary gave a nod, and the Dragon half-blood hesitated a little.

 

“I’m fine,”

 

Cale stared at him for a little bit. His body was quite large— he could fly around and have his wings cover a chunk of the forest. He didn’t seem like he was in pain or all that uncomfortable as he awkwardly looked at Cale and Raon. 

 

Things have come to a peaceful lull since the war ended, and the Dragon half-blood had been stationed on standby at the castle since then, though Cale doubted they’d really be expecting much fighting any time soon, much less battles that may require his assistance.

 

In the time after the defeat of the White Thing and during visit to the castle, Raon, Sheritt, as well as the Dragon half-blood had slowly gotten more used to each other and gradually became friendlier. The Dragon half-blood was still nervous though he was trying his best to figure out what exactly he could do to repent, in his words, and Sheritt was still a bit tense around him, and Raon was still kind of awkward. But they were talking more often, and Raon in particular often striked up random conversations along with On and Hong. Sheritt and the dragon Half-blood also had plenty of time to get to know each other and figure out their feelings since they stayed in the same space.

 

It would take a while, but eventually they’d figure something out.

 

Raon flew past Cale and rummaged through his pocket dimension before pulling out two slices of apple pies. Though they weren’t necessarily warm, they were no longer soggy anymore. He flew over to Mary and the Dragon half-blood and held out both of the slices in his chubby paws. “Have you eaten yet? You should eat!” he said. “Take it!”

 

Mary nodded. “Thank you, Raon-nim,” 

 

The Dragon half-blood’s dark void-like eyes sparkled as his head bent down to peer at Raon’s apple pie. This was the first time he’d been offered an apple pie from Raon, though he’s brought various random trinkets to show off and occasionally let him keep before. He held out one of his bony paws and Raon placed it there.

 

Cale hummed. Could bone dragons technically even eat? He’s heard from Mary that he’d need dead mana sometimes, but that was all he remembered. The Dragon half-blood looked at the miniscule little pie in his paws for a while, like observing a precious, delicate art piece, before speaking. “...Thank you, Raon,”

 

“Dragon half-blood! What were you talking about with good girl Mary? Is it something interesting?” Raon questioned, flying up to his face. “Is it about magic? I’m curious!”

 

“Well…”

 

Cale sighed, crossing his arms. Well, they were getting along— he thought it was kind of like a stubborn baby brother and the guilty and awkward older brother trying to chat about something. Mary was also there though, so he wasn’t really worried.

 

This kid… he stared at the bone dragon in front of him who had the soul of a person. It must be at least a little uncomfortable in that body. Does he ever get cold? Or hot? Is it possible to even feel through those bones? Maybe at some point they could work on some way to get him at least into a more convenient body, if that’s even possible. At least one that could fit into buildings.

 

Haa… I guess I need to make sure he at least hears his name before I die.

 

Just calling him the ‘Dragon half-blood’ all the time was a mouthful, and also it was important that people had something to call themselves. Cale was planning on coming up with something for him a little later with more room to think, but it couldn’t be helped that he was going to die soon.

 

Staring at Raon, Mary, and the Dragon half-blood talk, Cale learned a strange fact— even bone dragons could smile. 

 

“Human, we should head back inside now,” Raon said. “Mom mentioned that she found a book that she and her friend wrote earlier! Dodori said it was really cool and good and they even started talking a lot! I’m curious,”

 

“Haa…” they were walking around the castle now while Raon rambled on about things he found interesting, like new discoveries he made about the castle and the cool board game he found in a secret chest on the second floor. Cale however was wondering about that book he was talking about. It’s a bit too early for Raon’s chunni phase now and he seriously needed to check what kind of influence Dodori was to his kids. Especially after hearing about all the exaggerated tales he talked about regarding Cale from one of his books.

 

“It was stories about mom’s adventures— they’re like ours, human! But less looting and more fighting,” Raon said. “Apparently there was this rea~lly big snake! And then mom used her shield and rammed right into its face! And broke all its teeth and fangs!”

 

“Is that really how that works?”

 

“Anything is possible if you’re a great and mighty dragon!”

 

“Of course, of course,” he nodded.

 

Raon smiled brightly, one again, the sun reflecting in a dazzling gleam within his dark blue eyes as he spoke in an animated tone during their walk. 

 

“Raon,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“Do you like your name?”

 

The name ‘Raon Miru’ meant Joyful Dragon. It was a name that Cale chose because he wished that Raon would grow up with enough joy to make up for the four years of loneliness and pain he endured tortured in the cave. 

 

“What a silly question!” he exclaimed. “Of course I do! It’s my name!”

 

But in the end, he ended up not only being such a cheerful little kid, but a source of joy for everyone around him. Including Cale.

 

Raon was certainly his own person, but he was also Cale’s Raon. Cale’s joy.

 

“Human, why are you smiling like that?” the little five year old questioned. Cale’s reddish-brown eyes glinted. “Ooh, did something good happen?”

 

“You could say that,” he shrugged, patting his head gently and caressing his oddly fluffy scales. “Though it’s a good thing that’s happened to me a long time ago,”

 

“Hm? A long time ago?” he seemed perplexed by the answer. “But how come you’re still happy about it?”

 

He smiled. “How could I not be?” he replied. “I think I’ll be happy about it all the time,”

 

Raon seemed even more confused. “Huh? What is it?”

 

“That’s a secret.”

 

“Whaaat?” he pouted. “Tell me!”

 

“Nope,”

 

Raon frowned and turned away in a huff as they reached the castle gates. “You’re so weird, weak human,” he sighed. “Really weird.”

Notes:

haha gotcha bet you thought i might kill cale but nah he's got another month of suffering in him left :)

I am so incredibly ill over Sheritt Raon and DHB when I think i'm okay they just fricking pounce on me like a lion and I am shambled mess on the floor. DHB redemption supporter he's trying his best. (haven't been far along 2 but I know things do get better for him and I'm trying to make that happen in this fic.

they make me cry so hard man sheritt just wanted to keep her kids safe.

Chapter 9: seaside.

Summary:

Cale, Choi Han, and the kids go to a gathering at the Ubarr territory.

Notes:

hello!!!! i'm here!!! whew, its been like 10 days??? man, sorry guys, the angst fluff train is back on track though. uh, i'm too exhausted to think of what to say but i have an exam tomorrow and i hate biology and physics with a passion. ah, i guess the reason this fic was so late was because my laptop kinda broke? and my phone is remarkably insufferable to really write on.

also, heads up this chapter may feel a bit weird- i was going through it while writing this and i wish i could take a month long holiday and nap. may edit or revise certain bits later after a saner version of me rereads the chapter maybe if thats okay.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Cale wasn’t sure how exactly he got here— it felt almost ridiculous, actually. But the northeastern nobles— Eric, Amiru, Gilbert— and now also Taylor and Cage, decided to hold a gathering, specifically at the Ubarr territory. Normally Cale would have been a bit more reluctant about it or even maybe put it off for some other time, but at this point he may as well.

 

Really, it can’t get any more cliche than this—

 

The sound of the waves crashing against the rocks near the shore and the cold winter breeze that blew in through the window was a unique experience— and the repeated noise was almost soothing. He could fall asleep to it like white noise if the rest of the people at the gathering weren’t so busy chatting.

 

What am I, some sickly Victorian child on the brink of death? Cale winced. That may have been too oddly accurate for his liking. But really, it was incredibly cliche. It almost felt ominous. He wasn’t going to die just yet— he still had a whole month left to go. Cale tried not to think of that too much right now.

 

“And I can do… this!” Raon yelled, before a bottle of wine began to float, pouring its contents inside of Gilbert’s, Amiru’s, Taylor’s, Eric’s, and everyone’s glass one by one. Multiple gasps of amazement rang out as well as some claps.

 

“Wow…!” 

 

“That’s truly remarkable, Raon-nim!”

 

Eric clapped with an awed expression. “Thank you so much!”

 

“Heh. This much was nothing for the great and mighty Raon Miru!” the little dragon puffed up his chest and smiled somewhat smugly as they continued to applaud for him. Cale just sighed and patted his head to show his thanks, wiping crumbs from the corner of his mouth.

 

At the moment, Raon was busy showing off his magic to the rest of them. Cale had decided to reveal the little dragon’s presence to the three nobles, excluding Taylor and Cage who he’d already told, as he’d decided he could trust them with such a fact. Of course, one day when Raon was older he could choose to hide or flaunt his identity as a dragon as he wished, but since he was still a little kid learning about the world right now, Cale had been very careful about making sure the people who knew about Raon were trustable. He also told the three of them about On and Hong as well. 

 

He recalled the way that went, approximately half an hour ago.

 

[In the blink of an eye, On and Hong leapt out of Cale’s arms and turned from a pair of cute cats into two kids. They were both wearing the new clothes Cale had bought them about a few days prior during their trip shopping around the territory, and Cale made a satisfied note to himself that the style suited them both. Not a second after, Raon followed suit, switching off his invisibility and flying near Cale’s shoulder.

 

Eric’s teacup fell to the ground, and the three were gaping so widely you could fit an entire slice of apple pie inside. Taylor and Cage, who were sitting beside them, just sipped their glasses of Henituse wine while looking away.

 

“In order from oldest to youngest, this is On, Hong, and Raon. On and Hong are 12 and 9-year-old fog cat tribe members, and Raon is a 6-year-old dragon,” Cale explained in the most straightforward and simple way he could manage. “Ah, and I’m their guardian. They travel with me and are quite remarkable children.”

 

“...”

 

“Hello, weak humans! I am the great and mighty Raon Miru, and I am 6-years old!”

 

“Hi! I’m Hong, nice to meet you— though we’ve already met before~”

 

“I’m On, it’s nice to finally talk to you~”

 

The three of them stared in total frozen shock for exactly 8 solid seconds. Meanwhile, Taylor and Cage were watching with strange expressions while they swirled their glasses, almost as if attempting to hold back laughter. Finally, Eric put his teacup down, of which its contents had been spilled everywhere, and stood up abruptly.

 

“You had kids?!”

 

It took a second for Cale to process. “Hu—”

 

“All this time, you’ve been taking care of these kids for— for how long, exactly…? And while commanding a war…!? Multiple wars!?” This was the most stunned Cale had personally ever seen the usually composed Gilbert. 

 

“Wait—”

 

“You had these adorable kids with you all this time…” Amiru trailed off in a tone of, strangely, disappointment in Cale, before all the three of them suddenly stood together and slammed the table.

 

“And you didn’t tell us!?”]

 

The end of the record was marked by the sound of laughter from Taylor and Cage behind them who were having a bit too much fun with the whole ordeal.

 

What followed those events was a wave of dozens of questions, both for Cale and the kids. Eric nearly shook him about just from how concerned and surprised he was about the revelation. Afterwards, they started basically pampering the kids while asking a bunch of questions like a group of doting aunts and uncles. Tea, cookies, a dozen deserts, some steak— anything and everything really. Taylor and Cage also joined with the pampering, as Taylor had brought books from his library that he thought the kids may like, as well as cakes from yet another bakery in their territory.

 

On was sitting comfortably on Amiru’s lap while reading a book she had been recommended by her, and seemed quite invested as she swiped from a pile of dried fruits on the table without looking up to snack on. She called Amiru ‘unnie’ now. Hong meanwhile seemed to be chatting up a storm about something with Raon, telling stories to the rest of the people at the table. 

 

“Are you hungry? Do you want something to eat? What other pastries do you like?” Eric asked.

 

“Oh, thank you— is it okay if I get more of these little cakes, hyung?” Hong asked politely.

 

“The petit fours? Of course,” Amiru smiled, calling over a maid and motioning for more.

 

“Is there anything else you want? This hyung can also bring you more sweets— you should try this one, it’s from a renowned bakery in the Chetter territory that Gilbert brought. One more can’t hurt, right?” Eric offered. They really were like a group of aunties fawning over their cute new niece and nephews. Choi Han, who was standing behind Cale, had a very rbight smile on his face as he watched the entire thing unfold.

 

Hong received the plate before smiling widely. “Wow, thank you so much hyung and noona! You’re the best!”

 

Eric and Amiru both looked as if they had physically melted on the spot. Eric, who even sounded like he was sniffling, reached out and caressed the top of Hong’s bed of bright red hair. “Yes, yes, this hyung and noona will do anything for you— just ask, okay?”

 

“Okay!”

 

“Ah…” Eric was smiling as he mumbled something to Hong that Cale didn’t really catch. Hong’s eyes widened as he heard what he said, before inching closer and whispering something with a curious look. On, who was reading, looked up with an expression of equal intrigue, and Amiru and Eric smiled as they began to talk about something.

 

Meanwhile, Raon was showing off more of his magic and rambling on about the various things he experienced and found interesting to Gilbert, Taylor, and Cage. 

 

“...And in the morning, we all had flowers stuck everywhere! The weak human is very lazy and wouldn’t get out of bed, so we had to pick the flowers in his hair off one by one since they got tangled in. There were petals all over the bed, and the weak human even almost fell back to the mattress while he was sitting up! Drooling, even!” Raon explained with enthusiasm, spinning around his glass of grape juice. He wanted to hold fancy glasses like the adults as well. 

 

“Oh? Is that so?” Taylor had a very intrigued expression as he listened. In fact, Cage and Gilbert both leaned in to listen while eating a few cookies to Raon’s ramblings, while Cale shrinked back a little in embarrassment as he heard Cage chuckle. Looking beside him, Choi Han was even trying to hold in his own laughter. You can count on a little 6-year-old to reveal basically everything about you in a single interaction with someone else.

 

“Uh-huh! And then he was so~ sleepy, that when he washed his face in the bathroom, he even fell asleep there!” Raon exclaimed. “This weak human can fall asleep anywhere! He falls asleep while reading books at the library, he falls asleep at the dining table, and at the terrace, and on the sofa, sometimes even outside near a tree!” 

 

“Hm, really?” Cage had a somewhat amused look on her face, but glanced at Cale with a strange expression for a moment. 

 

“Is there anything else he does?” Gilbert questioned, curious.

 

“Hm… Oh, the weak human loves to read! All the time!” He exclaimed, while feeding Choi Han a cookie. “He reads a lot of stories— there’s this big pile of books on the desk and next to the bed and they’re all really thick, but this weak human can finish it very quickly!”

 

Taylor hummed, before smiling. “I see that you’re quite an avid reader, young master-nim,”

 

“I guess?” he shrugged. “Mn… speaking of, I have a collection of ancient texts in my villa. There's a lot of them. Drop by with Miss Cage if you want to have a look,”

 

He blinked, eyes subtly lighting up with interest. “I see… would that be alright?”

 

Cale just sipped his wine. “Feel free,”

 

“Oh, and this weak human also likes to read stories out loud to me, hyung, and noona as well!” Raon added. “We’d read fairytales right before bed— hm, there was one about fairies, and a big bean stalk, and a dancer, and knights, and a ton more!”

 

“He reads stories for you?”

 

“That’s right!”

 

The four of them seemed surprised but also… endeared? Cale just looked away towards the window to avoid the conversation, hearing the sound of wine pouring over small chuckles.

 

 

“Young master Cale,” Cale turned around to see Cage greeting him as he walked down the hall. The kids were off exploring the estate under Choi Han's watch and the company of the Amiru, so he was on his own at the moment. There was a strangely serious expression on Cage’s face. “Can I speak to you for a moment?”

 

“Hm? Alright,”

 

“It has something to do with… that guy,” she sighed as she gestured vaguely to the earrings she wore, which had the Church of the God of Death's emblem. Cale stilled. “I’ve been having strange and vague dreams and a bad feeling lately— it may not be anything but that damn God can be anything but direct sometimes,”

 

He replied calmly. “So… you suspect something is up?”

 

“Yes, something like that,” she shrugged, sounding exasperated at the thought. “The thing is, I keep hearing your name and vague visions of you in my dreams. It’s quite strange, so I decided I’d come and ask you at some point,” Cage spoke. “Has anything strange happened recently? Anything mysterious or out of place? A bad omen?”

 

Cale decided he might want to strangle that damn god the next time he tried to show up in his dreams. “No, nothing of the sort,”

 

“Are you sure?” She seemed reluctant. “You’ve been looking a bit pale, and also exhausted. I suppose that can be attributed to the war, but… I’m worried you might have been cursed, or something,”

 

Cursed was an understatement. “I’m fine. Just tired sometimes is all,”

 

“...If that’s really true, then I guess that’s the case,” she sighed. “Please take care of yourself then, young master-nim,”

 

Though Cage was quite reluctant about his response, she still left nonetheless, but with an expression of doubt and worry subtly casting over her features. At this point, that God of Death might try to pull some stunt to get people to question him more. Did Cale have to threaten him into keeping quiet? He grumbled a bit to himself as his steps carried him down the hall.

 

Cale still wasn’t sure yet whether he wanted to tell them or not.

 

Telling them may be the right thing to do, rather than letting his people suddenly be confronted by his death randomly, but… it felt pointless, in some way. If they knew, they’d certainly try to look for some curse or solution, even if Cale or the God of Death told them it was impossible.

 

They would keep working and working tirelessly, searching, before having to face the fact that it was inevitable and watch him die. 

 

Cale didn’t want their last memories of him to be a sense of failure.

 

He wanted no regrets for himself or them. That was why he was trying to make the most of his time to do all the things he and the kids and everyone wanted to do.

 

He didn’t want them to waste their time. That was why he didn’t want to tell them about anything until the end. At least, that’s what he planned to do, unless the God of Death started intervening in some way.

 

“Cale?”

 

He was pulled out of his thoughts by Eric’s voice. “Hyung-nim,”

 

“Are you headed somewhere?”

 

“Nowhere in particular,” he replied. “Just walking, looking around. I might head back to the guest room later,”

 

“Right,” he smiled, steps matching Cale’s relatively slow pace. “Those children with you, they’re very nice,”

 

“Aren’t they?” Eric’s eyes widened slightly when he looked at Cale’s fond expression. “They’re really brilliant, and they’re very quick on the uptake on things. Aside from being smart, I think they’re also quite artistic and creative sometimes. They like to draw pictures in their free time and look at artbooks sent from my mother,”

 

Eric blinked once or twice, before chuckling beside Cale while he tilted his head. “You’re showing off, I see,” he smiled while looking at Cale for a while in a complicated way. “You’ve changed a lot over the course of these years, but this hyung is really relieved, you know,” Cale’s breath hitched slightly. “You look so happy now, and there’s a lot of people who care about you,”

 

Eric really did seem relieved, but there was a tinge of sadness in his voice. Cale wondered if he felt like he was insufficient, or something. He shouldn’t feel that way— Eric, Gilbert, and Amiru were one of Cale’s first pillars of support, and the original Cale’s support too. 

 

If that Kim Roksoo was here, he would have wanted to tell him something. He didn’t know what he would have wanted to say, so Cale just spoke honestly.

 

“I was happy with you too, hyung-nim,” Eric was pleasant to be around, and he was sure the present Kim Roksoo felt the same way. “And you cared about me too, didn’t you?” he paused. “Thank you,”

 

When he heard those words, Eric’s pupils shook as he stopped. He stared at Cale for a while, as if in disbelief. “...Is that so?” he spoke, before smiling at Cale like he was about to cry. “I’m really glad to hear that, Cale,”

 

He stared at that expression for a while and wondered how the original Cale would have reacted to seeing it. That punk knew that there were people who really cared about him, right?

 

“I know you’re a remarkable hero now, but you can always come to me if there’s anything you need,” Eric said. “Just live well like you’re doing now and don’t worry about anything. If anyone’s giving you trouble, please rely on me as well,”

 

“...Okay,” 

 

Eric was very reliable. And so were the rest of the northeastern nobles at the gathering that day. That was why Cale reached out to them and introduced them to the kids— he wanted to make sure they had someone dependable they could rely on when they were outside the territory and roaming around the kingdom once he was gone, too.

 

 

“Woah…!” Raon gaspd.

 

“It’s the sea!” Hong ran ahead as they walked at a leisure pace near the shore, just enough to feel the soft wet sand under his shoes. It definitely wasn’t the first time the kids went out to sea, but they always marveled at the sight of it in front of them. Well, Cale could sort of understand— the sea was very vast, after all. He’s been near beaches on patrols and missions so it wasn’t all that remarkable to him anymore, but Cale didn’t dislike it. Which was exactly why they went on this walk in the first place.

 

“Look,” On picked up something small, covered in sand, and dipped in some seawater to clean it. She held it out for Cale, Hong, Raon, as well as Choi Han to see. “It’s a seashell,”

 

“Aren’t shells supposed to look like, mn, like this?” Hong asked, drawing something in the wet sand. It was a doodle of the usual shape of seashells you’d see in books, or maybe in stores. 

 

“Most shells you’ll find on shore are going to look like this,” Cale said, observing the one On had found. “Though, I guess maybe if you look a bit harder…”

 

“I found something!” Raon yelled, rushing over, presenting them with yet another seashell or two in his pudgy paws. “I picked out the prettiest ones, here!” 

 

“Ooh!”

 

“Mn, those are very nice finds, Raon,” Choi Han smiled. 

 

Raon had brought one with more prominent ridges, as well as nice pink-ish coloring with white, and another that had the shape of a conch.

 

“Hans told me once that if you put a shell like this up against your ear, you’ll hear the sound of the ocean in it,” Hong explained with sparkling eyes as he held the conch in his hands. 

 

“Uh… well…” Choi Han sounded unsure as he gave the idea some thought. 

 

“Really? Is that true, human!?” Raon yelled in astonishment. “I wanna try!”

 

“Okay, maybe hold off on that for a second,” Cale took the conch out of Hong’s hands and observed it, peeking inside.

 

“But why, weak human?!”

 

“Did Hans lie again?” On sounded disappointed as she pouted down at the conch, and Cale just chuckled. 

 

“Maybe,” he shrugged. “I’ve never really tried it myself,”

 

“Then what are you doing?”

 

“I’m checking for crabs,”

 

On blinked, tilting her head in confusion. “Crabs?”

 

“There are crabs in these seashells!?”

 

“Of course,” he nodded. 

 

“Oh, are you talking about hermit crabs, Cale-nim?” Choi Han asked. When the children looked up at Choi Han in more confusion, urging him to explain, he simply smiled and knelt down with them. “There’s a type of crab called hermit crabs that hide in seashells like these. When they outgrow a shell or need a new one, they’ll look for another shell to replace their old one.”

 

“If you put one against your ear without realizing what’s in it, you’ll get pinched,” 

 

Raon gasped. “Pinched!?”

 

“Does it hurt?” Hong asked.

 

Cale hummed before shrugging. “I’d say so,”

 

“Like a lot?”

 

“Maybe,” 

 

“Is there a crab in there, weak human!?” Raon asked, sounding panicked by the idea of suddenly being attacked by one. “If you get pinched and get hurt, this great and mighty Raon Miru will hurl that shell back into the sea!”

 

What an unfortunate little hermit crab. Cale thought. How unlucky do you have to be in your life to be born as such a tiny crab and still somehow manage to get smited by a six-year-old dragon on a seaside trip? 

 

“Don’t worry, there aren't any crabs in here,”

 

“Are you sure?”

 

“Sure. Ask Choi Han to check,” the children all looked at Choi Han, and he leaned closer to Cale to get a closer look.

 

“Mn, I don’t see any hermit crabs here,”

 

“None at all?”

 

“Nope. Empty.”

 

“Hm… Okay then,” On nodded, taking the seashell back. Raon and Hong watched with a sense of worry and anticipation as she pressed it against her ear. They were totally silent for a few seconds, before her eyes widened. “Oh…”

 

“Did you hear something, noona?”

 

“Is it really the sound of the ocean!? Can you hear it!?”

 

“Um…” she tilted her head slightly, listening in closer, before nodding slowly. “Mn, I think I do,” she paused. “! Yeah, I think I hear it!”

 

“Ooh, I wanna hear it too!”

 

“I wanna have a go!”

 

The children passed it around, listening in one by one. Judging by their reactions, they probably heard something. Eventually, the conch made its way to Cale. Raon pressed it near his ear for him, and Cale closed his eyes, listening.

 

“Do you hear it?”

 

The sound of something echoing, kind of like white noise. It was smooth— a lot like ocean waves. Huh. So maybe it was true. That was one more thing he learned.

 

Cale nodded. “I think I do,”

 

“See! It really is true!”

 

“I wonder how the sound of an ocean could fit inside of a small little shell like this?”

 

“Now it’s Choi Han’s turn!”

 

Choi Han simply obliged, leaning down to let the kids put in near his ear for him. A few seconds passed, before his eyes widened in a sense of wonder. “I… hear it.”

 

“You do?”

 

“Yeah, it’s— yeah, I hear it!” He was smiling in a sort of amazed way. “It’s kind of echoing,”

 

“Right!?”

 

“Hey look, I found another shell!”

 

Eventually, the kids just got to collecting pretty shells they found down the path as they continued along the shore, plucking them out half-buried within the wet sand. They came in all sorts of shapes, and they stored them in the pouches they carried with them. They’d show off a few they found particularly cool to Choi Han and Cale, and make up little stories of what they thought the crab that lived inside the shells looked like. 

 

“This shell looks fancy,” On had remarked. “It’s got this gold-ish coloring, and some red streaks and a nice pattern— I wonder why the crab who lived in here decided to leave it?”

 

“Wow, this shell looks kinda broken!” Hong had pointed out, showing off the little cracks along the shell. “Do you think maybe the crab that lived in here got in a fight? Or attacked? That’s kinda sad.”

 

“Ooh, this one’s all swirly, weak human!” Raon explained, flying up in front of Cale to put it right in front of his face, and letting Choi Han touch it. “I know what this looks like— it’s like a snail! A snail’s shell— I’ve seen one outside with good girl Mary once!”

 

“Mn, very observant,”

 

“Are there also snails in the sea?”

 

“There are,”

 

“Really?” Raon gasped. “I’ll go look for one, then, human!”

 

“I wouldn’t if I were you,” Cale replied. “Sea snails are usually poisonous, you know.”

 

“Poisonous!?”

 

“Mhm.” he nodded. “Deadly, even,”

 

“You could die…?” On sounded somewhat mortified by the idea.

 

On the other hand, Hong’s eyes were sparkling. “Can I eat one?”

 

Cale had to stop walking and Choi Han paused. “Wait, what—”

 

“I read in a book once that some people eat snails— I’m sure adding a bit of seasoning, and cooking it could…”

 

“No,” Cale’s reply was absolute.

 

“But I’ll be fine! You know I like eating poison!”

 

“But I’m not gonna let you eat sea snails.”

 

“It’ll be fine if we cook it!”

 

“Denied,”

 

Hong proceeded to sulk and pout for a while afterwards while Choi Han, On, and Raon tried to console him somehow, as confused as they were. Cale watched from behind them, as his own steps were a few paces slower.

 

The warm hues of sunlight painted their figures in an overlay of orange as they walked. He could make out a few words from their conversation. Hong was still complaining about wanting to eat sea snails, Raon picked up more sea shells to cheer him up with, On gave him a little lecture, and Choi Han tried to cheer him up with the promise of more pastries later on. He smiled to himself.

 

Drawing his attention slightly towards the sun slowly dipping below the horizon, he wondered if a view like this had always been so pretty, or if he just noticed now.

 

Cale stopped, watching as the sun slowly set, bit by bit, as if it was sinking into the sea, feeling the wind blow past his hair, treading between the strands like a gentle comb and blowing his bangs to the side of his face. 

 

“Cale-nim?” He’d slipped his shoes off and rolled up his pants a little bit, and he left his jacket on in the sand.

 

Slowly, step by step, he walked down the shore. The sensation of sand on his feet was a bit annoying, but the sea water washed it away with every wave. It was strange— the water was actually a little warmer than the cold air. He stared down at his feet, watching the waves wash up against his leg before being pulled back. He was standing still, but Cale could feel as if the sand was pulling him into the ocean with each wave— he’d always wondered about that. 

 

He started taking a few steps, walking around, and giving little kicks with his feet, letting the water splash around as he tried to wash away the sticky sand and miniscule pebbles with the help of the waves.

 

“...Cale-nim?”

 

Choi Han felt stunned. No, something more akin to awe. The kids also stared, the light of the slowly approaching dusk lighting up their eyes as they watched Cale kick the water every now and then.

 

It was a remarkably strange sight.

 

Cale was smiling, a little. He looked like he was having fun. There was a glint to his reddish-brown eyes. 

 

“Human, what are you doing?”

 

“I felt like taking a small dip in the water,” he replied. 

 

Hong’s eyes sparkled up at him. “Is that fun?”

 

Cale just shrugged. “Maybe,” 

 

With little hesitation, Hong followed suit, slipping his shoes and socks off, leaving them discarded in the sand as he ran towards the shore where Cale was. He stumbled a little bit, due to the softness of the sand. Then he got to kicking his feet like Cale too.

 

“Youngest, Noona, come on! It’s fun!”

 

“Isn’t it cold?” On asked, but she was already giggling to herself while taking off her shoes.

 

“It’s kind of warm, actually— mn, lukewarm!” Hong grinned, before nearly stumbling due to a wave. “Ack—! The water’s so salty, though!”

 

Raon lit up with curiosity, running towards the water at lightning speed. “Really!?” hovering above the water, slowly but surely he reached in to dip his paws in and take a handful of water, before taking a curious sip. “Blegh—!” he frowned. “It’s so salty!”

 

“Don’t drink seawater, it isn't good for you— it’ll only make you thirsty,” Cale chided, before getting splashed by a mischievous On and Hong. The two giggled at him, and he kicked his legs a bit in retaliation, lightly splashing them back.

 

It was a very warm view. Though Choi Han felt himself frozen in place just watching.

 

Cale looked over at him, with an expression of ease. “The water’s nice, Choi Han,”

 

His eyes sparkled. “...Alright.”

 

The water really was kind of lukewarm.

 

 

“Weak human,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“Is there a sea version of everything?”

 

Cale was now carrying Raon back with him, walking back along the shore towards the Ubarr estate. “What do you mean?”

 

“Well, there are sea-snails, and sea-shells, and sea-everything, right?” he asked.

 

“Try naming a few,”

 

“Hm… are there sea lions?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“What about sea dogs?”

 

“I think so,”

 

Hong, back in his cat form, tiredly piped in from Cale’s shoulder where he was perched on. “Sea cats?”

 

“Well, there’s catfish,”

 

“What about other stuff? Like a bed, maybe?” On asked as she strolled leisurely, before yawning. They were all perfectly dry thanks to Raon’s magic.

 

“Seabeds are a thing,” Choi Han replied.

 

“Oh, then what about stars?”

 

“Sea stars, or starfish, also exist,”

 

“Mn… swords?”

 

“Swordfish,”

 

“Grass?”

 

“There’s seaweed,”

 

“Uhhh, horses?”

 

“Seahorses,”

 

Raon gasped mid-yawn. “And a dragon!?”

 

“Mn, well…” 

 

“I think there was a species of seahorse called a leaf-dragon or something of the sort?” Choi Han suggested.

 

“Huh? But why would a sea-horse be called a dragon?”

 

“I saw it in a textbook once— they’re really strange-looking, but also interesting,” Choi Han smiled. “I think they really did look like small dragon. It was really cool,”

 

On’s eyes sparkled. “Really? Why was it called a leaf-dragon though?”

 

“Because it looked like leaves were sprouting out of it all over,” Choi Han explained. “I think it was… I can’t remember if it was green? Yellow? Might’ve even been a bit reddish…”

 

“Woah…”

 

“Huh… What about, hm, pudding?”

 

“Well, there’s jellyfish,”

 

“Can you eat them?”

 

“Nope. Poisonous,” Hong perked up a bit when he heard that. “and they also have stingers, which hurt.”

 

“What about… clowns?”

 

“Clownfish,” Choi Han smiled.

 

“Huh? Really?”

 

“There’s fish that look like clowns at carnivals!?”

 

“Mn…” Cale shrugged. “They’re orange, with some white stripes and some black,”

 

“Are they pretty?”

 

“I think so?”

 

The kids giggled at the thought, and Cale thought they would’ve loved ‘Finding Nemo’. Eventually, they drifted back into silence, save for the sound of the waves guided by the wind, crashing into the ocean and washing up shells and seaweed on shore.

 

“You know, Cale-nya,” Hong yawned. “Eric-hyung said that I reminded him a lot of you when you were younger,”

 

Cale’s eyes widened slightly. “...Really?”

 

“Uh-huh,” he nodded, before smiling. “He said I even looked like you,”

 

“Hm…” Cale thought for a second about how Hong’s middle-part had been brushed to part at the side like how his own bangs looked. He resembled the 18-year-old Cale Henituse quite a bit as a result. 

 

“He told a lot of stories about you when you were younger,” On had a mischievous expression. “He told us about how you used to hold his hand wherever you went and pick flowers for him,”

 

“Really?’

 

“Yup,” Hong nodded. “And he even talked about how you used to look su~per cute when you were grinning and smiling up at him about stuff like sweets and pastries, and how you used to get frosting on the side of your face when you ate that he’d have to wipe off,”

 

“He also said you liked to ask him to read stories to you,” On mentioned. “He said he still had that book you liked in his personal library,”

 

“Wow, you really like reading, human!” Raon pointed out.

 

“Amiru-unnie also mentioned how Eric-hyung would tell all kinds of stories about you when you were younger to Amiru–unnie and Gilbert-hyung.” On added. 

 

“Huh…” he remarked, feeling strange. When entering this world, he never received any of the original Cale’s memories— all he knew about him were the small passages written in the pages of Birth Of A Hero and his personal impression of the trash noble. Even so, his life was definitely far more than what the pages said, and so was the life of every other person in this world.

 

“But you know,” Hong spoke. “He also said you’d worry him a lot.”

 

“Gilbert-hyung and Amiru-unnie feel the same way too,” On added.

 

“Eric-hyung said that you were always constantly changing so suddenly ever since you were little,” Hong explained. “And that he wondered if something was troubling you even if you never said a thing,”

 

“...” The original Cale Henituse was trash. Or at least, he acted like trash for his family’s sake. Since he was eight. Hong was nine today, and he’d be ten next year, which was just a few days away. Thinking about the child that resembled the young Cale Henituse a lot, he couldn’t imagine him feeling the need to act in a way that would distance himself from the people he loved, suffering a burden he shouldn’t for their sake. 

 

It must’ve been hard for the original Cale and present Kim Roksoo, and it must’ve been hard for the people that cared about him.

 

“I think,” On spoke. “That he would’ve wanted you to know that no matter what happens, he’ll always support you— because he’s always seemed so happy when he talks about being your hyung.”

 

“...”

 

Eric had known Cale Henituse since he was young, before he became trash, maybe even when Jour Thames was still alive. Throughout the years, Cale had found many letters from Eric. Some opened, some unopened, some dating years back. They were left in a corner somewhere in his room at the estate, but even so they were never thrown away or burnt. Just sitting somewhere, as if waiting to be read someday. Even in the present, he, as well as Amiru and Gilbert, and Taylor, still pen him letters— of concern, of well-wishes, news— for him. 

 

Cale knew that the letters written to him by Eric were for the stubborn, but endearing little young master he was fond of.

 

He felt as if he needed to apologize for replacing that child who used to hold his hand wherever he went. And to tell him that the child, who grew up, was living well somewhere else holding another child’s hand.

 

“Cale?”

 

“...On,” he said, a bit hesitant. “Hong,”

 

The two perked up at the sudden call. Raon had already fallen asleep sometime during their walk carried by Cale. Choi Han, who had stopped and turned back to face him, seemed confused.

 

“What is it?” Hong asked from his spot on Cale’s shoulder.

 

“...I’m a transmigrator.”

 

Surely, one day he’d let everyone know. 

 

Their eyes widened. “I’m not the original Cale Henituse. I swapped bodies with him, so while I’m here, the original Cale Henituse is in my body in another world,”

 

But at least, before anyone else knew— he wanted all three of his kids to know first.

 

“My name before coming here was Kim Roksoo. My original world is the same as Choi Han’s hometown. Choi Han also found out about it just a few months ago.”

 

He felt a bit tense but tried not to let it show on his face. They might hate him. Or not see him the same way again. Maybe as a thief or someone they couldn’t trust.

 

“It was a result of a deal that was made with the God of Death.”

 

But they deserved to know too, since they’ve been with him for such a long time.

 

“...”

 

On and Hong stopped and stared at him for a long time, mouth slightly parted in a near gape. It was all very sudden. Choi han who was beside them seemed equally stunned by the seemingly spontaneous revelation.

 

On stared at him intently, assessing and processing what she had heard. They didn’t seem hostile, but rather just shocked and unsure of him. He’d expected this much. “You…” she paused, before shaking her head. “No, of course, you can’t be joking about something so outlandish…” she pressed her lips together and sighed, hesitating. “I.. um…”

 

“...Does youngest know?” Hong asked.

 

“Raon, Choi Han, and crown prince Alberu are the only ones who do other than you two,” he paused, thinking. “...I’m sorry for not telling you sooner.”

 

“...”

 

“If you’re… no, you’re definitely serious, so…” On mumbled “If all this is true, then…” the young girl peered into Cale intently with her gold eyes. “When did it happen? The… um, soul swap thing.”

 

Cale thought about it for a moment. “Two years ago,” he spoke. “March 29th,”

 

On and Hong fell silent, as if contemplating intently. Hong stared at his paws like he had just been counting on them before speaking up. 

 

“So then that means the person who fed us that day was you, right?”

 

Cale took a second to process. “...Huh?”

 

“That person who went up that man-eating tree and bribed us with bread every day to keep quiet,” On spoke. “That was you, wasn’t it?”

 

“I… yes, that was me,”

 

“And the person who fed us under that bridge, that was also you, right?” Hong added.

 

“And so was the person who decided to let us stay at the estate?”

 

“The same person who fed us so much we couldn't even eat anymore? The one who fed us cakes, and different types of meat, cookies, bread, and greens—”

 

“Also the person who told us to learn to read? And also taught us a bit?” On spoke, voice firm and unwavering. “And you were the one who would keep buying us clothes and stuff even when we told you we didn’t need anymore?”

 

“And the one who tucks us in at night and reads stories? The one who has a nice singing voice?”

 

“The one who keeps being reckless even when we tell you to care more about yourself?”

 

“The one who buys us sherbert?”

 

“The one who got mad at our tribe on our behalf?”

 

“The one who’s always reassuring us?”

 

“And the one that we have to drag out of bed? The one who sleeps in every morning like a rock? The one who taught us how to scam people?” On’s firm expression softened into a smile. 

 

“The person who saved us and cared about us, that was you, right?”

 

“...” Cale stood, still as if he was frozen in place with each added sentence the kids spoke. They weren’t as tense now, in fact, it seemed like he had just mentioned something normal to them. Both On and Hong were smiling up at him.

 

“You’re the only Cale we know,” 

 

“We did hear rumours about you throwing battles and being trash a long time ago, but it wasn’t like you, or I guess the ‘original’ Cale, ever hurt us either,” Hong shrugged.

 

“I guess it makes more sense why you didn’t match the rumours that were spreading around back then…” 

 

“So you’re from Choi Han’s world? That makes so much more sense now! I hear you talking to him in this language I’ve never heard of sometimes, and you know how to cook dishes from his world really well, too,”

 

“What was your life like before coming here? Have you ever talked to the person you had a soul swap with?”

 

“Tell us all about the deal— did that stupid God force you into it?” Hong frowned, and Cale only continued to stand, stunned and flabbergasted, unable to answer. He looked at Choi Han, who was laughing slightly with a relieved expression on his face. He smiled at Cale like he was glad for him.

 

“You should tell us how to speak that language from your world— it sounds interesting—”

 

“Wait,” Cale finally spoke. “This is… Are you both really okay with this?” There was a sense of nervousness in his voice. “You should think about it more. I’m not— I’m not really Cale Henituse, you know? I’m…”

 

He wasn’t sure what kind of reaction he was expecting. Cale was only planning on telling them the truth and maybe expecting and preparing for whatever reaction would come as a result, but he wasn’t— aren’t they angrier? Shouldn't they be a bit scared? Maybe upset? A bit of hatred?

 

“Well, we can call you your old name if you want to— what was it? Kim… Rock? Rock sew?”

 

“Kim Roksoo,” Choi Han answered.

 

“No, no, I mean, no— I’ve accepted the way I am now. I’m Cale… now,” But just because I’ve come to terms with it doesn’t mean everyone else will. “It’s just… shouldn't you be…”

 

“Mad?” On tilted her head. “Well, we did wish you told us a bit sooner, but I think it’s okay.”

 

Hong smiled. “We told you already— you’re the only Cale we know. Do we need to tell you a hundred more stuff you did?”

 

“I…” he hesitated. He thought for a long while before finally sighing. “...You don’t have to tell me anything else,”

 

“Alright,” On nodded. “But when we get back, you have to tell us everything, okay?”

 

“You too Choi Han,” Hong pointed at him. “You also knew, and you’re both from the same world, so you have to tell us all about it, alright?”

 

“Um…”

 

“This is to make up for keeping it secret for so long,”

 

“...Alright.”

 

Cale didn’t realize it, but he had been smiling to himself as he walked back to Amiru’s estate.

Notes:

I wanted northeastern trio content and they deserve to be the TwT og cale and eric were so tragic honestly. anyways hope you like this chapter! please pray for my grades and sanity it is 1 am and i dont know crap about plant movements or something and generally feel like dying. love you all and as always thanks for the support! A bit of a spoiler but next chapter is going to be quite fun!

(death is approaching)

Chapter 10: festivity.

Summary:

Cale and his group go on an outing.

Notes:

(edit since ao3 deleted my notes before and I somehow double drafted it-)

This chapter is an absolute beast. A monstrosity. A large footlong if that's how those work. I am once again completely sleep deprived while editing this so pardon any inconsistencies or typos or errs. I was debating whether to even post this as one chapter or like split it but decided you know what y'all waited like two weeks screw it, we ball. It is ramadan, not even the devil himself is here to stop me.

This is the part where the self-indulgent tag really shines and i'd like to apologize in advance this fic is a mess.

Woe! 64 word pages of silly festival outing crack/fluff upon ye!

Ah yes, and thank you for cheering me on about my exam! I'm pretty sure my grades cannot be saved :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

The small outing which Cale had initially planned to just be him, the kids, and maybe Choi Han, had escalated somehow and now almost everyone was going. The new year was approaching in a week’s time, and so festivals, held in honor of greeting both the new year and the era of peace after the war, began to start everywhere in the continent. The children had been wanting to go ever since they heard of it, and wouldn’t stop talking his ear off about it. 

 

There was one happening both in the Henituse territory, as well as in Huiss. They’d make a few stops around the territory and look around, and then head for the capital with teleportation magic. A remarkable feat of transporting so many people was only possible with the power of great and mighty mages.

 

Of course, one doesn’t go out willy-nilly just like that for outings when they were famous war heroes, so Eruhaben, Rosalyn, Glenn and Raon helped them disguise themselves. They managed to have a bit of fun with it.

 

“Choi Han, did you ever dye your hair in high school?”

 

“Hm? Ah, no— I think I had a friend who did, but I never got around to try it myself. It was technically against the rules at school anyway.” he replied sheepishly.

 

So he was the good kid type who followed the rules, huh? “Mn, well, I’ve never tried it either since I thought it was bothersome and messy to have to get the dye in there, and the color would dull anyways so why bother?” Cale said, before smirking. “Magic sure is the best, hm?”

 

“Human, human, what color do you want your hair to be?” Raon asked with stars practically gleaming in his eyes. Cale gave it some thought while listening to the others.

 

“Haha! Me and Glenn swapped colors!”

 

“Seeing you with purple hair is… weird.” Glenn remarked while staring at Bud, before looking at himself in the mirror and his newfound blue hair. “This feels even more wrong though. Can stupidity spread through hair color?”

 

“Hey!”

 

“I’ve always wanted to try black,” Hannah said, looking at herself through the hand mirror, purple eyes gleaming with her new jet-black hair in a ponytail. “Hm, you actually look really cool too, oppa,” she remarked. “You could look more intimidating if you wanted to but you still look so nice. Try glaring at me.”

 

“Huh—? Uh, like this?”

 

“Hm, that’s more like a pout. Try scarier. Uh, like, I don’t know, someone just talked badly about me?”

 

“What? Who would do that!?”

 

“Mn, okay, we’re getting there.”

 

Rosalyn turned to look to her side. “What will your alias be, Eruhaben-nim?”

 

“Hm. Well, I suppose I’ll go with Haben.” It didn’t matter what color his hair was, even if it was mud brown, the ancient dragon still looked as if he was straight out of a painter's magnum opus. He brushed it back and tied it with one of Cale’s black ribbons. “It’s simple enough, and I’ve gone with it before.”

 

“Hm. I see…” Rosalyn nodded, snapping her fingers and going through different hair and eye colors, trying to see if she could find anything that looked particularly interesting. “Then I suppose I’ll be… Rose,” This was actually quite fun. 

 

“Hm… Oh! How about purple?” Hong suggested.

 

“But Bud already has purple hair,” On said.

 

“Yes, the silly Bud already has purple hair, but how about purple eyes instead?”

 

“Ooh, good idea, youngest!”

 

“And for his hair, what will suit purple…?” On contemplated.

 

Lock scratched the back of his head sheepishly. “Uh, guys, it’s alright, you don’t have to think about it too hard—”

 

“Oh! How about red?”

 

“Ooh, okay! He can have red hair, and purple eyes?”

 

“Sounds good!”

 

“What do you think, brave Lock?”

 

“Ah… well…” he sighed but laughed. “Sure.”

 

“Okay and… Ta-da!”

 

In a small burst of sparkles, Lock’s hair was quickly recolored to a bright red, and his eyes a shade of light purple. The boy stared into the mirror handed to him by Raon with a contemplative look, but ultimately just smiled. “It’s great, thanks,”

 

Observing the kids, On and Hong decided to join the undercover fun and were polymorphed. On was wearing that dress she liked and tied her hair into a ponytail, bright golden eyes exchanged for a shade of turquoise, and her silver hair changed to black.

 

Hong had adapted a matching shade of black, as well as sky-blue bright brimming eyes. Next to Raon, they looked like they were matching with him, black hair, cool-toned eye colors and all. It was cute.

 

Looking in a different direction, Mary had a bed of bright blonde hair and gold eyes. Her expression was still neutral and mechanic-like, but she held up her hand and pointed at herself before speaking to Cale. “Young master-nim, I am in disguise. Am I unrecognizable?”

 

“Mn…” It’s still easy to tell that you’re probably a necromancer thanks to the dead mana scars. He sighed. Of course, he wasn’t going to ask Mary, and certainly not Hannah, to really cover them up. It wasn’t something either of them disliked about themselves. “...Sure.” Maybe a different color cloak?

 

She nodded and clutched her fist in front of her as if she had won something. Then she turned around and called out to Hannah. “Miss Hannah, it worked,”

 

Hannah turned before smiling at her. “See? Told you it would,” thinking about it now, they must’ve swapped hair and eye colors. 

 

Ron and Beacrox opted for a more basic and subtle hair color, Ron with brown and Beacrox a slightly more beige shade. Cale figured he should probably go for a similar choice.

 

“So? What color did you want, human?” Raon asked again, flying up to him with a cookie in his mouth. Seems like no matter the occasion, he’s always stocked up on snacks in his pocket dimension.

 

“Hm, I haven’t really decided yet,” he shrugged. “Brown, I guess?”

 

“But that’s so boring!” Hong frowned.

 

“How about you do something more fun~?” On suggested. “Everyone else is choosing cooler colors,”

 

On’s testament reminded Cale of the fact that they were supposed to stay under the radar and that their flashy hair colors could definitely stand out. Well, it was too late for that now. “Ron and Beacrox aren’t,”

 

“But that’s ‘cause they’re assassins,”

 

“Yeah! You should choose a good color, human!” Raon smiled up at him. 

 

“A better color, huh?” he sighed before shrugging again. “How about you choose for me?”

 

“Really?”

 

“Okay then! We’ll choose for you,” Hong grinned.

 

“Oh, close your eyes human! And Choi Han, have you chosen a color?”

 

He laughed sheepishly. “I haven’t…”

 

“Then you should close your eyes too!”

 

“Close your eyes~”

 

Choi Han and Cale looked at each other helplessly before doing so, standing as they waited for the kids to do something. He could hear the sound of them muttering and mumbling to themselves in a sort of excited manner, and a few giggles. Then he felt the cool blow of magic sweep up his hair before settling.

 

“Okay, you can open your eyes now!”

 

“...” Cale stared at the mirror, perplexed.

 

“Ta-da! It’s cookie prince and the human!”

 

Indeed, Cale was now blonde, with blue eyes, and Choi Han had a bed of red hair that was a similar shade to his before it was changed and slightly brighter eyes. He seemed quite amazed by his new look.

 

“Cale-nim…” he whispered under his breath. 

 

“It matched your scarf, too!” Hong added.

 

Oh Alberu would not be expecting this. It would be incredibly funny.

 

 

“Hm, so if we’re going in disguise…” On contemplated aloud. “That means we need a fake name, right?”

 

“Oh! An alias!” Hong added while climbing up Cale’s shoulder.

 

“Human, human, what’s your alias?” Raon asked excitedly. Cale only hummed for a moment as he thought about it.

 

“Bob,”

 

Half the room turned to him. Bud seemed perplexed. “Wait, what?”

 

Cale tilted his head. “Is something wrong?”

 

He only replied with a confused expression as he adjusted his cloak. “My fake name was going to be Bob though?”

 

Choi Han, who was beside Cale, also scratched the back of his neck sheepishly. “I… was also going to be Bob…”

 

Glenn blinked. “Wait, you too?”

 

“Oh… I was also going to be Bob…” Jack admitted.

 

“Huh!? But I was going to be Bob!” Hong added.

 

Mary chimed in at that moment in her mechanical voice. “I too was going to be Bob,” 

 

Hannah stared at both her brother and her friend in a perplexed manner, before sighing and muttering while looking away. “I was… also…”

 

Eruhaben seemed infinitely baffled by the whole ordeal. “So, you mean to tell me that… almost everyone in this room decided to all coincidentally choose the same alias? Bob?”

 

Half the room went silent at that.

 

“Oho,” Ron seemed fascinated more than anything. 

 

Raon gasped. “Lemonade Gramps, did you choose to be Bob too!?” 

 

“Oh, no, no,” Ron smiled benignly. “I’ve chosen a different alias— it is Robert,”

 

Isn’t that also still a variation of Bob anyway? Cale thought to himself.

 

“And what about uncle Beacrox?” Hong questioned curiously.

 

“...Ben.” he replied. Choi Han snickered from behind him and immediately got the death glare from him. Cale clicked his tongue as he began to see a pattern.

 

“Oh! What about the smart Rosalyn?”

 

“And Grandpa Eru?” On asked.

 

Eruhaben swept his hair back. “I am Haben, little kid,”

 

“And I’m Rose,” Roslayn smiled.

 

“Oh!” Raon’s eyes sparkled as he came to a sort of conclusion. “So to come up with an alias, you can also just shorten your name?”

 

“...Yes?”

 

“I see! Then, this great and mighty Raon Miru will choose the perfect alias!” he beamed, before puffing his chest up and flapping his wings about as he flew higher. “For today, I shall be the great and mighty dragon, Ra Mir!”

 

The room was silent for a bit. Bud almost laughed a little but got smacked by Glenn before he could spit out a word. Ron just nodded while smiling benignly while Eruhaben looked amused, but also unsure of what to tell Raon. Rosalyn brought both of her hands to cover her mouth as if she had just witnessed the cutest thing in the universe, and she was probably right.

 

Meanwhile, Cale was baffled. Ra? Like the Egyptian sun god? Raon’s eyes sparkled up at him, somewhat expectant as if he was waiting for Cale to say something or praise him. He’d rather he not be associated with any god at all because that damn Sun God was a bastard, but just sighed and patted his head. “Sure, Ra it is,”

 

He also knew that the little 5-year old dragon wouldn’t need an alias since he’ll be going invisible anyway, but just decided to go along with it anyway since he seemed so excited.

 

“Oh, so then if we shorten it… I’ll be Ho?” Hong questioned.

 

“And I’ll be…” On grimaced. “O?”

 

Cale clicked his tongue before wincing awkwardly. “Uh…” he hesitated. “… okay, maybe something else?” 

 

“Hm… oh! I think I know which fake name I’ll go with, then,” On nodded with certainty. “I’ll be Kira,” 

 

“Hm? Like that main character from the novel you liked?” Cale asked.

 

On’s eyes sparkled as she nodded with enthusiasm after Cale caught the reference. “Yup.”

 

Hm… On really does like that book, Cale thought to himself. Was there such a thing as merch here? Like, hm… teacups? Maybe a meet and greet with the author? Cale wasn’t exactly sure. 

 

“Oh, oh! Then I’m… hm…” Hong hesitated.

 

“Need more time to think?”

 

“Actually, I think we all do,” Glenn sighed.

 

And so, after that, they spent about 5 minutes rethinking their aliases on their own, before gathering back together to reconfirm with everyone. Cale decided they could just take turns going around the room. They also agreed to let Cale have the name Bob because he brought it up first.

 

“Mn, my alias will be Rob,” Choi Han decided.

 

“Oh, mine is… Robby,”

 

“What!?” Bud looked at Glenn in bafflement. “I was going to be Robby! Fine, I’ll be Robby with a y,”

 

“It’s already with a Y, idiot!”

 

“Fine with an ‘ie’ then,”

 

“That’s not—”

 

“Okay, let’s just circle back there later— mn, how about Saint Jack-nim?” Rosalyn suggested.

 

“Ah, well, I’ve decided on Bob…y,”

 

“Bobby?”

 

“And I’m Roberta,” Hannah continued. Cale was starting to see a pattern here.

 

Mary raised her hand. “And I… am Boberta,”

 

Rosalyn tilted her head slightly. “That’s…”

 

Hannah shrugged. “You know what, sure,”

 

“How about Lock?”

 

“Ah, well…” he trailed off, as if still contemplating. “I guess, uh, Bill…y?”

 

“Billy?”

 

“Wow, points for creativity,”

 

“Are all these names seriously just variations of Bob?”

 

“How about you, Eruhaben-nim?”

 

The ancient dragon rubbed his temples, sighing in exasperation, yet again. “Haben.”

 

“Rose,” Rosalyn smiled.

 

“And Ra!” Raon beamed.

 

“Kira,” On reiterated with a satisfied nod.

 

“I’ve decided I’ll be Bryan!” Hong exclaimed. Cale recognized that name from a character in a fairytale book he liked most.

 

Ron smiled benignly. “Robert,” Cale almost felt bad— he chose the name first but now he sounds unoriginal.

 

“...Ben,” Beacrox sighed.

 

“And that’s everyone,” Hannah said.

 

“I feel like we’re good to go now, right?”

 

“Guess so— I’m actually a bit excited about this,”

 

“Hm— I have to say so am I,”

 

They all sounded like school kids before a field trip as they chatted amongst themselves with an air of joy. As he readjusted his bright blonde hair in the mirror, he was reminded of Alberu. He said he was going to be a bit late, didn’t he? Cale wasn’t sure when they were even supposed to meet.

 

Everyone was dressed quite plainly, with a basic and simple cloak over them for a bit of extra stealth. They’d decided to go under the guise of travelers who decided to visit the kingdom to join the celebration on holiday, though their group was quite sizable. Cale couldn’t even count everyone on his fingers.

 

Eventually they all gathered up at the center of the room, and Eruhaben and Raon took care of the teleportation spell together. Mana surged throughout the area, a dense but not suffocating presence enveloping Cale. He couldn’t help but remember what Rosalyn had said about it in the library.

 

And in a blink, the cool breeze of the territory swept over them. They’d set the coordinates for a secluded spot near the estate so as not to draw attention. Rosalyn did a quick headcount before they headed off.

 

“Woah~!” The decorations were hung up all over Rain City, lighting it up with a  burst of color. Cale could see signs in front of bakeries and establishments with various discounts listed as well as special festive menu items. Judging by the sparkling gaze of the kids, food might be their first stop.

 

“Are you all hungry?”

 

“Well, I did skip breakfast earlier…” Rosalyn admitted.

 

“Human, look! Look at the size of that dessert!” Raon’s eyes were widening in an amazed sparkle as he flew circles around Cale and pointed at another young girl who was enjoying something reminiscent of a sundae in front of a dessert shop with a bright smile. 

 

Hong gasped, tugging at the hem of his jacket. “Look over there! They have a bunch of games!” Looking where he pointed, Cale could see various game stands. Cups stacked in tall structures, beanbag and horseshoes toss, raffles— heck of a lot of your typical fantasy carnival games.

 

“I think there’s a stage there,” On remarked, drawing his attention to a wooden platform set up at the center of the plaza. It didn’t seem like whatever performance it was had started yet.

 

“There’re tons of stores everywhere,” Bud pointed out, squinting ahead, and suddenly Cale realized he didn’t have his glasses on.

 

“What happened to your glasses?”

 

“Hm? Oh, haha! They broke!” he jovially admitted. “I was practicing with Miss Hannah here and got pummeled to the ground and my glasses shattered just like that!”

 

“That was after you got me in the face, jerk,” she huffed, and Cale hummed. So that was why she had a bandaid on her face yesterday.

 

“Ah, I know an optometrist near here,” Choi Han mentioned, looking around as if trying to recognize the path. He seemed to know his way around, probably because he went out often to spar at the knight training grounds or accompany the kids, as well as generally get to know the townsfolk. Cale noted he was well-liked by the people here, particularly by older ladies. He really did seem like that good grandson type.

 

“I think we could make a stop there,” 

 

“Then we should try out some of these street snacks,” Jack suggested with a smile. He seemed to have seen how his sister had her eyes on the meat skewers sold nearby.

 

“And then we could try out the carnival games!” Hong reiterated. “Lock-hyung said he could win a lot of them!”

 

“Ah…”

 

“Okay~ and then let’s look at some street performers,”

 

“I think I’m also out of ink— I need a new book to write in my spells too,” Glenn sighed.

 

“There’s a lot to get out of the way, huh…” Cale thought, before turning to Choi Han. “Well, lead the way,”

 

At the optometrist, there was an array of different glasses frames laid out, much like the ones Cale knew of from earth. He spotted a pair that resembled Eric’s too.

 

“Do you need to get a new prescription?” Cale asked.

 

“Prescription? Oh, I usually use magic lenses,”

 

“Huh?”

 

“You know, lenses with special material and enhanced with some magic?” Bud added as if it was a normal thing. “You don’t really need to get checked out again since they’ll just adjust to your eyesight. Really durable too,”

 

“...” Magic really was the best because what?

 

“What frame are you getting?” Glenn asked. 

 

“Oh, just the same as before,” he shrugged. “Round, should be somewhere around here,”

 

Cale could see Ron inspecting the various frames displayed around the store, scrutinizing them closely. He wondered if wearing glasses would make him look more like a regular old man and less scary, but Ron probably wouldn’t need them. He could spot things from a mile away. At that moment, he looked behind and at Cale, smiling benignly, and he shivered.

 

“Human, try this on!” Raon flew up and put a pair of glasses against his face. After readjusting the clumsy attempt, On brought him a mirror and made him look into his reflection. It was a black pair, with gold accents on the handle. Not too flashy, but quite classy. The kids had good taste.

 

“Oh, are you trying on glasses, young master-nim?” Rosalyn asked. 

 

“The kids picked it out,”

 

“Very classy,” she nodded, satisfied.

 

Looking to the side, he also saw Hannah trying on a pair with a vibrant blue color and noticeable embellishments, while pointing at her face, completely neural in contrast with the unique frame. Hannah and Jack who were with her laughed a little while picking out their own silly pairs from the collection.

 

“Right, I’ve got my pair,” Bud said with a smile, pointing to his face, glasses present.

 

Cale tilted his head. “Already?”

 

“Is it supposed to take long?”

 

“Well…” fantasy worlds really make things convenient, huh. “Did you pay yet?”

 

“I’m about to,”

 

Wordlessly, he hummed and tossed the owner a golden coin. The flustered woman caught it and stared at Cale in utter shock. Bud did too. Magical glasses that are that useful should cost a pretty penny, right? So the gold coin probably wasn’t too much. “Keep the change,”

 

“Huh? Cale, what are you doing!? I could’ve paid just fine,”

 

“I had an extra gold coin on me,” it was true— he took a bit too much money with him. “You can just pay it off later,” the war was over and times were a lot more peaceful but mercenaries were certainly still needed. He or someone else in his group could ask for a small commission in exchange or maybe at a discounted rate if that was how that worked.

 

“Alright…” Bud seemed quite unsure about it, but just sighed and thanked him. Honestly, Cale might’ve done it because he felt just slightly bad about the fact that he looted the Mercenary Guild that one time in the Eastern Continent. 

 

“Are those the magical lenses you talked about?”

 

“Hm? Oh, yeah,”

 

“Magic lenses, huh… those sound quite interesting— I’ve heard mentions of them from the librarian at my palace,” Rosalyn said, observing the pair. “I’m quite curious, admittedly. Can I try those on? I think my eyesight is quite alright, but it wouldn’t hurt to get a feel for them,”

 

“Honestly, I’ve kind of been curious too,” Glenn shrugged.

 

“Y’know I always thought you’d be the one with the glasses between the two of us. Can’t believe I got them first,”

 

“Why? ‘Cause I’m a mage?”

 

“No Gle— I mean, Robby, because you read grimoires with the most miniscule indecipherable chicken scratch I’ve ever seen at night, in the dark, under dim candle light, hunched over your desk like a goblin or twisting in weird positions on top of a cushion.” He said. “I’m surprised you don’t flinch in sunlight like a vampire,”

 

Rosalyn, who was also a mage, coughed and looked away. Cale recalled the occasional horrible eye bags she’d emerge from her room with in the morning, as well as the sound of loud pen scribbling coming from her room at night when Cale was wandering around the halls to get fresh air. 

 

He glanced at Raon who was off to the side looking at fancy pairs of kids-sized glasses, as well as Eruhaben who was silently judging the over-the-top dragon patterned frames displayed nearby. Raon fortunately slept at reasonable hours and Eruhaben always looked flawless, though dragons could practically do anything at that point so the image of a mad mage Eruhaben brewing potions in his study didn’t leave his mind.

 

“Perhaps you should try it as well, young master-nim,” Cale heard Ron’s voice suddenly from behind him and turned around. “You are quite the diligent reader. This old butler is simply looking for possibilities to improve your life,”

 

“Mn…” he did have reading glasses for some time as Kim Roksoo, courtesy of Lee Soohyuk and Choi Jungsoo. It’s been a while since then and he’s kept them with him though he doesn’t use them all that often. “Okay?”

 

Perhaps hearing their conversation, the optometrist rushed to the back of his shop to pull out two more pairs to test out with lenses attached. Glenn and Rosalyn picked them up, observing it a bit too carefully for normal standards. Maybe it was because they were magic?

 

Bud hesitantly gave Cale his new pair, as if fearful he’d break it or something. Cale just took them and placed them on his face, and Rosalyn and Glenn seemed to do the same thing.

 

A beat. Two beats. Cale blinked a few times, eyes squinting as he looked ahead. “...”

 

“...Oh.” Rosalyn let out, eyes widened as she stared at a wall as if it was the most fascinating thing she’s ever seen.

 

“Wha…”

 

“Human, what’s wrong?” Raon asked, curious, flying up towards him. Cale reached out to touch his chubby scaly cheek, which looked a lot more… Detailed than before. This was very confusing for the unfortunate owner of the store who couldn’t see Raon.

 

“Wait, no way,” Bud sounded genuinely surprised.

 

“Young master-nim?” Beacrox seemed equally confused but also worried by Cale’s reaction.

 

“What the hell.” He sounded flabbergasted as he pinched Raon’s cheek and stared at his cute big round blue eyes. “You’re telling me it’s supposed to look this detailed?” 

 

The world seemed so much sharper? It felt like someone just upped the resolution. He stared at a label that was a considerable distance from him and couldn’t stop feeling baffled. He could read it. So people were just supposed to be able to see that far? That seemed crazy. He opened a small book he carried around from his breast pocket and the letters seemed much more clear even though his face was far from the pages. What the hell. Just what the hell.

 

He poked and pinched at Raon’s cute face again while frowning as he listened to Raon complain and resist with his chubby little paws. “I’ve been scammed.”

 

He saw Glenn put the glasses on and then back off in equal bafflement while glaring at Bud as if it was his fault. Rosalyn was just somewhat excitedly flipping through her notes.

 

In the end they bought three more pairs, which were picked out after ample discussion between everyone in the store and the unfortunate store owner’s help. They also got reading glasses for Eruhaben, who would not admit that it really helped him that much but his fascination could not be hidden.

 

“Cale, let’s go buy food,” On suggested, pointing out a few stands. “That one there sells skewers, there’s some pancakes, oh, and there’s also the wraps you said you liked, and some frozen stuff like ice cream and popsicles.”

 

“Mn… alright,”

 

“Ooh, let’s see… looks like there’s a lot— some stands on that street and some over there….”

 

“Woah, what’s that?”

 

“Hm, I kind of want to pick up some herbs…”

 

The walk around the food stands was simple enough. They decided to split off, divide and conquer, if you will. They’d group up with each other and head off in different directions, then meet back up to share the stuff they found. Cale was with the kids, Choi Han, and Ron. Bud, Glenn, Rosalyn, and Eruhaben were in a group, as well as Mary, Jack, Hannah, Beacrox, and Lock, as peculiar as they were together. 

 

Hong and On were side by side with him, holding his hand and swinging it back and forth in merry rhythm as they began to list all the foods they wanted to try, excited to spend their allowance. Of course, Cale would just buy it for them anyway. They could save their money whenever he was around. As he walked, he saw Choi Han’s eyes silently sparkling and full of life as he took in the lively atmosphere of the festival. This certainly wasn’t his first time at one, as he’d gone with Cale for a little once before, but he supposed it was difficult for things like this to grow dull for the weary swordsman.

 

The novel, Birth of a Hero, rarely ever granted the munchkin protagonist a moment of proper rest or joy that wasn’t disrupted or quickly lost. Even so, Cale recalled a particular scene in the novel where Choi Han had gotten an opportunity to celebrate a small merry festival similar to what was happening in the territory at another village with his party, consisting of Witira, Rosalyn, Lock, and Pendrick at the time. It was short-lived, but the punk at least managed to buy a few snacks and try out a game and get a glimpse of a performance before an enemy went and attacked in the middle of the festivities.

 

“Cale-nim,” He blinked out of his sudden recollection and back to the present, the warm scent of seasoned meat skewers tickling his nose. Choi Han was in front of him, smiling while holding one out for him. It seemed like… beef? “Would you like one?”

 

“Ah, sure,” he nodded, accepting. Choi Han’s smile brightened at his reply, and Cale huffed out a sigh. Well, at least now he could just peacefully enjoy festivals like this throughout the year. 

 

“Human! Is it good?” Raon asked.

 

“Ooh, it looks a bit different and smells really nice!”

 

“It’s caramelized,” Cale replied, picking out a piece from the stick and letting the kids each have one to try. Upon their pleased, delighted reactions, he sighed and tossed the vendor a gold coin. “10 more please,”

 

That process would then repeat a few more times. They bought various things, like pies in different flavors like apple, blueberry, and cherry. Then they got ice cream, and afterwards meatballs, sandwiches, a dozen different things. Ron, who was smiling benignly as he followed them around the entire way, also got fed by the kids a few slices of pie.

 

“Cale-nim, aren’t these ones a lot like corndogs?” Choi Han pointed out.

 

He looked closer at the menu. “Seems like they’re sausages wrapped in potato and then breadcrumbs on sticks.”

 

“Hm… and that over there is kind of like hotteok,”

 

“I guess so, huh?” Cale nodded while drinking some sweet apple cider they had from a little while ago to warm up. 

 

“It’s making me miss Korean street food a little,” Choi Han whispered beside Cale. This punk had forgotten a lot about his hometown from all the years he spent in the forest, so if he started missing things like that again, that meant he was remembering. 

 

“Which kind?”

 

“I used to like odeng— hm, I think I went and bought it with my friends after school often,” he reminisced. “And this cold season is making me miss ddeokbokki,” 

 

“Hm…” 

 

“It seems you enjoy that drink, young master-nim?” Cale flinched when he heard Ron's voice suddenly. He sighed— why couldn’t he have just gone with Beacrox or Eruhaben, or something?

 

“...Yes,”

 

“Hm, then this Ron may find a way to replicate the recipe later,” Huh, that actually would be nice. “Though I may take liberties— how about a lemon variant? Since you are so fond of them, young master-nim,”

 

Cale’s expression soured immediately, which earned a laugh from On and nagging from Raon who was telling him not to make such strange expressions suddenly.

 

“Hey! Look over there!” Hong shouted. “Isn’t that Lock?”

 

“And uncle Beacrox!”

 

Lo and behold, they seemed to have crossed paths. Lock was carrying a handful of snacks while Beacrox was jotting notes down in his small notebook while Mary observed curiously, munching on some cookies. 

 

“Brave Lock, did you try the delicious pies in the stand over there?”

 

“Oh, and don’t forget about the skewers! They’re seasoned in this unique way,”

 

“Ah, well, I haven’t,” he admitted, before picking out a few things from his collection. “I might try them later. Have you tried these?”

 

The kids’ eyes sparkled at the sight. It was three colorful candies shaped like flowers. Honestly, if it was possible to take pictures he would. 

 

While the kids were fawning about the pretty snack, Beacrox began asking a few questions for Cale. “Young master-nim, what snacks did you try? And which one did you like?”

 

“Uh…” he thought again. “The meat skewers, I guess?”

 

“Are they seasoned a particular way?”

 

“They were caramelized, I think?”

 

He jotted a few things down and asked again. “Anything else?”

 

“I guess we also tried out some rolled eggs?”

 

“Hm…”

 

“There was also candy apples,”

 

“Candy apples?” Mary chimed in curiously.

 

Beacrox just kept asking while jotting down notes to himself, with Mary observing quietly beside him and asking Cale about a few of the snacks. She seemed to already have had her fair share too. 

 

“Cale, look over there,” On tugged at his sleeve a bit and pointed towards a stand on the side of the street. There was an old man sitting there with a canvas in front of him and a sign. “It says ‘live portraits’.”

 

“Hm..” he hummed contemplatively. “Do you want to try it?”

 

“Try what?” Hong piped in, before looking in the same direction they were looking. “Oooh!”

 

“Human, what is a live portrait? Will the portrait come to life?” Raon asked.

 

“Oh, no, a live portrait is when someone draws a portrait of you on the spot,” Jack helpfully supplied. “It’s much like paintings, just usually quicker and in pencil while paintings take much longer,”

 

Jack seemed tired when he emphasized how long it took to paint portraits, and Cale wondered if he and Hannah, as the saint and holy maiden, had to do them often. 

 

On the other hand, Cale liked the ‘quick’ prospect enough to be willing to give it a shot if the kids wanted to.

 

“Cale-nya, we should try it!”

 

“Yes! We should get a portrait!”

 

Cale stared at Raon and thought about it. He was currently invisible and Cale felt doubtful about revealing him just yet. He didn’t want to exclude him, though— certainly not.

 

Ron seemed to have read his thoughts and put out a suggestion. “I happen to know a trustworthy artist nearby,” he smiled. “I’m sure he could add to the drawing if we asked,”

 

When Ron referred to a ‘trustworthy’ individual, he must have been an old friend, and by extension, probably an assassin. Well, to be fair, all kinds of people in the duchy had anything but normal histories, and if that meant Raon could be added to the picture that would be enough. He told Raon about the idea, and the dragon, though a bit dissatisfied about not getting their portraits drawn at the same time, agreed.

 

Cale approached the artist and spoke. “We’d like a portrait, please,” he spoke. “Three people,”

 

“Hm…” the artist hummed as he looked at him, Hong, and On in a sense of somewhat amazement. Was it because they looked sort of flashy? “Of course,” he motioned to the price list. It seemed that it was priced per person. They decided on a half-body, and the artist said they’d pay after the portrait was finished.

 

“Can you leave room in the drawing for one more person?” Cale asked as Raon hovered over his shoulder. “He isn’t here today but would have really liked to be in it,”

 

“Yes, human! Tell him it’s from your close friend, the great and mighty Ra!”

 

He sighed. “For a close friend of mine named Ra,”

 

“I see…” 

 

In the end, they got positioned. Cale sat in the middle on top of a small stool, with On and Hong on either side. Raon decided where he wanted to be put in the picture, so they left space between him and On to hover above. 

 

“You should choose an easy pose you can stay still in for a long time,” Cale suggested as he brushed back On’s hair and combed it out a bit with his fingers and fixed Hong’s scarf.

 

“Okay, but what about you?”

 

“I’m very good at staying still,” Cale replied, sounding certain. The rest of the group nearby who heard this turned to look at him in sheer disbelief and On and Hong just stared in a deadpan like they didn’t believe him.

 

“You’re lying, human,” Raon chastised.

 

“I’m not, though?” he whispered.

 

“Alright, please stay still.”

 

The artist got to sketching, and Cale maintained a neutral expression. He didn’t know how the kids could manage smiling for so long without it hurting their face. 

 

A few minutes later, give or take twenty, he handed the paper back and smiled.

 

“Woah…” 

 

“Hey look! It’s us!”

 

“Hehe, I like the way my eyes look,”

 

Cale himself was quite satisfied, humming as he rummaged through a small pouch of a few coins, before sliding two towards the old artist. “Thanks,”

 

He tried to object, saying it was too much for the rates they charged, but Cale didn’t hear any of it and left with the rest of his group to keep exploring. He’d asked Raon about it and he said they could just add in his drawing later and that he wants to look around even more.

 

“You should eat more, Cale-nya,”

 

“Here, you like the skewers right? Have some more~”

 

“Young master-nim, these are some delicious meat buns that I have bought from Miss Fern,”

 

“Who’s miss Fern?”

 

“The person who sold it to Mary— she asked for her name,” Hannah helpfully supplied. “Those are spicy too, so I think you’d like them,”

 

“Eat, human, eat!”

 

“You need to grow up big and strong~”

 

“Are you thirsty? I bought drinks too— try this sweet tea,”

 

“Mn…” Why were they so strangely fixated on feeding him? He could’ve sworn they weren’t always like this… Well, he couldn’t complain if they understood the importance of food, though he was really getting full now.

 

“Hey, let’s try a game this time,”

 

“Look over there! That looks fun, right?”

 

Cornhole toss, hm? Cale noted to himself as they headed over. He’s never really played before but he’s seen them in movies once or twice. 

 

“Step right up~!”

 

“Cornhole toss! Throw three bags into the hole and win a prize~ You get 5 tries!”

 

“A prize! Let’s go!” Hong pulled Cale along while Raon pushed him from behind, laughing. Judging from what he knew about games like these, the prizes would probably be some sort of toy— usually a plush.

 

“Why hello there, young miss,”

 

“What’s the prize?” On asked, curious but straight to the point. The heart vendor laughed and pointed to a small shelf of prizes. As he had guessed, there sat a few plushies and toys. There were dolls shaped like animals such as bunnies, bears, dogs, and cats. Also some toys like spinning tops. Suddenly, Cale went pale.

 

“Ah, the one at the top…!”

 

“What a good eye,” the vendor smiled at Hong. “It’s none other than young master silver shield! In order to get him, you need to get all three bags in the hole~ how tough!”

 

“Human, look! It’s you! You’re so small!” Raon exclaimed excitedly as he zipped around, pointing to the tiny doll. Indeed, they had turned him into a marketable plushie. 

 

“I want to try…!” Hong yelled, excited.

 

“Me too,” On nodded along, not falling behind.

 

“Of course, of course. Just three copper coins and you can give it a shot!”

 

From the looks of it, it didn’t seem like a scam. The distance seemed far but was probably quite fair. You just need good aim and good control, he supposed. Cale handed the vendor six, for On and Hong each to get turns. 

 

In the end, neither managed to get all three in for the doll they wanted. Then they tried again. And again. And then one more time and then two more times. Normally, parents would stop at three and convince their kids to just try something else. They could try these many times because Cale was quite rich and spending so much on a carnival game wouldn’t put a dent in his wealth, as long as the kids were happy. Hong did get quite close, but fell short. Now they were sulking to themselves while eating an apple pie that Raon had given to them as consolation. 

 

Cale was about to try and cheer them up too, but then Lock stepped up.

 

“I’d like to try, please,” he said, polite but determined. He rummaged into his pouch but Cale had already tossed the three copper coins to the vendor. He seemed surprised by the action, but Cale just motioned for him to go ahead. Choi Han and Mary gave him an encouraging thumbs up from the side, and he got to it.

 

“!”

 

One, two, three, four— he got almost all of them in the cornholes, have for the fifth that fell just short but landed on the platform. On and Hong, who were quietly sulking to the side before this immediately got excited again as they cheered. The vendor, on the other hand, was quite speechless.

 

“Brave Lock! You are amazing!”

 

“That was so cool!”

 

“How did you do that? It was difficult because the bag was so floppy…”

 

“Haha,” he laughed happily at the compliments from his juniors and headed for the prize shelf. “Which one do you want?”

 

There were multiple Cales on the shelves, probably because they’d be in high demand, as much as Cale wished he didn’t need to admit that. They also varied in size, and held small differences. He wondered if multiple people had made them or the same person who did it different each time.

 

“Hm…” On hummed. “That one with the big smile doesn’t suit Cale at all,”

 

“Yup~ usually his smile would be less big and a bit pure because he’s trying to scam someone!”

 

“Ah, that one! The one with the tired expression, right?” Raon piped in, and On and Hong nodded in agreement. “It looks a lot like the human,”

 

“Mn, but I also like this one because it has a little silver shield in its hand…”

 

“Which one should we choose~?”

 

Seeing the children perplexed, Lock stepped up once again. “Just choose one— we can get the others too,” he smiled. “All you have to do is win again, right?”

 

The kids, who heard this, sparkled up at him. “Whoa, really?”

 

“You’re going to try and win again?”

 

“I guess so,”

 

“You’re so cool!”

 

Cale sighed as he tossed the vendor a silver. That should constitute about three, maybe four tries. It was more than he needed but really, it was more of a bother to rummage for 6 copper coins than it was for a single silver. What a reliable hyung, He thought as he watched him take the cornhole bags again and begin tossing. Choi Han also looked quite proud of him as he cheered, and even Beacrox was watching him with what seemed like an expression of approval.

 

Though, as he watched the children giggle to themselves with expressions that looked a bit vicious underneath their cute smiles, perhaps he may have gotten scammed.

 

The kids walked away with each their own Cale plushies, and even an extra two— one of which they had let Choi Han have. It was a smaller one with a loop tied to the top which he could attach onto his satchel like a keychain. He seemed quite satisfied, and the others seemed to be looking at it a bit too much for some reason with vicious expressions. Did they think the doll was stupid, or?

 

“I wanted one…” He didn’t believe his ears when he heard Hannah whisper behind him.

 

As they walked, they suddenly came across some familiar faces up ahead. “Ah, young master-nim and everyone!”

 

It was Rosalyn, waving their direction. She seemed to be in front of a stand and observing something, though it was hard to tell what it was from the distance. Glenn and Eruhaben seemed to be chatting about something, and from the way that Bud awkwardly stood off to the side while eating a meatbun as the only non-magic user in their group, it seemed that the subject was obvious.

 

The kids rushed over ahead of him to enthusiastically show off the snacks they had collected from every stand, as well as show off their— wait. Cale turned progressively paler as he got closer.

 

“Don’t tell me…”

 

Lock and Choi Han’s eyes sparkled at the same time as they headed over, and Ron let out an amused hum of interest. 

 

This section of the festival was full of hero merch. Cale gulped. His merch. 

 

“Wow, look!” Raon pushed Cale over in front of the stand, and Hong raised a small Cale plush up to his face. “It’s you, human! Again! This time, you have a lightning bolt!”

 

“Hey, look at this— it’s a Silver Shield replica,” Rosalyn pointed out while smiling. “Isn’t it lovely, young master-nim? It’s made of wood but very finely carved,”

 

At that moment, the glutton chimed in.

 

-Wow~ How nice! For a shield they’ve never seen up close, they got the engraved pattern quite accurate. I’m flattered— you should buy it, Cale!

 

Like hell I will. He thought to himself with a frown. Rosalyn laughed at him a second later.

 

The cheapskate then spoke as well, sounding somewhat whiny.

 

-Aw, I want to have merchandise, too! Hey, look at that plush the cute kid Hong is holding! It’s got a thunderbolt! You have to get it, Cale! You’re rich, right? Buy the whole stock!

 

How, annoying, really. Cale sighed. When he opened his eyes, Lock had pulled out a piece of paper from his bag and a pouch of money.

 

“Let’s see… 3 dolls, 4 charms, 5 silver shields… Lana also wanted this, and Maes…” As he pointed, the vendor picked out his choices accordingly. It was like a responsible older brother at a grocery store buying groceries except it was just— hero merchandise. Cale was completely baffled as he watched but still quietly paid for it before Lock could even rummage through his pockets.

 

“Choi Han! Look! There’s also you!” Upon the mention, Choi Han held the small doll version of him delicately. His eyes were widened in a sense of surprise, but also fascination. 

 

“Woah…”

 

“Are you a fan of the hero, young man? I also have a replica of his sword, here,” the woman who was running the stand smiled. “Have a look! You can wield a dark blade and one day be a swordmaster, just like him! How about it?”

 

“Ah. y.es. ju.st like… him.”

 

Cale immediately patted his shoulder and got beside Choi Han, smiling. “Yes, thank you so much for the offer madam. My friend here is an admirer of the hero Choi Han, you see,” Someone make him take acting classes, please. “It’s a wonderfully crafted sword.”

 

“My, don’t you have a great eye for craftsmanship. What's your name?”

 

He smiled. “Bob.”

 

“And your friend?”

 

“Rob,” Cale answered before Choi Han could even open his mouth.

 

“Huh, you both have similar names. It’s no wonder you’re friends, then. Well then sir Rob, I’ll let you have this sword at a discounted price~ just 5 silvers!”

 

“Human, you are smiling like a scammer again!”

 

“We’d be delighted to,” Cale replied, polite. Some kid in the wolf village might want it anyway— he saw Lock eyeing it earlier. 

 

In the end, they walked away with a truckload of stuff from the stand, stored away in a spatial magic storage pouch. Also…

 

“What is that?”

 

“Silver shield charms,”

 

“But why?” 

 

Everyone bought one and tied them in different places. Strapped to their bags, Choi Han tied his to the hilt of his sword, and Hannah even managed to tie it into his hair.

 

“Why not~?” On laughed.

 

In the end, it wasn’t like Cale could stop them, but that didn’t mean he had to say he liked that they bought them. He could physically feel his goal of laying low and not being recorded in history shrivel up and die with every piece of merch he finds of himself. 

 

“So, are we headed for Huiss now?” Cale asked. The rest of them were checking their bags when they nodded.

 

“Alright then,”

 

Raon and Eruhaben worked together as not to strain themselves too much with the large group, because the trip form the territory to Huiss was farther than from Harris Village to the Henituse territory. And in a blink, they opened their eyes standing in an alleyway somewhere in the capital.

 

“Cale— I mean, Bob-nya, where will we meet the crown prince?” Hong asked.

 

“I’m not sure, actually,” he admitted, before telling Hong to lower his voice. He hoped Alberu had come up with an alias of his own.

 

When everyone inevitably decided to tag along their outing, Cale decided he may as well ask Alberu if he also wanted to go out. So Raon helped him contact him through a communication device, and apparently he said yes. He looked quite exhausted, so Cale also told him he should just go take a nap instead if he was tired. 

 

Still, if it was Alberu, he’d probably contact them if he changed his mind, so he supposed all they could do now was wait for him to just appear?

 

“Wow~” On marveled as they stepped out onto the plaza.

 

“There’s a festival here too, human!” Raon exclaimed, pointing out various things. Similarly to the one that was being held at the territory, there was a lively atmosphere and bright colorful decorations. Even the ground paven beneath them had been decorated with patterns in chalk— he could see a few kids up ahead playing games and drawing on the floor. There was also a ton of music. At the center of the plaza was a stage where a live band was playing. 

 

“The ground is surprisingly clear— I thought it’d be completely covered in snow,” Cale commented.

 

“Hm… ah, see there?” Rosalyn pointed. In a few corners were some tiny, somewhat glowing stones in a warm hue. “Those are some relatively cheap low quality heat-emitting stones. They are technically somewhere in the vein of mana stones, though it’s difficult to really harness any of its mana for a single spell. You’ll often just see them be spread around during the winter when there’s a need for important events, like this one.”

 

“So it works like salt?”

 

“More long-lasting and with a greater effect, but roughly yes. They’ll last a few days and melt the snow. They also prevent the risk of ice growing on the pavement which also reduces risk of accidents,” She explained. “It’s also convenient that the sky is clear today— it isn’t snowing,”

 

“Huh. That’s handy.”

 

“Indeed so,”

 

“Hey, look!” Bud pointed to a sign plastered on the door of a tavern. “They’re giving out free drinks!”

 

“Ah, but we already ate and drank so much. Maybe later,”

 

“Where should we go first? Human, I want to try that thing! It smells good. Ooh, but also what’s that, human? Is it a game? And what’s that!?” Raon exclaimed, wings fluttering excitedly as he practically brimmed with energy.

 

“That person is swallowing a sword…!” On tugged at his arm and pointed to a street performer who was doing just as she said. A whirl of applause rang out at the seemingly daring act. Cale himself had seen a video that explained how these street performances work, and they were honestly more terrifying when he found out they actually inserted the blade down their esophagus. 

 

“What?! How’s he doing that?”

 

“Mn…” Eruhaben sounded both fascinated, perplexed, but also… mortified as he watched. For good reason, in all honesty.

 

“That sword’s kinda long, too…”

 

“Maybe it’s a trick with magic?”

 

“That’s some pretty complex magic for a street performance,” Glenn commented. “Though, I guess I’ve heard of travelling mage performers too.”

 

“Woah, and he’s pulling it back out just like that!”

 

“They’re giving him coins,” Hong pointed out. “Hey, can we do that too?”

 

“Mn…” Cale rummaged through his bag and pulled out three silver coins and passed it to the kids one by one. “Go ahead,”

 

Meanwhile, a portion of the group had found a few miraculously empty benches in the crowded plaza, getting a chance to sit and take a breather from all the walking and standing they did before. Choi Han peeked over Cale’s shoulder to look at the drawing that they had gotten from the street artist at the territory with a sense of marvel.

 

“Since it’s in charcoal, it still counts as a portrait of you even if you’re in disguise, right?” Choi Han pointed out.

 

“I guess so?” he shrugged. 

 

“I like the way they drew the eyes here,” he remarked. “I think they’re the hardest part to draw, right?”

 

“Did you used to doodle a lot in school?”

 

“When I’m bored and a little distracted,” he admitted. “What about you, Cale-nim?”

 

“Hm… Well, I’d scribble random lines at the corner of my page with a pen, I guess?” he contemplated. “Though when it comes to being distracted in class, it’s usually ‘cause I dozed off a little,” Though he was relatively focused and serious about his studies, hearing all the time that good grades get you in a good college and in turn a bright and preferably rick future, his high school years were still his most slothful and peaceful, mundane years. It might’ve been the only time he could manage a nap in the middle of the day.

 

Choi Han laughed at that and said he used to do the same after staying up the night before. “Did you have a favorite subject?”

 

“I don’t really need a favorite, they’re all just the same to me,” Cale admitted. He wasn’t particularly brilliant or stupid, just one in a dozen crammed in a classroom to listen to a teacher’s lecture in the day and do assignments. “But I liked lunch, I guess?”

 

“Ha!” Choi Han laughed again. 

 

“Hm?” he looked ahead. The kids had already given the street performer money, but they hadn’t come back. Actually, they were gathering with a bunch of other kids and talking about something. He got up and followed.

 

Getting closer, he squinted at the patterns on the ground. This was… “Hopscotch…?”

 

“Oh, it’s Bob,” Hong said. “It’s a game where you have to hop, I think?”

 

One of the kids nodded. “Yeah! You need to pick up a rock, like this one here, and throw it, and then jump. Do you know how to play, mister?”

 

“Uh…” Cale squinted at the chalk drawing of the layout on the ground. By the sound of it, he was probably right about it being hopscotch. Though the layout here was a bit different compared to the one he was used to in Korea, and he’s never even played it before. He does know the rules, though. “Yes,”

 

“Really?”

 

“You should show us!”

 

“Um…”

 

“Pleaseeeee?”

 

Really, what was he supposed to do in the face of a group of kids pleading at him to play some kids game? Cale sighed and picked up a rock from the ground. Judging by his memory, the hopscotch here looked a bit like the layout they used in western countries. It was more vertical than square like the ones he’d seen growing up in Korea. “Okay, so you throw it to the first square,” the rock bounced off the surface of the pavement and landed nicely at the center. “Now you have to jump on one leg over the first center.

 

Hop! Hop! Hop!

 

“Oooh~”

 

“Careful, mister! You’re all wobbly!”

 

“If the wind blows he could fall right away…”

 

God, his body was seriously weak, huh. His sense of balance felt totally off, but he managed to make it to the end of the board. “Now you turn around…”

 

Hop! Hop… Hop!

 

“Oh, what’s Cale— mn, Bob doing?” Bud questioned.

 

“Oh! It’s hopscotch.”

 

“Go Bob!”

 

“This is kind of embarrassing…” he mumbled to himself as he continued hopping, before then standing on the platform right before the one monopolized by the stone. “Then you have to pick it up…” He leaned down, and staggered, nearly falling to the ground, but managed to pick it up, squeezing the stone in his palm.

 

“Wow, he almost touched the line!”

 

“Be careful, you’re almost there!”

 

One jump later, and he was done. “Ha….” He sighed tiredly. “Then you just have to keep throwing it to the next square and repeat until you reach the end.” I’m not gonna demonstrate all that. 

 

“Good job mister~”

 

“You were kinda slow, but good job!”

 

“Here’s a lollipop!”

 

He reluctantly received the candy from the child, which was strange because usually it would be the other way around. “Thank you?”

 

“Oh, I wanna try!”

 

“Me too!”

 

Hong had a go first. He managed to go about 3 rounds before stumbling and touching the line, which was impressive for his first attempt. Then On went next, and got just halfway past her fourth round before accidentally slipping and almost falling, if not for Raon’s help.

 

Afterwards, they all just… started joining in, too. It started with Lock, with some light pleading from the kids. Being the athletic and strong kid he was, he nearly made it to the end, but stumbled a little and touched the line. Then Choi Han did it and succeeded at near-breakneck speed. Apparently he played a lot of games in his childhood, so he was also good at hopscotch. 

 

Then it became a competition— someway somehow. Everyone went one by one, timing it with the goal of finishing with the fastest record. The competition between Beacrox and Choi Han was particularly fierce. Seriously, he’s never seen someone glare so hard at another person while jumping on one leg with such crazy accuracy and speed. They were close, but Choi Han still made it faster the first time around, thanks to years of experience under his belt, according to Glenn’s stopwatch. Rosalyn made it about halfway, Mary almost tripped on her robe but was caught by Hannah and an invisible Raon, Bud tried— and really, maybe he could have done it, but he threw the stone and somehow tripped on it. Glenn went next, laughing at Bud, and then missed the jump over the first square and stumbled out of the line. Hannah made it all the way, though she couldn’t beat Choi Han. Jack also tried— and then slipped. But it was alright because the kids were cheering him on and Hannah caught him. 

 

Eruhaben and Ron only stood by, letting out their little benign old man laughs in amusement. Seriously, day by day Eruhaben started to sound more like Ron and it was terrifying. He suggested he drink lemonade once and Cale almost choked. 

 

And a few minutes later, after about 3 rematches between just Beacrox and Choi Han, the winner was decided and it was Beacrox. Seemed like Choi Han’s plot armor wore off for a day. 

 

“Bye bye!” the kids waved at On and Hong as they walked away. The boy who gave out lollipops to losers had spares and also gave them to the two siblings, as well as an extra (“It’s for my really cool friend, Ra!”).

 

As they walked around the plaza, suddenly a figure in a dark alley spoke in a quiet voice. “Hello, dongsaeng,”

 

Cale flinched before turning to his side, wide-eyed. “What the hell—” he squinted. “Wha— Your high—”

 

“Ah ah,” he wagged his finger like the dramatic bastard he was while smiling benevolently. “Call me hyung, since we’re supposed to be under the radar here,”

 

“Cookie prince!?”

 

“It’s the crown…! Mn, I mean, it’s— it's the cookie guy!” Hong stuttered out in shock.

 

“Pri— I mean, mn…” Choi Han hesitated as they tried to whisper. In an alleyway. With their hoods up. It was a recipe for suspicion.

 

“Okay we should really get out of here. Tavern, anyone?”

 

“Sweet!”

 

They went through the doors of the small establishment, bell ringing over the door. It was fortunately mostly empty and was spacious enough to hold everyone there. The owner, standing behind the table, quickly got up to greet them and help them get seated.

 

“What a large group,” he commented. “Are you travelers, perhaps?”

 

Cale replied in accordance with their plan. “Yes,”

 

He hummed. “Came here for the festival, I reckon?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“I see,” he nodded. “Well, feel free to order when you’re ready. How about some drinks to start?”

 

“Yes please!”

 

When the man left to go behind the counter and presumably to prepare the drinks for the sizable group, Cale crossed his arms and spoke to the person in front of him. “So, hyung-nim,”

 

“Just hyung is enough,”

 

“It’s nice that you could join us after all,”

 

He smiled sunnily as he folded his hands over the table. “Indeed,” he replied. “Also, it looks like everyone here is in some flashy disguises. Someone seems to have also stolen my look,”

 

Cale twirled his blonde hair with his finger while smiling, blue eyes glinting. “I don’t know what you’re talking about,” To be honest, the blue eyes were Raon’s suggestion which coincidentally made him look a lot like Alberu paired with the blonde hair. “You seem to have also chosen a disguise,”

 

Alberu had his bright blonde hair changed to black, similar to Choi Han’s, and his blue eyes a normal brown. Unexpectedly, they seemed to have followed some sort of theme here with Choi Han’s additionally red hair. 

 

Cale suddenly snorted, and Alberu tilted his head at him. “What are you laughing at, you punk?”

 

“Pfft— it really looks more like caution tape the more I look at it,”

 

Alberu scoffed at him as he readjusted his scarf. “You were literally the one who made this,”

 

“I know,” he’d made it black and yellow to suit both his dark elf and disguised form, but also because it’d be very silly. And he was right and everything was worth it.

 

“You remember what I said about it back then?”

 

“What? Are you going to brag that Cale Henituse knit a scarf for you while you’re in disguise?” 

 

“I will start preaching about young master silver shield, to the next random person who walks through the doors of this tavern.”

 

“Shut up,”

 

Alberu laughed with his bright sun-like expression before taking a bite out of the complimentary breadsticks. “You’ve got little braids in your hair,”

 

Cale shrugged. “That was the kids,”

 

“Cookie prince! Tell us, what’s your fake name?” Raon piped in, munching over a chocolate chip cookie over Cale’s shoulder. It got crumbs all over him. 

 

“Fake name?”

 

“Yeah! You need one to stay in disguise!” he proclaimed. “Mine is ‘Ra’,”

 

He blinked. “Ra…?”

 

“From ‘Raon’,” Cale helpfully supplied. Alberu just nodded along and praised him.

 

“Well, my fake name is…. Bob, I guess?”

 

Five different people began to immediately wheeze uncontrollably at their tables like they’d just gotten sucker punched.

 

 

“Weak human,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“The food here is very good!” Raon exclaimed in a satisfied manner.

 

“I agree,” On nodded as she bit from her sandwich, speaking with some food in her mouth but still managing to sound quite coherent. “I like the sauce,”

 

“They sell meat skewers here, too,” Hong added, waving around one from his plate and holding it in front of Cale. “You should try it!”

 

“Mn…” he was already a bit full from his meal already, but just one piece wouldn’t hurt. He opened his mouth for Hong to carefully shove the stick in and bit off a chunk.

 

“Is it good?” he asked, curious.

 

Cale nodded as he chewed. “It’s good.” Ron wiped the side of his mouth with a handkerchief. “Very tender.”

 

“Hey, so Rob here just told me that you bought merch of… a certain young master?” Alberu piped in with a single raised brow of amusement. Choi Han had pulled out the small silver shield charm and plushie he had gotten back at the territory. Cale sighed.

 

“They bought merch of me,”

 

“How fun,”

 

“Ugh…”

 

“Cookie prince, look at mine! The human looked very tired, see?” Raon said.

 

Hong also brought out his after wiping his sauce-covered hands. “And mine’s got a silver shield~”

 

“And this one has a little thunderbolt,” On laughed.

 

Cale’s expression soured and Alberu laughed again. 

 

“Mn, a coffee for Mister… Bobert?” A few quiet snickers rang out from the rest of the group and Cale managed to scoff. Since Cale had already chosen the name ‘Bob’, Alberu had to go with something else. This name was suggested by Mary, and, failing to come up with anything else, Alberu accepted defeat and ordered a black coffee under the name Bobert.

 

“Does Miss Tasha know you left?”

 

“She was the one who promised to cover up for me and helped with my disguise,”

 

“So the whole palace doesn’t know?”

 

“I took a sick day,”

 

“Fair enough,” he shrugged, sipping from a glass. Glancing to the side, he could see a sign plastered on the window and on the wall of the tavern, reading ‘Hiring’. Thinking about it now, he supposed that the shop seemed quite understaffed. Actually, it seemed to be only run by the old man who owned it, as well as another young boy who’d come through occasionally to serve their dishes. Though both seemed quite sprightly, it was hard to imagine the two running a tavern on their own.

 

He must’ve stared at the sign for too long because the owner spoke up. “Do you happen to be looking for a job, young man?”

 

“No,” he replied. “I’m not from around here,” which wasn’t a lie, since he didn’t live in the capital but instead in the Henituse territory, which was a few ways away from Huiss if they traveled through normal means. Which they didn’t, but it wasn’t like Cale needed a job. He was rich.

 

“That’s a shame, then,” he shrugged as he picked up their empty glasses and dishes. “We’ve only recently opened, and we’re also understaffed. If you know a friend looking for a job, part-time perhaps, you can direct them to my tavern,”

 

“Will do,” he nodded. The man seemed like he’d make a decent boss. Stern, but not with ill-temper, and capable too. Cale was sure his tavern would get more popular eventually anyway so there wasn’t any need to worry.

 

Then, after paying, he was immediately robbed about 5 minutes after stepping out of the store.

 

“Wha—!? Young master-nim! Your money!”

 

Not just the pouch he’d been using to carry coins, the perpetrator also took his leftovers which he had packed for later. Choi Han was on it almost immediately, and it didn’t take much for Cale to catch up with some help from the thief.

 

-Oh, did you see that? That girl had some sticky fingers.

 

You saw them?

 

-I’ve got sharp eyes. She’s a young girl, green hair and yellow eyes. I think she’s a beggar.

 

A young beggar, huh. 

 

They did eventually catch her, as a child was no match for the speed of a swordmaster and an ancient power. When Cale got there, the girl, who’s description matched what the thief had said, was dangling slightly above the ground in Choi Han’s hold. The guy held her up by her oversized sack of a shirt with little effort, while she was wriggling around like she was clawing at the air with the stolen goods in her hands. The sight reminded Cale of a feral cat being picked up by the nape.

Seeing this, Cale just nonchalantly extended his hand with his palm out. “I’m gonna need that back.”

 

The young girl just hugged the coins close in a death grip while glaring at him.

 

“You can keep the food, but I’m still going to need that money back,” He was too lazy to go to a bank or something to exchange his gold coins for silver and copper. That bag was his only supply of silver and copper coins.

 

Seeing as she still seemed adamant in her refusal, Cale sighed again. “He’s not going to put you down until you do,”

 

“...” She looked more hesitant after hearing that, firm resolve wavering as she looked down from where she was dangling. It wasn’t a far distance, but hovering above the ground unable to move was no good either.

 

“So, how about this,” he suggested, leaning down slightly so they were eye to eye. “This mister here is going to let you down, and then you’re just going to give that back. Again, you can just keep the food, and we’ll both get going,”

 

Observing her, she seemed somewhat hesitant. A few times he’d peek behind her towards a corner in an alley, as if looking for something. It could be that she really urgently needed money for something.

 

“Alright,” he sighed. “I think we’ll just let you down first and talk. Don’t try to run away,” she peeked behind her to see Choi Han, who was smiling but was certainly strong. “Is that what you want to do?” He really wanted to hurry up and get going now, so he should quickly resolve this.

 

“...fine.” it was the first thing she said to him, followed by a nod as she looked down defeatedly.

 

At Cale’s sign, Choi Han set her down back on her feet gently, as promised. The thought of escaping seemed to flash through her eyes for a moment, before disappearing when she saw Choi Han behind her again. 

 

“You,” Cale said. “What’s your name?”

 

“...becky.” she mumbled, looking away.

 

“Alright then, Becky,” Cale kneeled down slightly to get at her level. Just so he could make sure she was listening. At the same time, he managed to get a closer look at her. Becky's clothes were torn and too thin for the weather, her hair was matted and tangled, and her eyes looked tired. She was also way too thin for a kid, looking a bit gaunt with grime and dirt coating her skin. Even so, something about her gaze seemed determined.

 

“Why’d you rob me?” it was kind of a stupid question, in hindsight.

 

“...”

 

“Just answer honestly.”

 

“...‘Cause I needed money,” she looked at him with an attitude as if to ask ‘isn’t that obvious?’.

 

“Are you hungry?”

 

“...yeah.”

 

She still held the leftovers Cale had wrapped up from the tavern, though she seemed unsatisfied by it. To be fair, a single meal can’t satisfy a child who’d been starving for days. He’d know.

 

“You still need to give that back,” he motioned to the bag of money.

“...” with heavy reluctance, the young girl finally let him have it back. Cale took it and placed it somewhere secure on his person in case anyone else tried to snatch it back.

 

Becky was peeking behind herself again. Cale looked behind her, and turning the corner of the alleyway she could see a bunch of other kids peeking over hesitantly. “Haa…” so it was that kind of situation, huh? “You’ve got friends?”

 

She flinched, immediately looking behind her and shooting the other kids a glare until they hurriedly retreated back to the darkness of the alley. He could hear Choi Han snickering a little to himself with a good-natured expression.

 

“Seems like you do,”

 

“No, I…”

 

Cale looked to his side. There was a bakery there with the door open, the scent of freshly baked bread wafting in. “Come with me,”

 

Becky seemed quite stiff, but obliged, quietly following him. She grew progressively more perplexed when he led her to a bakery.

 

“Why’re we here…?”

 

“Okay,” they were standing in front of the counter now. “Repeat and follow after me,”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Just do it,”

 

“Ah— o-okay?”

 

The baker seemed to have his attention on them both, just as confused as the next person. “I want,”

 

“I… want,”

 

“Everything,”

 

“E-Everything…?”

 

Cale pointed to one end of the table full of bread. “From here,”

 

“From here…”

 

Then he dragged his finger to point towards the other end. “To here,”

 

She subconsciously copied him. “To he— what!?” Even the baker seemed shocked.

 

“Repeat that again,”

 

“T-To here? But wait, what are you talking about, mister…!? Are you crazy!?”

 

“No,” he motioned for her to open up her palm. At this point, she just followed along, albeit baffled. He placed a gold coin in her hand. “I’m rich,”

 

“Ah…!” she gasped, holding the coin close. 

 

“Go give that to the baker. Now, listen up. That bread supply should keep you and your friends fed for a while. Make sure not to eat it too fast and in small portions— she’ll take them all wrapped individually with some water, thanks. Be quick about it.” He spoke to the baker in a rather crass manner since he wanted to hurry up and get it done with, but she seemed quite happy about the money and didn’t care about it at all. He was in disguise anyway so there was no need to worry about what anyone might think. 

 

“O-Okay…”

 

He pulled out an extra bag of gold coins he carried with him. Such were the perks of being rich. “Hold onto this and don’t lose it. Listen, when you go out of this store through that door, take a left and walk until you see a tavern called ‘The Heart of The Rock’. There should be a sign up front saying that they’re hiring, and they’d take just about anyone. Go work there. The owner can be strict with you but you have to deal with it and make money. Maybe ask if some of your older friends can work there too,”

 

She was still very stunned by the amount of money in her hands but nodded dazedly. “Y..Yes…!”

 

“Mn, but you can’t get hired in these clothes,” he motioned to her ripped up shirt and pants. “Right next to the tavern is a clothes shop. Go there, buy yourself and your friends proper clothes. Get something warm. You can’t get sick while you’re working. Do you have anywhere to stay?”

 

“No…”

 

“There’s an inn a block ahead of the clothes shop. Just go there— should be enough for everyone to stay a few nights, so you have to work hard until you can figure out a better place to stay. Take a bath and get proper rest so you can work.”

 

“Wh… What if they won’t take us?”

 

Well, it would be weird for a bunch of poor kids to be walking around with a bag of gold coins. It wouldn’t be difficult for someone to accuse them of thievery. Cale pulled out his small notebook, ripped out a page, and scribbled something in before folding it up. “Give them this,”

 

“What is it…?”

 

“You can’t open it. Just hold onto it, and if anyone questions you, give them the paper. They won’t ask anything else,”

 

“What does that mean…?”

 

“Just go along with it,”

 

“Alright, but…” she hesitated. “Why are you doing this?” Why are you helping some random homeless kid who tried to rob you a few minutes ago?

 

“Do you need a reason to help the needy?” She reminded Cale of a lot of people. Choi Han, who was standing outside the door of the bakery, smiled at him. 

 

“...”

 

“...I like that look in your eyes,” he just said whatever came to his mind. “You’re very determined.”

 

He thought of some other kids he used to know from a while back, and then a glimpse of himself. It’s not like he’s solving all their problems— just tossing them a bag of money won’t fix their situation. Some bread probably won’t fill their stomachs either, and they can’t stay at an inn every night— in the end they still don’t have a permanent home. So she shouldn’t need to feel like she was indebted to him. How they’ll live in the future depends on how she chooses to work toward it and her own efforts. 

 

The young girl, Becky, just stared at him, wide-eyed and still, before suddenly wiping something from her eye. “...thanks.” she said. “Thanks, rich mister. Really.”

 

Rich mister, huh? Not the weirdest thing he’d been called.

 

“Don’t rob people anymore, and hurry on your way.” he said. “Your friends are waiting,”

 

 

Eventually, they found the rest of their group again. Apparently, they’d chased Becky quite far, and the crowd had impeded them from catching up. Choi Han explained the situation, which made things a bit awkward.

 

“So a beggar girl stole from you… And you gave her a bag of money?” Hannah sounded quite perplexed by the conclusion.

 

“You really are kind, young master-nim,” Jack seemed like he’d start tearing up from how emotional he felt over the story.

 

“I can’t believe that stunt you pulled at the bakery, though,” Alberu sighed. “Everything from here to there, huh?”

 

“What a power move,”

 

“I’ve done it once before already, though,” he sighed. 

 

“You’ve what?”

 

“Choi Han mentioned you wrote something on a piece of paper…” Rosalyn pointed out. “What was it?”

 

“Mn…” He remembered the words he’d scribbled in last minute at that time. 

 

‘These kids can do whatever they want. -Cale Henituse’

 

…Complete with his official signature on the bottom, and a stamp he carried around of the family crest for… reasons. He wasn’t completely sure it would work, but it should be good enough, right? Since apparently he was such a famous hero. Either way, there was at least proof they’d gotten the money from someone else and wouldn’t be accused of thievery.

 

“Something.”

 

“So ominous,”

 

On, who was on his right, spoke as she swung their joined hands back and forth. “It was nice of you to help her out that way,” she said, smiling. “Good job,”

 

Ah, so that’s why. He thought as he dusted small bits of snow off of her hat. She reminded me of On.

 

Their activities for the rest of the festival consisted of everything from watching street performers, buying more stuff, eating more, and playing and the like. The street performers were quite interesting. There was someone who breathed fire, singers and bards who played various instruments like fiddles, banjos, and mandolins, there were also those people who could lift themselves off by their cane, magicians, and some with familiars who knew particular tricks.

 

There were also the traveling mage performers that were mentioned before. Magic was really a spectacle when it was intended to be. Light shows, levitation, rapidly growing flowers. It was quite impressive.

 

“Smart Rosalyn and Glenn, can you also do something like that?” Raon asked.

 

“Of course I can,” Glenn seemed quite prideful. “They have sufficient practice refining their craft, sure, but it isn’t something I can’t do myself either.” He leaned down and picked up a clump of snow. As he mumbled incantations, a small rabbit was carved from the clump and hopped around atop his palm.

 

“And so can I,” Rosalyn smiled, and from the tip of her fingertips sprouted a flame, dancing about before curling into a ball, stretching its wings in a burst of cinders. A phoenix flew around before lunging at the snow bunny and reducing it to a puddle of water, before promptly disappearing. 

 

“...” Glenn stared at his palm with a deadpan expression while Bud consolingly pat his shoulder.

 

“Wow…!”

 

At some point it turned into a competition— again— and suddenly flutters of golden dust gathered together and the next thing the kids knew, there was now a tiny golden dragon flying around them, wings fluttering elegantly, refined and fluid. Rosalyn and Glenn just stared at it with a mix of awe, but also defeat.

 

Afterwards, they happened upon another interesting thing—

 

Raon let out a little gasp. “Good Girl Mary, look!” he exclaimed, pointing towards another stand among a dozen. “Isn’t that you?”

 

“!” Her eyebrows raised quite drastically, though her expression remained mechanical. It seemed that this particular vendor also sold merchandise of the Necromancer Hero, Mary. She approached, before picking up a small plush doll.

 

She held it up next to her face. “It is me,”

 

Mary was in disguise, so the resemblance wasn’t very striking at first, but their blank expressions definitely matched up. The small chibi-like doll had short dark hair, dark eyes, and wore a long black robe like Mary did. There was also the extra detail of small detailed black markings trailing up her face, representing her dead mana scars.

 

“It is a good doll,” Raon acknowledged with a nod as he pat the doll’s head with his chubby paw.

 

“Wow…” Hannah got a closer look, seeming quite intrigued. She poked at it with her finger. “It really does look like you. Do they have another one?”

 

On looked around curiously, before lifting up something… long resting on the side on display. “Wow~” she lightly swung it around a little and brought it closer to inspect. “Look at it, Mr. Bobert. It’s the crown prince’s spear,”

 

Alberu’s eyes actually lit up in a sparkle of interest as he moved closer to lean down and take a look. He traced the carvings along the handle and the tip while mumbling to himself. “Ha… they got the shape roughly right, but the color’s a bit off… still, not bad…”

 

From his pocket, he pulled out one very fancy looking white dagger that seemed as if it would fit a ceremony better than for practical use. From its distinct coloring, Cale could already recognize it was Taerang taking a different form. How clever.

 

“Oh! It’s Choi Han, too!” Hong exclaimed, picking out a small clay statue of him holding his sword. It actually looked quite nice, and relatively detailed. Whoever made it must’ve been quite passionate. Wait, actually, who has been making all this merch?

 

“Oh…” Choi Han held it carefully, turning it to the side to observe all the different angles. He seemed quite happy about it, so Cale slid a few gallons to pay for Choi han and Mary’s stuff to the merchant. Of course, his highness the crown prince of the Roan kingdom could certainly take care of himself.

 

“Hiyaaah!” Sensing the sudden exclamation, they turned their head to the side to see a child— raising a black wooden sword and wearing a cape— stand triumphantly. 

 

“Hey, doesn’t he look kinda like…”

 

“Choi Han, right?”

 

“Ha! I block it with my mana-shield,” another little girl, in a robe that was similar color to the one Rosalyn often wore, raised her hands ahead as if she was really conjuring up a defense. Cale also noticed a few painted rocks worn around her neck like a bracelet.

 

“Aww…” Roslayn whispers from the side with a small chuckle.

 

“You crazy mage! Fine, then I’m going to have to use my ultimate move… Shiiing!” He voiced out the sound effects and moved the sword about a little. “I am the Dark Knight of Cale Henituse! See if you can block this— Dark aura of untimely destruction!”

 

“Pfft—”

 

“Stop, stop— I shouldn’t laugh—”

 

“Huh, so I guess we’re supposed to be fighting in this scenario?” Rosalyn questioned.

 

“I guess so?” Choi Han shrugged.

 

“Uh oh! Lock, come and help me!”

 

And just like that, from the shadows emerged yet another little boy, with fake wolf ears on his head, spun into the scene— literally. He was spinning. Children were very peculiar. “Don’t worry, Rosalyn! I’ll help you,” he clenched his fists before inhaling a breath. “Huff. Haaaa…! HAAAAAA! BERSERK MODE!”

 

Bud completely lost it and almost fell to the ground trying not to laugh too loud while Glenn attempted to scold him about making fun of a kid’s play-pretend session, but unfortunately he was also trying his absolute hardest not to laugh. Lock was crouched on the ground covering his face which was red from embarrassment, but Cale could also tell he was laughing in a very endeared way. He supposed his hyung instincts were quite strong.

 

“S-So…” Alberu tried to speak coherently, still not quite over the ‘Dark Aura of Untimely Destruction’ bit. “Their idea of a berserk transformation is… screaming really loudly?”

 

What kind of crazy Goku logic is this? But anyway, the kid who was pretending to be Lock caught the kid-Choi han’s blade with ease, using both of his hands. Kid-Choi Han then proceeded to gasp dramatically in an attempt to resist. 

 

“Wow, these children’s games are quite intense, hm?” Alberu commented from the side. Seeing as he’s probably never played pretend in his youth, this must come as some sort of surprise to him. Cale couldn’t judge because he also never got to do this when he was younger but he at least saw other kids.

 

“I remember playing with my siblings when I was younger too, though we’d usually just go out into the forest and scavenge while playing hide and seek,” Lock said.

 

Cale sipped from his drink. “Well, that kid’s still a better actor than Choi Han,”

 

Rosalyn choked on her drink so hard she actually needed Jack to help her breathe, but it was difficult when she couldn’t stop laughing. Choi Han who was beside her just looked away in embarrassment.

 

“Don’t worry!” Yet another kid rushed to the scene, carrying a large— oh no. “I’m here!”

 

Everyone there gasped. “Young master silver shield!”

 

Now it was Cale's turn to choke.

 

“Well look who it is,” Alberu smiled in a very sun-like way despite being in disguise, patting Cale’s shoulder. He just groaned.

 

This little kid, who was carrying around a big wooden silver shield, raised it high above his head and blocked the hypothetical attack. Then he recoiled and began fake-coughing. 

 

“Oh no! Young master silver shield, are you okay?”

 

“I… I’m fine!”

 

He could see Choi Han and the kids frowning as they watched, and Alberu sigh. It was just a kids’ game, so he doesn’t really get why they’re so upset.

 

“Whoa! What’s that?”

 

A new challenger has entered the arena, as it seemed. A tall person, probably older than the kids, came in, wearing a mask over his face, and with another child over his shoulders that wore a black robe. 

 

“Oh.” Mary let out a short gasp as she watched.

 

“Necromancer Mary!”

 

The masked person came in and swooped up a few kids and spun them around while they were yelling. She seemed to be on neither Rosalyn nor Choi Han’s side. “Oh nooo! The bone dragon caught us!”

 

“Unhand me!”

 

“No!” The little girl laughed. “No more fighting! Sit down now,”

 

“Huh,” Jack smiled. “That does seem like something Miss Mary would do,”

 

Mary was staring up at the small child being carried on the tall person’s shoulders with a sense of wonder. “She resembles me,” she said, pointing to the girl's hands, and even on her face. “There are small markings there, as well.”

 

“Oh…” Rosalyn observed with a sense of curiosity. 

 

At that moment another little kid came in, carrying a white paint spear. 

 

“My, and who could that be, hyung?” Cale smiled as they watched the familiar-looking child raise his spear.

 

“Crown prince!”

 

“Haha…” he laughed nervously.

 

“I am the spearman of the sun! As your prince, I command you to stop it!”

 

“Oh! Okay!”

 

“Wow…” 

 

“I wish I could just end things like that…” Alberu sighed.

 

Without realizing, they all had subconsciously started clapping. The kids, who had noticed the adults watching them, got embarrassed and ran away carrying their hero toys, except the one who resembled Mary. She tapped the person carrying her and was promptly set down. Then she ran over to Mary.

 

“Unnie, are you a big fan of Necromancer Mary, too?” Mary blinked robotically, as if confused. The little kid smiled. “You have markings on your hands too, like me!”

 

“...Ah.” she nodded. 

 

“Did you get hurt, too?”

 

“Ah, sorry about my sister, ma’am,” the tall boy had removed his bone-dragon mask and was smiling sheepishly while ruffling the girl’s hair. He must’ve noticed her staring at the markings on the girl’s hands. “She got poisoned in an accident from a monster sometime a few years ago, and ever since she’s seen the necromancer hero, she’s been quite proud of her likeness with her dead mana scars.”

 

“Oh…” Mary carefully leaned down to kneel to get on the little girl’s level. “I was also hurt.”

 

“You were?”

 

“Yes,” she nodded. The girl looked closely at the scars on her face.

 

“That’s okay! Hurt people are still cool,” she replied. “Like the hero, Mary! I thought she was scary at first, but she seems so nice, and awesome, and cool! And super strong, too! She can control dragons! Don’t you think so?”

 

She seemed somewhat stunned, unable to reply. Hannah, who was next to Mary, held her hand up for a high-five. “Right?” The little girl laughed and high-fived her. “The hero Mary is the coolest,”

 

“I wanna be like her!” 

 

Mary reached out carefully to caress her head. Cale had an inkling of what Mary must’ve been thinking when she heard her say that. “You do not need to be,” she replied. “You can be cool as yourself, too. You are already very strong.”

 

“Really?”

 

She wiped dust off her cheek, hand touching the scars trailing up her face. “Very strong.”

 

In the end, Mary gave her the small doll of herself she got from the merchant. The young girl was more than thrilled to receive them, and they were back on their way. Of course, Raon insisted on buying Mary another doll anyway in addition to the one he already had.

 

“Haaa…” Cale slumped over the bench as he sat and caught his breath.

 

“Are you alright, young master-nim?”

 

“I’m fine,” he sighed, heaving slightly. “Just kind of… tired… I guess,”

 

“We could take another break if you want,”

 

“It’s fine, I just need a second,”

 

“Drink some water, weak human!”

 

On eyed him, somewhat suspiciously, as he drank. It made him a little nervous from how sharp her gaze was, but he tried not to make it too obvious.

 

-Don’t push yourself too hard. 

 

The crybaby spoke, before being followed by the glutton priestess.

 

-Have some bread, Cale! You still have that jam-filled one and I bet it’s still warm.

 

-It’s best not to overexert yourself. You could worry your family, too.

 

The Super Rock added, and Cale just stayed silent.

 

“Look over there! There’s more games here, too!”

 

It looked like a carnival lineup, with different assortments of games lying up ahead to choose from. He’s personally never been to one himself, but he had a few guesses to how some games would work. Like one had a target, so surely it had something to do with accuracy. Maybe an archery contest? There weren’t any archers in their group, though. And ring toss, and this, and that— there were of course also a ton of prizes lined up for winners.

 

“Guess how many beans are in this jar!”

 

The jar was open at the top, and the container was glass so they could see through it. The prize was supposedly, yet another Cale Henituse Hero doll. Specifically a tiny clay doll, with a big chibi head. The kids were eyeing it with great interest.

 

“Oh, let me guess!” Bud chimed in suddenly. He seemed woozy. 

 

“Where’d you get that drink?”

 

“Told ya! They’re handing ‘em out free~” he laughed. “Hm…” he leaned in closely, before… taking a whiff. Can his ancient power count things for him? “2,589!”

 

“Nope!”

 

“Aww…”

 

“Where’d you even get that number…?” Glenn asked.

 

“You try guessing, then,”

 

“Uh, 700?”

 

“Wrong!”

 

“Ugh…”

 

“Hm, let me try…” Choi Han took a close look. “542?”

 

“Certainly not,”

 

“Oh…”

 

“Human!” Raon hovered close to him. “Ask if it’s… hm… 895!”

 

“895?”

 

“Very close!”

 

“Woah, really?”

 

“Youngest is a genius~”

 

Cale raised a brow, whispering beside him. “Did you use magic to find out?”

 

“Whaaat? No…”

 

“896!”

 

“Close!”

 

“897!”

 

“Close!”

 

“89—”

 

“Stop that!”

 

After some trial and error, and some wasted copper coins (it turned out they needed to pay to guess) they did end up guessing it— the honor belonged to On who said 892 beans in a jar. The kids were quite happy with their prize.

 

“What are you going to do with all those dolls of me?” Cale asked in bafflement.

 

“Give it lots of hugs,”

 

“The real deal is right here, you know,”

 

“You can also get hugs, human!”

 

“Don’t feel jealous, Cale-nya~”

 

The next game was axe-throwing, interestingly enough. Cale tried to pick it up, but it almost ended up falling and chopping off his toes. Choi Han quickly intervened and did it for him. He’s never thrown an axe before, as it seemed, but he was the main character for a reason, and out of his three attempts, he hit two. Bud almost signed up, before quickly being restrained by Glenn because by god, a drunk man with an axe was terrifying, whether he was really that drunk or not. Interestingly, Ron and Beacrox tried it this time as well. Beacrox, who wielded a greatsword and was an assassin, had tremendous strength and precision and hit a perfect bullseye his second and last attempt, while Ron hit all three.

 

“Wow! What a strong bunch!”

 

The gift was a pack of cocoa beans for hot cocoa, fitting for the season. “What a fitting prize,” Ron smiled. “I believe these would pair lovely with some spices. I picked up a new cocoa recipe, you see. Please look forward to it, young master-nim.”

 

You know what? He thought as he shivered. At least it’s not lemonade or herbal tea. 

 

From beside him, Alberu contemplated to himself. “Hm…” he trailed off as he eyed the targets. “I wonder if—”

 

“Hyung, put the gun away.”

 

After that was a trivia booth, which Raon had a lot of fun with.

 

“In which kingdom was the spice turmeric first found?”

 

“Oh, I know this one, human!” He laughed. “It’s the Caro Kingdom~”

 

“Caro Kingdom,”

 

“Correct again!” the host shouted. “There is a rare plant with specific healing properties that can heal bleeding wounds at lightning speed, and are even used in high-quality potions. What is it called?”

 

“Easy-peasy! It’s a flower called the Saint’s Tears, weak human! Tell him!”

 

“The flower, Saint’s Tears,”

 

“Another correct answer!”

 

“You're very clever,” Cale praised.

 

“This much is a piece of cake for the great and mighty Raon Miru, human! You just have to study a lot~”

 

When they were done with that, they went ahead and played ring toss, which On and Hong, with refined precision and skill, completely knocked it out of the park like it was the easiest thing in the world. Lock had tried it before but couldn’t get the rings to land properly around the bottles, and instead tumbling off when he tossed too strongly.

 

“You both sure are skilled,” he remarked, ruffling their hair.

 

“It’s easy though~ I could do it with my eyes closed!”

 

“I could do it in my cat form, too~”

 

Ron and Beacrox, who had been teaching them, nodded in satisfaction. Cale just shrugged.

 

They went around just like that, dominating every game in their path like a pack of pros. It was a good thing they had magical spatial storage compartments to keep all of their weird prizes in or it would have been a double-edged sword. Everyone still seemed quite energetic, too. They played so hard that Cale couldn’t keep up and needed to sit out for a bit. 

 

“You go on ahead, I’m exhausted,” 

 

“Are you sure?” On asked.

 

“Yeah, you don’t have to worry. I’ll be right here if you need me,”

 

“Okay then,” Hong nodded. “Don’t go anywhere and just rest, okay?”

 

“If anyone tries to get you, just scream!”

 

Why would anyone try to get me? As he pondered the question, the kids were waving as they headed past the crowd to follow Alberu back to a few games. The latter looked back at Cale before watching over the kids for him. 

 

Haa, what a tiring day. Cale really wanted to go home and lay in his bed right about now and sleep like a rock. It was noisy here, too, the sound of chatter and laughter and song, but he was also just too exhausted to care.

 

It was a festival to celebrate the coming year, huh. 

 

“It’s been…” he couldn’t really believe it. “Two— almost three years,”

 

It had been that long since the day he first woke up in the body of Cale Henituse, in the Henituse territory. Multiple wars later, and the world was finally at some semblance of proper peace without any major wars to worry about brewing on the horizon. It was a future he was satisfied with, where his people could live freely without needing to worry too much.

 

The new year, what would it be like?

 

He tried to picture it in his mind as he drifted to sleep.

 

 

Choi Han felt Cale’s faint soft breaths on his shoulder where his head rested as he carried him on his back. He was light as a haystack, which concerned the swordmaster quite a bit. He hadn’t been eating properly during the wars, and he was sure all of that blood he was coughing up practically on the daily wasn’t helping his condition either. 

 

He’d found him once they were finished and tired from playing and hanging out all day asleep on the bench where he had sat fifteen minutes earlier. Cale had mentioned that once they were finished, they could all just rest up at the Henituse villa in the capital, so that was where they were headed.

 

Fortunately, now that everything was over— now that there was peace, Cale could start getting into a better lifestyle and taking care of himself and slacking off like he’d always wanted for so long, and he wouldn’t have to sacrifice himself and risk his life all the time for their sake. Choi Han, and the rest of them, would make sure of it.

 

As he walked at a leisure pace, Choi Han could feel the redhead stir awake, strands of red that draped loosely down his shoulder swaying as Cale mumbled something incoherent when he lifted his head.

 

“Choi…” 

 

“You fell asleep, Cale-nim,” he explained. “We’re heading to the villa.”

 

“...Oh,” he said, pausing for a moment before relaxing and putting his head back down. “Where’re the others?”

 

“They're just up ahead,” Choi Han said, motioning to the figures in the distance as Cale nodded. “Are you feeling alright, Cale-nim?”

 

“M’fine,” he replied. “Like I said, I was just feeling a bit tired, I guess.”

 

Choi Han hummed. They had been walking around and hanging out all day. It made sense that he'd get worn out by the end of it. But Choi Han still felt somewhat… worried. It's been a while now, but Cale's fatigue never seemed to go away at all. He also remembered what On had mentioned earlier.

 

“Something’s off with him.” She said. “He seems tired all the time and a bit tense. He seems to be thinking really hard about something, too. I’m afraid he might be hiding something, like if he’s actually not feeling well or if something bad happened.”

 

Was he sick? It would make some sense, since Cale was still frail despite his resilience and all his power. Maybe the cold weather was a bit much for him. Choi Han frowned. He should have listened to Beacrox when he told him to put on another layer of-

 

“The sunset’s… nice,” Choi Han flinched, stopping when he heard the Korean words that suddenly came out of Cale's mouth. Soon after, his steps swung back into motion.

 

“...Yeah,” Choi Han replied, looking forward towards the view up ahead that painted the sky a warm hue. “It is.”

 

“Y’know,” Cale said. “You have a bit of an accent when you speak Korean. Jungsoo had it too— it would come out thicker when he’s swearing or upset about something— mn, also when he's drunk during company parties.”

 

“Really?”

 

Cale let out a low hum “Yeah. A Satoori dialect, right?” He asked. “He lived somewhere in the country, around Gyeongnam, said he had the biggest tile-roofed house in the neighborhood and his family researched sword arts. Did you grow up there too?” 

 

“I… Yeah,” Choi Han replied, voice growing solemn as he lamented his old home— the one that he now knew was destroyed along with everyone he knew. “It was… uh, a nice house, it fit all of my cousins and my grandparents and aunts and uncles. A lot of space to run around, and, um, we had this big yard where we liked to play pretend sword fights and swing around wooden and toy swords and acted like we were ancient swordsmen, you know?”

 

“Mn, really? He did mention liking that.”

 

“Yes, and there was also…” Choi Han bit his lip as he tried to think of anything he could about his childhood. “There was also that old tree in a clearing near the woods where wildflowers grew, and my dad and uncles tied a tire on a rope to one of its branches and it was a swing we’d all take turns playing on. We’d host… we’d host barbeques in the backyard for special occasions, and then, uh, I think we used to do a lot of martial arts showcases too.” Choi Han reminisced. He was starting to piece things back a little better now, but their faces were still blurry and the rooms in his house would look a bit different each time he tried to picture it. 

 

“And, um, sometimes my aunt would take me to school by motorbike and on the way we’d stop by for street snacks— I always liked the fried chicken and rose tteokbokki— and then… ah, at school they called me a samurai and would ask me to perform cool moves from comic books using a toy sword from the drama club, and then they’d all laugh at me for dropping it.”

 

Choi Han let out a quiet chuckle as he looked back at all those specific memories. He could barely even remember the color of his aunt’s motorbike, neither could he name a single one of his classmates or imagine their voices, nor could he remember what that comic was even called. It was strange like that.

 

Cale hummed as he listened. “Jungsoo— he told me and Soohyuk once a long time ago, after the cataclysm and during the apocalypse, that once he retired and things, mn, settled, he wanted to go back to where his village was on the mountain and start a farm there— wanted to drag me and him there to live together with him actually. Return it to its former glory, and then maybe take the rest of the team there too to have a look and visit, sometimes.”

 

“Ah…”

 

“It’s a bit different from what he originally wanted to be before the apocalypse struck. Actually, during the cataclysm, he didn’t tell me much, but he said he was on his way to take entrance exams for college, specifically in the P.E. department. He said he wanted to be a teacher.”

 

“...” Choi Han spoke again. “That… I think I wanted to be a teacher too, back then.”

 

“Yeah?” Cale replied. “S’fitting. You make a good teacher. Lily and the wolf children say you are.”

 

“Really?”

 

“Mhm. You’re also Alberu’s instructor, right?” he remarked. 

 

“Mn… Yes. That’s right.” Fate worked in strange ways.

 

That aside, Choi Han was glad to learn all these things about Choi Jungsoo. He may have received his memories, but Cale had a deeper understanding of him and knew him better. It was nice to know more about him, it really was— and the more Choi Han listened, the more he thought they were really similar. Their feelings, their upbringing, even some of their ambitions. 

 

What happened to his hometown on the mountains when the apocalypse started, it— it reminded him a lot of Harris Village.

 

He’s lost two hometowns now.

 

“...Hey, Choi Han,” Cale spoke up again after a small silence between them. “Do you miss your hometown?”

 

“...” He thought about his family and his friends from Korea a lot, wondering what kind of lives they lived after he disappeared. If they were happy, if they were struggling— if they missed him or still thought of him too. He wanted to go back and relive some of those peaceful moments with his family and the people in his neighborhood, and he wanted to do stupid sword tricks for his classmates again. He missed them.

 

“I do.” 

 

However, he was with Cale and the rest of his new family now.

 

“But I also have a home here now, so I’m not too sad about it.”

 

He wouldn’t trade them for the world.

 

Cale let out an affirmative hum. “....I see.”

 

Choi Han thought for a moment. “Cale-nim,”  he asked. “Do you miss Korea?”

 

“Me…?” he said a bit questioningly. “No,” he answered without much hesitation. “There’s nothing left there for me to really miss. The people I was in charge of are in good hands, so there’s no need for me to worry or think about it too much either.”

 

“...I see.” 

 

Choi Han thought about the memories he saw through Choi Jungsoo’s eyes. About how he met Kim Roksoo, and the time he and the rest of his team spent with him, and the way both his nephew and Kim Roksoo seemed happy. And then he thought about the massacre and the very last of Choi Jungsoo’s memories while he was alive. 

 

And before that, he also remembered the indignity test at the temple with a younger Kim Roksoo, who was small and tiny and frail and starving, wandering around the streets all alone. The dead look in his eyes that Choi Han thought a child never should have. 

 

“But I guess I do miss the food a bit,” he added. “Stuff like kimbap, tteokbokki, kimchi, gochujang, bingsu, hotteok, bibimbap…” Cale listed in a nostalgic voice. “Mn, maybe some songpyeon and galbijjim would be nice for the end of the year, right?”

 

“Yeah,” Choi Han agreed. “And then in the spring, we could go out for a picnic, and eat tuna-filled kimbap, fried chicken, and soda by a river. Back in Korea I’ve always wanted to try chicken and beer by the river, you know? I think the others would enjoy picnics too."

 

“Mn…” 

 

“Ah, and let's all go to the beach during the summer too. We could do a bunch of things, like play volleyball, go swimming, maybe take a boat and eat ice cream. We could go back to the Ubarr territory, or maybe go to a tropical island, somewhere— is there a Jeju-equivalent in this word? I think On, Hong, and Raon-nim would like making sand castles too. Mn, and I think Pasteon and Miss Witira and Archie would like to tag along as well. Me and my cousins used to like digging holes in the sand and making little pools when we were younger.” 

 

“Really? That sounds nice…”

 

“And in the autumn we could go try and go hiking somewhere with everyone. I used to do that a lot with my family. Maybe we could also try camping, and then we could make jjigae and eat more tteok, visit a lake maybe.” 

 

“Hm…”

 

Choi Han smiled to himself as he thought about all these things. “And when New Year’s rolls around again, we could plan more trips and keep doing more things the next year, and the year after that, and even the year after that, for as long as we want.”

 

“Sounds a bit tiring,”

 

He chuckled. “But it would be fun, right?”

 

Cale was silent for a bit before he spoke. “Yeah…” Choi Han looked to the side and got a glimpse of his expression. It seemed hopeful, and yet somewhat fatigued, but he had the most genuine small smile on his face. “That would be… fun.”

 

His voice progressively sounded more drowsy as he spoke, slurring as it grew quieter.

 

“that… m’sorry…”

 

He blinked. “Cale-nim?”

 

And then he was silent, save for the sound of his steady quiet breathing, and the rise and fall of his chest that Choi Han could feel on his back.

 

He smiled as he looked forward and continued on as the sun dove below the horizon. “Rest well, Cale-nim.”

 

Notes:

There are so many scenes that I couldn't fit in here like a clothes-trying montage where Calefam puts him in silly outfits and a puppet show retelling of the puzzle city battle and uhhh yeah like alot actually i'll post them on my tumblr later love you all. Also, Choi Han never actually grew out of his edgy little chunni phase and secretly likes being called "The Dark Knight Of Cale Henituse" and thinks it goes incredibly hard. Goodbye its 1 am and i need to be up in like 3 hours i'm gonna pass out now love you all. did i say that already. Also Mary and Hannah friendship because they are precious to me and silly Glenn and Bud who actually share a braincell.

Chapter 11: light.

Summary:

Cale and his family celebrate the new year.

Notes:

Hello, friends! Welcome to this week's dose of fluff that makes you uneasy and overarching, impending, quickly approaching DoomTM! This chapter came out a little longer than I initially planned, sitting at 10k words- can't be longer than last chap, though!

Omg omg omg it's insane tho according to my stats we're at 200 bookmarks?? and 662 kudos? Y'all are crazy why would you hurt yourself this way (says the author, who wrote the story in question)

I think Cale deserves to smile and laugh a lot so I'm letting him smile and laugh a lot.

The entirety of writing this fic I just keep researching random Korean culture stuff. I can name like 15 dishes off the top of my head. Very fascinating and fun, though I hope it doesnt end up being inaccurate or a weird depiction.

I also incorporrated a little bit of my own New year's experiences here, so that was fun!

Anyways, thanks for everything and have fun! this chapter is probably one of favs :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

On New Year’s Eve in the Roan Kingdom, the palace banquet hall was extravagantly decorated, and filled with the chatter of nobles and royalty from within the nation and foreign kingdoms alike, speaking of the future of the kingdom and making connections, as they would. Gathering outside at the plaza of Huiss City was a festival, arranged in a combined effort by many of the kingdom’s citizens, with colorful decorations and stands filled with vendors and full streets and picnics. 

 

It was a truly joyous occasion.

 

After Alberu got past the formalities and chatted with the people he needed to speak with and greeted a few foreign representatives and royalty, he was reminded of a certain troublesome redheaded dongsaeng who he hadn’t heard from in a while since the banquet started. Alberu had wondered for a moment where he might have gone, but eventually figured he had an inkling in regards to wherever Cale might be.

 

“You can’t just keep breaking into the crown prince’s chambers whenever you please, you know,” 

 

Cale, who was wearing his black commander uniform that was decorated with golden badges and chains, just looked at him without much of a change of expression as he enjoyed his assortment of pastries, free of guilt, and Alberu sighed, closing the door behind him and sitting down on the sofa across from Cale.

 

“It seems you’ve been doing a lot of talking, your highness,”

 

“Haaa,” he sighed again, louder this time, leaning back. “Well, it was worth it. A lot of other kingdoms seem to be quite enthusiastic about establishing various connections with us. They’ve offered some sea routes for trade, a mine—”

 

Alberu discussed more of the things he managed to potentially gain within the past few hours or so, as well the very beneficial new relationship he gained with Queen Jopis, a guest from the Eastern Continent who Alberu thought was a lot like Cale in many ways, only with more sense and class, if he had to be honest. Cale just nodded along and voiced his own input for future plans and his next decisions in the silence of his room.

 

“Are you going back out?”

 

“The guests are occupied with Choi Han, Mary, Lock, and the others. I’ve made most of the appearances I needed to make,” Alberu said. “I need to keep my eye on you, you know. For all I know, you could snatch up a golden plaque while I’m not looking or stir up more trouble."

 

Cale feigned hurt, putting a hand over his chest with an exaggerated betrayed expression that didn’t fit him at all. “Your highness, my heart is pained beyond measure after hearing that you would assume such a thing from me. This lowly self would never even dream to betray or slight you, the shining, blinding, star of the—”

 

“Alright, let’s stop right there.” 

 

Cale leaned back and huffed out a snort. Alberu observed him carefully. “Is something wrong?”

 

“Hm?” he tilted his head slightly in confusion. “No?”

 

“You just… I mean, why’re you here?”

 

“I just got tired,” he shrugged. “I mean, trash don’t have to follow social conventions anyway, right?”

 

“Yes, ye—” Alberu almost choked on his tea. “I’m sorry, what did you just call yourself?”

 

“Huh?” he blinked. “Trash?”

 

“Are you actually still serious about that?”

 

“Huh? Yes—”

 

“No, stop.” Alberu quickly said. “Try telling that to Choi Han and see what happens,”

 

“What does Choi Han have to do with this?”

 

“Haaa, you’re really driving me nuts,” Alberu groaned in an inelegant way before looking at Cale again. “You seem so tired nowadays,”

 

Cale shrugged. “I’m just feeling lazy is all, I guess.”

 

Alberu wanted to say that it didn’t seem like that was all, or that he was actually a little worried about him, but he figured there’d be a better time to tell him sometime later, rather than now. He couldn’t stop thinking of On’s words from their outing a few days ago. He’d gotten easily exhausted there too, almost like he was fatigued.

 

“Ah,” Cale suddenly said, looking towards the clock sitting atop Alberu’s desk. “We should head to the terrace now.”

 

Alberu blinked. “Why?”

 

“Do you remember that thing I gave Rosalyn from a little while ago?”

 

“That blueprint from last week she wouldn’t let me look at? The one she was… oddly very psyched about?” Alberu almost gulped. From what he knew about the mage, she was quite… destructive. 

 

Cale nodded. “You’ll see what it is tonight.”

 

“Wait, what?”

 

“It’ll be fine, don’t worry— If it’s her, she’ll be able to handle it perfectly. No one will die.”

 

“Thats not very reassuring—”

 

“Well, if you’re so nervous about it, your highness, the best way to get over it is by just seeing it yourself, right?” he smiled, the same way he does when he does with other nobles. “Exposure therapy is worth a try,”

 

“I don’t think that’s— ah, you’re driving me nuts,” Alberu sighed for the umpteenth time that hour as he got up after Cale and headed towards the terrace, the cold night air blowing past as they made it to the railing. Well, if it was Cale, he could only have trust in him.

 

“It’ll be a short while until it’s set to go, I think,” Cale said, staring out into the starry night sky, the lights reflecting in his reddish brown eyes. “Hm… Probably at midnight— We can just talk until then. I don’t think it’ll be a long wait.”

 

“Mn…” Alberu hummed, standing beside him. “Ah, where are the kids, then?”

 

“They’re with Eruhaben-nim and the others, running around invisible in the banquet hall, probably. They’re quite interested in the sweets, like those brownies. I told Raon I wanted some time on my own for a bit.” he said. “Don’t worry, they’re good kids— nothing will be set on fire.”

 

“...Right,” Alberu replied, not very assured by Cale’s words but trusting of the children’s sensibility in comparison to their guardian.

 

“How’s the Puzzle City restoration project progressing?”

 

“Things are going smoothly. All the kingdoms are chipping in with their agreed share as they promised, the citizens are satisfied and are in good spirits. I think it might be finished sometime next year. Maybe March, if we continue at this rate.”

 

“I see,” he nodded, before huffing out a snort. “I have faith, your highness.”

 

“Pfft— Haha!” he laughed. “And what are mister Ron and Beacrox up to?”

 

“They’re both back at the villa right now, but they went to the inn on the Eastern Continent some time ago. Said they were just checking in by paying a visit and ‘cleaning things up’.”  Cale shivered.

 

“Mn, I see…”

 

“How are the second and third prince?”

 

Alberu tapped his fingers on the railing with leisure. “I don’t think they’ll try to really rise to power or attempt to challenge me any time soon. I’ve been quite sure of that fact for a while, but it’s basically undeniable now. In fact, they seem more trusting of me— I plan to return that favor.”

 

“I see. That’s good.”

 

“How are young lady Lily and young master Basen?”

 

“Mn, Lily’s aura smoke is getting thicker and more prominent by the day— she’s sparring with Choi Han, the wolf children, the knights, and also her master a lot. We make sure to tell her not to push herself too hard. Though I feel like she’s basically an unstoppable force.” Cale said. “Basen is studying just as hard. Father and his instructors say he’s very talented, and that there’s much to expect from him. I told him he was doing a good job, but also not to push himself too hard either, and when he takes over we’ll all manage the Duchy together.”

 

“So you do think pushing yourself too hard is a bad thing.” Alberu remarked. “I wish you’d follow your own advice better.”

 

“What? I don’t push myself—”

 

“Don’t even,” he sighed, massaging his temples while Cale’s confusion only increased. “You know what, that should be your new year’s resolution— not getting into trouble and being a slacker like you promised.”

 

Cale frowned at him as if he was just accused of a crime. “I don’t need a new year’s resolution to be a slacker, your highness. I’ll slack off either way.”

 

He snorted. “Doesn’t seem like you’ve been doing a good job of that,” he sighed, yet again. “Though, I guess you’ve gotten better at staying true to your words these past few weeks. Slightly.”

 

“Mn, have I?”

 

“Just make the resolution. If you fail next year, somehow, just make another one and try again the next.” he said. “If you fail that year, I’ll personally arrest you.”

 

Cale snorted at that, sipping from his wine.

 

Alberu took a moment to think before he spoke. “You know, Cale,” he said. “The war is over,”

 

“It is,” he replied.

 

“The Puzzle City would be rebuilt sometime in spring, right?” he said. “The chaos is winding down, gradually, and we’ve made lots of efforts to help with relief and support so we could recover as soon as possible,”

 

“Mn…” Cale nodded.

 

“When the restoration project is over,” he said. “I was thinking of getting coronated, at that time,”

 

Cale’s eyes seemed to widen when he heard that, before calming down to its usual state. “So you’ve decided to finally take the throne?”

 

“Yes,” he nodded. “I’ve been waiting for the right time to do so, when the kingdom is prosperous, so it would be right to do it when the relief and recovery efforts are over, and when everyone is in high spirits after the effects of the war don’t feel as fresh,” Alberu paused, turning to Cale. “What do you think?”

 

“...” he seemed thoughtful as he looked down. “March, was it?”

 

“Around that time— it’s an estimate,” 

 

“Do you…” Cale seemed a little hesitant, for some reason. “Do you think you could do it sooner?”

 

“Sooner?” Alberu was a bit taken aback. “Is there a specific reason why?”

 

“It’s… well, not particularly,” His eyes looked as if they were calculating something. A shadow of worry was subtly cast over his expression. Alberu didn’t really understand why.

 

“Cale,” he spoke, with a somewhat serious tone. “Are you sure everything’s alright?”

 

He tilted his head. “Why wouldn’t it be?”

 

“It’s just, I don’t know—” he looked at him and squinted his eyes as if he was trying to make sense of something. “You seem… have you been thinking about something, lately? Something on your mind that you’re keeping to yourself? Are you even feeling well? I know I said you had to attend this banquet since it was important, but if you were sick, you could've just said so and I would’ve done something,”

 

“...” Cale’s eyes swirled with faint contemplation, before he looked ahead past the railings where his hands rested, up at the sky swimming with stars. “You know, hyung-nim,” he said. “I talked to him,”

 

“Who?”

 

“The original Cale Henituse,” he said. “The present Kim Roksoo.”

 

“...”

 

Kim Roksoo. The person Cale was before he transmigrated. He thought about the 20-year-old Kim Roksoo from Earth 2 during the Sealed God’s Test.

 

“It was right after I passed out after knocking down those statues at Arm’s base. We talked, in a dream. I’m pretty sure it was that God’s doing. He was the one who told me about where to find my mother’s diary, and that’s how we beat that White Thing.”

 

“...Right.” Alberu’s fist clenched and his expression seemed strained. “...The world tree dagger.”

 

“Yeah,” Cale nodded, casual as ever as if the weight of the incident was null. “He also told me about how he was living well, and how my team was doing. He’s a bit weird though, smiling that widely with my face. I’m worried my team might send me to a mental hospital."

 

“Ha!” Alberu snorted. “He sounds fun.”

 

“Right, sure he is.” Cale said in an unamused tone. “He also told me that he planned to stay in Kim Roksoo’s body.” He continued, resting his hands on the railing and swirling a glass. “He said he’s thrown away the name Cale Henituse, and I should do the same if I was happy here. Then he asked me to take care of his family, and so I told him to take care of my team as well, and we agreed to continue to live as we have been so far.” 

 

“Is that so?” Alberu remarked, studying Cale’s expression. 

 

He simply hummed back with a small nod, staring into the liquid within his glass. It was a deep red, much like his hair. It was hard to see his reflection inside it. “Your highness, do you know about something called the Ship of Theseus?”

 

“Theseus…? I’m not familiar with that name.”

 

“Really? So I guess Greek myths probably don’t exist here, then,” Cale shrugged. "Theseus is the name of a mythical hero in my world.”

 

“There’s heroes in Korea too?”

 

“Something like that,” Cale shrugged. “We don’t have anything like magic— not before abilities came along, at least— but we have myths and stories and folklore to make up for it, I guess. We have real life heroes, but they aren’t swordmasters, mages, or necromancers. Instead, we've just got generals, admirals, freedom fighters, I don’t know. They’re just historical figures with nothing but the indomitable human spirit, I suppose.”

 

“The indomitable human spirit…” Alberu echoed contemplatively.

 

“Theseus is just another mythical hero blessed by the gods. Mn, he isn’t from Korea, though. He’s from Greece. It’s another country on Earth,” Cale shrugged. “Well, anyway, the Ship of Theseus is the name of a paradox.” 

 

“Mn…”

 

“I won’t get too into the plot of the myth right now, but Theseus had sailed back to his homeland, Athens, with a crew of people who were supposed to be sacrificed to a monster, but were saved by him after he slayed it.” he began. “That ship was then preserved by the Athens people as an important piece of history. And eventually, the planks would rot, so they would replace the planks with identical ones gradually over the course of years to preserve it, until eventually, the entire ship would be replaced with new planks, but still it retains its old functionality and shape.” He said. “They overcomplicate it again later but I’m just going to stick to the simple version. So, the question is, can it still be considered ‘The Ship of Theseus’, or maybe a new one?”

 

“I didn’t think you were the philosophical type, dongsaeng.” Alberu commented.

 

Cale sighed. “I’m not— I just read the myth when I was younger and liked the story, then I saw Theseus’ name on the paradox and read about it. Spending that much time contemplating something so pointless is useless to me.” 

 

“Well, in regards to that question…” he tapped his fingers on the railings and stared at Cale’s face. The ex-commander just held a questioning look at his actions. Alberu thought he knew what this ‘ship’ was probably an allegory for. “It would be the same, but slightly different.”

 

“That’s cheating, hyung-nim. Is it the same or not?”

 

He scoffed. “Isn’t there supposed to be no wrong answer? That’s mine,” Alberu said. “Even if every part of the ship was replaced, it’s still the same ship, right? It functions the same way, it’s the same shape— maybe it got renamed, but it’s still itself. However,” he continued. “I think that, even if it’s technically the same ship, you should acknowledge that it’s a different ship than it was years ago. Maybe the ship got repurposed, and while it was used to bring back the victims of that sacrifice thing, it could be that in the present it’s used as something else, like maybe just to sail and carry passengers, or transport items for trade, or maybe some ceremony, or even just for display to be commemorated." He said, before concluding. “It’s a different ship than it was years ago, but it’s still that ship.”

 

“...You think so?” Cale questioned.

 

“Mn, I’m guessing this could be a metaphor for people?”

 

“You’re very observant, your highness.” he smiled. “As expected of your highness. Truly, your knowledge knows no bou—”

 

“Yes, yes. Why don’t you stop now?”

 

“How blunt,” Cale said, feigning hurt. 

 

Alberu chuckled, but stared at Cale, whose gaze drew elsewhere. Perhaps to the courtyard below, lit up by the light of lanterns, or somewhere in the distant horizon, where fairy lights strung along across buildings above the streets. Then he thought about why he might’ve brought up this strange paradox from his world.

 

If a person were to be entirely replaced piece by piece with new, but identical pieces of themselves to the old ones, gradually, are they the same person?

 

Alberu knows he’s a different person than he was when he was younger. In 2 years, he had changed quite a lot, all thanks to one very troublesome and very sly, but kind person.

 

“In my dark elf form,” he said. “I’m technically a different person, aren’t I?” Alberu said aloud, and Cale looked at him. “My hair turns dark brown, and my skin also darkens. Even my eyes. Wouldn’t that technically mean I’m replacing parts of myself every time I change form? A completely different person.”

 

Slowly, starting from his fingertips and the tips of his hair, Alberu’s appearance darkened as he spoke. He moved back slightly from the railings, and felt a bit refreshed as the dye magic slowly disappeared. Bright, blonde locks darkened as if the sun was setting into the night, and his sky-blue jewel-like eyes turned a regular brown. He smiled. “So? Am I the same person?”

 

Alberu has never hated nor even disliked his Dark Elf form. He’s always liked it, actually, because of how he would resemble his mother and his aunt Tasha. He remembered how his mother would often say that he was very handsome no matter what form he’d take. After all, he was an elf. Alberu also liked that it would remind him that even in the cold days in the palace of his childhood, the dark elves, his kin, were always there to support him.

 

But even so, somewhere deep within his mind, carved in stone in the darkness, he would wonder if it was ever right for him to want the throne, if he deserved to be king, if crowning him would bring about destruction— if his blood was a curse on the kingdom and would harm the people, like what those words carved on a boulder in the basement where no light reaches foretold. For all his life, living in hiding and disguising himself, he felt as if the person who was the crown prince, the Sun of the Roan kingdom, what people viewed when they saw Alberu was not him but an illusion. That if he ever decided to reveal himself, the sun would dim and the world would go dark.

 

He sighed. “Well, maybe it needs to be a gradual kind of thing rather than all at once, but you’re certainly none other than Alberu Crossman, your highness.” Cale Henituse, the person who abolished all doubt like light that would burn the sky, told him. He spoke as if it was natural, as if nothing changed at all.

 

“Your existence is natural, your highness.”

 

“Cale,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“Are you happy here?”

 

He wanted to ask if Cale missed Earth. He wanted to ask if Cale felt lonely, or isolated. He wanted to ask him if he was plagued with doubt about where he was. He wanted to ask if he felt like he didn’t belong here, or if he felt guilty for ‘taking’ the original Cale Henituse’s place. Even if Cale would never show that he was feeling that way, much less say so, no matter how much he denied it, he was the kind of person who would have such thoughts.

 

“How could I not be?” he replied, casually, as if it was the most obvious thing in the world. “I’m rich. How could you ask such an obvious thing? Money is the best, hyung-nim,”

 

“Haaa…” Alberu sighed. “You can be really unserious, sometimes,”

 

“But I am serious though?”

 

“What I mean, is…” Alberu’s lips pressed into a line, and Cale’s pulled into a somewhat amused smile as a chuckle left his lips. He sighed, again. “Dongsaeng, you… How do you feel about transmigrating?”

 

Personally, it never mattered to Alberu what Cale looked like, whether he had his striking red hair, or if he was in the form of Kim Roksoo in another world, or even as a small cute vampire young master. He was still, and always will be, his cunning, troublesome and annoying dongsaeng who would give him headaches and pile paperwork on his desk.

 

“Hm…” Cale hummed thoughtfully, before talking. “Should I tell you a secret then, hyung-nim?”

 

“A secret?”

 

“Yes,”

 

“I’m all ears,”

 

“Well, it isn’t really a secret, I guess,” he admitted. “I’ve just never spoken about it since there never seemed to be any need for it.”

 

“...I see.”

 

Cale hummed for a moment, taking a sip of his wine, and spoke. “I was supposed to be born in this world.”

 

Alberu flinched. “What?”

 

“That white thing was a reincarnator, so he would essentially take over and reincarnate into other people’s bodies, and then boot the original soul of the body off to another world as a sort of twin. That’s also why he has the same face as Kim Roksoo,” he explained. “The white thing had a curse from breaking an oath, and thanks to him essentially hijacking my original body, I got a small share of that curse because of it,” Cale said, before pausing as he looked down, like he was hesitating. “..Apparently, it makes me lose everything I care about, so it wouldn’t let me cherish anything, or something like that. Kind of stupid, right?”

 

“...” He didn’t know what to say to him.

 

He sighed. “It’s explained a lot of things over the course of my life as Kim Roksoo, and when I first found out about it, to be honest, I—” Cale stopped, hesitant again, before sighing and talking in a quiet voice. “...I was a little… I was a bit scared.”

 

His eyes widened. “Dongsaeng?”

 

“When I found out about, I kind of wondered if it was still there, for a moment, and if it might take effect, some day, sometime soon. I’d never know.” he admitted, fingers beginning to thrum rhythmically on the railings. “Though, I’m a bit relieved now, since I think transmigrating back to my ‘original’ world neutralized it, or something like that.” he said. “Everything’s fine now, so I see no reason to think about it anymore, and… yeah.”

 

There was a curse.

 

Alberu didn’t know a great deal about Cale’s life as Kim Roksoo, but he was in Earth 2, and Cale mentioned a few things and he could make his own inferences from the way he would react to seeing the people from his past. The people at the shelter, Kim Roksoo’s friends, and a great deal of other people, had all died in Kim Roksoo’s original world.

 

If it was someone like Cale, even if he didn’t know there was even an actual curse, deep down, he would have shouldered the blame for those things that were never his fault. He would have felt as if he was a curse.

 

“I am meant to be here…?

 

Like Cale had erased all doubt in himself from his mind, he wanted to be the light that would burn away his burdens, too. That was the kind of light he wanted to be.

 

“...Cale,”

 

“That’s right. You are fated to be here”

 

“You’re meant to be here,” 

 

Cale stilled.

 

Alberu spoke, dark brown eyes peering into reddish brown. “You deserve to be here, with us. And…” he clenched his fists. “I… no, everyone— you should know that we’re all glad that you came to this world,” he took a step forward, and softened yet firmed his gaze as he spoke, because his dongsaeng needed to know this.

 

“Cale, thank you for being here.”

 

Really, there was nothing better that could have happened to him in this life, if not Kim Roksoo, or now Cale Henituse’s presence.

 

Cale’s pupils shook and his eyes widened, reddish-brown eyes glinting in the dark.

 

 

Bang!

 

Something loud went off. When Alberu whipped his head to look out the terrace, he was met with light, shooting from the horizon and upwards like the rising sun, piercing the night sky before exploding . Except, there was no attack, but instead, a bursting sparkle of light painting the night sky, before falling away and descending towards the ground and fading out, like shooting stars.

 

“What…” he mumbled, but he couldn’t take his eyes off of the sky. Another bang rang out, and then another, and another, and light just kept shooting towards the night with a sharp whistle as though they were beacons, and bursted into blooming flowers carved from light in the darkness.

 

It was breathtaking.

 

“...Fireworks.” Cale said in a quiet voice. It sounded as if there was a slight quiver at the end of his words. “These are called fireworks.”

 

“...” His mouth was hanging slightly agape as he stared up at the marvelous spectacle in awe. “F… Fireworks…”

 

“When the cataclysm on Earth happened,” he began, inhaling a breath before continuing, as if gradually calming himself. “It was a little close to new year’s, about a month away. When the year ended, a group of survivors found a box of fireworks and sparklers and firecrackers, and set them off one night,” Cale explained. He seemed a little nostalgic. “I remembered seeing it while I was roaming around. My concept of time was really messed up, so I didn’t even realize the year was over. And… supposedly, it was seen as a light of hope and a reminder to all the people who saw it that, after all that hardship, they’ve survived to see a new year.” 

 

“...ah.”

 

“They’ve done it every year since then. People would gather, set off fireworks and drink together, and talk about all the hardships they've faced, then everyone would say ‘but even so, we're all still alive’.” He gazed out towards the fireworks, the sparkling sight lighting up his eyes that seemed to recall a distant past. “I think it’s fitting for us, isn't it?” He smiled a little. “The kingdom with the longest history known for being survivors, greeting a new year of peace after war. A light in the darkness. That's why I suggested it to Rosalyn.”

 

Survivors.

 

“You…” Alberu trailed off, somewhat speechless. Baffled, even. “Really, this is… It’s the most beautiful thing I’ve ever seen,” Seriously, how could he do this so suddenly? It was still a little frustrating that he orchestrated all this and didn’t tell him.

 

Hope that conquers the darkness. It reminded Alberu of the glistening dark aura that emitted from Choi Han’s sword when he fought. 

 

“You think so?” He finally turned away to glance at Cale. He was smiling. It felt a bit different compared to his usual smile— he seemed so fond. “I’m relieved, then.”

 

Bang!

 

Bang!

 

Bang!

 

Light continued to burst, and the sound of cheering could be heard from miles away. Alberu chuckled and moved away slightly. “It’s a bit loud though, isn’t it?”

 

“That’s what makes them fireworks, hyung-nim,” he replied. “Even before the cataclysm, setting off fireworks on New Years’ was a pretty common practice— multiple times a year, actually,” He shrugged. “It’s just that since the monsters happened and the world went to hell, it gave it some new meaning.”

 

“New meaning…” he trailed off as another beam of light shot towards the sky. “How the hell do you even do this stuff without magic?”

 

“Mn, I think it was some sort of technology called pyrotechnics, or something,” he shrugged. “It has a lot to do with chemistry to get them to be certain colors and make certain sounds, things like that.”

 

Alberu stared up at the various bursts of sparkling colors in the sky, and thought again about how much of a mystery Earth was. 

 

“Though…” Bang!  “I think Rosalyn is having…” Bang! “a lot of fun with this.”

 

“Ah…” Letting a rather destructive archmage blow things up in the sky would be something quite catastrophic in any other circumstance. “Mn, did she do all this herself?”

 

“No, if I’m not wrong she’s working with her mage brigade,” Cale squinted towards the distance. “Ah, and also the flame dwarves.”

 

“Oh, is that them?” He could make out a speck of cloaked figures where the light would emerge and shoot out from.

 

“She really outdid herself though— I wasn’t really expecting something this grand,” 

 

Just as Cale said that, a few bangs went off and erupted in the sky. He went pale.

 

“...Huh?”

 

“Pfft—” Alberu couldn’t hold himself back. He was laughing so hard he almost choked on his drink. “Hahaha!” he was wheezing as the fireworks continued to go off. 

 

In the sky, were bursts of silver forming the shape of a winged shield with the silhouette of a heart emblem engraved at the center. The cheers of the crowd in the capital got several times louder while Cale just stared up at the sky in a mix of sheer horror, confusion, and bafflement, mouth hanging open. Alberu laughed harder.

 

But even as he did so, he couldn’t take his eyes off of the sky. The shape held itself for longer than the other fireworks, and truly looked like something divine. In the night, it really did shine like Cale’s silver shield. Right now, the redheaded owner of such a shield in question was burying his face in his hands while groaning.

 

“You shouldn’t cover your eyes and just enjoy the show, dongsaeng,”

 

“Who’s idea was this…?”

 

“Yours,” he smirked. “Young master silver shield,”

 

“Please, shut up,” Cale scowled, and he laughed louder. 

 

Next came various other symbols. A sword that glistened like Choi Han’s aura, a bone dragon, and even a bright golden sun.

 

“Look at that. How radiant,” Cale said as the golden shone high above like it was the afternoon. Alberu just averted his eyes with a sigh while he began his regular tangent.

 

Bang! Bang! Bang!

 

The air whistled, and the next burst brought countless eruptions of light that would rain down, blazing a golden trail like a meteor shower. He couldn’t help but be mesmerized by such a sight, a small gasp leaving his lips in a puff of cold air.

 

Cale spoke, saying something Alberu didn’t understand. He could recognize it, though— it was Korean.

 

“What was that?”

 

“It’s how you wish someone a happy new year in Korean,” he said, before repeating it again, a bit slower, enough for Alberu to slightly make out. “Saehae bok mani badeuseyo,” he said. “Try it,”

 

“Sae…” he hesitates. “Saehae vo– bok mani… badeuseyo?”

 

Cale laughed lightly at Alberu’s broken pronunciation. “Close enough,”

 

“What does it mean?”

 

“It means…” he trailed off. “Receive many blessings in the new year,”

 

He hummed. “There’s nothing I’d prefer more,”

 

“Happy new year, hyung-nim,”

 

Alberu smiled. “Happy new year, dongsaeng.”

 

May the new year overflow with peace and happiness.

 

 

As soon as the fireworks were over, Raon teleported everyone to the Black Castle in the forest. The reason they didn’t decide to go to the villa in Harris Village or the Super Rock villa was so that they could also celebrate with Sheritt at Raon’s request. Alberu had already made his appearance, and Zed Crossman could deal with bidding the nobles farewell since he was still the king and all. It was difficult for him to refuse anyway since he’d been telling him all about the good Korean food he’d be missing out on if he decided he wouldn’t go.

 

Cale was in the kitchen cooking some things and helping Beacrox who had been doing most of it while they were out, but he could clearly hear the conversations going on behind him with the rest of his family outside the door at the dining table.

 

They were not over the fireworks.

 

“I had a subordinate of mine record it,” Rosalyn said, sounding quite prideful. It made sense, they hadn’t stopped asking and praising her about the whole show since they’d gotten here.

 

“Whoa, really!?”

 

“Play it! I wanna see it again!”

 

A second later, while Cale was stir-frying something over the stove, the sound of the shrill whistle of fireworks shooting towards the sky and exploding rang out through the dining room.

 

“Oooh!”

 

“Ah, I love this one the most. It was so colorful,”

 

“It’s nice to look at them here now because it was so loud before~”

 

“Yeah, but seeing it in person was super cool too, right?”

 

“I’m still shocked by it, to be honest,”

 

“Right? It came out of nowhere, and I was so surprised— but in the end I couldn’t take my eyes off of the sky.”

 

He remembered the way New year’s fireworks used to be such a big deal over the years back on earth, and how people would crowd at the street and on rooftops to take pictures and record videos. The familiar sound of the recording and excited chatter reminded him a bit of his teammates during his team leader years, who would often discuss their New Years’ experiences with their families at work when their holiday was over. Cale couldn’t help but also recall when they’d show up to his apartment unprompted and drag him off to go eat at a restaurant for New Year’s with them too.

 

“Mhm. My neck sort of hurts from craning it up so much for so long…”

 

“Young master Cale is seriously a genius!”

 

Cale shivered when he heard his name while adding in sauce. They should be praising Rosalyn and the flame dwarves who did all the actual heavy-lifting and execution. All he did was serve a loose concept from what he remembered on earth and let them have a go at it. It was crazy enough that she managed to finish it in just a week or so, and execute it so flawlessly.

 

“Hong, could you carry this to the table?” He asked, pointing to a finished dish of Galbijjim. 

 

He sniffed. “It smells really good~ what is it?”

 

“Mn… I guess you could call it short ribs? Yeah, some braised short ribs.”

 

“Sounds yummy!” he smiled as he carried the plate with him out the kitchen door and towards the dining room, subsequently followed by awed voices.

 

“Raon, could you—”

 

“Just leave it to me, weak human!” In a moment, the finished dishes on the table began to levitate and carefully escorted out the door. Hong even came back in to help bring out some plates and cutlery. What reliable kids.

 

“On, how are the dumplings?”

 

“They’re almost ready~” she smiled as he sealed the ends with her fingers. She and Beacrox had been working together on ingredient prep as well as folding the various dumplings at the ready. They were quite insistent, still not letting him near a knife, or just anything sharp actually. Unfortunately, there wasn’t much he could do about it.

 

Cale smiled a little as he sampled the japchae. “Good job,”

 

The large assortment of dishes were then laid out at the center of the table, and Cale slumped over his seat and relaxed while everyone else was salivating over the food. Especially Choi Han— he wouldn’t stop pointing out every dish and naming them.

 

“That’s tteokguk, right?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“And that’s japchae?”

 

“Yes,”

 

“And there’s even jeon, and galbi, and some kimchi here,”

 

“That’s right,” What an excited punk. It was a good thing Beacrox worked hard to prepare a lot.

 

“You really are amazing, Cale-nim…! How did you manage to make everything?” He was looking at Cale as if he ate luxurious New Year’s hotpot every other day. Which was certainly not true, since more often than not, he’d just eat whatever he had in his pantry. Instant noodles, leftover kimchi, convenience store boxed lunch, nothing fancy. The same was for New Year’s, until his team started dragging him off for a team dinner during the holidays.

 

“I read a recipe book on a whim,” Lee Soohyuk had borrowed one from a library once back when they were starting to share an apartment. He read through all of it. “I’m just good at following instructions,”

 

On stared at him, almost die-eyeing when he said that as if she didn’t believe it, while Hong shook his head beside her.

 

Currently, there were all kinds of people present in the room in addition to their usual group from the Super Rock villa. Cage and Taylor managed to make it, bringing some wine with them (she pulled it out of her sleeve and impressed Bud. The three of them ended up chatting and getting along well), the dragons, consisting of Mila and Dodori as well as a grouchy and sleepy Rasheel were also at the table, and Witira and Pasteon as well, and some of the wolf children. Basen and Lily also tagged along, plus Pendrick, who was trying to hold it together in the presence of a grand total of… every dragon on the continent. In other words, five dragons, as well as the spirit of one more. Ah, and also maybe one more if you decided to count the Dragon Half-blood. The ceilings of the castle were quite tall. 

 

“Mom, mom! What do you think? Weren’t they super cool!? It was really loud at first too and I was surprised, but it was really amazing!” Raon exclaimed, wings flapping as he flew around his mom. They were quite natural with each other now. Sheritt smiled back as she commented about the unique sight recorded on the device.

 

Alberu looked like he was salivating just looking at the food on the table. After some evaluation over the course of the past Korean dishes, Cale either dialed down the spice by a lot, bringing them to a milder, foreigner-safe level, or made them not spicy at all and got creative with the seasoning. For Choi Han and Cale, it was nothing a tub of gochujang and chili flakes couldn’t fix.

 

“Ahhh, I want to try everything on this table!”

 

“It’s young master Cale and Mister Beacrox’s cooking, isn’t it? I’ll be sure to finish everything,”

 

“Oh, what’s this…? It smells really good!”

 

“Ah, it’s the round rolled up rice balls again!”

 

“It’s not very often that I eat rice, I’m not very used to it,”

 

Cale started picking up the different dishes he wanted from the pots and plates on the table with his chopsticks and placed them on his own plate. Beacrox’s steak was seriously amazing, and so are all his other recipes, but he also missed some of the Korean dishes.

 

Everyone there, being understandably not-Asian, ate with regular cutlery, with the exception of Choi Han and Cale, as well as On, who saw them both and had been practicing on her own to eat with chopsticks. She was quite good now.

 

“Human, what’s this?” Raon asked curiously.

 

“That’s gamjajeon,”

 

“What is it?”

 

“It’s a potato pancake,” he explained. From the way his eyes sparkled with interest, Cale picked up a slice for him and placed it on his plate.

 

“And what’s that?”

 

“That’s kimchi,”

 

“But it’s white!”

 

“It’s the non-spicy version,” multiple people at the table averted their eyes as if they were embarrassed. Cale faintly recalled the first time they tried kimchi. Alberu was even there after sword practice. The aforementioned crown prince winced a little as he picked up a piece of said white kimchi. 

 

“Oh, then I want one!”

 

“What’s this soup with round stuff?” Hong asked, intrigued as he stared at his individual bowl. Cale hummed as he placed pieces of kimchi on the kids’ plates.

 

“That’s called tteokguk,” he said. “It’s a soup with rice cakes in it,”

 

“Like that thing you made once? The tteok— um, ttteok-bok-something?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

Choi Han piped in as he ate his pieces of galbijjim. “Did you know that you turn a year older when you eat this soup?”

 

“Eh!? Really!?”

 

“Then we have to eat it!”

 

“I want to be a great and mighty 7-year-old!”

 

“I didn’t know that…”

 

Choi Han laughed at everyone’s reactions. Look at this punk, stirring up trouble. Cale sighed and placed more side dishes on their table as he ate. “It just symbolizes getting older,” he said. “Really, the more important thing about this soup is that it’s supposed to bring you good fortune. The rice cakes are cut into round slices to look like money,”

 

“Oh? It has that kind of meaning, too?” Taylor asked curiously.

 

“Then I’ll eat a lot and become rich!” Raon exclaimed. Cale just nodded along with a light chuckle. 

 

“What’s this, Cale-nya?” On asked, motioning to a different plate on the table.

 

“That’s spinach salad,” he said as he cut up pieces of meat for Hong.

 

“And what about this one?”

 

“That’s fruit salad that Beacrox made,” he slid a bowl over for them to have.

 

“Oooh, and this looks really good!”

 

“That’s called japchae,” he replied.

 

“What is it~?”

 

“They’re stir-fried glass noodles with some vegetables,”

 

“Glass noodles?” 

 

“Oh! I get it, the noodles are clear, right? That’s why they’re called that,”

 

Cale hummed back with a nod as he grabbed noodles for the kids. Their plates were practically overflowing with tons of food now. “I guess so,”

 

“Ooh, and what’s that?” Hong pointed to another dish on the table. This time, Choi Han was the one who answered him.

 

“That’s called janchi guksu, or party noodles,” Choi Han said. “My mom used to make me these on birthdays. They’re sometimes called festivity noodles too because they’re for special occasions,”

 

“Special occasions?”

 

“Mhm. Like birthdays, I also had some at my cousin’s wedding, and my family liked them a lot so we’d also have them sometimes during New Year’s. Like right now,” he smiled. “If you see here, the noodles are thin and really long, right? The reason they’re eaten a lot on special occasions is because they represent longevity. I think I heard once that you have to eat them without breaking them if you want to live long,”

 

“Eh!? Really!?”

 

“Human!” Raon reached out for a bowl of guksu and set it in front of Cale. “You have to eat the whole bowl! Don’t break the noodle like Choi Han said, okay!?”

 

Cale blinked. “Huh?”

 

“You have to do it~” On added.

 

“Say ‘aahh’!”

 

“What— hey, wait—”

 

The kids forced him to eat as much noodles as possible. He already had japchae so he wasn't too in the mood for it either. Cale could’ve sworn he heard Eruhaben snicker at least a little at his table. Was this because he forced him to drink all that water from the jar? The others were laughing, too.

 

The rest of the night’s dinner resumed in that lively manner, filled with chatter and conversation. It was a bit loud, but he couldn’t bring himself to be all that annoyed by it. 

 

It had been a while since he had a lively New Year’s dinner just like this. He worked quite a bit to set up this whole feast since it’s been a while since he’s had some good Korean food, and he wanted to selfishly indulge himself at least once. Were his team members dragging that punk Kim Roksoo off to that restaurant they went to every year, too? Knowing them and Kim Roksoo’s personality, they must be drinking soju while complaining about their higher-ups. Maybe they went to go see the fireworks, too.

 

 

“What’s that stick?”

 

“It’s so thin~ I bet I could break it if I bend it a little,” Hong commented.

 

The kids were crouched around Cale and his collection of thin sticks. “Raon, can you light a small fire? About as much as a matchstick's,"

 

“Of course I can!” he replied. A small ember ignited at the tip of his claw, as he had requested. 

 

“This is called a sparkler,” he said, picking a stick out of the dozen. “Wanna know why?”

 

“Why?”

 

Carefully, he lit the tip of the thin stick using the small ember. In a moment, a flame was lit, and the end burst into a sparkling ball. The kids moved back in surprise and Cale chuckled to himself. The others who were quietly watching from the distance lit up in ‘ooh!’s and ‘ahh’s.

 

He stood and waved it around, the light illuminating his features in a bright and sunny hue. The children’s eyes sparkled as they watched, almost more than the small light.

 

“Woah…!”

 

“What is that, human?!”

 

“It’s bright… Is it hot?”

 

“You just have to be careful with it,” Cale advised, holding it up for the others to see. “Do you want to hold it?”

 

On lit up with marvel, before nodding. “Yes,”

 

“I do! Me too!”

 

“Don’t forget about me either, weak human!”

 

He let On hold it first. She was quite wary, but eventually started holding it up and walking around with it, raising it up high, eyes sparkling with wondrous fascination. “It’s like I’m holding a star,” She lowered it so that her dongsaengs could get a closer look, too.

 

Cale picked up two other sticks and headed over to the kids. Then he connected the tips, and soon enough the previously unlit stick ignited in a bright starry blaze. The kids gasped, and Cale lit the other before handing it to both.

 

“Look, Choi Han! Kind Rosalyn! I’m holding a star!” Raon exclaimed as he zipped about.

 

Cale came over with the rest of the dozen and let everyone hold one. Rosalyn lit hers up with magic, emerging in a dazzling gleam of fiery-light that seemed a bit red in quality, as if corresponding to her mana’s characteristics. She waved it around like a wand and laughed.  

 

“Oh…” Pasteon held it a bit close to his face, curious.

 

“Hey, be careful, don’t hold it so close, Pasteon. You might get burnt,” Witira warned, snatching it away from him. In truth, it seemed like she wanted a turn to get a closer at the sparklers herself. Pasteon, who saw this, just watched speechlessly from the side.

 

“Wow, it’s a star! Hey Glenn, I also want a star~” Bud, who had drunk quite a bit with Taylor and Cage, seemed quite jovial. Glenn just sighed and held up his lit up sparkler, then took another one and pressed the tip together, igniting it. Giving a slightly tipsy guy access to fire might’ve been a poor choice, but Bud wasn’t a Mercenary King for nothing. He showed it off to Cage and Taylor, and ignited their sparklers.

 

Cale lit up a few more and passed it around. “Here you go,”

 

Lily’s eyes sparkled, hesitantly bur bravely taking it from Cale’s hands and observing it quite closely. The warm light reflected brightly behind her eyes. “Wow… Oppa, look at this! Give me your sparkler,”

 

Basen was a bit more skeptical about it all, but Lily forced him to just take it. “It’s a little hot, but…” he twirled it around, eyes widened in awe. “It’s… nice,”

 

“Hey! If you wave it around a little fast, you can kind of see a trail!” Dodori exclaimed. “Hey! I’m drawing a big star with it! Rasheel-hyung, look!”

 

Rasheel, who was laying around asleep in the lounge, didn’t hear him. This changed, however, when Mila dragged him out of bed and out to the yard with everyone else.

 

“How interesting…” Eruhaben hummed as he waved his around, pinching the stick like a toothpick. The warm light of the fire cast an ethereal glow over him and his golden hair and eyes.

 

“Hoho… what an intriguing invention,” Ron smiled benignly beside him.

 

“Haha!” 

 

“Mom, mom! Look at this! Isn’t it cool?” Raon exclaimed, showing off to Sheritt who nodded along. She couldn’t hold one herself, but seemed more than satisfied with just watching, her eyes sparkling with a sense of awe that resembled Raon quite a bit. 

 

The next thing he knew, the entire front yard of the Black Castle in the night was lit up with embers of light that shone and fizzed like stars. Cale lit up his own sparkler and walked around with it. He’s never seen the appeal of the things, since all you really do is hold them and wave them around, but right now they looked quite nice. He waved it around some more and laughed.

 

“Cale,”

 

“Ah, hyung-nim,” he smiled, holding out his lit sparkler. “Let me see yours, and Choi Han’s too,”

 

“Ah, okay…”

 

They held out theirs, and slowly pressed the three tips together. The fire crackled to life on their sticks. Alberu raised it high and watched with a sense of wonder. “Ah… it’s kind of like a mini firework.” At that moment, Cale thought he really looked like someone who held the sun in his hands.

 

Choi Han was also quite fixated with watching the fire slowly burn its way down the stick, as if waiting for it to burn out with great interest. It must’ve been a while since he last played with one. The dark exterior and his dark clothes really made for a remarkable contrast that lit up his eyes.

 

“Oh no! It ran out!” Hong exclaimed, sounding worried.

 

“It’s supposed to do that,” Cale assured. “Just take another one and relight it like I did,”

 

Alberu watched Cale hold his sparkler and observed his expression from where he stood. The way he smiled, and how’d been laughing a lot lately, he really seemed happy. It was a good look on him when it wasn’t about scamming someone. 

 

 

There were a lot of empty rooms inside the Black Castle, so everyone decided to inevitably find a bed to collapse into after they were done with all the running around. Although some also decided to just fall asleep on the couch in the main room. He placed a blanket on top of the kids, and one more on Choi Han and Alberu who happened to be messily strewn about over the couch. Choi Han was asleep while almost perfectly sat up, while Alberu took up the rest and the majority of the space that was left empty, face buried in a pillow. He might’ve even been drooling. By his guess, Alberu had probably been working quite hard preparing for the New Year’s banquet.

 

Bud was passed out on the floor, sound asleep. And so was Glenn, who was in a weird unnatural position leaning against a wall. He supposed mercenaries could sleep wherever they wanted. Hannah, Jack, and Mary were leaning against each other on a sofa, and Lily and Basen were sound asleep on another lounge chair (there were lots of comfortable places in the castle).

 

It was so silent that you could probably hear a pin drop, the faint candle light casting a warm comforting glow in the dark. Cale sat up in his spot on a couch, staring off. How peaceful, really.

 

He wrapped a blanket around himself, as well as a scarf, and headed out for some fresh air. Outside, it was so early that the sky was still dark and the sun was yet to even show itself.

 

He took a few steps, walking alone, when he spotted someone. “You’re out here,”

 

It was the Dragon Half-blood. “Ah,” he seemed a bit startled. “Hello, young master-nim…”

 

“You aren’t asleep?”

 

“I don’t really need to,” he admitted. Cale sat beside him on a bench that the wolf kids usually sat in when they were training. “Sleep isn’t something I really need,”

 

“Not food either, huh?” 

 

“No…”

 

Cale hummed. That was too bad. Isn’t it sad if he couldn’t even taste anything? “What are you doing here, then?”

 

“Well, I just like sitting out here, sometimes,” he said. “I like to watch the sun rise,”

 

“The sunrise?”

 

“Yes,” he nodded. “I think it looks… nice,” The Dragon Half-blood paused. “It’s something I wasn’t used to seeing,”

 

The Dragon Half-blood, who was trapped inside the dark cave for so much of his life, looked towards the empty dark sky as if he was waiting. Cale wondered if he did this all the time.

 

“Was it difficult, yesterday?”

 

“Not at all,” he said. “I think it was fun. Raon-nim, and On and Hong talked to me. They chatted about a lot of things, and I got to speak to a lot of other people as well,”

 

“That’s good,”

 

“I, well, I also…. Liked the sparklers from yesterday.” he seemed quite hesitant about admitting it, but in the end decided to tell him.

 

“I see,” Since Rosalyn was the one who made it, she might end up making a lot and distributing it around the kingdom, now that he thought about it. 

 

“How are things with Sheritt-nim?”

 

“Ah…” he seemed hesitant about this topic too, but he didn’t seem tense. “It’s… we aren’t on bad terms. She’s kind, and though it doesn’t feel like she’s really ‘forgiven’ me, it feels like she’s also made an effort to be open to me as well,” something about his voice sounded relieved, but regretful. “She waves and smiles a little at me now when we spot each other outside during training, and I feel like Raon-nim talks to her a lot about me,”

 

“Hm…” the kids were definitely pretty talkative whenever they came over for the week to the Black Castle. Sheritt seemed quite happy to listen though, nodding along and listening, then asking more about it from Cale later on. Well, the important thing though is that they’re starting to get along, and that they’re both at least comfortable with each other’s presence. 

 

“There’s a lot to clean up inside, since it’s so messy from the night before and everyone just fell asleep,” he mentioned.

 

“Mn, yes,” he replied. “I saw a few dirty plates. I wish I could help,”

 

“Haven’t you had enough of dishwashing?”

 

“It’s a bit strange,” he admitted. “Even though it hurt all over, I have to admit that I sort of liked it,” he seemed to contemplate a better way to explain himself. “The best time to do it is in the morning, because then the sunlight shines through the window on the wall next to the sink, and it feels nice and helps you see better.”

 

“Mn…” The Dragon Half-blood was really someone who enjoyed sunlight.

 

“Washing the dishes dishes was difficult to do at first, but when you get used to the feeling of the cold water, it feels kind of refreshing,” he said. “And once you get used to it, it’s somewhat calming. Mn, maybe more like distracting? Something like that.” The Dragon half-blood’s deep monotonous voice that was projected using magic sounded reminiscent. “It was familiar to me,”

 

So that was how this kid felt about those six months, huh? He enjoyed working at the inn. “How did the bandits treat you?”

 

“We didn’t speak to each other very much, but they were civil and even friendly, sometimes. Over time, they’d also talk to me when they were on break. I think I remembered someone letting me have leftovers or extra dishes, occasionally,”

 

It was good that he ate well enough, somewhat. “I see,”

 

They sat in silence for a little, staring off towards some empty sky where the tree’s highest branches didn’t reach.

 

“It’s the new year now,” Cale said.

 

“Oh, that’s right,” he nodded. “Uh, happy new year, Cale,”

 

When he recalled his first impression of the Dragon Half-blood, Cale had thought he was quite the prideful and individual, befitting that of the general aura of a dragon, even if he was a half-blood. Now, he seemed a bit stiff, and a little nervous sometimes. 

 

But he seemed more peaceful. Happier, even though he’s in such an inconvenient form.

 

“Did you know that watching the first sunrise of the new year brings good luck?”

 

“It does…?” he seemed perplexed, big bone dragon head tilting slightly to the side.

 

“Something like that,” Lee Soohyuk once dragged him and Choi Jungsoo out of bed, groggy and half asleep, towards their apartment rooftop, climbing ten flights of stairs at five in the morning, all to see the first sunrise of the new year. He told them about how it was going to bring good fortune, and if they wanted to retire early they should open their eyes and take a look.

 

“I didn’t know that,”

 

“It’s just something that’s apparently true,” Cale replied. “It also apparently symbolizes a fresh start for the year, too,”

 

“Ah…”

 

As they sat there, the dark sky began to fade, and the clouds moved as if to part for the rising light slowly blooming and emerging past the horizon.

 

“Happy new year, Haru,”

 

The Dragon half-blood flinched suddenly when he realized, his head turning to the side to peer down at Cale. “...What?”

 

“You didn’t seem like you wanted to choose your own name,” Cale spoke as the sun rose higher. “It’s no good to have to be referred to with just ‘you’ all the time,” he said. “It’s important for you to have a name of your own. Since you couldn’t choose, let’s stick with this for now, until you can figure out the one you’d like.”

 

“So…” he hesitated. “I— my name… is…”

 

“Haru,” Cale reiterated, a bit clearer this time so he could hear it properly. “It means ‘daytime’, or sometimes ‘sunlight’.”

 

It was difficult for a bone dragon to express many emotions through their face clearly, since it didn't exactly have muscle, but Cale thought he could see the magic that swirled behind his eyes widen and light up. He stared down at Cale for a long time, as if trying to comprehend it.

 

“You’ve hurt people in the past, whether it be the times you realized it, or the times you hadn’t,” Cale said. “So to make up for it, continue living, day by day, sunrise after sunrise.” The Dragon Half-blood’s eyes widened once more. “Live well, take care of yourself. Don’t act recklessly or try to get yourself hurt because you think it’s something you ‘deserve’. If what you want to do is repent, then live,”

 

“...”

 

“Try to do right by the people you’ve wronged, find something that you feel is good and that suits you well, live peacefully,” The sun’s rays brushed past the edges of the leaves of the forest, and gently reached them. “Even though the reason you were put in this form was to fight, it’s over, now.” He leaned back on the bench. “The white star is dead, so live a life you’ll be satisfied with.”

 

The ancient Dragon Half-blood, who lived for thousands of years in the dark, cherished the sunlight that shone from the sky. He’s someone who learned to live, day by day, slowly learning about himself and the people around him.

 

Cale thought of the day that he saved Raon, and the way his bright blue eyes peered at the sky painted with thousands of stars for the first time. He wondered if at some point, the Dragon Half-blood had forgotten the touch of the sun in his years within the cave. He wondered if the sun was gentle on the day he stepped outside the cave.

 

He’d chosen the name, which was a Korean word, because he wished he would continue to live a decent life under the rays of the sun he was so fond of.

 

The sun, that rose high above the trees, illuminated the sky and breathed life to the day. It was impossible for the Dragon Half-blood to cry, but for a moment he wondered if tears would fall from his wide eyes that glinted. He wondered if he could feel the warmth of the day on his bones.

 

“...Okay.” His voice was low and quiet, but sincere. “I will,”

 

“You’ll what?”

 

“I will live up to my name,” he said. Cale thought that strangely, his mouth had somehow lifted itself into a smile. “I like my name. Thank you.”

 

“Then I’ll call you Haru, now,” Cale smiled as the breeze blew past. The first morning of the new year began with a bright sky.

 

“Good morning, Haru,”

Notes:

#1 DHB supporter. he's a war criminal, and he's done a ton of wrong, but he was also wronged and tortured his whole life and is genuinely a good person at heart. he's trying his best to genuinely make amends someway somehow and. ugh. hannah, and a few other characters in this story have also been villains at one point, and TCF is a story about forgiving yourself and living well. So I think he deserves a fresh start, too. He's got a long way to go, but I'm cheering him on. Shout out to Ria for helping me come up with this name! you're a godsend TwT

The reason I chose a different name and not Eden (honestly, I really should catch up with p2 but I do know he gets reincaranted and named TwT) is because as we've seen with Cale, even if it's the same person, for example Raon, under different circumstances he'll give them a different name, like with Dodam, because he has different wishes for them.

something something, Raon was rescued and named on a starry night, and Haru was named during the sunrise of a new year. something something brothers.

Some more tidbits, Cale likes to tell stories to Alberu from his world, usually some mythology of the plot of crazy webnovels, and Alberu just tiredly listens and actually kind of enjoys it. Huge fan of earth for their guns and flavorful food, you know?

Just a fair little disclaimer I tried my best to research ship of theseus but for the life of me my teeny little brain cannot comprehend it deep enough so I hope this doesn't feel insufficient or weird TwT

Mmm pretty sure there's more fun little extra lore but I can't remember TwT feel free to ask questions in the comments, and I'm always happy to answer :)

Chapter 12: faint voices.

Summary:

Cale catches a fever.

Notes:

TW! for PTSD and flashbacks and blood (the usual coughing up) and maybe panic attacks. Cale is having a rough time today.

This is where the 'hurt' half of the hurt/comfort tag comes in.

Ahhh I hope this doesn't end up being OOC writing vulnerable scenes is *hard* TwT

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“...Roksoo—”

 

“...at the hell is—”

 

“Monster! Mon—”

 

“...et me out! Let me— NO–”

 

“-lease! My… child—”

 

“...how… cold-blooded…”

 

“...oor orphan—”

 

“...ere are your parents…?”

 

“...you damn useless son of a—!”

 

Warped, vaguely identifiable voices swirled in disorienting, loud echoes. Cale’s surroundings morphed from one place to the other, merging and bleeding into one another as the walls changed and went and the faces of the people blurred like smudged paint. 

 

One second, Cale’s skin pricked like he was using Instant, the next a sudden blunt force to his head that shattered and grazed the surrounding area, then what felt like punches to his abdomen, and then the feeling of blood dripping down his nose and his lips. 

 

Figures loomed over him, more so like shadows. Sometimes they were small, then tall and immense the next moment. Sometimes they seemed to try to reach out to him kindly, only to change and clasp their fists and aim for him the next second. Coupled with the disorienting jumbled voices and smudged, constantly shifting surroundings, and the intense burning, hellishly hot sensation overwhelming his body, Cale felt like he was really going to die.

 

He tried to cover his ears for any semblance of escape from all the racket but it had no effect. He couldn’t move at all, neither could he speak. It was like he was a ghost chained down to his spot to relive all his worst moments.

 

The deafening roar of a monster erupted in the distance. Then the searing hot pain burned hotter, and hotter, and hotter and—

 

 

Cale awoke with a quiet gasp, hands clasped over his mouth already like reflex. Pulling it back, he found that there was no blood staining his palm or his face, unlike his dream.

 

Right. He frowned. So it was a dream. More like a nightmare, really.

 

His heart was beating out of his chest, and it was hard to breathe. His hands were shaking so much that Cale felt like he could barely even grip the side of the bed without feeling like he would slip as he got off.

 

Cale looked back to see the children still asleep, much to his quiet relief. He was covered in cold sweats all over and his body was burning up and freezing at the same time. Every single touch felt like needles on his skin, and the chronic pain was aching all over his body twice as worse as usual. He unbuttoned the top of his shirt, then another button. It was still so suffocatingly hot.

 

He moved to the couch in his room to try and maybe fall asleep there so he wouldn’t bother the kids, but it wasn’t working no matter how long he tried to lay there, holding his eyes shut before it started stinging. He tensed up when he felt flaring pain all over his body.  

 

Cale loosely draped a blanket over himself, shakily held himself up, and headed for the door. He felt like being anywhere but his room at the moment— for some reason his body kept trying to convince him that he needed to move, get out of his dark bedroom, something.

 

Through the magically candle-lit hallways, his weak steps carried him to nowhere in particular, aimlessly wandering the path down the seemingly endlessly winding hallway, step, after step, after step.

 

-Cale?

 

-Whoa, you’re really burning up…!

 

-Is everything okay?

 

-What’s happening? Cale?

 

The ancient powers began to talk as Cale walked and it was not helping, thanks to his migraine.

 

“please…” he managed to weakly say. “shut up. Please, my head, it—” Cale cut himself off with a wince.

 

Whatever the ancient powers were saying now weren’t registering anymore— all they sounded like to him was just buzzing, muffled static. He kept walking, steps slow and weak in an unfocused dissociative haze, just one foot in front of the other for what felt like forever.

 

The hallway felt like it just stretched on and on, and at some point, the surrounding seemed to blur again, like in his dream, though more vague. The straight hall seemed to twist and turn like a funhouse mirror, and slowly it shifted from one form to another. Suddenly, the intricately carved wallpaper turned into cold, cracked white concrete and the lights seemed to dim. Kim Roksoo— no, no, Cale— he thought he heard the sound of glass breaking, specifically from a bottle. And then the sound of familiar unpredictable big footsteps echoing, and nearing him. Then they disappeared, and the sound of loud, angry yelling seemed to tune out and back in repeatedly like a radio.

 

“..bastard!”

 

“...oksoo!”

 

“Told you… on’t eat my damn… it was—!”

 

“...useless… -amn brat!”

 

“Haaa… h-haa…” Cale’s heart began to race faster and faster and his breaths grew shorter. His knees wobbled before finally giving out, leaving him to kneel on the cold ground, trembling hands reaching for the wall in desperation.

 

-Cale… calm—

 

-...eep breaths—

 

-...he… fever!

 

-count… five—

 

There were too many of them. There were too many— there were too many voices and he couldn’t process all of them at once—

 

The surroundings kept shifting again, wobbling here and there and morphing into vague places Cale was familiar with. For a second, he thought he was in the middle of the rubble of the restaurant he worked in during the cataclysm, and looked up when thought water was dripping down from a leak. The next second, he thought he was in the rubble after his shelter was attacked, leaving no survivors but him. And then— and then—

 

“...how cold-blooded.”

 

“not… a tear…?”

 

“after everything… leader did for him—”

 

“...how… pitiful…”

 

“...if… soohyuk… was… -survived instead..”

 

More shadows surrounded him and spoke in quiet hushed whispers, like they were right behind Kim Roksoo, the word digging icily into his back like spears. He really was cold-blooded. His entire team was dead because he couldn’t do enough for them, and now he was just kneeling here uselessly. He should move— he should do something, they entrusted him with this— they—

 

He could sense a figure approach with quiet footsteps where he had collapsed and the sky and rubble turned back to white, cold concrete, and the sound of TV commercials and breaking glass echoed faintly in his ears. Then it kneeled down next to him, and Kim Roskoo was sure it must’ve said something, but kept quiet. It reached a hand out to him, and he jolted back and scrambled to block it with his hands over his face, eyes clenched shut out of instinct. The figure in front of him seemed to distort into a character just vaguely resembling his uncle, but enough that he inched back some more.

 

It spoke again. “...young mas—”

 

“...soo?”

 

It sounded… It held no malice. It wasn’t— it didn't seem like it would hurt him. Maybe. 

 

Cale flinched when he felt something— a gloved hand touched his shoulder slowly before settling, and another one, ungloved, pressed against his forehead. It was cool, causing him to lean in, but it sent needle pricks all over his skin. He winced sharply and pulled back, but didn't try to shrug the figure's hands off.

 

“...young… aster…” It started to sound a bit… clearer. It was steady, calm, and concerned. It seemed familiar.

 

“roksoo-yah.”  

 

“T…” he choked out weakly. “team… leader…?” The blurring figure seemed to readjust to his thoughts and resembled him more. “Soohyuk-ah?”

 

“....alm down, Roksoo— Take a deep breath,”

 

“...you’re… -kay… no one’ll… hurt you…”

 

Lee Soohyuk’s voice echoed in his mind distantly. It was soothing.

 

“...young master-nim.”

 

The hand tightened on his shoulder in a grounding squeeze, and he tensed with a wince.

 

“Young master-nim.”

 

“Young… mas…ter…?” Roksoo— Cale echoed dizzily in a barely audible mumble as he felt himself sway forward and back. The hand on his shoulder felt secure, holding up before he could even fall, but his mind was still playing tricks on him and wouldn’t let him see this figure clearly without getting a migraine. “Wh.. What…”

 

“Young master-nim, please breathe in.” He obliged him. “Now breathe out. Again, please.”

 

“...”

 

“Can you please tell me where you are, young-master-nim?”

 

“I…” he trailed off, trying to get a glimpse around and think straight. “I’m at— I’m in…” The floor seemed… wooden. Was it? And the walls were… concrete? “Th… Headquarters?”

 

“...” this figure was silent. “Not quite.”

 

“I— we…” he stuttered out. It was still too cold, yet too hot, and he was only getting dizzier by the minute and everything just ached.

 

“Please breathe again, young master-nim.” he followed its words again, and felt the blanket that must’ve slipped off at some point before being placed back on his shoulder. “Can you please tell this forgetful butler your name?”

 

“I… I’m…” he trailed off. He was… “K-Kim…”

 

Kim Roksoo. That didn’t… sound right. But, it was, right? That’s his name, so why…?

 

“...”

 

His voice shrunk. “s- i’m sorry..”

 

“There’s no need to apologize. Are you aware of who this old man is, young master-nim?”

 

Roksoo’s vision of this person still felt too hazy and… “I-I… m’not… m’not sure…”

 

Was he angry? He was being nice now but he stuttered and messed up– he might get mad at him. He couldn’t even tell him his name. At best he’ll just leave him behind, but he might— what if he hits him? He’s not in a good state to be able to dodge or run away right now— he felt terrible. 

 

It’s better not to get hurt. I need to make sure I don’t… Really— I don’t want to—

 

Kim Roksoo felt unbearably small.

 

“...!” His heart rate was racing again suddenly, and Roksoo winced and almost keeled over. He clutched his hand over his chest and felt the erratic pace of his heart beating against his hand, and suddenly it was so hard to breathe and his head wouldn’t stop throbbing and aching like there was a needle repeatedly being stuck inside. “H-Haaa… haa… ha..”

 

“Young master-nim. Can you hear me?” He gave a small nod, and felt the figure’s thumb gently start to caress his shoulder in rhythmic patterns. “Good. I am Ron. This old Ron would like to ask a few more questions. Is that alright?”

 

“...” He just nodded again.

 

“Young master-nim, can you please tell this old Ron five things you can see?”

 

“...f-five things…” He mumbled, before looking around. Things were still wobbly, but… “is that— is that a candle— a candle… thing?”

 

“A candelabra. Yes, very good. Can you tell me a few more?”

 

“I— there’s… is there…” his head was throbbing like firecrackers. “a glass bottle…?” His lips thinned into a line. “S… Soju?”

 

“...” Ron was silent for a moment. “I’m afraid not, young master-nim. There are no bottles here.”

 

No bottles… so this wasn’t— maybe it wasn’t his uncle’s apartment unit? The cold white concrete walls started to fade in and out once he became sure of it. “s-sorry… Um— your… your gloves’re… they’re white?”

 

“That’s right, young master-nim. I have white gloves.”

 

“Th-that…” he stared at the flickering lights that he could make out to be flames on the wall. “The… torches?”

 

“Yes.”

 

“Wooden… Door?”

 

“One more, please.”

 

“The… the window. It’s… It’s night… time?” Wasn’t it– what time was it again? Wasn’t it morning or…?

 

“Yes, that’s right. Very good, young master-nim.” He assured him. “Could you also tell this old Ron four things you can hear at this moment?”

 

“...” Things he could hear? “I-I can hear—” His head felt indecipherable right now, but he could at least tell he was hearing… something. “there’re some… voices.”

 

“Voices?” he repeated gently. “Can you tell me who’s or what they’re saying?”

 

“There’s…” 

 

All of the noises from prior to talking to Ron hadn’t stopped. They were just running in the background while he was focused— or at least, trying to focus— on listening to Ron’s words, but they were all definitely still there. 

 

“...Yelling.”

 

“Yelling?”

 

“From my… relative.”

 

The voice of his uncle spouting curses and breaking glass rang a bit louder and caused him to drop his head lower and his shoulders tense. Ron sat him down in a more comfortable position and let him lean on the wall behind him with the blanket still over his shoulders. 

 

“Who is this relative?”

 

“...Uncle.”

 

He seemed a bit… bewildered by his answer? Maybe he thought he was lying? 

 

“...I see.” he nodded. “What else can you tell this old Ron, young master-nim?”

 

“...” he paused and thought about it. “s-screaming…”

 

The day of the cataclysm. Almost everyone around him died that day. Even when he was hiding under all the rubble, with a single patch of sunlight shining down from above during the day and rain water from water spouts dripping down from the crevices, the screaming would never stop. Even when they’d go quiet for a little, they’d run again full force.

 

“a-and… roaring.”

 

From the monsters. They all varied. Screeches in high, ear-bleeding pitches, beast-like roars that would echo from every corner, growling, hissing, and even silent movement.

 

“But also… there’s…” he trailed off, memories flashing through his mind with muffled noise. “T… There’s… the team leader and– and someone else. There’s Jungsoo. Grandma Kim. Jang Mansoo. Lee Jinjoo and Seungwon…”

 

Right. That’s right. There were his friends. They were there too. They were—

 

[“Kim Roksoo, it’s not your fault,”

 

“I leave it to you,”]

 

[The sounds of roars echoed in the distance, buildings came down and crumbled in explosions of debris. Grandma Kim dragged him and threw him out, yelling at everyone in sight to hide and run. Then she—]

 

[Jang Mansoo activated his ability, a silver shield—]

 

[The blaring sounds of a voice yelling out clearly like an emergency broadcast over the sound of monster ech—]

 

Records. An endless barrage, like a tsunami, hit him over and over again. Each one was so vivid and life-like as they replayed their final words, final expressions, final appearances, of each of those people. Team members, people at the shelter, his friends. 

 

That’s right— they were all… they were all dead now.

 

Haha, how did he— how did he forget that?

 

He could hear Ron’s voice raise for a moment— he sounded stunned. Kim Roksoo’s ears began to ring irritably, to the point that he felt like he couldn’t hear anything else. His eyes began to sting. Things started to get blurry and hot. Unbearably so. It spread all over his body starting from his face that felt as if it had been set on fire. There were so many records rushing at him like a violent wave and his head was in so much pain.

 

“S-stop…” make it stop. 

 

He didn’t want to hear these records. He didn’t want to feel them. He didn’t want to see them. He didn't want to smell or taste them and he’s suppressed them so deep for so long, but they were here tackling him all at once like a pipe that burst from pressure. 

 

[“Kim Roksoo,”]

 

[“Cold-blooded.”]

 

[“Monster.”]

 

[“I leave it to you.”

 

“I leave it to you.”

 

“I leave it to you.”

 

“I leave it to you.”

 

“I leave it—”]

 

“...oung master!”

 

Something… hot was trailing down from his nose. Kim Roksoo’s head turned downwards. Something dripped from his face and fell to the floor. It was— it was red? It was sort of dark, kind of like ink, but he could make out the undertones of red from within the continuously growing puddle.

 

Ron tilted his face up and Roksoo felt a handkerchief prod at his nose, gentle as it could, wiping off the… blood? He was bleeding? Right now? But there weren't any— there weren’t any monsters, right? What?

 

“...aster… Young master.” Firm. His voice was firm. But there was a sense of intense panic lined his features and trembled at the end of his voice.

 

“....” He stared off for a while.

 

He— Ron was wiping sweat and blood off his face with a handkerchief, and he could see his face. The aged wrinkles twisted in a way that seemed worried— fearful, even. 

 

“Please,” Both of his hands were on either of his shoulders now, squeezing down in a tight hold. He squeezed down so firmly it felt warm. “Please respond to me,”

 

 

“...r…” he barely even managed a syllable as he hazily tried to reply. Staring at this person, whose face was now beginning to clear he could begin to… recognize him.

 

Finally, he whispered in a small mumble, pupils shaking. “...ron?”

 

An assassin who went undercover and worked as an old butler for Cale Henituse— for him. A person who was always smiling in a benign way while bringing up bitter brews and lemon tea to him and enjoyed messing with him.

 

He’s always worn a benign smile, but at this moment his usual demeanor seemed to crack. His tense, frightful expression seemed to slowly soften as he exhaled when his name left Cale’s lips, dabbing off more blood from the corner of Cale’s mouth. The hand that gripped his shoulder tightened once more, firm but gentle, like a reassurance.

 

“I am here, young master-nim,”

 

It was Ron Molan.

 

The world began to return to focus, little by little.

 

 

Beacrox wasn’t a heavy sleeper, but that didn’t mean he was the kind to just randomly wake up in the middle of the night either. His room in the villa was on the first floor, closest to the kitchen by his request for convenience, and also to catch any intruders at night that might sneak in. 

 

He didn’t know why he suddenly woke up, but he did hear the faint sound of… something. Footsteps, one heavier than the other and the other quiet— it was his father’s. He decided to get up and check, just to be safe, and saw that the kitchen door was opened slightly.

 

“...father?” he blinked again. “Young master-nim…?”

 

It was a peculiar sight. Cale was wrapped in a blanket, posture slouched over the kitchen table where he sat on a wooden chair. His hands were folded atop the table, holding a glass cup of water— cold, if Beacrox were to guess, as well as his father’s signature cup of warm honey lemon tea. His father was sitting next to him, speaking to him in low mumbles. Though he was smiling as he usually did, his expression seemed strained. Something seemed wrong.

 

Slowly stepping closer, Beacrox finally caught a glimpse of Cale’s expression.

 

He looked as if he was dead. 

 

Cale’s eyes seemed terribly empty— distant and faraway. He didn’t move or speak a word to him or even father, though there was a slight tremble to his knuckles. His eyes were bloodshot and red, prominent dark bags present, and his hair was strewn about, sticking to his forehead and cheeks as if he'd been sweating a lot. He’s— he’s never seen him like this before. It stunned him so much he wasn’t sure what to even say.

 

Father raised his gaze to look at Beacrox, expression looking grim. “Ah…” he was… sick?

 

“Young master-nim,” Beacrox called out, cautious and quiet. He wasn’t granted with a reply. He spoke to his father. “Shouldn’t he rest in his room?”

 

“He doesn’t wish to,” he replied. “No matter how much I attempted to convince him, he insisted that he did not want to fall back asleep,”

 

He blinked. “How did he end up here?”

 

“I found him nearly collapsed in the hall,” Beacrox flinched when he saw the way his father’s expression looked. “He seemed to be… delirious,”

 

“Delirious?” the young master? “Is he alright?”

 

“I’ve had him drink medicine, and the young master-nim wanted cold water,” he explained. “It seems after this it would be best to—”

 

“...hungry…” 

 

Beacrox flinched. “Young master Cale?”

 

“I-I’m…” he mumbled. “...hungry.”

 

“...I see,” Beacrox nodded. “What would you like to eat?”

 

“Kim…chi,” he blinked a few times. “...jjigae.”

 

“Kimchi… jjigae?”

 

Cale replied with a small nod, but followed up with a string of jumbled words that sounded foreign to Beacrox. It didn’t sound like gibberish. In fact, it sounded more like a different language. He could recognize it, a little bit— it was the language from that punk Choi Han’s hometown. Korean, was it?

 

“Alright then,” he nodded. “Please wait then, young master-nim,”

 

Beacrox put on an apron, as well as a fresh pair of white gloves, before going to flip through the various notes he kept in a drawer inside the kitchen— familiar handwriting lined the pages with detailed instructions, before landing on one recipe. ‘Kimchi jjigae’ or ‘Kimchi Stew’.

 

Suddenly, Beacrox remembered something that Cale had told him a little while ago.

 

“Young master-nim, what’s your favorite food?”

 

“Mn, anything’s fine as long as it isn’t sour or bitter,”

 

“Is there anything more… particular? A specific dish you might like?”

 

“...Kimchi jjigae,”

 

So Cale was craving his favorite food. 

 

Looking through the recipe that he had written himself, it didn’t seem like it would take too long. They had some leftover kimchi too, though they’ll need to cook some more rice. Aside from that, it seemed quite straightforward. He could manage it.

 

Ron watched his son quickly get to work, the sound of footsteps, running water and fire on the stove lighting up the kitchen. Then he looked to his side, at Cale Henituse, who still seemed as if he was in a trance.

 

“...” he was mumbling a few words to himself, but Ron couldn’t understand any. It almost frustrated him as much as it worried him.

 

He had many questions.

 

Just what happened to his puppy young master?

 

An uncle? Monsters? A team leader? Names he couldn’t recognize? It didn’t seem like just something that might’ve emerged from a fever-induced hallucination. When Ron had found him, kneeling on the floor, burning up, it was as if he was speaking to someone else. He flinched when he reached out and moved as if he was trying to protect himself. Apologies would slip from him easily and he’d droop his head low. Most of all, it even seemed like he couldn’t even recognize Ron when he first saw him— in fact, it was as if he couldn’t even recognize himself, like he had temporarily lost his memory. Who was Kim Roksoo?

 

It all felt simply so unfathomable to him, more so than the very first time Cale had cried in years not long ago. But the worst part, the thing that frightened him most, was the way he suddenly blanked out when he was talking to him. 

 

It all happened in a moment. He was speaking, something about the voices from mumbled names that sounded far too foreign, and then he suddenly stopped as if his vocal cords were cut in the moment, and his eyes went wide. At that moment, Ron felt as if he had seen something almost glow, resonate in his eyes, but it was like the vitality was sapped and drained straight from his body. It felt like Cale had just died as he held him.

 

“...ron,”

 

“Yes, young master?”

 

“Where… are we right now?”

 

“We are in the kitchen, young master-nim. Inside of the villa located in Harris Village.” Cale stared into his reflection in the water within the glass and nodded. “Would you like to know anything else?”

 

“What time is it?”

 

“Around 2 in morning, I believe,”

 

“Date…?”

 

“It is the 9th of the first month in the Felix calendar, young master-nim. The second week after the new year began,”

 

“Felix… first.. month,” he echoed slowly. Then he was silent once more, before looking up, towards Beacrox, who seemed to be washing rice, the sound of water draining and the running sink filling the room. “...beacrox.”

 

“Yes, that is my son,” Ron replied. It seemed like he was trying to make sense of the things around him. He really must be delirious.

 

“...Ron, did you… know?” Cale said. “I don’t like lemonade,”

 

He smiled benignly. “Ho. I see. Then what beverage do you like?”

 

“I don’t like lemonade,” he echoed. “And I don’t like bitter herbal tea. But at least that’s… at least it’s better than not drinking at all, I guess.”

 

“...Young master-nim?”

 

“I— when… when the building collapsed, it…” he mumbled. “I was.. stuck. For a while. Was it 3 days? Maybe a— a week? A bit more? I don’t…”

 

He sounded like he was rambling on, unsure, but Ron was too busy trying to pinpoint when exactly Cale was talking about. A building collapsed? And he was stuck? For a week?

 

One of his hands reached out slightly, in front of him, like he was trying to catch something. His eyes were distantly recalling something Ron couldn’t see. “...A pipe leak,” he said to himself. “...lemonade’s still better than rusty water.”

 

When… was this?

 

Cale shakily lifted the cup of still-warm honey lemon tea and took a small sip, before sighing out. “...thanks.”

 

“...of course,” he nodded. Next time, he’ll make him the sweet tea he liked.

 

 

Choi Han was never the best sleeper. It’d been two years since he’s been out of the forest, but old habits died hard. Occasionally, he’d wake in the middle of the night, feeling uneasy, and would need to walk around until he settled down or just choose to do something. Polish or sharpen his sword, pace around, read a book, maybe head to the training ground if he was feeling particularly restless. 

 

A habit he’s developed over the years since leaving the forest was to get up and quietly check on the people around him. When he was traveling with Roslayn and Lock, he’d get up and watch them sleep for a little bit, maybe adjust one of their blankets if they were slipping off. And whenever he was with Cale, he’d check to make sure he and the children were sleeping peacefully. It might’ve been strange, maybe even invasive, but seeing them properly rest put him at ease.

 

Tonight, when Choi Han creaked the door open to take a peek, Cale was missing.

 

Alarms blared in his head but he tried to calm himself down and think logically. It could be that he just got up to use the bathroom, or head to the library, or get some water in the kitchen, or just go for a walk. Quite literally anything. This wasn’t even the first time this happened.

 

When he headed for the kitchen, he was met with his answer.

 

“...Cale-nim?”

 

Silence. Ron and Beacrox glanced back at him, and the old butler only gave him a look. Ah— he wasn’t feeling well.

 

He quickly rushed to Cale's side, and felt stunned by what he was met with.

 

“...” Cale was silent. Eerily so. And he looked… terrible. He spotted the dirty handkerchief, stained with blood, sitting atop the table next to Ron. He didn't say a word to Choi Han nor spare him a glance. It… worried him. Greatly. He got sick? They had just gone on an outing not long ago. Has he been pushing himself too hard? Was he overworking himself again and they didn't notice? What-

 

“choi…”

 

He straightened immediately. “Yes?”

 

“...choi jungsoo?”

 

Choi Han's pupils shook, and Ron shot him a curious glance. He probably recognized his family name.

 

Wait. His eyes widened again. Cale, he's… sick.

 

Choi Han suddenly remembered some of Choi Jungsoo's memories. Kim Roksoo appeared quite often in them, and he'd caught a few glimpses of the times he had gotten sick. He dragged a wooden stool and sat next to Cale, observing him.

 

Sweating, short of breath, nosebleeds or sometimes even coughing up blood, red eyes- he touched Cale's hand that was on top of the table. He flinched and tensed up, but Choi Han could feel the way his skin was hot like a furnace and the slight tremble against his fingers. He stared into his distant empty eyes and saw a faint red glow resonate from the center, a sign of the use of his ability— particularly an overuse. 

 

“..Kim Roksoo?” He quietly whispered.

 

“...jung…soo?”

 

Choi Han bit his lip. There was no doubt about it. His ability was malfunctioning.

 

Through the memories he'd seen passed on from Choi Jungsoo, he learned that when Kim Roksoo got sick, sometimes his ability would malfunction. Depending on the intensity of the fever, it could be more minor, like zoning out often or spontaneously recalling some of his records. But sometimes it could get worse, like hallucinations, coughing up blood or nosebleeds, overheating, intense nightmares, dissociating, and sometimes, he’d even temporarily lose some parts of his memories or even regress to certain points of his memory thanks to his records. According to Kim Roksoo himself, it was like having a tornado hit a library and having to reorganize all the books again. He’d frowned sourly as he explained those words to the rest of his team.

 

This time, Choi Han noted, seemed to be a particularly bad case.

 

He inhaled a deep breath and thought. He couldn’t remember everything perfectly the same way Cale did, nor was his memory particularly remarkable, but Choi Han tried to look into his memories and gather everything he could about how to deal with Cale’s ailments.

 

There were a few ways to deal with the symptoms of a record malfunction. Of course, since Cale’s ability malfunctioned thanks to a fever in the first place, as he got better and healed, the severity of it would gradually lessen over time. Aside from that, it was important to properly hydrate, preferably with cool water, in order to replenish sweat, and, according to Kim Roksoo, ‘clear his head’. Looking at the glass clutched in his hands, it seemed like that was taken care of. He should also take medicine to reduce his fever. Ah— and food. The constant use of Record was very draining, so he needed to eat in order to replenish that energy. 

 

Choi Han looked up and looked at Beacrox, who was focused on cooking something. He could hear something boiling on the stove and the familiar scent of warm rice cooking and… kimchi?

 

“...jungsoo.”

 

He drew his focus back to Cale. “yes?”

 

“...i’m hungry.” Choi Han stilled. He was speaking Korean. “I won at… Gonggi again, today.” he mumbled. “...pay up, you bastard. Grandma Cho closes up at… 6.”

 

“...Kim Roksoo-yah?”

 

“Ha?”

 

He must’ve been recalling something again. “...what do you want to get from Grandma Cho’s?”

 

“...are you messing with me?” he frowned. “She sells… soup dumplings.”

 

It was definitely way past six, by now. “I think she’s closed.”

 

“Ha…? Already…?” he sighed, before coughing. “....bastard. You promised.”

 

“Sorry,” he whispered with a small smile. “You should drink some more water,”  

 

“Hm…? Sure…” he nodded, somewhat dazedly, before lifting the glass with slightly trembling hands, gulping down the water and heaving. Ron wiped the corner of his mouth and looked at Choi Han with a questioning look. It must’ve been at least a little strange, since to him Cale was pretty much speaking gibberish, and now Choi Han was responding to him with the same gibberish fluently. 

 

“Roksoo-yah,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“No— Cale-nim.” his eyes widened slightly when he heard his name. “Do you remember the time we first met?”

 

“First… met?”

 

“Yes.” Choi Han nodded. “It was the first night I’d made it to the territory. I was exhausted since I’d rushed all the way here, and I hurt my leg on my way down from the wall. Then you came and spoke to me. Do you remember what you said?”

 

He was silent for a few moments. “...what did I say?”

 

“You asked me if I had someplace to stay.” Choi Han had a fond expression as he recalled those words. “If I was hungry, if I had someplace to sleep. Then you offered to feed me and took me back with you,”

 

“...”

 

“Thinking about it now, you probably should’ve been a bit more careful. I was a stranger, after all. Even if you knew I was the supposed protagonist of a novel,” Even as he said that, Choi Han had a light smile. “But for that, I’ve always been grateful.”

 

Cale’s eyes widened, pupils shaking lightly as if he was recalling something. He could see the red in his pupils grow more vibrant, as if intensifying. “...ah.”

 

He didn’t say anything else after that, and they sat in silence. It was heavy, a bit tense, even. Everyone present was worried about Cale’s health, since they’ve never seen him like… this before. It was such a hidden– vulnerable side of him that they weren’t sure what exactly they could do.

 

After watching Cale for so long as the minutes ticked by, Choi Han finally got up, heading to the counter where Beacrox was working.

 

It was as if the chef was in a focused trance. His hands were working the most precise and quick Choi Han had personally ever seen. Gazing at the opened paper with Cale’s familiar handwriting, he read the words written at the top and immediately understood.

 

“...Let me cut that up,” Beacrox turned to him with an inquiring expression. “The tofu.”

 

“I’m busy,” he replied coldly.

 

“Which is why I’m here to help,”

 

“And why would I trust you with cutting, of all things?” 

 

Choi Han didn’t let up. “Because I won a bet,”

 

“You’re bringing that up now?”

 

“I know what this dish is supposed to taste like,” he said. “It's a dish from my hometown, after all. You’ll need me if you want this to taste authentic enough,”

 

“...” Becarox stared at him, reluctant, before turning back to the stove, sighing. “Go wash your hands. And then use this knife, with the dark wooden handle. It’s the dullest knife I have here. If I get a repeat of the cutting board and counter incident you’re never setting foot in this kitchen ever again,”

 

Choi Han looked at the dulled knife and heaved a sigh, turning away towards the sink. 

 

 

Kim Roksoo, mn, no, Cale. Right. He didn’t know what to do.

 

It felt like his head was full of cotton, but also being stabbed repeatedly. His entire body felt like it was being stabbed repeatedly, actually. Every joint felt like it ached, every square inch of his skin like it was constantly being pricked with needles. His eyes were… burning. Even blinking so much felt burdensome. He should sleep. Something told him he needed to shut his eyes and pass out, but he felt— he knew that he’d only get nightmares if he did that, and then wake up to pain again anyway. Between the two, he’d rather… he’d rather just deal with the hurt.

 

But most importantly, I’m hungry. 

 

It felt like he’d been starving for a while. He’s been trying to sate his needs with the cool water and the sweet tea in front of him, but he couldn’t stop thinking about food.

 

He hasn’t starved this badly in a while, maybe. When was the last time? When he was a kid? Or that time under the rubble? Or that time…

 

[“Roksoo.”]

 

[“Kim Roksoo.”]

 

[“Roksoo-yah.”]

 

[“Team Leader-nim.”]

 

Voices kept calling out to him in his head, faint enough that he couldn’t tell if they were… if they were really there or not. He tried not to reply.

 

He stared at his shaky open palm for a while, dazed. His vision was going awry— each time he blinked, different images would flash and overlay his palm. There were scars, more or less of them each time. Small, big, dark and light. He tried tracing them with his finger again.

 

There were splotches of blood, in different patterns each time he’d blink. They were more dark than red, so it looked as if it’d been bitten in chunks. Not that he’s never experienced that. He suddenly winced and tensed up when a record started of a particular mission with the acid monsters, clutching his hand. Pain ebbed all over his skin.

 

It hurts. 

 

The scars he got from using instant, the way the air cut into him like glass shards that were on fire, igniting, leaving ugly marks in its wake.

 

It hurts. 

 

The time his uncle beat him with a bottle, and the way the glass shards cut him up all over, piercing his skin even when he tried to scramble away because they were all over the floor.

 

It hurts. 

 

The infection he got from trying to stitch up the gash on his leg with string by himself when he was a kid. Red, swelling, as blood poured between the messy gaps of weak, cheap string. It felt like he was being eaten alive by his own skin. It was difficult to suppress the need to let out a scream, brewing and fluctuating in his throat, enough that it was hard to breathe. He had to bite down on his lip, hard, to get him to stay conscious enough to try and pour water over it. It just stung.

 

It hurts. 

 

The stomachache he got from food poisoning. He was so hungry. There was some food that was a bit moldy in the fridge. His uncle would be okay if he ate that, right? He wouldn’t want something moldy. If he was quiet, maybe he’d be okay. There were fruits with just a bit of it on one side, so if he was careful he’d be okay. And there was some bread too. It was stale, but that’s okay. It turned out to be really moldy, but the fruits weren’t enough and they didn’t taste good and he was still so hungry. If he ate it fast, it’d be okay. Right? 

 

It hurts. 

 

The poison. There was a new monster, and it had poisonous thorns latched into its skin. It got stuck in his leg. He could see the disgusting purple and bluish color stemming from where it was plunged, and the outline of his veins vividly colored with the poison seeping through. It needed to be pulled out if he wanted to get healed. It should’ve been okay. Jungsoo should stop crying if he doesn't want to help. The taste of dirty fabric, cut from his jacket, was disgusting as it absorbed the saliva from his mouth. It was hurting. It was hurting a lot. His hands were shaking, but he needed to pull it out. He tugged hard once. It didn’t come out all the way but now he was bleeding and oozing something that made him feel sick. He tried again. Not out. Jungsoo stopped him and held his hand tightly before pulling it out for him. He bit into the fabric. Hard. It didn’t ease the pain at all. His throat was burning from the suppressed screams he couldn’t just keep in. He felt dizzy. There was yelling, and he didn’t want to look at his leg. So he closed his eyes and held them shut. 

 

It

 

“...hurts.”

 

Drip. 

 

There was red dripping down his nose again. The lingering memory of pain ebbed faintly as he felt as if he had been pulled out of the sea he had been slowly sinking into again. He felt Ron wiping his nose with a handkerchief, swift and calm, but with an air of unease, and the sound of cooking suddenly slowed to a halt.

 

Choi Han listened to the tiny voice from behind him and felt his stomach drop. He gripped the handle of the dull knife hard. He might’ve dented it a little as he tried to focus on finishing up.

 

They were done with the kimchi-jjigae.

 

Beacrox carried it over. The entire pot was simmering, and it seemed almost as if it was glowing under the light of the lantern on the table. The aroma wafting through also smelled flavorful as they set it down in front of Cale.

 

“...” 

 

He stared at it blankly for a long time, and Choi Han could see something lighting up behind his eyes. He washed his hands and sat next to Cale.

 

“...is…” he mumbled as Beacrox set down a plate with rice in front of him. “is it… my… birthday?”

 

Ron, Beacrox, and Choi Han tensed in surprise. Ah… right. Kim Roksoo’s birthday was on the 8th of November. It was around the time they were in the middle of the war and dealing with the Sealed God’s test. Even though they managed to have a little celebration back in Earth 2 before the final battle with the unranked monster, they didn't really get the chance to do so here in their world once they got back. “No,” he admitted honestly. “I think we might’ve missed it. I’m sorry,”

 

Cale raised his head slowly to look at Choi Han through a delicious haze. “did we… miss yours too?”

 

“Ah…” Choi Jungsoo’s birthday was on the same day. “Mn... well...”

 

Cale let out a sigh as he picked up a ladle. “...did you at least eat something nice?” he asked. “...Choi Han.”

 

“...!” Choi Han stilled. Oh. That’s right— his birthday was on the 8th, too.

 

“A birthday is a good excuse to… convince your sunbaes to buy you expensive hotpot,” he rambled on. Choi Han looked to the side and saw a very confused Ron and Beacrox staring back. 

 

Warm, steaming rice was placed inside a bowl. There was also a spare pair of wooden chopsticks for Cale to use and another empty bowl to put in his portion of the stew from the large pot. Choi Han watched Cale pick out his unevenly and messily chopped tofu and put it in his bowl with chopsticks on trembling fingers. Then he took another bowl and filled it up, too. They watched the way his eyes seemed to shine as he did.

 

“ha…” he paused as he continued taking from the pot and filling the two bowls. “happy… birthday to you,”

 

“!” It was… the Korean happy birthday theme.

 

A bowl slid across the table towards Choi Han in the silent kitchen, filled with stew, along with a bowl of rice. Then Cale began to eat with his chopsticks.

 

“Happy birthday… to you,”

 

The taste was— it was good. 

 

[“What’s everyone doing in our apartment?” Kim Roksoo deadpanned as he set his bag down. The entire team was in their small living room in casual clothes just lounging around.

 

“Eh~? It’s the birthday of our two youngest juniors! Of course we’re here to celebrate,” the team members laughed.

 

Choi Jungsoo came up behind him and pushed him towards the room. “Come on, let’s celebrate! Look, they brought food!”]

 

“In the earth and the universe…”

 

[“You know Miss Shin? We convinced her to help teach us how to bake a birthday cake and everyone chipped in to buy the ingredients~ This cake was made with our blood, sweat, and tears, you know?”

 

“You better eat up and enjoy it! It’s chocolate too,”

 

“Is that why the kitchen was a mess?” Kim Roksoo deadpanned once again as he sat down with a paper cup of water.

 

“Ah—! You saw that…?”

 

“Now, now, Roksoo, we’ll clean it all up,” Lee Soohyuk assured, walking in through the door with a big simmering pot of something in his hands. Both his and Choi Jungsoo’s eyes widened.

 

“Woah~!”

 

“Kimchi-jjigae…?” Even Kim Roksoo seemed pleased.]

 

“...I love you the most,” 

 

[“Ah, ah, wait. You need to sing the song first,”

 

“Do we really need to?”

 

“Of course! It’s a special occasion, so sit tight now and be patient,”

 

They all gathered around, and Choi Jungsoo and Kim Roksoo were squeezed together between everyone on the couch. The living room was totally crowded with too many people. Suddenly, Lee Soohyuk strapped a pointy colorful party hat on them both, with the polkadots and stripes and everything. He laughed when Choi Jungsoo and Kim Roksoo looked at him strangely for it.

 

“Alright! 1, 2, 3!”

 

They started clapping and singing.]

 

“More beautiful than a flower…”

 

[“Brighter than the stars!”]

 

“More courageous than the lion…”

 

[“Happy birthday to you!”]

 

He chewed the kimchi in his mouth. The thick, salty seasoned broth tasted good. The tofu was uneven, but it was still delicious.

 

[“Hey Roksoo, say ‘aah’!”

 

“I swear to god you better not get cake on my face,”

 

“Whaaaat? Now why would I do that? Close your eyes!”

 

“I’m not falling for that—”

 

Suddenly, he felt the cold sensation of sticky frosting tap his nose. It was Lee Soohyuk, who was a sneaky little bastard.

 

“Pfft— hahaha! Gotcha!”

 

“Aigooo, what a disrespectful look you have on your face,” Lee Soohyuk smirked as if he wasn’t the reason for it. ]

 

“My friend who is like a flower…”

 

[“This kimchi-jjigae is pretty good,”

 

“Ho? Wow, are you seeing this? Roksoo is smiling!”

 

“Hey, if you say that he’ll stop, you know?”

 

“Ah, no! I wanted to take a picture!”

 

“I prefer this more than the cake,” Kim Roksoo admitted.

 

“Really, now? This hyung is glad to hear that, since I made it after all,” Lee Soohyuk smiled at him.

 

“Hey, it was a team effort,”

 

“...Mostly done by the team Leader. But we worked hard on that cake!”

 

“Oi, Roksoo, are you adding more gochujang to that? You’re gonna get sick or something! We already added like a whole tub!”]

 

“...May you have longevity,”

 

“...Cale-nim,” Choi Han was… Speaking beside him. Yes, it was a real voice and not from his records. His voice was shaking a little. "You're crying,”

 

“...ah.” he let go of his chopsticks and brought a finger to the side of his face. There were tears trailing down his cheek, before falling to the floor. “...”

 

Drip. drip. 

 

Even Ron, who was next to him, seemed stunned into silence and uncertainty. Cale wiped his eyes, but they wouldn't stop flowing and stinging.

 

It was hard to eat because his throat felt so tight.

 

[“Happy birthday to you, happy birthday to you…”]

 

[“Roksoo, did you make a wish?”]

 

His jaw also hurt when he chewed, and there was dull pain ebbing from his head, again.

 

[“In the earth and whole universe…”]

 

[“I want to retire early and slack off,”

 

“Ha… You say that all the time!” Choi Jungsoo laughed.

 

“It’s not a bad goal. Being alive is the best, but living well is even better,” Lee Soohyuk said as he ate some marinated fried chicken they’d picked up on the way home.]

 

Why is it that he can’t stop crying?

 

[“...I love you the most,”]

 

[“Well, for me, I’d wish for the same thing, I guess. I want god to drop a giant bag of money from the sky next time instead of a monster. How about that? Then I’ll buy the entire mountain and recultivate it like a webnovel MC, and eat expensive steak for the rest of my life,”

 

“Roksoo sure is rubbing off on you,”

 

“Ehhh? He is, isn't he? What if tomorrow I start drinking americanos and reading webnovels in one sitting?”

 

“Huh? What kind of descriptor is that?”

 

“Ahhh, whatever. We should start cleaning up soon. It’s getting late, the rest of the team just texted us good night an hour ago,”]

 

The rice was dug into halfway, and Cale gripped his chopsticks tightly as he silently sat, listening to the voices of Choi Jungsoo and Lee Soohyuk that felt so close, as if they were right next to him.

 

[“More beautiful than a flower, brighter than the stars,”]

 

[“Kim Roksoo, get off your phone already. It’s your turn, so go take a hot shower and go to bed,”

 

“Mn, yeah,”

 

“Aigooo, this punk is never going to listen to me, hm?”

 

“Alright, alright,” he sighed. “Where’s Choi Jungsoo?”

 

“Fast asleep on the couch over there like a puppy,” he chuckled. “You should hurry up and sleep too, you know. There’s still work tomorrow.”

 

“Haa… yeah,”

 

Lee Soohyuk watched him for a bit longer, before the corners of his lips lifted into a light, fond smile. “You looked really happy today,” 

 

“Huh?”

 

“Your expression is always neutral and grouchy, but I could tell you were happy today. Weren’t you, you little punk? Hm?” he chuckled, before tossing Kim Roksoo his towel. “I hope that in the future, you’ll always have someone to make you smile like that,”]

 

“....soohyuk-ah,” he mumbled, lower than a whisper to a person who won’t reply.

 

[“Happy birthday to you, happy birthday to you,”]

 

[“What are you talking about?” Kim Roksoo replied. “Are you and Choi Jungsoo going anywhere? Don’t talk so ominously like that,”

 

Lee Soohyuk blinked at him from where he stood with a red towel over his hair and laughed. “Right, right,” he nodded with a smile. “Your hyungs…”]

 

[“My friend who is like a flower…”]

 

[His voice rang clearest amid the choir of song.

 

“...Will always be here with you,”]

 

[“...May you have longevity,”]

 

[A thousand voices echo in warm tones.]

 

“I’m—” the words slipped out just like that, without Cale being able to control it. It was a realization that should’ve been obvious from the start, but was dawning on him at that moment where he sat. “...i’m scared.”

 

Beacrox’s eyes widened, the most surprise he’s ever seen from him. 

 

All of his fears and grievances aired out, as the sea enveloped him once again.

 

[“Weak human, you’re making that expression again!”]

 

[“Haaa, you’re driving me nuts, dongsaeng…”]

 

[“Cale-nim!”]

 

[“You really worried your poor father, here. Please be more cautious and take care of yourself,”]

 

Years of grit, of survival. He’d made a promise to live, and that was the only reason he did. He had more reasons now— so much that he couldn't even count them on his fingers, recorded in his mind. It felt as if he had lived and survived every single event just to come to the current present that he cherished.

 

All those moments, they would really come to an end just like that.

 

[“Orabuni, you’re here! Are you going to watch over me train, again?”]

 

[“Wha? Are your ancient powers speaking to you…? That still doesn’t make sense to me, but sure! Here, friend, have a drink!”]

 

[“These blueprints…! They’re remarkable. Fireworks, are they? You really are brilliant, young master-nim, I don’t know how you came up with this,”]

 

[“Near an ear— a ier-ly— agh! Almost got it…”]

 

[“Cale-nya, hurry and wake up~ Grandpa Ron said he’ll server you lemon tea, you know,”]

 

[“Wow~! I really like painting with watercolors. See? It’s you! Do you like it? I tried to remember what it looked like when you were cooking, hehe~”]

 

Kim Roksoo, who survived every single thing, who always made it out battered but alive through everything, even if everyone else fell behind— It was now his turn to be the one who left everyone behind.

 

The tears wouldn’t stop as the records played, over and over. “...i don’t want to—” he stuttered. “...i don’t want to die,”

 

[“Young master silver shield!”]

 

[“...You should know we’re all glad you came to this world.”]

 

[“So then that means the person who fed us that day was you, right?”]

 

[“I like happy endings.”]

 

[“Thanks, Cale,”]

 

Would it hurt?

 

Dying. Would it hurt?

 

It was a ridiculous question. Of course it would. He hated pain, but even that couldn’t be helped. He should know, he’s come so close to death so many times already. He expected that much.

 

I’m afraid.

 

Will it hurt, Choi Jungsoo? Lee Soohyuk?

 

Cale found himself asking that question, to nobody in particular.

 

He wished he was there to tell him. He wished he were there to laugh or crack a morbid joke and say something stupid or clearly untrue, like that it won’t, or that it would only sting as much as a needle, or that it couldn’t be worse than getting beat up for screwing up that mission with the juniper guild. That they’ve been through worse. 

 

[“No one here will hurt you, Roksoo,”]

 

Records of comforting words of the past started playing involuntarily. He felt like he was drowning again.

 

When Cale came to his senses, someone was hugging him.

 

“Choi… han?”

 

“...yes,”

 

He sounded like he’d also been crying. Cale couldn’t see his face. 

 

“...” Cale’s hands hovered uselessly over his back, unsure how to respond. He was hugging him so tightly that he felt like he wouldn’t even be able to move.

 

[“For that I’ve always been grateful,”]

 

“Don’t… cry,” he managed to say, awkwardly patting his back. He eyed the unfinished bowl of food over his shoulder. “You punk,”

 

It wasn’t even him who was dying, or recalling all these useless memories. So he should stop.

 

“You won’t die.” Cale tensed up a little. “You won’t. I promise, you won’t.”

 

“…”

 

It was weird and unfair how reassuring those words sounded at the moment. Cale exhaled and just slumped over in Choi Han’s tight and awkward hold, and closed his eyes.

 

When the sun rose, and light trickled past the curtains and flooded the room, Cale was asleep, with his tears slowly drying. 

Notes:

The Korean happy birthday song is so sweet TwT Also yeah Choi Han still managed to dent his cutting board. Beacrox is not happy.

I'm in a rush ahhh so I can't leave a lot of notes. Thanks for the support as always!

Chapter 13: well-wishes and prayers.

Summary:

Cale is still sick, and everyone is trying their best.

Notes:

Can I just say I was absolutely flabbergasted by the barrage of comments last chapter like holy frick. Y'all really do like angst and apparently last chapter hurt. Don't worry you'll get a lotta that later.

Shoutout do Dark_Starbright lol this one is unfortunately not really that angsty, pretty fluffy (welcome to the comfort segment) (maybe not next chapter though) but eh. I sat down for so long my butt is literally burning. Have fun kids :) It feels a little rushed but honestly I really wanted to upload this soon ajsajksakj. hopefully it doesn't feel weird but um, for authenticity's sake I was feeling slightly unwell while writing this. Hurray! have fun kids.

Warning: Author is very bad at taking care of herself so there may be inaccuracies about caring for sick people here. have fun regardless!

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Cale had been asleep for the entire day. Mn, maybe more like he’d been in and out of sleep for a while.

 

Choi Han had helped carry him back to his room and onto his bed, and then carried the half-asleep kids out so Cale wouldn’t be disturbed and so that they wouldn't risk the kids also getting sick in case it was contagious. His fever went down a few hours after he fell asleep, and now he was resting mostly peacefully, with Ron watching over him while the rest of them gathered in the common area to talk.

 

“Young master Cale is sick?” Rosalyn’s eyes widened in concern.

 

Alberu, who had come over for sword training lessons, was met with quite the surprise. “Mn, I had a hunch— so he really hadn’t been feeling well, huh?”

 

“Will the human be okay!?” Raon exclaimed. He’d been restless since he woke up that morning and found out about it. “What if he got cursed!?”

 

“We could ask Cage about it,” On suggested.

 

“Saint Jack-nim had a look at him earlier, it wasn’t a curse,” Beacrox replied. “More… concerningly, he…”

 

Beacrox and Choi Han then explained what happened, with Cale's delirium and the state they found him in the night before. On, who was practically the sharpest in the room, seemed to have caught on first in regards to the idea that it may have been caused by Cale's ability in some way, since he'd explained it to them in more detail back at Amiru's. Alberu seemed to pick up on it himself after seeing the look on her face and the way she whispered to her dongsaengs.

 

“I don’t want to die.”

 

Choi Han remembered those words, ringing clearly in his mind over and over again. 

 

He’d never seen Cale look so vulnerable.

 

Not even when he was younger as Kim Roksoo in the indignity test, not even in the millions of times he’s gotten himself hurt, not even after he stabbed himself or when he used Instant for the first time in his current body— he felt it was even worse than the first time he’s ever cried after waking up. At that time, he thought his heart might shatter, but the night before when he heard him mumble those words while crying, it really did.

 

Thinking about it now, the reason he said those words... It might've been because he recalled some moments in his life where he was close to death or in danger. Choi Han hated that there were so many different instances that could have fit that category.

 

Now that everyone had an idea of Cale’s condition, as well as his supposed delirium, they sat down and started brainstorming every possible way they could take care of him. Rosalyn, Glenn, and Eruhaben quietly cast a dozen different charms and spells in his room, from temperature regulation, protective charms, even mental protection, if it could ease his nightmares just a little bit. Jack researched the kinds of things he could do with his healing powers in the library to see if he could ease Cale’s illness any more than he already has, and Beacrox went to the kitchen to get to work on some proper meals that were easy to stomach for a sick person.

 

Since everyone was quite worried about him but were also somewhat busy, they decided to do rotation schedules where one or a few people would watch over Cale at a time, since there was no telling what he might end up doing if he ever woke up. He stumbled out of bed and nearly passed out in the hall last time, after all.

 

So with tons of medicine, spells, blessings, meals, and soggy apple pies at the ready, everyone waited.

 

 

Cale’s eyes slowly fluttered open in small, slow blinks. He turned to his side and stared off for a while, as if his mind was trying to make sense of where he was.

 

Ron pressed his hand against his forehead, and Cale quietly leaned in. It was still quite warm, but the medicine he’s taken the night before seemed to have helped bring down his temperature. He also looked like he was in less pain, fortunately.

 

“Good morning, young master-nim,”

 

“Mn…” he groaned.

 

“I ask that you please stay awake, just for a moment,” he said as he opened the small jar of medicine from his bedside. “You’ll need to take your medicine if you’d like to feel better,”

 

Cale stared up at him for a while, before speaking. “...Ron?”

 

“Yes,” he smiled benignly. 

 

“...” he just kept staring at his face with a dazed and exhausted expression. Ron helped him sit up against the headboard, and Cale reluctantly complied, before erupting into a fit of coughs. “W-Water…”

 

Ron brought a cup of tea to his lips, and he took careful sips. The tea was at a warmer temperature now, but not enough to feel like it had gone cold. Cale blinked as he stared at the cup that was placed back on the nightstand. “...it’s sweet,”

 

He smiled. “Indeed it is,”

 

“It’s not lemonade?”

 

“No, young master-nim,” he smiled benignly. “Since you seem so fond of lemons, however, I’ve taken to using lemon sugar cubes,”

 

“...” Cale was now frowning up at Ron as if he had taken offense, and the old butler chuckled at his puppy-like reaction. At that moment, Cale sneezed.

 

“It’s time to take your medicine now,” he said, wiping his nose with a handkerchief. It was a bit red. Despite the fact that Ron called Cale a puppy young master, he sneezed like a kitten.

 

“M’dizzy…”

 

“Yes, of course. You’ll be able to rest again right after this, so please do this old butler a favor. This medicine will help make your headache better, as well,” He placed a pill in Cale’s palm, and prepared a cool glass of water, at a temperature that was just slightly colder than normal to adhere to Cale’s usual preferences. He stared down at the pill and swallowed it, before drinking the water that Ron held up for him.

 

“How about a meal, young master-nim?” Ron suggested. “My son made you chicken soup,”

 

“Beacrox…?”

 

“Yes,”

 

“...” He stared at the bowl Ron held, contemplating. “...just a little,” 

 

Ron smiled. “Yes, of course,”

 

He ate in small portions, one spoon at a time, with Ron’s help. Fortunately, it seemed like Cale liked the soup quite a bit, and it didn’t seem too difficult for him to stomach. He even managed to have a few apple slices.

 

“These slices were cut by On,” Ron said as he broke them off into smaller, more bite-sized portions for Cale to have. “Everyone is quite worried about you,”

 

“...” He was staring off, again.

 

“Young master-nim?”

 

“...”

 

It didn’t seem like he was thinking of something unpleasant, but his lack of a response and hazy eyes was still worrying. Ron held his hand. “Where are you right now, young master-nim?”

 

He seemed to reach slightly to the touch as he looked ahead, thoughtful. Finally, Cale spoke in a tiny, almost unhearable voice. “....mom.” 

 

Ron’s eyes widened.

 

…Jour?

 

He’s never heard Cale bring up the topic of his mother in so long. It even felt almost taboo, as well, and in the past two years, he almost seemed somewhat indifferent about it, even when he passed by Jour’s portrait. 

 

“...your mother?” he asked carefully.

 

“...” it was like he was seeing something that Ron didn’t. “...she was nice,” he said, nearly inaudible. “i miss her.”

 

“...” Ah. If what that punk Choi Han said was correct, then he might even have gaps in his memory. “What was she like, young master-nim?”

 

“...kind,” he whispered. “she was… soft-spoken, but sometimes stern,” Cale mumbled, hands fiddling with the hem of his blanket. “...she took care of me when i was sick, just like this,” he was staring off at a shelf of books at the end of the room. “...she’d sit next to me, and read stories to lull me to sleep while… touching my head, i think.”

 

“...”

 

Cale closed his eyes. “...dad was nice, too,” 

 

‘Dad’ and ‘Mom’.

 

It wasn’t very often that Ron heard Jour or Deruth be referred to that way. In fact, he was sure that Cale, even when he was younger, only ever referred to Deruth as father. Perhaps papa when he was very small, but never ‘dad’, as far as he could remember. As for Jour, he’d often refer to her as ‘mother’, though there was a time where he’d call her ‘mama’ or ‘mommy’ when he was much smaller. 

 

Even stranger, the descriptions seemed… off. The late countess was a kind, albeit slightly eccentric woman, however neither Ron or anyone in the household would choose to describe her as soft-spoken— she was the boldest individual in the then-county. 

 

Cale also spoke of both of his parents as if they were long gone.

 

He was starting to sweat a bit, so Ron pressed his hand against his forehead, again. It had gotten slightly hotter. He helped Cale lay down, and pressed a wet cloth on his head. He closed his eyes.

 

“Ron,”

 

“Yes?”

 

He peeked one of his eyes out to peer up at him, for a while. “...what would you do if…” he hesitated, before closing his eyes. “I was a transmigrator?”

 

Ah.

 

He stopped midway from filling a glass of water from a jug.

 

“...” A few seconds of silence ticked by. “...I’m not sure, young master-nim,” he spoke, placing a glass of cool water on the bedside.

 

So it was that.

 

“Would you get rid of me?”

 

A transmigrator. A term used in holy scriptures and divine history to describe the change from one state of existence to another. 

 

“...” Ron sat on the stool beside Cale. He had asked that question with such a casual tone, as if he was asking him what type of tea he liked making most. He looked down at the person that slept on the plush bed. “...when?”

 

Even though Cale himself phrased it as a hypothetical, he replied without asking Ron about it. “Around… choi han.” 

 

When the punk was brought back. So it was all that time.

 

It should’ve been obvious. Even if Cale Henituse was a more complicated person than he was letting on, he couldn’t have changed so much so suddenly.

 

“...I see.”

 

Cale still seemed like he was waiting for an answer.

 

“I would not.”

 

How could he, after everything?

 

Even if it was a stranger in Cale’s body now, he was the one who Ron grew indebted to. He was the one who Ron grew to cherish, as well.

 

“...i’m sorry.”

 

The apology was whispered in a small voice that only Ron could hear. It seemed that his young master had a habit of apologizing when he was sick, whether it was necessary or not. Knowing the person he’d been serving for these past two years, Ron was certain that the current Cale would not have taken someone else’s body of his own volition unless it was absolutely necessary. 

 

“And…” he trailed off, as if he was slowly falling asleep. “...he’s also living well.”

 

Ah.

 

So that puppy young master, he was living happily, elsewhere?

 

Ron wondered if he was still picky about his food, or if he still drank to his heart’s content. He wondered what kind of people he found, or if he was finally living freely where he was.

 

Cale was asleep, now. He pushed a few strands of hair out of his face and fixed his blanket. “Rest well, young master-nim,”

 

Right now, in this lifetime, the person he served was the one that slept before him.

 

 

Ron had been acting a bit strange since leaving Cale’s room. No one was particularly sure what happened, but he had silently headed for his room. Though he was smiling benignly like always, they noticed he seemed strangely sorrowful.

 

Cale had already eaten. Rosalyn flipped through a few books from the sofa in Cale’s room, glancing up a few times in worry at the sleeping young master. He seemed peaceful— Choi Han had mentioned him getting nightmares when he was sick in addition to his delirium. That was why everyone was so eager to watch over him to ensure he was resting properly and could receive consolation when he needed it.

 

She watched Choi Han sit on a stool next to Cale with his arms crossed, and his eyes closed. He supposed it was a skill only a swordmaster could have, sleeping while sitting up. Even so, it seemed like the slightest movement could wake him immediately.

 

Lock had contacted Pendrick and went out to fetch some herbs that supposedly could ward off nightmares. From her knowledge and research, there was some truth in that statement— it was a herb that could help calm a restless mind, so it could also extend to nightmares.

 

Crown prince Alberu was seated in a different chair across from him, polishing his spear while absentmindedly flipping through and sorting the books that Cale had in his shelf. He seemed worried, too.

 

It was difficult not to, when they recalled the words he’d spoken when he was with Ron, Beacrox, and Choi Han.

 

“I’m scared. I don’t want to die,”

 

Even Choi Han’s voice quivered as he recited those words he heard in a low whisper.

 

Everyone’s been on edge since they heard it. It seemed so… unfathomable. Cale was a pillar of strength, to everyone. Someone dependable, kind, and powerful. He still was, even now, but when Rosalyn laid eyes on him when she walked in the room, all doubt disappeared from her mind. The person who was sleeping in that bed seemed like someone she needed to protect.

 

There were about a dozen different spells and charms cast within Cale’s bedroom. Two by dragons, another by Glenn and the last by her. The presence of mana was strong, but careful as not to be suffocating. Needless to say, anyone who tried to approach Cale with ill-intentions would die immediately.

 

“Mn…” All three of them jolted at once. Choi Han, who’s eyes were closed, flew wide open as he straightened up, and Alberu immediately turned to face the bedside. Roalyn herself was already on her feet.

 

“Young master Ca—”

 

“Director Ma you goddamn bastard,” 

 

 

“Pardon?”

 

Choi Han looked as if he had malfunctioned like a jammed cog as he stared at Cale. The redhead whined with the sourest, most annoyed frown on his face.

 

“You damn bastard,” he reiterated in a slurred voice. “You better… watch yourself…”

 

Rosalyn covered her mouth. No, she was a cool-headed, rational and efficient archmage. She was going to be the future tower master. She was a cool-headed, rational and efficient, serious archmage—

 

“I’ll change your laptop’s password you goddamn—” his sentence was followed by a string of… very strange and unintelligible but angry-sounding syllables.

 

Choi Han blinked a few times. “W-Was that Russian…?”

 

Alberu turned to him. “What’s a Russian?”

 

Either way, Cale was now whining half-conscious about a director, and a few names Rosalyn didn’t recognize while cursing quite a bit. Now she shouldn’t say this about someone who was sick, and especially not someone who was delirious, but really, it was quite cute. And also funny. 

 

Eventually, Choi Han brought him some water from his bedside. After a drink, he seemed to have slipped into a state of clarity and stopped cursing, just staring up at the ceiling with a neutral expression. Rosalyn, Alberu, and Choi Han were sitting beside him by this point.

 

“What time is it…?”

 

“Ten in the morning,” Alberu replied. 

 

Cale turned his head towards the crown prince, looking confused. “Your highness…?”

 

“Call me hyung,” he smiled in the usual sun-like way. “I was here for training, and you got sick.”

 

“...” He stared at him again, dazed. “Did you… eat?”

 

“Hm?”

 

“Breakfast.”

 

He blinked, before sighing. “I did,” Alberu replied. “Did you?”

 

“...soup.”

 

“I see,”

 

“Lunch is coming up,” Rosalyn said. “Sir Beacrox said he was preparing something in the kitchen. Would you like anything, young master-nim?”

 

It was very important for a sick person to be well-nourished, especially since their appetite would usually be low. Having meals on time and taking proper rest and taking medicine was key to a smooth recovery. 

 

Cale stared off, again, in his thousand-yard gaze directed at nowhere in particular, before speaking in a small mumble. “...soup,”

 

“Hm?” 

 

“Seaweed… soup.”

 

The three were silent for a while as they sat. “Huh?”

 

“I want…” he trailed off. “Sea… weed soup.”

 

“...Ah,” Choi Han gasped. Was this another dish from his world, again? It was fascinating how much the young master-nim was fond of them.

 

“With… beef,”

 

“Beef?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“Yes, yes, we’ll get you beef as well,” Alberu nodded, looking at Choi Han. If anyone had a clue what Cale wanted, it was probably him. 

 

Choi Han was sitting there. Looking like he was thinking quite hard, before nodding in a determined manner. “Yes, of course Cale-nim. You’ll have seaweed soup for lunch,”

 

“M’kay…”

 

Choi Han then got up quickly and quietly shut the door behind him as he ran down the hall, leaving the two of them to watch over Cale.

 

“Hyung-nim,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“Why are there so many blankets on me?”

 

“Well…” Cale was swamped in layers upon layers of blankets, numbering about five, if Rosalyn remembered correctly. This was because everyone had brought him one when they heard he could get cold while he was sick, and really it was fine to be like this just to be safe. “Because it’s winter.”

 

“Okay…” Cale sighed, before staring at Alberu again. “Hyung-nim,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“I want a golden plaque.”

 

Crown prince Alberu Crossman was stunned into silence at the casual request. He sat there for a while, before rubbing his temples and sighing, yet again, as if it couldn’t be helped. “Really, you… Haa… you’re driving me nuts,” he frowned. “You can ask me for one when you’re better,”

 

“...fine.”

 

“What do you even want to buy with it?”

 

“A… house,”

 

Rosalyn and Alberu both blinked, looking at each other at the same time. “A house?” Cale just nodded back.

 

“But don’t you already have, like, five?” 

 

“I want to buy five more,”

 

“Five more?”

 

“Yes,”

 

“You’re saying crazy things because you’re sick,”

 

“I’m not crazy, I want to buy houses,”

 

“For what?”

 

“Why wouldn’t you want a house?”

 

“Haaa…” Even when he was sick, Cale was very good at talking. Rosalyn chuckled a little to herself. “You can ask me again when you aren't lying sick in bed, dongsaeng,”

 

“Mn…”

 

Really, it was quite an endearing sight.

 

 

Beacrox flipped through the neatly clipped paper pages of handwritten recipes. “It’s not here,”

 

“What?”

 

“Young master Cale never gave me a recipe for this seaweed soup,”

 

“...Oh.” Well, that definitely wasn’t good. But they couldn’t back out now, he promised. “You don’t know how to make it?”

 

“Why the hell would I know how to make seaweed soup?”

 

Choi Han contemplated it for a moment. “Well,” he began, “Since this is a dish from my world, I’ve had it before,”

 

“No,”

 

“I know what it tastes like. Kind of,”

 

“Do you know what it’s supposed to look like? The ingredients? Do you even know the recipe?”

 

“Seaweed.” Choi Han replied. “And— um, Cale-nim wanted beef in it.”

 

Beacrox stared at him for a long time, and Choi Han stared back. Then he sighed and put on a new pair of white gloves and turned towards the counter.

 

 

Choi Han had explained a few things to Alberu regarding Cale’s illness, and how it also affected his abilities from earth— particularly Record. He’d explained to him most of the things he remembered and what to watch out for, so Alberu was quite prepared for a lot of things.

 

But probably not this.

 

“Entry #27, ‘Red Viper’. Classification rank 8, mild danger. 1,5 meters in length on average. First appearance March 10th, 6 years after the cataclysm. Hunts in small groups. Characterized by elongated snake-like appearance, red scales in varying shades, black eyes, blade-like formation on tail, and large fangs. Most notable features, venomous stinger and bite, both treatable via healing skill ranks 5 and up and developed anti-venoms. Weak point—”

 

He sounded like a textbook and it had been about an hour. He supposed he should have expected this, since he would supposedly have begun to experience spontaneous recollection of his records, but this was really unusual. It was highly informative and interesting of course, yes, though uncanny nonetheless. Rosalyn seemed to be listening quite closely while she changed the cloth resting on Cale’s head, though Alberu wasn’t sure what she thought of it.

 

Then, three more entries later, he went silent for a bit.

 

“...The mitochondria is the powerhouse of the cell,”

 

“The mito-what?”

 

“Other organelles of the cell include lysosomes, which digest unwanted materials within the cell; and the endoplasmic reticulum and the Golgi apparatus, which play important roles in the internal organization of the cell by synthesizing selected molecules and then processing, sorting, and directing them to their proper locations. In addition, plant cells contain chloroplasts, which are responsible for photosynthesis, whereby the energy of sunlight is used to convert molecules of carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) into carbohydrates—”

 

“Oh…” Rosalyn sounded intrigued. Alberu as well. Thinking about it now, Earth was much more advanced than their world, even without magic. Especially in medicine. Which poor human got torn open for them to find out things like this?

 

“Specialized organelles are a characteristic of cells of organisms known as eukaryotes. In contrast, cells of organisms known as—” Cale abruptly erupted into a fit of coughs. Rosalyn passed him a glass of water and helped him drink. 

 

“That’s enough talking out of you, just take a nap or something now,” Alberu said, while touching his hand. It felt a bit warm but not enough to be very concerning. Definitely not as bad as CHoi han had described it the night before. “You need to hurry up and get better if you want to talk my ear off. We’ll wake you up when you need to eat lunch.”

 

“‘Kay…”

 

Alberu wondered to himself as he adjusted his blankets why Choi Han was taking a while. Could it be he was helping Beacrox cook? The thought made him shiver.

 

 

Mary walked down the hall, intending to head to the young master-nim’s bedroom. She carried a few picked flowers in her hand as she did. Hannah had helped her pick them out, and they smelled quite nice. She thought about how when she was sick and being cared for by Tasha, looking at flowers helped her feel better.

 

On her path, she passed by the doors of the kitchen. They were open slightly ajar, and—

 

“It tastes off,”

 

“What do you mean it tastes off?” Beacrox sounded tremendously baffled. “This is the 4th bowl we’ve made, you punk,”

 

“And I’m telling you it tastes off,”

 

“Okay, fine, what are we missing then?”

 

“Something. It’s supposed to taste different—”

 

“What are you talking about?”

 

Oh. They were arguing. She decided to open the door slightly and enter the kitchen and see what was happening. Beacrox and Choi han turned to look at her.

 

“Ah,”

 

“Miss Mary,”

 

“May I have some water?” 

 

“Ah, yes, of course,” Beacrox nodded back with a sigh. As she poured in water from the jug on the table, she felt as if there was a tenseness in the air. Actually, it was always tense whan Choi Han and Beacrox were talking to each other, but that was besides the point.

 

They sounded like they were fighting about… soup? Oh, sick people usually drank soup. Was it for young master Cale? Perhaps they were debating over its taste. “I’m sure young master Cale would like anything you make for him, mister Beacrox,” 

 

It was the truth. Every time he ate Beacrox’s food, he’d always have a satisfied smile on his face. She supposed it would make sense since Beacrox himself was quite talented.

 

As she walked out the door, she thought she heard the sound of blades clashing over some voices, but perhaps they were just very enthused about their cooking process.

 

 

“Roksoo,” The voice that spoke to him was familiar.

 

“You should eat it while it's hot,” the person speaking also had a familiar, recognizable face. His expression was quite soft as he spooned rice for him from the rice cooker and into a bowl. “Mn, since it’s been a week ever since you’ve been living with me, I tried to make something nice for a change. Your… dad used to tell me you liked this.”

 

The person who sat across from Kim Roksoo on the dinner table had a tired expression on his face, but he still seemed kind, and spoke softly to the child in front of him despite his difficulty. Up until that day, they’d mostly been eating takeout or microwaves convenience store food and leftovers.

 

A steaming plate of omurice sat on top of the table in front of him. The omelet seemed a little overcooked on one side and kind of deformed. There was ketchup drizzled on top, and it seemed like the person had tried to draw something cute, but failed.

 

There was also some fresh juice, and a few sweets from the convenience store for them to share. The person who made this dinner set-up tried his best.

 

His uncle smiled. “Let’s eat now, okay?”

 

Cale hated this record.

 

It wasn’t because this current version of his uncle in his memory was a fake, or that this kindness was insincere or a farce. It wasn’t because he disliked the food, or thought he hadn’t tried enough.

 

“...Okay.”

 

Even the child version of him, who had just lost his parents, smiled in this record.

 

Cale hated this record because it was the one thing that stopped him from resenting his uncle. When he thought about his uncle, even as a child and until now, he couldn’t even bring himself to curse his name because he would think of this memory, as well as many other memories.

 

He hated it because his uncle used to be a kind person, and he hated the feeling of betrayal that came with the record. He hated it because in some ways, it was partly his fault, as it turned out, that his uncle ended up the way he did.

 

The taste of the warm rice and the salty omelet was fresh on his mind, and so was the sweet orange juice. The person who made it put a lot of effort into it.

 

He wished he could bury this record, forever.

 

 

“...ale. Cale.”

 

He felt someone slightly shaking his shoulder and opened his eyes. Alberu was looking at him, and his expression looked a little concerned when he stared back.

 

“It’s time to eat your lunch,” he said. “Beacrox and Choi Han brought that seaweed soup you said you wanted.”

 

“Seaweed… soup?” oh, right. He did kind of ask for that.

 

“...You look a bit troubled,” he asked, seeming kind of worried. “Are you alright?”

 

“...” Cale thought about it for a while. “...A dream.”

 

“...Oh.” He passed Cale some water. “The unpleasant kind?”

 

He stared into his reflection on the surface of the water, whirling within the glass cup. “I’m…” he trailed off. “...I’m not sure.”

 

Beacrox came in a few seconds later, carrying a warm bowl of seaweed soup, along with Choi Han. They set up a table for him on his bed, which felt a little unnecessary, but he didn’t say anything. Cale stared at the bowl of soup in front of him.

 

It looked kind of authentic. Though he didn’t remember giving Beacrox the recipe for it. Looking up, Choi Han and Beacrox stood at a distance, but seemed like they were greatly anticipating his reaction.

 

“...it looks good.” he stirred it, and lifted up a spoonful. The texture seemed relatively the same, it also had sesame seeds in it. Cale blew on it before putting the spoon in his mouth.

 

It was slippery, and salty. He could also feel the small sesame seeds rolling around in his mouth as he chewed.

 

[“Aigoo, we told you not to overdo it, you punk,” Lee Soohyuk sighed as he entered the room, carrying a bowl of soup. The arm aroma filled the air. Kim Roksoo, who was sitting on the bed, sneezed into his tissue and looked up helplessly. 

 

A second later, the front door opened accompanied by the sounds of key turning. “I’m back~” Choi Jungsoo’s cheery voice sounded from the living room. “I got the medicine from the store, and some snacks, and a popsicle,”

 

“A popsicle?”

 

“It's good for blood sugar. Mom used to make me some herself with fruits, helps with congestion too,” he replied. 

 

“Did you get the compress?”

 

“I did, yeah,”

 

Kim Roksoo stared down at the warm bowl that Lee Soohyuk placed into his hands, sitting on top of the blankets. He made good seaweed soup— they actually had it often, particularly when he or Choi Jungsoo got sick, and on birthdays and slightly special occasions.

 

“Hey, don’t blow on your food, you punk,”

 

“Why not…?”

 

“My mom used to scold me about it a lot, you know,” He said, sitting down on a chair next to the bed. “She’d tell me it gets carbon dioxide on your food, and that it isn’t good, and also germs or something,”

 

“What do you do if it’s hot then?” Choi Jungsoo asked.

 

“Just wait it out,” he shrugged. “So? How’s it taste?”

 

“...Slippery.”]

 

“Cale?”

 

“...” He blinked and sighed. “It’s… a little different,” he mumbled. Cale thought he saw Beacrox’s expression waver. “But it still tastes good,” he added. “I guess it would since Beacrox was the one who made it,”

 

If the need be, he’d even eat slop if Beacrox was the one who made it. He continued eating the soup feeling quite pleased. The beef was also quite tender, and it paired well with the rice.

 

[“Kim Roksoo, say ‘ahhh’,”

 

“What are you doing?”

 

“Helping a sick person,”

 

“I can eat fine on my own, you know,” Kim Roksoo sighed as he gulped down more water from his bedside. “What about the re—”

 

“Nope, shh, don’t think about work,” Choi Jungsoo shushed him with his index finger pressed against his lips. Kim Roksoo frowned in annoyance. ]

 

“...ha.” he chuckled to himself.

 

[“Is that syrup medicine…?”

 

“Yeah, it should help with your cough,”

 

He frowned. “I hate the syrup,”

 

“Really? Most people would prefer it over swallowing a pill or tablet, you know,”

 

“The flavor’s weird and it makes my mouth— mn, I don’t like it,”

 

Lee Soohyuk sighed. “Oh just deal with it, you punk, the team sent over some beef this morning,”

 

“Beef?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“Oh…”

 

“Everyone’s worried about you, so hurry up and get better,” He said. “Don’t think about anything else and just get proper rest and eat your meals, alright?”]

 

“Dongsaeng?”

 

Cale was smiling, all of a sudden. His expression looked really fond, and Alberu wasn’t sure of what he should say. Maybe he was remembering something nice.

 

 

Bud thought that Cale was a very strange sick person. For one, he started laughing randomly and saying scary things and cursing, completely unmprompted. It was actually kind of terrifying.

 

“Haha…”

 

God, he’s doing it again. He shivered. Just a minute ago he’d threatened some unfortunate person about moving everything in their office two centimeters to the left and chucking all their legal documents out of a window. It seemed very oddly specific but still scary regardless.

 

“Bud,”

 

“Y-Yes?”

 

“Have you ever beaten anyone up with a rock before?”

 

“With— with a rock?”

 

“Yes,”

 

He was suddenly reminded of one of Cale’s ancient powers, which could control rocks, levitating them and whatnot, and inched back. “...No.”

 

“It’s tiring, but very stress-relieving.”

 

What does that mean!?

 

“...Why don’t you have some water?” he suggested. Fortunately, Cale just hummed and did so, taking a glass of water from his bedside. Beacrox has told him to ask him to drink water often since it was supposedly quite important for Cale— something about it affecting his abilities. Really, just how many ancient powers did he have?

 

“Bud,”

 

“Yes?”

 

“Are you afraid of dying?”

 

What a terrifying question. “Well, it’s, uh…” he shrugged. “It’s a natural fear in my line of work as a mercenary. Even the strongest could die on a job, and there are many unprecedented dangers that could appear unexpectedly, or traps and set-ups,” he replied. “The person you said hello to the day before might not return your greeting the day after,”

 

Even as a Mercenary King, he and Glenn weren’t invincible. That was just how it is.

 

“So are you afraid?”

 

“It’s more like I’ve grown accustomed to the feeling, and can honestly expect and be prepared for anything that might happen,” he said. “I think it helps me live in the moment more, personally, and grow an appreciation for certain things,” he smiled jovially. “Like alcohol.”

 

“Hm…” Cale hummed back. “...I guess you’re right about that, living in the moment,”

 

A delirious person could ask all sorts of strange things.

 

“Are there any things you particularly appreciate, Cale?” It would make sense for Cale to understand, a little. He was always on the front lines doing ridiculously reckless things that worried everyone around him. Though it didn’t help that he had such little regard for his life, perhaps there were some feelings he and Bud shared regarding the matter.

 

“...food.” he said. “A good warm meal. I appreciate that a lot,” he paused. “And somewhere comfortable to sleep,”

 

How remarkably humble, for the son of a Duke. Though to be honest, even though Cale threw money around like they were just flimsy pieces of paper, he didn’t seem like someone who had lived comfortably for his whole life at times. He found that peculiar.

 

“I can agree with that,” 

 

Then, he went silent, again. Quietly staring off into the unreachable distance, again. Bud was curious about what that was about. Was he seeing something?

 

“...”

 

He suddenly got up and hopped off of his bed. Bud straightened. “Hey— you’re not supposed to—”

 

Cale paid him no heed, wrapping the blanket over himself as he walked towards the other end of the room, like he was reaching for something. He wouldn’t listen to whatever Bud was saying to convince him to get back on bedrest. 

 

“What are you…?” On the table, sat three piggy banks.

 

Well, they were called piggy banks, but they looked like and resembled three small but vicious children Bud could recognize. A black one in the shape of a dragon, a red one with cat ears, and another silver cat. It was, admittedly, cute.

 

Cale stood in front of the lined up piggy banks, staring at them for a long time. As Bud carefully observed him, he felt like he could begin to understand what they were saying when they talked about his million-yard gaze. His expression was empty, but he could get the strange feeling that a thousand things were racing past his eyes.

 

“...”

 

His hand reached out to touch the piggy banks, hand caressing the top of their clay heads and trailing downwards towards their noses. It was strange, he looked sorrowful, as if he had lost something precious.

 

Cale suddenly reached into his pocket, rummaging around, even opening the drawers while frowning.

 

“What are you doing?”

 

“...money,” he mumbled. “I need— why don’t I have money?”

 

Money? He was thinking about that so suddenly? He looked somewhat frustrated so Bud pulled out a few coins that he happened to have on him. Cale took three silvers, much to his dismay.

 

“...” He held it, and slowly, gently slid them into each piggy bank. He was quiet ust like that, for a while. “...where’re the kids?”

 

“The kids?”

 

“On, Hong, and Raon,” he whispered. He could see the hands that touched the piggy bank shaking a little. “Where are they?”

 

“Um, well, they’re—”

 

As if right on time, the door opened, and a black shadow immediately zipped inside at the speed of light, brushing past Bud and basically running into Cale’s arms.

 

“Weak human!” Raon exclaimed. “What are you doing?! Aren’t you sick!? You have to go to sleep and lie down on the bed!” he shouted, chubby paws pinching at Cale’s cheeks and hitting them a little as if it would knock sense back into him. 

 

“Cale-nya, you should sit down, at least~ Why are you standing up? Uncle Beacrox said Bud was watching you,” Hong, who was polymorphed, spoke, before looking at Bud. He just raised his hand in defense.

 

“Let’s get you back on bedrest, your hand is kind of warm, you know,” On chided, pushing him from behind all the way back to the other end of the room where his bed was. Cale still seemed quite dazed as he looked down at Raon, who was cradled in his arms, and On and Hong who were dragging him by the hand and pushing him forward.

 

Bud thought he saw his eyes light up and his expression of surprise soften into the greatest sense of relief he’s ever seen. He didn’t know he could wear an expression that happy.

 

He plopped down on the bed. Hong carried a tray of tea and offered it to him, while On pressed her hand on his forehead with a ‘tsk’. Raon was asking him a million different questions while scolding him about recovering properly. What fussy children.

 

“We studied all day in the library with Grandpa Eru about how to take care of sick people, you know,”

 

“So now we’re gonna take care of you and you can’t do anything about it, so just follow along, okay?”

 

“Don’t try to run away, weak human!” Raon frowned. “If you die, I’ll destroy the world and everything in it!”

 

Bud shivered. How vicious.

 

“N-No,” Cale said, slowly, patting his head. “I won’t… I’m not going to die from… a fever.”

 

“Yes, yes, that’s right! So now you have to focus on getting better, or else we’ll tell on you to Grandpa Ron!”

 

“He’ll make you bitter herbal tea with your medicine,” On threatened.

 

“And also—”

 

All of a sudden, he scooped up all three of the children into a hug. Even the kids seemed shocked by the sudden gesture. “Huh—”

 

“...”

 

On seemed quite stiff, but not necessarily uncomfortable, though her confusion was clear. Hong reluctantly hugged back with a few comforting but nevertheless awkward pats to his back, and Raon was practically buried in the embrace between them.

 

“Cale—?”

 

He fell back and basically collapsed back into the bed, dragging the three children down with him. “Woah!”

 

“Cale-nya? Hey, what are you doing?” 

 

“You can let go of us now, you know,” He didn’t.

 

“He’s asleep!” Raon exclaimed. “Shhh, he’s snoring a little…! The weak human is very strange today, he really must be sick,”

 

“I guess this is okay…”

 

“Dongsaeng, can you get the blanket?”

 

“Okay!”

 

Bud carefully stepped out of the room and closed it behind him. It seemed like he didn’t need to be there anymore, since the children were very capable and could handle it on their own.

 

He didn’t think Cale could be such an affectionate person.

 

 

“Human, do you remember this? It’s the portrait that the artist drew during our outing! Look at it!” Raon enthusiastically showed the drawing to Cale. 

 

“Hm…” he hummed back, before nodding. “I do,”

 

“How about this book? You read it to us last week, remember?” Hong asked, holding up a children’s story book with a picture of a little boy etched into the cover. Cale nodded back.

 

“Cale, open up’.”

 

“I can eat by myself,” 

 

“You eat slowly,” On retorted as she picked up a spoon, just after reaching from a bowl of dried fruits. “Don’t lift a finger, okay?”

 

“Mn… okay,”

 

Cale’s room was quite lively, now. Alberu, who was still at the Super Rock Villa, sat there next to them. Mary was also on the sofa arranging a bouquet from flowers she picked out from Eruhaben’s lab. 

 

“After the meal, you should drink this potion,” Eruhaben said, placing a bottle onto the bedside table. His room was quite crowded with all sorts of things, now. “It helps with congestion and digestive problems,”

 

“Is it bitter…?”

 

“Aigoo, you unlucky punk,” he sighed. “You can’t be picky, but no, it’s sweetened,”

 

“Oh? Medicinal potions are usually bitter or tasteless, though,” Alberu commented.

 

“Yes, well, those are most human potions. It wasn’t anything that was difficult for me to alter,” he replied.

 

Cale nodded with a satisfied expression on his face. “Dragons are really the best,”

 

“Ho,” the ancient dragon seemed quite amused by the sentiment.

 

“Cale, what’s that?” Hong asked, pointing to the booklet on his lap. 

 

“An estate catalogue?” On read aloud.

 

“Hm?” Choi han sounded confused.

 

Cale flipped it open. “Something like that,”

 

“Oh, really?” Hong seemed just as curious as he leaned in to get a closer look. “Are you going to buy another house~?”

 

He shrugged. “Maybe. I just got curious,”

 

“Just got curious, huh?” Alberu sighed. Cale simply smiled at him.

 

“So about that golden plaque, hyung-nim?”

 

“Haa… seriously, you’re driving me nuts,” 

 

Raon pointed his claw at one particular house. “This one looks good, human!”

 

Cale hummed. “Why do you think so?”

 

“It has a nice garden! The roses are pretty,” Raon replied.

 

“Oh~ And look, this one’s got a hatch on the roof. It could open up so we could stargaze. I bet it would be really nice to nap up there!”

 

On nodded, looking closer while she chewed on some dried fruits. “It says here the hatch is in the attic, so we could set up a comfy space up there, right? We could put in lots of pillows, some cookies, books…”

 

“Oh! Let’s get the chocolate chip ones like the ones that cookie prince has! And we can look at stars at night, right?”

 

“I can send you the cookies, then,” Alberu spoke from where he sat with a small smile.

 

“Hm, Choi Han, what would you want in a new house?”

 

“I already like this house already,” he admitted with an innocent smile. When the kids seemed dissatisfied by that answer, he thought about it again. “Mn, well, I guess I’d like somewhere that has or is near a good training ground. With enough space for sword training and the like,”

 

“What about you, crown prince?” Hong questioned.

 

“Me?” he shrugged. “I’m a prince, you know. I already have everything I need in my palace,” he smiled in a bright, sun-like way. The kids gave him the same look as with Choi Han. “Alright, well, I guess the same as Choi Han, a proper place for training. And a comfortable workspace or study, perhaps,”

 

“I would like a house that has a nice view and a spot to sit outside and enjoy the sunlight,” Mary said. “Perhaps somewhere like a terrace or balcony,”

 

“Ooh! I like the terrace in the villa, too!”

 

“I think I would like a lab, though the one here is already more than sufficient,” Rosalyn smiled. “Maybe a greenhouse? I’ve always been curious about running experiments with mana exposure to plants.”

 

“I’d like the same,” Eruhaben nodded. 

 

“The music room was also really nice,” On added.

 

“Mn, we should get a large kitchen so that we can cook lots of good meals!”

 

“How about a swing?”

 

“I know how to set those up,” Choi Han nodded.

 

“How about a secret hidden room?”

 

“To hide loot!”

 

“Yes, a treasury is important to keep relics and valuable possessions and the like,” Rosalyn nodded. “I could set up security and defensive spells,”

 

“Oh, and a bi~g frozen pantry to store ice cream, and popsicles, and sherbert,”

 

“I like sherbert,” Mary nodded.

 

“And we can keep lots of houseplants and flowers…”

 

“Let’s ask Freesia how to make vases and pots again!”

 

“Oh, what if we also have a fountain?”

 

“Oh! And how about a house near a lake? I read in a book once…”

 

The room grew quite lively after that, with everyone chipping in with their different additions to their hypothetical house. It was an amusing conversation. Cale, who was silent the whole time just listening, smiled as he recorded all of their voices, despite the fact that he should limit his use of the power while he was sick.

 

 

It had gotten late. The sky was dark, and the moon shone through the window like a veil of light. The children were sleeping next to Cale now, softly snoring as the minutes ticked by.

 

Cale was resting on the bed with his eyes open, staring upwards in a blank gaze that seemed to stretch on for miles. Choi Han held his frail hand as he sat next to him on a stool. His fingers traced light patterns over his palm silently.

 

“Jungsoo used to do this to me with my scars,”

 

He’d trace over them with his index finger, drawing different patterns following them. He’d point out a few intersecting scratches and say ‘Ah, look, if you look at this way and complete it with a few more strokes, it’d be a star’. It was his favorite pattern, just drawing stars from the various lines etched into his skin repeatedly when he was bored. Cale would let him do it when he had nothing else to do or deep in a different webnovel in his other hand. Sometimes he’d draw stick figures, or random letters. He found half of a heart, once.

 

“I know.”

 

Choi Han continued his random tracing. It seemed like he was trying to trace lines of his scars too, but didn't know where they were, so they were just random lines, maybe. 

 

“He was annoying, and bothered me a lot,”

 

[“Hey, Roksoo~ what’re you reading this time?”]

 

[“Hey, if you keep eating stuff like that every day I’ll snitch to the team leader, you know?”]

 

[“Stay behind me, okay? Don’t go rushing in like last time. You really need to stop that— you’re rear support, remember? Let this hyung take care of it for you~”]

 

[“Overtime again? Geez, I’m really gonna kill that director…”]

 

[“Hey, have you ever seen this show before? No? There’s a salvaged recording of it posted here, you should watch it at least once! It’s real fun!”]

 

[“Roksoo~ Let’s hurry home already, I feel like collapsing,”]

 

[“Aigoo, just stay still. Stop asking me about the others— yes, me and everyone are fine. Who's the one being carried back to Headquarters here? I would complain about you being heavy but you’re really not. Light as a stack ‘a hay. No, that wasn't a compliment. Just go sleep now, we’re almost back.”]

 

[“Hey, are you okay? Breathe. In and out— yeah. You’re alright, Roksoo. You’re fine, okay? No one’s here to hurt you. Ah, you should drink. Water— drink the whole thing. Yeah, okay. You’re okay.”]

 

“I know.”

 

Cale stared at his hand, which was still being fiddled with by Choi Han. Aside from boredom, he also used to do it as a grounding technique from when Kim Roksoo got the rare panic attack, or was being swallowed by his records. It had a familiar effect that would pull him back down to earth.

 

“He talks a lot.”

 

“I know.”

 

“He keeps making fun of my taste in fantasy novels.”

 

“I know.”

 

“He drags the team leader into it, too, those bastards.”

 

“I know.”

 

“He’d never stop pestering me when I’m just doing my work,”

 

“I know.”

 

Cale closed his eyes. For the first time in a while, he was just met with black. “I miss him.”

 

He allowed himself to finally say the words he’s kept suppressed all time for the first time in so long. 

 

“I know.”

 

His palm was shaking in Choi Han’s hold. “I wish he’d come back.”

 

“I know.”

 

“I wish he’d… say something stupid to me.”

 

Choi Han stopped for a moment, head low as he stared down at Cale’s hand, a thumb pressing down on the surface.

 

“...I know.”

 

The night passed just like that, and for the first time all day, Cale dreamed of pleasant records.

Notes:

Kim Roksoo who rambled the randomest bs when he's sick because Record is weird like that. Also pro tip from author, keep in mind of some events in this fic. they will boomerang and hurt you later. Also don't read this (or do if you like being in pain) while listening to Clannad. Actually you know we're all here to hurt ourselves so I'm gonna drop a fic playlist sometime soon so stay tuned!

Hope this didn't come out OOC! I'll try to re-edit later if I find anything or feel less DepressedTM. Also, happy late Ides of March! Cale and Hannah would have loved stabbing.

Edit: ah yes, clarification, Kim Roksoo memorized every curse word in every language. So sometimes he spontaneously starts cursing in random languages. His team from earth made a bingo card for it. Yes, he can also curse in morse code. Can't hear? Don't worry he can sign his hatred for you too.

Chapter 14: stories.

Summary:

Cale goes on an outing by himself.

Notes:

Ahhh I'm sos sorry this came out so late TwT This chapter is a little underwhelming in terms of wordcount and plot, but it's plot-relevant, I promise! I just thought he needed a bit of time by himself to figure stuff out. Though i can, with confidence, say that next chapter probably won't be so underwhelming :)

Also, I drew some ART of the New Years' chapter! took me ages and it honestly isn't my best work but I do admit I like the lighting to some degree!!

https://www.tumblr.com/records-of-a-slacker/778409152584318976/happy-new-year-dongsaeng-chapter-11?source=share

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

A person with quite a small stature wearing a cute tuxedo with a bow tie trotted along, carrying a tray of tea. He placed it on top of the table before excusing himself with a little bow.

 

“...Huh,” Cale hummed with interest.

 

Witira smiled as she allowed the little penguin-person to pour tea for her. “As I’ve said, they make great butlers,”

 

“I see…”

 

“It’s rare to see you out without Raon-nim or Choi Han, or really anyone else in your party with you,” Witira commented as she sat across from Cale on the table. She looked slightly worried. “Mn, are you still cold? The north is very cold in this season, you see,”

 

“I’m aware,” he did try to layer up a little. A penguin butler placed yet another blanket on his shoulders. This would be the fifth blanket and counting.

 

“I’m a little worried because I heard that you caught a really bad fever,” Pasteon commented. “Are you sure you should be out and about like this, young master Cale?”

 

“I’ve healed up,” he felt sore, like a lot, and the fatigue was really getting to him now. But he could think straight and walk around like normal without feeling like collapsing or getting a migraine. “This is a secret trip,”

 

“A secret trip, hm,” Witira tilted her head, before smiling. “Ah, so this villa that you wanted to build in our territory is a surprise?”

 

He shrugged. “Something like that?”

 

Pasteon smiled. “Then we’ll make sure to put in our best effort into its construction. You can expect the best results, so rest assured,”

 

“Yes, of course,” Cale nodded in a satisfied manner. The crown prince’s golden plaque was seriously the best. Though they tried to offer it for free at first, Cale would rather not be indebted to the whales, since he wasn’t sure he’d ever have the opportunity to pay them back, and he didn’t want someone else to do it. Even when they say it was ‘in return for his help during the war’ it was really them who did a lot of the fighting during the alliance, so a fair trade was the best bet.

 

“Just to go over it again, here is the floorplan, we’ve ensured that you get the nicest view of the sea,” Witira spoke, “and also away from the Paerun kingdom.”

 

Cale nodded. Good.

 

“You should visit more often, young master-nim, you’re always welcome here,” Pasteon said. “After all, we’re indebted to you— though we’re up north it does get warmer, you know, so consider visiting, maybe next season,”

 

“Maybe,” Cale replied without much thought. He heard the voice of a certain crazy kid in his head. 

 

-This person, she’s really XXX cool! Ahh, I’ve heard a bunch of stories from the kids but she’s really a lot XXX cooler in person! I wanna fight her!

 

“Miss Witira, do you mind people who swear?”

 

“Hm?” she tilted her head. 

 

“Someone who curses a lot,”

 

She stared at Cale, which he thought was a little strange. “I don’t particularly care about manners or rudeness as long as they’re strong and capable, and a good person at heart,”

 

Pasteon glanced to the side where Archie was outside the door on guard duty. Well, Cale supposed he could make it work, right?

 

“Alright,”

 

 

Cale walked down the path of the Caro Kingdom’s bustling capital with a piece of bread in his mouth. His hair was disguised into a mud-brown that wouldn’t catch anyone’s attention, and he was dressed with a cloak. Using teleportation scrolls so often kind of made him dizzy, but he wanted to get it done as quickly as possible, so he resolved to go on his own. He was sure that if the kids or anyone else tagged along it would somehow end up causing some sort of mess.

 

So far, he’s acquired properties in nearly every major territory in the Roan kingdom, one in the Caro Kingdom’s capital, one in the whale’s territory, he’s also arranged one in the Paerun kingdom, entirely remotely via magic communication device in order to not need to even meet Clopeh Sekka. Even then he managed to make the interaction incredibly uncomfortable. He also had property located in Breck, which he already arranged with Rosalyn and the second prince a while ago, one in Mogoru, and—

 

“Hm?”

 

Oh, there was a new pastry shop opened. Cale himself had never really explored Caro that much, but the display caught his eye. They were serving a special slice of apple pie, and some sweets with dried fruits on top. He thought of On and Raon before stepping through the door.

 

The establishment had all kinds of sweets in store with interesting appearances. He chuckled to himself when he saw a hazelnut flavored cake on display and a little drawn squirrel sticking in from the top.

 

[“Haa… You’re driving me nuts,”]

 

Hong would also probably like this jam cookie, and he could get this one for Choi Han, and the other for Lily too since she might also be training with him, and Basen could use something to snack one while he’s studying…

 

Before he knew it he had a dozen bags of sweet pastries on his person. Fortunately, he had plenty of space in his spatial magic bag. Though, to seem less weird, he decided to buy one for himself and eat it at the store. 

 

“Mn…” 

 

He wasn’t particularly a fan of sweets, but they were nice. He bought himself a slice of apple pie, and thought a lot about how Raon would usually like to scold him while feeding him soggy, tear-soaked pies. Cale felt a bit bad about those instances.

 

“Did you hear about the light show that happened at the New years’ banquet in the Roan kingdom?”

 

“I did. I’m so jealous, a friend of mine decided to go to the kingdom for a trip to see her family and saw it in person! Really, it was a spectacular sight, I heard.” 

 

There were two people speaking enthusiastically about the sight of the fireworks at a different table. Cale listened as he dug into his pie.

 

“It was so bright in the night sky, like the shining sun in the middle of the day!”

 

“And there were so many colors, as well, I heard. The most marvelous sight of all though, must be…”

 

“The holy silver shield that shone in the sky!”

 

Cale choked on his pie.

 

Haaa, really… even in the middle of a different kingdom he couldn’t escape the cursed nickname. He sighed grumpily while finishing his pie.

 

“I hope they show it again next year— what were they called? Fireworks? What a marvel,”

 

Cale stopped out of the store with a sigh. Well, he supposed it was good that the fireworks came out fine and had positive reactions, but the cheer of the war that was won hadn’t died down. On the streets, he heard bards sing joyful tunes about the stories of different battles. This also unfortunately meant the name ‘young master silver shield’ was ever present. 

 

Mandolins, fiddles, flutes— all kinds of instruments would play throughout the streets. He supposed it was just how stories about heroes were spread, through song and poetry. Even though he disliked hearing fancy songs about himself, Cale supposed he could appreciate the artistry. Back on earth, a similar thing started happening when civilization was picking up the pieces left from destruction, slowly recovering step by step. Communication was worse than ever, with digital networks shut down. You couldn’t get into contact with anyone outside of your area unless you went and met them in person. Even at moments like that, people wrote songs and sang tunes as they walked down the ruined streets. New songs, old ones. There was no way to listen to music, so you’d have to make it on your own. People began sharing songs they remembered, singing and humming them, making jokes. It was one of the ways that humanity reconnected with each other even when they were facing calamities that tore them apart by the seams.

 

Lee Sooohyuk liked to sing a lot, too. He had a habit of whistling or vaguely singing to himself while he was working, and when networks were back up and karaoke places were somehow reopened, they’d always ask him to sing after a drink or two. He had a handsome and deep protagonist-like singing voice in Kim Roksoo’s records, and always sang sappy love songs like a yearning male lead, which was a funny inside joke between everyone at the company. He was also the person who got so many random annoying songs Cale had never heard stuck in his head. It was a strange side to him, but it was one Cale liked. 

 

As he recounted the sound of his sappy singing voice, Cale stumbled upon a bookstore on the side of the street. “Ah,” The sequel to the book he’d been reading was on display.

 

The bells above the store chimed as he stepped inside. It wasn’t too difficult to find the book he wanted, since it was a mostly new arrival and was nicely displayed. Cale picked it out of the shelf and flipped through it.

 

How long exactly had he liked fantasy novels for? He wasn’t too sure, it was just something that he’d picked up one day, out of interest and curiosity. Maybe his parents used to read him bedtime stories. He couldn’t really remember anymore. But the words on the page and the cliche tropes and overused archetypes were a constant, and constants were something Kim Roksoo liked. 

 

In the midst of his world being flipped upside down, over and over, in more ways than one, being able to predict ‘Ah, this character will certainly be an annoying villain who pops up often, won’t he?’ and ‘Hm, so this character might end up repparing later to help, huh?’ as well as ‘so this one will be the main love interest,’ brought him some semblance of comfort. The way the characters were always similar to each other in some way, even if it would make the stories seem like they were all the same, felt like something that would never change. Like people who wouldn’t leave.

 

Cale simply stood there, flipping through page after page as he’d done countless times before. When the shopkeeper approached him, he handed them his payment without looking up, and then found a seat somewhere in the corner of the store. 

 

It was strange, but there was an aspect of being in the body of Cale Henituse that he liked. Back when he was Kim Roksoo, for some reason he could never really fully finish stories. When he started reading webnovels, sometime in the middle of it or near the end, the author would suddenly disappear, or drop the story, or get caught in a sort of accident, or get delayed or go on hiatus. Even with an ongoing book series, the next book may never come out after he finished reading it for similar reasons. So he only started reading completed works when he noticed the strange occurrence. 

 

But even then, sometimes something would happen that prevented him from finishing it, anyway. He lost his copy, the sequels couldn’t be found anywhere or were overpriced, the work was suddenly deleted. So eventually he started feeling like he needed to quickly hurry up and finish reading the stories in one session. 

 

However, when he transmigrated, he found that he didn’t need to worry about such a thing. Even if he spent a week on a single book, reading at a snail’s pace, nothing would happen. He could leisurely keep a stack of books by his bedside, and read it a few sessions at a time every night. He could actually properly finish a story without feeling like he missed out on some part of it.

 

And so after an hour, he turned the final page, and frowned. “What a cruel cliffhanger,” It was clear that there was going to be another book in the lineup after this one. It was unfortunate, but like his days as Kim Roksoo, he wouldn’t get to read it.

 

He passed by more bookshelves on his way out, and a particular title in the biography section caught his eye. 

 

“Young Master Silver Shield Cale Henituse, A Kind of Hero Who Will Never Be Seen in the World Again”

 

He frowned a bit. That title was far too long, and the book was a little too thick. Thinking about it now, he’s never read any book of himself, mostly because it felt embarrassing to do. Aside from that, he recognized this book— it was the worn out one Dodori carried with him and liked quite a bit.

 

Cale was going to place it back when a head of familiar, eye catching poodle-like hair suddenly walked past him.

 

“...Dodori?”

 

The pink-haired dragon jolted before turning to Cale. “Who—” His eyes immediately lit up as they widened. “Young master—!”

 

“Shh!” he silenced him with his finger before he could say another word. “Don’t,”

 

He looked at Cale’s appearance, disguised with brown hair, a pair of glasses, and less flashy clothing, then nodded. “Ah… I see,” Dodori looked around, cautiously. “What are you doing here, erm…”

 

“Bob,”

 

“...Bob,” 

 

“I had something to take care of,” he replied, before glancing at the book in Dodori’s hands. He was carrying a short stack of books, and Cale recognized his name in some of them, much to his dismay. When he noticed his gaze, Dodori quickly straightened. “What are you doing suddenly in the Caro kingdom?”

 

“Ah, these books, and— ahem,” he cleared his throat once more. “There was a meeting that was happening today for the ‘Young master silver shield a Hero who will never be seen in the World again’ fanclub, or erm, YHW for short.” 

 

He blinked. “A fanclub meeting…?”

 

“It’s too bad that you just missed it, but I came here to pick up more biographies,” he smiled, before speaking animatedly. “And of course, there was also a store that opened up selling limited edition silver shield pins, and artisan who made tapestry depiction of the battle at Puzzle City, and—”

 

Cale looked around at all the people who’s gazes silently drew to this excited kid’s rambling, and sighed. “Maybe let’s get out of here first,”

 

 

Dodori bit into the meat skewers that Cale bought him from where they sat on a bench in a very hearty manner, while Cale sighed yet again. Despite his appearance that made him seem like he was around Cale’s age, this dramatic 14-year-old dragon acted just like neighborhood chunni delusional eighth-grader who wore eye patches and idolized an anime character. So the idea of just letting him wander around the world unsupervised on his own sort of bothered Cale, nevermind that he was a powerful dragon.

 

“Is your mom with you?”

 

“No,” he replied. “She’s back at home, I came here on my own,”

 

Cale wanted to ask if he was allowed to do that or if he snuck out somehow, but decided not to for his own peace of mind. “Is this fanclub meeting really so important?”

 

“Of course it is— we’re discussing the achievements of young master silver shield! ” he sounded quite firm, and his light purple eyes deepend. “You’re the greatest hero of this generation, so of course it is important that someone out there is constantly recording all of your feats,”

 

“Recording, huh…” if it was Cale, he wouldn’t bother with such a thing.

 

“Yes. We usually gather on an agreed date somewhere once every few weeks or so, and talk about things we’ve heard about you. Things like rumours, fact-checking biographies, and stuff like that. We make sure that nasty, clearly untrue and evil rumors don’t get around—” he was frowning, and Cale just hummed back.

 

“Is that an important thing?”

 

“Why wouldn’t it be? If the truth gets clouded and altered with untrue things, one day you’ll never be able to tell what the original truth was, and people might think your story was never real in the first place,” he said, deep purple eyes sparkling. “The stories of heroes should be properly recorded and preserved,” he spoke. “Your story is very important, young master-nim,”

 

He doubted it was as important as Dodori made it out to be. It wasn’t like he was the only hero on the continent, there were many other great ones too. In truth, Cale would really rather just fade into history and be forgotten. 

 

“You seem doubtful,” Dodori spoke as he licked sauce off his fingers. Cale handed him a handkerchief. “It really is important, because one day….” he trailed off, before looking at Cale. “Someone will find that story,”

 

“...” 

 

“Someone will have read it, or seen it, or heard it, and that person may have really needed to find that story,” Dodori said. “It could inspire them to do something, and it could push them to do great things, and be a great and cool person,” he smiled, somewhat pridefully. “Like me, of course,”

 

“Hm…” Cale thought about how Dodori mentioned he found the Super Rock’s story at some point in his life, and was greatly moved by the tale. He wondered what would have happened if he hadn’t found it.

 

“Which is why, we have to make sure the records are properly and correctly preserved for the person who will find it, so that they’ll have accurate information to read…” Dodori suddenly pulled out a notebook. “Such as your height. Young Master Silver Shield-nim, can I ask for your exact height, in centimeters?”

 

“...” Cale stared blankly at Dodori’s sparkling eyes, and sighed, yet again. “Don’t call me that,”

 

“Oh— Mn, right, Bob-nim,”

 

“...It’s 177 centimeters.” Dodori’s eyes widened. Even if he disagreed with the sentiment of his supposed feats being so great and that he was the ‘greatest hero on the continent’ or whatever that crap was, he knew that proper and accurate records were important for the future. History should remain history, and mistakes should not be repeated. Lessons learned should not be forgotten.

 

He scrawled notes into his book. “And what’s your history with the crown prince?”

 

“Is that really necessary?”

 

“Even the exact number of strands of your hair is necessary!”

 

“Haa…” he sighed. “Do people really want to know that much about me?”

 

“Of course they do,” Dodori replied, with little hesitation if any. “You are a very interesting person! We’ve even debated over your favorite color multiple times,” he said. “Getting to know someone, it is very important. You won’t know about things like these in the far future unless they’re written down now. Someone might really want to get to know you,”

 

“They’d want to know my favorite color?”

 

“Why wouldn’t they?”

 

“I don’t have one,”

 

“Not even one that you like to just look at?”

 

A color I like to look at? Cale hummed. Well, if it was a question like that— would it be black? Maybe also silver, and red. A deep blue, bright yellow, white, brown, or gold. He couldn’t just list an entire rainbow. “Then I like all colors,”

 

“All colors?”

 

“It's too bothersome to pick,”

 

“Oh… I see, then,” he nodded. “I can’t believe Greta won that bet…”

 

“What?”

 

Dodori then asked a bunch of other things. Very peculiar and specific things, while scribbling into his notebook with a pencil that even went dull a few times. He seemed so focused and serious that it was a little silly. The stack of meat skewers that Cale bought for him eventually ran out.

 

“Biographies don’t allow you to be forgotten,” Dodori had said. “You are a great and amazing hero, so I won’t let you be forgotten, even after time marches on,” he spoke, in a deeply dramatic voice. “And I’m sure a lot of people wish the same thing. I don’t want to be forgotten either, which is why in the future when I become a great, cool, and famous existence, I’ll have lots of biographies written about me and write plenty of detailed autobiographies myself,”

 

Maybe Cale didn’t really understand it because he was unable to forget about anything, even if he tried his hardest. Not people, or memories. 

 

Dodori was kind of weird, but he was a good kid. Would more people be like him if they read about the stories of heroes the same way Dodori had?

 

He wouldn’t mind it if it turned out that way.

 

 

Dodori went back on his way, and Cale was on his own again. It was late into the afternoon at that point, and the sky was bright and clear. The cool winter breeze hung in the air as patches of snow crunched under his boots. 

 

Even though he told Witira he was on a ‘secret trip’, it wasn’t really all that secretive. At most he’d just been really vague about what he’d be out doing. All he mentioned was that he was off on a trip on his own, and everyone agreed with some reluctance. He did have a curfew though, unfortunately imposed by everyone at the villa after some discussion, so he needed to be back before late. 

He recalled On’s stern expression as she lectured Cale.

 

“If anything happens, you have to get back home immediately. Don’t use your powers, don’t cough up blood, if you feel sick you have to go home, don’t forget your medicine just in case, you also have to eat. If you break your promise we’ll make you stay in bed forever—”

 

What a vicious fourteen-year-old. “Did they really need to go that far…?” It wasn’t like he was a child that could run off at any second.

 

Snow began to fall gently from the sky in small, fragile snowflakes. It wasn’t enough that you needed to head indoors, but it did get caught in your clothes and made your hair wet. He dusted bits of snow off his coat and kept walking, frosty breaths emerging from his lips in a white mist.

 

A snowflake landed on his glove, and he stopped and curiously examined it. The pattern was sharp, protruding out of the core and branching out like autumn leaves. Then, it melted away and stained his glove in a tiny puddle.

 

“...”

 

As Cale walked, he thought about a story the kids showed him and asked him to read, once.

 

There was once an old man with a young son who loved the sky. He loved its blue hue, and he loved watching the clouds and tracing their shape for hours. The young boy loved everything that came of the sky, including the rain.

 

On every occasion that it rained, the boy would run out and dance, splash around, and sing. He gazed up at the sky fondly and smiled in wide grins while saying kind words, even when it rained so hard the raindrops felt like bullets. He’d often get sick as a result, so the old man always barred him from sneaking out to play in the rain. Though again and again, the boy disobeyed his father and played in the rain.

 

One day, when the boy was caught sick once again, the old man tearfully, in frustration asked, ‘why did you play in the rain so much, even when I prohibited it? One day you will get sick and not recover. Why do you wish to sadden your father so?’

 

The little boy only smiled and replied, as he drank his warm soup, ‘The sky is crying, father. When it cries, everyone hurries inside to avoid its tears. No one stays behind to comfort the sky and cheer the sadness away. Isn’t that so sad? So I will go out even during storms to do so.’

 

Hearing the words of the sickly young boy, the sky who oversaw the whole world and has never been loved so tenderly, cried once again. Only this time, instead of water that rained like bullets, small crystal-like patterns softly fell floating down towards the ground. They were snowflakes. The little boy held his hands up to catch each one while grinning, and cried, ‘It is a gift from the sky, father! The sky is crying happy tears, because it loves us so’

 

Time passed by in flurries of snow, and one day the boy passed from sickness, just as his father feared. On the day they sought to bury him, snow fell in large amounts, enough that the body of the young boy could be blanketed in them. Even stranger, the small snowflakes were warm to the touch, like an embrace. And so he was buried under delicate snowflakes that brought warmth to his cold skin, and never melted. 

 

The old man cried. ‘Why do you cry happy tears on the day that my son passed?’

 

The sky, replying in whisper carried by the wind said ‘Because he loved me so, and I am happy’

 

And when the old man kneeled to let tears fall from his eyes, small, delicate snowflakes fell. The sky asked him, ‘Why do snowflakes fall from your eyes?’

 

The old man replied, with a smile. ‘Because I loved my son, and he was happy, and so I am happy,’

 

Then the story ended.

 

It was a story about a unique whimsical take on the origin of snowflakes. The kids happened to like the story a lot, saying it was very touching though somewhat sad, and the pictures were pretty. Cale personally didn’t like the idea of letting a little kid play around in the rain all the time until he eventually got sick and died to please some giant entity in the sky. There were also lots of plot holes and inconsistencies, like whether or not snow even existed before that point. But it was a fairytale, and they weren’t supposed to make sense anyway.

 

Though, the ending did catch his eye. It was interesting, and for some reason he was thinking about it now. Cale, who had witnessed a lot of people die, and had at some point simply stopped crying and was unable to do so, again, wondered about how people felt when they cried at funerals.

 

It must be exhausting. He thought. If crying was a way to let go of and release your feelings, then crying at funerals must truly take an intense toll, in order to let out everything that person was feeling at the moment. 

 

…Would the same be said for when his funeral inevitably comes up?

 

He didn’t want them to cry, like that. 

 

“They could get sick…”

 

Thump. 

 

Something suddenly fell in front of him. He picked it up.

 

“Ah, I’m sorry,” it was the sound of an old person. He was sitting on a bench under the shade of a building. “That book is mine, I’m afraid I dropped it.

 

He examined the book and brushed snow off of its hardcover. It seemed dated and aged, the edges of the pages torn slightly and worn out, and a little crumpled. It must’ve been used well. Cale handed it back.

 

“You seem interested in this book. Are you curious?” the elderly man smiled. “This is my journal. I’ve had it for some time, a decade or two,”

 

“Ah.” that’s a long time. No wonder it seemed so old.

 

“It was a gift. Paper was very expensive, back then,” he spoke as he flipped the pages open for Cale to see. He honestly didn’t care that much but wasn’t about to be so rude to an elderly person. “A friend of mine gifted this thick empty book to me before he left the kingdom behind, saying that I should fill it with things I liked, and then let him flip through it when I saw him again,”

 

“This is…” Cale’s eyes widened. This person seemed to be a good artist. His graphite and charcoal, even occasionally colored sketches and drawings seemed lively. They were drawings of random mundane things, like birds, buildings, occasionally people, food, along with some words written between them. “You’re very talented, sir,”

 

He laughed, and the wrinkles around his mouth stretched perfectly into a bright smile, as if they were embedded into his face. “Thank you, young man,” he replied. “They aren't much, because my life isn’t so interesting. I only drew the things I saw, and the things I did, and then wrote my experiences. I’m sure if he ever returned for it, he’d be bored to death.”

 

Not so interesting? Cale squinted down at the filled pages, scanning and reading the small passages. He seemed to live a quiet, peaceful life. It was the kind of life that Cale had always dreamed of— he was more than interested. He replied without thinking about it much. “I’m sure he’d simply be glad just to see his friend again,” 

 

The old man blinked, before smiling. “Mn, well, I suppose I feel the same. What kind words from you,” he replied. “I wish to tell him all about the boring days I’ve lived while he was gone, and then I’ll ask him about what he’d been doing.”

 

“...” He stared at the slowly turning pages. “If you knew you could just tell him all about it, why did you draw so much in this book?”

 

“Well,” he smiled. “It could be that perhaps, I won’t see him again,” 

 

“...”

 

“So I will leave behind this book for him to find, so that I would still keep my promise,” he said. “Or perhaps, someone else may find it and flip through the boring pages, and read my name and see the world I saw. Wouldn’t that be nice?” he smiled again. “Only important people tend to have stories or biographies written about them in history. This book, it would be like a record of my existence.”

 

Record of existence.

 

“...I see.” he nodded. “Then, please take care.”

 

“You as well, young man,”

 

Cale stared at the divine artifact, the book of the God of Death, which he carried with him inside his satchel, and ripped a teleportation scroll.

 

 

Alberu jolted when he heard a door open to his office, unprompted. He looked up, and really, he should have expected this person to suddenly show up. Again.

 

Cale unceremoniously and casually collapses into the sofa across from his table, slumping over and sprawling out like it was his own house after a long day. Not even a ‘Hello, your highness’ or ‘Good evening’ or ‘please excuse me’. 

 

“...Cale,”

 

“Mn, hyung-nim,”

 

He massaged his temples as Cale reached for the freshly refilled jar of cookies. “Look, when I said start using the door instead of jumping through the window, that also meant stop breaking in and, perhaps, formally request for a visit? Ask me beforehand, maybe? Talk to the guard at the front? Knock?”

 

The only thing that followed was the sound of chewing. “Mhm.”

 

He groaned. “Ha… You're driving me nuts,” Alberu clicked his tongue and directed his focus back to the mountain of paperwork. “Where have you been, anyway?”

 

“On a trip,”

 

“A trip to where?”

 

“Mn… just decided to go on a little outing on my own,” he replied as he lay down leisurely on the sofa, head resting on the pillows.

 

“Haa…” Alberu sighed yet again. “...You look tired,”

 

“I guess? It was a lot of walking,”

 

“Don’t go out and overexert yourself for no reason,”

 

“It wasn’t for no reason though?”

 

“Then what did you do while you were out?”

 

“Hm…” Cale contemplated for a moment . “I had some pastries— ah, on that note,” he sat up and pulled something out from seemingly nowhere, and placed it on the table. Alberu raised a brow. “Hazelnut cake,” he smirked as he opened up the box. On top of the cake sat a small squirrel figure. 

 

“...” Alberu was speechless. “You’re driving me—”

 

“...nuts.” Cale finished for him like a mischievous bastard before laughing and slumping back down on the sofa. He massaged his temples again. “Aside from that, I also went to a bookstore, I guess.”

 

“Hm…” Alberu hummed back. “Are you… sure you’re fine?” he questioned again. “It’s cold these days, you know. You could get sick again. It’s only been a day or two since we let you even walk out of bed.”

 

“I’m perfectly fine,” he argued back. “I’ve had all the medicine and slept a lot, I’m more than fine, actually.”

 

“You say that, but…” Alberu sighed. The dark bags under his eyes, his complexion that only seemed like it got paler by the day, the constant fatigue and his sometimes weird behavior… He felt a little paranoid. “Cale,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“You know we worry about you, right?”

 

Cale tensed a bit, as if he wasn’t expecting his sudden words. “...”

 

“If there’s something happening, you should say something. Rant about it, whine, or just say it, I don’t care.” he said. “We care about you,” Alberu paused. “Dumbass.”

 

Cale paused. “Where did you learn that?”

 

“Sealed God’s Test,”

 

“Ah,” Cale hummed awkwardly, almost as if he was feeling guilty. About what? Being a bad influence? It was too late to be guilty about that now. 

 

He watched Cale lie on his back and stare off, absentmindedly. His expression was blank for a long time as he gazed up at the ceiling, and Alberu didn’t like the thought of him being so quiet and blank for so long.

 

“You know,” he spoke. “When you were sick, you rambled a lot,”

 

“Huh? Oh,” he paused. “I guess I’ve been known to do that,”

 

“You were rambling about a bunch of things— really different things, actually,” Alberu spoke as he straightened his papers. “First you were talking about a bunch of monsters, almost like some kind of index. I’m assuming they’re from Earth. That went on for about 10 minutes. Then you talked about this thing called…” Alberu clicked his tongue, trying to remember. “Might-o-can— the might-ow-can-tree…?”

 

Cale blinked. “The mitochondria?”

 

“Yes, that,” he nodded. “It was interesting, but also really terrifying,”

 

“Why?”

 

“Exactly which human did you have to tear open to find out about all that?” 

 

“Oh,” Cale hummed. “I don’t think the process is nearly as grotesque as you’re imagining, not that I knew— I guess the things I memorized back in high school came back, huh…”

 

Alberu raised a brow. “I didn’t take you for someone studious,”

 

“Well, there wasn’t really another option,” he sighed. “I needed to do well in school, get into a decent college, then maybe land a decent job after graduating with an at least okay income with some benefits, maybe hope to retire early—”

 

Alberu wasn’t sure what exactly Cale was talking about but nodded along. “...I see.” his quill moved along the paper as he signed an approval form. “There was also this other thing, later on. You were rambling about a sort of story. I was curious about it since you fell asleep before you could finish,”

 

“What story?”

 

He smirked. “It has a shield hero,”

 

“...” Alberu tried to hold in his laugh at the expression Cale made at that moment. 

 

“No, but really, I’m quite curious about it.”

 

“What was it about?”

 

“Like I said, the hero had a shield. Hm, I believe his name started with a ‘P’? And there was something about monster with multiple snake heads.”

 

“Ah,” Cale hummed. “The myth of Perseus and Medusa— I guess I was rambling about that,”

 

“Oh, a myth?”

 

“Greek, like Theseus,”

 

“I never did learn about him either,”

 

‘It’s a long story, I’m too lazy for that,”

 

“Haaa, you’re no fun,” Alberu sighed.

 

“You’re interested in these kinds of things?” Cale asked.

 

“How could I not be interested in the culture of other worlds?” He replied.

 

He shrugged. “That’s fair,” 

 

“I’m more surprised that you like it. Mn, well, I know you like fantasy stories, but myths are kind of a different vein…”

 

“I mean, I guess I do?” Cale shrugged once more as if he was unsure himself.” They’re interesting, and also particularly outlandish. I guess that’s what makes them fascinating, people from back then came up with a lot of uniques explanations for natural occurrences,”

 

“Natural occurrences? Like what?”

 

“Like rain being the tears of a father named Daedalus after his son, Icarus, flew too close to the son while they were escaping captivity with wax wings, causing them to melt and for him to fall,”

 

“Oh…” That sounded quite… tragic.

 

“Or Demeter, goddess of the harvest, who freezes the earth over during winter because her daughter Persephone would be away in the underworld with her husband, Hades, the god of the underworld.”

 

“I’d like it if you elaborated on that, actually,” They were quite interesting.

 

“Mn, I’m too tired,” Cale replied lazily, before covering his eyes with his arm as he laid.

 

“Do you even like these myths?”

 

“Somewhat,” he shrugged. “I read them because Lee Soohyuk mentioned being casted and even growing interested in action movies for some times referencing Greek myths.” Cale said, before smiling mischievously. “Me and Choi Jungsoo read up on a few so we’d have things to tease him about.”

 

“Ha,” what annoying dongsaengs. “I’m also interested in these gods you have in those myths. Like this, mn, deity named… Zeus?”

 

“I’m pretty sure they're not real,” he paused. “...personally.” 

 

Ah, that’s right. Cale was a stubborn atheist. It didn’t matter if he personally cursed out deities himself, he would still deny their existence or simply refuse to have anything to do with them, which was understandable.

 

“They’re more like ancient gods, if you will. Religions do definitely exist, there just aren’t as many believers for Greek gods anymore, as far as I know. Maybe,” he shrugged. 

 

“Hm…” he hummed with a nod.

 

The office fell into a sense of silence for a while. It was the usual silence they would share from time to time. It was never empty nor lonely, because their presence was there to fill it, even when they didn’t speak. Alberu was fond of these moments.

 

“Cale,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“I’m going to be crowned soon,” he spoke, not looking up from his papers. “It’ll happen sometime in February.”

 

“...”

 

He’d pushed the date forward slightly when he remembered Cale’s request. Alberu waited for Cale to reply, say something about it. He couldn’t tell what expression he was making since he was facing away from him.

 

“...I see,” he said, simply. “Then should I start referring to you as your majesty, hyung-nim?”

 

He sighed. “Not yet. Didn’t I just tell you that won’t happen ‘till next month? You can wait that long,”

 

Albru could already tell Cale’s glib tongue would grow to be ten-times more insufferable as soon as he gets crowned. He was already annoyed by the thought of it, so much so that he sighed to himself.

 

Alberu spoke once more. “...What do you think?”

 

“About what?”

 

“Ascending the throne as the shining sun of the Roan kingdom,” he cringed internally but carried on. “...and as a dark elf?”

 

Cale fell into another contemplative silence. He gripped his quill a bit tighter.

 

“What about it?” he replied, nonchalant. “You can be both at once,” He sat up for a moment, before going back on his dramatic tangent. “being the shining star that guides the kingdom to prosperity and sustaining the citizens with valor and nobility…” Alberu sighed. “as well as being a dark elf, those two things aren’t opposite of each other. They don’t affect each other, being a dark elf and being the king, they’re just two different lines in your resume,”

 

“Resume…?”

 

“There isn’t anything to say about it. Didn’t I tell you, hyung-nim?” he spoke again, like it was the most obvious thing in the world and he was a fool for even asking. “Your existence is natural,” Cale said, before pausing. “So please, just act as you’ve always had. It wouldn’t matter whatever form you decide to take. You are the Crown Prince, Alberu Crossman, your highness, and you are the one who has devoted so much of yourself to the kingdom. That is an unchangeable fact.”

 

“...I see,” he smiled. “Thank you.”

 

The reason he asked him, it was because he wanted to hear Cale’s honest and somewhat blunt words. Alberu wanted to hear his reassurance, once more, just like that time, and now he was certain.

 

Cale smiled back, the corners of his lips pulling up subtly as he closed his eyes. “You don’t need to thank me for saying something so obvious.”

 

Then they drifted back into silence, before being gently broken by the sound of snoring. Alberu glanced up towards Cale who was across him, from his desk. The hero of the continent, and the supreme commander, was resting peacefully with silent breaths leaving his lips.

 

Ah, this person, Cale Henituse.

 

He was truly the most reliable person by his side.

 

 

-Crown prince! The irresponsible weak human went missing! He missed his curfew!

 

Raon cried from the other side of the magical device, with the rest of his allies shuffling  around in the background. On, how had a very disappointed pout on her face looked towards the screen closely, while Hong was somewhat worried.

 

Alberu laughed. “He’s with me,”

 

-Huh!?

 

“He broke into my office two hours ago,” he sighed, before turning the communication device the other way so the kids, and a few of the other worried adults could see. Cale was sound asleep on the couch. “You don’t have to worry,”

 

-Ah, young master Cale!

 

-That unlucky bastard didn’t even bother to tell us this late.

 

-What a relief…

 

Everyone sounded quite worried from the other end, which was honestly understandable. Cale wanting to wander around on his own as soon as he was out of bed was basically a recipe for disaster, especially after his severe fever just a few days before.

 

There’s really no telling what’ll happen with this bastard. Will he blow up another organized crime hideout or pass out somewhere in an alleyway? Alberu wished he knew.

 

Either way, the important part was that he was resting, now.

Notes:

Something something Cale's not making it to the coronation something something

Why do you think Cale bought so many houses suddenly? Hehe, only one way to find out~ Also, as someone who was fourteen not long ago but went through my chunni phase a loooot earlier I fear I may not have done our great and super cool chunni dragon boy justice TwT Started charting ORv territory with the themes there, too. In a rush rn so I can't say much,

 

You know what would be so funny? if Cale died next chapter.

Chapter 15: record.

Summary:

The final hour of the hero's life.

Notes:

Happy deathday guys.

 

Well. we've made it this far. here we go. Thank you so much for the crazy amount of support, i hope you cry :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

When Cale opened his eyes, he was greeted by the soft rays of sun filtering past the sheers, and the light chirp of birdsong. The kids, rolled and curled up into three fluffy round bunches, were sleeping on him. Raon on his chest, with his hand placed over his head, Hong close to his face, and On leaning against him.

 

He sat up, carefully, so as not to disrupt them. “...”

 

The three kids seemed to have chosen to sleep in, that morning. They’ve been doing a lot of staying up over the course of the week, between New Year’s, and celebrations, and late bedtimes, so he supposed it would make sense that they’d get tired eventually. He caressed Raon’s scaly, but soft chubby cheek, and the small dragon drowsily leaned into his touch. He used his other hand to tread through On and Hong’s fur, too. They let out soft purrs as they slept.

 

Cale sat and looked down at the children for a long time, hand caressing shapes in rhythmic patterns. Then, curiously, he leaned down and decided to press a kiss on Raon’s head, just so see what would happen. The little dragon smiled a little in his sleep. He decided to do the same for On and Hong, and they both rustled a bit but had similar reactions. He smoothed over their head and sighed, fond.

 

What a beautiful morning.

 

In some strange way, Cale already knew that he was going to die, that day.

 

If I could stop time, he thought. Maybe I would have chosen to lay here forever.

 

Sleeping and rolling around in a soft bed all day under the gentle sun with the children, wouldn’t that be nice?

 

A part of him wanted to just die there.

 

But I can’t.

 

The kids shouldn’t wake up next to the corpse of their dead guardian.

 

So, carefully, as gently as he could manage, he got the children off of him, and slid a blanket over their sleeping figures, caressing their heads and looking at them, just one more time. A second longer, in a gaze that lingered as it recorded the soft puff of their breaths, the twitch of their noses, the rise and fall of their chest, the small, near quiet snores. He murmured a few whispered words against their softly twitching ears.

 

Then, he let go.

 

Cale shrugged on a cardigan, put on his satchel, and left his room behind, quietly closing the door behind them.

 

Down the quiet echoing steps, and following the hall where they’d started placing flowers. Different colors, he noted. Eruhaben and Mary had been the ones who arranged them, though the flowers themselves had been chosen by everyone on a random afternoon. Cale lingered past each step, momentarily, until he was finally out the door towards the early dawn.

 

The snow had begun to melt away to greet the presence of spring that still wasn’t due until a while, and patches of wet grass shone under the snow that was slowly dissipating. He walked along the path that led nowhere in particular, glancing behind him towards the Rock Villa just once.

 

“It’s not that early, but it feels kind of quiet,” just past sunrise, Cale would bet. 

 

I let everyone sleep in, just for a little while longer.

 

So it was that god’s work after all, huh? “Don’t cast any weird spells on them,”

 

They’re called blessings, you know.

 

“Not a fan of those either,” Cale sighed. He noticed that he’s been feeling rather frail that morning. Not enough that he couldn’t make the trip, though.

 

Eventually, he stopped, far enough from the villa’s yard, and pulled out a teleportation scroll. He ripped it apart and was engulfed in light.

 

“...”

 

-You came back here, cutie.

 

The young, somewhat teenage Jour Thames, spoke. He’d brought her diary with him too. She must’ve recognized the red tree that marked her grave. It was still there, standing as if it had always been.

 

Cale wasn’t sure why exactly he came here. But it wasn’t like he had the time to turn back or look for some other spot, so he approached the large tree in place of his biological mother’s grave, and sat beneath the red leaves against the sturdy bark. It was— well, it was as comfortable as it could get.

 

“It’s strangely warm when it’s not even February, yet,” Cale commented.

 

That might be because of Angelina. The God of Death’s voice paused. Mn, The Sun God, I mean. She said this was the least she could do for you, or something of the like.

 

“...” What a peculiar force of nature, gods were.

 

He sat down, under the shade of the blood-red tree that matched his hair.

 

To be honest, he wasn’t sure what to do, now that he was settled here on his own. Just… what should he do, now?

 

The Super Rock spoke at that moment, as if to fill the silence.

 

-You didn’t tell them, in the end.

 

It wasn’t accusatory, it wasn’t spoken to make him feel guilty about it. But it sounded somber.

 

Maybe it was cruel to not have even said a word. Even Cale himself hesitated.

 

He closed his eyes and sighed. “No one needs to watch me die.”

 

All his life, Kim Roksoo had seen it happen. Time and time again, to different people. Everyone was different in those final moments— angry, betrayed, saddened, scared, calm, regretful— happy, even. He bore witness to their final words, final actions, final breaths, final wishes, final faces. The feeling of helplessness was something he couldn’t forget.

 

Whether they were calm, or if they were crying, if he’d hated them once before or if it was someone he truly cherished— Someone’s dying moments was a record he wished he could erase.

 

[“I leave it to you.”]

 

The burden of truly final words, it wasn’t something he wanted his allies to hear. And the burden of choosing final words wasn’t something Cale could bear, either. In the end, it was a selfish decision, his final sin in his final moments.

 

The voice of the cheapskate calmly rang in his mind.

 

-When I was travelling around the continent, I stayed at a village for some time. At that village, there was a stray cat that everyone took care of. They’d feed him, shelter him during the rain, kids would play with him, too.

 

He listened closely, as the wind tossed and turned, rustling the leaves and swaying the grass to its will.

 

-He was a really old and grumpy kind of cat that would scratch you if he didn’t like you. I didn’t get why they’d love such a mean thing.

 

The cheapskate laughed a little to himself.

 

-Then one day, he disappeared. Everyone was really worried about him when he didn’t turn up for food at the chief's house all day. I happened to be staying in the village around that time, so I helped look for him. 

 

“...”

 

-We found him a few hours later, hiding somewhere in the forest in the midst of a patch of grass, all curled up, covered in some fallen leaves. He didn’t wake up anymore after that. Didn’t even scratch me when I carried him back to the village.

 

His voice grew a little sad.

 

-Everyone was really sad when they found out. The kids cried for a long time. They told me, “I wish we could have been there for him, he must’ve been lonely by himself,”

 

That was all he said. Cale held the red, thick book in his arms, running his finger down the spine and tapping against the hardcover. It felt cool to the touch, somehow. It must’ve been an effect of the God of Death’s magic. “The cat,” he said. “He probably felt like he wouldn’t have been able to handle seeing someone watch him die, either.”

 

Thinking about it again, Cale felt bad, since the Ancient Powers had to be here, too. It was a little hypocritical of him.

 

The glutton then spoke up in a steady voice, as if reading his mind.

 

-We’re not going anywhere, Cale.

 

The crybaby’s voice followed.

 

-We’re right here.

 

“...” Maybe it was cruel, but a part of him was relieved that they were here. He smiled, just a little. “Okay.”

 

Cale picked up a small pebble from his side, and fiddled with it a little absentmindedly, rubbing his fingers against the smooth surface. The kids would’ve liked gathering this sort of thing when they were out playing.

 

The Super Rock’s voice spoke once again.

 

-What did you want to be, when you grew up?

 

“Hm…” ‘Did’. 

 

Something like an ambition… it wasn’t the kind of thing that crossed his mind for a long time. But when he was a kid, he had many wants— to sleep in a nicer bed, live under a warm and dry roof, eat hearty meals and even snacks when he was hungry, go outside to play rather than to look for money and food— greedy wishes like that. Eventually as he grew, those wishes built up and became more unified into a single goal. 

 

Cale huffed out a sigh. “I wanted to be a rich slacker,”

 

And he did manage that, for a while.

 

The crazy kid spoke at that moment, befuddled.

 

-A slacker, huh? You have such weird goals.

 

The glutton laughed. 

 

-No, no, I think I get it. A slacker— that means eating a lot of good, delicious warm food too, right? I’d want to be a slacker, too.

 

The Super Rock hummed.

 

-Hm… Three hearty meals a day has always been my dream, as well.

 

The cheapskate added on.

 

-And a rich one! Good specifics, you can do anything when you’ve got money and time on your hands!

 

The crybaby spoke as well.

 

-Living carefreely and leisurely and safely for a long time is really nice. I think I would’ve wanted that too.

 

The thief chuckled.

 

-All of us seem to have similar goals. Riches, time, comfort— I like those a lot. Maybe loot a rich noble on the side and that’s the dream.

 

“Hm…” So the ancient heroes, revered and legendary, seemed to have similar greedy wishes too. He couldn’t help but laugh a little. “Ah, and I guess I wanted to be a farmer, at one some point,”

Their voices sounded perplexed.

 

-A farmer…?

 

-I wasn’t expecting that from you, to be honest.

 

-Wouldn’t that be counterproductive though…?

 

-You seem so frail I bet you’d topple over if you even tried to pluck out a carrot.

 

-Farming is tiring work, you know~ isn’t it better to just lay around and be a slacker like you promised?

 

“It’s not like I’ll do that much, it would’ve been just small-scale. Just an orchard, some easy plants—”

 

-Knowing you, I’m reluctant to believe in such words.

 

Cale frowned silently at the reply while the ancient powers laughed at him once more. 

 

“Ah, and…” Then, curiously, he placed his hand over the Top’s Whip, which he had carried with him to the tree. In a moment, more voices erupted in a whirlwind all around him.

 

-You’re going to die!?

 

-Chaos, destruction, pain…!

 

-Cale, Cale…!

 

-Is this really all…? It can’t be…! 

 

-After everything—

 

-Please, there has to be a way!

 

-Chaos, destruction, and sorrow. I feel nothing but great sorrow and pain. Why must something like this happen?

 

The voices of the wind elementals were abuzz, and the wind picked up. It had been noticeable before, but now even more so. “...What a racket.” Cale took his hands off the handle and sighed, the voices dispersing and vanishing in an instant like a wind current that was parted. “...”

 

Then, the thief spoke up as if to change the topic. The whirlwind that stirred around Cale gradually slowed into a gentle breeze, swaying and swishing with caution, as if he was delicate.

 

-We’re curious about you. What was your hometown like?

 

“…my hometown?” he contemplated it for a moment, picking up a fallen red leaf from his side and twirling it between his fingers. “There isn't much to say about it,” he replied. “I didn’t have any particularly interesting neighbors, or stories, or anything like that,”

 

-That’s kind of a boring answer.

 

-I’m sure there’s something. How about a favorite place from there? I liked to go to this one clearing that had lots of berries I could snack on in secret. I did get sick a few times, though.

 

Cale tilted his head, trying to think of an answer. Maybe a place he frequented back then? “A convenience store, I guess…?”

 

-A what?

 

“Don’t worry too much about it,” he sighed. Right, ancient heroes—

 

“Ah—!” Cale let out a sharp wince and tensed, clutching his chest. “Mn…”

 

-Hey, are you okay?

 

-What’s happening? Cale?

 

“..it’s fine,” he replied, voice a little strained. It felt a bit like his usual chronic pains flaring up but far less dull, the aches felt more like sharp incisions all over his body. Almost like it was more defined. The God of Death did mention something like this. “Feels like cracks all over my skin…” Not something he wasn’t used to, thanks to Instant, but still not a welcome feeling. 

 

At the same time, he could feel the place where it had ached a second ago be overwhelmed with a cold sensation, like someone was filling in cracks and mending them with glue. It was similar to Mila’s power when his plate broke, just less painful and more so very uncomfortable with no physical sign of it, and gave him some chills. It must’ve been the God of Death’s work.

 

“That—” he managed with a wince as the sensation dialed down, momentarily. “That thing I asked for,”

 

A little busy preventing your soul from collapsing in on itself, but yes, it’s possible. The voice of a certain god rang in his head. Just use that power you received from Lee Soohyuk, and your own power, and imbue it into the book. He paused. …You’re going to die, Cale.

 

“...” He wordlessly picked up the book in his arms and laid it in his lap, then placed his hand over it, fingertips resting against the surface of the solid cover. Then, he closed his eyes.

 

Embrace. It was a power that he had used a few times before. And Record, too. So like he’s always done, he pictured his records, in his mind, while Embrace pulsed through his fingertips.

 

The memories flew through his eyes in a smooth influx, like water coursing down a river. This time, he was directing that flow and not drowning in it.

 

[“Cale Henituse,”]

 

[“Weak human!”]

 

[“Cale-nya,”]

 

[“Dongsaeng,”]

 

[“Cale-nim,”]

 

[“Young master-nim,”]

 

[“Young master Cale!”]

 

[“Son,”]

 

[“Hyung-nim,”]

 

[“Orabuni!”]

 

Ah. Cale’s eyes widened. He could hear his name being called, over and over again.

 

[“Human! You are making that lying expression again!”]

 

[“Are we going to loot them?”]

 

[ Boom!]

 

“Pfft— ha!” He managed to laugh, even if it hurt his chest. Of course, he liked these memories, as well.

 

[“You know what, that should be your new year’s resolution— not getting into trouble and being a slacker like you promised.”]

 

[“You know, Cale, The war is over,”]

 

[“Cale, thank you for being here.”]

 

At that time, those words meant a lot to him.

 

[“You really are amazing, Cale-nim…! How did you manage to make everything?” He was looking at Cale as if he ate luxurious New Year’s hotpot every other day.]

 

[“Mom, mom! What do you think? Weren’t they super cool!? It was really loud at first too and I was surprised, but it was really amazing!” Raon exclaimed, wings flapping as he flew around his mom.]

 

[Choi Han laughed at everyone’s reactions. Look at this punk, stirring up trouble. Cale sighed and placed more side dishes on their table as he ate.]

 

Cale smiled and sighed. He wished he had a bite of something before he dragged himself here, he’d really like some of Beacrox’s cooking right about now. 

 

[Hong and On were side by side with him, holding his hand and swinging it back and forth in merry rhythm as they began to list all the foods they wanted to try, excited to spend their allowance. Of course, Cale would just buy it for them anyway. They could save their money whenever he was around…]

 

[“I see! Then, this great and mighty Raon Miru will choose the perfect alias!” he beamed, before puffing his chest up and flapping his wings about as he flew higher. “For today, I shall be the great and mighty dragon, Ra Mir!”]

 

[“Mn, a coffee for Mister… Bobert?” A few quiet snickers rang out from the rest of the group and Cale managed to scoff.]

 

[Choi Han smiled to himself as he thought about all these things. “And when New Year’s rolls around again, we could plan more trips and keep doing more things the next year, and the year after that, and even the year after that, for as long as we want.”]

 

He laughed again. As chaotic and tiring as it all was, he had to admit he had fun.

 

[“One… two…! Ah, damn it!”]

 

[“Oh, just quit it, it’s my turn!”]

 

[“The rules are that you need to first collect them all, and then scatter them, then you need to toss it up while picking up—”]

 

[“You’ve got this, young master-nim, you just need to catch it!”]

 

[“Near an ear… e-rer near?]

 

[“Susie works in a shoe-sai— a shoe sine— a shoeshine shop…”]

 

[“...And so that’s why you should be careful when you ask to board random wagons,”]

 

[“Remember— stranger danger,”]

 

[“Well, that’s because I didn’t smell anything on them! How was I supposed to know they were actually—!”]

 

“Ah.” 

 

So these silly voices really did echo in the end. He remembered the feeling of warmth brush against his fingertips and smiled as he closed his eyes, listening closely to the sound of childish chatter among remarkable people simply being unremarkable, together. Cale mumbled a tongue twister or two to himself and circled the pebble in his hands with his finger, chuckling.

 

The ancient powers were silent all throughout. He wondered if they could see the fond records that were running through his mind.

 

[“I’m like you, young master-nim,” Rosalyn smiled. “I like happy endings,”]

 

“Ah…” The reason he imbued the God of Death’s divine book with his records, was because Cale thought that even though he had many records he’d rather bury and be rid of, even though there were many that were painful, he also had records he liked. 

 

He wondered if this could be considered a happy ending.

 

[“I like it— I’ll wear it whenever I go out for sword training, Cale-nim,”]

 

Even though he’s grieved countless times for countless people, even though reminiscing was painful, he didn’t regret meeting the people he lost, and held onto their records.

 

[“What’s your favorite food, young master-nim?”]

 

For the thousands of unanswered questions and the dozen things his allies never knew of him, if something like that was really as important as they say, the records were proof of his existence. It was Cale’s way of being honest with them, and opening up even if he couldn’t be there.

 

[Raon’s eyes sparkled with wonder, brimming with excitement. “It’s snowing!”]

 

All the records that flowed into the empty blank pages of the thick book, they were the countless mundane records that filled the spaces in between his mind. There were also the records that shone brighter than others, brimming with joy, which he cherished very much. He decided that they didn’t need to have the painful ones. Those records were for Cale, and they would disappear alongside him.

 

Kim Roksoo grieved by himself for a long time. And in that way, even records he was so fond of could be painful. But right now, everyone had each other— there was someone else to mourn with. Someone else to talk to, someone else to cry with, someone else to be angry with. They were a family that could keep one another afloat above the sea. In that way, they could turn out okay, after all of this.

 

That was why he thought it would be okay to let them see it.

 

[“Ta-da~” a pointy birthday hat was promptly stuck to his head and party poppers went off. “Happy birthday, team Leader-nim~!”

 

Kim Roksoo stared, blinking owlishly at the setup in front of him. A birthday cake, cards, food, even a few small gifts. “...I didn’t mention my birthday,”

 

“Not something difficult we couldn’t figure out,” Kim Min-Ah smiled.

 

“Ah, sit down, sit down,”

 

“This cake is homemade, you know~”

 

“I brought spring rolls and kimbap!”

 

It was a little confusing, but he complied.]

 

Everything was contained in the book he held. Whether they decide to throw it all away, or to hold onto it, it was a choice that they could make. If they wanted to, they could forget or remember. It was a choice that Kim Roksoo, and even Cale in his present, could never make.

 

[“Hey, look! I got these on discount,”

 

“What did you get this time?”

 

“T-shirts! And they match and everything~”

 

Kim Roksoo stared at the shirts in question judgingly. “..I’m not wearing that,”

 

“What? Come on! I bought this set with three because it was cool,”

 

“What the hell is that even supposed to say?” Kim Roksoo asked while wiping the plates and sorting them into the cupboards.

 

“Read it! Drop, Dead, and Gorgeous!”

 

“I’m back, what did I miss?” Lee Soohyuk asked.

 

“Choi Jungsoo’s poor financial decisions,”

 

“My very creative financial decisions,”

 

Lee Soohyuk stared at the shirts on the table with a pensive hand on his chin. “...Okay so, what I want to know is who gets ‘Gorgeous’, here,”

 

“I’m not wearing a shirt that says ‘Dead’ on it,” Kim Roksoo squinted. “And what would ‘Drop’ even mean?”

 

“Okay but consider, we could screw with everyone?”

 

“...”

 

“Personally I’ll go with gorgeous,” Lee Soohyuk shrugged as he moved next to Kim ROksoo to help with the dishes. “And you can have dead, because you’re dead to me,”

 

“Huh!?”

 

“Not only did you finish all my leftover kimchi from the company party, you also shared a video of me singing at the team karaoke to the company group chat.” He had a vicious expression. “The directors keep asking me to do finger hearts and sing at the next party,”

 

“Pfft—” Kim Roksooo choked, before clearing his throat. Lee Soohyuk smiled at him with a look that suggested extra training hours for him.]

 

“Hahaha!” Ah, he felt as if snowflakes could fall from the corner of his eyes, even as his chest ached. He’s never really laughed this hard by himself. Surely, if his allies saw him like this, they’d be concerned.

 

-...Cale.

 

He coughed, while smiles infectiously crept up his face in a giddy haze. “Do you remember that thing we agreed to do?”

 

-We know.

 

“...okay, then.”

 

 

After recording his final record, he lifted his hand.

 

Ah, Cale just remembered. This tree was where Jour’s grave used to be.

 

“...hello,” he hesitated, thinking about the present Kim Roksoo. He said it was okay. “mother.”

 

Cale felt guilty. The first time he came here, he promised he’d take on the responsibilities of maintaining it, in some way. The clouds floated along, in the sky.

 

“I’m sorry I didn’t bring flowers.”

 

At that moment, the aged branches creaked as the wind blew, as if replying. He held the red leaf in his hand.

 

A long deceased mother, and the stranger inhabiting his son’s body.

 

“...your son is doing well,” he paused. “Both he and I were.”

 

Whoosh.

 

He knew that the soul of Jour Thames had been reincarnated, and was living happily with the soul of her son. The one Cale was speaking to was the long deceased Jour Thames, who rested beneath the soil, waiting. He felt like it was right for him to reserve a few words for his biological mother, who had helped him in many ways even though he was a transmigrator.

 

“I’m sorry… that the second visit had to be at a time like this.”

 

He really felt guilty. The first time he visited, it was only to dig up her diary and gain an ancient power. The second time was to die.

 

The leaves rustled softly in reply. And in some way it sounded forgiving. Another leaf fell from the tip of a dry branch and landed atop his head.

 

“...thank you.”

 

Cale thought that he would have liked to meet her, at least once. Kim Roksoo spoke fondly of her. A part of him wished he had gotten to know the person who was supposed to have been his mom more.

 

But then again, he’s never really had the chance to, before. No one told him how to go about getting to know your parents.

 

-It seems like we didn’t know a lot about you.

 

The Super Rock added on to the crazy kid’s remark.

 

-I don’t believe we’ve ever properly introduced ourselves to each other. Is it too late to do so now?

 

Cale huffed. ”I’ve got a few minutes.”

 

-Ah. Then if that’s the case, 

 

He spoke in a calm, somewhat relaxed voice.

 

-My name is…

 

One after the other, the ancient powers, the legendary heroes of yore, properly introduced themselves one by one as if they were meeting each other for the first time. They spoke their names, the ones that they’ve had since birth and the names that weren’t inscribed in the records, in a voice that only Cale could hear. It was a bit silly— it felt like a game of icebreaker at school.

 

-My favorite food is..

 

-My hometown was at…

 

-My parents were…

 

-I had a dog, who…

 

It felt so casual, and Cale listened closely to the stories that they told as if they were just ordinary people.

 

-It’s your turn, now. 

 

“Mn…” he hummed, breaths shallow. He could faintly feel his heartbeat slow in his chest like a dying flame. “...my name was Kim Roksoo.”

 

-Kim Roksoo. It really does sound otherworldly.

 

-Does it have a meaning?

 

“I… think it meant something like…” he trailed off, looking up at the outstretched branches over him as if they were shading him from the sun. “Evergreen.”

 

It was much like this tree, who’s leaves were vibrant and full even in the midst of winter.

 

-Ah, I see.

 

-That’s a good meaning.

 

-Evergreen means you’re thriving even in the cold, right? 

 

“My hometown… mn, world— is called Earth. The country I’m from is called Korea.”

 

-Ko-re-ah…

 

-What else? Which part of the country did you live in?

 

“A city called Seoul. It happens to be the capital.”

 

-Ooooh.

 

-I’ve always wondered what life in the capital would be like.

 

“Expensive.”

 

-Pfft—

 

-Ho, what a realist you are.

 

-Did you have any close friends back in Korea?

 

“I did.” he closed his eyes. “Two.” he paused for a moment. “They were my hyungs.”

 

-Hyungs, hm?

 

-So they were older than you. It’s nice that you had someone to take care of you.

 

It felt more like pestering and nagging continuously as well as teasing, really, but Cale just chuckled back at the thought. If Choi Jungsoo, who barely even qualified as his hyung, heard him call him that— he’d never let him live it down. Well, he wouldn’t mind that, if it meant he’d be here.

 

“But anyway,” he smiled. “My name is Cale Henituse.”

 

-ah.

 

-I see.

 

He flipped to the end of the record book, where a few bookmarks were stuffed together. He held them together gently as embrace pulsed through his fingertips one last time.

 

-Then, Cale Henituse…

 

He could feel their voices, their presence slowly slip away…

 

-Please rest well.

 

…and disappear from his mind.

 

Cale closed his eyes.

 

“You, bastard god,” he mumbled. “if you’re listening…”

 

He inhaled…

 

“...make me a slacking farmer in my next life.”

 

And breathed his last.

 

His eyes never opened again.

 

The final moments of the record keeper, who’s eyes carried the burden of a thousand stories, were witnessed by nature.

 

The wind tossed and turned, and howled like it was wailing.

 

On the morning of the winter day when snowflakes fell gently, and blanketed the ground in warmth like a blessing for one single hero who died alone, an evergreen tree that persisted through a thousand harsh winters finally wilted.

 

The moment his heart stopped, the silverlight gently shattered into a million pieces, and the shield finally broke.

 

The grass rustled quietly, the leaves fell as if the tree was shedding tears, and the branches groaned. The sun hid behind the clouds once more as if to weep. The earth, sky, and sea subdued to mourn the presence of the human who was loved by nature.

 

 

It all happened suddenly.

 

Alberu was at a meeting arranged to discuss various matters concerning the aftermath of war, such as reporting on restoration progress and budgeting, with the heads of various noble families at the palace.

 

It was on that strangely warm day that Cage, who had accompanied Marquess Taylor, suddenly slammed open the meeting room door.

 

“Miss—”

 

“This is urgent.”

 

Alberu tensed when he heard the tone of her voice. Even Taylor seemed surprised at her sudden interruption. “What happened?”

 

“Your highness, I beg of you, I’d like to speak to you in private,” she spoke with a tone of such panicked urgency that it disturbed him. “Please.”

 

When he saw the way she eyed Duke Deruth with such a look of intense emotion, Alberu didn’t think twice. He glanced at Taylor, who nodded and would help control the nobles present. Judging by his alarmed expression, he might’ve read the situation and could also maybe inform Duke Henituse. “Please excuse me.”

 

Once the doors were closed, they didn’t even spare a second and got to walking. Alberu followed Cage down the hall of his very own palace, and recognized the path to the magical transportation chambers. 

 

“It’s young master Cale.”

 

“I could tell.”

 

“The God of Death had contacted me suddenly, this doesn't happen often,” she said, expression looking horribly, terribly grim, with her lips pressed into the line. They were only a few paces away from the entrance of the chambers when she finally dropped it.

 

“Young master Cale may be dead.”

 

His steps stopped almost as quickly as his heart. “...What?”

 

“I’m not sure what this means. We’ve had a similar situation happen before— with the sealed god, so…” she seemed like she was trying to convince herself just as much. The door to the magic chamber was thrown open. Alberu went up to the startled mage and scribbled down the coordinates on the dot. 

 

“Bring us to these coordinates. Now.” 

 

He’s never usually so stern and brash. But it couldn’t be helped if it was about that bastard.

 

“Last time— it was an effect of the vow being broken or something like that, wasn’t it?”

 

“Yes.”

 

“What about now?”

 

“This is different— this is… it can’t be due to a vow of death. When young master Cale was cut at that time, he severed the vow and rendered it useless.” Cage explained. “And that God contacted me directly. Not even through a dream, his voice simply popped up in broad daylight like a hallucination.”

 

“Are you sure it wasn’t one?”

 

“With all due respect, it’s impossible to mistake the words of a god for a hallucination, your highness,”

 

The teleportation circle glowed beneath their feet before lighting up in a blinding light. When they opened their eyes, they were standing at the doorstep of the villa.

 

Alberu rushed in without so much as a knock, running down the hall.

 

He brushed by a confused Choi Han at that moment. “I— your highness? Have you seen—”

 

“Where’s Cale?”

 

“What—”

 

“Cale Henituse, where is he? Have you seen him?”

 

Choi Han’s expression stiffened once he realized something must not be right. “I haven’t.” he answered, matching Alberu’s pace down the hall. “We’ve actually been looking for him, he…” his expression grew mortified. “He wasn’t in his room when Ron went to check on him today.”

 

Looking around, he could feel a tenseness in the air. Goddamnit.

 

Alberu inhaled a strained breath. “Miss Cage said that he died.”

 

All color drained from Choi Han’s face. “...What?”

 

“We don’t know anything yet. It could be like that time when he was sealed in the black orb.” He could see the way his hand tightened around the grip of his sword ‘till his knuckles were white. “So for now— do you know where—”

 

A glass shattered from behind them. Alberu looked back.

 

Hong, who had dropped his glass of juice, was frozen in place. “...cale-nya?”

 

“T, the human…!” Raon shouted. “Where is he…!?”

 

Cage not-so-calmly informed everyone present who was looking for Cale about what the God of Death told her. They searched every nook and cranny of the villa, every room and every secret hatch or corner.

 

He was nowhere to be found.

 

Eruhaben, who seemed terribly stressed, had his arms crossed, talon-like nails digging into his sleeves. “...that unlucky punk,” 

 

“...Maybe he left?” On said in a low, nervous voice. “His– His cardigan and his slippers are both missing…”

 

“His cardigan is?” Eruhaben’s eyes closed as if he was focusing. “I charmed it with a temperature regulation spell. It’s faint, but I can detect the mana and follow its trail. If he’s wearing it, I could track him down that way.”

 

“We need to hurry,”

 

 

Following the approximate coordinates, they ended up at the foot of a tall, mountain-like hill covered in tall dry trees in the cold weather.

 

At the top of that hill, was a large tree with leaves red as blood, standing tall in the cold.

 

“His… mother’s tree..?” Choi Han mumbled softly, eyes shaking as he recognized the scenery in the distance.

 

“!”

 

There, under the red leaves, was a bed of equally dark and vibrant red hair sitting beneath as the wind blew. He was still.

 

Not even during the war did they run so quickly, climbing the hill breathlessly.

 

He looked worse up close. Terribly, terribly worse—

 

Cale was pale but he wasn’t supposed to be that pale. And he was so still. So terribly still. On looked closely, eyes squinting, looking for the rise and fall of his chest, the puff of his breaths, the twitch of his eyelids.

 

Nothing.

 

On felt like she couldn't hear. Like the world went terribly deaf to her ears.

 

Even as Choi Han held him with the look that screamed a despair so deep, and as the corn prince shook him about and tried to wake him, speak to him, get some kind of reply from him—

 

She knows she should check his pulse now. She knew how to. Uncle Beacrox and Ron taught her how to and she read the books and she’s tried it once before. She knows where to check– the wrist, the spot on his neck— On should check now. She should. If they wanted— if the wanted a definitive answer she needed to—

 

Ron, who was beside her, gently lowered her hand that was shakily reaching towards him, and pressed his hand against his pulse.

 

They waited.

 

His grim expression only worsened. Beacrox reached out to hold his limp wrist. His frown deepened. Alberu even pressed his ear against his chest and lifted his eyelids. He let go immediately when he saw how dead and unmoving it looked. 

 

Nothing.

 

Nothing, nothing, nothing—

 

“...human?”

 

Ah.

 

Raon had just caught up.

 

“Why haven’t you woken him up?”

 

He said such innocent words, but On could tell from his eyes that everything in him, his knowledge and his mana, told him. He wanted to be proven wrong.

 

Raon was correct.

 

“Human.”

 

He slowly flew over to him. On held Cale’s wrist, which she didn’t realize she’d even started holding onto, tighter.

 

“Weak human?”

 

Nothing.

 

He’s going to cry now, you know.

 

On squeezed his hand tighter. As tight as she could, hoping it could wake him and he could get annoyed about it– complain to her.

 

Don’t be a jerk. Youngest will cry. 

 

He floated over until he was right in front of his face, leaned against his chest. “...Cale?”

 

 

Nothing.

 

Tears began to brim at the corner of his wide shaking blue eyes, and…

 

The earth and sky began to shake.

 

 

“...Cale-nim.” Choi Han mumbled slowly, when they found him. He was unmoving in his arms. They shook him about some more, like they were trying to wake him from a dream. “Cale-nim, please wake up. It’s—”

 

 

Choi Han could feel the presence of mana, fluctuating as over a dozen different spells were cast around them like a protective dome. It was natural, as multiple mages were with them. It felt as if even time could stop within that space. It felt like his entire world stopped spinning.

 

It couldn’t be. It was impossible. How could it… there was no way that it could just end like this, so suddenly.

 

It was impossible. Impossible. It can’t—

 

“You’re squeezing him too hard.” Alberu sounded firm from beside him. His hands were hovering shakily above Cale’s face, as if waiting for even the faintest puff of breath. “...Loosen your grip.”

 

It seemed impossible no matter how they looked at it. He wasn’t— there wasn’t any blood. On his hands, on his face, on his leg, his entire body, there wasn’t a single scratch or wound or anything. 

 

They’ve checked. Over and over again. As if he was just asleep and it was all a lie. He pressed his hand over his pulse as firmly as he could manage while trying not to accidentally hurt him, but all signs just— 

 

Cale was dead.

 

“...No.”

 

He was gone.

 

“No!”

 

The person— the body they cradled was lifeless.

 

“NO—”

 

“Stop!” Alberu snapped at him, a firm hand on his shoulders squeezing him to the point that it stung a little. “We don’t know yet. We don’t— there’s the possibility that he could—”

 

The usually refined, elegant, and calm crown prince was stammering like a desperate fool.

 

Choi Han’s grip on Cale’s wrist tightened involuntarily like a reflex to calm himself. If— if even Alberu…

 

He was cold. He was— there wasn’t any warmth against his skin, no matter how much he held him. The feeling was so uncanny that he felt like he could go mad. How long was he here by himself for? Alone? How— How late were they?

 

What happened to him?

 

Why was he here?

 

Why did he leave suddenly?

 

Was he brought here?

 

Did someone hurt him?

 

Who killed him? Who killed Cale? Who would even dare—

 

“...Weak human?”

 

Ah.

 

“...Cale?”

 

Oh… 

 

He was here, too.

 

Choi Han looked up in time to see On’s tearful eyes as she looked at her dongsaeng with an expression of pain.

 

Then, it was as if the world tore itself apart. 

 

Something rose with the low hum of pure unbridled power. The sky darkened and the air grew chilly. The ground shook like an oncoming earthquake and something rumbled like a growl between the gathering clouds in the sky.

 

“NO!” Raon screamed. He sounded like a child being ripped away from his parents as he clutched his red-haired guardian. “NO!”

 

A presence in the air so thick that it almost felt suffocating surrounded them. Even Eruhaben and Rosalyn attempted to reach for Raon but couldn’t get close, like they were being weighed down. The air thickened again, crackling with power. He, Alberu, and anyone else near Cale were practically blown aside.

 

Ah. Just like that time at the first battle during the war against the wyverns at the wall, when Cale was hurt. It was what Choi Han would imagine the wrath of a dragon lord would feel like. 

 

Raon was crying.

 

“YOU CAN’T!”

 

It was like he was screaming at the sky. In this situation, no one knew where to direct their anger.

 

“GIVE HIM BACK TO ME!”

 

“Raon—!”

 

“Little kid—!”

 

It wasn’t any use, their voices were drowned out like a ripple in the sea. 

 

“MY HUMAN!”

 

It felt like nothing could get through to him. At that moment, Cage yelled as the wind began to pick up like a typhoon.

 

“Book!” she yelled, pointing. “That book!”

 

Choi Han looked to his side and was attracted by the strange, magnifying presence of a thick red book. He grabbed it and nearly stumbled— despite its width, it felt weightless when he lifted it. There was no title to be found anywhere on the cover of the spine.

 

He opened the book.

 

There, written in familiar handwriting on the very first page, were a few words in ink.

 

‘For my family’

 

“...” Choi Han’s pupils shook but he pulled himself together and flipped to the next page. It was empty— completely blank, save for a number at the bottom of the page where the page number should be, reading ‘1,059’.

 

Gently, carefully, he ran his finger through the smooth, cold pages, when he felt a force surge through his fingertips. “What—” the entire world blurred out, before being overtaken. New images fizzing to life with the light sound of crackling like a drop of paint to a canvas, and—

 

[In the middle of the gently melting winter stood a tree, evergreen, with full lush leaves rustling in the wind. A patch of grass spread out beneath it, as if sustained by the old tree, bright as it curled against the fingertips of the figure that rested below. The sun shone in gentle rays from above, filtering past the leaves.

 

Laying against its sturdy structure was a frail figure with red hair, expression absentminded. Voices echoed within his head in comforting tones. He was smiling.]

 

Choi Han’s breath hitched.

 

[“Can you… hear me?” he paused for a while. “Mn, I don’t know if it’s even possible in the first place actually,” 

 

Cale’s voice was quiet and subdued, but rang clear]

 

“C…” He reached out. The only thing his fingers brushed against was air. “...Cale-nim?”

 

“Choi Han…?” he could make out Alberu’s confused, somewhat muffled voice beyond the image in his head, and he lifted his hand. The image dissipated just as soon as it came.

 

“This…” he touched the page once again, and sure enough, Cale was there. “...Ah.”

 

Choi Han forced himself to let go of the page, and tightly held it, then carefully stood amid the suffocating force. 

 

“Choi Han!” 

 

He ignored the worried voices and reached out for the wailing Raon.

 

“Raon,”

 

“GIVE HIM BACK!”

 

He plunged his sword into the ground so he could stand before the young dragon, who guarded Cale like a precious treasure threatening to be taken away.

 

He was crying so loudly. It must be hurting his throat, because his voice started to sound sore.

 

“I STILL NEED HIM!”

 

“...” Choi Han’s throat tightened so much he felt like he couldn’t even breathe. He wanted to cry.

 

“HE HAS TO LIVE FOREVER!”

 

He inhaled a deep breath, reached out for Raon’s chubby paw that fizzed and crackled with magic. Though it felt like his hand was burning like it was set alight, he held the small hand in his tightly, opened the book, and pressed it against the empty page.

 

The previous power surged through their palms, as the image overtook their vision once again.

 

“Wha—”

 

[“But, just in case this record really appears, I guess I’ll talk for you,” Cale smiled again. “So… The truth is that I’m sick, and I’m going to die. I’m dying right now, actually.” he said, before pausing. “I’m sorry.”]

 

Raon let out a gasp. The burning sensation on Choi Han’s palm eased a little. Then, a small, weak and shaky voice emerged.

 

“..h… human…?”

 

[Cale smiled.]

 

The paw beneath his hand trembled and shook. 

 

[A bird chirped almost sorrowfully on a dry branch as if to reply.]

 

The cold and thick presence in the air slowly began to dissipate. Choi Han could feel small tears landing on his hand that was holding Raon’s above the page.

 

[“I’m sure you’re mad at me,” his expression wavered. “You might be... Angry. No, you definitely are, since I hid it all this time.” Cale paused. “Don’t destroy the world, alright?”]

 

“...”

 

The burning heat that surrounded his body disappeared. The nature around them was no longer lashing out. Raon was crying.

 

Choi Han caught him, and hugged him as they put the book down. The weight of Cale’s body slumped against him, and he gently set him down to lay above the grass.

 

“I…” he choked out between sobs. “...i wanna wake up,” he mumbled quietly. “...this must be a bad dream.”

 

He hugged him tighter. “It’s not.”

 

Tired, chubby paws were pawing at Choi han’s shoulder. “...it’s impossible… this must be…”

 

He thought so too. Choi Han inhaled a shaky breath as he glanced down at the eyes that would never open again. “It’s not.”

 

He could feel his clothes being covered in snot. “Then— then I want to destroy the world.”

 

His shaky hand caressed the little dragon’s head. “...You can’t,” he paused, lips quivering. “...cale-nim doesn’t want you to,”

 

“...” the little dragon, wrought with suffocating grief, wailed into the hero’s arms.

 

 

They brought Cale back to the villa.

 

Everyone else, who was waiting, tension hanging in the air, had their hopes crushed in a single instant.

 

Saint Jack had checked. He held Cale’s hands while wiping his tears, whispered blessings in a shaking voice, but nothing came of it. They checked, over and over again, and still, nothing came of it.

 

“You heard it from the God of Death, right? We could contact him!”

 

“We need information— it could be a curse, of some kind. Maybe it’s just that his heart stopped but his soul is contained elsewhere. We can bring him back,”

 

“I’ve heard of such cases— of an illness afflicting the soul— there must be something,”

 

They were determined to deny it. They were determined to find a way. They prayed, they cursed, they hoped, again and again.

 

The divine entity in the sky did not reply.

 

“A deal— let’s make some kind of deal,”

 

“Young master Cale has done it himself a few times, hasn’t he?”

 

“We should negotiate something. What should we ask for?”

 

“Maybe we could try a regression. Turn back time. Change things— if he was sick, we can look for a cure! Make another deal to cure him, there must be—”

 

“ANSWER US DAMN IT!”

 

There was wailing, there were tears, there was disbelief and denial, and then there was silence. 

 

Cale still lay on his bed, lifeless, and it seemed like it would be impossible to pry him out of the children’s desperate hold.

 

All that was left, now, was the red book.

 

“...That God, he said…” Cage inhaled a breath and spoke. She’d been relentlessly trying to contact the God of Death for a while now, but after he said what he needed to say there was no way of reaching him. Of course, they weren’t done with contacting the god just yet, but for now they needed to focus on consoling each other. “...that this red book contained the things that young master Cale left for us,”

 

They hadn’t touched it since they got here. Now that they were desperate for answers, it was time to look. Alberu glanced at Choi Han. “What did you see when you opened it?”

 

“I saw…” his throat tightened. “I saw Cale-nim.”

 

“...” Hong looked at him, desperate. 

 

“What did—” Alberu paused, inhaling a breath. He hadn’t been composed at all, all morning. “What exactly did you do to… see it?”

 

“I… touched the book.” Choi Han said, reaching out towards it. “I flipped through it, and touched the page. Then I saw… I saw Cale-nim at the tree.”

 

“Was he…”

 

“He was alive.” he clenched his fist. “I— I think that was the moment before he…”

 

Eruhaben reached for the book and flipped it open. Then he froze when he saw the first page and read the words written there. Choi Han looked away.  “...”

 

Eventually, they all crowded around him in silence. Everyone who was present at the villa on that day were the first to know.

 

Eruhaben touched the page like Choi Han had said, and his eyes widened. “...it—”

 

“What do you see?” Rosalyn, who was leaning beside him, asked in a sore voice. She’d been silently crying a lot as well. 

 

“...It’s that unlucky punk.” he lifted his index finger, and sighed. “Now he’s gone. It really seemed like—”

 

“...His memories?” On asked. Hong perked up, eyes widening. He’d been hugging his sister for a while now. 

 

“...Record.” Alberu mumbled.

 

Crowding closer together, they silently placed their fingers on the page of the large book. An image flickered to life through their eyes like a projection, and they let out soft gasps.

 

There he was.

 

Two hours after the death of Cale the hero, his allies listened to his final record.

 

[...]

 

[“But, even if you knew, there was nothing that could’ve been done,” he chuckled, somewhat bitterly. “I tried everything I could— even tried to make a deal with that damn God of Death.”

 

The wind whistled by, blowing his bangs apart.

 

“So, I got sick,” Cale said. “You may as well call it a terminal illness, just apparently ones that gods even catch,”]

 

Choi Han’s hands trembled as he whispered. “...You were sick?”

 

“...ah.” Rosalyn remembered the books on medicine stacked between fantasy novels, and her world crumbled.

 

[“I… well, I thought it’d be better not to tell anyone, since all it would do is just cause unnecessary pain,” he said. “I had two months. I wanted… to spend the rest of that time just slacking off and spending time with the people who were important to me,” he chuckled. “If you’d known I was dying, you’d really lock me up, wouldn’t you?”]

 

A chubby scaly paw brushed against Eruhaben’s hand that touched the page. It was wet as if it had just been wiping tears.

 

[Cale sighed. “I don’t want you to bargain and think over and over again, ‘if only’ or ‘if i had known about it’ because it wouldn’t have changed a thing,” he spoke. “Not in any universe or world you choose to search— the cure for this doesn’t exist.” he paused, gaze softening, just slightly. “The fault lies with no one, so please don’t think such thoughts.”]

 

“...no.” Mary whispered. Her mechanical voice sounded like it was breaking.

 

[“I died because I was just an unlucky bastard,” he spoke, a hand on the red hard-cover book that lay next to him in the grass. “That’s it. Okay?”]

 

“...ha.” a certain gold dragon felt as if he could get a headache

 

[“There’s a letter in my room with some detailed notes, it’s locked in my drawer— the key is in the bookshelf, but you wouldn’t need the key, would you?” he said with a small chuckle. “Well, there’s also some more things you should know, I guess. I’m a transmigrator.”]

 

“!”

 

Beacrox’s eyes widened. “You—”

 

[“You’ll hear all about it here in— ah, this book you’re touching right now.”

 

Cale ran his fingers across the cover. “This… it’s a book of records— my personal records, to be precise.” he paused. “I have a sort of other power— it’s called an ability, if I’m being specific— that gives me perfect memory and allows me to memorize things through sight. It’s called ‘Record’.”]

 

“...That’s why you could read all those books in the directory.” They heard Bud mumble. There was no trace of his usually jovial tone.

 

[“I think that record is a useful ability, bu t can also be really bothersome sometimes,” he admitted. “There are many records that I’d rather bury forever.”

 

He looked down at the book he was holding, nostalgia glinting in his eyes. “...But that also means that I can never forget my happiness, either,”

 

Wildflowers swayed side to side in tandem with the wind that pushed them about like a tide in the sea. 

 

“I feel like I’ve lost a lot, and sometimes I wonder if it would’ve been better to just never have cherished anything if it meant I wouldn’t have to suffer losing it,” he smiled in a way as if to say that it couldn’t be helped. “But in the end, I could never come to follow through with those thoughts.”]

 

Drip. Drip. 

 

Ah. Who knew it could rain in the winter?

 

[“This book contains all the records that I liked,” He said. “It’s a book about all of ‘my people’. All of you.”

 

His voice grew weaker and his complexion even worse.

 

“This is all I can offer,” he said. “Remember that you’re part of the reason that this book is as ridiculously thick as it is,”]

 

“...Ah.”

 

[“I feel like this moment is going to show up in this book too— no, it probably will,” he chuckled. “Because I feel happy right now.”]

 

Their breath hitched. Tears began to well up in Choi Han’s eyes.

 

[“I’m dying and I feel terrible, but I’m happy when I look back on the life I lived with everyone, and I thought it’d be nice if maybe you’d feel a similar way,” he smiled, again. He’s smiled so much his face began to hurt. “Thank you.”]

 

“...cale.”

 

[“Mn…” he hummed quietly. “I’m sorry for breaking all my promises.”]

 

“...you— bastard.” Alberu sounded angry, but it was as if he couldn’t even bring himself to feel that way.

 

[He went quiet for a while, breaths beginning to slow with every moment. “...By the way,” he said with a small smile. “Have you all eaten, yet?”]

 

And with a click, the record fizzed out.

 

 

A small silence stretched over them for a long, long time, before Alberu broke it.

 

“...ha.”

 

“...that unlucky punk,”

 

“His final words to us are really…”

 

“I can’t believe he— haha!”

 

Alberu, even Choi Han started laughing, with tears streaming down their faces, and soon enough everyone was. They laughed in choked, tired voices. It was really so much like him to say something like that.

 

Such a stupid— such a foolish guy.

 

And then it sort of hit them— that it was really Cale, in that record. That it’s really Cale’s final words, and… that he really died.

 

He was an idiot. Cale was an idiot. Didn’t they tell him not to bear his burdens by himself?

 

Really.

 

Really…

 

Ah, they cried so much today.

 

Hong, who was sitting close to Eruhaben, wiped his tears and turned the page. He pressed his finger on the top corner.

 

[Three children, On, Hong, and Raon, slept next to Cale. The candle grew dimmer and the sound of humming filled the room as the snow outside continued to fall.]

 

“Ah,” he gasped. “Th-This is… This was from the night before, when we were sleeping…”

 

Alberu reached out and touched the page as well, on the opposite corner from where he was sitting. An image was formed in his mind.

 

[Steam wafted from the fresh hot plate of steak that sat atop the table in front of him. The flavorful sauce was melting all over the piece of meat. A cup of tea was set down next to it.

 

“Mn… Beacrox’s steak is really the best,” Cale said, satisfied as he began to dig in.]

 

“All I see is…” he chuckled and tilted his head. “steak?”

 

“We had that for dinner last night,” Hannah replied as she helped to wipe her brother’s tears.

 

“I guess he really liked it, huh?” 

 

Beacrox, who heard this, had his eyes widen. Then a small, sorrowful smile found its way to his face. “...I see.”

 

“But it’s different from what Hong saw, right?” Rosalyn asked.

 

“Huh…” 

 

After some investigating, they found out that each page after the last record was divided into four parts, starting from each corner. Each part contained a different record.

 

“Ah, we should write down which record is which,”

 

“I’ve got paper, here,”

 

[“Weak human! Listen to this poem I learned to make today!”]

 

[“Can we have ice cream today? Please?”]

 

[“You should try reading this book. I picked it up earlier, it was one of the books that the duchess sent over. I like it.”]

 

Small moments with the kids were here, their expressions and voices clearly recorded. It felt as if their presence brightened the surrounding area within each memory.

 

[“Cale-nim, what kinds of shows did you like to watch?”

 

“I didn’t really watch any,” he shrugged.

 

“Hm, then… How about any books? Did you like comics?” Choi Han asked as he sat beside him, storring his cup of tea.

 

Cale hummed at that, setting down his own cup. “I read a few,”

 

“Do you know the one called, mn, ‘Chronicles of The Legendary Sword Emperor?’” He sounded quite enthusiastic. “I really liked it. It’s murim, and it was still ongoing back when I was in high school. I’m not sure how it’s going now…”

 

“...” Cale looked at him strangely. “You mean the one that’s… decades old?”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Mn, from what I know, there was a movie adaptation for it…”

 

“There was!?”

 

“And the comic finished serialization,” Cale nodded. “I’ve never read it myself, but I think Team Leader mentioned getting the role of an extra in the reboot once..”

 

“Eh?! Really!?” His eyes were sparkling like an excited fan. Cale laughed.]

 

“Ah, it’s a little embarrassing…” Choi Han mumbled, and Rosalyn who was beside him chuckled slightly.

 

“So… if young master Cale was really— he’s a transmigrator?”

 

“He’s from my world.”

 

“Oh.”

 

[“Ah,” Cale hummed. “The myth of Perseus and Medusa— I guess I was rambling about that,”

 

“Oh, a myth?”

 

“Greek, like Theseus,”

 

“I never did learn about him either,”

 

‘It’s a long story, I’m too lazy for that,”

 

“Haaa, you’re no fun,” Alberu sighed.

 

“You’re interested in these kinds of things?” Cale asked.

 

“How could I not be interested in the culture of other worlds?”.

 

He shrugged. “That’s fair,”]

 

“Random conversations like these are also here…” Alberu remarked with a huff as they turned the page.

 

[“They’d want to know my favorite color?”

 

“Why wouldn’t they?”

 

“I don’t have one.”

 

“Not even one you like to just look at?”

 

A rotoscope of different imagery, colors vibrant, flashed through his mind.

 

“Then I like all colors.”]

 

Mary’s eyes that swelled from the tears she cried sparkled. “Ah,”

 

“What a cliche bastard,” Alberu laughed to himself.

 

“That’s such a childish answer,” Bud added from beside him.

 

Even so, they had smiles as they thought about the reason why.

 

[“Just leave it to me, weak human!” In a moment, the finished dishes on the table began to levitate and carefully escorted out the door. Hong even came back in to help bring out some plates and cutlery. What reliable kids.

 

“On, how are the dumplings?”

 

“They’re almost ready~” she smiled as he sealed the ends with her fingers. She and Beacrox had been working together on ingredient prep as well as folding the various dumplings at the ready. They were quite insistent, still not letting him near a knife, or just anything sharp actually. Unfortunately, there wasn’t much he could do about it.

 

Cale smiled a little as he sampled the japchae. “Good job,”]

 

“Ah… I remember that,” Alberu hummed.

 

“Mn… The food was delicious that time, right?”

 

“S-So, if… if young master Cale was a transmigrator… and from Choi Han’s world, at that— does that mean that the reason he was so good at making those dishes is because…” Jack mumbled.

 

“Ah, they were the food he used to eat, right? No wonder he was so skilled.” Lock nodded as he wiped his eyes.

 

“So that’s why…” Beacrox trailed off, thoughtful.

 

That was all they did, for hours. Flip through page after page of Cale’s records, the ones he held so dear. 

 

They saw the world through his eyes, and sometimes they could understand his thoughts. They watched closely to the mundane activities he did like read novels and sit out on the terrace, the ways he did small things like fill up a cup of water three-quarters of the way, and tie his hair back with black ribbons, stare at the delicate snowflakes that caught on his jackets, and warm his hands with his breath in the cold. 

 

They listened to his voice when he spoke, and the thoughtfulness of his silence that they never realized when he was listening to someone else's words. They paid attention to the small things he found joy and satisfaction in, and saw the way they were drawn in his records. 

 

Their voices rang clear, their laughter sounded full, and their expressions were discernible. Every little action was recorded with detail, as if it was precious and important.

 

Within those records compiled of Cale’s existence, he was not a hero or a devil, but just another person who lived. It didn’t showcase all his greatest and most grandiose moments as the war hero, nor his worst. He was simply Cale Henituse, the person who they cherished, and the person they lost.

 

[“The person who saved us and cared about us, that was you, right?”

 

“...” Cale stood, still as if he was frozen in place with each added sentence the kids spoke. They weren’t as tense now, in fact, it seemed like he had just mentioned something normal to them. Both On and Hong were smiling up at him.

 

“You’re the only Cale we know,”]

 

“...” On let go of the page, and then touched it again, and then let go of it again. “...i didn’t think those words mattered so much to you.”

 

[“Oh, Cale-nim,” It was Choi Han’s voice. “You should have some,”

 

He was handed a small bowl with a dumpling on top, and some dipping sauce. Choi Han also gave him some chopsticks. “Haaa…” he blew on it before taking a bite. “Mn…!”

 

“Is something wrong?”

 

“...I burnt my tongue,” he mumbled, chewing through carefully. Choi Han quickly handed him a glass of water. It tasted a bit different compared to the ones he had in Korea, but it was still good.

 

“So?” Beacrox asked. “I used one of the recipes you wrote down.”

 

“Mm…” he hummed, before nodding. “It tastes good. Delicious, actually. Thanks.”]

 

“...” Beacrox stared off quietly.

 

[The golden plaque sparkled under the light, and Cale smiled, satisfied. “Your grace knows no bounds, your highness,”

 

Alberu flipped through his pile of endless paperwork and sighed. “Ha… how shameless you are, young master Cale,”

 

“This shameless subject admires your radiance and generosity. Truly, I am grateful beyond compare— It is a blessing to be bestowed with such a treasure from the brightest star of—”]

 

“Haaa…” Alberu rubbed at his dry eyes while laughing. “You were really that happy about these instances huh, you greedy punk,” he smiled in a painful sort of way. “I’ll give you as many plaques as you want, so…”

 

Cage spoke, suddenly. “Th—! That god,” she said. “He told us to… Flip to around the 800th page or so?”

 

Alberu reached out and did so, landing somewhere near the middle of the giant book.

 

[ When I opened my eyes, I was inside a novel. ]

 

“Ah” Rosalyn gasped as they listened.

 

The record recounted the first time Cale had woken up in this world.

 

To be honest, it was all— everything still just felt very disorienting, to them. They were just left with surprise after surprise, and even now it felt like they haven’t really taken in everything. It all still felt like a dream.

 

Somewhere deep in their hearts, as they held motionless thin hands, they waited for a pulse. 

 

Somewhere, deep down, they didn’t want to believe it. They waited on a miracle, because to them, Cale was like a miracle. 

 

It was a useless hope.

 

[“Cold water.”

 

“Excuse me?”

 

“Please get me some drinking water.”]

 

They learned that in his world, their world was a novel. It was a concept so ridiculous that it was difficult to grasp.

 

They also learned that their story within that novel was far different from the way their current fates turned out.All because of one person.

 

Two years.

 

For most individuals who were in that room viewing these records, it didn’t change a single thing, because the Cale they had met and gotten to know was the person who had transmigrated into his body.

 

That person, they also learned that his name was Kim Roksoo. He originated from Choi Han’s world.

 

Beacrox stared down at the empty and blank pages of the book for a long, long time. Then he glanced at his father. “...” Then he sighed, sat down, and closed his eyes as if he was deep in thought.

 

No matter what kind of person Clae Henituse was before the transmigration, unpleasant or not, learning he was replaced in a single night without you ever noticing it, it was a staggering revelation. 

 

Ron, who had a few days to sit and think on it, was unaffected.

 

Then, they flipped the page, and…

 

The records of Kim Roksoo’s life began.

 

[A tall man, clad in all black, was covered in scars. Peeking from beneath his sleeves, the corners of his ears, his face. His reddish-brown eyes held a stone-cold gaze.]

 

Lock let out a soft gasp. “...Young master Cale.”

 

“This is… him?” Hannah said, slowly. She studied the marks that littered his skin closely. “...”

 

Eruhaben’s gaze softened. “He has that same look in his eyes.”

 

[Kim Roksoo sorted through his paperwork with efficiency, as he’d done it a dozen times before. Monster reports, new data, missions, reassignments, evaluations and reviews. He could feel himself zone out somewhat as he shuffled through them like he was on autopilot.

 

As he stood up to move his papers, he felt a tug on his turtleneck shirt. Kim Roksoo turned around.

 

There was a small child blinking up at him.

 

“...huh?”]

 

“He’s really efficient, hm?” Alberu mumbled. He thought about the way he sorted through all of his own paperwork in a single night. He supposed that kind of experience could be attributed to this.

 

“So he worked a kind of administrative job before this?” Rosalyn wondered aloud.

 

“Mn, he seems a bit… fit for that kind of occupation,” Eruhaben mumbled. 

 

“Is that really him? I can’t believe he used to be so… muscular,” Bud sounded baffled. “What happened after he got here?”

 

“If it’s Cale, he probably got lazy,” On spoke. A few chuckles rang out at the thought.

 

[“Ahjussi,” the child said. The little girl with cute pigtails sounded curious. She then lifted her arms and made grabby-hand motions. Kim Roksoo awkwardly stared back.

 

“Ah.” he even more awkwardly lifted her off her feet. 

 

Staring at her wide brown eyes up close, he realized who this little girl was. It was unmistakable, with the amount of pictures Kim Min Ah showed off. She was her cute daughter.

 

“Ahjussi,” she reached forward and touched his face. Her tiny hand slapped and smushed his face a few times.

 

“...mn,”

 

She frowned, as if something wasn’t right. “Why’re you all hurt?”

 

“...Ah.”]

 

“He’s so…” Hong chuckled. “Awkward.”

 

Their heart ached when they realized they missed this awkward but affectionate person.

 

[“I… It doesn’t hurt,” he tried to explain.

 

“These’re.. Mn…” she frowned, deep in thought. “Scars. Mama has them too,”

 

Ah, so it really was Kim Min-Ah’s child. “That’s right,” was he scaring her? It couldn’t be helped that he couldn’t cover his entire face.

 

“Ahjussi, did monsters beat you up?”

 

“Mn…” he hesitated before sighing. “I guess so.”

 

Kim Min-Ah’s daughter then wriggled around, reaching into her kiddy sling bag with colorful pins on it and pulled out a pack of bandaids. Kim Roksoo’s arms were starting to hurt a little. “It’s okay, ahjussi,” she patted his face a few times as if trying to soothe him. “Mama said that she’ll go and beat up all the monsters in the world, so it’s okay now,” She pulled out a colorful cartoon bandaid and struggled with the adhesive for a while. Then she reached out again and stuck one to his cheek, where a scar was.

 

“Mn, you don’t have to put that on me, the scars don’t hurt me anymore because the injury is healed.” Kim Roksoo tried to reason as the determined child pulled out more princess bandaids from her bag. “It’s a waste,”

 

“But papa says that sometimes they still hurt,” she said. “Papa says mama’s scars have ghosts behind them, and sometimes they hurt her again. It’s not a waste if it stops the hurt,” she stuck another over Kim Roksoo’s eyebrow. “You look like you have lotsa ghosts, ahjussi,”

 

“...” Hm, phantom pains, huh? “Aren't ghosts scary?”

 

“Are they scary for you, ahjussi? It’s okay, don’t cry, I’ll beat them all up for you, okay?”

 

“No… I mean,” he sighed. Kids were a bit tougher nowadays, huh? “You aren’t afraid of ghosts?”

 

“I dunno,” she shrugged. “Never seen one. But I’m not scared of scar-ghosts. They’re just annoying.” she said. “I don’t like it when they bother mama, so I’ll scare them away, so her scars don’t hurt anymore and she can show them off,”

 

“Show them off?”

 

“Scars’re cool,” she stuck a kitty-bandaid on his forehead. “Mama says it means you win, and it’s like a little souvenir.” she hummed. “She talks about a guy who has a lot of souvenirs at her job. I think he’s cool. Mn, but you’re also cool, ahjussi. Look at all the pretty souvenirs on your face,” she poked his face with her finger and dragged it around, like a pattern. “See? There’s a star on your face. That’s cool.”

 

“...” Kim Roksooo sighed and dialed Kim Min-Ah’s number. “You have a good imagination,”

 

She smiled. “Thanks,”]

 

The record fizzed out. They couldn’t help but feel fondness in their heart. No matter how cold he seemed, this person— Cale, he’s always had a soft spot for children. 

 

There was more, after that.

 

Kim Roksoo took this thing called a bus everyday to work. He went on morning runs and blended protein shakes. He only ever eats convenience store food that could be heated with either a heating machine called a microwave, or hot water— though they didn’t look very healthy. He had a leadership role as a Team Leader at his company, and was very diligent. His closet was full of black turtlenecks and dark trousers. His hair was short and black and he’d only spend a second combing through it in the morning. His team members always worry about him. He buys dumplings every day from an old lady down the street. Sometimes, he drops portions of food for stray cats and silently leaves leftovers for people on the street. He has a job hunting monsters, and he gets hurt, like he did when he was in their world. Everyone worries about him too, like in their world.

 

When they dug deeper, as the sun began to slowly sink, he was twenty, and there were two people who were always by his side. He wasn’t a team leader at the time, and was almost as frail as Cale was. 

 

These two people had the clearest voices and the most detailed expressions. Their eyes shone in the sunlight and each strand of their hair seemed clear as day. 

 

[“Roksoo-yah!”]

 

They were present, almost in every record.

 

[Lee Soohyuk’s hair was slightly strewn about, and the rest of the team was cheering. Kim Roksoo and Choi Jungsoo were laughing like crazy amid the disco lights at the karaoke.

 

The pop music blared. “It’s just— Sweet dream~ It’s fated today so wait for me there, I’ll be seeing you soon, whoa~”

 

Choi Jungsoo was holding his phone up and recording. “This is priceless. I’m never letting that bastard live this down,”

 

Kim Roksoo sat and drank his iced tea while trying to hold back his laughter. He was also recording. “Pfft—”

 

The disco lights illuminated a captivating glint in Lee Soohyu’s eyes as he held the mic with all the confidence in the room and sang in his deep, baritone voice. “Lord please! When this song finally ends…” 

 

“Please come and save this poor soul!”

 

The rest of the team was clapping along while acting as backup. “My… Father, my universe~”

 

“Standing at the edge of a cliff~!” He grinned, loosening his tie. 

 

Kim Roksoo mumbled as he sang along to the lyrics. Damn his ability for making songs get stuck in his head so easily. “My… father my universe…”

 

“Praying that you come take away this poor soul— now I,” he turned towards the camera Choi Jungsoo was holding. “Live in darkness~ Bring me brightness—”

 

“Pfft— haha!” Choi Jungsoo laughed.

 

“Show me proof you hear my sound~”

 

“I hear you loud and clear,” Kim Roksoo said sarcastically as he dipped his fries in sauce.

 

“Live in darkness, bring me brightness,” he smiled in a dazzling way only a protagonist-like actor could. “Show me proof that you’re here now lord~”

 

The sound of applause and cheers rang out. He smiled at Choi Jungsoo and Kim Roksoo, and was then pulled down into the seat so he could relax a bit. The fact that Lee Soohyuk was a lightweight was a fun surprise for them. The sappy love songs and dramatic k-pop idol-esque singing was also fun.]

 

The loving way they were remembered, it made them wonder how much he cherished these two people.

 

Through the records shared with them, they continued to understand more things about Cale over the course of his past life.

 

His favorite food were spicy soup dumplings and homemade seaweed soup, he was the earliest riser on weekdays and slept like a log on weekends. He read webnovels on his cellphone during company breaks, and he was as reckless as he always was. He used to laugh a bit more freely, and his shoulder shook in tandem with the vibration of his voice. He always won at memory games and was petty. He had a habit of clicking his pen or tapping the table when he was thinking. 

 

They were all small things that really reminded them this person who looked completely different, was their beloved Cale Henituse. 

 

The hours faded into the night, the sky darkening like spilled ink on watercolors. In those hours, it felt as if the world outside mattered little compared to their small candle-lit lounge in the villa. Couldn’t the world stop, just for a while? Couldn’t time halt, slow its steps for their precious person? Can’t the sun hang in the sky for a little longer, so it could warm his cold body?

 

Couldn’t the universe be considerate of the mourning?

 

They stopped their page turning, for a moment. Everyone had small paper cuts on their fingers.

 

A few people had fallen asleep, tired from… grief, perhaps.

 

The only ones left were Rosalyn, On, Alberu, Choi Han, Eruhaben, Ron, Beacrox, and a few others.

 

They stopped, maybe to take a break.

 

[A warm steaming bowl landed on the wooden table. The small child, covered in purple bruises, sat up in his ragged clothes and stared.

 

“Go on,” the owner said, sliding the bowl close to the child. “Eat,”

 

“...” Kim Roksoo’s empty dark eyes lit up with a sparkle. “...for me, sir?”

 

“Yes, for you,” he sighed, filling up a glass of water for him. “Hurry and eat. You’re so skinny a worm could mistake you for a stick,”

 

“...” he looked nervous as he reached out for the chopstick with shaking hands. He split them apart and inhaled a breath. “Th… thank you for the food, sir.”

 

The owner hummed back, wiping a table as he watched the scrawny little kid carefully dig into his bowl of soup dumplings. 

 

The taste was amazing. It was warm, and the broth was savory and flavorful. It burned his tongue a few times, and the owner scolded him, but he didn't care. He hasn't eaten in so long. It was delicious and he wished he could ask for more, but—

 

Another bowl landed on the table. He looked up.

 

“Aigoo. Growing kids should eat more,”

 

That little restaurant felt so, so warm.]

 

It was an early record from Kim Roksoo’s childhood.

 

It wasn’t one they were prepared to witness.

 

Rosalyn stared down at the blank page for a while. Her expression looked empty. Then she lifted her gaze towards the person lying still on the bed and broke down.

 

Lock, who was leaning next to her, opened his eyes for a moment and placed a blanket over the both of them. He leaned closer and rubbed soothing circles over her shoulder.

 

On was staring off, emptily, like she wasn’t present in the room and detached. Alberu recognized that look and pulled her closer, and placed a warmed cup of tea in her hands. Not hot enough to scald and warm enough to soothe. She slowly closed her eyes and laid down on a pillow, next to Hong and Raon.

 

The record book was set down, and so were their notes. Everyone held each other in a mess of blankets, tears, grief, and passed the cold night quietly awaiting the rising sun. Awaiting a miracle. Awaiting something.

 

A miracle did not come.

Notes:

So how we feeling?

 

Hehe! anyway, the question now must be, what's next? Well, friendo, truckton of mourning, that's what. Every chapter after this will be nothing but pain and grief and every happy moment will be haunted forever. It's time for my favorite acivity: haunting the narrative!

there's a lot of stuff to explore, a lotta feels, and if i've got an estimate we're halfway through this fic or so, maybe 5/8ths at best. Please stick around, and I hope you enjoyed this chapter :) Goodnight, I'm gonna go pass out on my couch or something. Feel free to curse me on my Tumblr, asks r always open and i promise i'll answer when i ahve the energy :)

Cale is happy he lived.

Chapter 16: flowers.

Summary:

Cale is gone. There's flowers, regrets, and a funeral.

Notes:

There are a lot of things i want to say like oh my god, 15k hits and 1k kudos like holy frick you guys. And also the amount of comments from last chapter. It seems like we're all grieving, huh. Well, you clicked back here with your own two fingers.

disclaimer, i have no clue how funerals work. I've never really attended one. Nevertheless, hopw you enjoy (?) it. happy grieving.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

The sun rose, and the world continued to spin, despite everything.

 

Alberu had to wake up early to take a call from his aunt Tasha after he suddenly disappeared the other day. He’d briefly mentioned that he’d be absent, for a while, and then never answered any other calls made. She had to stop when she saw the disheveled, exhausted state he was in.

 

“...” he stared at her through the video communication device, and spoke in a sore voice. Choi Han listened from the corner as he clutched the record book in his arms.

 

 

Someone had to break the news to the Henituse family. 

 

Alberu helped issue a royal summon, directing them to the Super Rock villa. It was hard to even look them in the eye, but Rosalyn and Choi Han, who they were most familiar with among the bunch, guided them towards his room.

 

And then left them be.

 

“...” Deruth stood still at the doorway, and when his eyes landed on a still red-haired figure, his entire world crumbled in a moment.

 

“Hyung-nim!” his second and his third children rushed past him in a flurry, and duchess Violan’s hand squeezed his shoulders tightly, and he regained his senses. 

 

“...my son.” he said slowly as he watched Basen take hold of his shoulders and shake him, more incomposed than he’s ever been, and Lily collapse with tears streaming down her face after placing a hand on his pulse. He rushed towards his bedside. “MY SON!”

 

He took hold of his hand and held it tightly in his grasp. It was so— cold. Limp and unmoving. Oh, when did he get so thin? When did his son end up this way? He pressed his thumb against his wrist and felt nothing. “No, no, no…” he pressed his wrist against his cheek. “Please, no, this can’t…”

 

He closed his eyes and for the first time in ages, he prayed. He pleaded and begged for any god in the sky. Deruth prayed. For Cale.

 

It wasn’t supposed to be this way. It wasn’t supposed to. Violan stared at the pale deathly face of her stepson and felt her breath catch in her throat. It shouldn’t be this way. 

 

That was her son. 

 

“..no,” she said softly. “No.” the day Cale died was the day she died. It didn’t matter that he wasn’t her birth son and it didn’t matter that he used to be distant, Violan cherished him just like her own, and he was her own.

 

That was her son, lying still and lifeless.

 

That was her son.

 

“...hyung-nim.” Basen fell to his knees. “...hyung.”

 

It felt like they could finally get close to him. It felt like after all these years, they were finally getting somewhere— like they were relying on each other and Cale was opening up. They made promises. It should’ve—

 

His eyes watered. “...hyung.” 

 

Lily pressed her thumb against his pulse, over and over again. Checking. Trying to correct herself. Edro had taught her how to check for someone’s pulse– but she’s inexperienced. She’s still a student and she could be wrong. This could all just be wrong—

 

All that training, all that practice— her oath and her promise to protect the territory. 

 

It must’ve all been meaningless if she couldn’t even protect her own Orabuni.

 

She stared at his closed eyes and her pupils shook. Her own Orabuni—

 

“...” Choi Han heard the sound of wailing from outside the room and silently closed his eyes.

 

 

They stormed the temple as soon as everyone was awake.

 

The answers they were met within the prayer room, echoing, weren't good ones.

 

There’s no way to bring him back.

 

“A deal— I can trade more of my lifespan—”

 

This is beyond my control. Even if you offered the entire universe… The God’s voice trailed off. Nothing can bring back Cale Henituse.

 

Choi Han’s palms were shaking as they gripped his scabbard.

 

“...he’s gone?”

 

 

The god sounded as if he was hesitating.

 

He’ll reincarnate. 

 

They lit up. “Then—”

 

He won’t remember his past life. 

 

“We’ll make a deal so that he can regain his memories— that much… if you can’t bring him back, you could at least do this much, can’t you?”

 

I can’t do that either.

 

“Why!?”

 

It’s just how it is. He said. It’s the laws of a balance I can’t control. 

 

Before they could plead for anything else, he was gone.

 

 

Time felt like an illusion. Some sort of lie. It felt like a chunk of him was taken away, an important piece of him gone. It felt as if the weight that kept him steady upon the earth was lifted off, leaving him stumbling. It felt like he was a ghost.

 

The seconds, minutes, and hours of the day were slipping past his fingers, leaving him senseless. Glued to place. Chained down. The simple idea of taking a step forward felt impossible. Grief was a thief of vitality, and right now Choi Han felt like a numb, dead man.

 

“Stop.” Rosalyn had a stronger grip than she looked. She was pushing down and squeezing his arm, and… when did he get to the training grounds?

 

Choi Han lifted his gaze. Lock and Rosalyn were there to meet his eyes. Her eyes looked sharper, sterner. There were dark, black bags under her eyes and they seemed red and puffy. She looked exhausted beyond belief.

 

Lock stood next to her, his tall posture slouched, and he looked tired. He looked so very tired of crying, and he looked so very tired of watching other people cry. His tired gaze softened into concern as he looked at Choi Han.

 

He tried to lift his hand which gripped his sword, but Rosalyn’s grip grew tighter. “Stop it.” she said, sounding as stern as she looked. “This— this is no way to cope.”

 

“...”

 

“Hyung,” Lock’s lips pursed into a line as he looked won at his hands which— they were bleeding. When did that happen? He sighed “have you… eaten, yet?”

 

“...” 

 

The strength in his hands gave out and his sword, which was tightly clasped in his hands just a moment ago, rolled to the ground in a weak release. Rosalyn and Lock wrapped him in a tight hug, and it felt almost as if they were trapping him.

 

“...Ah.” he let out a soft gasp as he stood, arms wrapped around him in a secure embrace. “I—” when did he start crying?

 

“...we all miss him,” Rosalyn mumbled over his shoulder. Her hands were shaking. “We really, really miss him, and…” she inhaled a trembling breath. “He— he wouldn’t have wanted us to hurt ourselves.”

 

Rosalyn spoke, voice steady though it quivered at the end of her words. Choi Han knew, this person was strong and this person was very smart. He knew that Rosalyn was one of the people who understood Cale more than anyone.

 

“He wouldn’t have wanted us to miss meals,” Lock said in a shaky voice. “And he— he’d probably be mad at you right now, hyung,”

 

Ah.

 

“...And you can’t miss meals because it’s colder now, so your body is going to burn through more of its energy so it can keep you warm. Have you eaten yet?”

 

The person who was very strict about these kinds of things, he would surely scold Choi Han for training until his sword was covered in the blood from the scrapes and cuts on his palms.

 

Lock, who was also very diligent, must have been scolded and reminded by him in a similar way, many times.

 

That person, he would no longer come to them during training hours to scold them anymore.

 

Ah, so Cale was gone. He was really, truly gone.

 

So they stood there for a long time, holding each other while crying. Choi Han cried a lot. He cried and cried until the tears stopped enough for them to make their way back inside the villa.

 

“....Let’s go pick flowers, after this.”

 

For the first time, he felt like he could take just one small step forward, with two precious people at his side.

 

 

A few short days after the death of Cale Henituse, they would hold a funeral for him.

 

The word funeral left bitter tastes in their mouths. It felt wrong. It felt— it didn’t feel like that was how it should be. 

 

Raon didn't want to let go of his human. Raon never, ever wanted to let him go, again. He didn’t understand why they had to do this. Why they had to take him and put him in a box and then bury him under. It was unfathomable and ridiculous to him. It was unimaginable to him that the person who was laying on the bed right now would simply be thrown away like that.

 

He didn’t want to. No. 

 

“...Little kid,”

 

No. He didn’t want it.

 

Eruhaben sat at the foot of the bed. He stared down at Cale’s body— his corpse, with a complicated expression. Raon’s grip on his bony, thin arm grew tighter. It was cold. It was so, so cold.

 

“We’re going to bury Cale,”

 

“Why!?” he screamed, anger brewing against his skin. “Why must that happen!? What’s the point!?”

 

They were honest questions.

 

What’s the use of shoving his precious human underground?

 

Wasn’t that a cruel thing to do?

 

Eruhaben stared down emptily, and lifted Cale’s other hand. He circled patterns over them, as if he would be able to feel them. “Us dragons are existences which are close to nature,” he began. “And so when we die, we will simply turn into mana and return to nature. That is how it is for us, and it is considered a beautiful death.”

 

“...” Raon stared at him, tail coiling tighter around Cale’s arm.

 

“Humans aren’t able to do that,” he said. “Their bodies cannot return to nature on their own, unlike us.” He stared down at Cale’s limp hand once more, gentle in his grip as if he didn't want to accidentally graze him with his nails. “Little kid— you know, there is a belief that says humans were made from the soil,”

 

“The soil…? Like dirt…?”

 

“Yes,” he sighed. “They believed that gods carved them from the earth,” He set Cale’s hand down, smoothed over his skin, and let go. “And because they can’t return to nature on their own, their loved ones send them off for them,” he spoke softly. “Just as we dragons return to magic, the humans return to the soil.”

 

“....”

 

“Well, they have many different practices, however, I think this would fit him best. Either way, to humans, handling each other as they pass on is an act of care.” Eruhaben remarked, pushing a strand of hair out of his gaunt face. “Because he is a weak human, he’ll need someone to help him return to nature,” he closed his eyes, and then looked at Raon. “So let’s send him off.”

 

“...” 

 

Oh.

 

Raon wasn’t sure what to even say, anymore. 

 

Crying was so, so tiring. His eyes hurt. He wanted to complain about it to Cale and demand a hug. He really, really wanted— he wanted—

 

Eruhaben silently opened up his arms and pulled Raon in. It was a secure, and safe hug, surrounded by his long and loose white sleeves like a blanket. His hand gently rubbed up and down his back as Raon dug his face into his chest and sniffled and cried, again. 

 

“...bring him back to me. Give my human back.”

 

The voice shook like a leaf in the wind. It trembled in a way that was nothing like his usual words. It lacked any power, and didn’t feel intense. The little kid who would wail when he cried, shook the ground with his anger, brightened the world with his joy, and surged with energy, was quietly and weakly sobbing into the arms of his goldie gramps. He didn’t feel great, mighty, nor powerful. He was simply a child crying into the arms of an adult.

 

There was snot on his elegant white garments, but Eruhaben seemed to pay it little mind. Instead he rested his chin above Raon’s head and allowed him to sob. Before this, the place where Raon would always cry was with Cale. 

 

He opened his eyes, and looked at the figure that laid still on the bed. With arms that could no longer cradle, a voice that could no longer soothe, and eyes that could never soften.

 

This person was dead, and they’ve kept him for too long.

 

So, once they sent him off, Eruhaben decided it would be okay for him to be the children’s place to cry.

 

Ah, so this was what this bastard meant.

 

“It might be a big favor, but please protect and guide them.”

 

How sly, he’d trapped him in this role before he could even realize it.

 

He gazed upon that unlucky punk once again, and didn’t know whether the weight bubbling from his throat was a laugh or a sob. In the end, it was both.

 

 

It was bound to happen. News of Cale’s death traveled the kingdom like wildfire, and then the entire continent, and then even the next continent, and every part of the sea.

 

A story about how the most valiant and noble hero of the generation was defeated not in battle, however taken by a terminal illness.

 

It shook the entire world like an earthquake.

 

Grief, and an inexplicable and yet perfectly painful sense of loss touched every corner of the land like a famine. 

 

Ah, in the end, the shield did break. The shield that stood still and protected the entire continent finally crumbled.

 

It was a fact that shattered the hearts of many. 

 

And at last, the date of the funeral was announced.

 

 

“....This place is so pristine,” Choi Han mumbled from where he stood. Right now, they were inside of the church of the God of Death. Most funerals were usually held by this church, because aside from the special blessings of the night, the church was also particularly specialized in arranging funeral services. The clean white walls of the interior without even a speck of dust gave off a sense of holiness.

 

There were a lot of people here.

 

Funerals were a bit different here compared to the ones Choi Han vaguely remembered in his memories. For one, everyone was wearing mostly white. Even he did. It was apparently the custom for one to do so, because it was a holy color. 

 

In the large hall with tall ceilings, the sun shone from the tall windows. The light rays that weren’t too hot but brought warmth that touched their skin filtered past the glass and lit up the cathedral.

At the same time, there were snowflakes, slowly falling from outside the window. Their crystal patterns seemed much clearer in the sunlight.

 

The place was decorated in flowers, which were specially preserved with magic. Many of them were chosen by them, and many of them came from the garden at the villa.

 

“....”

 

Sometimes, you could hear the soft, somber tones of grief, through suppressed sobs or muffled cries, quietly echoing in the cathedral like a low hum.

 

There was something strangely peaceful about everything.

 

Even Cale’s expression.

 

It was an open casket funeral. That was supposedly the usual custom here.

 

Inside of a pristine white casket, a bed of long red hair peeked out. It was neat, brushed, and combed by someone who wanted him to look nice. His pale skin could nearly blend into the walls that held him, and his wrists were thin. His eyes were peacefully closed, and the color had left his lips. He was dressed in a spotless white robe-like garment. His arms were crossed over his chest and his fingers were gently intertwined with each other. 

 

His casket, though pristine and white on the outside, was covered in flowers within. It looked as if he was sleeping atop a bed of petals. Each flower was picked, carefully so, and woven in with care. The colors brightened the cold place where he rested. There was a white ribbon, like the one he always wore, tying back his hair neatly. It didn’t seem too tight, neither too loose.

 

“...”

 

It felt like the whole world was washed out. It felt like there was cotton covering his ears. It felt unreal.

 

Cale dying, it felt unreal.

 

He didn’t want it to be real.

 

Even so, he stepped towards the casket when it was his turn, and gazed upon him closer. Even if it looked as if he was sleeping, the familiar rise and fall of his chest was absent, and not a single puff of breath left his lips. 

 

Choi Han held the flower he picked. 

 

On the western continent, this was an unconventional choice for funeral flowers. So his choice must’ve seemed quite strange by the standards of the norm. 

 

The flower in Choi Han’s hand was a single white chrysanthemum. It was the kind of flower you’d see at funerals in Korea.

 

I haven’t seen this flower in a while, even though they grow here sometimes. He thought, as he leaned forward to tuck the small white flower in between the others. How ironic is it that the first time I’ve held it in decades was to give it to you, on your funeral?

 

It felt ridiculous to the extent of absurdity.

 

“...”

 

He lifted one of the pale hands that were folded above his chest, gentle, careful, like he was glass. It was so thin. It might’ve been because he was sick, or maybe because he always overslept and missed meals, even after they scolded him about it. 

 

His hand was cold.

 

“...why did you go alone?” he whispered softly, in a voice that nobody would hear, even in this echoing cathedral. He held that cold, limp hand tighter. “Wasn’t it scary? It must have been. It must have been cold, and it must’ve been lonely, because you went and left all alone early in the morning.”

 

Choi Han chuckled to himself. The one time he woke up early, and it was for this.

 

He had one lingering regret. No, many regrets. But this one was the strongest. 

 

“...i wish I could’ve stopped you,” he said. “I wish I could’ve grabbed your hand, like this, and I wish we could’ve wrapped you in blankets and sat next to you and held you until the moment you left.”

 

He held Cale’s hand and pressed it against his forehead, with the small hope of even sharing an ounce of warmth to the tips of his fingers. Then, he said, softly, closing his eyes. 

 

“I’m sorry,” he said. “...from the bottom of my heart, i’m sorry.” his breath hitched. He wasn’t sure what he was apologizing for. There were many mistakes, many actions that he held regret for. Choi Han was Cale’s knight. “I’m sorry, my liege,” Choi Han was Cale’s ally. “I’m sorry, Cale-nim,” Choi Han was Cale’s friend. “I’m sorry. I’m so sorry. I didn’t protect you.”

 

His warm tears landed on the top of Cale’s palms, and rolled off the surface and trailed down his sleeve. “...i’m sorry… i’m sorry…” Even with everyone watching from behind him, he held the thin and weak hand and mumbled apologies, over and over, softly fading into a weep.

 

 

On’s steps echoed in the large cathedral as she arrived before Cale. She was also holding the invisible Raon’s hand on her right, and her brother’s on her left. She tensed a little when she saw Cale, but quietly exhaled.

 

“...hey.”

 

“...cale-nya.”

 

Raon quietly stared. On sighed, and pulled out the small flowers she was holding. She was going to place it in, before pausing.

 

She carefully reached out for his hair. It felt soft, between her fingers. She lifted the strands and pulled out a flower, and began braiding. Hong watched her, somewhat dumbfounded, but quietly did so as well.

 

“You…” she closed her eyes. “I’m wearing that dress you bought me,” her hands continued to move. She found that her thoughts flowed more smoothly when she was doing something else. “The one I told you that you didn’t need to buy, but you got anyway.” she whispered, before pausing as if he’d just realized something. “...Stupid Cale.”

 

Hong shifted slightly so he was closer to his sister. This way, he could also block the view, so that the floating strands of hair messily braiding itself wouldn’t be visible. The children were weaving flowers into Cale’s hair again, like they always did.

 

“...you know, cale-nya,” Hong spoke softly. “I had a strange dream that morning, when you left,”

 

Flowers that they went and picked earlier that day were being carefully tucked between the strands of Cale’s red hair. He didn’t stir even once.

 

“I heard your voice,” he said in a low voice. “I couldn’t see you, but I heard you,”

 

“...”

 

“It felt warm, and then you were gone.”

 

The braids were almost done.

 

“In that dream, you said something, almost like a whisper— like a secret. If you forgot about it, I’ll remind you one more time.” he said. “You said this,”

 

Hong inhaled a breath, and his voice sounded strained. “You said, thank you for growing up well, all this time.”

 

“...” On’s hand that was combing through his hair shook.

 

Raon, who was on the other side of the casket, looked down at Cale with tired, sorrowful eyes. He looked as if he’d been thinking a lot, and the invisible young dragon opened his mouth to whisper.

 

“Stupid weak human,” he said. Even though he sounded fatigued, his voice trembled as if all his emotions were flooding back anew. “You always do this. We tell you all the time not to do foolish things, but you keep doing them anyway,”

 

They knew that being sick was not foolish. The things that happened to Cale, they weren’t his fault, and he isn’t to blame for his fate. 

 

Even so, Raon was frustrated.

 

“You always tell us not to hide things, and you always tell us to complain to you when something is wrong. Why didn’t you tell us anything?” it felt like there were rocks in Raon’s throat. “You don’t— you’re such a liar, weak human,” he frowned as his voice shook. “You’re such a terrible bastard.”

 

In truth, it was himself that was terrible. 

 

It was himself that was terrible for not noticing. It was himself that was terrible for pushing Cale around even when he was sick. It was himself that was terrible for not realizing that he was suffering even when he was right next to him. It was he, Raon Miru, who was a terrible bastard for being greedy and careless. 

 

He had been too caught up in his happiness, in Cale’s happiness, to realize he was in pain.

 

He sniffled. “I am not great and mighty.” his paws trembled as he pulled something out of his pocket-dimension. “I am a weak and foolish dragon. And this is the only thing I can do for you,”

 

Raon set down a piece of apple pie atop the bed of flowers Cale was sleeping in.

 

But it was a special kind of pie that he put his magic in. It was the kind of pie that would never rot or spoil, and would even stay dry even when tears caught onto it. It was a slice of pie that Raon prepared specially for his precious human.

 

“...It’s for you,” he said softly. “It’s— it’s a send-off gift.” he sniffled once more, wiping his tears. “You might get hungry, so eat this when that happens,”

 

Raon isn’t sure what it would be like to return to nature. He wasn’t sure if it was a sort of journey, or if it would be long. But Cale liked to have snacks when he was lying around in bed and when he was traveling. So he got it for him, fresh and warm. He wanted to give him cookies, too, but he needed to leave room for everyone else’s send-off gifts.

 

“So,” he thought again about Eruhaben’s words and closed his eyes. “Bye, Cale.”

 

On sniffled as she smoothed over Cale’s clothes, trying to blink away her tears. It was hard to see. “We’ll go to bed on time,” she said. “And we’ll keep eating on time, too, and— and we’ll rest when we have to,” she paused before a small smile pulled at her lips. The back of her eyes started to sting. 

 

On recalled a record that was inside of the book. It was a very peculiar one that she didn’t quite understand why Cale cherished it. It took place within an illusionary world, a test within the temple.

 

She chuckled. “We’ll complain about our side dishes sometimes, too,”

 

After looking through the record book, she learned many things about Cale. One of those things was his upbringing that was painfully similar to hers. Which was why she made all these promises to him.

 

“We’ll continue to grow up well,”

 

Hong looked down at Cale, again.

 

Parts of his hair were woven into braids, with flowers peeking out. It reminded him of that day they went out to pick flowers for him and played with his hair as he slept, just like this. He remembered the way Choi Han carried him inside and  they slept next to him, and he remembered the way he woke up with a blanket wrapped around him sleeping on the bed with Cale, youngest, and his noona.

 

He also remembered the morning he left. He couldn’t help but remember and think about it all the time. 

 

That morning, he recalled feeling something warm brush against his forehead in a fleeting moment, and then disappear. Hong had pondered for a long time what that feeling might have been, and today he felt like he knew the answer.

 

So he leaned down, carefully, brushed back Cale’s hair, and pressed a kiss on his forehead, and whispered words softly, gently, the same way Cale had.

 

“thank you,” 

 

For all the warm days, for all the happy memories, for all the gentleness and kindness. For all the love that Cale, for as stubborn as he was, had for them.

 

“...bye.”

 

He tucked a pink carnation behind his ear, the soft petals brushing against his fingers.

 

The children lingered a second longer to send off the person they cherished most.

 

 

Everyone continued to take turns saying words and placing flowers in the casket.

 

Words of gratitude.

 

Bud went with Glenn beside him, and put down a flower. He recalled it was one of the flowers that were woven into his hair, that time, so that way they picked that one.

 

They both bowed, tilting forward. “Thank you.”

 

It was a simple string of words, but it was something they meant with great, great sincerity. 

 

Cale had done a lot for them. Cale had done many things for them. He couldn’t forget that time with the ranger brigade, and he couldn’t forget all those other instances where he allowed himself to get injured and hurt for someone else’s sake.

 

“Goodbye.” if he had less decency, Bud would have left a bottle of wine inside that casket. They never really got to share a proper drink with each other, since that time they first saw each other.

 

Mary placed down a blue flower. It was a flower she had grown fond of since leaving the City of Life and exploring the world above. She could only thank one person.

 

“Young master Cale.” she whispered. “...the world is really a wonderful place.” 

 

The sunlight, the people, the shining blue sky and the clouds. Everything.

 

“I hope that, wherever you go, you’ll be able to think so, too.”

 

They said he would reincarnate. Mary pleaded, with some force out there, that this precious and kind person could be born into a beautiful place that he could cherish. She pleaded for Cale to be born into a person that could love with his whole heart everything about the world and who he is.

 

“Thank you.”

 

Jack and Hannah held hands as they stepped towards the casket. It was already filled with many things. They placed down flowers that grew in their rooms by the windowsill.

 

“...a second chance.” Hannah mumbled. “I received a second chance, thanks to you.”

 

To survive, to take revenge, to live. Hannah couldn’t be more grateful. She squeezed the hand of her brother that was shaking.

 

“Thank you so much.” he said in a quivering voice. “Thank you sos much for saving my precious sister.”

 

And there were words of regret, and frustration.

 

Rosalyn recalled that conversation, in the library.

 

“Ah.” she sighed. “You were bringing up such topics because of this, huh.” 

 

Happy endings.

 

She was tearing up. “That’s very cruel of you, young master-nim.” she whispered. “I hate tragedies of this kind.”

 

Even so, even though she sounded almost resentful, she still swept back his bangs and placed a flower beside him. It was red, and it would never wilt, for all of eternity. 

 

“....” Deruth stood before his son. Jour’s son. It felt as if the world was crumbling all over again, seeing him this way. It felt as if he could crumble where he stood.

 

Violan squeezed his hand and inhaled a shaky breath. Her tired, fatigued eyes, from mourning silently, were firm. 

 

Ah. That’s right. I am his father, and I have failed him many times. 

 

He could not show such a side in front of his son, now. He had to be there for him, even in this moment.

 

Oh, Jour. 

 

I failed to protect him again. I failed to protect our son. 

 

His hands were so cold.

 

Deruth reached out towards his pale face, and caressed his cheek with his shaking hands. “...i’m sorry.” he mumbled. “Please,” he pleaded. “This— Dad is so sorry, Cale.”

 

He’s done so much to try and keep him safe. But he was so ignorant and foolish when it came to his own son.

 

The many times he was hurt, the many times he bled and sacrificed himself.

 

Deruth could only think of all those moments in regret.

 

Violan, who stood next to him, had a stoic expression. Even so, her lips, her fingers, every part of her trembled like she could break any moment. 

 

What was she supposed to do, when her son was lying dead so peacefully right before her eyes, like this?

 

Her son was a hero. Cale would be recorded in the history books.

 

But that never mattered to her. That never mattered to anyone in the family.

 

The most important part— the most important thing of all was for him to leave peacefully, and safe, and comfortable. It didn’t matter to Violan, even after everything, if her son would one day act and misbehave as he did long before, if Cale would become distant again, if he would look at them with cold gazes and go out and cause trouble in the streets. It wouldn’t matter if they went back to that if it meant he would be alive and he would be well.

 

But they couldn’t turn back time.

 

Cale was lying deceased before him now, still as stone, and she hadn’t even realized it was going to happen. That he was sick.

 

Ah.

 

What kind of mother, was she?

 

Basen and Lily went together.

 

They went together to see their precious hyung and orabuni. They went together to see him off.

 

Basen couldn’t help but think of all those moments again. All his memories with Cale, like his life was flashing before his eyes.

 

He thought about when they were younger. The first time they met. It was just after Cale’s mother had passed away.

 

He was a crybaby and was often targeted by the cousins and branch family members for being a stepson. 

 

Cale was brash and blunt, even at that age. He was polite sometimes, though there always seemed to be a tense air about him. Basen remembered how Cale, who was a few years older than him, used to hold his hand. He used to be quite protective, and he used to be quite stern to him. Thinking back now, it was all for his sake.

 

Then he changed one day, and they were distant. At some point, he was the center of attention and he was to blame for many things and threw many tantrums. At some point, the cousins disliked him and talked all the time about getting rid of him. He and his mother never let that happen.

 

He thought they’d grown distant. He was right. But Cale, maybe he never stopped caring for him. Maybe, if he sat and thought about it, he was never so harsh on him.

 

Though he raised his voice at servants, never with him. Though he threw bottles and caused tantrums, he never hurt him or Lily or their parents. Though he cursed everyone, never him.

 

There was care, even in those days. And one day, he changed again. And he was a hero. And he was gone.

 

He changed and changed, but he never truly stopped caring for him, did he?

 

He still kept that fountain pen. He still requested the round rice ball things for his study snack. He still stared at his back.

 

Basen never stopped loving his hyung, and he was too late to realize that Cale was the same.

 

Ah, what a fool, he was.

 

Lily recalled a time from when she was younger. It was a bit difficult to remember things super clearly, but she remembered the way Cale’s gaze used to soften whenever he saw her. 

 

She remembered she used to be carried around by him, and that sometimes he’d play with her. Then he stopped.

 

She thought about the recent years, when Cale would ruffle her hair, fuss about her eating habits, tell her to rest, tell her, ‘good job’.

 

She thought about how she would never have that again.

 

She thought about how she couldn’t even get the opportunity to show her orabuni the result of all that support.

 

Then, she cried.

 

 

Flowers after flowers, words after words. They were all delivered time and time again by grief-filled individuals.

 

Ron stood before his puppy young master.

 

It was strange. He almost reached out to lightly shake his shoulder and wake him up, as he always did.

 

Ron silently smoothed over his white garment, and fixed the flowers woven into his hair. He pushed aside the small stray strands that were strewn over his cheek, and fixed his long sleeves.

 

His silent movements were filled with care, and his thoughts filled with grief.

 

To think that this puppy young master, who he’s cared for since he was an infant, and throughout his childhood years, his rebellious trash-like days, even through wars and battles, though everything— to think that Ron, as the old butler he was, would even get to attend his funeral.

 

It was strange.

 

It was supposed to be Cale, who would see Ron’s last days. It was meant to be Ron who would serve him until the end of his life, as he had decided, and not Cale who would be served by Ron till his final days.

 

It felt unfair. Unjust. 

 

“Are you having a good dream, young master-nim?”

 

He had left behind many of his good memories for them.

 

Ron could only wish that it meant that he had rid of them to make space for new ones, more joyful ones. He held Cale’s hand.

 

“Please rest well,”

 

A flower was tucked in his hair, and he bowed one more time.

 

 

Footsteps. Light, but it felt as if they carried an incomprehensible weight behind them. Short, muffled murmurs rang out, and the people bowed. 

 

Alberu Crossman was walking in a stride that lacked spirit towards the end of the hall.

 

He stopped before him. The sun’s rays illuminated his golden hair like a blessing, a crown gently laid above his head. Even so, his blue eyes seemed to darken in an empty way, though he was stoic.

 

“...Dongsaeng.” Those were the first words he spoke, quiet. It seemed as if the cathedral, the house of death that shone pristinely, stopped its echoing fixtures so that the soft words spoken by the mourning could only be heard by the person it was meant for.

He inhaled a breath and spoke once again. “Cale.” There was something in his hands, golden like his hair.

 

Alberu held the golden plaque in his hands, and carefully pulled aside Cale’s fingers that were intertwined over his chest. The plaque, which he had specially made recently, was similar to the ones he’d often give Cale.Though, more ornate. Rather than flat, it was round like a large coin. It looked like a large crest.

 

At the centre of it was a large shield with wings outstretched carved in gold. Even so, the centre of it had the heart insignia that was seen on Cale’s shield in silver. For the shield that protected the kingdom, for the shield that prevailed many times over, for the shield that shone in the night of the new year, for the shield that has protected many, many people, in many ways. Maybe, it was a final way to poke fun at him too. 

 

Alberu chuckled a little to himself. “Wearing all-white, like that—” he looked holy, like a saint. “You look like a divine being, young master silver shield,”

 

He said all this, and yet Cale didn’t even frown with that expression of his that looked as if he’d eaten a vat of lemons. He almost felt disappointed. Why? He didn’t expect him to rise from the dead, but his heart still clenched.

 

“...ha,” he sighed, tired. Even so, it was a fond kind of exasperation.

 

Alberu’s fingers ran over the rim on the side of the thick plaque. It was smooth, save for one part, which had indents on the surface. They were words, engraved and carved into the side. Though it was a very fancy plaque, the words were simple.

 

For my crazy dongsaeng.

 

Alberu recalled many things.

 

He recalled the records within the book, and how instances where he’d give him the plaque popped up a few times. Ah, what a greedy bastard.

 

He also thought about something Cale mentioned to him once. He’d curiously asked something about the Greek myths from his world, and he began rambling in his office white munching on cookies. It was a small detail that he could’ve probably missed while he was working.

 

“Mn, about the underworld, when you get there you’ll see the river Styx. It’s this huge river that separates the land of the living and the dead. If you died, you’ll need to cross it in order to get to the underworld,”

 

“By yourself?”

 

“Of course not. There’s a guy there called a ferryman who’ll row you across it with his boat. If you pay him.”

 

“Pay? With what?”

 

“A golden coin, or something. A token, if you will. It’s like a transaction, if you’ve got the token for him, he’ll row you across. If you don’t, you’re basically stuck there for at least a hundred years before you can cross. The ferryman’s name is Charon,”

 

“But where are you supposed to get it? I doubt you keep your treasures when you die,”

 

“Mn,” Cale hummed. “Your family is supposed to bury you with one,” 

 

It suddenly came up, in his mind. It felt silly, but one of the reasons he’d done this was because he remembered that story.

 

With a golden plaque as nice as this, he could get on a fancy boat and make it across the river, and then stay in the fanciest place the underworld has to offer. It was a silly wish, but it was a small hope. After all, Alberu was Cale’s backing. An extravagant bastard like him should get at least this much.

 

He placed the plaque, cool against his fingers, in Cale’s hands. It rested over his chest, and gently, he intertwined his fingers over them, once again.

 

Behind that silver shield that sprouted wings and was surrounded by roots like a sturdy evergreen tree that would not shake or wilt, was the sun and the moon. They were not two separate celestial beings, but rather joined together like they were each other’s half. It was different compared to the Crossman’s insignia, which depicted the sun in its full glory, because Alberu was not here as a Crossman, or a crown prince, or a monarch. He was here as Cale Henitue's sworn brother.

 

“Your hyung-nim is here,”

 

Cale Henituse, who was the moon of the Roan kingdom.

 

“I showed up a little late,”

 

Cale Henituse, who was also sometimes like the sun, that vanquished doubt like light that scorched the sky.

 

“Don’t be mad at me,”

 

Cale Henituse, who was also like a distant star that was long dead, but left behind a twinkling light that illuminated the dark and haunts them as if he was still there.

 

“Ah…” he promised himself he wouldn’t cry.

 

Cale Henituse, who was…

 

“Really…” he covered his face with his palm as he felt like he could fall. “You drive me nuts.”

 

Someone he was glad to have met. 

 

On that day, when the moon set, the sun of the Roan kingdom, the brilliant star, dimmed.

Notes:

I reccomend listening to clannad while reading this fic, I listen memento- warm everytime i write and haha. haha. man.

I don't have a complete understanding of grief, but i hope this works out. I think this is also my way of processing certain things, too.

As always, thanks for the support, and love you all :) Happy Anniv yall! seven years of cale chasing slacker-life-chan. Will he ever get the girl? not in this fic.

Chapter 17: handwriting.

Summary:

Things left behind by one crazy, infuriating, dearly-missed Cale Henituse.

Notes:

Hello! ahh, this chapter's honestly kind of underwhleming, but grief is a slow painful process so we'll have to bear with it. Either way, have fun! Mn, heads up tho, updates will def slow down much to my own dismay TwT school is dishing out test after test and a storm is coming like its crazy. I've got practical exams and stuff to do, but hopefully I can pull through and make time to try and be a bit consistent in my uploads at least.

I aplogize in advance for lore inconsistencies, I'll probably get those fixed later if i find anything, i felt like i got a concussion trying to remmeber certain details lol

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

The final record.

 

Getting through the entire book was difficult enough, and they hadn’t even managed to make it to the end when they skimmed through it and skipped a few pages.

 

Over warm bowls of soup at a corner of the villa, seated close to each other, they continued to go through Cale’s records in the afternoon after the funeral.

 

“...the duke and duchess…” On mumbled quietly with a frown. They didn’t plan on publicizing this book or allowing just anyone to touch it, but it was true that they needed to tell the Henituse family about it, as well. The difficult part was the transmigration.

 

For most of them, the reveal of the transmigration was staggering, but it wasn’t a problem because the only Cale Henituse they knew was the one who was possessed by Kim Roksoo. However, it would be different for his family who had lived with him over the course of years.

 

Even for Beacrox and Ron, who had served Cale since he was young, it was difficult.

 

They turned the page, and saved the thought for later.

 

“...”

 

They had only records of Kim Roksoo’s childhood to go.

 

There were only little records of that age, saddeningly so, but even the supposed happy ones were difficult to get through.

 

The small moments of joy that flickered behind wide, dead, fatigued eyes that felt so, so painfully familiar, shattered their hearts with each instance.

 

Finally falling asleep on a flimsy mattress after working and scavenging for food in the streets for an entire day, when his uncle wasn’t home.

 

Satisfaction after learning to messily stitch up the rips in clothes he should have outgrown long ago.

 

So, so many records of food— the smile of a little child over small plates and salvageable scraps, and suddenly everything clicked as they held their bowls of steaming soup, and their hearts broke a thousand times over.

 

The person who always made sure everyone around him was properly fed had grown up without an ounce of that care spared to his name.

 

Rosalyn could hear the sound of Choi Han’s sword shifting in and out of his scabbard restlessly where he sat and watched the record. She’d guess it must be because he was feeling distressed over the state the young child was in, and also due to hostility over the so-called ‘guardian’ that lived in that same house. She could feel fire brewing hot beneath her skin in fury.

 

All these early records at the last pages of the book, were illuminated with small flickers of joy. Joys so small, but indecipherably meaningful to one child. One child they wished they could embrace, but could not.

 

“...”

 

They turned to the second-to-last page.

 

The very first happy record that Kim Roksoo experienced and kept. It was his earliest record, at the bottom right corner of the page.

[“Roksoo-yah,”]

 

He was very young. Maybe around Raon’s age.

 

[Three people were sitting around a dinner table. A simmering pot of stew, plates of kimchi, and various other delicious dishes sat atop the wooden table. The surroundings were a bit faded, like the edges of a page of watercolors, but resembled an apartment. 

 

Two figures sat across from him, next to each other. Their faces and expressions seemed foggy, and it felt like a child’s drawing that had fallen into a sink, lines wobbled and seeping in blurs. The only things that could be made out were vague features, and a faded smile that lined their lips.

 

Even so, it was warm. It was hazy, but so very warm. Like a dream during a child’s afternoon nap.

 

Muffled voices echoed in warm tones. It was hard to tell what they were saying, but the words must have been kind. They soothed him like a lullaby.

 

“Roksoo-yah, you have to eat now,”

 

The little child stared down at his plate of food, with rice and vegetables, and frowned in a detesting manner. 

 

“Aigooo,” a man sighed, but he didn’t sound exasperated. “Roksoo-yah is so picky, isn't he?”

 

“How about a treat after lunch, hm?” the woman’s voice echoed temptingly, like a special offer. “There’s an apple pie in the fridge that mom bought today. You can watch cartoons, too.”

 

“But you have to eat it all, okay?”

 

“...” The child hesitated, but firmed his resolve to refuse the vegetables on his plate. He glared at his plate harder, pushing it away, and glanced up at the figures across from him as if checking if he’s proven his point with a pout.

 

The two laughed. Their voices echoed warmly.

 

“Aw, what a cute little frown you have,”

 

“Mn, it’s no good to be picky, you know,” they smiled. It was fading, slowly, like drying watercolors left in a drawer for too long. For some reason, it felt as if the record was trying hard to hold onto itself. 

 

Their gazes softened, like cotton. “But it’s okay,” they smiled. “Because you’re so cute, and because you’re still little, you can be as picky as you want,”

 

“Mom and dad can handle your tantrums, so whine to us a lot if you want. And then when you’re older, we’ll teach you how to be less picky,”

 

“You have to eat a lot and grow up well, Roksoo-yah,”

 

And slowly, the colors bled off the page and disappeared into white.]

 

“...” 

 

“..ah—”

 

It felt like the air grew stuffy.

 

Kim Roksoo’s earliest fond memory was of a simple lunch with his parents when he was very little. It was so very straightforward, and so very cherished, though faded. 

 

The more time that they had spent looking through the records, the more connected they felt with Kim Roksoo’s emotions, and Cale’s as well. Sometimes they could feel the corners of their lips lift into a ghost of a smile, a warm feeling in their chest, or a sense of absentminded peace. It felt like they could feel Cale’s happiness and his ease, as he did, through every memory. It didn’t hurt any less that he wasn’t here, though.

 

They wiped their eyes, and turned to the very last page. There were words written on that page like the first one.

 

...

 

Thank you for being part of my records.

 

It felt like words meant for them, who were reading the records of Cale’s life in the lounge.

 

And at the same time, it felt like words he left behind for every person in his life. It felt like a conclusion that Cale had come to, after some thought. It felt like the words of a child to their parents, a commander to their subordinates, a dongsaeng to their hyungs and noonas, a team member to a team leader, a grandchild to a grandparent, a subordinate to a leader, an ally to the ones who stood by his side, and one friend to another. It felt like words written by one Cale Henituse, to everyone.

 

They were sincere words, and they were words they would never hear from the person they held dear. 

 

Drip. drip. 

 

Even the mightiest, the strongest, the smartest, none were immune to the force that was grief.

 

“...hm?”

 

There were small bookmarks tucked on the very last page as well.

 

“...ah.” Hong let out a soft gasp, voice quivering from suppressing tears. “It’s… the flowers.”

 

The flowers that the children picked. Lock’s eyes widened when he recognized some wildflowers from the small bouquet that the wolf kids had picked for Cale, which grew in a field near the forest. They’d given it to him all the way back before it even began to snow, months ago.

 

They were pressed into bookmarks. No one was sure when he managed to get that done.

 

There were names written behind them, at the bottom.

 

Alberu read one out. “...On.”

 

Her eyes lit up at the call of her name, and she took the pressed flower bookmark that was held out for her. 

 

On held it delicately in her hands, like it was precious.  She could recall the day she’d threaded these through Cale’s hair on that sunny day, between strands of his red braids. She recalled his sleeping expression in the warm sun of the winter, and stared down at the trinket in her hand again. His familiar quick handwriting was there, too. Even so, it seemed a bit different, as if the person who wrote it had made an effort to write slower and neater, for her.

 

“...” As she closed her eyes and sighed…

 

Something surged through her fingertips. “…Ah!”

 

“What’s wrong?”

 

“Huh—!?”

 

“Noona?”

 

“Are you okay?”

 

Multiple adults jumped to their feet at the alarming sudden noise. She blinked a few times, and suddenly felt a cool sensation wash over her. It felt strange— like a breeze. The wind. 

 

Jack seemed alarmed, looking around. “What was that sudden gust of wind? The windows are closed…”

 

“I—”

 

-Hello.

 

She flinched. There was the voice of a woman.

 

-Mn, you’re On, right?

 

“...H-Hello?”

 

“Noona? What’s happening?” Both Hong and Raon seemed worried and confused about her in equal measure.

 

“On, what’s—”

 

At that moment, the strange voice spoke again. She sounded wistful.

 

-I’m Cale’s friend.

 

On’s breath hitched.

 

-I was the original owner of his ancient power, the Sound of the Wind. I’m guessing you know which one it is.

 

“!”

 

Cale’s ancient power. It was the one with the wind attribute. 

 

“What…” she blinked a few times, as if trying to regain her composure. “You— S-So, you can… talk…?” she stammered, feeling terribly confused.

 

The ancient power brightly replied. 

 

-That’s right. 

 

“That’s… but ancient powers aren't supposed to…?” On glanced at Bud, who was blinking at her, equally confused by what he was hearing here. “But then…”

 

Why was this power talking to her, now?

 

-Mn, Cale asked me to go with you. So now this ancient power, the Sound of the Wind, is yours. 

 

“...Huh?”

 

-Ah, and so is the golden top’s whip, but we can get to that later.

 

She stared off in disbelief for a moment. “...for me?”

 

-Yes. He left most of his other powers for other people as well, actually. They’re all in those bookmarks, with names addressed to them.

 

On blinked and spoke at that moment, coming to her senses. “...The bookmarks—” she spoke, turning towards the record book. “Cale put his ancient powers inside them.”

 

“Wha—!?”

 

“Huh…?”

 

“But how do you—”

 

“There’s one talking in my head right now,”

 

Bud looked at her, wide-eyed. “Talk?”

 

“There’s a lady— Mn, it’s Cale wind ancient power,”

 

“!”

 

“The wind—?”

 

“Ah, the ones he flies with it…” 

 

“So, then…”

 

“Each of these bookmarks…”

 

Seven. There were seven bookmarks there with different names written behind them, excluding the one in On's hands.

 

“You’re telling me he had— he had eight ?” Bud sounded completely stupefied by the conclusion. 

 

“Ha— that unluckily fortunate punk,” Eruhaben scoffed. It really sounded so absurd that someone could have such crazy luck— anyone would say that Cale must’ve been God’s favorite.

 

“Seven and… they talked? In his head?” Alberu repeated to himself, slowly, like he was trying to make sense of it. He’s heard Cale mention it a few times but eight voices in his head? No wonder that punk always acted crazy— anyone would go insane with that many voices talking in their head.

 

On paused for a moment as if she was listening to someone. “...Yeah.”

 

“Choi Han, do yours talk?”

 

He blinked equally astonished by the thought of it. “...No?”

 

It sounded so incredibly ridiculous that some of them laughed. It also felt a little refreshing.

 

Eight ancient powers— when they tried to recall the ones they saw from him, there should’ve been less— maybe five?

 

“On, could you try using those powers?” Beacrox asked.

 

“Mn, okay…” She wasn’t sure how exactly she was supposed to use it. On exhaled a deep breath and closed her eyes. She pictured Cale.

 

Right— he could fly, couldn’t he?

 

A cool sensation swept under her.

 

Whoosh…

 

The breeze within the room suddenly picked up, and whirlwinds swirled at her feet. In a moment, On was flailing her arms around and floating, hovering above the ground. “W-Woah–!”

 

“Ah–!”

 

“You’re really flying,” Jack said, astonished as his hands hovered awkwardly prepared to catch her in case she were to slip, worry lacing his features.

 

“So it really is in the bookmarks,” Glenn said, cautious and in awe.

 

“Ah, when the owner dies, the ancient powers…” Rosalyn trailed off.

 

“Careful,” Hannah advised, and multiple more of them stood awkwardly below her in case she fell. 

 

“....there are markings on your feet,” Raon pointed out. On lifted her pants and sure enough, what looked like tattoos were circled around her ankles. They were bluish in color and had a flowing pattern, like a whirlpool. She thought of the ones near Hais islands in Amiru’s territory as she slowly and carefully landed back on her feet, much to everyone’s relief.

 

“It’s like Cale-nya’s,” Hong whispered in awe.

 

“So, then…” Alberu shuffled through the bookmarks and read their names. There were some for people who were here, and some for people who weren’t here, and… “Ah.”

 

There was one for him.

 

He stared at his name that was written in smooth, familiar handwriting. Alberu picked up the bookmark and stared at the yellow flowers etched into the design. 

 

He was about to say something when a surge of power overcame him, flowing through his fingers “! It’s—”

 

A voice spoke in his mind.

 

It was the voice of a man, mostly quiet, and sounded as if it would only be straightforward with him. 

 

-Cale asked me to stay with you. 

 

“...!” Alberu listened closely.

 

-Mn. So you’re the one who’s going to be the king. A ruler must be able to dominate their subjects and subdue their enemies. Do you know the best method of taking their breaths away?

 

Alberu waited for an answer. The voice then answered with confidence.

 

-The answer is with fear. 

 

Fear.

 

So he had a power like that, huh? “Pfft—” Alberu laughed at the absurdity of it. “That scamming bastard.”

 

The others looked at him as if he was crazy.

 

Yes, this kind of power was the one that suited Cale very well.

 

-And, when you dominate your enemies…

 

The voice continued to speak in his mind.

 

-You are able to give your allies who stand by your side the strength and resolve, as well. That is the power of domination.

 

Domination. Alberu wondered why Cale left him this power out of all of them, even if it felt fitting for him as a ruler. As he thought that, a strange aura suddenly flowed out of him. 

 

There was no visual indicator, however it felt like the pressure of the room heightened by a few degrees. The people around him who had surrounded him with concern and confusion stepped back and flinched.

 

“Crown prince, you—! You seem more powerful!” Raon exclaimed, flabbergasted. “Almost as much as two of the fingers on my paw…!”

 

Coming from a great and mighty dragon, that was quite a lot. Alberu laughed.

 

“This— this aura…”

 

“Doesn’t it remind you of…?”

 

“...It’s like Cale.”

 

They stared at Alberu for a while as the ancient power’s effect toned down and the fearful pressure slowly subsided Alberu examined himself. “It doesn’t feel like I have any new tattoos anywhere…”

 

“So that strong aura was an ancient power?”

 

“Ah…” 

 

Everyone nodded along as if some things began to make sense and fall into place. Some even laughed and scoffed a little at the revelation.

 

“And…” Rosalyn flipped through the bookmarks again. “...This one is for Lock.”

 

Lock, who had been staring in surprise at the sudden occurrences happening around him, tensed at the call of his name and the eyes that diverted to his side. “Me…?”

 

He tried to think of what kind of power Cale could have decided to leave with him, and gulped. His mouth felt dry.


Rosalyn gently handed it to him, the bookmarks with flowers pressed from the ones he helped his younger siblings pick for Cale. He also thought about how they cried when he came back to Harris village with his hyung and noona to inform them of what had happened to Cale, and how he stood next to them as they picked more flowers, for him.

 

And at the funeral, the wolf kids all got a turn to place down theirs in the casket. They hadn’t cried so much since the attack on their village. Maes, who had always been mature for his age and looked out for Lock, allowed him to hug him while he cried for the first time in a while.

 

He held the small reminder with shaking hands while trying to compose himself, when a light illuminated the small bookmark. It was a holy, silver light that he could recognize anywhere. Lock gasped.

 

The light rose, and shot straight into his chest— his heart. He stumbled a bit from surprise but was carefully caught by Choi Han.

 

He rubbed around his chest a few times, and turned away to unbutton his shirt slightly. Over the place where his heart should be, was a tattoo of a silver shield. “Ah—!”

 

“That was—”

 

“Lock, you—”

 

He couldn’t hear the sound of the people around him, simply pressing his palm against his chest and shaking, eyes blinking at a rapid pace as tears began to well.

 

-Hmm, you’re the wolf child. Lock, was it?

 

A voice spoke into his mind as well. It was one of a woman who seemed quite curious, but kind.

 

-You’re really tall, and a lot healthier than Cale was. Good, very good.

 

“I-I…”

 

A warm sensation flowed from his heart to his palms, and a burst of light shot out.

 

“...!”

 

A shield, medium in size, took form. A holy silver light emitted from its surface, and wings sprouted from its sides like a guardian angel’s.

 

Standing behind this shield, being the one who wielded it…

 

Lock felt as if he was staring at the back of someone reliable, and strong. He felt safe behind this shield, and as the wings continued to outstretch, he could only think back to those moments at the Gorge of Death.

 

-As long as your heart beats, this shield will protect you. Even if it breaks, it’ll repair itself, again.

 

The voice sounded like it was smiling.

 

-I promised Cale I’d take care of you and make sure you could properly protect yourself.

 

“...”

 

The silver shield. Such an important power was left for him.

 

“Do you like using the shield?”

 

His answer was immediate. “I do,”

 

“Why is that?” 

 

“Because it can protect the people around me,”

 

So he had believed in him, that time.

 

The shield retracted, dissipating in a beam of light. He could feel Choi Han patting his shoulder in a comforting sort of way, and Rosalyn handed him some water.

 

“Hong is also here,”

 

He looked up and took the bookmark with his name written carefully on it. 

 

Hong closed his eyes and waited for power to flow through him, like it did with everyone else. He wasn’t sure what to expect— however, a blood-red aura suddenly overtook his form before dissipating, like it sunk into him. There was a breeze, but it was different compared to the one that he felt when his noona got her power. It felt more akin to the kind that rustled between the leaves of a large sturdy old tree.

 

“...I don’t hear any voices?” he said, questioningly.

 

“I guess that should be normal, right? Isn’t that how ancient powers are technically supposed to work?” On questioned, eyeing Bud, who was still processing everything and looked as if he could sigh all over the place.

 

“Mn!” Lock suddenly exclaimed. “The— um, noona in my head just said to check the.. Um, satchel? Young master Cale’s…”

 

Mary, who was next to it, opened it up, and a book immediately flew towards Hong and landed in his hands with a thump.

 

“Woah!”

 

“What the—!?”

 

There were words written on the pages, and when he touched the book, a voice echoed in his mind. It was one of a curious teenage girl.

 

-Oh, and who do we have here? Aw, you’re Cale’s cutie, aren’t you?

 

“...Huh?” he blinked dumbfoundedly.

 

-Wow, you even have red hair like me and him! It’s dark yet bright, how pretty. You remind me of the paintings of my handsome older brother from when he was little in our estate. If this was a trial, then you would have definitely passed, already. 

 

“Huh— Wha?”

 

“Hong, are you okay?”

 

“It— uh, she called me cute?”

 

“What?”

 

The voice simply giggled playfully and continued.

 

-Well then~ Hong, was it? I’ll be sticking with you, now. Half of this ancient power is in this diary, and the other half is with you. This is a power called the Annual Rings of Life. 

 

“A— Annual rings of life…” Hong trailed off as he listened. On and Roan, as well as a few other adults peeked curiously over his shoulder to stare at the text on the pages. The voice continued to explain things to him.

 

-It’s a power that will let you see one’s present, past, and future, as rings that look like the annual rings on a tree. Because half of this power is in this diary, the full extent of it can only be used when it’s on your person as well. Otherwise, you’ll only be able to see a portion of it— like only the past or the future 

 

“Oh, okay…?” he looked up, and his eyes widened. There were different rings on everyone there. He averted his eyes. “Ah.”

 

-It can also be deactivated if you wish not to see it.

 

“...alright.” he nodded.

 

-I promised Cale that I would help you out too, so you can read the contents of this diary, as well.

 

Hong cautiously flipped through the pages, which were filled with a dozen different secrets. Raon, who was next to him, tapped his shoulder. He seemed to have already read it with Cale when they first went to retrieve it, and maybe the contents were so important that he had to hide it. He held the red book closer to his chest, carefully guarding it.

 

-The secrets of my family’s, the Thames family’s, research is all here. 

 

His eyes widened. Thames? Hadn't Cale mentioned that family once, before? 

 

-Take good care of it. Mn, you can also find content here about the soul of the person who you really cared about here, and more information on his peculiar circumstances.

 

Ah, the transmigration. Hong felt that despite her somewhat playful and youthful tone, she seemed very well-informed on these complicated things. He really needed to keep it a secret, then. Cale really trusted him, leaving him with all this, after all. 

 

He closed the book and held onto it. “It’s a, hm, wood-attributed ancient power,”

 

“Wood?” Alberu asked.

 

“What does it do?”

 

He smiled. “That’s a secret, for now,”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Well, looking at these bookmarks…” Bud spread out the remaining four bookmarks. 

 

“Ah,” Choi Han’s eyes widened when he saw his name. “One’s mine,”

 

He held the bookmarks like everyone else, carefully in his scarred hands. Something fizzed at his fingertips— it reminded him of when he used the record book. It raced through his hands and then hir arms and towards his core like an electrical current through his veins. There were no special effects like the other ancient powers. He opened his eyes, and waited for a voice.

 

-Mn, hey, Choi Han?

 

His eyes blew wide. “This is—!”

 

-Calm down, first. Don’t react. You’ll freak out the others.

 

It was Cale Henituse’s voice. At his command, he settled down while the others looked at him, biting his lip as he listened closely.

 

-This is a recording— I didn’t turn into an ancient power.

 

“...” Ah. So that was the case. Cale’s delayed voice continued after a short pause.

 

-First of all, I know that you’ve already got three ancient powers. You have a very large plate, but you don’t have to worry too much about this power because this isn't an ancient power, but an ability.

 

“!” An ability— no wonder it felt similar to the effects of record.

 

-This is one of Team Leader Lee Soohyuk’s multiple abilities. You already know about slash, but this one isn’t an attack-type ability.

 

“...I see…”

 

-This ability is called ‘Embrace’. It’s an ability which I inherited from the Team Leader of Earth 1, our Earth, some time ago. I think I mentioned it a few times.

 

“Choi Han, what—”

 

“Shh.” It didn’t even occur or matter to Choi Han that he had basically effectively shushed the future king of the most powerful kingdom on the continent. Alberu scoffed but stayed silent, much to the disbelief of a few people in the room.

 

-Anyways, Embrace, despite the misleading name, is actually quite a terrifying power. It allows you to seal anything into a chosen object. Yes, including living people— I sealed the White Star within the golden plaque with this power. It can seal objects, and I plan to seal my records inside a book as well. You probably already have it.

 

“...” Choi Han glanced towards the red record book that Eruhaben was currently holding.

 

-I embraced a record of my voice into this bookmark, and that’s what you’re hearing right now. As long as you’re holding onto it, you’ll hear it.

 

His grip tightened even more onto the floral bookmark between his fingers. 

 

-It’s also how I moved my ancient powers into these bookmarks. It’s absurdly strong— heck, it even sealed a god. Not even I know the extent of this power. You’re free to experiment with it, go embrace a mountain or something, I don’t care, just don’t make trouble for yourself you punk.

 

“...ha,” he laughed.

 

-If you’re wondering how to use it, I think I put records of its use somewhere in the record book. The same goes for the other ancient powers as well, though their respective owners should have already explained it.

 

Ah. So he’s really thought that far. Choi Han wondered for how long he’d been planning this.

 

-Anyways, I need you to do me a favor.

 

“...”

 

Choi Han was silent for a while, listening without saying a word to something the others could not hear. Then he tucked the bookmark in his pocket and stood.

 

The final words of that recording were this; 

 

-Mn, and… I don’t want you or the others to cry, but that’s a lot to ask. So just go drink some water and tell everyone else to also go drink too, alright? …I’m sorry.

 

It began to buzz and come apart, like a connection slowly being lost over a phone.

 

-Eat well, and don’t get sick. That’s the most important part. You have to keep living.

 

With a click, the voice disappeared.

 

You have to keep living.

 

They were sincere words that came from someone who had also lived by them.

 

“...”

 

Embrace. It really did seem like a powerful ability, from what Cale had described.

 

There were now three bookmarks left on the table. According to what Cale had explained, there should be the Vitality of the Heart, Super Rock, Sky-Eating Water, and Fire of Destruction remaining. Human, rock, water, and fire-attributed ancient powers respectfully. 

 

Some of these powers needed a few extra steps in order to get to their new owners.

 

“Mn, Rosalyn,”

 

She blinked. “...Yes?”

 

“Do you… hm, do you have some kind of object that you always carry on your person?”

 

“Always carry…?” she questioned. “Um— well, I suppose I use my staff often? I keep it in a spatial dimension until I need to use it. And if not that then… my earrings?” she tucked her hair back slightly to show the small ones dangling off her ear. Choi Han remembered Rosalyn mentioned that she used magic to keep them tightly secured on her ears and also basically nearly invincible and unbreakable. The small red gem shone and he nodded.

 

“Alright— um, can I borrow them?”

 

“My earrings…?”

 

“Yes?”

 

“Okay?” It was strange because even Choi Han seemed uncertain of what he was even planning to do and they sounded like they were questioning each other continuously.

 

The earrings, which were pierced like a hook, were taken off and teleported into her hands in a blink with a snap of her fingers. Magic sure was useful.

 

Choi Han then flipped to a specific page of the record book, touched it, closed his eyes, and then sighed and took the earring Rosalyn had just taken off.

 

“Hyung, what are you doing?” Lock asked.

 

“Do you like wearing earrings, Choi Han? There were earrings in the treasury in different colors. They’re pretty too,” Raon suggested. His voice seemed brighter, but fatigued laced between his innocent words like a shadow.

 

Choi Han recalled a time where he wanted to try piercing his ears back in high school but didn’t because of dress codes and sighed. “No, Raon-nim,”

 

“Then what are you doing with Miss Roslayn’s earrings?” Beacrox asked.

 

“Mn, something, hold on,” he said, flipping back and forth between records again. Afterwards, he took the bookmark with red flowers, Rosalyn’s name written beneath, and held it and the earrings, closing his eyes. “Okay.”

 

It took a minute for him to get a sense of what he was doing, but he tried to imagine the way Cale had done it in his records. A red orb, with bright flames rising from it in a dazzling rose gold light, fierce as it parted and danced, emerged in a glowing light from the bookmark. 

 

“Ah—!”

 

“What is—”

 

“That power— it’s definitely the thunderbolt.”

 

“The fire of purification!”

 

After some work, the rose gold flames were sucked into Rosalyn’s pair of earrings. The gemstones brightened and shone before returning to its original color. He handed it back to Rosalyn.

 

“What— what was that?

 

“Can you please put these back on?”

 

“Um… alright?”

 

With another snap of her fingers, they were in place without much trouble. Such precise mana work could only be possible with  the abilities of an archmage like Rosalyn. “Hm…” she could feel a sort of aura emanating from it. Something like—

 

-Hey!

 

She blinked. “Huh?”

 

The voice of a man simply spoke once more. 

 

-I’m sure you’ve already understood the gist by now. I’m an ancient power.

 

“An ancient—!?” but that would be impossible. Mana bubbled at Rosalyn’s fingertips and they worked just fine, the flow familiar and steady. “How in the world—”

 

-Hm, oh! You’re a mage, I remember you. Rosalyn. You’re quite strong— and destructive! This is great.

 

It was strange enough when she noticed a bookmark with her name, despite the fact that possessing an ancient power would create an internal imbalance for a magic-user like her, two forces of nature clashing with each other. It was even stranger when there was now a talking ancient power in her head and with her mana working just fine.

 

-You can still use magic perfectly fine, don’t worry— this is possible because of one  of Cale’s powers. Mn, that punk Choi Han there, has it.

 

“You received an ability from young master Cale?”

 

Ron, who was sharpening his dagger like it was a way to calm himself, looked toward Choi Han with intrigued eyes. He just nodded. “Yes.”

 

“But didn't you already have an ancient power? Multiple?” Hannah questioned.

 

“It wasn’t an ancient power,”

 

“Huh!?”

 

“Then, what is it?” Alberu questioned.

 

“It’s an ability from Earth,”

 

“!”

 

“Ah, like Kim Roksoo’s…”

 

“So that means… I guess it works differently compared to an ancient power?”

 

“Yes,” he nodded. “It’s um, a sealing power,”

 

Jack’s eyes widened. “Seal…?”

 

“I can seal anything anywhere— mn, maybe more like place something. Like an ancient power.” he pointed to Roslayn’s earrings. “That way, it wouldn’t need to affect her plate,”

 

“So— I’m sorry, she can use magic and wield an ancient power?” Eruhaben questioned.

 

“...Yes.” Eruhaben needed to sit down somewhere and a glass of water.

 

“...” Rosalyn also stood speechless, listening to the ancient power in her head who sounded like quite a cheapskate ramble on without pause. Things had become quite a mess.

 

Curiously, she lifted both her hands. Mana, bright and red, swirled in a smooth potion atop her right palm. In the same moment, lightning crackled between her fingertips like static on her left. She was swept away by the amount of power she felt surging through her at the moment.

 

Judging from what she knew of Cale’s use of this power— the thunderbolt, it had the ability to purify dead mana, as well as despair, which was certainly useful. Though it came with some intense physical repercussions.

 

-Don’t worry,

 

She heard the owner’s voice in her head as warm static crackled between her fingers.

 

-I promised him I would take care of you, so you won’t get hurt that much. Cale is a crazy bastard that does everything on a grand scale and that’s why he keeps getting hurt as bad as he does.

 

“Pfft—” she chuckled. “And what makes you believe I’m not a crazy bastard as well?”

 

-Well, maybe you are, but at least this time around you seem more reasonable. 

 

The cheapskate chuckled. 

 

-If Cale finds out you got too hurt while using my power, I’ll never hear the end of it.

 

“...” she stared, speechless, before smiling in a wistful sort of way, whispering. “Oh, but that would mean he’d come back to scold us both, wouldn’t he?”

 

She was really, truly tempted to act foolishly if it meant she could lure him out, somehow.

 

-That’s right. But maybe let’s not cough up too much blood while looting.

 

What a peculiar voice. She couldn’t imagine hearing 5 more, maybe 7, of them. The thought of Cale calmly listening as he did without them suspecting a thing made her chuckle.

 

Oh, really. Her chest hurt.

 

The last one remaining for the people present was addressed to Raon.

 

The bookmark was adorned with bright blue flowers and small white ones. It looked like a starry sky. Raon’s wide eyes sparkled as he took it in his paws, like a small child with chubby hands trying to hold a flower that a parent had picked for them.

 

“Raon-nim,” Choi Han spoke. He recalled what he heard from Cale. “Because this power has a human attribute rather than a natural one, you won’t need to worry about it clashing with your magic.”

 

Alberu Crossman, who was also technically a mage through utilizing dead mana, possessed a similarly human-attribute ancient power. Cale had mentioned the existence of this power to him in the recording but did not elaborate further. Either way, it was an example of a magic user still being able to possess an ancient power without it hindering their magical abilities. According to Cale’s theory, it had something to do with the attribute, and after some research and questioning with the God of Death, his theory seemed to be correct.

 

“!” A force surged through Raon, all the way from the tip of his claw and towards his heart.

 

The voice of an old man was speaking in his mind. It was strained and dry like he had been crying for a long time before this, but he was now speaking mostly calmly.

 

-H-Hello. 

 

His eyes widened. An ancient power. He tried to guess which one this was. It wasn’t a naturally-attributed power, so it was difficult.

 

-Cale trusted me to take care of you.

 

Hearing that made Raon’s heart clench. 

 

-This power is called the Vitality of The Heart.

 

“Vitality of the heart…?” Raon echoed. Heart. His heart. And vitality. Did it have something to do with energy? Was that why his human seemed to have such a hard time sleeping and kept running around everywhere running errands?

 

-It’s a healing power.

 

“...What?”

 

“Youngest?” On questioned.

 

“It’s—! An old man just told me Cale had a healing power!”

 

“A healing power!?” Alberu’s eyes blew wide.

 

“What!?” Bud seemed even more baffled.

 

Ron raised a questioning brow. “Old man?” 

 

“He’s saying… hm…” he tightly closed his eyes and leaned towards the air like he was really listening to someone. “He says it’s a healing power that only heals the user, and that the weak stupid human just forgot to tell us…”

 

“Ho…” Eruhaben raised his brows. He knew he had some kind of power that was keeping the elements at bay in his plate back when he was in an incomplete state. But it was a healing power, huh.

 

“So all this time he— haaa….” Alberu sighed and flopped to the floor in an ungraceful manner. “That crazy punk…”

 

“No wonder he kept saying he’s fine…”

 

“He just forgot? Really?”

 

“Hm, well,” Rosalyn spoke up. “I think was better that way, that nobody else knew,”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Why?” Hannah raised a brow, confused.

 

Rosalyn hummed. “It’s true that we were worried sick for him all the time and not knowing was quite frustrating, but… if his healing power were a known fact…”

“...Everyone would continue to push him past his limits,” Choi Han finished.

 

“Ah…”

 

Just the thought of Cale going through  something like that, perhaps even at their careless hands, was upsetting. 

 

“I guess it’s a good thing that he never said anything, huh?” Bud sighed, tired of being shocked, by this point. 

 

Cale Henituse was just a crazy lucky and unlucky bastard, that was what he was.

 

 

They followed the words of Cale’s final record, and went to look at the things he had supposedly left for them. 

 

They opened the doors to his room, which was meticulously taken care of, as if attempting to freeze everything within like a vessel. From the air, the objects— everything felt like it was still and within place, unmoving ever since their owner had left one bright winter morning.

 

They moved across the hall towards the desk. A stack of books sat atop the wooden surface, unmoved. They were all fantasy novels with exciting titles, a piece of paper peeking out the page of the biggest book which had the words ‘to be read’ written in familiar handwriting

 

This was a space where time stopped.

 

Glenn went and got the key to the drawer on the shelf as said by Cale, and they unlocked it.

 

“...”

 

There were a few things.

 

First, there were many folders, labeled in ink. Choi Han picked up one that was labeled ‘houses’.

 

“...Huh?”

 

“These are…”

 

Multiple documents, with the seals of many different locations and organizations. They were neatly organized, held together with paper clips. Hong picked up the picture of a house in the front.

 

It was sketched out in graphite, a building like a villa surrounded by ice. “This is…?”

 

“Isn’t that the whale territory?”

 

Ron’s eyes narrowed as he flipped through the papers, reading through them. “These are copies of the deeds of different villas and houses, as well as land,”

 

“What?”

 

Eruhaben squinted down at the paper beside him. “These are coordinates,”

 

“Oh! And this is an address, isn’t it?”

 

There were lots of houses and villas. In the Sten territory, in the capitals and major areas of multiple kingdoms, even on the eastern continent, like the Molden kingdom, and even the territories of different races like the whales and even elves. They were all here.

 

“...ha, that punk really went and bought houses?” Alberu scoffed, astonished yet again.

 

“This one… it says it has a rose garden,”

 

“A music room?”

 

“...an attic with a telescope.”

 

“This one has a beautiful terrace like this…?”

 

“A laboratory,”

 

“A green house?”

 

“An art studio…!”

 

“What nice training grounds…”

 

“The view is so nice, and it’s in an area that isn’t very busy…”

 

“Hey, this one has its own library—”

 

“There are servants in some of these, and if not that regular housekeeping…!”

 

“I’ve never seen such a large kitchen in my life—”

 

House after house, they flipped through them. They weren’t sure what they were even for, or the reason why Cale suddenly went on a house-hunting spree and had all these built seemingly on a whim.

 

“...Ah.”

 

Kim Roksoo, who was always wandering around without a permanent home, uncertainty in every place he moves to.

 

On and Hong thought about how the very first thing Cale offered them was food, and then afterwards allowed them shelter.

 

Choi Han thought about the young Kim Roksoo who did not even like to go home to the apartment where his uncle awaited.

 

Lock thought about how Cale had given the wolf children and the tiger members a home in the village.

 

Everybody thought of Cale Henituse who was always taking care of the people around him.

 

The locations of these buildings weren’t random either. Major territories, places they would probably frequent for business, cities that were often visited. They were all strategically chosen with thought.

 

It felt as if his intentions were something like this;

 

Wherever you go, you will always have a home.

 

“...ha,”

 

It was too early to want to cry, there was more.

 

“Your highness, this one has your name on it,”

 

“Huh?” He picked up a brown folder that was placed on the table for him. He sat on Cale’s desk chair and examined the contents.

 

Raon, who was in front of his chest, and curious, as well as On and Hong and a few other people, tilted their heads. “The myth of Perseus and Medusa?”

 

“...” Alberu sat there, staring at the handwritten pages in ink, words dying on his tongue.

 

Page after page, there were different title written at the top under the same handwriting.

 

Orpheus and Eurydice

 

Theseus and the Minotaur

 

Prometheus

 

Pandora’s Box

 

The 12 Labours of Heracles

 

Persephone and Hades

 

The Odyssey

 

Icarus

 

 

“These— they’re Greek myths,” Choi Han said softly. “Mn, why, though?”

 

Alberu was silent for a while, staring as he flipped through all the pages that looked like an anthology. He blinked, and then— “...ha— you really— pftt—”

 

Crown prince Alberu Crossman laughed. These past few days, he’d laugh and laugh, a lot. It was unlike him. It wasn’t the polite kind, it wasn’t the kind he controlled, it wasn’t fake and it wasn’t elegant. It was probably very undignified of him to laugh so much that his throat hurt and his eyes watered.

 

Really, how completely absurd all this had been. 

 

The person who summarized the myths from their world for him while lazing around on the couch in his very own office munching on cookies, citing that they were too lazy to get into it too much, had sat down and written down tens of them in ink by hand. Sat down, and translated it into the Roan kingdom language, sat down, and wrote down all the flowery prose that came with ancient myths— sat down, and even wrote small anecdotes at the foot of the pages and defined specific words for him like a textbook.

 

“Haha!”

 

Cale Henituse was a ridiculous, ridiculous man, and only he could make Alberu laugh while grieving him down to the depths of his bones.

 

Choi Han patted his shoulder, despite his lack of understanding, and handed him some water. “...Don’t get sick,”

 

There were also envelopes, sealed, with names on them. One was addressed to Duke Deruth Henituse.

 

There was also a note as to how his wealth should be distributed. On, Hong, and Raon would receive most of it when they came of age, and until that time came, he entrusted the management of that inheritance under Ron, Beacrox, and Eruhaben. There was a portion set aside for his territory, for developing Harris Village and maintenance, portions set aside and distributed to multiple individuals- aside from that, there were also notes leading to various locations. and information on various artifacts, and much more. 

 

There were miscellaneous things, as well. Like the written storyline of a few comics and a few shows on TV that Choi Han was fond of, a music sheet with all the notes and lyrics for a few nursery rhymes from earth, like ‘Mary had a little lamb’. There were suggestions, like infrastructure to improve kingdoms, different social programs, proposed solutions to multiple different issues, and the like. 

 

How long, they wondered, had he planned to die?

 

It didn’t matter, anymore, to ponder such questions.

 

The final remnants of Cale Henituse were tightly held in his allies’ hands.

Notes:

tbh the reason. this. chapter took so long was because i spent weeks agonizing over the logistics of the APs and who would receive which power and etc. Had to do multiple lore deep dives to figure it out. Shoutout to messy-haired-bum on tumblr for being my lifesaver, eun and mew as well for spending hours with me agonizing over LoreTM and the logistics of using embrace and such. could not have done it without you guys.

Rosalyn and cheapstake destruction looting duo is now a reality TwT. You'll get more AP and owner interactions soon, and ofcs, angst sparkle sparkle theres more where that came from, everyone needs to mourn and process and also try to live despite everything. introspection and character povs and interactions yay they have a looooong way to go still.

Also, yes, the Henituse family will find out about the transmigration eventually, the squad just need a minute to hold on to Cale on their own for a little while longer.

Chapter 18: sea.

Summary:

The Henituse family learn more about Cale, and mourn. The artists of the Henituse territory honor their young master silver shield.

Notes:

I honestly don't know how this ended up being so Deruth-centric (tho hes not the complete focus dw) but it happened and yay character development he's stepping up his dad game and talking to his kids this time instead of shutting himself away.

Anyways tho the Henituses are hard to write but hopefully i did well TwT they get a tad bit more exploration later, mainly on lily and basen's part in the future, but this is the one centered around them plus some on and choi han :)

I would add more but I have a science practicum tomorrow and lack a will to live so good night :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Deruth stared at the red book on his desk. Lily, Violan, and Basen were also here, and they were sitting together, unsure what to expect.

 

It had been a week. A week since Cale died.

 

Just the thought of it hurt him to conceive.

 

Cale’s knight, the one who would always follow him, came by that day. He was also with the three children that Cale cherished, and they were staying in the estate at the moment, away from the office. He had brought him a thick red book, and pointed out a bookmark, and left him an envelope or two.

 

“From Cale-nim,” he had said.

 

It was a very strange book. Despite its large size, it felt nearly weightless. The inside of it was empty, save for the messages on the first and final page. There were bookmarks inside and dog-eared pages. Though most of it was blank, there were a few small scribbled notes, and small splotches of tears darkening in dots along the paper. 

 

They flipped to the bookmark that Choi Han had told them about, one that was adorned by pressed flowers. Deruth recalled his instructions, saying to simply touch the page, and reluctantly did so.

 

“!”

 

Something flickered at his fingertips, like a small weak flame. It surged through his arm and—

 

“Father?”

 

“What happened?”

 

“Is it some sort of magic?”

 

“Speak to us,”

 

“...” He couldn’t even speak a word, eyes blown wide. “C—”  he stuttered, reaching forward. “Cale…?”

 

It was there, before his eyes like a curtain. Cale’d bedroom, and… 

 

There were two people sitting across from each other, one on the bed, and one on a wooden chair. They shared reddish-brown eyes and similar gazes, despite their differentiating appearances.

 

Understanding that there may be something going on, they touched the page in the same spot Deruth had. A few small gasps rang out. “Orabuni—!”

 

Despite their shouts, the image continued to play.

 

[“Kim Roksoo, you’re finally up?”

 

“Are you Cale Henituse?”

 

“You recognized me right away,”]

 

“What…” Basen sounded astonished and conflicted. Of course, it would make sense, because these two individuals acted similarly despite being two different people. But most of all— the mannerisms of the dark-haired man…

 

Deruth was never the most attentive person to his son, and he regretted it every day. However, even he could tell that the mannerisms of this foreign person were familiar.

 

From his smirk, his expressions, the way he crossed his arms, and the way he’d chuckle. He never paid attention to these things, but Deruth could feel it now— those were the kinds of things Cale would have done.

 

[“Yes, I am Cale Henituse,”]

 

“...” This… What was this?

 

[“I plan to live the rest of my life in this body. That’s why I’m planning on throwing away the name Cale Henituse and living as Kim Roksoo.”]

 

“Cale…?”

 

[“I guess you’ve been really happy.”

 

“Yeah. I met someone I wanted to see for a long time.”

 

“Who was the person you wanted to see?”

 

“My mother.”]

 

Deruth gasped.

 

Nothing was making sense, right now. He wasn't sure what to make of anything— no one in this room was even sure what they were witnessing. However, those words…

 

“...Jour.”

 

Those were the kinds of words Cale would have said. The kinds of words that Cale, who had cherished his mother and lost her when he was young, would have traded the world to be able to say.

 

[“Cale Henituse, my mother reincarnated into the world you used to live in. The world I live in now,”]

 

“Ah.”

 

The members of the Henituse family were smart, clever, and resourceful. This far into the conversation, they could begin to piece together what they were seeing. This was some kind of show of a past event, and the person who had the appearance of Cale Henituse— he was a version of the ‘current’ Cale. The Cale that woke up one morning and suddenly changed during one breakfast meal. The person sitting across from him in black hair was most similar to the young Cale that saw his birth mother as his entire world, and lost her.

 

They both were Cale Henituse. Two versions of his son.

 

[“My reincarnated mother lost her parents when she was very young because of an unranked monster’s attack and was left all alone. I’m trying hard to become her family.”

 

“If she reincarnated, she should be younger than you, no?”

 

“Ha, she currently calls me uncle.”]

 

“...” Jour had reincarnated, according to this show of the past. In another world, where this black haired person who was a version of his son apparently lived. It was… he wan’t sure what to make of it.

 

[“The family is all well?”]

 

“...he—” Basen could not finish his words. The usually calm and eloquently-spoken son was stammering like he was in disbelief. Lily held his hand and squeezed it hard, as if to also support both of them.

 

If this version of Cale was the one who had come before that breakfast morning…

 

He was the Cale who they thought did not care about them and chose to distance himself far away, building a wall around him.

 

[Kim Roksoo smiled sorrowfully, in a different way than before after hearing Cale’s response. Cale then added on to his response.

 

“Everybody is doing well. Father and Mother are healthy, Lily is learning to use the sword. I want to make Basen the territory lord. But for now, he is just helping with administrating the territory.”]

 

“....”

 

Basen’s eyes sparkled as he listened. Then, words that he never thought he would hear again were said.

 

[“When I first spoke to Basen, I said these things to that kid at that time.”]

 

[“Basen, you are part of the Henituse household. Remember that. No matter where you go, your family name is Henituse, got it? Don’t you remember what father said? Listen to me unless you are an idiot. Tell people that the Henituse blood flows through you. Tell them that no matter what.”]

 

“...hyung-nim,”

 

Lily, who had never heard these words before, looked at her orabuni who was tearing up where he stood. His fingertips, down to his entire frame, were shaking like there was an earthquake.

 

[“Shut the hell up. Do as I said. Otherwise you won’t be able to live in this house. Do you think the cousins or the collateral family will leave you alone? Are you going to be dumb?”]

 

Those blunt words that were sharp and brash, but most of all honest, could only be said by one person. Violan knew this well. 

 

The first time he spoke to Basen could not have been more than a few days since they first arrived at the Henituse estate. The young Cale, who was still riddled with complicated feelings about her and Basen, had sternly said these words with full confidence. For her son.

 

Violan began to shake.

 

[“I don’t know who’s blood flows through Basen Henituse’s body, but that kid is my younger brother, Lily’s older brother, Count Deruth’s son, and Countess Violan’s son. He’s definitely someone with the mindset of Count Henituse’s family.”]

 

“...Ah.”

 

[“Basen is my dongsaeng as well.”]

 

Basen did not know what it meant for Cale if there were two versions of him speaking to each other. He still couldn’t understand what circumstances Cale was under in this record of the past. 

 

But in this moment, he realized that both versions of his hyung, whether from the past or present, really, truly cared about him.

 

He fell to the ground, and crumbled, yet again. 

 

He felt Duchess Violan— his mother’s warm, strong hand, reach for his shoulder and squeezed, as if to reassure him, with slow circles drawn with her thumb. Lily was still squeezing his left hand, too. They were telling him that they were learning things too late, together.

 

It didn’t get easier, after that.

 

They learned more things about Cale, things they should have noticed a long time ago. Things they should have understood about him before he was gone. And, things they never could have even known about.

 

He acted like trash, misbehaving and isolating himself all that time, to protect Basen’s reputation. There was an attack, and he survived by himself. There was a war, and it raged on for decades, and he’d fought for twenty years atop the rubble of a razed and crumbling kingdom. He nearly died, he made a deal— a deal to sacrifice and abandon everything, just for the sake of his ruined world. For the sake of saving it.

 

The first version of Cale, the original soul of Cale Henituse, his son who he carried in his arms when he was a baby and saw take his first steps, sacrificed himself, and a person named Kim Roksoo entered his body and saved the world.

 

Deruth was angry.

 

Not at his son, never. Not at either version of him, be it past or present. He was angry at himself.

 

His son disappeared one day, and someone else woke up in his body, and he didn’t even notice? No one noticed? He acted as trash and misbehaved and he didn’t even give it a second thought? 

 

His sons, both versions of Cale Henituse, were constantly always fighting in battles. Always. For years. 

 

There were all these burdens they both carried, things they misunderstood and never knew.

 

They never truly understood Cale.

 

And now he was gone. 

 

Cale Henituse, who they cherished for a long, long time, was gone before they could even apologize.

 

 

Basen had gone for a walk.

 

He needed to, unless he wanted to explode somehow. So he walked around the estate, and the garden, thinking—  though his mind felt strangely empty. It felt like his every step was one of a ghost’s.

 

“...”

 

He stopped near a bench in the garden.

 

Someone wearing a red scarf was folding paper silently. She didn’t even look up when he sat down on the other side of the bench. Basen recognized this person— she was the child from the cat tribe that Cale took care of, and usually traveled with him. He talked to her a few time before, and they got along.

 

Next to her and on her lap, surrounding the space of the bench, were folded paper figures— Basen thought they resembled something like a graceful and tall bird. He just sat and watched silently as she folded like it was muscle memory after doing it for so long.

 

“What… is it?” he mumbled the question quietly. He wasn’t exactly expecting an answer, but she replied.

 

“A paper crane,” she paused. “Cale taught me how to make one.”

 

Basen’s eyes widened, sparkling. On handed him a piece of square paper. There were various colors, but this one was blue. He stared down at it dumbfoundedly, but looked towards his side where On had begun a new crane, and observed carefully. It seemed like she was moving slower on purpose so he could follow.

 

“He bought me way too much origami paper when I mentioned offhandedly just once that I thought it looked fun,” On mumbled absentmindedly as straightened the wing of her crane. 

 

“...he’s always been like that,” he replied as he struggled slightly to fold down a head for his bird. Basen thought about the times he offhandedly mentioned needing certain things or taking an interest in different subjects while talking to Cale, and the package of things like ink bottles and books and materials that followed soon after.

 

“There are a bunch of different things in the origami book,” she said. “But this is my favorite,”

 

She folded down the wings, and set the  finished paper crane down. Basen realized that his was a lot messier compared to On’s, who was neat and quick, like she’d  done it dozens upon dozens of times before.

 

“It’s because it’s from Cale’s world, and he taught me how to,”

 

Ah. “...The result is nice,”

 

She picked up a piece of red paper and began anew, and also gave Basen one. “Cale told me something about these cranes, too,” she said quietly. “He said, if you made a thousand, you’d get to have one wish.”

 

“...”

 

Him and On were somewhat closer in age. They were also two very rational and logical people in general.

 

“I’m at 258,” she said simply. Basen noticed a few small paper cuts on her fingers, some dried and some looking a little fresh.

 

“...okay,” he nodded, beginning to fold. “I think… we can make it to 300, today,”

 

“...alright.” 

 

The day was young, and lunch would still be in a while. Two eldest children sat next to each other and silently worked towards a shared wish for the slightest chance of a miracle.

 

 

Deruth unfurled the envelope, addressed to him. His hands smoothed over the familiar handwriting in ink. Looking at it now, perhaps… perhaps he should have noticed that it;s become slightly different than before.

 

Inside of it was a small, brief letter.

 

“Dear Father,”

 

He’d written a few things for Deruth. There were suggestions for him and the territory, like what to do and what not to do, things to look for, what he thought should improve. Technical things like that. He read, and stored those useful suggestions in the back of his mind.

 

“Father, I’m sure that  by the time you’re reading this, you already know about the truth. I already asked Choi Han to deliver the book to you. It’s a book containing my memories. They don’t contain all of it, but they contain the ones I liked.”

 

“....”

 

The ones he liked.

 

He— Deruth recalled looking through more page sof the book with his family. There were instances of times where he had worried over him, times where he had spoken to Violan, moments where he spent time talking to Basen and Lily’s excited ramblings. 

 

“It must’ve been quite a shock. I’m really sorry.”

 

Why was he apologizing?

 

There was nothing he needed to apologize for.

 

It was him that owed him so many apologies, to his son.

 

“Your son, Cale, who’s name is Kim Roksoo now, is living well. He said so himself, and I’ve heard from him.”

 

“You…” Deruth wanted to say, you are also my son.

 

“He and I have decided to continue to live our current lives without guilt. I hope that’s alright.”

 

“...”

 

“I hope it’s alright with you if I said that I lived and died as a member of the Henituse family, as Cale Henituse.”

 

His pupils shook. 

 

How… How could he not?

 

“I have also lived well and comfortably, and it is thanks to the wealth and backing of the Henituse family. So, I’d like to thank you, really. I was happy, father.”

 

‘I was happy’

 

Drip, drip.

 

Those were the words he’d been hoping for his whole life. The paper crumpled slightly in his tight hold.

 

“I’m also… I’m sorry for keeping the truth from you and mother, Lily, and Basen. It’s understandable if you are frustrated, or upset, since I’ve kept it for such a long time.”

 

“Ah…”

 

Oh, but there was nothing to forgive. Nothing at all. It was painful, but he would never blame his son.

 

“I also want to ask you something.”

 

“Please, if you are grieving— share that grief with the rest of the family.”

 

“Please don’t go through things all alone, for your own sake and for the family’s sake. Talk to each other and cry together. Sharing pain is also part of being a family.”

 

His pupils shook, and his fingers trembled.

 

“Lily and Basen are very resilient, but please still ask them if they are okay. Hug them if that is what they need. Remember that you still have each other.”

 

Deruth’s eyes clouded over as he thought about the young Cale from a long time ago. The one who hugged him and consoled him when he— when they lost Jour. Had he ever seen him cry about his mother, since then? Had Cale ever gone to him and asked for a hug or expressed his sadness or his frustration?

 

He never did.

 

He stayed quiet while Deruth’s own cries drowned everything else out, and then he’d begun misbehaving— and even then, that was for someone else’s sake— for his brother, Basen’s sake.

 

Cale, his son, no matter what version or time, had always been the kind and selfless boy he’d always been. Always. He never stopped.

 

Always.

 

“I just wanted to say, again, thank you for everything.”

 

“I’m happy that I came to this world as a member of the Henituse family, and as your son.”

 

Deruth was a foolish, foolish father.

 

.

.

.

.

 

It was a Thursday, late into the afternoon when the sun slowly began to dip and the blue sky bled into a warm hue— around 4 o’clock or so. Team leader Lee Soo Hyuk’s Team 1 had just finished a mission around sector 3, eliminating a few aggressive but low ranked monsters and evacuating a few citizens to the nearest shelter. It was tiring, but they’d gotten through it. Currently, they were at the beach near the city.

 

Lee Soohyuk was sitting on top of a mostly intact bench in the city wiping his sword while Choi Jungsoo paced around after chugging down some water, the rest of the team nearby. They had small bruises and cuts along their skin, and sweat running down their backs. No major injuries, but they’ve never completed a mission unscathed.

 

“Hey, Roksoo, you’re starting to burn up again,” Choi Jungsoo sighed, poking his forehead with his index finger, before shoving a water  bottle in font of his face. “Relax a bit— you’ve been writing that report literally since we finished the mission. Have you even had water? Huh?”

 

Kim Roksoo accepted it with grunt without looking up, having a few sips before setting it down on the ground. Choi Jungsoo frowned and plopped down next to him. “Haaa— hey, Team Leader, our youngest is overworking himself again~”

 

“Roksoo, relax, we’re done for the day. The report can wait.” Lee Soohyuk said. When he was only met with a grunt, he stood in front of him and snatched his notepad away.

 

“Hey—”

 

“Aigooo, if you’re so keen on working, do you want to do some extra training today? Hm?”

 

Kim Roksoo gave him a disrespectful look that made it seemed as if Lee Soohyuk just offended his entire bloodline using such a suggestion, which made Choi Jungsoo start laughing.

 

“Haaa? Is Roksoo pushing himself again?”

 

“Team Leader~ let’s go out for dumplings after this!”

 

“Has he had water yet? He’ll get a fever again like last month,”

 

“Oh, I remember that! Haha, he can be really stubborn when he wants to be!”

 

The rest of the team fussed about, laughing and joking around while Kim Roksoo sighed and finally gulped down some more water, wiping the sweat off his face and brushing back the hair that stuck to his forehead.

 

“Hm? Hey look,” Choi Jungsoo pointed towards the horizon. “It’s the sunset,”

 

Choi Jungsoo paced closer towards the shore, sea water crashing against the tips of his boots, leaving prints in the wet sand. 

 

“Huh,” Lee Soohyuk replied back, gaze wandering towards the view without much thought. Kim Roksoo was tiredly leaning back on the bench and placing leftover band aids on the scratches and cuts on his arm as he watched.

 

“Y’know,” he spoke. “In movies and comics and anime with like, dystopian or apocalyptic settings, there’s usually some sort of scene at the sea with the main characters, right?”

 

“What’re you rambling on about?” Lee Soohyuk questioned, picking up a rock from the sand before throwing it into the sea, watching it erupt in a splash.

 

“It’s usually something like, mn, the main characters have never seen the sea before, or something. And then it’s just pretty panels and scenes of the sea that look inspiring, I guess, and their reactions to it.” He said. “That checks out, Roksoo?”

 

“Mn, there’s a few scenes like that, yeah,” he nodded with a shrug. Both he and Choi Jungsoo enjoyed reading and watching TV shows.

 

“Kinda like this, right?” 

 

“Oh? So are you implying that we’re the main characters, here?” Lee Soohyuk questioned.

 

Choi Jungsoo laughed. “Sure, why not?”

 

“Team Leader definitely seems like the overpowered MC type,” a team member called out.

 

“Oh, then I want to be the fan-favorite side character!”

 

“And why would you be the fan-favorite? I think you’re more like the clumsy comic-relief guy.”

 

“Same thing!”

 

Laughter burst amongst them as they chatted, exhausted and weary.

 

“I think it wouldn’t be so bad,” Choi Jungsoo said, before suddenly slipping his boots and socks off. 

 

“Hey, what’re you doing?”

 

He rolled up his pants and tugged off his jacket, and walked ahead, leaving more footprints in the wet sand, with clumps of them sticking to the soles of his feet. He walked a bit farther into the shore ‘till it reached halfway down his knees, before kicking his feet and splashing water around.

 

“Hey, this is kinda fun!” He grinned. “Oi, come in here, Team leader! Drag Roksoo in with you too! The water’s nice!”

 

“Haaaa…” Lee Soohyuk let out a sigh but still tugged his boots off and rolled his pants up to join him, water splashing as he ran over just to kick his feet and splash water at Choi Jungsoo.

 

“Hey!”

 

“That’s for charging in earlier before my call this morning during the mission,” He said, sprinkling salt water on his face.

 

“Agh— stop that, you’re getting salt all over my face—! Gah, it’s in my eyes!” 

 

Eventually the rest of the team joined, rushing towards the shore while laughing and shoving each other as they slipped their footwear off like little kids during school recess. Kim Roksoo only planned on standing near the shore, or something, but his seniors seemed to have different ideas, pushing him and taking his jacket off and all but pulling off his boots before dragging him along towards the water, saying he needed to cool off for the day.

 

The sea sparkled in a brilliant way at the lonely, ruined beach, and the sinking sun and its warm hues reflected in the ocean as if it was painting it. Kim Roksoo stumbled in the shallow water after his teammates pushed him ahead. It was hard to maneuver around all the water since it was so restricting, but it was kind of refreshing.

 

The view of the sun beginning to sink more and more below the horizon was a bit too bright for him, making his eyes squinty enough that he needed to cover them with his hands. But it was… pretty? It was strange. Choi Jungsoo was somewhat right, just a little bit, about scenes like these fitting the apocalyptic dystopian settings. And maybe he got it, just a little bit. If no one’s ever seen a sunset at the beach before, this would be… beautiful.

 

“Oi, Roksoo!” Choi Jungsoo called before splashing him with little to no warning. He blocked most of his entourage of splashes with his hands while Jungsoo kept laughing about trying to soak him from head to toe.

 

“Hey— stop that, you bastard,” he frowned.

 

“Yeah? Make me,”

 

Kim Roksoo frowned in a detesting manner before dipping his hands in the water and finally countering with a big splash using both of his hands, which seemed to accurately get seawater in Choi Jungsoo’s mouth, making him sputter while Lee Soohyuk laughed at him. 

 

“Pwah! Stop it already, my tongue’s gonna shrivel up at this point!” In response, Kim Roksoo splashed him with more seawater with his hands.

 

“Hey look, a sea shell,” Lee Soohyuk remarked, holding up a light-colored conch-like shell he pulled from the water.

 

“Ooh, hey it looks pretty! It’s usually just random scale-like chunks lodged into the sand. Think ya can hear the sound of the sea from it?”

 

Kim Roksoo raised a skeptical brow. “Yeah, you know, I wouldn’t try that— it looks like it—”

 

“Hu— OWCH!” Choi Jungsoo yelped before Lee Soohyuk threw the sea shell a few ways away from them. “Ow, ow, ow I think a crab just actually pinched me!”

 

A nearby crew member yelled. “There’s crabs!? Where!?”

 

“Is it red!? Are crabs poisonous!?”

 

“Pfft– Hahaha!”

 

Kim Roksoo leaned in and touched his cheek with a small wince but otherwise an exasperated sigh. “Tch. That was just a hermit crab. You wouldn’t find poisonous crabs here. A poisonous sea snail, maybe, lethal enough to kill you in about an hour, but you’ll be fine. You just got pinched.”

 

“WHAT!?”

 

“There’s poisonous sea snails here!?”

 

Lee Soohyuk laughed harder while Kim Roksoo snorted. Unfortunately for these two, that was a mistake, because Choi Jungsoo immediately took this opportunity to tackle them, sending them plummeting into the seawater and essentially getting all of them soaked from head to toe.

 

“Wha— Jungsoo!”

 

“Agh— get off me!”

 

“Hahaha!”

 

“I think I just felt a sea snail move,”

 

“Wha—?! Where?!”

 

Splash!

 

“Pfft— Hahaha!”

 

“Ha–!? Team leader, you bastard!”

 

“Hey, stop that!”

 

“Ah—! Oi, Roksoo, you disrespectful little punk!”

 

“Heh.” 

 

Splash!

 

“Gah! Not in the eyes! That’s just foul play!”

 

The three were basically wrestling in the water at this point in a fit of laughter and playful aggression, tripping each other up and making sure no one could even manage to stand up without being dragged back down. 

 

At some point, Lee Soohyuk and Choi Jungsoo just started laughing uncontrollably and wheezing like they couldn’t breathe when they were all on top of each other like a pile of rags, water dripping down from the tips of Lee Soohyuk’s long dark hair and from the ends of Choi Jungsoo’s brown strands. Choi Jungsoo’s shoulders shook as he pointed and laughed at the amount of sand that got on their clothes, and even Kim Roksoo let out a few amused chuckles while wearing a disrespectful-seeming expression that earned a splash from Lee Soohyuk.

 

“So, main characters, are we?”

 

“If we're the main characters, we should still somehow be spotless after this though for aesthetic reasons,” Choi Jungsoo whined. 

 

Lee Soohyuk raised a brow. “You sound like you’ve been reading too much of those novels Roksoo likes,”

 

“Mn, he rambles about these things a lot during breaks when he’s stressed out, y’know~ And I read too!” Choi Jungsoo said. “Ah man, I feel like there’s an entire bucket worth ‘a sand in my pockets…”

 

“It’s your turn to do the laundry today, you know,”

 

“Wha—!? Seriously? Oh dangnabbit!” 

 

“Some protagonists we are,” Lee Soohyuk laughed.

 

“Well, I think it’s alright,” Kim Roksoo remarked, leaning back on his hands that were sunken into the sand as he stared up at the clear sky, before his gaze lowered to look at the two friends in front of him. They looked like a total mess, and the whole team was definitely going to have to walk all the way back to headquarters soaking wet just like this, and they would totally look ridiculous. The director and the other teams would definitely laugh at them.

 

“After all, main characters…” Kim Roksoo’s eyes sparkled.

 

The sun’s dull light cast a warm overlay over their figures and lit a glint in their eyes that brightened their pupils. Choi Jungsoo had his head tilt in somewhat confusion, listening as he tried to squeeze water out of his hair, while Lee Soohyuk had an expectant expression, waiting for Roksoo to finish his statement as he dusted wet clumps of sand off his collar. Kim Roksoo’s reddish-brown eyes shone.

 

“...Have plot armor, right?”

 

“Plot armor?” They both seemed to blink at the same time, before wearing similar smiles. Lee Soohyuk laughed. “You’re right. That’d be really neat.”

 

“I think the fact that we’ve made it this far isn’t disproving it, right? Looks like this plot armor’s working properly,” Choi Jungsoo shrugged, pounding his chest as if he wore a chestplate.

 

Lee Soohyuk squeezed the water out of his long hair and sighed in a half-tired, half-relaxed way. “Being alive is the best, after all,”

 

“You always say that,”

 

“Am I wrong?”

 

“That’s fair,” Jungsoo shrugged before smiling. “Then I hope we get the cheesiest, most cliche happily ever after possible,”

 

Soohyuk snorted. “With the fairytale wedding at the end?”

 

“I mean, a girlfriend would be nice,” he admitted with a shrug. “I was leaning more like a retirement plan—” Jungsoo said, before switching to a weird mock-narrator voice. “Our heroes are so beloved by everyone that for their continuous valiant efforts, the government bestows them great wealth, and they hang up their sword and retire off in some countryside and settle down.”

 

Kim Roksoo scoffed as if it sounded unrealistic to him. “Yeah, right,”

 

“I mean, personally, I think I’ll keep my sword, thanks,” Soohyuk interjected.

 

“Okay, so like you swing swords recreationally now, or something?”

 

“How about you become a mentor for the next generation? That’s a common ending for Great Hero-Types.” Kim Roksoo suggested.

 

“Mn, teaching sounds okay, I guess?”

 

“You seem more like the OP grandpa in murim novels who turns out to be like, I don’t know, the fist king or something,”

 

“You really have been reading those novels. Did you and Kim Roksoo start a book club without me? Hm?”

 

“Okay so what else does this happy ending entail?”

 

“Money,” Kim Roksoo didn’t hesitate for a second.

 

“Well, obviously yeah, Roksoo. You seem to be pretty set on that– don’t you want anything more profound? like, I don’t know—”

 

“Money.”

 

Lee Soohyuk sighed. “Aigooo, you little punk. Well, it isn’t like I don’t think the same way,”

 

“Heh.” he smirked. “Ah yeah, and the farm.”

 

“Oh yeah, that. Will we keep cattle?”

 

“I want to host hotpots and barbecues, so that would be real neat,” Jungsoo nodded.

 

“Alright, but I don’t wanna be the one tending to them,” Roksoo interjected almost immediately.

 

“Dibs on the apple orchard!”

 

“You’d really make your Team Leader wash pigs and milk cows?”

 

“Hey, we didn’t mention cows or pigs but help yourself,”

 

“Let’s not make it too complicated. I like beef.” 

 

“Okay, what else? Hey Roksoo, what does your cheesy fairytale ending entail?”

 

“Hm…” he hummed like he was daydreaming. “Slacker life…”

 

“Pfft— Of course,” Lee Soohyuk laughed, before poking him in the forehead. “Aigoo, but you need to keep that promise and not go off and fight in a war midway or something, got it you punk?”

 

Kim Roksoo looked baffled by Lee Soohyuk’s words yet again. “What are you talking about? I wouldn’t do—”

 

Jungsoo splashed some seawater on him, and promptly restarted another water fight.

 

In the end, they finally got out of the water, soaking wet. Some of them did carry towels and they took turns drying themselves off. Lee Soohyuk still remained majestic as always, like the main character he was, Choi Jungsoo looked like a puppy who just got out of the bath, and Kim Roksoo looked like a very exasperated black cat who fell into a lake.

 

“So, it’s a promise, then.”

 

“Hm?”

 

“Let’s all stay alive until our cheesy and cliche retirement as farmers, yeah?”

 

Jungsoo laughed. “Yup.”

 

Kim Roksoo stared at these two people, his closest co-workers, and closest friends, and hyungs, though he’ll never, ever admit to it out loud. The sun only continued to dip lower and lower, the cooler colors of the night creeping in quietly in a somewhat dazzling gradient as stars slowly became visible, twinkling in the sky. As the last remains of the sun’s rays slipped past the horizon, they added a somewhat shining glint to their eyes.

 

Sunsets made everything look like they were meant to be photographed or painted in some way.

 

Kim Roksoo could only record it with his eyes.

 

“Hey, Roksoo? Are you burning up again?”

 

“...Yeah.”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Let’s stay alive until then.”

 

The two of them looked at each other before sighing as if it couldn’t be helped and draping a towel over his head, the sound of nagging and chatter gradually fading out as they walked back to headquarters.

 

 

With a click, the record disappeared, the veil before Choi Han’s eyes disappearing, and leaving him in the quiet guest room he was staying in. His palms rested above the pages protected by many, many preservation spells and charms. Not even fire could set it alight.

 

He buried his face in his hands. Spots started to appear in his dark vision from the pressure on his eyelids.

 

“The water’s nice, Choi Han,”

 

The lingering memories of the sunset and the ocean waves flooded his mind, and he felt like he was drowning.

 

Really, this felt too cruel.

 

 

A sorrow so all-consuming and a grief so powerful had taken over the entirety of the Henituse territory, wrapping around it like a dome. The colorful streets in the midst of winter and its festivity had begun to dull and dull, like a sword losing its edge.

 

A tavern owner wipes his tables, lamenting an old customer who was sometimes troublesome and sometimes lively who used to frequent his establishment. Even if he used to break a lot of things, he brought him business and never brought any real harm to fellow customers, and he’d come to truly respect him for how much he devoted himself to the territory. 

 

A baker down the street looks at his stock of leftover bread and thinks back to a remarkably baffling occasion where his entire stock was bought out by a single person, and contemplated giving out the rest to beggars on the streets.



The street lights would shine in the quiet night in a soft glow that illuminated the path for people heading home from work, steps soft and light, heavy with fatigue from a day’s job.

 

In the daylight, after a day’s rest, the city, the territory of artists, experts, and passionate citizens who have found joy wonder, what could they do?

 

What could they do for the hero who protected them?

 

What could they do for the one who wielded the silver shield and broke before it?

 

What could they do for one such young master, who died before he could even rest?

 

There is little you can do for the dead compared to the living. The dead no longer have ears to hear words from the living’s regret and gratitude. If you are too late, if you do not speak before they go, apologize or express your joy and frustration, they would not hear it. 

 

It is a mistake that people make, time and time again, because punctuality is a learned skill.

 

Even so, they will say those words. Even if it wouldn’t reach, if by some miracle, the wind— the gods may carry their voice up past the clouds and towards the heavens, the souls dearly missed would hear those words they needed to hear.

 

So, the citizens of the territory mumbled their gratitude in prayers.

 

But, for a city of art and the greatest of passions and dedication, surely, there is more they could do.

 

If you cannot send your words to the dead, listen again to the ghost of their words as they have lived.

 

There is little you can do for the departed, but you may remember.

 

And art, is there no greater form of remembrance than through art?

 

There was an empty space in the middle of the plaza of Rain city, and there was a hole in  everyone’s hearts.

 

Sculptors, with eyes that see potential in a mound of little more than a blank slate, came together. People who have come to the Henituse territory because of their passions and  their desire to live anew, came together for the person that protected that chance.

 

Artists sketched with their pencils on paper, the silhouette of a hero, and the sculptors sought to bring it to life. 

 

 

Violan stared into the distance through the pane of glass, watching the mound of stone that even towered over buildings slowly take form with each day. She crumpled the letter in her hands, that had been written to her by her son long before his death, and turned away.

 

Scaffolds and ladders were used, but the few mages within the territory also aided in the process, lifting sculptors off their feet and up towards the peaks to carve out a face.

 

People would surround the feet of the giant mound that had been in process for a few days, watching and observing in curiosity and admiration.

 

Every day, there were also a few people, chefs, bakers, or really anyone who could cook a meal at all, handing out food for the artist hard at work. There were some who knit scarves to keep them warm in the winter, there were tavern owners who offered free drinks. Children picked flowers and sometimes crafted them into flower crowns and handed them out, sometimes they drew their suggestions in the ground before artists who have long since sharpened their skills, and they listened.

 

It felt like even as they mourned, the city that devoted itself to its passions was on its feet, day after day.

 

Violan watched that constant motion, the flow of work and ambition, every day, in the territory that she loved and dedicated much of herself to— and knew it was all for her son.

 

 

Lily was more of a quiet kind of child who lit up around the people she cared about. These people could be like her instructor— Edro, her mother and father, a few of the knights she sparred with, some friends of hers, and her older brothers. 

 

It was a difficult time for everyone, and Deruth believed it would be best that they all had time alone to themselves too. However, he thought about the words on the pages handwritten to him, and visited the training grounds.

 

It was quiet, save for the sound of a sword swinging.

 

Lily’s hair, tied up with loose strands everywhere with every motion, was tirelessly swinging her sword in the empty training grounds.

 

Fwip. Fwip. Fwip. Fwip.

 

Continuously, rhythmically, like a machine.

 

It felt different compared to the ones Deruth caught glimpses of sometimes, filled with energy, perhaps a sense of joy in what she did despite her tiredness.

 

But the determination was unyielding.

 

Unyielding even in the snow.

 

Unyielding, even when she looked like she could collapse.

 

Unyielding, even with bandages covering her small calloused hands.

 

And, Deruth began to understand what Cale meant.

 

There were also times when you needed to break past each other’s walls, and talk to each other. There were times where they needed to hold each other, to keep each other afloat. Space was important, but too far a distance could cause them to float away, alone.

 

And being alone was very, very difficult, and Lily had only turned ten.

 

Deruth did what he should have done a long time ago. He ran, footsteps crunching in the snow, and reached for his daughter. His daughter with rough hands and small scars, and a determination that exceeded everything else. His daughter, who would certainly, certainly be destined for great things. His daughter, his little girl— his daughter.

 

Lily was panting heavily, and a sense of vitality returned to her eyes, like things began to ebb into clarity. Her grip was steady on her sword, and she tried to push him away— make him let go. And she was strong, but so was Deruth.

 

“I— I have to—” she mumbled. “Father, I—”

 

“...”

 

The tip of the sword glowing with a red aura in the evening light shook. “I—” she stammered. “...i have to get… stronger.”

 

Deruth hugged her tighter, and she was shaking about like she wasn’t sure what to do.

 

“...please let me go,”

 

Her voice was so small.

 

Deruth rubbed her back, up and down. “....i’m sorry,” he whispered. “I’m sorry for not talking to you sooner.”

 

Her back was shaking, termoring. Lily buried her face in her father’s shoulder, and he could feel warm tears soaking his clothes. He shrugged off his jacket and draped it over her. It was a cold day.

 

“I— I couldn’t even…” she stammered. “I couldn’t even protect him.” she was crying now. “I’m not strong at all.”

 

“That isn’t true,”

 

“I said— I said I would protect him and— and—” slowly and surely, she was crumbling. “And I couldn’t even— I couldn’t—” Lily sobbed. “Orabuni— Cale-orabuni is— he’s gone.”

 

“....yes.”

 

“He’s gone.”

 

Deruth watched the violently fluctuating aura smoke, undefined in its red hue. He noted that it was the same shade as Cale’s hair. “...yes.”

 

“He’s…” she was repeating it to herself over and over, as if it was all still so unbelievable. And, it did feel like a false reality. It felt like something that should’ve been impossible, but happened, and now they were here. “H-He’s… not here, anymore.”

 

“Yes,” he said, once again. “...and that isn’t your fault.” Deruth paused. “It will never be anyone’s fault.”

 

Lily’s breath hitched, and…

 

She cried. 

 

She wailed, and sobbed, and got snot on Deruth’s clothes, and tears welled and fell down her face over and over again. 

 

And that was how it should be. A child should be able to cry into their parents arms when they are sad, and a parent should be there to soothe and comfort him. 

 

This is what he should have been doing, since a long time ago.

 

“...I miss him—” she wailed. “I miss him!”

 

The wild red aura smoke condensed back into her wooden training sword, and dissipated. Lily’s aura would not activate under a circumstance where she broke herself like a machine, and would awaken some other time. Hopefully, when she was happier, when she was as passionate.

 

But for now, she would cry, and it would be okay.

 

“Let’s….” he trailed off, a little awkward. “Let’s go inside and eat something.”

 

“...”

 

“And then,” he said, slowly. “We can pick flowers for your brother,” Deruth said. “There are some winter flowers in the garden,”

 

“...” Lily nodded as she wiped her tears and got back on her feet.

 

Deruth could only lament in regret for the times he failed.

 

But he would not fail, again, and he could only do better. Step by step, a little at a time. Even if he’s late, Basen and Lily had plenty more time to grow, and he would not be a fool who would waste those years to come.

 

 

Day by day, from light to dark. Time marched on. 

 

From a large slate of bronze, something began to take form with each passing day. With a dozen sculptors at work, the figure became clear as the winter melted with the snow to greet the arms of spring.

 

In the midst of the third month of the new year, a memorial was completed.

 

Standing atop a carved stone platform was a bronze statue, spanning multiple feet tall, climbing the heights of the sky surpassing the height of most buildings. 

 

The statue of Cale Henituse was built in the middle of Rain City.

 

His silhouette stood tall and valiant, and despite being carved from stone, it seemed as if his commander uniform and long winding hair fluttered in the wind, creases and folds in his clothes like they were being pulled by the wind. One arm stretched outwards ahead of him, and from it was a winged shield made of silver, carved with an intricate crest at its hull, and wings outstretched as if it was truly flapping, feathers in full detail like that of an angel’s. 

 

His expression was stoic, yet calm and focused like a true commander. The heels of his feet were firmly planted to the ground like he would not move. And his eyes, carved from a gemstone, were a dazzling reddish brown that shone in the sunlight. 

 

The hero’s shield pointed towards the tall walls of the territory, where the first attack of the Indomitable Alliance occured on the Henituse territory, with wyverns and a holy knight from the north. It was a reminder of the time when the hero fought with everything he had to protect the people and the territory, and to honor the silver shield that did not break.

 

In the golden plaque etched onto the stone platform, were words. 

 

“In Honor of Our Young Master Silver Shield, Cale Henituse, Who Protected The People And Stood Firmly Until The End.”

 

The statue was completed, and…

 

There was space for their gratitude.

 

Just a few hours after the statue was completed, flowers were placed at its feet.

 

It began with one small bunch of freshly bloomed spring flowers from a young woman, then there were three more bouquets, weaved flower crowns from the children, small individual flowers, more and more.

 

Small gifts, like plushies. A bottle of fine wine, a handkerchief, and more and more flowers of every color and every variant, from the most well-cared and the one that grew wild in the forest.

 

Flowers were the language of the dead, and when the sun was high in the sky, there was a sea of words spanning from the feet of the hero that stood planted to the stone, and then outstretched towards the entire plaza like a wave.

 

Even as it covered the ground, no one dared to even step on a single petal.

 

Thousands, hundreds of blooms, picked and gathered, with gifts of art and passion. It was a sea created by the people of the territory for their beloved hero who was long gone.

 

“...” Rosalyn stared at the view where she stood, watching as petals swayed in the wind. She felt a tear well up from the corner of her eye. Hong was carried in her arms, eyes sparkling. 

 

It was truly beautiful. 

 

Alberu, who was next to her and in disguise, also stood, completely speechless. More like mesmerized by the view. Astonished by the love and passion behind honoring Cale’s memory. Astonished and relieved, to know just how loved he was, pupils shaking.

 

Did that punk know? That there are countless people who feel such a way for him?

 

Raon and Choi Han were together, watching as more and more gifts were placed, on the ground, atop flowers. The little dragon rummaged through his spatial dimension, and pulled out an apple pie. Choi Han placed it down, for him, suppressing tears.

 

On stepped forward, the golden top’s whip in  her pocket. She seemed like she was listening to something. After a few moments, she quietly whispered. “...go,”

 

Something in the air rose, like a whirlwind. A flower crown was lifted from the foot of the statue, and floated up all the way towards the top, and then gently placed atop his head.

 

The wind continued to whirl once more, like a spiral, carrying petals up towards the sky. The fragrance of flowers filled the air.

 

The language of the dead was flowers, and the wind was carrying towards the heavens. Every wish, and every hope, and every gratitude.

 

Deruth walked towards the statue in slow steps, and then fell before the sea of flowers and gifts.

 

And then, he cried. Again.

 

He remembered something he heard during the funeral.

 

The snowflakes were falling gently outside the church glass, and he had mumbled something, lamenting the weather.

 

“Why is it that it snows on a day like this one?”

 

He wasn’t expecting an answer, riddled with grief.

 

Hong, who happened to be standing next to him, mumbled back.

 

“Because he’s loved.”

 

The spring was here.

 

A spring that would feel cold without Cale, was here.

 

And they would learn to find that warmth again, little by little.

Notes:

Ahhh as alwaysthanks so much for reading! we'll get more exploration and reactions from other characters next chapter, mostly the kids, maybe some hannah and mary, bud, witira, and others, probably taking place around before the statue was finished and wehn spring happened :) grief is a force of nature alright. And then alberu coronation woohoooo :))

Some fun snippets, the flower scene as inspired by what happened with princess Diana at the gates of the palace after she died, I think. They placed dozens of flowers for her :)

Gn, uhh, if i remember something else, I'll add it here too but for now i need to sleep before i just straight up die tomorrow but depression will never let me rest.

.
.
.
.

[The Story, "One Who Is Loved By All", continues to resonate despite losing its center]

[The Story, "Young Master Silver Shield" is dearly told by the incarnations of Nameless 1]

[The Giant Story, "The Hero Who Will Never Be Seen Again Or Forgotten" is continuing its storytelling]

[The incarnation Cale Henituse's ■■ is "Remembrance"]

Chapter 19: still.

Summary:

Even still, the world does not crumble for you. Even still, it does not yield for the mourning. Even still, nature does not remain still.

Notes:

Hellooooo! Exam season is crazy rn. Actual exams just started like yesterday, on a friday with like the hardest subject, and i've got two weeks of this left TwT so updates might come after exam period or be a pretty slow, maybe minimal in wordcount.

This chapter's pretty introspective in nature. It hasn't covered all the characters and their. reactions and grief yet, but it covers some important bits. Also, it takes place in the remaining days of winter before the statue was erected. In other words, before the events. at the end of last chapter and while the Henituses were mourning calefam is also mourning :)

Have fun guys

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

The wind blew past with the sound of a low whistle in the dark night. Every corner of the villa felt inexplicably cold to the bone. Every footstep, every sound echoed and resonated. It was as if a bright burning candlelight had been dampened, and now no one was sure what could be done.

 

Beacrox walked down the carpeted hall with a lamp in hand, illuminating his path in a soft warm glow. He stopped in front of one door on the third floor, and gently pushed it open.

 

“...”

 

In front of a fireplace, flickering and burning as cinders danced and disappeared like autumn leaves, three figures sat on the rug on the floor, close together and connected by a blanket as if they were woven together. The two youngest were asleep, leaning against their eldest and snoring softly. Golden eyes reflecting the fire under silver bangs shone in the dark as they flickered up at him as soon as the door creaked, as if they’d been cautious and alert.

 

“....” On silently stared back at Beacrox, still as she hugged her legs. Her hair was messily strewn about, and she had dark bags under her eyes. The record book was tightly held in her arms. She looked exhausted.

 

Beacrox asked her something at that moment, leaning down.

 

“...are you hungry?”

 

“...” She had opened her mouth, as if to decline, before stopping, again. She stared down at the record book, like she was remembering someone’s words, and pressed her lips together. On wiped at her eyes, and Beacrox wordlessly helped set her siblings down to lay atop a pillow over the rug.

 

The walk to the kitchen was silent, On following beside him with a blanket wrapped around her shoulder, dragging across the floor with expressionless eyes. Beacrox quietly noted that it would bring dust into the kitchen, but it wasn’t something he couldn’t sweep up later.

 

Beacrox set down a bowl of dried fruits on the table, and warm tea. “It isn’t as good as father's brews,” he admitted.

 

“...That’s okay.” she replied as she drank. Beacrox eyed the record book that was set atop the tabletop as he took off his gloves, and On slowly slid it towards him as if reading his gaze.

 

He flipped through the pages, feeling the edges softly brush against his calloused fingers. The sound of page turning filled the kitchen before he found the bookmark he wanted. Then, he pressed his thumb down on it, and closed his eyes.

 

[“You know, you’re actually good at this kind of thing,”

 

“What thing?” Kim Roksoo asked as he brought out the cutting board from the cabinet.

 

Lee Soohyuk motioned vaguely to the kitchen as he tied an apron around himself. “Cooking,”

 

“Isn’t it a necessity for everyone to know how to cook for themselves?”

 

“Aigooo, you really don’t know how to take a compliment, huh?”

 

“We’re in an apocalypse,”

 

“You said you knew how to even before all this. I used to just live off of instant ramen, you know,” Lee Soohyuk added, the sound of running water running from the sink. 

 

Kim Roksoo shrugged. “Well it was either that, or dead,”

 

“How bleak,” even as he said that, a flicker of concern and sadness was visible behind his eyes. “Well, anyways, I’ll take over and decide what we make for Jungsoo this time,”

 

Kim Roksoo hummed as he pulled out some leftover tea bags from the drawer, glancing towards the seaweed Lee Soohyuk was marinating. Choi Jungsoo had caught a fever from getting lost in the rain because he forgot his umbrella at him like an idiot while going for a grocery run that morning.

 

“What’s that?”

 

“The one thing I’ve known how to make for ages,” he smiled. “Seaweed soup. Here, let me teach you how to make it.”]

 

Beacrox headed for the sink, and the sound of running water filled the room as he washed his hands and started on the rice. He wasn’t used to cooking rice so much before, but the past two months he’s done it so often at Cale’s requests that it felt natural to him. He began chopping up beef on the cutting board into thin pieces, like in the record. 

 

[“Why’re we making three portions?” Kim Roksoo asked as he chopped up pieces of beef on  the cutting board. Lee Soohyuk had to stop him from putting a raw slice of it in his mouth. They were still having a hard  time stopping Kim Roksoo from eating just about everything he deems just slightly edible due to his old habits.

 

“Because we’re three people. Do you want to starve tonight? Hm?”

 

“Of course not,” he frowned.

 

“Besides, aren’t you curious about how it would taste?”

 

“I’ve had seaweed soup once before,”

 

“Yeah? And what was your impression of it?”

 

“Slippery.”

 

“Pfft— how cute.”

 

“Hah?”

 

“Well, this one’s different, Roksoo. It’s special, my grandma’s recipe.”

 

“I see nothing special about it though? Except for the cheap beef,”

 

“You’re seriously no fun,”]

 

The backdoor was open, leading outside. At some point, On had gotten up, and was sitting with her feet past the doorway and slippers touching the ground outside, head leaning against the frame. The cool night air blew past the blanket that wrapped around her.

 

At times like these, when he watched the empty look in her eyes and the way she stared off far into the distance, he thought she looked a bit like Cale from that one time.

 

[Choi Jungsoo, who was groaning sickly with a bowl of seaweed soup on his lap, and Kim Roksoo who was sitting at the foot of the bed with his own bowl, tried it at the same time.

 

“Mn,” Choi Jungsoo hummed with his nasal voice. “Salty,”

 

“It’s still slippery,” Kim Roksoo said, feeling sesame seeds roll around his mouth. “With a crunch,”

 

“Aigoo, it’s seaweed soup, of course it’s slippery,” Lee Soohyuk chuckled, snapping a picture with his cellphone.

 

“Huh—”

 

“Happy birthday,”

 

“Huh!?”

 

“How did you—”

 

Lee Soohyuk scoffed while looking down at the picture inside his cellphone. “Of course I know, I’m your Team Leader and they were on your files,”

 

“....” Choi Jungsoo and Kim Roksoo stared at each other, as if they had just realized the date.

 

“Haaa…” Jungsoo groaned. “Getting sick on my birthday’s the absolute worst~”

 

“Hurry up and finish it, then take your medicine,” Kim Roksoo replied.

 

“Still so stern— isn’t it my birthday? And also yours? Shouldn’t you be nicer?”

 

“If it’s my birthday, shouldn’t it mean I get to be extra mean and demanding?”

 

“Aigooo, so vicious,” Lee Soohyuk chuckled as he sat on the other end of the bed.]

 

“Do you know what I do when I’m feeling unwell?”

 

On stared back, replying quietly in a sore voice. “...what do you do?”

 

“...” His gaze softened slightly. “I open the record book, and try out a recipe from young master Cale’s world.” Beacrox said, accompanied by the rhythmic sound of chopping. Steam wafted from the pot that cooked rice in a warm mist. “I try to make it precisely the way he made it, and try to replicate the motions, process, taste,” he said. The record book didn’t only allow them to see memories, but also affected all five of their senses. You could hear the sound of a bird chirp, you could smell the scent of flowers, and you could feel the taste of food like a ghost on your tongue. “Then I’d eat it myself to compare, and note down differences. I’d also wonder why he liked this particular dish.”

 

“...”

 

The taste, the memories that came with it, the process, whatever the reason Cale ate the food he did as Kim Roksoo. Why he was fond of them and why they appeared in the book. Beacrox poured in the cut seaweed into the broth over the stove. “I would also look at instances where he was fond of the food he was eating. Instances where he was eating the food I made,” he said. “And I try to understand the taste from his perspective.”

 

[Cale’s eyes were sparkling brightly as he dug into his sandwich outside the tent. He was exhausted and tired, though he didn’t admit it, from planning and organizing strategies all day, but now he was feeling quite satisfied. 

 

“This, oh, it’s great…” he said, sounding completely exhausted and somewhat desperate. “As expected of you, I guess I can’t expect any less from an expert, huh?” Cale commented, casually, though he seemed quite happy, a small genuine smile on his lips. “Mn, could I get seconds? I’m pretty hungry. Also, make it with more beef next time as well, and a bit spicier, please.”]

 

“He always seemed to like the dishes more than I did,”

 

“...he was the kind of person who really enjoyed his meals,” On mumbled.

 

“He was,” Beacrox replied, focusing on his cutting before he accidentally chopped his finger off from being swept up by memories. “Sometimes, I try to imagine what he would have said if he tasted the recreation of the dish I made, if he’d like it as much as his own version or if he’d like mine more,”

 

[“It’s a little… different. But it still tastes good. I guess it would since Beacrox was the one who made it.”]

 

Beacrox’s throat tightened as he stirred the pot. He wiped his eyes.

 

“I like to think he’d like my version more,”

 

That was his belief, as the person who was the best cook in Cale’s book.

 

“....he would have,” On replied, faint certainty in her voice.

 

The night continued to pass, like that.

 

On stared off into the distant dark sky, seeing puffs of her breath visible in the cold like mist and cloud her vision. She fiddled with the hem of her blanket, and listened to the voice of the woman in her head.

 

It was a little difficult to get used to having a voice occasionally speak in her head at all. Sometimes she was silent, sometimes she spoke. It was strange, but…

 

-Hey, kid, isn’t it kind of cold? You should drink that tea again and warm up.

 

She was nice, and when the silence and her thoughts felt like they’d get to On, she’d help push them away and talk her through it. On took a sip of the still warm lemon tea.

 

Tick. Tick. Tick. There was no clock, but the illusionary sound of ticking filled the void of her mind, like a constant beat.

 

Hurts. It hurts. Something was hurting, but she wasn’t sure what. It just ached.

 

It just—

 

It felt like she’d just been crying, over, and over, and over. And it had just been what-if, and ‘maybe’, or ‘if only’, again and again. She’s read once that there were five stages of grief, but all On had been doing was cycle between depression and bargaining endlessly.

 

It felt like she couldn't even cry anymore. It just would just hurt, a sting behind her eyes and base of her nose and a tightening clench in her throat as if her thoughts were just choking and drowning her.

 

What if she had woken up that morning? Could she have stopped him? Could On have dragged him back, maybe? Talked to him? Pressured, asked him more about what was going on because clearly she’d known something was up. She was smart, and she was sharp. Of course she knew. There was something, but she never even tried to press for more.

 

Could she have found out sooner? Could she have forced Cale to stay at home? Could she have, maybe, if she turned back time, tried to research something? Or maybe, what if she could have managed a deal with a god? A different god, maybe, since the God of Death couldn’t manage anything. But then, Cale would have already tried that. Maybe… some other route… What if—

 

“...”

 

Would that have even made a difference at all?

 

What if it wouldn’t have changed a thing?

 

What could she have even done, if she was brought back to that moment? To that morning? Maybe even years ago?

 

Was it— Was it really, truly always meant to end like this? 

 

Was Cale just supposed to die? After everything? Were they always just supposed to lose him?

 

But she couldn’t think of a single way to even save him.

 

Even if she’d gone back, even if she tried, he might still have just… died.

 

Like it was just his fate.

 

What right did fate have to take away her guardian? 

 

To take away their Cale? On what grounds? What rules? What reason did they have to just discard him after saving the world?

 

-On.

 

Someone had to tell her, why?

 

-On, hey, you need to breathe.

 

Why was it like this? Why are things this way? Why did it turn out how it did? 

 

-take a deep breath—

 

Just why them? Why him?

 

Why?

 

“On,” Someone was squeezing her hand. “You have to breathe. Slower.” 

 

“...” she lifted her other shaking hand. When did she even— how… “I-I…”

 

The muscles in her face felt like they were tightening like knots, trying to squeeze out tears. It hurt.

 

She could feel the cold breath of the night freezing and drying her lungs, and the air in her throat bubble into a lump that made it hard to breathe. On wanted to talk, say something, but it felt like every word melted at the tip of her tongue in useless stammers. It felt like her voice was stuck in her throat.

 

Beacrox sat next to her, on the ground, holding her right hand. “Take a deep breath,” 

 

“I-I’m— I’m trying…” every heartbeat was hammering against her ribcage like it was trying to rip it open, and her thoughts wouldn’t stop racing. “...i…”

 

It’s scary. It felt scary. She wasn’t sure what’s happening to her right now. It’s hard to even breathe or see straight.

 

It all just felt so hopeless. Because Cale— Cale— he was gone. He’d still be gone, tomorrow, and he'd be gone ‘till the next week, and he’d be gone when spring ended and all the summers, autumns, and winters again. He was going to be gone next year, he’d still be gone in ten years. He’d be gone when she grew up and he’d be gone. Gone. Forever.

 

Forever.

 

…Forever—

 

“On. Hey. Can you hear me? Look here,” she slowly turned her shaking pupils toward Beacrox. His expression was calm, it helped a little. “Breathe, carefully. Just try.”

 

“....”

 

“Good. Okay, now, can you just tell me five things you can see?”

 

“...F-Five… five things?” she stuttered in a shaking breath. Beacrox nodded. Focus. She looked to her side. “Um… I… I–I see grass?”

 

“Good. What else?”

 

“...the floor.” she whispered. “There’re— there’s… this cup of lemon tea.”

 

“Right. Just two more, please?”

 

“...I see the counter, and… the window.”

 

He nodded. She could feel her breathing grow steadier. “Good job. Can you tell me about four things you can hear?”

 

“...four,” she repeated. “Uh, I… I hear… I heard your voice?”

 

“Okay.”

 

“I hear…” she mumbled. “I hear the wind-noona’s voice in my head.”

 

“Ah, right.”

 

“She’s… she’s also calming down,” she commented. “I hear…” she closed her eyes. “...wind. The sound of the wind. It— it’s been picking up all night…”

 

“One more.”

 

“I hear… I hear my voice?”

 

“That works,” he nodded, eyeing the way the tremble in her shoulders were gradually easing as the world came back into focus, but On’s eyes were still darting everywhere and she clutched the hem of the blanket. “Three things you can feel?”

 

“W-With my hands?”

 

“Mhm,”

 

“...this, uh, this blanket,”

 

“Good.”

 

She brought her hand to the cold floor, exhaling a breath. “...floor.”

 

“Yes,”

 

“And—” she stared at the ground. “...your hand.”

 

It didn’t completely stop, but she felt… she felt a little better. It didn’t feel like the whole world was shaking, anymore. It didn’t feel like she was drowning, anymore.

 

“I think…” she inhaled a breath, and let go. “...I think I’m fine now, uncle Beacrox.”

 

He patted her hand and let go, standing up to get something from the counter. “Okay.”

 

It felt like the wind was knocked out of her. The violently stirring tsunami was now calmly draining. The giant storm was winding down, and now all that was left were the afterthoughts.

 

She pictured the future, in small snapshots, in visions, and it felt so impossible from where she sat. It was impossible to change all those small visions of a future with her younger siblings, her complete family— a future with Cale. 

 

All that time, when she thought of the days that lay ahead, she pictured them traveling all over, doing the things they liked, seeing the world. But she also saw Cale, drinking tea, waiting for them.

 

Waiting at one of their houses, doing nothing but rolling around in bed or reading a stack of books or eating cookies, and video calling them and the crown prince. Listening to their long stories, giving them his thoughts. She saw herself going around everywhere and buying Cale souvenirs, Hong and Raon rambling and telling him all about them, and then him keeping them all somewhere on a shelf in his room or a drawer or by the windowsill.

 

Now, she just couldn’t. She just couldn’t erase that Cale who would have— should have been waiting for them. She just couldn’t picture that vision any other way. 

 

It was all gone.

 

Beacrox placed a bowl of warm soup in front of her, steam wafting. Her eyes lit up with wonder, seeing the swirling, long ribbon-like green contents. “What…”

 

“Seaweed soup.”

 

“...Like from the sea?”

 

“Yes,” Beacrox was sitting next to her, feet out the door in front of the yard, overlooking  the walls that were covered in old, overgrown vines. “It’s one of young master Cale’s favorites,”

 

“....” her eyes widened— sparkling as she remembered the similar-looking soup she’d fed him when he was sick— and mumbled. “...favorite.”

 

They ate together, Beacrox has his own bowl, leaned against the door frames, silent. On blew on her spoon, the steam dissipating into the air, before eating it.

 

“...slippery.” she whispered. Beacrox chuckled next to her as he nodded.

 

On thought about it. Cale liked this sort of thing, huh? It tasted so strange, she supposed he’s never been the pickiest eater. It was probably a dish from his original world. 

 

“He used to have it sometimes when he was sick,” Beacrox said. “And, his friend would make it for him on birthdays.”

 

On nodded back. She drank the last of the warm lemon tea as well, sugar pooling at the bottom of the cup, and had the pieces of tender beef in the soup. It tasted unique, but good. 

 

“...That 5-4-3 countdown thing, what was that?” On asked, a little curious.

 

“It’s something my father taught me,” he replied. “Mn, maybe more like used on me, and I figured it out,”

 

“What is it?”

 

“It’s a calming technique,” Beacrox answered. “Sometimes you aren’t in your right mind, sometimes you can’t seem to make out the world around you, sometimes you feel overwhelmed,” he explained. “I felt a lot of those things when I left the Eastern continent to make the journey here,”

 

“...” On quietly listened from beside him. She’s rarely heard stories like this from Beacrox.

 

“There were lots of times where I was afraid, panicked, sad. It would happen sometimes just suddenly, in a burst— while we were on the move, or eating in the middle of nowhere in the dark, just like this. Sometimes, all it would take is just a single thought, or a single reminder that brings everything else down.” he said, softly. “During those times, my father would calm me down using this technique. I still use it, sometimes,”

 

“...oh,” she nodded. “I see.” On paused. “Thank you. It worked.”

 

“Mn, of course,” he nodded back. They drifted back to a comfortable silence. The seaweed  soup tasted interesting to her. She stared  down at her reflection in the green-ish clear broth, swirling around. 

 

“...” On chewed on the seaweed some more. She liked the texture. The sesame seeds were a bit weird, but the beef was nice. “I don’t really get it,” she said, with food in her mouth. “I was fine yesterday. I was fine all morning,”

 

Even though he was gone. Even though the thought hurt her every time it came to her, it was the truth. When they’d gone out and explored all the different properties and estates Cale had bought and built for them, all around the continent, it was fun. They’d looked around, tried out the different unique rooms— she was just, alright, in general. It didn’t feel sad, sometimes it just felt like nothing.

 

“Sometimes it’s like that,”

 

“Does it ever stop being like this?”

 

“Maybe not,” Beacrox said. “Maybe, sometimes, you’ll get inexplicably sad, and you won’t know why. Maybe you’ll know exactly why, but not understand why it’s suddenly hurting you so much. Maybe it’ll be like that even when you’re an adult.”

 

“...was it like that for you?”

 

Beacrox thought about his late mother. “It was,” he replied. “And right now, it’s like that for me again, too.”

 

“...i see.” On continued eating from her warm bowl of soup. 

 

The crickets chirped. The bugs that hid under the ground and crawled all over the tree  bark, were silent. The light of the moon shone down in a veil that lit pale shadows past the trees. The wind, as always blew yet again, and she felt like the gusts were trying to be gentle, cooling the spoonful of soup in her hands. She thought about the golden top’s whip she left in her room.

 

In a way, she’d almost forgotten it was winter at all, these past months. 

 

But now, it felt painfully obvious.

 

Painfully, painfully obvious. On felt as if she would dislike winter, again. She felt like—

 

“It’s okay for you to cry, you know,”

 

“...huh?”

 

Drip. drip. 

 

In the silence of the cold night air, came light rain. 

 

Drip. drip. Drip.

 

oh.

 

Her eyes were stinging painfully, and her throat was tightening again, there were sobs bubbling up her throat and bursting into whimpers past her lips. She was sniffling and there was snot on her sleeves, now. 

 

“...I just—” Beacrox was fixing the blanket around her shoulders. Her voice was crumbling. “...i just want him back.”

 

Beacrox was caressing her  shaking  shoulders silently, now. On buried her face in her sleeves. “...just one more minute,”

 

One more minute.

 

If she could have had one more minute, to just say anything to Cale. Anything. Something kind, something angry, something sad. 

 

Tell him something meaningful before he went and gone just like that.

 

She sniffled. “I just—” she rubbed at her eyes that were stinging. “I…”

 

Her thoughts were racing but they couldn’t seem to put themselves into words. It was like a jumbled mess tangled into stutters. It was like her vocal chords were tied into huge winding knots and nothing could come out except a sob and half-baked words.

 

“Cale.. he… i— i just— he’s…”

 

“I know,”

 

Her hand balled up the fabric of her pants in a tight squeeze, she could feel her nails poking past and digging into her palm. On was looking down and watching her trembling hands.

 

“Please, just give him back…”

 

On was a mature child. She was sharp, perhaps more than most people in her family, and she was smart and sensible. But she was a kid. And Beacrox knew this. Kids needed comfort, even adults did too. Maybe she won’t cry, or she’ll choose to stand taller than her younger siblings when they fall. But just as her dongsaengs could rely on her, she could rely on the adults around her, as well.

 

“..i…”

 

“...” Beacrox simply rubbed her shoulder comfortingly as she cried, as the wind whistled by in a low, comforting hum, and as the night continued to pass, the moon high up in the sky awaiting the day despite her cries. It could be said that it was curel of the moon to do, but in a way it could also have been nature’s kindness. That night and day won’t stop dancing around each other, that the clouds would continue to drift, that stars would continue to glimmer, and the world would not cease to breathe. 

 

It would continue to live even if you sat still frozen in place forever, it would continue to live even if your crying may never stop. Your world may crumble, but the earth and sky will not. It may march on without you, but it will march on forever. The world would live on until you were ready to join it.

 

It had been a while. It felt like a dam broke. On wasn’t sure when she started trying to put her feelings away like she was sealing them in a bottle, but the glass was shattering and the contents were spilling before the cap could even be popped off.

 

And… maybe she needed it to.

 

 

“So… what are you doing?” Bud asked, remarkably awkward. He even felt somewhat embarrassed about the way his voice sounded trying to talk to this kid.

 

“...nothing,” Hong replied, sitting down on the couch in the library and staring off, indefinitely. It wasn’t an empty stare. He was spacing out, yes, but his expression seemed thoughtful, in a way. His fingers tapped against his thigh in a continuous absentminded motion. He really was just doing nothing.

 

The tone of the villa all week had been quite somber. Heavy. Stuffy. And, well, for understandable reasons. Bud himself had gone out and drunk with Glenn the other day. He never considered himself an emotional drunk, but it helped push out his feelings.

 

“Have you just been sitting here, for a while?”

 

“...Guess so,” 

 

Hong, to his knowledge, was a very expressive kid, and also the most energetic of the three. Like his siblings, he was quite mischievous, and of course, vicious beyond compare. Seeing him sit so still didn’t feel right. 

 

Bud sat next to him on the couch, a bit awkward. Reading wasn’t something he particularly  did so much in his spare time unless out of necessity, that being for research and the like for jobs. Starting a conversation about a book of all things would be difficult for him to do.

 

It was the afternoon, and the sunlight gently shone past the blinds. The snow was slowly, but surely melting as the days passed. Even so, the villa felt like it was stuck in an eternal winter, forever. Bud felt like he was cold all the time, too.

 

“...oh,” he felt something in his pockets. Rummaging through them, he found— “pebbles,”

 

“Pebbles?” Hong questioned him with a tilt of his head.

 

“Oh, I remember these,” he rolled one of the smooth stones around with his fingers, observing its shape. Hong was staring at the ones on the table, spread out. “These’re from that time,”

 

“What time?”

 

“Well, you were asleep, along with your noona and Raon-nim,”

 

“Huh?”

 

Oh, was he curious? “It was that time where we had flowers all stuck in our hair,” he smiled, just a bit, at the memory. “Later that day, starting in the evening, that punk Choi Han told us about some game with rocks from his hometown,”

 

“Rocks?” his eyes lit up with interest. “Like with those pebbles?”

 

“Yup,” Bud smiled back. Good, this was a bit better. There was some light in his eyes again. “You have to catch it,”

 

“That’s it? Just catching rocks…?”

 

“You’re saying it like it’s easy,” Bud scoffed, tossing a few up and down. “Watch, it’s like this. I’m a pro at this you know,”

 

Hong looked slightly unimpressed despite his words. Bud thought it resembled his sister’s expression and got the chills.

 

“Scatter the stones, then pick one up and go one by one while tossing it in the air like this,” he demonstrated, tossing one stone in the air, swooping down to collect one, catching the flying stone, and repeating until there were none left. “Now you go two by two,” he repeated, this time collecting two stones at a time while one was in the air. “And then… three and one,” he succeeded and smiled. “Now all four.”

 

Hong hummed from beside him, watching closely.

 

“With all the pieces in your hand, you have to… hup!” he tossed them all into the air, and then caught them all at once on the top of his hand. Bud remembered how many times he practiced this specific part of the game because it was so difficult. “And finally, you have to toss it up again and— catch!” he caught all the pieces in his palms in a swift motion and smiled. “And that’s the game. It’s pretty hard, you know,”

 

The redhead was staring at Bud’s hand full of stone pieces, and then at his face that seemed tired. Everyone felt tired. The pebbles were scattered back on the table, and Hong picked one up and fiddled with it. “What’s the game called…?”

 

“Hm, Gonggi, I think,” Bud said. “It’s apparently a kid’s game from Choi Han’s hometown,”

 

“If it’s from Choi Han’s hometown then…” he trailed off. “Did… Cale know how to play?”

 

His expression. “Yeah,” he rolled a pebble around his finger absentmindedly. “Actually, he got it on his first try while everyone else was struggling as soon as he woke up. I’m pretty sure he was yawning while doing it too, that punk,”

 

Hong listened to Bud’s short laughter and felt a bit better. “He was good?”

 

“Really good. It was a little frustrating, haa…” he sighed while watching Hong absentmindedly hold onto the little pebbles. “Why don’t you try it?”

 

“Hm?”

 

“You’ll mess up a lot, but it’s fun once you figure it out,” Bud said. He thought back to the time he spent trying to get really good at catching just a bunch of rocks just to best Cale. He even practiced with Hannah and with Glenn outside after sparring, and he even made bets with the impressive priestess who kept wine in her sleeves and the marquess with a crazy alcohol tolerance. Recalling such silly memories made him feel like a little kid. All that work and for what, huh?

 

“I mean, it’s a bit complicated…” Hong trailed off in  a quiet voice as Bud handed him a pebble. “One by one, and then two by two, mn, three and one, then all four, right?”

 

“And then you catch it on top of your hand.”

 

“And then flip it over in your palm?”

 

“Yup,”

 

“Mn… okay.” Hong nodded, picking up the stones, and…

 

....

 

“...hup!”

 

In the end, he finished by catching all five pebbles in his palm, opening them up to confirm his win. 

 

“...” Bud was gaping, eyes wide. He was completely and utterly speechless, gobsmacked, flabbergasted, and baffled by what he was seeing. Hong chuckled a little under his breath after seeing his over the top reaction.

 

“You—” He got it on his first try. And with remarkable speed as well.

 

“It was easy~” Hong replied in a relaxed tone. “We should do a bet too, next time,”

 

Hong was smiling up at Bud, flashing a toothy grin. It was eerily similar to a combination of Ron’s benign smile and Cale’s own smile when he was trying to extort someone, as if the boy was trying to loot him. Bud shivered. How vicious. Really, he’d almost forgotten that this boy was trained by assassins.

 

“If I had a coin….” he muttered. If he had a coin for every time he’d been bested by a redhead in a game about catching rocks, he’d have 2 coins, which wasn’t a lot but it was really strange that it happened twice.

 

Strange, really. He knew Hong wasn’t Cale’s relative or anything, but he resembled him quite a bit. It was in all the small things, like his cleverness, the way his eyes curl like crescents and the glint of his teeth, his composure in certain situations, the way he sometimes hummed when he was leisurely thinking. They were small things that Bud, who was at least a little observant in his own right as a mercenary, noticed. He must have picked up a lot of things over the course of the time he spent with Cale.

 

Two years, how much could you take after someone after that amount of time?

 

“...did Cale also play any other games?”

 

“Hmm…” Bud hummed, thinking. He observed the way the sadness returned to his eyes like a faint curtain. “That night, mn, we also tried tongue twisters,”

 

“Oh,” he blinked. “I think I saw that in the book.”

 

“Mhm,” he nodded. “How about you try a few?”

 

“...okay,”

 

He seemed curious, that was good. “Let’s start a little easy, I saw a kitten eating chicken in the kitchen.”

 

“You saw a what?”

 

“That’s the tongue twister,”

 

“Hmmm, uh, I saw a kitten eating chicken in the kitchen?”

 

“Okay, try it faster and say it three times now.”

 

“I saw a kitten eating a chicken in the kitchen, I saw a kitten eating a chicken in kitchen, I saw kitsch— mn, a kitten eating a chitchen— bwah,” 

 

“Difficult, huh?” Bud chuckled. “How about this one, Scissors sizzle, thistles sizzle.”

 

“Scissors sizzle, sisth— thistles fizzle,”

 

“How about you try saying it three times?”

 

He hesitated. “Three times?”

 

“Hm, not good at tongue twisters, huh?”

 

Hong was frowning at him as if he’d been wronged, and Bud laughed again. 

 

“I feel kinda weird,”

 

“Weird?”

 

“I don’t know what I feel right now, and I don’t know what to feel, either,” Hong mumbled, fiddling with the stones again, smoothing over the surface. “I don’t—” he hesitated. “I miss Cale.” Bud could see his fingertips shaking. “I really miss him. I miss him right now, I missed him yesterday, I’ll miss him tomorrow too. I think I’m always gonna miss him.”

 

“Hm…” Bud hummed back. Everyone did.

 

“But I feel like— I don’t— it’s like I’m not really sad right now. And, I still miss him, and I still— I think I feel something, I don’t feel good, but I feel like I should be crying more—” he was stammering over his words with a frustrated expression. “I just— I feel like I’m not sad enough, but I am, but… I feel… I’m not really feeling anything right now. I just  feel kind of calm, but… kind of…”

 

“You feel like you shouldn’t be feeling like this?”

 

“Maybe?” he shrugged, shaking his head. “I don’t know anymore.”

 

Bud hummed again, looking out the window. It was a nice day, and the sun was warm. A butterfly flew past, wings fluttering. “You aren’t always going to be sad.” Bud simply said. “You aren’t always going to be crying all the time, either.” 

 

“...”

 

“Sometimes it’s just a lot of… all this,” Bud vaguely motioned forward with his fingers as if he was trying to make sense of it too. “Sometimes it's just a lot of sitting down and feeling nothing. Or maybe feeling other things,” he wasn’t very good at explaining things like these, but tried his best. “It’s like… when you lose someone, it’ll feel like you’re just sitting down and waiting a lot, sometimes.”

 

“Waiting?”

 

“It’s just what it feels like sometimes, right?” Bud said. “Sitting down, and waiting for something to happen, watching things happen, waiting for… well, it’s a lot of passiveness.”

 

“....” he was silent, but nodded, slightly as if he understood.

 

“A lot of… just watching the days pass, a lot of continuing your routines, a lot of forgetting things, like sometimes you’ll blink and the sun is setting,”

 

“Is it like that for you?”

 

“Sometimes,” Bud shrugged. 

 

“Noona and youngest always look so… sad.” Hong said. “They look like ghosts. They’re really quiet.”

 

“It’s like that for some people too.”

 

“Why aren’t I like that?”

 

“Maybe because you’re just going through it differently,” Bud shrugged. “Maybe Raon-nim and your noona are feeling a little different from each other too. That’s just how it is, because everyone’s feeling their own things and this kind of thing’s always been really, really complicated.”

 

“....I wish it wasn’t,”

 

“Everyone wants the same thing,”

 

“Still, I…” he hesitated. “Does it mean it’s easier for me because I’m not as sad?”

 

Oh. So that’s what’s been bothering him. It must’ve been difficult. Bud’s expression softened. “No,” he replied. “This kind of thing isn’t easy for anyone, even if you feel like you’re not ‘as’ sad.” he spoke, picking up a rock and rolling it around his palm, too. It helped him think. “Just because maybe you don’t feel or seem as sad or affected, it doesn’t mean you’re less… mn, sad about all this. It doesn't mean you miss him any less. And you did cry, at the funeral, and lots of other times.” Bud said, words gentle. “And, even if you weren’t, it still hurts anyway, right?”

 

The tips of Hong’s fingers were trembling, his lips pressed together as they quivered. “...yeah.” he mumbled. “...it does.”

 

Bud leaned back. “Just because you feel like you’re feeling less things than maybe what you thought you would…” he spoke. “Doesn't mean you loved him any less.”

 

Hong’s breath hitched at his words. The sky, layered with clouds, cleared slightly as they passed, and sunlight shone past the window in brighter rays. Bud patted his shoulder as comfortingly as he could manage as Hong dealt with his complicated tangled feelings. He felt like he was being a bit awkward with it.

 

He sniffled. “You seem— you seem like you know a lot about this kind of thing.” Hong wiped his eyes. “Did you lose a lot of people before?”

 

Oh, he must’ve asked that because of his occupation. “Yeah,” he nodded. “A lot.”

 

That was just the nature of his work. No one’s invincible, there’s always danger, there’s always risks, there’s always people you won’t see again the next day. 

 

“Is it hard?”

 

“Yeah, sometimes,” he admitted honestly with a shrug.

 

“Then… you go through this kind of thing, a lot?”

 

Bud’s mind was filled with a dozen different faces. “Somewhat.” 

 

“Does it get easier?”

 

“Not really,” he gave a light-hearted smile. “Even when you get punched a lot, a punch still hurts when you get one,”

 

“...oh.” Hong nodded. “Then, you must be pretty strong,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“To be able to take so many punches,” Hong said. “I think you must be pretty strong.”

 

Bud blinked at his words but smiled. “Thanks,” he said. “The sky hasn’t fallen yet, after all.”

 

It did feel like the sky had fallen that day, though. 

 

The chirp of bird song echoed past the glass, outside.

 

“Do you…” Hong trailed off. “Where do you think he is, right now?”

 

“Hm?” his eyes widened in a moment. “Ah.” 

 

Cale. 

 

They knew one thing, and that was that Cale had reincarnated, somewhere, someplace. There was no definitive way to find him. No method they could use, no way to track his soul or even see what he’s up to or talk to him, or…

 

It was weird. It was like they were mourning him, but at the same time, he was alive in a way, somewhere, and they were hopeful of him coming back. It didn’t make it hurt any less.

 

“I’m not sure,”

 

“Do you think…” Hong trailed off. “He’s far away?”

 

“Maybe,”

 

“Is it possible that maybe he’s… he’d be close by, somewhere?” 

 

“That’s possible,”

 

“I just—” he hesitated. “I wonder where Cale-nya is.”

 

Desperation, some sense of hope. It was something that plagued the corner of their souls since they raided the temple and demanded answers from a certain god. Bud would be lying if he didn’t want to see where Cale was, either. He knew everyone, despite their grief, was working on their own thinking and hoping for a way to find him.

 

He’d be a liar if he said he wasn’t the same.

 

But it was best not to think about that, right now. He checked the time, ticking on the clock, and turned towards Hong.

 

“Did you eat yet?”

 

“Hm?”

 

“Lunch,”

 

“Oh.” Hong blinked back. “Uh, no, I guess I haven’t,”

 

“Well, let’s go get a sandwich, then,” Bud stood on his feet. “Sir Beacrox is away right now~”

 

“If you get caught, you’ll be in a lot of trouble,”

 

“Well, he’s not gonna catch us,”

 

Hong raised a brow but had a mischievous expression. His eyes began to light up, little by  little as he wiped his face. “Okay.” he nodded. 

 

If it felt like the world was slowing to an unbearable pace, if it felt like the hours were empty, if the seconds ticking by just felt like empty shells— They’ll just wait the days out. They’ll wait, and they’ll live. If just for one reason, it would be because that person who was missing from the corners and centers of their minds would have wished for it.

 

 

“...You should really learn to use doors,” 

 

“...” Choi Han was standing at the terrace as the afternoon faded into the evening, the skies darkening. Alberu was there, too, at the railing and looking out. The person who was in dark clothes, contrasting Alberu’s light attire, stood next to him.

 

“What brings you here?”

 

“Nothing, really,”

 

“...okay,”

 

They stood next to each other just like that, in silence as the sun slowly, surely set into the horizon. Choi Han then spoke up.

 

“You look like you’re thinking deeply about something.”

 

He said that because Alberu’s eyes looked so subdued. It was as if, just like the one sinking before them, the sun was setting, dimming, leaving the sky and allowing the darkness of the night to take charge. 

 

“I was just thinking,” he began, staring off. “about how peaceful it is,”

 

Peaceful. Yes, despite everything, the land was peaceful and safe. A ruler was looking out towards that view, which would be any monarch’s dream, in front of him, stretching far as the eye can see. Their world shook but the earth remained intact.

 

“....” It was something Choi Han appreciated, as well.

 

“And I was also thinking—” he continued. “About how Cale must have suffered a lot for us to get all the way here.”

 

Those words cut like blades. Choi Han felt a part of himself crumble. Alberu, who was standing beside him, continued to silently, regretfully, mournfully contemplate. 

 

They came a long way, and managed— survived through so many ordeals.

 

And yet.

 

“It’s so frustrating,” Alberu spoke. “That punk of a dongsaeng of mine is, and so is fate and the divine, and everything,” his tone was calm, composed, but also exerted a kind of pressure like he was about to burst. He clenched his fists. “He’s so—”

 

Alberu sounded angry, in a way.

 

And yet.

 

It was like he couldn't even bring himself to be angry. Not at Cale. Oh, but, no, he was angry, definitely, but…

 

“Why the hell isn’t he here?”

 

Why wasn’t the person who sacrificed the most, who fought the hardest, who got in trouble and caused him the most paperwork pulling the craziest damn stunts, not here? Why wasn’t he here to enjoy the peace he worked so hard to attain? That damn slacker life he talked his ear off about? After fighting for years all his life, even before setting  foot in this world?

 

It was like some sick irony. Some joke. 

 

“...I actually came here to ask a question,” Choi Han’s steady voice cut through the wind. Alberu exhaled a breath.

 

“What is it?”

 

“Your highness,” he began, eyes glinting in the light of the sinking sun. “Does heaven exist, here?”

 

“....Heaven.” he echoed. Paradise, Eden, it went by many different names. Alberu was knowledgeable in many different religions, though he wouldn’t consider himself a devout worshipper of any. “I’m not sure,”

 

“You aren’t?”

 

“Gods exist, divine realms, powers— and so does reincarnation,” Alberu said. “In many churches, such a place does exist. There are myths, as well.”

 

Whether there truly was a heaven, a place where souls rested, Alberu didn’t know. Maybe there was. He wasn’t sure due to the fact that reincarnation was a thing.

 

“...”

 

He thought of a talk he had with Cale regarding the underworld. In that place, there was such a place like paradise for heroes, as well as reincarnation. Elysium, if he remembered right.

 

“...It could be real.” 

 

Maybe a Cale made a stop there, and then quickly headed off to reincarnate like the workaholic he was. Alberu chuckled at the thought, and Choi Han looked over at him.

 

The stars began to be visible as the cool currents of the night sky spread and stretched above them, ushering the sun to sleep.

 

“...Maybe he…” Choi Han spoke in a low voice, as if the words were heavy on his lips. “...Became a star in the sky.”

 

How poetic of this punk. “Maybe.”

 

“Yeah, maybe he… reincarnated into that,”

 

“Hmm…” Alberu hummed. “Then, it’d be difficult to reach him, right?”

 

“We could try,” Choi Han’s gloved hand reached upwards towards the vastness of the sky, as if trying to feel the stars at his fingertips. “We could, mn, make a rocket ship… or use magic, or… anything’s possible, right? We managed to do it in Korea.”

 

“You did?”

 

“Americans made it to the moon, Cale-nim told me there's robots on Mars, and… anything could happen. I mean, I don’t know how to build a giant rocket, but… we can try.”

 

Alberu’s expression softened. Right. Even if he was at the edge of the universe, the tips of the sky, in another world far beyond their reach, they would defy even the divine to see him. To meet him. Just once.

 

“We can try,” Alberu repeated, and Choi Han smiled a little. “Though, when you say he could be a star, that means he could be anything too, right?”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Who knows, really? Maybe in this life he could be a random pebble deep in the forest,” he chuckled. “That way he’d get his slacker life, huh? Just sit down and turn about every now and then.”

 

“...maybe he’s a bird,” Choi Han mumbled. “The kind that hates migrating,”

 

“He could be a random leaf, or a cringey fantasy novel, maybe he’s some old grandma’s grumpy cat who hates baths and sunbathes all day while napping,” Choi han chuckled at his words, Alberu stared off thoughtfully, watching the final moments of the sun sink. “He could be an apple tree, or something. Heck, maybe he’s a drop of water, a wind spirit, an elemental, maybe he’s the goddamn sun, or just sunlight that stings your eyes in the morning. He could be a flower that only blooms whenever the hell he wants but never when there’s people around because it’s annoying, or maybe he’s one sly fox that keeps eating a poor farmer’s livestock. Y’know, I’d bet he’s a shiny gold coin in this life,”

 

Choi Han snorted. “That’s ridiculous,”

 

Yes, it was ridiculous. And they knew if he was reincarnated, he’d probably be a human anyway. 

 

But no matter where or what he ended up as, even as a speck of dust, they would go find him if even to just meet him for one moment. 

 

“They’re building a statue of him.”

 

“Hm?”

 

“The citizens of the Henituse territory are building a statue of Cale-nim.” Choi Han said. Alberu’s eyes clouded over as he looked at him. “They’ve been working for a while. It should be finished around…” he trailed off. “Spring.” 

 

“Ah, so… the end of the month.”

 

The winter was slowly melting away each day. The days would grow longer as the ground warmed. 

 

Alberu almost wanted to laugh. It was silly, in a way. If Cale was here, he would immediately object to such a gesture done in his honor, and would whine to Alberu to go say something about it and stop the people from doing so.

 

Still, a statue of Cale, huh?

 

Alberu wondered what manner of vision would be carved from the stone their kingdom was known for. He wondered what Cale looked like, built from the eyes of the people he saved. Drawn, sculpted, chiseled, and created by mournful, but grateful hands.

 

“...”

 

Cale’s statue would end up looking quite beautiful, if that was the case.

 

“...your highness, have you eaten yet?”

 

Choi Han suddenly asked this question as they sat in the shadow of the approaching evening, glancing back to the tall stacks of paperwork at his office desk, emptied cups of coffee. Alberu huffed.

 

It was a phrase they said all the time, now. Something they’d ask whenever they met each other and left the comfort of their own solace. He’d expected it to be painful words to hear, as they were Cale’s last words in the record book, however…

 

“In a minute. I had some cookies,” he said softly.

 

They ended up being somewhat comforting to hear.

 

“It’s almost time for dinner,” Choi Han said, like a reminder.

 

“mhm.”

 

“Are you going to be eating here?” it sounded like he was offering someplace else to eat.

 

“Y’know, I’m usually the one who gets pulled out of my office and dragged to the villa, or be randomly brought lunch boxes,” he chuckled, forlorn, despite the memories of a certain redhead being the culprit of such stunts not being so distant. “Why don’t you stay over, this time around?”

 

“For dinner?”

 

“You can have snacks too,”

 

Choi Han stared at him and shrugged. “...okay.”

 

“This palace’s chef is quite talented too, you know,” sometimes it was if the others forgot he was a powerful monarch of probably the strongest kingdom on the continent at present.

 

“Alright.”

 

….

 

They were back to contemplative silence. 

 

How long had it been, already? 

 

Since Cale was gone?

 

Alberu closed his eyes. A while. It felt like every day was just going by at a pace that was both agonizingly slow, but also gone in a blink.

 

“Haaa….” he let out a long sigh and whispered. “I wish he was here.”

 

“...I know.” Choi Han replied in a quiet but soft voice.

 

“I wish he’d… ask me for a golden plaque.”

 

“I know.”

 

“I wouldn’t mind it if he… went and caused more paperwork for me to do,”

 

“I know.”

 

He chuckled while shaking his head. “I wish he’d keep breaking into my office like he didn’t know how to use doors.”

 

“...i know.”

 

“I wish he’d… ramble nonsense to me again,”

 

“I know.”

 

“...eat my cookies…”

 

“I know.”

 

“Drug me with tea and… sort through my paperwork like a madman,”

 

Choi Han looked at him strangely this time and Alberu laughed.

 

“I wish he’d come back.”

 

Choi Han traced lines on the railings, seemingly at random, but it was like he was trying to recall some sort of pattern. 

 

“....I know.”

Notes:

first i've gotta say grief. isnt something i've experienced myself, at least not to the same extent/intensity as the characters here because yknow, cale died, thats their entire universe gone. However some of these do hold true some of my own feelings in different contexts, though they might still be inaccurate TwT

Ah, and for those wondering, there will be a reincarnation arc coming up. after maybe 2, 3 more chapters. Beacrox and On are so scary uncle and his favorite equally vicious niece to me like theyre so- ahhhhhhhh. Hong and Bud are alcoholic uncle thats lowkey kind of stupid sometimes and super awkward and his boss' kid that bullies him on occasion and asks to be taken out for ice cream every time they meet. Choi Han and Alberu are just in DespairTM. and ofc bonus dynamics with the APs later on which will be explored (On and her wine aunt with a questionable past that encourages thievery and tells her to punch the boy back twice as hard)

Even still, the world doesnt end when yours does. and, well, thats a little comforting.

Chapter 20: the rising sun.

Summary:

Alberu's Coronation, and the days that led up to it.

Notes:

HELLO YES IM ALIVE AND SO IS THIS FIC (not cale though)

waaah, how long has it been? a month? sure has been a while, huh~ a lot of things have happened to me. For one, I just graduated, and then there was also the senior trip, etc. etc., so my life has really been jam packed. Ah, and on that note, something relatively important regarding future updates:

On the 20th next month I'm going to a boarding school (hurray...) and they're a bit strict with tech use so the updates might slow down by a lot, so i'm really sorry! i can bring my laptop but its rlly strictly managed, tho they do have computer rooms there so i might be able to manage with those.

ahhhhh and my goodness, this chapter really took a lot of time cooking too. there were so many revisions and i tried to proofread it but there still might be a bunch of typos and errors here and there so apologies in advance (i seriously need to do a mass-edit of this fic TwT) and Alberu is such a complex character that i unfortunately did not have as deep of an understanding of compared to Cale and Choi Han, so I had to spend the month slowly absorbing his character via fandom and source material analysis osmosis~ even then im still nervous about this chapter TwT

well, have fun!

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Two days before his coronation, on the third month of the year. The first breaths of a bright spring were softly blowing past the trees, nature itself awakening after a long peaceful slumber. Leaves and buds sprouted at the tips of dry branches, tulips emerged from the ground. It was exactly a week after the statue of Cale Henituse, the war hero, was erected in the Henituse territory.

 

The crown prince, or better yet soon-to-be king of the Roan kingdom, was looking at the date circled in ink on his calendar, tapping his fingers lightly against his desk, and thinking.

 

“...”

 

The coronation’s date had been pushed back in light of… recent events. The initial plan to hold it in February was moved back to March. It was still a good date, early in the year and in the first breaths of spring, fresh from the victory of the war, though the giref still lingered like a shadow.

 

The date. Alberu buried his face in his hands, sighing. He hadn’t been able to stop agonizing over it all week.

 

“...That guy was the one who asked me to push the date of the coronation earlier,” he mumbled. 

 

Alberu didn’t exactly ask Cale explicitly to come to his coronation. He told him about his plans for it— the redhead was the first to hear of it at the time, before even his close confidants. This was because he wanted to hear Cale’s opinion on the matter— he wanted his support.

 

His fingers traced over the edge of a budget report. “...should I have made him keep a promise?”

 

Cale hated social events. It was a fact that he didn’t hide at all. He really couldn’t be bothered to attend even a banquet dedicated to himself. But even then, Alberu could tell that even if he were to only tell him about the coronation ceremony, he would show up even if he whined about it, because that was just the kind of person he was.

 

And, Alberu wanted him there. That was why he pushed to set the date earlier contrary to his initial plans after Cale suggested it on the night of the New Year.

 

For Cale. So that he’d attend.

 

“Do you think you could do it sooner?”

 

“...what a jerk.”

 

Alberu felt upset, again. He shook his head and shuffled through his papers, reorganizing the documents in his drawers, his writing kits, and refilling ink bottles and replacing his quills. Alberu wasn’t sure why he was busying himself with such pointless things— suddenly taking everything out and clipping his papers together. Maybe he just needed to work on something, keep his hands moving, take the focus somewhere else.

 

“...ah.” he paused when his hand brushed against a folder. At the top was Alberu’s name written in quick, efficient, slightly messy ink. There wasn’t much else to it to indicate what was inside, but Alberu already opened it once.

 

He took out the pages from inside, got up, and plopped onto his couch just across from his desk. It was a quiet afternoon, and no one would bother him unless it was particularly urgent, and he’d been doing nothing but work these past few days, nonstop. Now that he’s run out, he guessed there was nothing else to do but read the Earth myths Cale had written down for him.

 

Handwritten, neat and clear, from this punk, top to bottom. It was even formatted like it had been written with a typewriter. He supposed such were the talents of Cale Henituse and Kim Roksoo, the workaholic with an impeccable work ethic at his company in Korea, and the hero awarded with multiple medals of honor across the continent. Maybe he really should have made him Prime Minister, he’d have been extremely efficient.

 

“Pfftt—” he huffed, laughing to himself with a slight smile. “Sorry, that was so mean of me to even think, huh?”

 

He wasn’t graced with a frown or a response to his small apology, so Alberu flipped through the titles of Greek Myths. There was nothing else to do.

 

“Hades and… Persephone,” he wasn’t sure if he pronounced the names right, but he decided he'd just start with that one.

 

One sunny day, Persephone, the Goddess of Spring and daughter of Demeter, Goddess of the Harvest, was picking flowers in a garden, like roses, violets, hyacinths and the like on Earth. As she was joyfully frolicking, a beautiful radiant narcissus captivated her. As she reached towards it, the earth below her tore in half and opened up like the jaws of a beast.

 

Near certain words were small numbers, and the bottom of the page were footnotes in correspondence.

 

‘1- Persephone is a young goddess, also the goddess of life or grain in some depictions. 

 

2- a narcissus’ other name is a daffodil. The narcissus is named after a figure in Greek mythology. He’s quite a character.’

 

“Mn…”

 

Hades, God of the Underworld who was in love with Persephone and had earned his brother's— Zeus, who was also Persephone’s father— permission to have her, emerged with his golden chariot and abducted her. When Demeter heard her daughter’s cries, she descended towards the Earth, looking for her daughter. She carried a torch in her hand as she scoured the land dressed in a black robe, without anybody to guide or tell her what had happened to her daughter, for days.

 

“...What a sad story,” Alberu mumbled as his gaze trailed down to the footnotes.

 

‘3- a chariot is similar to a cart and is usually pulled by an animal, like a horse, and carries one or two people.’

 

On the third day, she met with Hecate, who also heard her daughter’s cries, but did not know what had happened to her. Then they went to the Sun, Helios, who saw everything and informed her of Persephone’s abduction and how Zeus had allowed for it.

 

“The Sun?” Like a god? The footnotes written by Cale were available at the bottom once again as if to respond to his questions.

 

‘4- Hecate is a Greek deity known as a protector of the household. She’s also known as the goddess of necromancy, witchcraft, the moon, etc.

 

5- Helios is sometimes called the Sun God, but he’s more like the actual personification of it in the eyes of the Greeks.’

 

“...mn,” So there was a goddess of necromancy and witchcraft? It was interesting to him. Usually things like that would make you an enemy of the church, particularly the Sun God’s, though now creatures of the night were no longer considered as such even though the bitter sentiments still lingered in the minds of people. He thought of Mary, Tasha, and the Dark Elves as he continued.

 

Demeter, stricken with immense grief and anger at Zeus’ betrayal, was inconsolable, and neglected her duties as Goddess of Agriculture. As a result, the land on Earth became barren. It had gotten so bad that Zeus, the king of the gods, had to step in due to the fact that the humans were on the brink of extinction. 

 

No matter how many deities they sent to persuade Demeter to return to her duties and accept the fact that her daughter was Hades’ wife now, she would not yield, continuing to grieve until her daughter was returned to her. In the end, they negotiated with the Underworld, and Hades agreed. 

 

However, Persephone had consumed pomegranate seeds offered by Hades. Tasting the food of the food of the Underworld would bind you there forever. As a result, since she did not eat all the pomegranate seeds, there was a compromise. Persephone would spend four months of the year in the Underworld  with Hades, and the rest of the year with Demeter, in accordance with the amount of pomegranate seeds she’d eaten.

 

“...”

 

When Persephone returns to Demeter, she is overjoyed, and in turn so is the earth— sprouting with life and flourishing, spring and summer. When the time nears for her to return to the underworld, the air grows cold and the trees begin to shed their leaves and crumple away. And finally, when Persephone leaves towards the Underworld, Demeter is overcome with sorrow and in turn so is nature. Nothing may grow, nothing may flourish. The land is frozen just as their goddess is awaiting her daughter’s return, and the cycle begins anew.

 

And that was the end of the myth.

 

Below it were attached anecdotes from Cale.

 

This myth is actually quite popular on modern Earth due to the nature of Hades and Persephone’s romance, and their contrast. There’s other stories about Persephone’s rule as Queen of the Underworld and how Hades was devoted to her, but this myth isn’t really about that but Demeter’s, her mother’s, perspective. It’s important to note that myths were written to explain natural occurrences and as a way to represent certain circumstances at the time, much like normal stories.

 

“Explain natural occurrences…” ah, so the changing of the seasons, then. It started to make more sense.

 

Aside from the changing of the seasons, at the time this myth was created, many mothers would suffer losing their daughters due to them being married off, often young, usually for political or practical reasons to different men who are more often than not older than them. This myth is a reflection of that grief and rage.

 

“...ah.” A grief that could end the entire world. Alberu trailed his fingers across the page, feeling as if he could understand it, to some degree.

 

Things like myths leave a lot of room for your own interpretation. I read an analysis once about this myth. Their interpretation was something like how the gods aren’t supposed to make sense as people but rather as what they represent. I thought this particular sentence was very accurate, “Of course Hades rips a daughter away from their mother’s arms, because that’s what death does”,

 

“...That’s what death does.” Alberu repeated the last sentence of the anecdote. 

 

He gazed out into the beautiful weather outside the glass, the pleasant wind flowing through the opened windows in a cool breeze, the gentle sunlight lighting up the room, the sound of birds chirping and the palace’s garden that was blooming with spring’s flowers and bright green leaves, well tended to.

 

It was the product of a mother’s joy after being reunited with her daughter. Someone’s joy after meeting their loved one, their family, once again. 

 

Alberu chuckled to himself, bitterness at the tip of his tongue. “I’m envious.”

 

At the very end of Demeter’s grief, theirs started.

 

And it would be winter, forever.

 

He read the next story, setting aside the first story. It was titled, ‘Daedalus and Icarus’.

 

“More names I can’t pronounce, huh…? Day-da-loose?” Alberu sighed but began, anyway. Perhaps if he pronounced it wrong enough times, an annoyed ghost will appear to correct him.

 

Daedalus was a skilled sculptor and artisan. It was said once that his creations needed to be tied down or else they would run away. His sculptures were so life-like and incredible that they would really come to life. He was also a remarkably talented inventor.

 

“Come to life…” Alberu noted. If a sculpture could become life-like enough to really run away into the night, he wondered if the sculpture of Cale in the Henituse territory would one day vanish. The thought was silly.

 

After being banished from Athens for trying to kill his nephew, Talos, he headed to Crete. There, the king, Minos, would ask him to construct a labyrinth to contain the Minotaur and various other things.

 

He looked towards the footnotes once again.

 

‘1- Athens is the name of a Greek City with the patron Goddess of Wisdom, Athena

 

2- Crete is the name of a different Greek city ruled by King Minos

 

3- The Minotaur is a type of monster, half-man and half-bull, with human legs and bull parts from the torso and up, and is the child of King Minos’ wife (it’s complicated). You’ll see him in Theseus’ myth.‘

 

“Ho,” It was interesting how interconnected every myth was. 

 

Though, when Daedalus tried to leave Crete, the king who was greedy for his brilliant mind imprisoned him in a tower overlooking the ocean. He was not alone, but with his dearest son, Icarus. He planned an escape, telling his son, ‘He [Minos] may thwart our escape by land or sea but the sky is surely open to us: we will go that way: Minos rules everything but he does not rule the heavens’

 

“So they plan to fly?” Alberu mumbled to himself quietly

 

Daedalus, determined to escape, created a pair of wings from feathers lined from longest to shortest and held together by beeswax and thread. When he finished, he wore the wings and demonstrated to his son, explaining how they should be used. He warned Icarus, do not fly too high nor too low and to take the route in the middle of the extremes.

 

Alberu could already tell that it wouldn’t end well for him. Hearing about the invention of artificial wings, he thought of the ones the Flame Dwarves had created during the battle at the Gorge of Death.

 

And so Daedalus led his dear son in the skies as they flew away from Crete. But, overcome with hubris at the power and thrill of conquering the sky, Icarus soared higher, and higher, and in the end, despite his father’s shouts and warnings, he had flown too close to the sun. The beeswax on his wings melted, and the feathers came apart and he plummeted towards the dark sea, and died. Overcome with grief, Daedalus flew towards the island near the place where his son fell and named it Icaria in his memory, and the sea where he fell is named the Icarian sea. There, he also buried his son and mourned him.

 

“...” Was loss a common theme in Greek myths?

 

He traced over the line about Daedalus naming an island after his son, and thought for a while. Even now, there were a few streets named after Cale, or some alias of his. The capital’s plaza had a street called ‘Silverlight’, to honor Cale’s actions in the first terror incident. In the Henituse plaza, there were streets and avenues named after Cale, as well as his different abilities. The shield, the thunderbolt, and all the others. 

 

He’d heard that in Puzzle City, they named multiple streets after Cale as well, among other heroes, and stacked rock towers for him. The people of the town with a history of being abandoned by the gods, and in turn stopped relying on them, stacked rock towers high up in front of their houses adorned with mourning flowers. They did not hope for blessings and for someone to grant their wishes, but built resolutions from stone. They resolved to live proper and meaningful lives to honor the sacrifices made by the heroes who fought for the current era of peace.

 

In other kingdoms as well, they named many more streets and places after him. Perhaps his name had even etched itself into the next continent over. 

 

It always…

 

Even though Cale was gone, it also felt as if he was present in every corner of the world, wherever he looked. Like a lingering ghost.

 

It brought a strange sense of comfort.

 

“...”

 

Yes, even these handwritten myths were one of the many things that reminded Alberu of Cale.

 

They all have some sort of anecdote at the end, too, he thought.

 

His gaze traced downward towards the notes Cale wrote. When did he even have the time for this, when he was so sick?

 

“Crazy…” he mumbled, an exasperated smile twisting at his lips. He trailed back towards the anecdotes, where Cale would be explaining things and providing more context and perspective.

 

This is another popular one. There’s a phrase on Earth from this myth. When someone had been too arrogant, and then failed or was met with negative consequences in some way while trying to gain more things, you would say they flew too close to the sun.

 

“Hm,” 

 

The main moral behind the myth is about hubris, and how it could bring about your downfall. There’s also a line about flying in the middle between extremes in Daedalus’ instructions to his son. I think this also lines up with a philosophy called the ‘Golden Mean’ by Aristotle, who was one of the greatest Greek philosophers, which is mostly about living life finding ‘the balance between two extremes’. 

 

Generally speaking, there are many morals condemning arrogance and hubris in Ancient Greek society, since they often led to the downfall of many heroes and figures. Icarus is just one example. It seems to be a theme that’s taught very often. This may be an exception, but many stories like Arachne’s, where she’s punished by the goddess Athena for insulting the gods and believing her skills to surpass them, often have the wrath of a god or goddess incurred as a result of arrogance. It tells you a lot about what kinds of values the people back then had.

 

To earn the ire of gods, was there no scarier thing? Even in this world, it was a terrifying thing that could really happen and really could happen. He supposed only Cale Henituse could sometimes seem scarier than such powerful deities.

 

The paragraph was coming to an end as he read the last lines.

 

Though, at its core, no matter what lesson it's trying to teach, this myth is also a tragedy about a father losing his son. 

 

If a child was given wings, wasn’t it natural that they would wish to soar to the ends of the sky?

 

I once read a strange reimagining and reiteration of what happened in high school, or maybe a false version— I’m not too sure what it was. The memory is a bit hazy now, and I’m not sure what it was about, but I could remember that in the story, Daedalus continued to fly across the world, searching for his drowned son who was swept up in the waves, and his tears became the rain, which was an explanation for the phenomenon. 

 

Tears that became rain. It made him think of another story, a popular children’s fairy tale about the origin of snowflakes. Alberu’s eyes softened just slightly when he remembered the nights where his mother would tell the story to him in a soothing but dynamic voice. She was a great storyteller.

 

If it was really Daedalus, who became the sky and cried for his son in thunderous wails and tears that welled into rain that soaked the earth, and was cheered up by the small boy playing in the rain every day until he became sick and so snowflakes fell— perhaps he’d seen some part of Icarus in the cheerful boy.

 

Then, in that story, one father’s grief would cause the same pain for another.

 

What a tragic iteration, Alberu thought with a sigh as he sifted through the myths once again.

 

There were many. A tale about a woman who challenged a goddess and was turned into a spider monster, one of an arrogant and selfish person who fell in love with his reflection and turned into a flower, a story of a golden apple that caused a war because of a dispute between gods, an epic of a war-battered captain and king who sacrificed everything to return to his wife and son, the origin of red roses, the birth of the Goddess of the Hunt and the God of the Sun.

 

Again, Alberu found many intertwined themes. One of which was grief and loss, among others.

 

He felt a bit fascinated by the way the world changed and twisted to the whims— the emotions— of the gods. The winter that stretched on, the flowers dyed with blood, the way mortal things were immortalized. Their grief that shook the entire world. 

 

He liked reading the footnotes and the anecdotes. He’d find himself rereading those parts more than the myths themselves, or sometimes focusing more on them, because Alberu felt as if he could hear Cale’s voice through his handwriting, rambling on and explaining things to him like he often would.

 

When the afternoon arrived, he realized he'd read through all the pages in the folder prepared for him. All but one.

 

Alberu traced under the title that was written in ink.

 

“Orpheus and Eurydice.”

 

By this point, he was laying and sprawled all over the couch, the afternoon’s light shining through the curtains. There was an open cookie jar on his table and crumbs on his face and on the pillows, and his eyes were stinging, a little. Such an undignified appearance wasn’t befitting of the king-to-be, but Alberu felt somehow that he didn’t care, in the moment. That he didn’t need to.

 

“I feel so lazy,” he mumbled to himself with cookies stuffed in his mouth. Cale would often act in such a lazy way while Alberu was working on the other end doing some form of paperwork. He looked towards the direction of his desk from there. It was a clear view, and he got a sense of Cale’s perspective while he would be lazing around after barging in his office. “I guess… this feel pretty comfortable”

 

He sipped some tea and drew his gaze back slowly to the first words on the page.

 

Orpheus was a brilliant and talented musician, the greatest of his time, his voice and lyre enticing even the gods. He was the son of Apollo from where he acquired his remarkably divine talent in music. He fell deeply in love with a wood nymph named Eurydice, who was enamoured by his talent. Eventually, they decided to get married.

 

“Ah,” Alberu could almost tell that it would not end well for them either. Tragic romances were a genre that appeared too often. 

 

‘1- Apollo, aside from being the sun god, is also a deity associated with music’

 

On their wedding day, the newlyweds were joyous and blessed by many. There was a feast, laughter, and their love only continued to bloom. The newlyweds departed on their way once the festivities were over, starry-eyed and encompassed in happiness. However, that joy was short-lived.

 

“...”

 

On their way home, Eurydice was bitten by a viper with a lethal venom, and died.

 

There it was.

 

Orpheus was stricken with immense grief. Every day that passed, he could do nothing more than mourn for his wife, until he resolved to enter the Underworld in order to retrieve his wife. The God Apollo would speak to Hades, God of the Underworld, and would allow him entry.

 

Alberu’s eyes faintly shone. To go to the land of the dead and simply take a person back, it seemed like such a ridiculous idea. Even so, he read on.

 

He entered through the gates, and nobody blocked him. Then, he arrived before King Hades and Queen Persephone, and sang of his grief— pleading through song. The immense pain in his voice and his mournful prose was difficult to ignore, and even brought the King of the Underworld to tears, melted the ruthless Queen’s heart, and even the fearsome Cerberus wailed in despair.

 

‘2- Queen Persephone is actually pretty fearsome, being called Dreaded Persephone. She handed out the punishments in the Underworld.

 

3- Cerberus is a three-headed dog who guards the gates of the Underworld.’

 

Hades and Persephone were here, as well. It seemed like, as Cale mentioned in the first myth, they were quite devoted to each other. Alberu supposed he could understand why they would have been so moved by Orpheus’ song. 

 

He wondered what would have happened if any of them had such a strong voice, enough to reason with the gods. Enough to make them listen and do something for them, enough to awaken humanity within them, enough for them to return their precious person, somehow. Just somehow.

 

If they stormed the temple again and pleaded, would they be let through the gates, too? Or were the gods simply not so easily swayed, in this world? 

 

What song should they sing so that the gods would grant their wish?

 

“...” Ah, Alberu was just slightly envious.

 

Hades permitted him to bring back his wife from the Underworld and towards the Upper World, the land of the living, with him. He told him that his wife Eurydice would follow him up the steps to the gates, but warned that he should not look back even once towards Eurydice or else she would be bound back to the Underworld, unable to leave and undoing everything he hoped for. Hades said to wait until Eurydice was in the light before looking back towards her.

 

“...”

 

Orpheus joyously began his journey out of the Underworld. As he approached the exit, he could hear Eurydice’s footsteps, and her hand reaching for his own. Containing his relief and his emotions, he simply held onto it silently in a secure grip as they ascended towards the light.

 

Ah, Alberu disliked tragedies. It was a fact he had just come to realize, at that moment, when he felt he could predict the ending of this story.

 

When Orpheus stepped out into the light and gazed at the radiant sun, he looked back excitedly towards his wife. But, Eurydice had not seen the sun yet, still veiled in darkness. Her cold ghostly hand was pried out of Orpheus’ own and she was swept back into the darkness of the Underworld, without him being able to do a single thing. 

 

“...” Alberu stared at the paper as his head rested on the pillow on the couch. The light of the afternoon sun illuminated the paper, and he could see the shadow of his finger behind the page. “...What a fool.”

 

He’d been given such a huge chance, but in the end he messed it up and fumbled at the finish line. Even though he knew that the story was going in this direction, he still couldn’t help feeling disappointed.

 

Alberu could only think, it didn’t have to end this way, if only he hadn’t made that mistake.

 

The myths continued on.

 

Swept with anguish, he approached the gates of the Underworld once more, but was denied at the gates by Hermes, who was sent by Zeus and would not let him through.

 

“...the messenger god,” Alberu duly noted, recalling his presence in a previous myth.

 

He would spend the rest of his waking days from then on, wandering the land with nothing but heartbreak. He would shun any company from any woman, crying, and singing the saddest of songs. And so a group of women, furious of his indifference and scorn, would attack him. Orpheus did not even have the will to resist, and he was killed, dismembered, and his parts thrown and swept away by the course of the river.

 

“Hm?”

 

Normally, footnotes were functional and straightforward in nature, used only to clarify and provide context on more topic-specific words or references in the text. However, the fourth footnote, referencing the last line of the paragraph Alberu had been reading, just said this: 

 

‘4- Don’t be like this guy, he’s kind of pathetic. You’re better than that.’

 

“...”

 

It was about the line where Orpheus didn’t even resist being killed by a group of women in his grief.

 

“....Ha.”

 

Alberu was laughing. He was almost offended.

 

It is said that his head and his lyre floated down the river and towards the Island of Lesvos, where the Muses had found him and gave him a proper burial.

 

He remembered something Cale mentioned, once, about being unable to cross the River Styx if they weren’t given a proper burial. 

 

‘5- An island named after the mythical hero, Lesvos

 

6- The muses were the inspirational Goddesses of literature, science, and the arts’

 

And in the end, Orpheus’ soul descended towards the Underworld and was finally reunited with his beloved wife, Eurydice, where they would spend eternity together.

 

And that was the end of the myth. 

 

The first line of Cale’s usual anecdotes for this one was…

 

Don’t try this.

 

“Pfft—” he choked on his jam-flavored cookie and sat up a little to swallow in an undignified manner that was certainly not fitting for his title.

 

I’m telling you, gods can’t be trusted. At least, the ones in our world, most of the time.

 

“Haaa...” what a way to start an end-note.

 

This is the last Greek myth in the stack, unless you were reading out of order, which is still fine. 

 

Alberu had read it in the order it was in the folder. He leaned back comfortably on the sofa once more as he continued reading.

 

Hyung, I don’t know when you started reading this. But I’ll guess that you’re getting crowned sometime soon.

 

“I could be reading this at some point after that, you know,” he mumbled out loud, but if it was Cale, then he probably predicted that Alberu would do this, that punk.

 

His hand traced under the word, ‘hyung’. It didn’t have the usual honorific ‘nim’ attached. This note didn’t seem to be as focused on Orpheus and Eurydice’s story, compared to other anecdotes.

 

So the cookie prince will be the cookie king now, hm? Ahhh, what an honor it is for this simple subject to write in such a casual way to the future sun at the height of the Roan kingdom, I can envision your radiance just as I write to you, it is truly so dazzling that I can’t help but feel as if I’ve been blinded in the middle of this tranquil night.

 

His right eye twitched. This was starting to feel more like a personal letter than anything. “My dearest dongsaeng, treasure of the kingdom and light of the continent, seems to have a pen that’s as smooth as his glib tongue,” 

 

He could almost see Cale’s sour expression and couldn’t help the light laugh that escaped him.

 

Now about the myth. This one is also very popular, and there’s many discussions on it and reenacted plays. There’s particularly a lot of discussion and interpretation, like with many other myths, on the reason why Orpheus looked back— At least on the forums I was looking at.

 

“The reason…”

 

Some say maybe he looked back because he saw the sun and couldn’t contain his excitement, some say he had cast doubt because Eurydice was so quiet behind him and worried it might be a trick, or that he couldn’t hear her footsteps. There’s one that says Eurydice had accidentally tripped on the way up, and he looked back in worry to help her. There’s an iteration where he just really wanted to look behind him and see her again. 

 

“...”

 

None of them could be right or wrong, because ancient myths themselves were passed down orally and would inevitably vary from storyteller to storyteller, listener to listener. Have you ever heard of the Death of the Author? You could say that really, a story without a fully documented form is shaped by the interpretation of the listener. Even right now, it’s shaped by you.

 

“...by me.” 

 

This story, to Alberu, was about a preventable tragedy.

 

Even so, it maintains its core points. No matter what the reason was for Orpheus deciding to look back— misunderstanding, distrust, worry, or joy, in the end the conclusion was the same.

 

“Eurydice was pulled back into the Underworld.”

 

No matter what the reason behind it was, it didn’t change a thing.

 

These myths in the folder and the book— these records will always be right behind you. So, you can look back as many times as you want, and they won’t go anywhere. The past is the past, and the past is unchanging. 

 

His eyes slowly widened.

 

So please look ahead, and then stop and look back whenever you need to.

 

Alberu’s finger carefully, gently, trailed down the page towards the last few lines.

 

Congratulations on your coronation, hyung. You worked hard.

 

It was always fated to be.

 

Always fated to be.

 

“Haa… I get it, I get it,” Cale was always saying things like that.

 

“Your existence is natural”

 

“You are meant to be here”

 

It was repeated so often, like a little mantra, that he was almost tired of hearing it from him. Almost.

 

Almost.

 

“....”

 

The first person to congratulate him turned out to be Cale, even though it wasn’t even the day of the coronation yet.

 

 

“Your highness, mn, or maybe I should refer to you as your majesty, now?”

 

Alberu sighed. “Not yet, my official title is still the crown prince, don’t get ahead of yourself,”

 

“Right,” Choi Han replied, sipping from a glass of cool lemonade. They were outside of the Black Castle after a training session. Taerang was propped up beside him, leaning by the wall, polished, and the spring weather was pleasant. They could watch the way the trees slowly regrew their leaves and sprouted buds as the days passed.

 

From the corner of his vision, he could spot a certain wolf boy, still training. The person who usually carried around a large silver shield himself now simply summoned one in a blink, levitating with shining wings sprouting out. All morning, he’d continuously been tossing up rocks and cut up boulders and then using the shield. Mystically, there were no scratches on its shiny surface. He would also sometimes use the shield more creatively, like to slice things with its sharp and sturdy edges. However…

 

“Lock hasn’t stopped training consistently for entire days since he got the shield,” Choi Han said. His voice was calm, but there was a twinge of worry underneath. His gaze was fixed forward as if he was closely watching Lock, and his heel would shift up and down as if he was restless. 

 

“Is he alright?”

 

“Sheritt-nim, Rosalyn, Maes, and I have been keeping an eye on him. He’s a bit insistent, but he at least eats his meals on time, and he’ll pause training after some persuasion for needed breaks.” Choi Han explained. “Sheritt-nim and I also try not to let him train alone to make sure he doesn’t accidentally hurt himself or push past his limits.”

 

“....” Alberu was suddenly reminded of his own ancient power, which he hadn’t really used since he’d gotten it— mostly because he never needed to just yet, and it never spoke, unlike with the stories he heard from other people with ancient powers. According to Bud, ancient powers talking in the first place was in no way normal, so he didn’t think too much of it.

 

Lock must be placing a lot of pressure on himself. After all, it was Cale’s shield power. 

 

A few times, Alberu saw him sit down, hold out his palm, and simply stare at the radiant silver shield that manifested in front of him. He would look deep in thought, as if he was deeply contemplating something. Sometimes, Alberu thought, despite his tall frame, he looked quite small behind the shield. Like a child being protected.

 

The sun was bright today, as well.

 

“Mn, I recently mailed that letter to Clopeh Sekka.”

 

“That letter?” Choi Han’s expression was a bit confused, but was overtaken by a grimace when he heard Clopeh’s name. 

 

“The one we found in Cale’s drawer. I didn’t open it, but now I kind of wish I did,” Alberu sighed. It was a good thing he didn’t need to give the letter to him in person. He couldn’t imagine what kind of crazy preaching he’d have to deal with. “I wonder what he wrote there for him?”

 

“Maybe a warning?”

 

“I’m not so sure either,” Alberu was actually pretty curious himself. He just hoped it didn’t start some kind of crazy ruckus. Knowing Clopeh Sekka, he might interpret anything Cale wrote as some kind of divine message or command and go completely overboard. Actually, he had already caused a ruckus. Ever since the news of Cale’s death spread on the continent…

 

It’s a good thing he wasn't invited to the funeral.

 

Alberu’s expression twisted. The word funeral still left an unpleasant, foreign taste in his mouth. It didn’t feel right to him. Nothing did.

 

“There doesn’t seem to be much urgency, despite the coronation happening soon— not from your highness, at least.” Choi Han remarked.

 

“Well, I’ve taken care of most of it, and I have reliable subordinates.” Alberu replied with a sense of ease. To be honest, he… he thought he’d be more panicked, too. Maybe more on edge. More… something. 

 

Of course, it wasn’t like he was slacking on the preparations or taking it lightly, in any way, it was just that… he felt oddly sober. It felt like his feet were planted firmly on the ground, and it felt like the sharp edges of his mind had been dulled. A strange sense of calmness crept over him.

 

“I see,” Choi Han simply replied. “Is there anything I should prepare?”

 

“No, I don’t think so,” Alberu answered. “All you have to do is attend as the war hero. Regarding the attire, Tasha should have helped prepare something for you and the others.”

 

“Alright.” he nodded, again. They stared off at the cool dawn and the sun that hung low. “Then, congratulations, disciple-nim.”

 

“....Huh?”

 

Ah. 

 

‘You worked hard. It was always fated to be.’

 

“Congratulations on your coronation.”

 

It was a simple phrase, but hearing it— hearing it from someone, in person— from a close friend, like Choi Han… Made it feel like reality was really sinking in.

 

Sinking. Yes. Maybe he’d been out of it, all this time. 

 

He could feel the gradually intensifying glow of the sun, and the warmth of its rays on his skin. He pictured the many mornings he woke up to alone, sometimes in his quiet bedroom chambers, or his lonely office room on his desk with papers scattered about. 

 

He thought about his teen years after his mother died, and how the Palace of Joy carried a tense air that crawled up his skin like small needles, and the food that he ate that was always just enough, the dreary and dusty unused rooms, and footsteps that echoed only rarely outside his doors. He thought about the way the place that was built to celebrate his birth was no different than a cold palace where he lived as quietly and subtly as an afterthought. How his father, whose thoughts he could no longer decipher, turned away from him like he really was an afterthought.

 

He thought about the gaps between his schedule where he would only sit, the sense of clear purpose leaving his mind and leaving room for his idle fears to set in. Each night when he would take off his bracelet and stare at his appearance, his true appearance, in the mirror inside his chambers under the gentle shine of the moonlight, unsure of what to think of himself. Unsure of whether he was out of place, if he should simply turn away and disappear from the palace. 

 

The carriage rides where he was always sitting in his own carriage while his family rode together. The reports where he spoke to his father, standing and bowing before him as if he was really no more than another subject to a king and him no more than a king to Alberu.

 

The support of nobles and factions which he had to earn gradually, building trust and securing connections little by little over the course of months to even years like chipping at a slab of stone with a small chisel. His place and standing in the royal court which he had to claw and carve from where stood, unfavored. The smiles he had to play up, the words he had to choose carefully, the bitter sentiments he had to turn in his favor.

 

He thought of the times he stared at his princely, dignified appearance in the mirror, golden hair like a drop of sun and jewel-like blue eyes gleaming under the radiance of sunlight like a lie. Like a lie he was starting to believe. Like he’d lost track of who the imposter in the mirror was.

 

He thought, every time he stared at his appearance, day and night, of how everything could come crashing down the moment anyone saw the true form. He thought about how he feared the entire world and the heavens would purge him for the features his mother had given him, for his veins that flowed with the blood of his kin. He feared how his own blood father might even turn away when that came to be as if erasing a faulty thorn on his side and discarding a pawn.

 

Then, he thought about the boulder in the basement of the library, buried deep like an ominous destiny waiting for him. The boulder that was like a large roadblock in his path, like a confirmation of his fears— the words of a god from the heavens reaching the earth like streams of sun, coldly whispering, ‘you are a curse’.

 

Alberu thought of all those times he had to prove he wasn’t a curse. That it was okay for him to rule— if only to just be, even. 

 

He thought about all that, and…

 

“...Your highness?” Choi Han called out from beside him. He sounded surprised, maybe flustered, and then concerned. “Are you okay?”

 

“H-Huh?”

 

“You’re crying.”

 

 

“...oh.” he let out softly in response after a pause, the single syllable forming around his mouth and rising from his dry throat. “I’m—” he pressed an ungloved hand on his cheek. There was really something trailing down his face. Something warm, and— “I’m—? This—?”

 

Oh.

 

He was really— Alberu was actually crying.

 

He quickly wiped at his face and turned away as if he was embarrassed, or maybe to maintain his dignity. Choi Han quietly placed a handkerchief in his other hand. “You should drink something, too,”

 

“....” He rubbed at his stinging and wet eyes, and took another glass of lemonade from Choi Han. Alberu kept blinking continuously to distract himself from the pressure behind his face like a dam trying to push through and the tight feeling in his throat.

 

Ah, how long has it been? 

 

“...it’s sour,”

 

“You sound like Cale-nim,” there was a fond nostalgic mischief in Choi Han’s remark.

 

“Don’t compare me with that guy…” he drank more of the lemonade while frowning. The cool drink flowed down his throat, and though it was difficult to swallow, he felt a bit refreshed.

 

Refreshed— yes. Right now, Alberu felt refreshed.

 

It felt like a heavy weight had just been lifted off his shoulders. Though he probably shouldn’t feel that way, since ascending the throne meant heavier burdens.

“Instructor-nim,”

 

“Hm?”

 

“You know, about the way… I really l ook,” he motioned vaguely over himself with one hand, placing his fingers to the side of his head and flicking outwards as if to emphasize the pointiness of his ears. Choi Han tilted his head but subtly nodded as if he understood. Alberu did reveal it to him at some point too, seeing as he himself knew both Cale and Choi Han’s deepest secrets.

 

“Do… what do you.. Think of it?”

 

Ah, really, he could do more to at least ask a proper question rather than just put out vague words. Choi Han picked up his glass of lemonade and had a sip. It was empty now, but the melting residue from the ice filled the bottom of the glass. “What I think of it?”

 

“It’s, well, do you think…” he exhaled, thinking a bit more clearly. “Do you believe it’s a form fitting for a king?”

 

Choi Han stared over at him with his dark eyes that sparkled under the light of the fading sun. He seemed a bit confused as he tilted his head. “? Are you worried you won’t be handsome or charismatic enough as a ruler if you were to take on that appearance…?”

 

A beat. “Huh— no—”

 

“I think you look fine in both forms?”

 

“You— that’s not— haaa…” it wasn’t exactly the kind of answer he was expecting, and it seemed like Choi Han had misunderstood something. However, it was oddly reassuring to hear. Perhaps, bluntly honest responses had become as strangely comforting to him as it was normal. “I meant, mn, if it would be… ‘okay’.”

 

If it was okay for him to be… the way he was.

 

Choi Han hummed back after a pause as if he understood. “Well…” he trailed off, swirling the melting and deformed ice cubes with a small tea spoon, before replying, completely seriously. “I think that it wouldn’t matter even if you were a squirrel, disciple-nim,”

 

He blinked. “A— A squirrel?”

 

He nodded. “I think that it wouldn’t matter who was sitting on the throne, as long as it’s Alberu Crossman,” 

 

Oh.

 

“Isn’t it… wouldn't it be a bit strange if a dark elf of all things were to rule the Roan kingdom?” he mumbled, tone slightly awkward as chuckle bubbled at the end of his sentence, all of his small insecurities leaking out one by one like droplets through a crack in a great dam.

 

“Wouldn’t it be even stranger if it were a squirrel?”

 

“You’re still running with that—”

 

“If it’s that kind of concern,” Choi Han paused, as if he was really carefully trying to consider his words. “Mn, I guess it would take a little bit of time for the people to adjust their perspective of you, but there isn’t any real issue, is there? It isn’t like you’re some sort of fraud.”

 

“Huh?”

 

“It’s still you who’s been doing the work of the crown prince all this time. It’s you who was born as a Crossman. It’s always been you, hasn’t it?” Choi Han simply spoke, as if it was a natural and obvious conclusion. And, well, with the way he said it, maybe it was. “It was just that you took on a different appearance, not that someone else came in and invaded your body to do everything you’ve done up until now. Mn, if I may speak bluntly— you’re a liar, not a fraud.”

 

“...” Alberu was rendered basically speechless.

 

Choi Han spoke naturally, once again. “To me, your highness, you are you.”

 

“Your existence is natural.”

 

Those words continued to echo, again and again. 

 

Alberu tilted his head, repeating the phrase to himself. “I am… myself?”

 

“Yes,” he nodded back. “Like I’ve said, it’s not like you’re a monster of some sort like a skinwalker or something, right?” 

 

“Alberu, you’re very handsome, you know. You have your father’s features and the blood of dark elves. Ah, my son is really so adorable, isn’t he?”

 

He brought his hand to his cheek where his mother used to affectionately pinch him. He wasn’t even sure what a skinwalker was supposed to be. “...No.”

 

“Alberu, to me, you are my greatest joy. To this kingdom, you are a blessing. Don’t forget that.”

 

“Deciple-nim, you’re simply Alberu Crossman.” Choi Han reiterated again, a sense of certainty in his voice.

 

Alberu paused, before a smile tugged at the corners of his lips. “That response is really straightforward.”

 

Choi Han blinked and fidgeted awkwardly with his scabbard, a bit hesitant. “Mn, was it senseless? Should I have thought about it more?”

 

“No,” Alberu answered, leaning back on his arms and closing his eyes. Then, he couldn’t help but laugh. “I think I like those kinds of answers the most.”

 

When he had a dongsaeng who was as blunt as a swinging bat about revealing information, and said whatever was on his mind with a sense of such certainty, as if to say ‘isn’t it obvious?’, he couldn’t help but get used to it. Though of course, he wished Cale didn’t drop everything all at once like he was detonating bombs in his face, and it was true that Cale would annoy him with his glib tongue whenever the opportunity presented itself, too— but Cale didn’t lie to him. 

 

Even with all his elaborate tricks, he was honest with Alberu about important things— he was blunt, and sometimes the truth came out late, but Cale was honest. He trusted him more than anyone else.

 

Of course, he lied once, and that lie was the gravest of all. 

 

It seemed like, after spending so much time with Cale, Choi Han had really started becoming more similar to him as well. That bastard was seriously a bad influence.

 

“You’re still crying,”

 

He wiped his face with the handkerchief Choi Han handed him, and grumbled while covering his face. “...i guess.” 

 

“I think that,” Choi Han added quietly. “Whatever you choose to do will be right by me and everyone else.”

 

Whatever he chose to do. 

 

“...Is that so?” Choi Han nodded again in response. “I see.” he paused before mumbling, as the remnants of the sun began to sink deeper and deeper past the trees. Alberu exhaled. “....thank you.”

 

‘You are you’. Alberu Crossman was, and always has been, Alberu Crossman.

 

 

A few hours into the night, Alberu found himself sitting next to a familiar figure.

 

He didn’t know this person quite well— actually, whether he was a person or not was a bit difficult to figure out considering his current form. Despite his stiff and bony appearance, The Dragon Half-Blood’s actions felt strangely expressive. Though, at the moment, he was simply sitting still, tail swaying here and there once in a while as he looked out towards the forest veiled in darkness.

 

“....hello.” The bone dragon head turned to him. 

 

“Oh.” he said in a monotonous and deep, however somewhat expressive voice. It reminded him a little of Mary’s. “mn, good evening, your highness.”

 

He nodded back as he polished Tareang, since he’d used him to train again after he was done talking to Choi Han. “Good evening… mn…”

 

The Dragon Half-Blood had a name. It was announced at some point after Alberu had gone back to the palace after New Year’s. Raon, On, and Hong were quite lively when they called him on the video communication device with the Dragon Half-Blood about it.

 

“Crown prince! He has a name now, it’s really cool! Tell him, tell him!”

 

He’d been a bit tired that day so it slipped his mind a little, and he was afraid to get his name wrong now that he was actually talking to him. “Pardon, what’s your name?”

 

Alberu was a bit worried he’d be coming off rude by asking, but the Dragon Half-Blood’s hollow eyes seemed to sparkle, his mouth almost forming a smile with his stiff and bony jaws, as he replied in his deep voice.

 

“My name is Haru.”

 

“Haru,” Alberu echoed carefully, and the Dragon— no, Haru nodded back as if to say ‘that’s correct’. It sounded somewhat cute? “It’s a nice-sounding name,”

 

His smile seemed to widen slightly. “Isn’t it?” he said. “I got it from young master Cale.”

 

“...ah.” Cale really had a unique naming sense. He wondered if this name had any special Korean meaning, as well. “I see. When did he tell you?”

 

“The first morning of the new year. We watched the first sunrise, and he told me I could change it once I figured out a better name, that it’s just a placeholder he came up with,” Haru recounted with a strange fondness in his voice. It didn’t sound like he planned to do so. “Did you know that the first sunrise of the new year brought good fortune, your highness?”

 

“Does it?”

 

“Apparently. I’m not sure, it’s what Cale told me,”

 

“Ah.” so it must be a Korean tradition, too, maybe. “How was the sunrise?”

 

“It was the same as always,” he replied. “But it felt like the sun was a bit brighter when it rose past the trees.”

 

In contrast, it was dark now, as stars slowly began to twinkle in the sky once the warm gradients of the sunrise bled completely into twilight shades. Alberu looked ahead and tried to picture the sun rising. “I see,” he said. “Perhaps I should have seen it too, for good fortune.”

 

“I think it’s alright, even if you don’t, your highness.” he said. “It’s peaceful now, I think that’s this year’s good fortune.”

 

Peaceful.

 

Alberu stared at the being— the person who was not born for peace, but was learning to live in it. He stared at Haru, and wondered what wish Cale left for him in his name. The redhead had casually mentioned to him once the meaning of Raon’s name over some tea in the palace garden, with a cookie in his mouth even. 

 

“Raon Miru. A happy dragon. It’s more important to be happy than to be great and mighty.”

 

Cale’s soft words, which he’d spoken while his eyes wandered over to the little dragon in the distance, watching a caterpillar inch across a leaf in a bush, echoed in his mind faintly.

 

“...I see.” he couldn’t help but wonder again, with worry, how Raon was doing now. His jar of cookies had been full for a while, only being eaten by Alberu himself. 

 

As if reading his mind, Haru spoke. “Your highness, do you know how… Raon is doing?”

 

“Hm?”

 

He seemed a bit awkward as he spoke, talons scratching random symbols into the ground like he was fidgeting. “Raon. I haven’t really heard much from him, since…”

 

“He’s…” Alberu hesitated, voice lowering. “I heard he used to have a difficult appetite, but he’s doing better, now,”

 

Before, Raon used to refuse to eat, or be unable to eat much. All he would do was stay cooped up in his, On, Hong, and Cale’s shared bedroom on the fifth floor, curled up in the bed or hiding away somewhere by himself. Eruhaben mentioned the silence was uncanny and eerie, like something was missing. Alberu often sent their favorite cookies, hoping to cheer the kids up, and waited for any calls from his magic device. After a while, though, he found out that he was at least eating his meals on time, and On and Hong were also doing a little better too.

 

“...I see,” Haru nodded. “That’s… that’s good.” he paused. “Ah, and… I heard you were going to be coronated soon, your highness,”

 

“Ah,” he supposed the news traveled a decent way. “Yes, that’s right.”

 

“Congratulations,”

 

“Thank you,”

 

The short exchange was over just like that, and the two individuals who did not know each other very well simply sat and shared the moment within the tranquil darkness of the night.

 

 

The evening before the coronation, Alberu was still in his office, writing on his desk. As the sky was dark, the room was illuminated by magical lamps, the chandelier’s candles flickering. 

 

“A blessing to all of thy children, of every faith and belief,” His hands traced over the vows written in ink, reciting them once more in a mumble. “Beheled under the eyes of the sun, to grace and not to wither, to be fair, just, and loyal.”

 

A knock sounded on the door with a familiar rhythm— Alberu let Tasha in. She smiled at him, carrying his dinner on a tray. “Good evening, dear nephew,”

 

“Aunt,” he replied, looking up.

 

She glanced at the half-empty jar of cookies sitting on the coffee table in front of the couch, then back at Alberu as she placed the tray on his office desk. “You’ve been pouting over those for a while now,”

 

“I need to memorize the vows,”

 

“You already did, days in advance. You recited all of it to me perfectly like you’ve practiced it your whole life,” she said.

 

“Well, maybe this is kind of the most important event of my whole life.” he replied, sipping from the warm cup of tea. For the past few days, her aunt had forbidden him from drinking coffee, telling him it would mess up his sleep schedule and he’d be crowned with eyebags and fall asleep through the ceremony. Which wouldn’t happen, but he probably did need to fix his sleep schedule. Just a little.

 

Tasha’s expression softened slightly, and her light skin slowly faded into her natural dark pearl-like shade, like paint washed off in the rain. Alberu stared at her while cutting up his steak. “Are you nervous?” 

 

“....” he sighed, pulling the curtains closed, and slipping off his bracelet. His golden hair faded and his skin darkened. His blue eyes faded to brown and his ears grew pointy. “...maybe.”

 

Tasha leaned back before ruffling his hair in an affectionate kind of way. Alberu frowned— no, he didn’t pout at all— just a little bit, and swatted it away. “You’ll be fine,” she reassured. “As long as it's you, you’ll be fine— you’ve always been.”

 

“...right,” he mumbled, quiet. “It’s just, I don’t know…” he sighed. “...something could go wrong.”

 

“And it probably wouldn’t be your fault,” she replied, cutting up the steak on his plate into more even pieces like Alberu was a child, and dipped a piece into some sauce. “It would take a lot more than that for everything to suddenly go wrong for you, you know,”

 

“...”

 

She slid a chair from the corner of the room next to Alberu’s desk and sat down, gathering the scattered paper on his desk and setting them down. “Because you’re already dear in a lot of people’s hearts.”

 

Alberu’s eyes sparkled as he laid his head on the desk, looking up at Tasha. She chuckled and slid a glass of water in his direction. “Over the past few years, you’ve really gathered some reliable allies. People of your own that you could trust,” she said. “The other Dark Elves, here and in the City of Life, and your great grandfather, are relieved about it.”

 

“...relieved?”

 

“It was always like you were carrying everything on your own since you were little, you know?” Tasha said. “But since meeting your people, it’s like… mn, well, it’s like you’re more at ease. You’re more like yourself.”

 

“... at ease?” Alberu almost frowned. “Those bastards Cale and Choi Han are causing a ruckus wherever they go— I've never had to do more paperwork in my life.”

 

“Pfft–” Tasha suppressed a laugh. It was just like when Alberu was younger and whining to her during snack time about how much he disliked his lessons or found certain playmates bothersome. “I guess that’s also true,”

 

Even as Tasha laughed at his complaint, she seemed a bit sad. It might be because Cale was gone.

 

“Finish your plate and don’t stay up late.”

 

“I’m not a child, aunt,”

 

“Yes, yes,”

 

“Will you be there tomorrow?” he suddenly asked. “At the ceremony.”

 

She smiled. “Of course.” Tasha got up from the chair, sliding it to the side. “We’re war heroes, too, you know?” She caressed Alberu’s hair once again. “Congratulations, nephew.” Her smile seemed to sadden slightly. “You know, your mother, she would have been so proud of you.” Alberu’s eyes widened. “Though, she’d be proud of you no matter what you end up doing, as long as you’re happy.”

 

And she left, closing the door behind her quietly. 

 

“...”

 

No matter what he ended up doing, as long as he was happy. He wished he could hear those words from his mom.

 

Feeling fatigue set in but his mind racing restlessly, Alberu pulled out the thick red weightless book from his drawer. It was his turn to have it today.

 

He ran his hands down the spine and across the hardcover. All the preservation spells placed on it may as well have made the book indestructible at this point, but everyone always handled it carefully, like it was a precious, delicate treasure— and, well, it was. There were bookmarks on the pages and along the sides to tell you which record was which, and some unique notes, organized like a real record book. Alberu went to a particular page and closed his eyes.

 

[“Hyung-nim?”]

 

Cale’s voice cut through the cold night air like an arrow. Alberu nearly flinched, listening closely to the familiar sound that was slowly slipping his mind with time.

 

The records were very flexible in nature depending on how you ‘read’ it. You could sometimes only hear the record, like the noises and the ambience. Sometimes you’ll smell things, you’ll probably see things, and you’ll feel, and you’ll taste. You could choose to omit certain parts, or experience all of it. It felt somewhat like a simulation.

 

[Cale walked over from the couch where he was lazily relaxing in and stopped next to Alberu, whose head had thunked right on the desk as if he had passed out. He could even hear him snoring. 

 

“Hooo,”]

 

Alberu looked up from where he laid his head on his desk, just like the version of him in the record, except he was conscious, staring up at Cale who had a mischievous and somewhat amused expression as he peered over at him from the corner of the page. A simulation— yes, that was what this was. He looked at the ability’s record of Cale on that day he crashed his office and served him chamomile tea, eyes clouding over.

 

It was just like looking at a ghost.

 

[Cale poked at Alberu’s cheek lightly, and he stirred just a little bit before groaning (the ghost of Cale’s touch felt strangely warm against the present Alberu’s face). He stepped back. “I can’t believe it really worked. I’ve always wanted to try this on someone else for a change.”]

 

“You punk. Do you realize that you sound like you just drugged the crown prince like a madman?” Alberu murmured with a frown as if he was scolding him. Naturally, the record of Cale didn’t hear him and picked up more of the papers off his desk, examining them with a pensive hum.

 

[“Well, I guess it must’ve worked because you were already tired.” he muttered, flipping through them and separating a few of the less-important menial tasks, leaning on the side of the table as he hummed. He smirked. “The star of the kingdom truly works hard, doesn’t he?”]

 

“....”

 

[“Hm, but missing meals and running on just coffee won’t do, you know?”]

 

“...the work needs to be done,” he mumbled, somewhat defensively.

 

[“When I call you at night you aren't even in your pajamas and still in your work clothes. Have you been sleeping at all? Hm?”]

 

Alberu stared up at him, eyes half-lidded. “...no.”

 

[Cale took the various cups of coffee off Alberu’s desk, and set them aside on a tray and wiped down the coffee stains on his desk. “I’ll ask for a golden plaque later.”]

 

Alberu simply watched as the ghostly record of Cale, that seemed to emit a faint glow in his vision, walked over with a stack of paper in hand to the office and started working on a few with an air of expertise, pouring over them like it was something that came naturally to him. He listened to the sound of his faint sighs and hums and the crunch of cookies as his jar began to empty.

 

He listened to his small remarks.

 

[“What a shameless proposal.”]

 

[“ho, this is interesting.”]

 

[“hm, these don’t line up…”]

 

[“Crazy bastard.”]

 

The ambience that stretched on for a while seemed to bleed the longer it went on, like watercolors at the edge of a painting. It was probably because Cale wasn’t actively trying to record every second of his work.

 

Even so, the mundane and quiet atmosphere and the faint sounds of the quill’s tip scribbling across the parchment lulled him, slowly, into a sense of calmness, drowsiness even, as he laid his head and stared forward at the couch across his desk. It was comforting, even if it was more like an illusion.

 

When his glass of water eventually emptied, Cale poured himself more, before looking up. The present Alberu and the past Cale were now making eye contact, bleeding reddish brown eyes swirling with a familiar warm glow.

 

The redhead took the pitcher and a folded blanket on the couch then headed to his desk. He was right next to him, again.

 

[“Ho, is that drool on the table?”]

 

Alberu huffed in embarrassment and turned away while Cale chuckled to himself like he had found blackmail material.

 

The ghost of a blanket, a fake kind of weight, draped itself over his shoulders. Oh. So it really was Cale’s doing, that time. He could hear the sound of water pouring from beside his left ear into his glass on the table.

 

[Cale messed with the pendulum on his table, pulling out the steel ball from the other end and letting go, watching it move. A ticking noise was created for a few seconds, and then he stopped it because it was annoying.] 

 

Alberu watched him fiddle with various trinkets on his desk for a while— like statues, paper weights, pens— before Cale finally left towards the couch again to continue working, with Alberu listening to the taps of his fingers as he thought and the click of his tongue and the rustle of papers, again. Slowly, minute by minute, he felt like he could fall asleep.

 

Eventually, Cale put the quill down, stacked the papers and let out a yawn. He shut off the lights, gulped down a glass of water and finally fell back on the couch like it was his own bed, pulling out a second blanket from a pocket dimension inside his coat.

 

“...it’s so late for you,” Alberu mumbled. “...punk. You said you’d slack off but you stayed up all night doing work that’s not even yours.”

 

Stupid workaholic.

 

[“Hmm,” Cale hummed to himself, staring at Alberu as he laid on the couch. (The present Alberu and the ghost of Cale Henituse were making eye contact, once more). “Really, your highness, you should stop falling asleep on your desk or your posture will end up ruined.”]

 

“Says the person who fell asleep at his desk all the time doing late night overtime at his old job?”

 

[“You’ll be all sore in the morning too,”]

 

“I bet you’d know, huh?”

 

[“Well,” Cale said. “Good night, hyung-nim.”]

 

He could feel his body still as the record came to an end. His jaw was starting to hurt from being pressed against the hard wood, and his neck ached. 

 

Alberu’s desk had a small pool of water forming underneath his face. Though, not because of drool.

 

“...night.” he replied in a small voice. “Good night, dongsaeng.”

 

There were tears welling up in small drops from the corner of his eyes, and then falling down his cheek, though Alberu’s dark brown eyes were still fixed towards the fading record of Cale’s presence across from him, dissipating like a dream.

 

[“See you tomorrow.”]

 

His breath caught in his throat.

 

Tomorrow. At the coronation.

 

“....okay.” the record was fizzing out, again, because it wouldn't record anything while Cale was asleep. “okay.” he repeated. The faintly glowing ghost was gone, now, and the false weight of a fake blanket dissolved into nothing on his shoulders. 

 

He closed his heavy eyes, lifted his hands from the pages, murmuring in a whisper meant for no one at all.

 

“...see you tomorrow.”

 

And the night remained quiet for the last dream of the sun prince, while the morning awaited to welcome the king who would wake in the dawn.

 

 

From sunrise, cheer erupted throughout the capital. The streets were full and bustling, the sky was bright, and the sun’s rays were gracefully shining over the entire kingdom. Bards and poets sang, commodores cheered, for it was a joyous day.

 

Alberu could hear the sound of a choir singing and harmonizing, echoing throughout the pristine halls of the throne room. His spotless white regalia, adorned with gold, swayed with every step. He held his head high, and walked.

 

Golden light filtered past the large windows, illuminating the area and over his form, his hair that was like a drop of dun shining. He could see familiar faces as he walked. He fixed his gaze forward, towards his father, his majesty, who was waiting on the other side. His expression was firm, like that of a king, and did not soften even as he gazed at Alberu. And Alberu didn’t need it to.

 

Everyone was here. War heroes, representatives and rulers of different kingdoms and tribes, territory lords— He saw Eric Wheelsman, who stood firm, but it was as if his entire body had been pushed down by a force. Perhaps it was his grief. He could see Saint Jack who was standing beside the king, regal and pure as if he was prepared to bless him with the hands of god himself. 

 

Everything he’s done, everything he’s worked for— it all led to this moment. 

 

The dark elves were there, as well. Though they were pushed slightly to the back, their skin that shone like black pearls were difficult to miss. He could see his aunt Tasha watching him with a smile, and it looked as if she was crying. 

 

Alberu had a mix of emotions stirring within him. Something between worry, nervousness— but also a strange sense of calmness, washing over his entire form. He’s had lots of time to think and ponder, to make sense of himself, to be reassured. The fear that he thought he would feel tricked from the back of his mind, but melted away. 

 

He could hear the choir chant blessings, prayers, and gospel. He walked up towards the pristine steps laid in red carpet, up a platform, he stopped, and prepared his vows. They said to be a king was to be married to his people, and Alberu didn’t plan to marry anybody in the near future, so he supposed, how he walked down the aisle of the throne room, adorned in white, with a life-long promise to rule his kingdom, was his replacement for a wedding ceremony.

 

His father, his majesty the king, stood before him, and spoke in a clear voice as the room began to wind down to silence. “I here present unto you King Alberu, your undoubted King— Wherefore all you who come this day to do your homage and service, are you willing to do the same?”

 

Vow after vow, swear after swear, oath after oath— and each time he responded, ‘I do’. The chorus began to sing again, and Alberu knelt, his mantle splayed out as he looked downwards, bowing his head. The king, his father, laid the crown atop his head. The cool sensation of the gold surface against his brow and the weight made him tense. 

 

The jewels glimmered in the sunlight, the gold shone. Alberu stood, carefully, and was handed the Taerang, the spear of the sun, which was in the form of a holy sword. The AI within the spear spoke in that moment, as he held it, in a voice that only he could hear.

 

“Congratulations, user Alberu Crossman, on this merry occasion.”

 

Jack, who was an important figure of the sun god church, bestowed him a blessing, and the entire throne room prayed in his name, hands clasping together. “Let us pray,”

 

“May the sun bless the king, and may he be true and just, graceful and benevolent, fair and forgiving.”

 

As the ceremony approached the end, Alberu sat on the throne with his robes and his crown. Today, the blessing of the sun he wished for, and the title he gave everything to have was his. Today on, he’d have heavier shoulders and vows to fulfill. Today, he was a king, righteously crowned.

 

Alberu peered out at the sea of people, of the sunlight that shone past the glass and illuminated them all in a warm glow. 

 

“Your ancestor was a criminal.”

 

Those words suddenly came to mind, again. It was probably the strangest thing Cale would have said at the time, but right now it brought him a weird sense of… reassurance.

 

He may have been someone born of darkness, but his predecessor was a truly terrible person, and so at least Alberu wasn’t that.

 

He stood before his people, his subjects, silent as they peered up at him from below the platform. He could see Choi Han, Rosalyn, Lock, the kids, even. Almost everyone was here, watching him. 

 

“It isn’t like you’re some sort of fraud.” 

 

He reached towards his wrists, hand tracing over his bracelet. They were trembling, slightly.

 

At that moment, a voice spoke, echoing in his mind.

 

-That’s no good.

 

A faint aura rose from his figure. The air seemed to shift.

 

-A ruler must be the most dominant presence in the room.

 

“...!” He could see the people tense in their spots just slightly, shoulder twitching once as if they had gotten a shiver, and their head lowered.

 

-You can’t afford to have doubt in yourself, now. Especially not at this moment.

 

His trembling stopped. Alberu exhaled with a sense of awe.

 

-What was that thing that Cale said to you? That you were meant to be here, was it?

 

The aura, the familiar tingle against his skin reminded him of something. Of someone. It reminded him of a certain hero’s presence.

 

-Hold your head up high. These are your subjects. 

 

The voice that had been quiet for weeks was now finally speaking to him, and the familiar aura that exuded from his form and coursed through his veins— 

 

It reminded him of Cale. Yes, that was what it felt like. It felt like he was here, through the ancient power he gave to Alberu.

 

The Dominating Aura.

 

So this was the reason, was it? 

 

Calmly, Alberu slipped off his bracelet, and in an instant his disguise melted away like gold in a furnace.

 

“!?”

 

“His majesty—!?”

 

“What is the meaning of this…!?”

 

“! A dark elf…!”

 

He watched as traces of light pale skin disappeared, fading from even the tips of his fingers. His ears grew pointed, his jewel-like eyes a warm brown, and his hair like a shade of dark oak. Alberu exhaled slowly and stood firm. He felt… a bit lighter. It was like old skin had been peeled off.

 

Tasha and the rest of the dark elves were looking at him, eyes sparkling in the sunlight. Choi Han’s eyes went wide, but simply watched Alberu, waiting for what he planned to do next. He was well aware of the murmurs and even shouts echoing throughout the palace.

 

“…!”

 

Something like a low hum of power spread out and weighed on everyone in the hall, cold and commanding. They stopped, stilled, and fell silent. Silent enough to listen to his words. Alberu glanced to his side for just a moment, to see his father’s expression. 

 

For the first time, it seemed as if he had felt something. It seemed as if his eyes flickered with a light. His lips were slightly parted, and his pupils shaking, just slightly. It looked as if he was staring at a ghost, and Alberu looked away.

 

“...they don’t affect each other, being a dark elf and being the king, they’re just two different lines in your resume,”

 

He still wasn’t exactly sure what a resume was. 

 

Alberu stood still and calm, under the gaze of the sun. He was sure the Sun God was watching, and he was sure he would not be struck down, because he had performed no sin against the sun.

 

The various witnesses seemed to slowly, gradually understand this, in their silence, despite the brewing hostility among certain groups and the confusion.

 

“I,” he spoke, voice resounding and echoing in the silent palace, from the highest platform. “I, Alberu Crossman, your rightful king,”

 

He could see Choi Han watching him with a focused expression, listening closely to every word.

 

“Whatever you choose to do will be right by me and everyone else.”

 

“For as long as I sit on the throne and for as long as I wear the crown, I vow to be fair and just, for every existence, every walk of life, every belief, so long as they walk the god-given soil, and under the gaze of the sun,”

 

Every walk of life.

 

“I vow to serve the kingdom, and honor my oath— to devote the life I’ve been given to guide the kingdom through the dawn of the age of peace, and to promise prosperity in honor of the sacrifices made by the people so that the kingdom may stand on this day.”

 

His aunt Tasha was looking at him with tears trickling down her cheek, eyes fixed on him. She was mouthing something to herself with trembling lips, repeatedly, as if she couldn’t believe it, and Alberu could read the syllables of his mother’s name.

 

“A blessing to all of thy children, of every faith and belief,” He repeated the oath, once again, this time as his true self, with the presence of the dominating aura. “Beheled under the eyes of the sun, to grace and not to wither, to be fair, just, and loyal.”

 

There was a deafening silence, with the light tone of murmurs erupting and disappearing from different corners within the crowd like ripples of water in a lake. 

 

And then.

 

A few people bowed.

 

The war hero Choi Han, the archmage Rosalyn, the wolf warrior Lock, the dark elves, then Duke Deruth Henituse and his family, Marquess Taylor Stan, Eric Wheelsman, Amiru Ubarr, Gilbert Chetter, the Queen of the Jungle Litana and her representatives, the members of the Brek monarchy—

 

Like small ripples, more and more people bowed, an acknowledgement of his position. An act of respect— of acceptance— towards the new king. 

 

An act of acceptance towards Alberu Crossman.

 

Under the light of the sun, his dark hair gleamed at the tips, and his eyes shone with a glint. Adorned in white, he looked as fitting as a Spearman of The Sun as he always was.

 

And among that sea of people before him, between figures bowing at different degrees towards him, he thought he could see one person, standing straight, dressed in a black uniform. His gloved hands were clapping. Alberu’s eyes widened.

 

“Ah, the sun is truly shining so radiantly today, isn’t that so?”

 

From above the platform, he looked down on the figure that was clapping, while looking up at him from the crowd. There was a familiar smile stretched on his lips, and his calm eyes were curled into crescents.

 

The windows of the throne room, facing eastward so that the sunlight would shine in from behind the throne, was enveloping the deceased hero who had stepped into the world of the living with light.

 

Alberu, who had his back facing the sun, had his gaze fixed towards that person. Even so, he did not disappear. 

 

“Your majesty is certainly the brightest thing in this throne room— ahh, truly, I feel as if I can be blinded, I can’t see at all.”

 

No, unlike in the myth, Alberu was allowed to see him, even for just one more moment. He didn’t have to look back, because he was already right there.

 

“Pfft—” Alberu suppressed a scoff, speaking in a quiet voice. “Even on a day like this, your words are flattering as always, huh?”

 

Cale’s reddish-brown eyes shone in the sunlight. “Flattery? You wound me, your majesty— it is only the admiration of this lowly subject for the star of the kingdom.”

 

Star of the kingdom this, radiant sun that— Alberu wanted to groan and facepalm. Instead, he chuckled. The pressure on his shoulders, the tightness in his chest, it was as if it was all diffused and melted away. Alberu felt feather-light. 

 

“You drive me crazy.”

 

“It is my honor.”

 

“Yes, that’s right,” he sighed with a small smile. “The honor is all yours.”

 

Cale smiled back. Alberu looked at him.

 

"You're here,”

 

“Yes, of course I am,”

 

It felt as if time stopped for the both of them. Alberu didn’t want to know if this was some kind of dream, or if Cale was really here.

 

“Then,” he said. “You’ve been through a lot, hyung,”

 

“....”

 

Slowly, Cale brought his palm to his chest, and leaned forward. “Congratulations,” he said. “Truly, congratulations, Alberu Crossman,” he could see his smile even as his head was lowered. “Hyung, congratulations, once again, on your coronation day.”

 

And just as he bowed, like a shadow, he disappeared, between the sound of rising heads and applause.

 

The coronation of the next king of the Roan Kingdom, Alberu Crossman, ended with his tearful laughter amongst the sound of clapping. It was strange, so very strange, but warm.

Notes:

happy coronation day, Alberu, your dongsaeng is very proud of you ^^

if it helps you cope imagine cale in elysium or something ranting about Alberu and revealing embarrassing stories to his mom like a snitch and her eating every single detail about her son up over cookies.

Mn, and about that last scene~ i was inspired by the scene in OnK where Ai was at the stageplay clapping, or that scene in your lie in april with kousei's mom in the crowd. Cale's just haunting the narrative like always, huh?

Regarding the Daedalus thing, I actually just discovered recently that the part about his tears over losing his son becoming the rain wasn't part of the myth even though I learned about it in my social studies class. it's really interesting, actually, so i tried to incorporate it here and thats what cale's talking about. A lot of the Greek knowledge here is actually based on stuff my social studies teacher from 6th grade taught me-

I hope this chapter was worth the wait, im gonna go pass out again as always, thanks for reading! love you all- also wow, holy frick, like 25k hits!? thats insane! you're all insane and awesome!

Chapter 21: regret.

Summary:

Cale, and the various ways his allies bargain.

Notes:

we r so back

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“...”

 

Raon wasn’t sure at all where he was. He wasn’t sure of a lot of things— just that it felt dark, and kind of blurry. It felt as if everything was deafeningly silent, but also buzzed like static pricking against his ears and crawling over his scales.

 

In the dark landscape was a hole in the ground. He thought it was quite large in size, enough to fit someone, to lay in, but cramped if a person were to crawl into it. Inside of the hole was dark, damp— like a void to drown in. He wondered if it was deep, despite the narrow walls.

 

Something was slowly being lowered inside that void. Something wooden, like a container— like an old box, and someone was inside.

 

Someone.

 

Someone was inside.

 

Showered in white flowers, as if he was drowning in them— suffocating, even. He could see petals poking out of his mouth like they were growing inside of him, taking root and spreading up his throat like a weed infestation attempting to feel the sun’s warmth by breaking through skin.

 

That person who was suffocating was being lowered inside of that void. 

 

Alone. 

 

Raon could see figures, standing around the hole, standing upright and still. He heard weeping, but no movement. No one moved.

 

No one came to get this person who was slowly being lowered underground.

 

Why? 

 

One of the puppet-like figures picked up a shovel, and began to dig up dirt down the hole, covering the lidless case, paying no mind to the person inside. The dirt sullied the petals and stained his pristine clothes, dirtying his hair and his face.

 

Flowers shouldn’t be buried. Why were they doing this?

 

Why?

 

Why?

 

Why…?

 

Finally, the person suffocated in flowers, with empty eyes like they were glass, with roots and petals growing out of the corners and crawling up his face, turned his head and spoke in a strangely clear voice.

 

“Raon.”

 

I’m sorry.

 

“Raon,”

 

He couldn't move at all, like he was petrified and sealed in place. 

 

“Raon, why aren’t you saving me?”

 

I’m sorry.

 

Cale spoke in a calm voice while peering up at him, slowly sinking, like an old damaged boat in the sea. 

 

“I can’t breathe. It’s cold down here. It’s so cramped.”

 

It felt as if the landscape, the black and white world was slowly sinking down with Cale, like his absence would suck everything away with him, except Raon. He could only stand, collapse, and watch.

 

“Raon?”

 

“......” every word melted to bitter sand on his tongue like it was all tied up.

 

“Raon, please come get me.”

 

He wanted to move. I want to move.

 

“Raon.”

 

I’m sorry.

 

“I’m hungry.”

 

No, I’m so sorry.

 

“I’m scared.”

 

Please, he wanted— Raon needed to say something just once. 

 

“I want to go home.”

 

Water poured out of Raon’s eyes like an overflowing fountain, and trailed down towards the ground, beginning to flood the landscape and wipe everything away like a rising tide.

 

“Save me.”

 

The tears were flooding everywhere. The black landscape was turning into a deep salty sea, and was even flooding the void where Cale was half-buried.

 

“Ah.”

 

He couldn’t stop his tears that were drowning everything, and he couldn’t move, and he couldn’t speak, and he couldn’t save him. 

 

“So I guess that’s it.”

 

His body was half submerged in dirt and water. He would surely suffocate and drown.

 

“It hurts.”

 

I’m sorry.

 

“It hurts, Raon.”

 

I’m so sorry.

 

“Raon.”

 

“....i’m…” he managed to choke out. It felt as if his throat was bound tightly by a thick rope— it felt just like the chains clad in iron that restricted his mana when he was trapped in the cave. “hu– human....i’m…”

 

He stared at him as he sank, slowly. There was no anger, no sadness, but his skin began to crack like he was a clay sculpture, and from the cracks around his eyes, ink-like tears and wet vines and petals poured out, spilling into the water as his face became fully submerged.

 

“Bye, Raon.”

 

.

.

.

 

Raon awoke with a terrible start. His chest was tight and his eyes stung with tears as if he’d poured a viciously burning poison over them. His head was throbbing and aching from the inside.

 

“Bye Raon.”

 

No, come back. Don’t go.

 

Don’t go.

 

He should have done something back then. He should have… done something, he should have—

 

“....”

 

What could Raon have done?

 

He couldn’t… he couldn’t use magic to fix everything. He couldn’t just… magic it all away. He wasn’t strong enough yet. He wasn’t… anything.

 

What could he have done?

 

Why didn’t he notice it?

 

“It hurts.”

 

He was right next to him. He knew Cale was a weak human. He should have noticed if he was acting weird. He should have. His weak human was a liar, he knew better.

 

Raon was supposed to be great and mighty. He was supposed to protect his human and save him when he was being reckless, because he was a very weak human who couldn't save himself. 

 

“Raon.”

 

“Raon-nim?”

 

He curled into himself, once more, burrowing beneath the pillows and the blankets underneath the bed, in the dark. Raon didn’t say a word.

 

It weirdly reminded him of back then, in that terribly dark cave, when he was in pain all the time and would curl up to try and protect himself, just like this.

 

Had he really gotten any stronger at all since then?

 

Someone was sitting on the ground, leaning on the side of the wooden bed. He peeked out of his blankets, just a little. He caught sight of red hair and flinched.

 

“Raon-nim, are you there?”

 

…Rosalyn. Yes, it was just the kind Rosalyn.

 

“......”

 

The one with bright rose-like hair. Kind Rosalyn.

 

“I brought food again today.”

 

“...” Raon felt like he couldn’t eat today either.

 

“Aren’t you hungry?”

 

It felt like if he decided to eat something, it would get thrown back up again. Like there was air filling his stomach, and it didn’t leave a single bit of room for even a grain of rice.

 

“It’s small,” she whispered, as if trying to convince him. “Just some bread with apple jam on top, and also some water.”

 

“....”

 

He didn’t want to think about anything, but he was afraid of falling back asleep.

 

Rosalyn, sitting on the ground next to the bed, peered inside slightly. Raon was still under the bed, burrowed in blankets. Ever since Cale died, he’s had a habit of burrowing into tight spaces alone and staying there, quiet. Many times they’d found him under tables, between dressers, inside shelves and cabinets, behind curtains. It was as if he didn’t want anybody to find him.

 

She leaned back, setting aside the plate of food and water. It had been a continuous up and down progression in his eating patterns. Sometimes he’d manage a proper meal, twice a day, sometimes just a small piece of bread or apple pie, or some cookies, or just a drink. Of course, it was almost the same for everyone else, too.

 

Peeking in, she could see the way the blanket trembled and shook, and the sound of Raon’s quiet shuddering and broken breaths. He was crying, again.

 

“Raon-nim, was it a bad dream?”

 

“....”

 

Slowly, his head peeked out, just a bit, maybe his nose. She took it as a yes.

 

“It was difficult, then, wasn't it?”

 

“....”

 

The little head nodded, she smiled, slightly.

 

“Do you wish to tell me about it?”

 

“....it was scary.”

 

“Mn,”

 

“....i was alone.”

 

The small paw poking out of the blankets trembled and shook, talons digging into the carpet. Rosalyn continued to listen, leaning slightly closer.

 

“....the weak human was there. they were burying him.”

 

“...” her shoulders tensed, slightly. Ah, so it was that kind of nightmare, huh? To a young dragon like Raon, the act of burying someone, no matter how they explained it to him, must've seemed like a terrifying and cruel act.

 

“...he…” Raon paused, silence stretching on for a while. “...he… he was…”

 

His breathing quickened. Rosalyn’s hand carefully and slowly reached in, and caressed the mound of blankets he was curled under. He let out another shuddering breath. “...h-he… i was…”

 

“You don’t have to explain everything if it’s difficult.”

 

“....” Raon seemed to hesitate for a moment, talons scratching at the carpet yet again, and his paw caressing his other paw like he was trying to soothe himself. Rosalyn continued to circle her thumb over his head. “....he asked me to save him.”

 

Rosalyn inhaled slowly, breath hitching.

 

“...and i couldn’t at all.”

 

His voice sounded so incredibly defeated, like he’d been sapped of everything he was. Raon was seven.

 

“...i was so weak.”

 

A dragon so young, calling himself weak. Rosalyn leaned back, closing her eyes. It was the middle of the afternoon, and no candles or lamps were lit within the room, only leaving the light streaming in from outside as the only light source. 

 

“If you’re weak, I wonder what that would make the rest of us?”

 

Her gaze drew to the side, where a stack of books sat. She had just gotten back from the library when she peeked in to check on Raon, only to find him crying in his sleep. The jam on bread was actually her meal.

 

Her fingers smoothed over the leather-bound covers, and then the scrolls, and the scrawled notes with words crossed out in a mess of ink. Time-reversal, resurrection, regression, wishes. Surely, somewhere in the past, elixirs or spells of that nature must be real. Magic could do anything, after all.

 

But it couldn’t. Resurrection was not a natural thing, and magic was derived from nature. To contradict itself was beyond its ability.

 

“...” there were even scriptures about deals with the demonic race. Exchanges. But even they couldn’t be trusted without risking placing some sort of curse on Cale in the end.

 

“....i want to see him.”

 

“...Me too,” she replied, voice a bit strained. Her eyes were covered in dark circles. “Everyone wants to.”

 

It was so tiring.

 

Day in and day out, she would research continuously. Every legend, every taboo, everything. When it came to ancient knowledge, she would ask the voice of the Fire of Destruction to guide her, and sometimes Taylor to help decode a few scriptures or provide context. Fatigue would claw at her bones. Choi Han and Lock had to pull her away multiple times, and even sometimes Eruhaben did so as well. 

 

But that was the case for everyone. They had to keep each other in check. 

 

Lock, who would still often hurt himself in training without stopping, Choi Han who would go into the Forest of Darkness and slay monsters and train, again and again, until he lost himself. Eruhaben who was in his lab researching ancient elixirs and experimenting in silence. Glenn who was splitting the work of transcribing ancient texts with her and researching in the Mercenary Guild’s directory day in and day out. Cage, who was working to get in contact with the God of Death again somehow, and Jack who was trying to ask and plead to the Sun God for guidance. Bud, who would flip through different records in the directory and sometimes contact anyone who might have an answer for them. Alberu, who gave Rosalyn formal access to all of the Roan kingdom's royal archive, to conduct research, and even looked into his hometown’s folklore and asked his grandfather for any possible way to… to…

 

To bring him back, somehow. 

 

It was okay if they even sacrificed their lifespans. It was okay if they sacrificed their limbs, their blood, their sight, their hearing. It all didn’t matter. Everyone wanted him back, one way or another.

 

No matter what Cale said in his records, continuing to live without him weighing their minds was impossible. Not after everything.

 

She recalled the words he wrote in Alberu’s myths that he showed her.

 

“The past is the past, and the past is unchanging.”

 

Rosalyn had almost laughed that time. 

 

How hypocritical, he was. 

 

When he was trying to save someone else, he’d see through every single way and every single method. When it came to himself, he simply gave it all up.

 

Yes, he even sealed a path himself.

 

They had attempted a deal some time ago, to regress like the original soul of Cale Henituse now residing in Kim Roksoo’s body, because surely if he alone could change the fate of his doomed world, they together could change the fate of one person. But Cale himself had sealed that path before they could even try.

 

According to the God of Death, he had made a deal with him before he passed. 

 

It was a deal made so that no one else could regress or turn back the time of their world to save him. The price of such a deal, the god refused to say no matter how much they demanded.

 

And resurrection, it was impossible. If the issue was Cale’s body, they could restore it with magic to a healthy state even if he was rotting— however, his soul was already gone. He had already reincarnated. Even if they purged the heavens, he wouldn’t be there in the first place.

 

Why was it that the young master was always deciding things by himself without them?

 

Why did it always have to be him?

 

The crown prince, Alberu, told her he’d seen Cale at the ceremony, mentioning it in passing. That he was there like a haunting presence in a sea of people. She was beginning to worry if they were starting to see things that weren’t there, but couldn’t bring herself to bring it up with the state he was in during their conversation. It looked like he was desperately holding on to some sort of hope, and really, how could Rosalyn ever extinguish that?

 

Sometimes, she’d think about all those times that the signs were there, all those times she should have tried to do something. She wished she’d paid more attention to the hesitation in Cale’s voice when he asked her in the library, and the feather-light tremble of his pupils as he looked at her. She should have noticed that he was getting more fatigued by the day even if he stayed in bed all day and night, and the growing bags in his eyes and paling of his skin.

 

Again, and again, the guilt of being blissfully, foolishly ignorant was eating her up from her core the longer she thought of it. Again, and again—

 

-Hey, calm down.

 

“....” the static fizzing at her fingertips disappeared and died like a current being obstructed.

 

-If you’re a bad person, then I’m worse, because I was there the whole time and couldn’t do a thing.

 

The Fire of Destruction was speaking to her in a calm voice. Despite his presence in Cale’s memories as a generally very destructive character, he sounded very reasonable to Rosalyn.

 

-I was in his head, you know.

 

“...how did you handle that…?” she mumbled. 

 

-Handle it? Well, I don't know— that Cale dropped it on us like a bomb, you know? No tact at all.

 

“....”

 

-Me and the others were trying to be as calm as Cale was trying to be, for his sake. 

 

For his sake.

 

Rosalyn pushed the plate closer into the bed, so that Raon could maybe reach over once he was feeling a bit better. His pupils drew towards the plate in the darkness, simply eyeing it.

 

Rosalyn decided to take one from the plate, too, hoping that maybe it could coax Raon into following. She had a small bite— the apple jam tasted sweet.

 

“...does the voice in your head talk to you?”

 

It was a question from Raon.

 

“The Ancient Power?”

 

“....”

 

“I talked to him just a second ago.” Rosalyn said. “How about yours?”

 

“....” he seemed to contemplate it. “He’s an old man— he tells me to eat.” Raon whispered. “...he’s a bit annoying.”

 

Rosalyn slid the plate closer. Raon stared again, for a long time, and as if coaxed by a voice Rosalyn couldn’t hear, he reached in and grabbed a cookie, slowly nibbling into it. She let out a subconscious sigh of relief. “The voice is right, though. Mn, yours is a healing power, right?”

 

A healing power— to be honest, she had been wondering why Cale never mentioned having one. It would have helped to ease their constant worry for him, but thinking back perhaps it was for the best. If the knowledge slipped out… Cale could have been pushed to farther more dangerous limits. Maybe he hadn’t mentioned it to avoid such a troublesome situation.

 

Having one voice in her head already took a while to get used to— just how did the young master live with 7? More? And On mentioned being able to hear little voices in the wind when she found the Top’s Whip as well. What a remarkable person.

 

“Hong wanted me to tell him how you’re doing.” 

 

“...”

 

“This apple jam is actually something he suggested sir Beacrox make for you— he said it’d be easier for you to stomach.” 

 

Raon continued to nibble on the cookie within the silence, eyes glinting as he glanced at the bread with jam for him, and the glass of water.

 

“Do you want to send a message to him?”

 

The kids, who were stuck together almost like glue, had moments where they would try to support each other. Sometimes they’d find them asleep in a pile together, nestled close under blankets in random quiet corners, or flipping through the thick record book, or other things. They’d never been so quiet, it felt eerie.

 

And Rosalyn noted that nowadays, the three never woke up late or slept in, even as weary as they felt in the morning. As if they were forcing themselves awake.

 

Even so, they sometimes needed space away from each other. Hong drew pictures more often, he seemed to be fixated with flowers blooming in spring. He didn’t often draw people, but if he did, it was always the same subject. The tube of red in his pallet of watercolors seemed to be often replaced. Rosalyn would often see various illustrations of spring flowers woven into braids and slipped behind an ear, or hair tied back with a black ribbon. 

 

Bud would sometimes mention that he’d keep drawing until his hands hurt and gained blisters while frowning like he wasn’t satisfied with anything on his page. Ron found him quietly crying once surrounded by scattered paper on the floor and spilled ink.

 

“....i don’t know what to say.”

 

“Anything is okay,” she said. Even now, at this moment, she wasn’t sure what the right thing was to say to Raon. They were never very good with words. Even with a deeply rooted understanding of each other or when they were desperately trying to grasp the weight that was crushing them, it felt difficult to mold those feelings into letters written or sounds that were comprehensible. It was different compared to sternly commanding an army or speaking with a silver tongue to provoke an enemy— in this scenario, their tongues were tied into twisting knots.

 

“...he…” he paused. “...can you tell this to noona, as well?”

 

“Of course.”

 

As suffocating as that might be, it was fine.

 

“...i want to be alone.” he said in a tiny hesitant voice. “...but i just ate, and… i may not be great and mighty, but i am still strong enough to… be alone. so… do not worry.”

 

They were stiff, perhaps not very straightforward, not very cohesive. Maybe they picked that up from someone.

 

“...tell him to also eat properly.”

 

But there was simply nothing else they were better at than being each other’s quiet shelter.

 

Burdens are eased when they are shared.

 

“I see.” Rosalyn nodded. “Then I’ll tell him what you said.”

 

“...”

 

She wanted to go back and do research, look for something again, even if she still wasn’t sure just what it was. 

 

“It’s a lovely spring day, isn’t it? There hasn’t been much rainfall, it’s like it’s always sunny.”

 

But Raon still seemed shaken up.

 

“...it’s too bright and it hurts my eyes.”

 

“Hm,” in such weather, Raon would have normally wanted to explore outside and look for something. “There’s a pleasant amount of sun in this spot, will you allow me to rest here, Raon-nim?”

 

“...okay.” he nodded. “if you must.”

 

So, Rosalyn leaned back, eyes half-lidded as she watched the curtains flutter and sway and the way the leaves outside moved and rustled by the wind’s will. An old lullaby slipped from her lips in small hummed broken notes, separated by short pauses and the aches of her throat. The flimsy melody that sounded more like quiet somber wails loosely curated into a song floated into the wind, as if to lull the spirits of an equally broken little dragon.

 

It was a slowly fading song meant to soothe two weary, weak mages, from their suffocating grief.

 

 

“eugh, but I don't wanna eat it…”

 

“Now, now, young master-nim, if you do not eat properly, I fear you will fail in your goal of outgrowing Beacrox.”

 

“What? No! Of course I’ll still be able to do that… It’s just this one time. Just one less portion of veggies won’t make me short, right? That’s nonsense!”

 

“Well no, I wouldn’t be so certain. Doesn’t the madam often tell you that you must eat them all? Surely, it must be for a good reason.”

 

“Of course mother doesn’t lie…” he pouted slightly as if he was frustrated. “Mn, but just a few less… I can still grow tall, right?”

 

“Perhaps, but this old butler cannot be certain that it will be enough to outgrow my son.”

 

“Huh!?”

 

“He’s quite tall, young master-nim, and he had many vegetables in his youth. I fear you may need to work quite hard in order to surpass him.”

 

“....! Ah—! fine, then… just a little…”

 

He smiled benignly. “Yes, that seems to be a wise choice.”

 

 

Mundane. That was the best way to describe Ron’s dreams over the course of the months after Cale’s death.

 

Never anything sudden, never anything particularly terrifying or unnerving or ‘scary’. It was nothing like that. In fact, it was nothing he did not already know. Simply smudged memories and faded voices.

 

He never woke up screaming or wailing, or sweating excessively, or with shivers.

 

It felt just as if a ghost loomed after him, quietly haunting.

 

And yet, with such dull dreams, they strangely ache all the same.

 

“...”

 

Ron’s day would begin as it always did. He’d wake up, tidy his bed and smooth over the surface of the folded blanket and bed covers, and then swiftly bathe and change into his neat work clothes. He stared into his reflection within the mirror hung on the wall of his room, and adjusted his tie.

 

“Ron!”

 

“Young master-nim, pardon me, but I’m afraid your necktie isn’t quite on the right way. Did you put it on yourself?”

 

The young redhaired child beamed brightly. “Yep! I thought I should try it myself today, it’s good right?”

 

“Hmm, well, it’s certainly not in a style I recognize. It seems to be a bit uneven, yes?”

 

“Huh? Uneven?”

 

“Yes, though of course this Ron will not resist your desire to try a more unique fashion sense, if it is really to your liking.”

 

“Umm…” the child pressed his lips together and had a bit of a conflicted expression. “Um— yeah! Of course, it’s a new style from… from a book! But, uhhhh, I think that today, I want to just wear it like how I usually do.”

 

Ron smiled benignly in response, setting his tray of tea down. “Is that so? Then would you like this Ron to adjust it?”

 

Cale smiled widely as he stood up straight in front of him. “Yes please!”

 

His gloved hand left his neck, where his black tie was neatly done, a product of years of routine. He slipped on his shoes and opened the door of his room and out into the hallway.

 

The first thing Ron did in the morning after properly preparing himself was to clean, whether it be sweeping the floor, polishing a few things here and there, dusting, organizing— everything. 

 

However, as a butler, his main priority was to tend to his young master. Back in the Henituse estate, cleaning was the responsibility of others, however he would usually work in his spare time to lighten the load of the other servants.

 

Now he would often simply clean and manage the villa day in and day out. It didn’t matter that there were already maintenance charms and spells in place for it.

 

Tap, tap, tap.

 

Nowadays, Ron would often find himself alone in the halls. Most of the people living in the villa would shut themselves in their rooms or in some other place, researching, working, wallowing. Every step on the marble floors would echo across the sturdy stone walls, absorbed into the structure.

 

Tap, tap, tap!

 

“Oh, hi Ron!”

 

It was unfortunate that the halls were so quiet.

 

Ron dusted the top of a wooden cabinet that really didn’t have that much dust to begin with.

 

“Good evening, young master-nim.” he gazed at the books he was carrying in his hands. “Ah, you’ve finished your lessons, I see.”

 

“Mhm!” He raised the books up as if to show off. “I’m so tired…”

 

“Oh? Were the lessons difficult?”

 

“Nope! Super easy, it’s just so boring~”

 

“Oho, is that so? The madam would be happy to hear of your diligence, I’m sure,” Ron replied. 

 

A weight. Yes, the presence of memories suddenly pouring from the gap within his mind and leaking slowly and quietly into his mundane routine felt heavy.

 

The red-haired child beamed with joy. “You have to tell her that the instructor said I was really talented! She said I’ll surely be a great count!”

 

Ron put the duster away, and began polishing some displayed silver. 

 

“Yes, yes, I’ll surely let the madam and master know.” he smiled benignly. “The lessons must have been tiring. Would you like a snack, young master-nim?”

 

The silver was already clean, his reflection almost clear as if it were a mirror.

 

“Yes please!”

 

Even though Ron wasn’t carrying the silver tray of snacks like in his memories, his hands still felt heavy. Perhaps he was really getting quite old. His gloved hand lingered around the top of the table, before leaving.

 

“Roooon, I want cookies, please!”

 

The jar of cookies sitting in the hall was almost still full. The three children who often left it empty rarely opened it anymore.

 

Beside that full jar of cold cookies, was a bottle of wine.

 

“Ron,”

 

When did his puppy young master stop saying ‘please’? 

 

“I don’t want to go to my lessons!"

 

He remembered it started out that way. The cheerful child who was mischievous at best but never troublesome, started to act rebelliously. 

 

Cale pushed his plate of food away with a deeply dissatisfied expression. “I don’t want this!”

 

He would throw tantrums, and frown. Rarely did they ever see his sun-like smile again. The servants around the estate would often speak to Ron, voicing their concern, before their worry soured into disappointment and exhaustion. 

 

“Why did the young master, who was such a good child, suddenly turn out this way?”

 

Many had thought it may be because of the loss of the first countess, and the arrival of countess Violan and young master Basen. The behavior started when they began living in the estate, after all.

 

At the time, Ron had come to his own conclusions as well, however, he kept the late countess’ words in mind. 

 

“Ron, Cale will surely go through many troubles in the future.” Jour smiled as she spoke softly, her precious child held in her gentle cradle. “Whatever that may be, please take care of him, and stay by his side.”

 

At that time, Ron only smiled and nodded in reply. However, perhaps, the madam knew more than he could have understood at the time. She was always quite insightful.

 

“Please take care of him.”

 

So Ron did so, caring for the young master who became bolder and bolder by the day, like a small puppy trying to act like a bloodhound. Since his first cries and steps…

 

“…And stay by his side.”

 

Maybe, on the night where he decided he’d leave, he had failed in his second promise.

 

Even if, in the end, he didn’t leave, in another world he would have, if it weren’t for the fact that the present Cale Henituse took over.

 

Crash!

 

“! ...oh, erm, I’m— I’m sorry,” Bud mumbled. The shattered pieces of glass were scattered on the floor in small and sizable pieces, and the contents of the wine were spilled in tandem. He reached for a broom and perhaps also a mop, but Ron stopped him.

 

“Please allow me,”

 

“No, I dropped the bottle, I’ll clean it, really.” But Ron was already ahead of him, sweeping the pieces of glass away.

 

“Do be careful and watch your step.”

 

“...” He seemed a bit too intimidated to assert any further. “...alright. Thank you, and— uh, I’m sorry, sir.”

 

Bud quickly left— he must have come here to get a drink as it seemed this week’s search into the directory proved fruitless— and Ron got to work. The red wine may leave stains on the flooring, and tiny shards could easily be stepped on.

 

 

Ah. His palm was bleeding. How did such a thing happen?

 

“...Ron..?”

 

He must really be going senile if he could allow himself to be hurt by such a small thing. 

 

Young master Cale, who was fifteen-years old, was standing still and quietly staring from the doorway.

 

What age had the young master started drinking? He was probably much too young for it.

 

“Ah, young master-nim. Please forgive this sight.”

 

At the time, the puppy young master had started to throw empty glass bottles of alcohol at people, another form of trouble he’d taken a fancy to, though they would most often miss their targets due to his poor aim in his drunken stupor.

 

Ron had been cleaning up the mess that was left behind, however, he had accidentally injured his hand a little at the time.

 

“...”

 

No curses or harsh words left his mouth, only an empty stare. Ron had seen his fingertips tremble and his pupils shake. Maybe, he should’ve also paid attention to the way his eyes were never quite hazy as well.

 

“S—” he mumbled. “....sorry.” 

 

And then he quickly ran away, like a puppy scurrying away after making a regrettable mistake. 

 

The next day, Ron found him to be quite compliant. He didn’t whine or groan when he woke him in the morning, and his usual sour expression was replaced with a blank one. He would simply nod or shake his head when Ron posed a question for him. When he was finished, he said—

 

“...thanks, Ron.”

 

It was the first and last time he’d hear him say it for the next few years, and when he returned that same day, late at night, he was back to his trouble-making endeavors, and Ron returned to simply cleaning up after him.

 

“Ron—”

 

“Ron?”

 

“...Ah.” It was Eruhaben. The old dragon didn’t wait another second and simply snapped his fingers. Golden dust gathered around Ron’s open palm and the miniscule manifestations of magic closed his injury as if stitching his sinew back together. It felt cool, and then faded.

 

“I took a page from Mila’s technique.”

 

“I see,” Ron nodded, sitting down on the kitchen chair across from Eruhaben. The latter poured tea into two antique teacups with a swipe of his finger. 

 

“You seem to be unfocused, that’s quite unlike you,” 

 

“I fear I may be growing quite old.”

 

“Please,” the much more ancient dragon replied, sipping from his tea. Ron followed suit. It was sweet with a twinge of bitterness, an eastern brew that Beacrox must have made some time ago, judging by the somewhat lukewarm temperature.

 

“....” 

 

There was a black ribbon lying on the table. The kind used by someone as a hair tie.

 

“Ron.”

 

It was of fine quality, durable and elegant from an excellent material.

 

“Young master, it’s time to wake up,”

 

The mound under the covers let out a long, winding sigh. “Fine, fine…”

 

The black hair tie would be intertwined with strands of wine red, tying it back into a ribbon behind the ears. It was a new routine that Ron had gotten used to when Cale had allowed his hair to grow out, a first in years.

 

He’d tie it first thing in the morning, while Cale was drowsy after waking up and when it’d come loose after a full night of work without rest. Sometimes he would comment, “There’s no need for it,”, but wouldn’t stop him. 

 

“Ron?”

 

The long winding black hair tie of medium length was tied into a ribbon in his hands by the time Ron came to his senses as if muscle memory had taken over. He held it, and then gently set it down with his wrinkled old hands atop the surface of the table as if it was something delicate.

 

Eruhaben stared at it as well, golden eyes glinting in a thoughtful way before returning to his cup of tea. 

 

“The weather is rather nice.”

 

A very generic statement, the kind of remark made to simply fill the silence.

 

“Indeed.”

 

“I guess so,” 

 

“It’s fine weather for a walk, is it not?”

 

Cale let out a long sigh, but averted his gaze after spotting Ron’s benign smile. “...no thanks.”

 

Even when he said that, he’d not-so-begrudgingly let himself be dragged out of his room and outside by On, Hong, and Raon, even if only to accompany them as they roamed around the perimeter of the villa or to give small words of appreciation for anything they found and showed him.

 

“Ron, this rose looks just like mother’s hair, right?”

 

The younger Cale Henituse had often done that as well.

 

“Ron,”

 

“...yes?”

 

Eruhaben set down his cup, which was three-quarters of the way empty. “Do you know where the ink is?”

 

“Ink?” he replied, pouring more tea. Eruhaben stopped it when it reached halfway.

 

“I seemed to have run out, again,” he replied. 

 

“It appears to be the third time this week that you’ve run out.” Ron remarked lightly. Eruhaben hummed back in a somewhat awkward manner.

 

“...I seem to be rather busy.”

 

How many pages and how many books he’d filled with his research notes, Ron wasn’t sure. “I see.” he rose to his feet. He happened to keep a spare jar in one of the kitchen cupboards. 

 

The ink filled the glass until it reached the mouth of the container. Cale, who was still busy writing and reviewing reports without stopping, seeming to only grow thinner and paler by the day, looked up once and nodded. “Thanks, Ron.”

 

“Have you been resting well?” Ron asked. It was a question from a person who could never properly sleep in peace to another. 

 

“...Well enough.”

 

The person who’d been working for days and had only woken up from a week-long coma recently stood up and tossed the papers he’d been tirelessly writing into the fire. Ron watched as they turned to ash, leaving cinders to dance as if to feast, before asking.

 

“May this ignorant old Ron ask what the purpose of burning those documents were?”

 

“They were confidential,” Cale answered simply, sitting down once more to take a sip of cool water. Ron wiped his forehead with a handkerchief. “It’s best not to let anyone else see it.” He set down the glass.

 

“And what of the contents?”

 

“I’ll remember it all.”

 

At the time, Ron didn’t know about the existence of the young master’s ability, Record, and simply thought of it as a new quirk of his.

 

“...team leader?”

 

A power that allowed you to retain memories like an archive of records in your mind without forgetting any of them. It was both an extraordinarily useful power, as well as one akin to a curse.

 

A record read, [“Hey rookie, how come you can remember anything you want to remember after seeing it once, but never remember anything you don’t want to remember as if you have amnesia?”]

 

“If you could choose to forget the most devastating moment of your life, would you?”

 

“....” Eruhaben looked up from his cup as Ron pushed the glass full of ink across the table towards him. “You’d have to be more specific.”

 

Ron took one last sip of his cup. “A moment where you felt powerless, a moment where you lost something, of yourself or of someone else.” he elaborated. “Think of that moment.”

 

“...I don’t wanna die.”

 

“...I wouldn’t.” Eruhaben paused for a moment, he seemed to be gripping the handle of the teacup quite hard. “...I… couldn’t.”

 

Ron hummed back in response, staring at his reflection through the glass container, a shadow within a pool of ink.

 

That young master of his, who stared off that night with empty sunken eyes like glass that reflected a million records— Ron couldn’t help but wonder if he’d been haunted the same way that Ron was now by his presence, or perhaps, the lack thereof.

 

“...ron..?”

 

That night, he’d sat in the seat next to where Ron was now sitting, hadn’t he? 

 

Right now, the seat beside him was empty.

 

“...hurts.”

 

The person who could remember what he wished to remember, and forget what he wished to forget, did not forget his losses nor his pain, because he has not forgiven himself.

 

Even to the grave, he chose to bring those bitter memories with him and instead left behind his sweeter records. It was like a gardener gathering the clipped thorns from sold roses and storing them away to be kept. 

 

“I don’t like lemonade,” he’d said in a quiet mumble and faded eyes. “And I don’t like bitter herbal tea.”

 

It was rather silly to Ron— did he not say himself that he disliked bitter and sour things? His young master was rather contradictory.

 

“What are you doing?”

 

The kettle would soon run out of tea, and Ron felt that they would still need refreshments. He picked up a tea spoon from the drawer as well as a tea filter and began brewing lemon tea.

 

Cale stuck out his tongue after taking a sip, his expression scrunching. “So sour!” he exclaimed with a childish frown.

 

Wshhh… the hot water poured into the brew he’d concocted.

 

“...” Cale simply stared at the cup before him with a blank expression, but Ron could catch the unsatisfied purse of his lips. He sighed before reluctantly picking up the cup and mumbling, “....thanks.” 

 

Their shared distaste for this beverage was a similarity that Ron found to be interesting, and somewhat amusing. 

 

“Do you really like this kind of tea, Ron…?” 

 

Ron was not very particular with his tastes in beverages, though he had preferences. When he was asked this question by the young Cale Henituse, he simply smiled benignly and offered to pour another cup.

 

“I want something else for my hangovers.” 

 

Ron poured steaming contents of the kettle into one cup, perhaps just to taste. It was still quite hot. The troublemaking Cale Henituse preferred iced drinks during his hangover, or more alcohol. Ron would still often serve him lemonade despite his occasional complaints and frowns so that he would feel more fresh in the morning. And perhaps, admittedly, as a way to tease him.

 

“...I preferred yesterday’s honey tea.” 

 

Cale tended to mutter his grievances under his breath and never quite out loud. His sour expression and the knit of his eyebrows as he consumed the tea in multiple small sips while being laughed at by the children was rather amusing to witness. It was one of the few aspects of his personality that was rather expressive, in comparison to his usual demeanor, and so Ron often tried to evoke it more often, perhaps in response to his own curiosity regarding this unique part of him.

 

Ron brought the cup to his lips and had a sip. It was sour, yes, though it was tasteful. Even so, he could understand how the young master may not like it.

 

“Ron!” 

 

Perhaps, he shouldn’t have teased him so much.

 

“Ron,” 

 

Perhaps, he should have brewed him more of the sweet tea he liked.

 

A brightly shining smile was directed at him, and then a small tired smile of gratitude, with two sets of the same reddish-brown eyes.

 

Perhaps… 

 

“Ron?”

 

The two ghosts in his presence diminished, fading into the wind and into faint whispers that loomed over his shoulder.

 

 

On the floor of an unused studio in the villa, papers were scattered about, containing messes of ink, graphite, charcoal, and paint, some even staining the marble floor.

 

Inside of that room was a red-haired boy, endlessly drawing the same subject, over and over again. His lip quivered as he scrutinized his current project, before sighing and pushing it away and ripping out a new page from his drawing book, restarting the process.

 

His graphite pencil glided across the paper in light strokes. Thin lines to shape a sketched figure, then thicker lines to define the drawing, and then details, and the color…

 

Cale smiled at him, rubbing off some steak sauce from the corner of his mouth with a swipe of his thumb. “There you go.”

 

His wrists were starting to cramp from repeating the same motions, over and over again.

 

Ron quietly entered through the door that was open slightly ajar, watching with a tray of refreshments in hand. This was a more hidden room in the villa and he had not told anyone he was here. Hong paused but continued his work. He set the tray down beside him on the floor and observed the subject drawn on his paper, kneeling beside him quietly.

 

He could see that the subject’s expression had many eraser marks underneath the current sketch, like shadows of past attempts to capture something. Something that was beginning to grow hazy, something that never seemed to be recreated quite right, despite the many records at their disposal.

 

Near the paper Hong was drawing on, Ron could spot a familiar sketched portrait. The person sitting down at the center had a rather stoic expression, whilst the children at his side had bright smiles, and the small figure with fluttering wings behind him had an equally enthused expression. Despite the subject’s stoic expression, there was something bright and warm drawn in his eyes— perhaps it was the way the light reflected in erased spots within his irises, or the way his eyelids drooped in a peaceful manner, Ron wasn’t sure.

 

Hong let out another dissatisfied noise and erased Cale’s expression once more, leaving him faceless. His palms were shaking, perhaps from fatigue or frustration. 

 

There was something different about this portrait compared to others.

 

Ron could notice that Cale’s hair, tied loosely with a black ribbon, seemed slightly longer, and the erased lines left behind on his expressionless face seemed to curl around his features, like his eyes, lips, and nose— The skin on his neck didn't seem to hang as tightly, and it seemed like Hong was trying to draw a pair of round glasses on him.

 

Finally Hong exhaled a long breath, and looked towards Ron, staring quietly. The old butler picked up a glass of cool water, offering it to him, as he seemed to be sweating. Hong glanced at it once, and then back up at his expression, as if attempting to scrutinize him closely. His eyes seemed focused, but his fingertips were still trembling as he gripped his pencil. Ron offered the plate of cookies to him.

 

“I believe it is snack time.” It was difficult to imagine that there would come a time in the children’s childhood that he would have to coax them into enjoying the treats they were so fond of.

 

Hong didn’t reply, continuously staring at him, eyes almost squinting. When Ron was going to simply hand him a glass of water, Hong suddenly spoke in a somewhat quiet voice.

 

“do all old people have white and grey hairs?”

 

“...” Ron took the plate of cookies and placed it down near Hong’s utensils. It was his favorite flavor, red velvet. He pictured the ancient dragon Eruhaben. “For humans, yes. It is a natural sign of aging.”

 

Hong silently stared once more, his pupils began to shake more as time went by as if he was seeing something.

 

“do old people always get wrinkly?”

 

“Many of my old acquaintances have them.”

 

“is it hard to see for you?”

 

“The worsening of sight is also a natural part of aging, though the severity varies from person to person. I sometimes wear reading glasses.”

 

Hong was staring closely at Ron, once more, mouth opening slightly and closing again. Ron smiled benignly at him. He observed the way the wrinkles on his face stretched near perfectly following the curl of his old lips, and the crows’ feet that branched out from the corner of his eyes took a form akin to roots. He looked at the lines on his forehead, and the creases and scars on his hands. He observed how even the hairs on his brows greyed and lightened. He saw the way traces of brown that was like Beacrox’s remained.

 

Cale stared at the drawing in his hands— one drawn by Hong— and smiled. “It’s very nice.” he paused, as if searching for something more. “I like the way the colors look and the weight of the lines.”

 

Drawing was something he picked up in passing, and grew to like. He liked messing around with different supplies and experimenting while trying them all out— paints, pastels, charcoals, ink, graphite, watercolors. It was exciting, to him, and he liked how he could show off the final product to people. 

 

Cale would collect his and the youngest’s drawings, keeping them whenever they gave one to him. From the smallest doodles to whole pages— he saw Cale store a few, neatly tucked in his desk’s drawer, and sometimes they’d hang them up on the walls in their room, near the bed or near the shelves, and they’d frame their favorites in gold by their bedside.

 

And Cale— he was also good at drawing. He didn't do it often, but Hong would often admire the islands and maps drawn in ink between pages of his work notes, and the precise way he drew people in their portfolios, not missing a single detail. He was good at that, but never quite told them about it upfront or even considered himself at the very least an okay artist.

 

Looking into old records, Hong found that Kim Roksoo used to draw when he was younger too— for fun, just like him. With crayons and colored pencils— he liked to draw the characters that appeared on his TV— a red ranger, was it?— like he and Raon liked to do with their favorite book characters. 

 

Only, those drawings would often go missing, or get spilt with juice, or get wet when he was being picked up on a rainy day, or get ripped by accident, or even mistakenly thrown away. 

 

As he grew up, it was something he rarely touched upon anymore, but he’d use it at his job at that monster hunting company. His two teammates noticed it though.

 

“Hey Roksoo! Draw me!”

 

“No.” 

 

“Pleaseeee?”

 

“Choi Jungsoo, stop bothering me.”

 

But of course, since he was Cale, he caved and did so. And, he lost that drawing too.

 

Cale didn't really lose his things as often, nowadays. Maybe because he was less clumsy now, even though they still have to scold him for being so reckless all the time. And there was one instance when he saw him drawing, absentmindedly. It was after their outing before New Years’, and he was staring at the live portrait they’d gotten done for a long time. It was late, and Hong was a bit sleepy, but he saw him draw three figures under the light of the moon, looking really focused.

 

“Cale-nya, why do you wanna farm? Don’t you just wanna stay in bed all day?”

 

“Hm? Well, that’s definitely true.” he admitted honestly.

 

“You’re so weak, too! Auntie Mila said you could barely pick up a pitchfork.”

 

“...I can.”

 

“But it’s still heavy for you~”

 

“Haa…” he sighed, almost defeated, leaning back on his bed. Hong giggled at that. “I had friends who wanted me to start a farm with them.”

 

“Hm?”

 

“It was part of our retirement plan,” he explained, and the smallest and thinnest of smiles tugged at his lips. “I wasn’t a big fan of it at first, but they talked about it so often that it became an easy conversation topic when we were bored, and, well, I guess I ended up not minding the idea all that much.”

 

It was silly to imagine Cale doing the back-breaking work of farmers that auntie Mila talked about, toiling at the soil under the sun and getting sunburnt, tending to the crops everyday— and Hong wondered if he would’ve done it until he got old or if he’d tire from it.

 

The plot of land that was meant to be for their farming endeavors was still empty, back at Harris Village.

 

Hong thought a lot about this old farmer figure that Cale could’ve grown into.

 

His red hair that maybe would’ve begun to fade into greys at the tips, or maybe they’d turn one strand at a time, like stripes. His voice that would sound deeper, older— maybe he’d wisen up and wake up earlier in the morning instead of whining so much while stubbornly keeping them in bed or being too lazy for breakfast, or maybe he’d stay the same. His skin that would grow wrinklier as the years passed, lines and creases appearing like annual rings.

 

Hong was plagued with the image of a Cale with greying hair. A Cale that he would not get to meet.

 

Ron stared at Hong who had such a focused expression on his face, erasing and redrawing every line, again and again.

 

“...” 

 

He’d thought of it before, but Hong resembled Cale quite a bit. Of course, all of the children averaging 10 years old resembled their complicated guardian in many ways, picking up his characteristics like they collected trinkets while exploring the garden. 

 

But Hong really looked the most like him, with his red hair— it seemed to be placed at a bit of a side part too, resembling Cale’s usual style— and sometimes when he beamed at him with bright yellow eyes he saw reddish brown.

 

“Ron!”

 

There were traces of that stubborn yet bright child in front of him. 

 

“...father seems to be keeping to himself.”

 

But Hong’s current silence reminded him more of the somber puppy who was trying to be stronger in the face of loss.

 

There were many things that he wanted to say to that small, unfortunate, lonely  child.

 

“...i’m sorry, uncle.”

 

Many kinder, more comforting words, and many, many apologies.

 

“You don’t have to wake me up tomorrow, Ron— and let the kids sleep in a little, but make sure they don’t miss breakfast.”

 

Truly, he was a senile old man who failed him many, many times.

 

He heard the sounds of paper crumpling and turned his head.

 

“...it—” Hong made a choked kind of noise as the page scrunched underneath his fist. “I—” 

 

It seemed like nothing could properly leave his mouth, and that his voice twisted to complicated knots on its way out his throat. His chest began to heave quicker, heavier, breaths growing shorter, his pupils shook like a gentle quake and his fingers trembled like they couldn’t keep still.

 

He opened his mouth. “I just—” his mouth closed again, and tears welled up. “...i just— i-i can’t—” 

 

It was difficult to decipher what he was trying to say, or what he intended. It was just that he seemed to be overwhelmed.

 

“...I miss mother.”

 

“I’m scared… I don’t want to die.”

 

“why did it— why did it have to be him…?” he managed in the smallest voice, surrounded by the countless depictions of one such beloved red-haired guardian. “really, it— couldn’t it have been anyone else…?”

 

There were blisters on his hands with light bruises on his knees, and ink staining his fingers and palms and a drop or two on his clothes, with traces of charcoal and watercolors. He wasn’t sure how long he’d spent sitting on the floor like this, drawing.

 

Right before him, that red-haired boy was grieving, again.

 

Ron could offer no words, but a consoling presence and a cup of warm tea to wash away his nerves. And Hong cried.

 

Ron gently caressed his bed of vibrant red hair, and Hong quickly plunged himself into a hug. He could feel tears and snot stain his clothes, but that was okay. This was how it should’ve been, perhaps.

 

To the young master who was riddled with scars, to the lonely child who grew to be an adult with many pains, to the person who quietly carried every burden all alone, to the one who was always left behind and left the same way, and is sorely missed…

 

This Ron was truly sorry.

Notes:

author is so sleep deprived, please pardon spelling mistakes or inconsistencies but this chapter has been marinating for ages

“You don’t have to wake me up tomorrow, Ron— and let the kids sleep in a little, but make sure they don’t miss breakfast.” this line was said the night before chap. 15

mary crisis. see you in another six months /hj

Notes:

I tried not to get too technical and into Cale's soul-deterioration illness thing but the gist is that he's sick and like incurable. I thought that if I just gave him heart problems he'll go to some other world, break down their doors, scam them for some wish or all-cure artifact and find some way because he's Cale Henituse. Instead I give him the illness of gods.

Also! sorry in advance if I get any inaccuracies regarding the plot of tcf itself bc the novel is really long and I downed the entire thing 90 chapters a day minimum. Cale I love you you're my everything.